1 


'Wvj^^v'V^AVVajji  ^ • ' 

Sc^jisVsW  - ' (i^’nv  . 

«***•.-•  '■  V,  v ; \>-.;-^.v7'  ■■ ■• 

saasassj^^ 


IBBl 


m *y  f 

ggfX 

\j$gra  «^jmi 

0 K 


1^ 


Post  UIIH-c  I*-'-*'-  ~~~ 

Santa  Monica,  Ca. 


90406 


.>  - » . M 


W 


A 

'^'■4 


| 


HE  STORY  OF  THE 


PHILIPPINES. 


NATURAL  RICHES,  INDUSTRIAL  RESOURCES,  STATISTICS  OF  PRODUCTIONS,  COMMERCE 
AND  POPULATION;  THE  LAWS,  HABITS,  CUSTOMS,  SCENERY  AND  CONDITIONS 
OF  THE  CUBA  OF  THE  EAST  INDIES  AND  THE  THOUSAND  ISLANDS 
OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGOES  OF  INDIA  AND  HAWAII,  WITH 
EPISODES  OF  THEIR  EARLY  HISTORY 

♦ 

THE  ELDORADO  OF  THE  ORIENT 


Personal  Character  Sketches  of  and  Interviews  with  Admiral  Dewey,  General  Merritt, 
General  Aguinaldo  and  the  Archbishop  of  Manila. 


HISTORY  AND  ROMANCE,  TRAGEDIES  AND 
TRADITIONS  OF  OUR  PACIFIC  POSSESSIONS. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  WAR. IN  THE  WEST  WITH  SPAIN,  AND  THE  CONQUEST  OF  CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


BY  MURAT  HALSTEAD, 

IV ar  Correspondent  in  America,  and  Europe,  Historian  of  the  Philippine  Expedition. 


Splendidly  and  Picturesquely  Illustrated  with  Half-Tone  Engravings  from  Photographs,  Etchings 
from  Special  Drawings,  and  the  Military  Maps  of  the  Philippines,  Prepared 
by  the  War  Department  of  the  United  States. 


OUR  POSSESSIONS  PUBLISHING  CO. 


Copyrighted,  1898,  by 
H.  L.  BARBER, 
Chicago,  111.,  U.  S.  A. 


The  engravings  In  this  volume  were 
made  from  original  photographs,  and 
are  specially  protected  by  copyright;  and 
notice  is  hereby  given,  that  any  person 
or  persons  guilty  of  reproducing  or  in- 
fringing upon  the  copyright  in  any  way 
will  be  dealt  with  according  to  law. 


1 \ 

V 

INSCRIBED 


TO  THE  SOLDIERS  AND  SAILORS 

OF 

THE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES, 


With  Admiration  for  Their  Achievements 
In  the  War  With  Spain; 

Gratitude  for  the  Glory  They  Have  Gained  for  the  American  Nation, 
And  Congratulations  That  All  the  People  of  All  the 
Country  Rejoice  in  the  Cloudless  Splendor  of  Their  Fame 
That  is  the  Common  and  Everlasting 


Inheritance  of  Americans. 


AUTHOR'S  PREFACE 


The  purpose  of  the  writer  of  the  pages  herewith  presented  has  been  to  offer,  in 
popular  form,  the  truth  touching  the  Philippine  Islands.  I made  the  journey  from 
New  York  to  Manila,  to  have  the  benefit  of  personal  observations  in  preparing  a 
history  for  the  people.  Detention  at  Honolulu  shortened  my  stay  in  Manila,  but 
there  was  much  in  studies  at  the  former  place  that  was  a help  at  the  latter.  The 
original  programme  was  for  me  to  accompany  General  Merritt,  Commander-in-Chief 
of  the  Philippine  Expedition,  but  illness  prevented  its  full  realization,  and  when  I 
arrived  in  Manila  Bay  the  city  had  already  been  “occupied  and  possessed”  by  the 
American  army;  and  the  declaration  of  peace  between  the  United  States  and  Spain 
was  made,  the  terms  fully  agreed  upon  with  the  exception  of  the  settlement  of 
the  affairs  of  the  Philippines.  While  thus  prevented  from  witnessing  stirring  mili- 
tary movements  other  than  those  attending  the  transfer  of  our  troops  across  the 
Pacific  Ocean,  an  event  in  itself  of  the  profoundest  significance,  the  reference  of 
the  determination  of  the  fate  of  the  Philippine  Islands  to  the  Paris  Conference,  and 
thereby  to  the  public  opinion  of  our  country,  in  extraordinary  measure  increased 
the  general  sensibility  as  to  the  situation  of  the  southern  Oriental  seas  affecting  our- 
selves, and  enhanced  the  value  of  the  testimony  taken  on  the  spot  of  observers  of 
experience,  with  the  training  of  journalism  in  distinguishing  the  relative  pertinence 
and  potency  of  facts  noted.  Work  for  more  than  forty  years,  in  the  discussion 
from  day  to  day  of  current  history,  has  qualified  me  for  the  efficient  exercise  of  my 
faculties  in  the  labor  undertaken.  It  has  been  my  undertaking  to  state  that  which 
appeared  to  me,  so  that  the  reader  may  find  pictures  of  the  scenes  that  tell  the 
Story  that  concerns  the  country,  that  the  public  may  with  enlightenment  solve 
the  naval,  military,  political,  commercial  and  religious  problems  we  are  called  upon 
by  the  peremptory  pressure  of  the  conditions  local,  and  international,  to  solve  im- 
mediately. This  we  have  to  do,  facing  the  highest  obligations  of  citizenship  in  the 
great  American  Republic,  and  conscious  of  the  incomparably  influential  character  of 
the  principles  that  shall  prevail  through  the  far-reaching  sweep  of  the  policies  that 


11 


12 


AUTHOR’S  PREFACE. 


will  be  evolved.  I bave  had  such  advantages  in  the  assurance  of  the  authenticity  of 
the  information  set  forth  in  the  chapters  following,  that  I may  be  permitted  to  name 
those  it  was  my  good  fortune  to  consult  with  instructive  results;  and  in  making  the 
acknowledgments  due.  I may  be  privileged  to  support  the  claim  of  diligence  and 
success  in  the  investigations  made,  and  that  I am  warranted  in  the  issue  of  this 
Story  of  the  Philippines  by  the  assiduous  improvement  of  an  uncommon  opportunity 
to  fit  myself  to  serve  the  country. 

Indebtedness  for  kind  consideration  in  this  work  is  gratefully  acknowledged  to 
Major-General  Merritt,  commanding  the  Philippine  Expedition;  Major-General  Otis, 
who  succeeds  to  the  duties  of  military  and  civil  administration  in  the  conquered 
capital  of  the  islands;  Admiral  George  Dewey,  w’ho  improved,  with  statesmanship, 
his  unparalleled  victory  in  the  first  week  of  the  war  with  Spain,  and  raised  the 
immense  questions  before  us;  General  F.  Y.  Greene,  the  historian  of  the  Russo- 
Turkish  -war,  called  by  the  President  to  Washington,  and  for  whose  contri- 
butions to  the  public  intelligence  he  receives  the  hearty  approval  and  confi- 
dence of  the  people;  Major  Bell,  the  vigilant  and  efficient  head  of  the  Bureau  of 
Information  at  the  headquarters  of  the  American  occupation  in  the  Philippines; 
General  Aguinaldo,  the  leader  of  the  insurgents  of  his  race  in  Luzon,  and  His  Grace 
the  Archbishop  of  Manila,  who  gave  me  a message  for  the  United  States,  expressing 
his  appreciation  of  the  excellence  of  the  behavior  of  the  American  army  in  the 
enforcement  of  order,  giving  peace  of  mind  to  the  residents  in  the  distracted  city  of  all 
persuasions  and  conditions,  and  of  the  service  that  was  done  civilization  in  tne 
prevention,  by  our  arms,  of  threatened  barbarities  that  had  caused  sore  apprehen- 
sion; and,  I may  add,  the  Commissioner  of  the  Organized  People  of  the  Philippines, 
dispatched  to  Washington  accompanying  General  Greene;  and  of  the  citizens  of 
Manila  of  high  character,  and  conductors  of  business  enterprises  with  plants  in  the 
community  whose  destiny  is  in  the  hands  of  strangers. 

These  gentlemen  I may  not  name,  for  there  are  uncertainties  that  demand  of 
them  and  command  me  to  respect  the  prudence  of  their  inconspicuity.  This  volume 
seems  to  me  to  be  justified,  and  I have  no  further  claim  to  offer  that  it  is  meri- 
torious than  that  it  is  faithful  to  facts  and  true  to  the  country  in  advocacy  of  the 
continued  expansion  of  the  Republic,  whose  field  is  the  world. 

Steamship  China,  Pacific  Ocean,  September  20,  1898. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THIS  STORY  OF  THE 
PHILIPPINES. 


The  letter  following  is  the  full  expression  by  the  author  of  this  volume  of  his 
purposes  and  principles  in  making  the  journey  to  the  East  Indies. 

GOING  TO  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

Washington  City,  D.  C.,  July  18. 

With  the  authorization  of  the  Military  Authorities,  I shall  go  to  the  Philippine 
Islands  with  General  Merritt,  the  Military  Governor,  and  propose  to  make  the 
American  people  better  acquainted  with  that  remarkable  and  most  important  and 
interesting  country.  The  presence  of  an  American  army  in  the  Philippines  is  an 
event  that  will  change  broad  and  mighty  currents  in  the  world’s  history.  It  has 
far  more  significance  than  anything  transpiring  in  the  process  of  the  conquest  of 
the  West  India  possessions  of  Spain,  for  the  only  question  there,  ever  since  the 
Continental  colonies  of  the  Spanish  crown  won  their  independence,  has  been  the 
extent  of  the  sacrifices  the  Spaniards,  in  their  haughty  and  vindictive  pride,  would 
make  in  fighting  for  a lost  Empire  and  an  impossible  cause  with  an  irresistible 
adversary.  That  the  time  was  approaching  when,  with  the  irretrievable  steps  of  the 
growth  of  a living  Nation  of  free  people,  we  would  reach  the  point  where  it  should  be 
our  duty  to  accept  the  responsibility  of  the  dominant  American  power,  and  accomplish 
manifest  Destiny  by  adding  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico  to  our  dominion,  has  for  half  a cen- 
tury been  the  familiar  understanding  of  American  citizens.  Spain,  by  her  abhorrent  sys- 
tem, personified  in  Weyler,  and  illustrated  in  the  murderous  blowing  up  of  the  Maine 
with  a mine,  has  forced  this  duty  upon  us;  and  though  we  made  war  unprepared,  the 
good  work  is  going  on,  and  the  finish  of  the  fight  will  be  the  relegation  of  Spain, 
whose  colonial  governments  have  been,  without  exception,  disgraceful  and  disastrous 
to  herself,  and  curses  to  the  colonists,  to  her  own  peninsula.  This  will  be  for  her  own 
good,  as  well  as  the  redemption  of  mankind  from  her  unwholesome  foreign  influ- 
ences, typified  as  they  are  in  the  beautiful  city  of  Havana,  which  has  become  the 


14 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THIS  STORY. 


center  of  political  plagues  and  pestilential  fevers,  Those  contagion  has  at  frequent 
intervals  reached  our  own  shores. 

In  the  Philippine  Islands  the  situation  is  for  us  absolutely  novel.  It'  cannot 
be  said  to  be  out  of  the  scope  of  reasonable  American  expansion  and  is  in  the 
right  line  of  enlarging  the  area  of  enlightenment  and  stimulating  the  progress  of 
civilization.  The  unexpected  has  happened,  but  it  is  not  illogical.  It  must  have  been 
written  long  ago  on  the  scroll  of  the  boundless  blue  and  the  stars!  The  incident 
of  war  was  the  “rush”  order  of  the  President  of  the  United  States  to  Admiral  Dewey 
to  destroy  the  Spanish  fleet  at  Manila,  for  the  protection  of  our  commerce.  The  deed 
was  done  with  a flash  of  lightning,  and  lo!  we  hold  the  goldep.  key  of  a splendid 
Asiatic  archipelago  of  a thousand  beautiful  and  richly  endowed  islands  in  our  grip. 
This  is  the  most  brilliant  and  startling  achievement  in  the  annals  of  navies.  Never 
before  had  the  sweep  of  sea  power,  ordered  through  the  wires  that  make  the  world’s 
continents,  oceans  and  islands  one  huge  whispering  gallery,  such  striking  exemplifi- 
cation. There  was  glory  and  fame  in  it,  and  immeasurable  material  for  the  making 
of  history.  We  may  paraphrase  Dr.  Johnson’s  celebrated  advertisement  of  the 
widow’s  brewery  by  saying:  Admiral  Dewey’s  victory  was  not  merely  the  capture  of 
a harbor  commanding  a great  city,  one  of  the  superb  places  of  the  earth,  and  the 
security  of  a base  of  operations  to  wait  for  reinforcements  commensurate  with  the 
resources  of  the  United  States  of  America— the  victorious  hero  fixed  his  iron  hand 
upon  a wonderful  opportunity  it  was  the  privilege  of  our  Government  to  secure  at 
large,  according  to  the  rights  of  a victorious  Nation  for  the  people  thereof — a chance 
for  the  youth  of  America,  like  that  of  the  youth  of  Great  Britain,  to  realize  upon  the 
magnificence  of  India;  and  this  is  as  Dr.  Johnson  said  of  the  vats  and  barrels  of  the 
Thralc  estate — “the  potentiality  of  wealth  beyond  the  dreams  of  avarice.”  It  is  a 
new  departure,  but  not  a matter  for  the  panic  or  apprehension  of  conservatism,  that 
the  Stars  and  Stripes  float  as  the  symbol  of  sovereignty  over  a group  of  islands  in 
the  waters  of  Asia,  that  are  equal  to  all  the  West  Indies.  If  we  are  strangers  there 
now  we  shall  not  be  so  long.  We  have  a front  on  the  Pacific  Ocean,  of  three  great 
States — Washington,  equal  to  England;  Oregon,  whose  grandeur  rolls  in  the  sound  of 
her  famous  name,  and  incomparable  California,  whose  title  will  be  tbe  synonym  of 
golden  good  times  forever.  The  Philippines  are  southwest  from  our  western  front 
doors.  They  have  been  the  islands  of  our  sunsets  in  the  winter.  Now  they  look  to  us 
for  the  rosy  dawn  out  of  which  will  come  the  clear  brightness  of  the  white  light  of 
mornings  and  the  fullness  of  the  ripening  noons,  all  the  year  around.  With  our 
bulk  of  the  North  American  continent  bulging  into  both  the  great  oceans,  it  was 
foreordained  since  the  beginning  when  God  created  the  earth,  that  we,  the  possessors 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THIS  STORY. 


15 


of  this  imperial  American  zone,  should  be  a great  Asiatic  Power.  We  have  it  now 
in  evidence,  written  in  islands  among  the  most  gorgeous  of  those  that  shine  in  the 
Southern  seas — islands  that  are  .east  from  the  Atlantic  and  west  from  the  Pacific 
shores  of  the  One  Great  Republic — that  wre  may  personify  hereafter,  sitting  at  the 
head  of  the  table  when  the  empires  of  the  earth  consult  themselves  as  to  the  courses 
of  empire.  Our  Course  of  Empire  is  both  east  and  west. 

The  contact  of  American  and  Asiatic  civilization  in  the  Philippines,  with  the 
American  army  there,  superseding  the  Spaniards,  will  be  memorable  as  one  of  the 
matters  of  chief  moment  in  the  closing  days  of  the  nineteenth  century,  and  remem- 
bered to  date  from  for  a thousand  years.  It  is  my  purpose  to  write  of  this  current 
history  while  it  is  a fresh,  sparkling  stream,  and  attempt  something  more  than  the 
recitation  of  the  news  of  the  day,  as  it  is  condensed  and  restrained 
in  telegrams;  to  give  it  according  to  the  extent  of  my  ability  and  the 
advantages  of  my  opportunity,  the  local  coloring,  the  characteristic  scenery;  the 
pen  pictures  of  the  people  and  their  pursuits;  sketches  of  the  men  who  are  doers  of 
deeds  that  make  history;  studies  of  the  ways  and  means  of  the  islanders;  essays  to 
indicate  the  features  of  the  picturesque  of  the  strange  mixture  of  races;  the  revolu- 
tionary evolutions  of  politics;  the  forces  that  pertain  to  the  mingling  of  the  religions 
of  the  Occident  and  the  Orient,  in  a chemistry  untried  through  the  recorded  ages 
It  is  a tremendous  canvas  upon  which  I am  to  labor,  and  I know  full  vrell  how  inade- 
quate the  production  must  be,  and  beg  that  this  index  may  not  be  remembered 
against  me.  It  is  meant  in  all  modest}’,  and  I promise  only  that  there  will  be  put 
into  the  task  the  expertness  of  experience  and  the  endeavor  of  industry. 

MURAT  HALSTEAD. 


. < • 


CONTENTS 


Pages. 

AUTHOR’S  PREFACE 11-12 

THE  ORIGIN  OF  THIS  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES 13-15 


CHAPTER  I. 

ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 

A Stormy  Day  on  Manila  Bay — Call  on  Admiral  Dewey — The  Man  in 
White — He  Sticks  to  His  Ship — How  He  Surprised  the  Spaniards — - 
Every  Man  Did  His  Duty  on  May-Day — How  Dewey  Looks  and 
Talks — What  He  Said  About  War  With  Germany  in  Five  Minutes — 

Feeds  His  Men  on  “Delicious”  Fresh  Meat  from  Australia — Pho- 
tography Unjust  to  Him 35-45 

CHAPTER  II. 

LIFE  IN  MANILA. 

Character  of  the  Filipinos — Drivers  Lashing  Laboring  Men  in  the  Streets — ■ 

What  Americans  Get  in  Their  Native  Air — The  Logic  of  Destiny 
— Manila  as  She  Fell  Into  Our  Hands — The  Beds  in  the  Tropics — 

A Spanish  Hotel — Profane  Yells  for  Ice — Sad  Scenes  in  the  Din- 
ing Room — Major-General  Calls  for  “Francisco” — A Broken- 
Hearted  Pantry  Woman 46-54 


CHAPTER  III. 

FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 

Across  the  Continent — An  American  Governor-General  Steams  Through 
the  Golden  Gate — He  is  a Minute-Man — Honolulu  as  a Health 
Resort — The  Lonesome  Pacific — The  Skies  of  Asia — Dreaming 
Under  the  Stars  of  the  Scorpion — The  Southern  Cross 55-61 

CHAPTER  IV. 

INTERVIEW  WITH  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 

The  Insurgent  Leader’s  Surroundings  and  Personal  Appearance — His  Re- 
serves and  Ways  of  Talking — The  Fierce  Animosity  of  the  Filipinos 
Toward  Spanish  Priests — A Probability  of  Many  Martyrs  in  the 
Isle  of  Luzon .62-72 


17 


18 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  Y. 

THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 

Correspondence  with  Aguinaldo  About  It— Notes  by  Senor  Felipe  Agon- 
cillo — Relations  Between  Admiral  Dewey  and  Senor  Aguinaldo — 

Terms  of  Peace  Made  by  Spanish  Governor-General  with  Insur- 
gents, December,  1897 — Law  Suit  Between  Aguinaldo  and  Arlacbo 
— Aguinaldo’s  Proclamation  of  May  24,  1898 73-80 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE  PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 

June  16th,  1898,  Establishing  Dictatorial  Government — June  20th,  1898, 
Instructions  for  Elections— June  23d,  1898,  Establishing  Revolu- 
tionary Government — June  23d,  1898,  Message  to  Foreign  Powers 
— June  27th,  1898,  Instructions  Concerning  Details— July  23d, 

1898,  Letter  from  Senor  Aguinaldo  to  General  Anderson — August 
1st,  1898,  Resolution  of  Revolutionary  Chiefs  Asking  Recognition — - 
August  6th,  1898,  Message  to  Foreign  Powers  Asking  Recognition. . . .81-99 

CHAPTER  VII. 

INTERVIEW  WITH  ARCHBISHOP  OF  MANILA. 

Insurgents’  Deadly  Hostility  to  Spanish  Priests — The  Position  of  the  Arch- 
bishop as  He  Defined  It — His  Expression  of  Gratitude  to  the 
American  Army — His  Characterization  of  the  Insurgents — A Work 
of  Philippine  Art — The  Sincerity  of  the  Archbishop’s  Good  Words.  .100-106 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

The  Responsibility  of  Admiral  Dewey — We  Owe  It  to  Ourselves  to  Hold 
the  Philippines — Prosperity  Assured  by  Our  Permanent  Possession 
—The  Aguinaldo  Question— Character  Study  of  the  Insurgent 
Leader — Flow  Affairs  Would  Adjust  Themselves  for  Us — Congress 
Must  Be  Trusted  to  Represent  the  People  and  Firmly  Establish 
International  Policy 107-114 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 

Area  and  Population — Climate — Mineral  Wealth — Agriculture — Com- 
merce and  Transportation — Revenue  and  Expenses — Spanish 
Troops — Spanish  Navy — Spanish  Civil  Administration — Insurgent 
Troops — Insurgent  Civil  Administration — United  States  Troops 
United  States  Navy — United  States  Civil  Administration — The 
Future  of  the  Islands 115-158 


CONTENTS. 


19 


CHAPTER  X. 

OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 

The  Pith  of  the  Official  Reports  of  the  Capture  of  Manila,  by  Major-General 
Wesley  Merritt,  Commanding  the  Philippine  Expedition;  General 
Frank  Y.  Greene,  General  Arthur  McArthur,  and  General  Thomas 
Anderson,  with  the  Articles  of  Capitulation,  Showing  How  8,000 
Americans  Carried  an  Intrenched  City  with  a Garrison  of  13,000 
Spaniards,  and  Kept  Out  14,000  Insurgents — The  Difficulties  of 
American  Generals  with  Philippine  Troops ,159-183 


CHAPTER  XL 

THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 

The  Official  Gazette  Issued  at  Manila — Orders  and  Proclamation  of  Major- 
General  Wesley  Merritt,  Who,  as  Commander  of  the  Philippine 
Expedition,  B'ecame,  Under  the  Circumstances  of  the  Capture  of 
Manila,  the  Governor  of  That  City 184-198 


CHAPTER  XII. 

THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 

Why  the  Boys  Had  a Spell  of  Homesickness — Disadvantages  of  the  Tropics 
— Admiral  Dewey  and  His  Happy  Men — How  Our  Soldiers  Passed 
the  Time  on  the  Ships — General  Merritt’s  Headquarters — What  Is 
Public  Property — The  Manila  Water  Supply — England  Our  Friend 
— Major-General  Otis,  General  Meritt’s  Successor 199-211 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

THE  WHITE  UNIFORMS  OF  OUR  HEROES  IN  THE  TROPICS. 

The  Mother  Hubbard  Street  Fashion  in  Honolulu,  and  That  of  Riding 
Astride — Spoiling  Summer  Clothes  in  Manila  Mud — The  White 
Raiment  of  High  Officers — Drawing  the  T ine  on  Nightshirts — 

Ashamed  of  Big  Toes — Dewey  and  Merritt  us  Figures  of  Show — 

The  Boys  in  White 212-217 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 

Dr.  Jose  Rizal,  the  Most  Distinguished  Literary  Man  of  the  Philippines, 

Writer  of  History,  Poetry,  Political  Pamphlets,  and  Novels,  Shot  on 
the  Luneta  of  Manila — A Likeness  of  the  Martyr — The  Scene  of  His 
Execution,  from  a Photograph — His  Wife  Married  the  Day  Before 
His  Death — Poem  Giving  His  Farewell  Thoughts,  Written  in  His 
Last  Hours — The  Works  That  Cost  Him  His  Life — The  Vision  of 
Friar  Rodriguez • • • • .218-235 


20 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 

No  Mystery  About  the  Cause  of  the  War— The  Expected  and  the  Inevitable 
Has  Happened — The  Tragedy  of  the  Maine — Vigilant  Wisdom  of 
President  McKinley — Dewey’s  Prompt  Triumph — The  Battles  at 
Manila  and  Santiago  Compared — General  Shatter  Tells  of  the  Bat- 
tle of  Santiago — Report  of  Wain wright  Board  on  Movements  of 
Sampson’s  Fleet  in  the  Destruction  of  Cervera’s  Squadron — Stars  and 
Stripes  Raised  Over  Porto  Rico — American  and  Spanish  Fleets  at 
Manila  Compared — Text  of  Peace  Protocol 286-280 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 

The  Lessons  of  War  in  the  Joy  Over  Peace  in  the  Celebrations  at  Chicago 
and  Philadelphia — Orations  by  Archbishop  Ireland  and  Judge 
Emory  Speer — The  President’s  Few  Words  of  Thrilling  Signifi- 
cance— The  Parade  of  the  Loyal  League,  and  the  Clover  Club 
Banquet  at  Philadelphia — Address  by  tbe  President — The  Hero 
Hobson  Makes  a Speech — Fighting  Bob  Evans’  Startling  Battle 
Picture — The  Destruction  of  Cervera’s  Fleet — The  Proclamation 
of  Thanksgiving 281-80i 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

The  Abolishment  of  the  31st  of  December,  1844,  in  Manila — The  Mys- 
tery of  the  Meridian  180  Degrees  West — What  Is  East  and  West? — • 

Gaining  and  Losing  Days — The  Tribes  of  Native  Filipinos — They 
Had  an  Alphabet  and  Songs  of  Their  Own — The  Massacre  of  Magel- 
lan— His  Fate  Like  That  of  Captain  Cook — Stories  of  Long-Ago 
Wars — An  Account  by  a Devoted  Spanish  Writer  of  the  Beneficent 
Rule  of  Spain  in  the  Philippines — Aguinaldo  a Man  Not  of  a Na- 
tion, But  of  a Tribe — Typhoons  and  Earthquakes — The  Degen- 
eracy of  the  Government  of  the  Philippines  After  It  Was  Taken 
from  Mexico — “New  Spain” — The  Perquisites  of  Captain-Gen- 
erals— The  Splendor  of  Manila  a Century  Ago 802-323 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE  SOUTHERN  PPIILIPPINES. 

Important  Facts  About  the  Lesser  Islands  of  the  Philippine  Archipelago — 
Location,  Size  and  Population— Capitals  and  Principal  Cities — 
Rivers  and  Harbors — Surface  and  Soil — People  and  Products — 
Leading  Industries — Their  Commerce  and  Business  Affairs — The 
Monsoons  and  Typhoons— The  Terrors  of  the  Tempests  and  How 
to  Avoid  Them 


324-343 


CONTENTS. 


21 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 

An  Official  Copy  of  the  Manifesto  of  the  Junta  Showing  the  Bad  Faith  of 
Spain  in  the  Making  and  Evasion  of  a Treaty — The  Declaration  of 
the  Renewal  of  the  War  of  Rebellion — Complaints  Against  the 
Priests  Defined — The  Most  Important  Document  the  Filipinos  Have 
Issued — Official  Reports  of  Cases  of  Persecution  of  Men  and  Women 
in  Manila  by  the  Spanish  Authorities — Memoranda  of  the  Proceed- 
ings in  Several  Cases  in  the  Court  of  Inquiry  of  the  United  States 
Officers 


CHAPTER  XX. 

' HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 

The  Star  Spangled  Banner  Up  Again  in  Hawaii,  and  to  Stay — Dimensions 
of  the  Islands — What  the  Missionaries  Have  Done — Religious  Belief 
by  Nationality — Trade  Statistics — Latest  Census — Sugar  Plantation 
Laborers — Coinage  of  Silver — Schools — Coffee  Growing 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 

Captain  James  Cook’s  Great  Discoveries  and  Has  Martyrdom — Character 
and  Traditions  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands — Charges  Against  the 
Famous  Navigator  .and  Effort  to  Array  the  Christian  World  Against 
Him — The  True  Story  of  His  Life  and  Death — How  Charges 
Against  Cook  Came  to  Be  Made — Testimony  of  Vancouver,  King 
and  Dixon,  and  Last  Words  of  Cook’s  Journal — Light  Turned  on 
History  That  Has  Become  Obscure — Savagery  of  the  Natives — 
Their  Written  Language  Took  Up  Their  High  Colored  Traditions 
and  Preserved  Phantoms — Scenes  in  Aboriginal  Theatricals — Prob- 
lem of  Government  in  an  Archipelago  Where  Race  Questions  Are 
Predominant — Now  Americans  Should  Remember  Captain  Cook  as 
an  Illustrious  Pioneer 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE  START  FOR  THE  LAND  OF  CORN  STALKS. 

Spain  Clings  to  the  Ghost  of  Her  Colonies — The  Scene  of  War  Interest 
Shifts  from  Manila — The  Typhoon  Season — General  Merritt  on  the 
Way  to  Paris — German  Target  Practice  by  Permission  of  Dewey — 
Poultney  Bigalow  with  Canoe,  Typewriter  and  Kodak — Hongkong 
as  a Bigger  and  Brighter  Gibraltar 


344-359 


360-374 


375-404 


,405-409 


22 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 

Glimpses  of  China  and  Japan  on  the  Way  Home  from  the  Philippines — 
Hongkong  a Greater  Gibraltar — Coaling  the  China — Gangs  of 
Women  Coaling  the  China — How  the  Japanese  Make  Gardens  of  the 
Mountains — Transition  from  the  Tropics  to  the  Northern  Seas — 

A Breeze  from  Siberia — A Thousand  Miles  Nothing  on  the  Pacific 
— Talk  of  Swimming  Ashore 410-421 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

OUR  PICTURE  GALLERY. 

Annotations  and  Illustrations — Portraits  of  Heroes  of  the  War  in  the  Army 
and  Navy,  and  of  the  Highest  Public  Responsibilities — Admirals 
and  Generals,  the  President  and  Cabinet — Photographs  of  Scenes 
and  Incidents — The  Characteristics  of  the  Filipinos — Their  Homes, 

Dresses  and  Peculiarities  in  Sun  Pictures — The  Picturesque  People 

of  Our  New  Possessions 422-427 


CHAPTER  XXY. 

CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 

Conditions  In  and  Around  Havana — Fortifications  and  Water  Supply  of 
the  Capital  City — Other  Sections  of  the  Pearl  of  the  Antilles — 

Porto  Rico,  Our  New  Possession,  Described — Size  and  Population — 

Natural  Resources  and  Products — Climatic  Conditions — Towns 
andCities — Railroad  and  Other  Improvements — Future  Possibilities.  .428-470 


CHAPTER  XXYI. 


THE  LADRONES. 


The  Island  of  Guam  a Coaling  Station  of  the  United  States— Discovery, 
Size  and  Products  of  the  Islands 


399-400 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

THE  OFFICIAL  TITLE  TO  OUR  NEW  POSSESSIONS  IN  THE  INDIES. 

Full  Text  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Spain  Handed  the  President  of 
the  United  States  as  a Christmas  Gift  for  the  People,  at  the  White 
House,  1898 — The  Gathered  Fruit  of  a Glorious  and  Wonderful 
Victory 4 <3-480 


CONTENTS. 


23 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 

The  Aguinaldo  War  Upon  the  Americans — The  Course  of  Events  in  the 
Philippines  Since  the  Fall  of  Manila — Origin  of  the  Filipino  War — 
Aguinaldo’s  Insolent  and  Aggressive  Acts,  Including  Treachery 
— His  Agent’s  Vanity  and  Duplicity  in  Washington — Insurgents 
Under  Aguinaldo  Attack  American  Forces — Battle  of  Manila, 
February  4 and  5 — Heroism  of  American  Troops  in  Repelling  the 
Insurgents — Aguinaldo’s  Proclamations — Agoncillo’s  Flight  to 
Canada — The  Ratification  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Spain  by 
the  American  Senate  Followed  the  Fighting — The  Gallantry  and 
Efficiency  of  the  American  Volunteers — Another  Glorious  Chapter 
of  Our  War  History 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 

The  Filipino  Swarms,  After  Being  Repulsed  with  Slaughter,  Continue 
Their  Scattering  Efforts  to  Be  Assassins — They  Plan  a General 
Massacre  and  the  Burning  of  Manila — Defeated  in  Barbarous 
Schemes,  They  Tell  False  Tales  and  Have  Two  Objects,  One  to 
Deceive  the  People  of  the  Philippines,  the  other  to  Influence 
Intervention — The  Peril  of  Fire — Six  Thousand  Regulars  Sent 
to  General  Otis — Americans  Capture  Iloilo,  and  Many  Natives 
Want  Peace — The  People  of  the  Isla  of  Negros  Ask  that  They 
May  Go  with  Us — Dewey  Wants  Battleships  and  Gunboats,  Gets 
Them,  and  Is  Made  an  Admiral — Arrival  of  Peace  Commissioners, 
with  Their  School  Books,  Just  Ahead  of  the  Regulars  with 
Magazine  Rifles — The  Germans  at  Manila  Salute  Admiral  Dewey 
at  Last 


481-500 


501-512 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Page 


1.  Frontispiece Major-General  Merritt,  First  Governor-General  of  the 

Philippines. 

2.  The  President  and  His  Cabinet 27 

3.  President  McKinley  27 

4.  Secretary  of  State  Hay 27 

5.  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  Gatge 27 

6.  Secretary  of  War  Alger 27 

7.  Secretary  of  the  Navy  Long 27 

8.  Attorney  General  Griggs 27 

9.  Postmaster  General  Smith 27 

10.  Secretary  of  the  Interior  Bliss 27 

11.  Secretary  of  Agriculture  Wilson 27 

12.  Admiral  Dewey,  the  Hero  of  Manila 28 

13.  Map  of  the  Philippine  Islands 34 

14.  Photograph  and  Autograph  of  Aguinaldo,  as  Presented  by  Him  to  Mr. 

Halstead,  the  Author 41 

15.  Archbishop  of  Manila.  His  Photograph  and  Autograph  Presented  to 

Mr.  Halstead,  the  Author 42 

16.  Ex-Consul  General  Fitzhugh  Lee,  Now  Major-General  Commanding. ...  47 

17.  Captain  Sigshee,  Commander  of  the  Ill-fated  Maine 48 

18.  Brigadier-General  F.  Y.  Greene 65 

19.  Government  Building  in  Pampanga 66 

20.  Church  at  Cavite 66 

21.  Masacue — Town  in  Cavite 66 

22.  Natives  Taking  Refreshments 66 

23.  Official  Map  of  the  Isle  of  Luzon,  Prepared  by  War  Department 83 

24.  Official  Map  by  the  War  Department  of  the  Seat  of  War  in  the  Philippines  84 

25.  Murat  Halstead,  the  Author,  at  Manila 101 

26.  Cathedral  of  Manila  After  Earthquake 102 

27.  Spanish  Re-inforcements  Crossing  Bridge  Over  Pasig  River 102 

28.  Oriental  Hotel,  Manila 117 

29.  The  Sultan  of  Jolo  in  Mindanao 119 

30.  A Beheaded  Spaniard — Sign  of  the  Order  of  Katipunan 120 

31.  San  Juan  del  Monte,  Where  Revolution  Started 126 

32.  Brigadier-General  E.  S.  Otis. >>•»<  * «<•<«<«  t » * 128 

35 


26 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Page 

33.  Brigadier-General  Thomas  M.  Anderson 129 

34.  Military  Heroes  of  Santiago  and  Porto  llieo 137 

35.  Major-General  Miles  137 

36.  Major-General  Shatter  137 

37.  Major-General  Wheeler 137 

38.  Major-General  Brooke 137 

39.  Brigadier-General  Wood 137 

40.  Colonel  Roosevelt  137 

41.  Naval  Heroes  of  Santiago 138 

42.  Admiral  Sampson 138 

43.  Admiral  Schley  138 

44.  Captain  Chadwick,  of  the  New  York 138 

45.  Captain  Cooke,  of  the  Brooklyn 138 

46.  Captain  Clarke,  of  the  Oregon 138 

47.  Captain  Evans,  of  the  Iowa 138 

48.  Captain  Higginson,  of  the  Massachusetts 138 

49.  Captain  Philip,  of  the  Texas 138 

50.  Commander  Wainwright,  of  the  Gloucester 138 

51.  Lieutenant  R.  P.  Hobson 138 

52.  General  Greene’s  Headquarters  at  Manila 139 

53.  Manila  and  Its  Outskirts,  Showing  Malate 142 

54.  Principal  Gate  to  the  City 147 

55.  Loading  Buffaloes  with  Produce  in  Luzon 155 

56.  Filipina  Preparing  for  a Siesta 155 

57.  Philippine  Author-Martyr,  Plis  Wife  and  His  Execution 156 

58.  Dr.  Rizal 156 

59.  Dr.  Rizal’s  Execution 156 

60.  Dr.  Rizal's  Wife 156 

61.  The  Seat  of  War  in  Cavite 160 

62.  Attack  on  Manila,  Showing  Position  of  Our  Ships  and  Troops 164 

63.  Fortifications  of  Manila *, 16S 

64.  United  States  Peace  Commissioners 173 

65.  Senator  Frye 173 

66.  Senator  Gray  173 

67.  Ex-Secretary  of  State  Day 173 

68.  Senator  Davis 173 

69.  Whitelaw  Reid 173 

70.  Flowers  of  the  Philippines 174 

71.  Interior  of  the  Fortifications  of  Manila » 175 

72.  Fort  Santiago  at  Manila,  Where  the  American  Flag  Was  Raised 181 

73.  Dining  Room  in  General  Merritt’s  Palace  at  Manila 191 

74.  An  Execution  Entertainment  on  the  Luneta 192 

75.  Victims  Reported  Dead  After  the  Execution 192 


THE  PRESIDENT  AND  HIS  CABINET. 

(Photo  of  Long  Copyrighted  1897  by  Purdy  of  Boston.) 

(Photo  of  McKinley  Copyrighted  by  Elmer  Chickenng.) 

(Photo  of  Smith  Copyrighted  by  Rockwood.) 


THE  HERO  OF  MANILA. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


29 


Page 

76.  Aguinaldo  and  His  Compatriots 209 

77.  Senor  Aguinaldo  209 

78.  Senor  Montsnsgro  209 

79.  Senor  Natividah  209 

80.  Senor  Ninisgra  209 

81.  Senor  Rins 209 

82.  Senor  Belavinino  209 

83.  Senor  Covinbing  209 

8L  Senor  Mascordo 209 

85.  Senor  Arbacho  209 

86.  Senor  Pilar  209 

87.  Senor  Viola  209 

88.  Senor  Francisco  209 

89.  Senor  Llansoo  209 

90.  Savage  Native  Hunters 210 

91.  Girl’s  Costume  to  Show  One  Shoulder 210 

92.  Public  Buildings  in  Manila 215 

93.  Fort  Weyler,  Built  by  General  Weyler  When  Governor  of  the  Philippines  216 

94.  The  Destruction  of  Cervera’s  Spanish  Squadron  at  Santiago 225 

95.  The  Luneta — Favorite  Outing  Grounds  of  Manila,  and  a Place  for  Exe- 

cuting Insurgents 226 

96.  Admiral  Dewey’s  Fleet  That  Won  the  Battle  of  Manila  Bay 231 

97.  The  Flagship  Olympia 231 

98.  The  Baltimore 231 

99.  The  Concord 231 

100.  The  Raleigh 231 

101.  The  Boston 231 

102.  The  Petrel  231 

103.  The  Monument  of  Magellinos  in  the  Walled  City 232 

104.  A Railroad  Station  North  of  Manila — Spaniards  Airing  Themselves. . . . 249 

105.  The  Battle  of  Manila  Bay — In  the  Heat  of  the  Raging  Fight 250 

106.  A Suburb  of  Manila,  Showing  a Buffalo  Market  Cart 255 

107.  The  Cathedral  at  Manila 256 

108.  An  Insurgent  Outlook  Near  Manila 265 

109.  Display  in  Manila  Photograph  Gallery,  Insurgent  Leaders 266 

110.  Group  of  Filipinos  Who  Want  Independence 266 

111.  The  Principal  Gate  to  the  Walled  City 287 

112.  A Public  Square  in  Manila 288 

113.  A Bit  of  Scenery  in  Mindanao,  Showing  Tropical  Vegetation 305 

114.  Parade  of  Spanish  Troops  on  One  of  Their  Three  Annual  Expeditions'to 

the  Southern  Islands 306 

115.  After  an  Execution— Prostrate  Forms  are  Men  Shot 311 

116.  Spaniards  Ready  to  Execute  Insurgent  Prisoners 311 


30  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Page 

117.  A Group  of  the  Unconquerable  Mohammedans 312 

118.  A Native  House 321 

119.  Riding  Buffaloes  Through  Groves  of  Date  Palms 321 

120.  Natives  Fishing  from  a Canal  Boat 322 

121.  Great  Bridge  at  Manila 322 

122.  Southern  Islanders — Showing  Cocoanut  Palms  and  the  Monkey  Tree. . 327 

123.  A Review  of  Spanish  Filipino  Volunteers 328 

121.  A Spanish  Festival  in  Manila 328 

125.  Spanish  Troops  Repelling  an  Insurgent  Attack  on  a Convent 345 

126.  Business  Corner  in  Manila 345 

127.  A Native  in  Regimentals 346 

128.  A Country  Pair 346 

129.  Peasant  Costumes  346 

130.  Woodman  in  Working  Garb 346 

131.  Map  of  Hawaii 361 

132.  Official  Map  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands 367 

133.  Map  of  Cuba 429 

134.  Map  of  Porto  Rico 469 

135.  Outline  Map  of  the  Philippine  Islands 472 

136.  A Spanish  Dude — An  Officer  at  Manila 476 

137.  The  Harbor  at  Manila 476 

138.  General  E.  S.  Otis  and  Staff  on  Porch  of  Malacanan  Palace,  Manila.  . . . 365 

139.  Malacanan  Palace  and  Pasig  River,  Manila 366 

140.  General  Otis  and  Staff,  Dining  Room,  Malacanan  Palace,  Manila 366 

141.  Views  in  Manila,  Philippine  Islands 383 

142.  View  from  My  Office  Window  in  Palace,  Sept.  8,  1898 383 

143.  Fountain,  Manila,  August,  1898 383 

144.  Door  of  Flospital  De  San  Juan  Di  Dios,  Intramuros,  Manila,  Aug.  29, 

1898  383 

145.  Sentry  Box  in  Old  Manila  Wall,  August,  1898 383 

146.  Dungeons  in  Old  Manila  Wall,  Sept.  7,  1898 383 

147.  Door  of  Jesuit  Church,  Manila,  Sept.  3,  1898. 383 

148.  Court  Yard  of  Palace,  Manila,  Sept.  3,  1898 383 

149.  View  of  Tower  of  Iglisia  De  Sta  Grum,  Manila,  Sept.  9,  1898 383 

150.  Corner  of  Old  Manila  Wall,  August,  1898 383 

151.  Interior  in  Palace,  Manila,  Sept.  4,  1898 383 

152.  View  of  Church  of  August  30,  Manila 383 

153.  General  Hughes’  Temporary  Office  in  Palace 383 

154.  Puerto  De  Gabel,  Old  Manila  Wall,  Aug.  29,  1898 383 

155.  Views  in  Manila,  Philippine  Islands 384 

156.  Wash  Lady  in  the  River,  Manila 384 

157.  Soldiers  Washing  Their  Persons  and  Clothes,  Manila 384 

158.  Man  Rowing  Small  Boat,  Manila. 384 


Illustrations.  3i 

Page 

159.  Perry  in  Canal,  Manila 384 

160.  Or onp  of  Native  AYomen  on  Canal  Bank,  Manila 384 

161.  Government  Launch,  Manila 384 

162.  View  of  Canal  in  New  Manila 384 

163.  View  From  My  Ferry  Crossing  River  Looking  Toward  New  Town, 

Manila  384 

164.  View  of  Intramuros  From  the  Water,  Manila 384 

165.  Women  Washing,  Manila S 384 

166.  F>arge  in  Canal,  New  Town,  Half  Barge,  Half  House  Boat,  Manila 384 

167.  Canal  Scene  in  Neuva,  Manila 384 

168.  Stern  of  Lighter  in  Canal,  Manila 384 

169.  Views  in  Manila,  Philippine  Islands 401 

170.  Native  Woman,  with  Fruit  and  Child 401 

171.  Native  Woman 401 

172.  Fruit  Woman  on  Main  Bridge 401 

173.  Small  Boy,  With  Pup 401 

174.  Native  Woman  on  Canal  Bank.  401 

175.  Buffalo,  Wagon  and  Two  Coolies 401 

176.  Beggar  on  Main  Bridge 401 

177.  Views  in  Honolulu  and  Manila 402 

178.  Leaving  Honolulu,  Aboard  U.  S.  S.  Peru  for  Manila 402 

179.  A Soldier  on  Deck  of  Oakland  Ferry 402 

180.  Three  College  Men,  Corporal  Morrow  in  Center 402 

181.  U.  S.  S.  Philadelphia  Entering  Honolulu  Harbor 402 

182.  In  Camp  at  Manila 402 

183.  Leaving  Honolulu,  U.  S.  S.  Peru,  for  Manila 402 

184.  U.  S.  S.  Philadelphia,  Honolulu  Harbor 402 

185.  Bridge  Over  River  Naig,  Cavite,  Connecting  Santa  Cruz  Road  with  Town 

of  Naig  419 

186.  Highway  in  the  Philippines 420 

187.  Native  House  in  Suburb  of  Calamba,  Philippines 420 

188.  Front  and  Back  View  of  Native  Woven  Shirt 439 

189.  Malay  Women  of  Jolo  Pounding  Rice 439 

190.  Ancient  Cannon  Taken  from  Insurgents 439 

191.  Arsenal  Grounds  in  Cavite,  Chapel  in  Front  of  Commandant’s  House.  . 440 

192.  Bridge  Crossing  the  River  at  Tambobeng,  Manila  Province 440 

193.  Cane  Bridge  Over  Arm  of  Bay  at  Ilo-Ilo,  Philippines 457 

194.  Sergeant  Dan  Hewitt,  Hero  of  Calooean 457 

195.  View  on  Pagsanjan  River  in  the  Province  of  La  Laguna 457 

196.  Royal  Street  in  Ilo-Ilo,  Island  of  Panay,  Philippines 458 

197.  Native  Dwelling  in  the  Suburbs  of  Manila 458 

198.  The  Insurgent  Leaders  in  the  Philippines 463 

199.  Isabelo  Artacho  463 


32 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Page 

200.  Baldomero  Aguinaldo 403 

201.  Severino  de  las  Alas 463 

202.  Antonio  Montenegro  463 

203.  Vito  Belarmino  463 

204.  Pedro  Paterno  463 

205.  Emilio  Aguinaldo  463 

206.  Church  of  San  Augustin,  Manila 463 

207.  Schooner  Anchored  in  Ilo-Ilo  Harbor,  Philippines 403 

208.  Major-General  Thomas  M.  Anderson  and  Staff,  in  Command  of  1st 

Division,  8th  Army  Corps,  at  Manila 464 

200.  Major-General  Thomas  M.  Anderson,  Commander  of  1st  Division,  Sth 

Army  Corps,  at  Manila 475 


1 


CHAPTEE  I. 

ADMIEAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 

A Stormy  Day  on  Manila  Bay — Call  on  Admiral  Dewey — The  Man  in  White — He 
Sticks  to  His  Ship — How  He  Surprised  Spaniards — Every  Man  Did  His  Duty 
on  May-Day — How  Dewey  Looks  and  Talks — What  He  Said  About  War 
with  Germany  in  Five  Minutes — Feeds  His  Men  on  “Delicious”  Fresh  Meat 
from  Australia — Photography  Unjust  to  Him. 

Steaming  across  Manila  Bay  from  Cavite  to  the  city  on  an  energetic  ferry-boat, 
scanning  the  wrecks  of  the  Spanish  fleet  still  visible  where  the  fated  ships  went 
down,  one  of  them  bearing  on  a strip  of  canvas  the  legible  words  “Eemember  the 
‘Maine,’  ” the  talk  being  of  Dewey’s  great  May-day,  we  were  passing  the  famous 
flag-ship  of  the  squadron  that  was  ordered  to  destroy  another  squadron,  and  did  it, 
incidentally  gathering  in  hand  the  keys  of  an  empire  in  the  Indies  for  America, 
because  the  American  victor  was  an  extraordinary  man,  who  saw  the  immensity  of 
the  opportunity  and  improved  it  to  the  utmost,  some  one  said:  “There  is  the 

Admiral  now,  on  the  quarter-deck  under  the  awning — the  man  in  white,  sitting 
alone!”  The  American  Consul  at  Manila  was  aboard  the  ferry-boat,  and  said  to  the 
captain  he  would  like  to  speak  to  the  Admiral.  The  course  was  changed  a point,  and 
then  a pause,  when  the  Consul  called,  “Admiral!”  And  the  man  in  white  stepped  to 
the  rail  and  responded  pleasantly  to  the  greeting — the  Consul  saying: 

“Shall  we  not  see  you  ashore  now?” 

“No,”  said  the  man  in  white,  in  a clear  voice;  “I  shall  not  go  ashore  unless  I 
have  to.” 

Some  one  said:  “This  would  be  a good  chance  to  go.  Come  with  us.” 

The  man  in  white  shook  his  head,  and  the  ferryman  ordered  full  speed,  the 
passengers  all  looking  steadily  at  the  white  figure  until  it  became  a speck,  and  the 
fresh  arrivals  were  shown  the  objects  of  the  greatest  interest,  until  the  wrecks  of  the 
Oriental  fleet  of  the  Spaniards  were  no  longer  visible,  and  there  was  only  the  white 
walls  to  see  of  Cavite’s  arsenal  and  the  houses  of  the  navy-yard,  and  the  more  stately 
structures  of  Manila  loomed  behind  the  lighthouse  at  the  mouth  of  the  Pasig,  when 
the  eyes  of  the  curious  were  drawn  to  the  mossback  fort  that  decorates  as  an  antiquity 
the  most  conspicuous  angle  of  the  walls  of  “the  walled  .oity.” 

There  was  a shade  of  significance  in  the  few  words  of  the  Admiral  that  he  would 

35 


36 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 


not  go  ashore  until  he  must.  He  has  from  the  first  been  persistent  in  staying  at 
Manila.  There  has  been  nothing  that  could  induce  him  to  abandon  in  person  the 
prize  won  May  1st.  His  order  from  the  President  was  to  destroy  the  Spanish  fleet. 
It  was  given  on  the  first  day  of  the  legal  existence  of  the  war,  counting  the  day 
gained,  in  crossing  the  Pacific  Ocean  from  the  United  States  to  the  Philippines, 
when  the  180th  degree  of  longitude  west  from  Greenwich  is  reached  and  reckoned. 
It  was  thus  the  President  held  back  when  the  war  was  on;  and  the  next  day 
after  Dewey  got  the  order  at  Hongkong  he  was  on  the  way.  The  Spaniards  at 
Manila  could  not  have  been  more  astonished  at  Dewey’s  way  of  doing,  if  they  had 
all  been  struck  by  lightning  under  a clear  sky.  They  had  no  occasion  to  be  “surprised,” 
having  the  cable  in  daily  communication  with  Madrid,  and,  more  than  that,  a Manila 
paper  of  the  last  day  of  April  contained  an  item  of  real  news — the  biggest  news  item 
ever  published  in  that  town!  It  was  from  a point  on  the  western  coast  of  the  island 
of  Luzon,  and  the  substance  of  it  that  four  vessels  that  seemed  to  be  men-of-war, 
had  been  sighted  going  south,  and  supposed  to  be  the  American  fleet. 

What  did  the  Spaniards  suppose  the  American  fleet  they  knew  well  had  left 
Hongkong  was  going  south  for?  If  Admiral  Dewey  had  been  a commonplace  man 
he  would  have  paused  and  held  a council  of  war  nigh  the  huge  rock  Corregidor  at  the 
mouth  of  Manila  Bay.  There  is  a channel  on  either  side  of  that  island,  and  both 
were  reputed  to  be  guarded  by  torpedoes.  The  Spaniards  had  an  enormous  stock  of 
munitions  of  war — modern  German  guns  enough  to  have  riddled  the  fleet  of  Ameri- 
can cruisers — and  why  did  they  not  have  torpedoes?  They  had  the  Mauser  rifle, 
which  has  wonderful  range,  and  ten  millions  of  smokeless  powder  cartridges.  Marks- 
men could  sweep  the  decks  of  a ship  with  Mausers  at  the  distance  of  a mile,  and 
with  the  smokeless  cartridges  it  would  have  been  mere  conjecture  where  the  sharp- 
shooters were  located.  There  are  rows  of  armor-piercing  steel  projectiles  from 
Germany  still  standing  around  rusting  in  the  Spanish  batteries,  and  they  never  did 
any  more  than  they  are  doing.  It  is  said — and  there  is  every  probability  of  the  truth 
of  th«  story — that  some  of  these  bolts  would  not  fit  any  gun  the  Spaniards  had 
mounted.  The  Admiral  paid  no  attention  to  the  big  rock  and  the  alleged  torpedoes, 
but  steamed  up  the  bay  near  the  city  where  the  Spaniards  were  sleeping.  He  was 
hunting  the  fleet  he  was  ordered  to  remove,  and  found  it  very  early  in  the  morning. 
Still  the  thunder  of  his  guns  seems  to  thrill  and  electrify  the  air  over  the  bay,  and 
shake  the  city;  and  the  echoes  to  ring  around  the  world,  there  is  no  question — not 
bo  much  because  the  Americans  won  a naval  victory  without  a parallel,  as  that  Dewey 
improved  the  occasion,  showing  that  he  put  brains  into  his  business.  They 
say — that  is,  some  people  seem  to  want  to  say  it  and  so  do — that  Dewey  is  a 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 


37 


(strange  sort  of  man;  as  was  said  of  Wolfe  and  Nelson,  who  died  when  they 
won  immortality.  Dewey  lives  and  is  covered  with  glory.  It  has  been 
held  that  there  were  not  enough  Americans  hurt  in  the  Manila  fight  to 
make  the  victory  truly  great.  But  the  same  objection  applies  to  the  destruction  of 
Cervera’s  fieet  when  he  ran  away  from  Santiago.  General  Jackson’s  battle  at  New 
Orleans  showed  a marvelously  small  loss  to  Americans;  but  it  was  a good  deal  of  a 
victor}',  and  held  good,  though  won  after  peace  with  England  had  been  agreed  upon. 
The  capture  of  Manila  is  valid,  too.  Spain  surrendered  before  the  town  did.  If 
Dewey  had  been  an  every-day  kind  of  man,  he  would  have  left  Manila  when  he  had 
fulfilled  the  letter  of  his  orders,  as  he  had  no  means  of  destroying  the  Spanish  army* 
and  did  not  want  to  desolate  a city,  even  if  the  Spaniards  held  it.  He  remained  and 
called  for  more  ships  and  men,  and  got  them. 

“How  is  it?”  “Why  is  it?”  “How  can  it  be?”  are  the  questions  Admiral  Dewey 
asks  when  told  that  the  American  people,  without  exception,  rejoice  to  celebrate 
him — that  if  one  of  the  men  known  to  have  been  with  him  May  1st  should  be  found 
out  in  any  American  theater  he  would  be  taken  on  the  stage  by  an  irresistible  call  and 
a muscular  committee  of  enthusiasts,  and  the  play  coiild  not  go  on  without  “a  few 
words”  and  the  “Star  Spangled  Banner,”  “Hail  Columbia,”  “Yankee  Doodle,” 
“Dixey”  and  “My  Country,  ’tis  of  Thee”;  that  the  hallelujah  note  would  be  struck; 
that  cars  are  chalked  “for  Deweyville”;  that  the  board  fences  have  his  name  written, 
or  painted,  or  whittled  on  them;  that  there  are  Dewey  cigars;  that  blacksmith- 
shops  have  the  name  Dewey  scratched  on  them,  also  barn  doors;  and  that  if  there 
are  two  dwelling-houses  and  a stable  at  a cross-roads  it  is  Deweyville,  or  Deweyburg 
or  Deweytown;  that  there  is  a flood  of  boy  babies  named  Dewey,  that  the  girls  sing 
of  him,  and  the  ladies  all  admire  him  and  the  widows  love  him,  and  the  school 
children  adore  him.  The  Admiral  says:  “I  hear  such  things,  and  altogether  they 

amaze  me — the  newspapers,  the  telegrams,  the  letters  become  almost  unreal,  for 
I do  not  comprehend  what  they  say  of  my  first  day’s  work  here.  There  was  not  a 
man  in  the  fleet  who  did  not  do  his  duty.” 

The  Admiral  is  told  that  he  need  not  think  to  stay  away  until  the  people  who 
have  him  on  their  minds  and  in  their  hearts  are  tired  of  their  enthusiasm;  that 
he  cannot  go  home  undiscovered  and  without  demonstrations  that  will  shake  the 
earth  and  rend  the  skies;  that  the  boys  will  drag  the  horses  from  his  carriage,  and 
parade  the  streets  with  him  as  a prisoner,  and  have  it  out  with  him,  giving  him  a 
good  time,  until  it  will  be  a hard  time,  and  he  might  as  well  submit  to  manifest 
destiny!  His  country  wanted  another  hero,  and  he  was  at  the  right  place  at  the 
right  time,  and  did  the  right  thing  in  the  right  way;  and  the  fact  answers  all 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  II1S  FLAGSHIP. 


:;s 

questions  accounting  for  everything.  Still  lie  has  a notion  of  staying  away  until 
the  storm  is  over  and  he  can  get  along  without  being  a spectacle.  Why,  even  the 
ladies  of  Washington  are  wild  about  him.  If  he  should  appear  at  the  White  House 
to  call  on  the  President,  the  scene  would  be  like  that  when  Grant  first  met  Abraham 
Lincoln. 

One  rough  clay  on  the  bay  I took  passage  in  a small  steam-launch  to  visit  the 
Olympia,  where  the  Admiral’s  flag  floated,  to  call  on  him.  There  was  plenty  of 
steam,  and  it  was  pleasant  to  get  out  a good  way  behind  the  breakwater,  for  the 
waves  beyond  were  white  with  anger,  and  the  boat,  when  departing  from  partial 
shelter,  had  proceeded  but  two  or  three  hundred  yards  when  it  made  a supreme 
effort  in  two  motions — the  first,  to  roll  over;  the  second,  to  stand  on  its  head.  I 
was  glad  both  struggles  were  unsuccessful,  and  pleased  with  the  order:  “Slow 

her  up.”  The  disadvantages  of  too  much  harbor  were  evident.  The  slow-ups 
were  several,  and  well  timed,  and  then  came  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  frisky  launch 
beside  the  warship,  the  throwing  of  a rope,  the  pull  with  a hook,  the  stand  off  with 
an  oar,  the  bounding  boat  clearing  from  four  to  ten  feet  at  a jump;  the  clutch, 
the  quick  step,  the  deft  avoidance  of  a crushed  foot  or  sprained  ankle,  with  a 
possible  broken  leg  in  sight,  the  triumphant  ascent,  the  safe  landing,  the  sudden 
sense  that  Desdemona  was  right  in  loving  a man  for  the  dangers  he  had  passed, 
the  thought  that  there  should  be  harbors  less  fluctuating,  a lively  appreciation  of 
the  achievements  of  pilots  in  boarding  Atlantic  liners.  The  broad  decks  of  the 
Olympia,  built  by  the  builders  of  the  matchless  Oregon,  had  a comforting 
solidity  under  my  feet.  The  Admiral  was  believed  to  be  having  a nap;  but  he  was 
wide  awake,  and  invited  the  visitor  to  take  a big  chair,  which,  after  having  accom- 
panied the  launch  in  the  dance  with  the  whitecaps,  was  peculiarly  luxurious.  The 
Admiral  didn’t  mind  me,  and  had  a moment’s  surprise  about  an  observer  of  long  ago 
strolling  so  far  from  home  and  going  forth  in  a high  sea  to  make  a call.  I con- 
fessed to  being  an  ancient  Wanderer,  but  not  an  Ancient  Mariner,  and  expressed 
disapprobation  of  the  deplorable  roughness  of  the  California  Albatross,  a brute  of 
a bird — a feathered  ruffian  that  ought  to  be  shot. 

The  Admiral  would  be  picked  out  by  close  attention  as  the  origin  of  some 
millions  of  pictures;  but  he  is  unlike  as  well  as  like  them.  Even  the  best  photo- 
graphs do  not  do  justice  to  his  fine  eyes,  large,  dark  and  luminous,  or  to  the  solid 
mass  of  his  head  with  iron-brown  hair  tinged  with  gray.  He  is  a larger  man  than 
the  portraits  indicate;  and  his  figure,  while  that  of  a strong  man  in  good  health 
and  form  and  well  nourished,  is  not  stout  and,  though  full,  is  firm;  and  his  step 
has  elasticity  in  it.  His  clean-shaven  cheek  and  chin  are  massive,  and  drawn  on 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  TITS  FLAGSHIP. 


39 

fine  lines  full  of  character — no  fatty  obscuration,  no  decline  of  power;  a stern  but 
sunny  and  cloudless  face — a good  one  for  a place  in  history;  no  show  of  indulgence, 
no  wrinkles;  not  the  pallor  of  marble,  rather  the  glint8  of  bronze — the  unabated  force 
good  for  other  chapters  of  history.  It  would  be  extremely  interesting  to  report  the 
talk  of  the  Admiral;  but  there  were  two  things  about  him  that  reminded  me  of 
James  G.  Blaine,  something  of  the  vivid  personality  of  the  loved  and  lost  leader; 
something  in  his  eye  and  his  manner,  more  in  the  startling  candor  with  which  he 
spoke  of  things  it  would  be  premature  to  give  the  world,  and,  above  all,  the  ab- 
sence of  all  alarm  about  being  reported — the  unconscious  consciousness  that  one 
must  know  this  was  private  and  no  caution  needed.  A verbatim  report  of  the 
Admiral  would,  however,  harm  no  one,  signify  high-toned  candor  and  a certain 
breezy  simplicity  in  the  treatment  of  momentous-  matters.  Evidently  here  was  a 
man  not  posing,  a hero  because  his  character  was  heroic,  a genuine  personage — not 
artificial,  proclamatory,  a pigker  of  phrases,  but  a doer  of  deeds  that  explain  them- 
selves; a man  with  imagination,  not  fantastic  but  realistic,  who  must  have  had  a 
vision  during  the  night  after  the  May-day  battle  of  what  might  be  the  great  here- 
after; beholding  under  the  southern  constellations  the  gigantic  shadow  of  America, 
crowned  with  stars,  with  the  archipelagoes  of  Asia  under  her  feet  and  broad  and 
mighty  destinies  at  command. 

It  was  the  next  day  that  he  anchored  precisely  where  his  famous  ship  was  swinging 
when  I sat  beside  him;  and  his  words  to  the  representative  of  three  centuries  of 
Spanish  misrule  had  in  them  an  uncontemplated  flash  from  the  flint  and  steel  of 
fixed  purpose  and  imperial  force.  “Fire  another  gun  at  my  ships  and  I will  destroy 
your  city.” 

We  can  hardly  realize  in  America  how  flagrant  Europeanism  has  been  in  the 
Manila  Bay;  how  the  big  German  guns  bought  by  Spain  looked  from  their 
embrasures;  how  a powerful  German  fleet  persisted  in  asserting  antagonism  to 
Americanism,  and  tested  in  many  ways  the  American  Admiral’s  knowledge  of  his 
rights  and  his  country’s  policy  until  Admiral  Dewey  told,  not  the  German  Admiral, 
as  has  been  reported,  but  his  flag  lieutenant,  “Can  it  be  possible  that  your  nation 
means  Avar  with  mine?  If  so,  we  can  begin  it  in  five  minutes.”  The  limit  had  been 
reached,  and  the  line  was  drawn;  and  Dewey’s  Avords  will  go  doAvn  in  our  records 
with  those  of  Charles  Francis  Adams  to  Lord  John  Russell  about  the  ironclads  built 
in  England  for  the  Confederacy:  “My  Lord,  I need  not  point  out  to  your  lordship 
that  this  is  war.” 

Perhaps  the  German  Admiral  had  exceeded  the  instructions  of  his  Imperial 


10 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 


Government,  and  the  peremptory  words  of  the  American  Admiral  caused  a better 
understanding,  making  for  peace  rather  than  for  war. 

Next  to  the  Americans  the  English  have  taken  a pride  in  Admiral  Dewey,  and 
they  are  in  the  Asiatic  atmosphere  our  fast  friends.  They  do  not  desire  that  we 
should  give  up  the  Philippines.  On  the  contrary,  they  want  us  to  keep  the  islands, 
and  the  more  we  become  interested  in  those  wafers  and  along  their  shores,  the  bet- 
ter. They  know  that  the  world  has  practically  grown  smaller  and,  therefore,  the 
British  Empire  more  compact;  and  they  find  Russia  their  foe.  They  see  that  with 
the  Pacific  Coast  our  base  of  operations  looking  westward,  we  have  first  the  Hawaiian 
Islands  for  producers  and  a coal  station,  naval  arsenal,  dockyards  for  the  renovation 
and  repair  and  replenishment  of  our  fleets;  and  they  see  that  we  have  reserved  for 
ourselves  one  of  the  Ladrones,  so  that  we  will  have  an  independent  route  to  the  Philip- 
pines. The  Japanese  have  cultivated  much  feeling  against  our  possession  of  Hawaii, 
the  animus  being  that  they  wanted  it  for  themselves;  and  likewise  they  are  disturbed 
by  our  Pacific  movement,  anticipating  the  improvement  of  the  most  western  of  the 
Alutian  Islands,  an  admirable  station  overlooking  the  North  Pacific;  all  compre- 
hending with  Hawaii,  the  Alutian  Island  found  most  available,  the  Ladrone  that  we 
shall  reserve  and  the  Philippines,  we  shall  have  a Pacific  quadrilateral;  and  this 
is  not  according  to  the  present  pleasure  and  the  ambition  for  the  coming  days,  of 
Japan.  England  would  have  approved  our  holding  all  the  islands  belonging  to  the 
Spanish,  including  the  Canaries,  and  Majorca  and  Minorca  and  their  neighboring 
isles  in  the  Mediterranean,  and  take  a pride  in  us.  She  has  been  of  untold  and 
inestimable  service  to  us  in  the  course  of  the  Spanish  War,  and  her  ways  have  been 
good  for  us  at  Manila,  while  the  Germans  have  been  frankly  against  us,  the  Rus- 
sians grimly  reserved,  and  the  French  disposed  to  be  fretful  because  they  have 
invested  in  Spanish  bonds  upon  which  was  raised  the  money  to  carry  on  the  miserable 
false  pretense  of  war  with  the  Cubans.  One  day  while  I was  on  the  fine  transport 
Peru,  in  the  harbor  of  Manila,  the  American  Admiral’s  ship  saluted  an  English 
ship-of-war  coming  in  that  had  saluted  his  flag,  and  also  displayed  American  colors 
in  recognition  that  the  harbor  of  Manila  was  an  American  port.  That  was  the  sig- 
nificance of  the  flashes  and  thundering  of  the  Admiral’s  guns  and  the  white  cloud 
that  gathered  about  his  ship  that  has  done  enough  for  celebrity  through  centuries. 

Admiral  Dewey  created  the  situation  in  the  Philippines  that  the  President  wisely 
chose  by  way  of  the  Paris  Conference  to  receive  the  deliberate  judgment  of  the 
Senate  and  people  of  the  United  States.  Dewey  has  been  unceasingly  deeply  con- 
cerned about  it.  His  naval  victory  was  but  the  beginning.  He  might  have  sailed 
away  from  Manila  May  2d,  having  fulfilled  his  orders;  but  he  had  the  high  am) 


GENERAL  AGUINALDO,  HIS  PHOTOGRAPH  AND  AUTOGRAPH,  AS  PRESENTED 

TO  MR.  HALSTEAD. 


ARCHBISHOP  OF  MANILA,  HIS  PHOTOGRAPH,  AND  AUTOGRAPH,  AS  PRESENTED 


43 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 

keen  American  spirit  in  him,  and  clung.  He  needed  a base  of  operations,  a place 
upon  which  to  rest  and  obtain  supplies.  He  had  not  the  marines  to  spare  to  garrison 
a fort  save  at  Cavite,  twelve  miles  from  Manila;  and  he  needed  chickens,  eggs,  fresh 
meat  and  vegetables;  and  it  was  important  that  the  Spanish  Army  should  be  occupied 
on  shore.  Hence,  Aguinaldo,  who  was  in  Singapore,  and  the  concentration  of 
insurgents  that  had  themselves  to  be  restrained  to  make  war  on  civilized  lines.  One 
of  the  points  of  the  most  considerable  interest  touching  the  Filipinos  is  that  the 
smashing  defeat  of  the  fleet  of  Spain  in  Manila  Bay  heartened  them.  They  have 
become  strong  for  themselves.  The  superiority  of  the  Americans  over  the  Spaniards 
as  fighting  men  is  known  throughout  the  islands  Spain  oppressed;  and  the  bonds  of 
the  tyrants  have  been  broken.  It  should  not  be  out  of  mind  that  the  first  trans- 
ports with  our  troops  did  not  reach  Manila  for  six  weeks,  and  that  the  army  was  not 
in  shape  to  take  the  offensive  until  after  General  Merritt’s  arrival,  late  in  July.  All 
this  time  the  American  Admiral  had  to  hold  on  with  the  naval  arm;  and  it  was  the 
obvious  game  of  Spain,  if  she  meant  to  fight  and  could  not  cope  with  the  Americans 
in  the  West  Indies,  to  send  all  her  available  ships  and  overwhelm  us  in  the  East 
Indies.  At  the  same  time  the  German,  French,  Russian  and  Japanese  men-of-war 
represented  the  interest  of  the  live  nations  of  the  earth  in  the  Philippines.  As  fast 
as  possible  Admiral  Dewey  was  re-enforced;  but  it  was  not  until  the  two  monitors, 
the  Monterey  and  Monadnock,  arrived,  the  latter  after  the  arrival  of  General  Merritt, 
that  the  Admiral  felt  ‘that  he  was  safely  master  of  the  harbor.  He  had  no  heavily 
armored  ships  to  assail  the  shore  batteries  within  their  range,  and  might  be  crippled 
by  the  fire  of  the  great  Krupp  guns.  It  was  vital  that  the  health  of  the  crews  of  his 
ships  should  be  maintained,  and  the  fact  that  the  men  are  and  have  been  all  sum- 
mer well  and  happy  is  not  accidental.  Admiral  Dewey  took  the  point  of  danger, 
if  there  was  one,  into  his  personal  keeping,  by  anchoring  the  Olympia  on  the 
Manila  side  of  the  bay,  while  others  were  further  out  and  near  Cavite;  and  through- 
out the  fleet  there  was  constant  activity  and  the  utmost  vigilance.  There  was 
incessant  solicitude  about  what  the  desperate  Spaniards  might  contrive  in  the  nature 
of  aggressive  enterprise.  It  seemed  incredible  to  Americans  that  nothing  should 
be  attempted.  Flow  would  a Spanish  fleet  have  fared  for  three  months  of  war 
*dth  us  in  an  American  harbor?  There  would  have  been  a new  feature  of  destruc- 
tiveness fried  on  the  foe  at  least  once  a week. 

The  Spaniards  ashore  seemed  to  be  drowsy;  but  the  Americans  were  wide  awake, 
ready  for  anything,  and  could  not  be  surprised;  so  that  we  may  commend  as  wis- 
dom the  Spanish  discretion  that  let  them  alone.  The  ship  that  was  the  nearest 
neighbor  of  Admiral  Dewey  for  months  of  his  long  vigil  flew  the  flag  of  Belgium. 


44 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 


She  is  a large,  rusty-looking  vessel,  without  a sign  of  contraband  of  war,  or  of  a 
chance  of  important  usefulness  about  her;  but  she  performed  a valuable  function.  I 
asked  half  a dozen  times  what  her  occupation  was  before  any  one  gave  a satisfactory 
answer.  Admiral  Dewey  told  the  story  in  few  words.  She  was  a cold-storage  ship, 
with  beef  and  mutton  from  Australia,  compartments  fixed  for  about  forty  degrees 
below  zero.  Each  day  the  meat  for  the  American  fleet’s  consumption  was  taken  out. 
There  was  a lot  of  it  on  the  deck  of  the  Olympia  thawing  when  I was  a visitor;  and 
the  beef  was  “delicious.”  I am  at  pains  to  give  Dewey’s  word.  While  the  Spaniards 
ashore  were  eating  tough,  lean  buffalo — the  beasts  of  burden  in  the  streets,  the 
Americans  afloat  rejoiced  in  “delicious”  beef  and  mutton  from  Australia;  It  was 
explained  that  the  use  of  cold-storage  meat  depended  upon  giving  it  time  to  thaw, 
for  if  it  should  be  cooked  in  an  icy  state  it  would  be  black  and  unpalatable,  losing 
wholly  its  flavor  and  greatly  its  nourishing  quality.  Australia  is  not  many  thousand 
miles  from  the  Philippines — and  one  must  count  miles  by  the  thousands  out  there. 
The  Belgians  have  a smart  Consul  at  Manila  who  is  a friend  of  mankind. 

One  of  the  incidents  in  the  battle  of  Manila — all  are  fresh  in  the  public  memory — 
is  that  Admiral  Dewey  did  not  make  use  of  the  conning-tower — a steel,  bomb  proof, 
for  the  security  of  the  officer  in  command  of  the  ship — the  Captain,  of  course,  and  the 
commander  of  the  fleet,  if  he  will. 

This  retreat  did  not  prove,  in  the  battle  of  Yalu  and  the  combats  between  the 
Chileans  and  Peruvians,  a place  of  safety;  but  as  a rule  there  is  a considerable  per- 
centage of  protection  in  its  use.  Admiral  Dewey  preferred  to  remain  on  the  bridge — 
and  there  were  four  fragments  of  Spanish  shells  that  passed  close  to  him,  striking 
within  a radius  of  fifteen  feet.  The  Admiral,  when  told  there  had  been  some  remark 
because  he  had  not  occupied  the  conning-house  in  the  action,  walked  with  me  to  the 
tower,  the  entrance  to  which  is  so  guarded  that  it  resembles  a small  cavern  of  steel — 
with  a heavy  cap  or  lid,  under  which  is  a circular  slit,  through  which  observations 
are  supposed  to  be  made.  “Try  it,”  the  Admiral  said,  “and  you  find  it  is  hard  to  get  a 
satisfactory  view.”  Pie  added,  when  I had  attempted  to  look  over  the  surroundings: 
“We  will  go  to  the  bridge;”  and  standing  on  it  he  annotated  the  situation,  saying: 
“Here  you  have  the  whole  bay  before  you,  and  can  see  everything.”  I remarked: 
“The  newspaper  men  are  very  proud  of  the  correspondent  of  the  Herald  who  was  with 
you  on  the  bridge;”  and  the  Admiral  said:  “Yes;  Stickney  was  right  here  with  us.” 

There  were  many  reasons  for  the  officer  commanding  the  American  fleet  that  day 
to  watch  closely  the  developments.  The  Spaniards  had,  for  their  own  purposes,  even 
falsified  the  official  charts  of  the  bay.  Where  our  vessels  maneuvered  and  the  flag- 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY  ON  HIS  FLAGSHIP. 


45 


ship  drew  twenty-two  feet  of  water  and  liad  nine  feet  under  the  keel,  the  chart 
called  for  fifteen  feet  only! 

It  is  not  a secret  that  the  President  wanted  Admiral  Dewey,  if  it  was  not  in  his 
opinion  inconsistent  with  his  sense  of  duty,  to  go  to  Washington.  Naturally  the 
President  would  have  a profound  respect  for  the  Admiral’s  opinion  as  to  the  per- 
plexing problem  of  the  Philippines.  The  Admiral  did  not  think  he  should  leave 
his  post.  He  could  cover  the  points  of  chief  interest  in  writing,  and  preferred  very 
much  to  do  so,  and  stay  right  where  he  was  “until  this  thing  is  settled.”  The 
opinion  of  the  Admiral  as  to  what  the  United  States  should  do  with,  or  must  do  about, 
the  political  relations  of  the  Philippines  with  ourselves  and  others,  have  not  been 
given  formal  expression;  but  it  is  safe  to  say  they  are  not  in  conflict  with  his  feeling 
that  the  American  fleet  at  Manila  should  be  augmented  with  gunboats,  cruisers 
and  two  or  three  battle-ships.  It  was,  in  the  opinion  of  the  illustrious  Admiral,  when 
the  Peace  Commission  met  in  Paris,  the  time  and  place  to  make  a demonstration 
of  the  sea  power  of  the  United  States. 

The  personal  appearance  of  Admiral  Dewey  is  not  presented  with  attractive 
accuracy  in  the  very  familiar  portrait  of  him  that  has  been  wonderfully  multiplied 
and  replenished.  The  expression  of  the  Admiral  is  not  truly  given  in  the  prints  and 
photos.  The  photographer  is  responsible  for  a faulty  selection.  The  impression 
prevails  that  the  hero  is  “a  little  fellow.”  There  is  much  said  to  the  effect  that  he 
is  jaunty  and  has  excess  of  amiability  in  his  smile.  He  weighs  about  180  pounds,  and 
is  of  erect  bearing,  standing  not  less  than  five  feet  ten  inches  and  a quarter.  His 
hair  is  not  as  white  as  the  pictures  say.  The  artist  who  touched  up  the  negative 
must  have  thought  gray  hair  so  becoming  that  he  anticipated  the  feast  of  coming 
years.  The  figure  of  the  Admiral  is  strong,  w^ell  carried,  firm,  and  his  bearing  that 
of  gravity  and  determination,  but  no  pose  for  the  sake  of  show,  no  pomp  and  cir- 
cumstance, just  the  Academy  training  showing  in  his  attitude — the  abiding,  uncon- 
scious grace  that  is  imparted  in  the  schools  of  Annapolis  and  West  Point — now 
rivaled  by  other  schools  in  “setting  up.”  The  Admiral  is  of  solidity  and  dignity, 
of  good  stature  and  proportions;  has  nothing  of  affectation  in  manners  or  insincerity 
in  speech;  is  a hearty,  stirring,  serious  man,  whose  intensity  is  softened  by  steady 
purposes  and  calm  forces,  and  moderated  by  the  play  of  a sense  of  humor,  that  is 
not  drollery  or  levity,  but  has  a pleasing  greeting  for  a clever  word,  and  yields 
return  with  a flash  in  it  and  an  edge  on  it. 


CHAPTER  IT. 


LIFE  IN  MANILA. 

Character  of  the  Filipinos — Drivers  Lashing  Laboring  Men  in  the  Streets — What 
Americans  Get  in  Their  Native  Air — The  Logic  of  Destiny — Manila  as  She 
Fell  into  Our  Hands— The  Beds  in  the  Tropics — A Spanish  Hotel — Profane 
Yells  for  Ice — Sad  Scenes  in  the  Dining  Room — Major-General  Calls  for 
“Francisco” — A Broken-Hearted  Pantry  Woman. 

The  same  marvelous  riches  that  distinguish  Cuba  are  the  inheritance  of  Luzon. 
The  native  people  are  more  promising  in  the  long  run  than  if  they  were  in  larger 
percentage  of  the  blood  of  Spain,  for  they  have  something  of  that  indomitable  in- 
dustry that  must  finally  work  out  an  immense  redemption  for  the  eastern  and 
southern  Asiatics.  When,  I wonder,  did  the  American  people  get  the  impression  so 
extensive  and  obstinate  that  the  Japanese  and  Chinese  were  idlers?  We  may  add  as 
having  a place  in  this  category  the  Hindoos,  who  toil  forever,  and,  under  British 
government,  have  increased  by  scores  of  millions.  The  southern  Asiatics  are,  how- 
ever, less  emancipated  from  various  indurated  superstitions  than  those  of  the  East; 
and  the  Polynesians,  spread  over  the  southern  seas,  .are  a softer  people  than  those 
of  the  continent.  However,  idleness  is  not  the  leading  feature  of  life  of  the 
Filipinos,  and  when  they  are  mixed,  especially  crossed  with  Chinese,  they  are  inde- 
fatigable. On  the  Philippine  Islands  there  is  far  less  servility  than  on  the  other  side 
of  the  sea  of  China,  and  the  people  are  the  more  respectable  and  hopeful  for  the 
flavor  of  manliness  that  compensates  for  a moderate  but  visible  admixture  of  sav- 
agery. We  of  North  America  may  be  proud  of  it  that  the  atmosphere  of  our  con- 
tinent, when  it  was  wild,  was  a stimulant  of  freedom  and  independence.  The  red 
Indians  of  our  forests  were,  with  all  their  faults,  never  made  for  slaves.  The  natives 
of  the  West  Indies,  the  fierce  Caribs  excepted,  were  enslaved  by  the  Spaniards,  and 
perished  under  the  lash.  Our  continental  tribes — the  Seminoles  and  the  Comanches, 
the  Sioux  and  Mohawks,  the  Black  Feet  and  the  Miamis — from  the  St.  Lawrence 
to  Red  River  and  the  oceans,  fought  all  comers — Spaniards,  French  and  English — 
only  the  French  having  the  talent  of  polite  persuasion  and  the  gift  of  kindness 
that  won  the  mighty  hunters,  but  never  subjugated  them.  We  may  well  en- 
courage the  idea  that  the  quality  of  air  of  the  wilderness  has  entered  the  soil. 
When,  in  Manila,  I have  seen  the  men  bearing  burdens  on  the  streets  spring  out 
of  the  way  of  those  riding  in  carriages,  and  lashed  by  drivers  with  a viciousness  that 
no  dumb  animal  should  suffer,  I have  felt  my  blood  warm  to  think  that,  the 

JO 


EX-COUNSUL  GENERAL  FITZHUGH  LEE,  NOW  MAJOR-GENERAL  COMMANDING. 


CAPTAIN  SIGSBEE,  COMMANDER  OF  THE  ILL-FATED  MAINE 


LIFE  IN  MANILA. 


s 


49 


men  of  common  hard  labor  in  my  country  would  resent  a blow  as  quickly  as  the 
man  on  horseback—  that  even  the  poor  black — emancipated  the  other  day  from 
the  subjugation  of  slavery  by  a masterful  and  potential  race,  stands  up  in  conscious 
manhood,  and  that  the  teachings  of  the  day  are  that  consistently  with  the  progress 
of  the  country — as  one  respects  himself,  he  must  be  respected — and  that  the  air  and 
the  earth  have  the  inspiration  and  the  stimulus  of  freedom.  The  Chinese  and 
Japanese  are  famous  as  servants — so  constant,  handy,  obedient,  docile,  so  fitted 
to  minister  to  luxury,  to  wait  upon  those  favored  by  fortune  and  spurred  to  execute 
the  schemes  for  elevation  and  dominance,  and  find  employment  in  the  enterprise 
that  comprehends  human  advancement.  It  must  be  admitted  that  the  Filipinos 
are  not  admirable  in  menial  service.  Many  of  them  are  untamed,  and  now,  that  the 
Americans  have  given  object  lessons  of  smiting  the  Spaniards,  the  people  of  the 
islands  that  Magellinos,  the  Portuguese,  found  for  Spain,  must  be  allowed  a measure 
of  self-government,  or  they  will  assert  a broader  freedom,  and  do  it  with  sanguinary 
methods.  As  Americans  have  heretofore  found  personal  liberty  consistent  with 
public  order — that  Republicanism  was  more  stable  than  imperialism  in  peaceable 
administration,  and  not  less  formidable  in  war,  it  seems  to  be  Divinely  appointed 
that  our  paths  of  Empire  may,  with  advantage  to  ourselves,  and  the  world  at  large, 
be  made  more  comprehensive  than  our  fathers  blazed  them  out.  But  one  need  not 
hesitate  to  go  forward  in  this  cause,  for  we  have  only  gone  farther  than  the  fa  I hers 
dreamed,  because,  among  their  labors  of  beneficence,  was  that  of  building  wiser 
than  they  knew,  and  there  is  no  more  reason  now  why  we  should  stop  when  we  strike 
the  salt  water  of  the  seas,  and  consent  to  it  that  where  we  find  the  white  line  of  surf 
that  borders  a continent  we  shall  say  to  the  imperial  popular  Republic,  thus  far  and 
no  farther  shalt  thou  go,  and  here  shall  thy  proud  march  be  stayed — than  there 
was  that  George  Washington,  as  the  representative  of  the  English-speaking  people, 
should  have  assumed  that  England  and  Virginia  had  no  business  beyond  the  Alle- 
gheny Mountains,  and,  above  all,  no  right  to  territory  on  the  west  of  the  Allegheny 
and  Kanawha,  and  north  of  the  Ohio  river,  a territory  then  remote,  inhabited  by 
barbarians  and  wanted  by  the  French,  who  claimed  the  whole  continent,  except 
ihe  strip  along  the  Atlantic  possessed  by  the  English  colonies.  Washington  was  a 
believer  in  the  acquisition  of  the  Ohio  country.  He  was  a man  who  had  faith  in 
land — in  ever  more  land.  It  is  the  same  policy  to  go  west  now  that  it  was  then. 
Washington  crossed  the  Allegheny  and  held  the  ground.  Jefferson  crossed  the  Mis- 
sissippi, and  sent  Louis  aaid  Clark  to  the  Pacific;  and  crossing  the  great  western 
ocean  now  is  but  the  logic  of  going  beyond  the  great  western  rivers,  prairies  and 
mountains  then.  We  walk  in  the  ways  of  the  fathers  when  we  go  eonauering  and  to 
feonqu.gr  along  the  Eastward  shores  of  Asia. 


50 


LIFE  IN  MANILA. 


One  of  the  expanding  and  teeming  questions  before  the  world  now,  and  the 
authority  and  ability  to  determine  it.  is  in  the  hands  of  the  Commander-in-Chief  of 
the  Army  of  the  United  States,  is  whether  Manila  shall  become  an  American  city, 
with  all  the  broad  and  sweeping  significance  attaching  thereto.  Manila  was  not 
dressed  for  company  when  I saw  her,  for  she  had  just  emerged  from  a siege  in 
which  the  people  had  suffered  much  inconvenience  and  privation.  The  water 
supply  was  cut  off,  and  the  streets  were  not  cleaned.  The  hotels  were  disorganized 
and  the  restaurants  in  confusion.  The  trees  that  once  cast  a grateful  shade  along  the 
boulevards,  that  extended  into  the  country,  rudely  denuded  of  their  boughs, 
had  the  appearance  of  the  skeletons  of  strange  monsters.  The  insurgent  army  was 
still  in  the  neighborhood  in  a state  of  uneasiness,  feeling  wronged,  deprived,  as  they 
were,  of  an  opportunity  to  get  even  with  the  Spaniards,  by  picking  out  and  slaying 
some  of  the  more  virulent  offenders.  There  was  an  immense  monastery,  where 
hundreds  of  priests  were  said  to  be  sheltered,  and  the  insurgents  desired  to  take  them 
into  their  own  hands  and  make  examples  of  them.  The  Spaniards  about  the  streets 
were  becoming  complacent.  They  had  heard  of  peace,  on  the  basis  of  Spain  giving 
up  everything  but  the  Philippines,  and  there  were  expectations  that  the  troops 
withdrawn  from  Cuba  might  be  sent  from  Havana  to  Manila,  and  then,  as  soon  as 
the  Americans  were  gone,  the  islanders  could  be  brought  to  submission  by  vastly 
superior  forces.  There  were  more  rations  issued  to  Spanish  than  to  American 
soldiers,  until  the  division  of  the  Philippine  Expedition  with  Major-General  Otis  ar- 
rived, but  the  Americans  were  exclusively  responsible  for  the  preservation  of  the 
peace  between  the  implacable  belligerents,  and  the  sanitary  work  required  could  not 
at  once  be  accomplished,  but  presently  it  was  visible  that  something  was  done  every 
day  in  the  right  direction.  There  was  much  gambling  with  dice,  whose  rattling  could 
be  heard  far  and  near  on  the  sidewalks,  but  this  flagrant  form  of  vice  was  summarily 
suppressed,  we  may  say  with  strict  truth,  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet.  The  most  rep- 
resentative concentration  of  the  ingredients  of  chaos  was  at  the  Hotel  Oriental,  that 
overlooked  a small  park  with  a dry  fountain  and  a branch  of  the  river  flowing  under 
a stone  bridge,  with  a pretty  stiff  current,  presently  to  become  a crowded  canal. 
It  is  of  three  lofty  stories  and  an  attic,  a great  deal  of  the  space  occupied  with  halls, 
high,  wide  and  long.  The  front  entrance  is  broad,  and  a tiled  floor  runs  straight 
through  the  house.  Two  stairways,  one  on  either  side,  lead  to  the  second  story, 
the  first  steps  of  stone.  In  the  distance  beyond,  a court  could  be  seen,  a passable 
conservatory — but  bottles  on  a table  with  a counter  in  front  declared  that  this  was 
a barroom,  as  it  was.  The  next  thing  further  was  a place  where  washing  was  done, 
then  came  empty  rooms  that  might  be  shops;  after  this  a narrow  and  untidy  street. 


LIFE  IN  MANILA. 


51 


and  then  a livery  stable — a sort  of  monopolistic  cab  stand,  where  a few  ponies  and 
carriages  were  to  be  found — but  no  one  understood  or  did  anything  as  long  as  possi- 
ble, except  to  say  that  all  the  rigs  were  engaged  now  and  always.  However,  a little 
violent  English  language,  mixed  with  Spanish,  would  arouse  emotion  and  excite 
commotion  eventuating  in  a pony  in  harness,  and  a gig  or  carriage,  and  a desperate 
driver,  expert  with  a villainous  whip  used  without  occasion  or  remorse. 

The  cool  place  was  at  the  front  door,  on  the  sidewalk,  seated  on  a hard  chair, 
for  there  was  always  a breeze.  The  Spanish  guests  knew  where  the  wind  blew,  and 
gathered  there  discussing  many  questions  that  must  have  deeply  interested  them. 
But  they  had  something  to  eat,  no  authority  or  ability  to  affect  any  sort  of  change, 
and  unfailing  tobacco,  the  burning  of  which  was  an  occupation.  The  ground  floor 
of  the  hotel,  except  the  barroom,  the  washroom,  the  hall,  the  conservatory  and  the 
hollow  square,  had  been  devoted  to  shop  keeping,  but  the  shop  keepers  were  gone, 
perhaps  for  days  and  perhaps  forever!  Stone  is  not  used  to  any  great  extent  in 
house  interiors,  except  within  a few  feet  of  the  surface  of  the  earth.  Of  course,  there 
is  no  elevator  in  a Spanish  hotel.  That  which  is  wanted  is  room  for  the  circulation 
of  air.  Above  the  first  flight  of  stairs  the  steps  have  a deep  dark  red  tinge,  and  are 
square  and  long,  so  that  each  extends  solidly  across  the  liberal  space  allotted  to 
the  stairway.  The  blocks  might  be  some  stone  of  delightful  color,  but  they  are  hewn 
logs,  solid  and  smooth,  of  a superb  mahogany  or  some  tree  of  harder  wood  and 
deeper  luxuriance  of  coloring.  The  bedrooms  are  immensely  high,  and  in  every 
way  ample,  looking  on  great  spaces  devoted  to  wooing  the  air  from  the  park  and 
the  river.  The  windows  are  enormous.  Not  satisfied  with  the  giant  sliding  doors 
that  open  on  the  street,  revealing  windows — unencumbered  with  sash  or  glass, 
there  are  sliding  doors  under  the  window  sills,  that  roll  back  right  and  left  and  offer 
the  chance  to  introduce  a current  of  air  directly  on  the  lower  limbs.  One  of  the 
lessons  of  the  tropics  is  the  value  of  the  outer  air,  and  architecture  that  gives  it  a 
chance  in  the  house.  It  is  a precious  education.  The  artificial  light  within  must 
be  produced  by  candles,  and  each  stupendous  apartment  is  furnished  with  one  tal- 
lowy and  otherwise  neglected  candle  stick,  and  you  can  get,  with  exertion,  a 
candle  four  inches  long.  There  is  a wardrobe,  a wash  stand,  with  pitcher  and 
basin,  and  a commode,  fans,  chairs,  and  round  white  marble  table,  all  the  pieces 
placed  in  solitude,  so  as  to  convey  the  notion  of  lonesomeness.  The  great  feature 
is  the  bed.  The  bedstead  is  about  the  usual  thing,  save  that  there  is  no  provision 
for  a possible  or  impossible  spring  mattress,  or  anything  of  that  nature.  The  bed1 
space  is  covered  with  bamboo,  platted.  It  is  hard  as  iron,  and  I can  testify  of 
considerable  strength,  for  I rested  my  two  hundred  pounds,  and  rising  a few  pounds, 


52 


LIFE  IN  MANILA. 


on  this  surface,  with  no  protection  for  it  or  myself  for  several  nights,  and  there 
were  no  fractures.  There  is  spread  on  this  surface  a Manila  mat,  which  is  a shade 
tougher  and  less  tractable  than  our  old  style  oilcloth.  Upon  this  is  spread  a 
single  sheet,  that  is  tucked  in  around  the  edges  of  the  mat,  and  there  are  no  bed 
clothes,  absolutely  none.  There  is  a mosquito  bar  with  only  a few  holes  in  it,  but  it  is 
suspended  and  cannot  under  any  circumstances  be  used  as  a blanket.  There  is  a 
pillow,  hard  and  round,  and  easy  as  a log  for  your  cheek  to  rest  upon,  and  it  is  beau- 
tifully covered  with  red  silk.  There  is  a small  roll,  say  a foot  long  and  four  inches  in 
diameter,  softer  than  the  pillow,  to  a slight  extent,  and  covered  with  finer  and  red- 
der silk,  that  is  meant  for  the  neck  alone.  The  comparatively  big  red  log  is  to  extend 
across  the  bed  for  the  elevation  it  gives  the  head,  and  the  little  and  redder  log,  softer 
so  that  you  may  indent  it  with  your  thumb,  saves  the  neck  from  being  broken  on  this 
relic  of  the  Spanish  inquisition.  But  there  is  a comforter — not  such  a blessed  car- 
essing domestic  comforter  as  the  Yankees  have,  light  as  a feather,  but  responsive  to 
a tender  touch.  This  Philippine  comforter  is  another  red  roll  that  must  be  a quilt 
firmly  rolled  and  swathed  in  more  red  silk;  and  it  is  to  prop  yourself  withal  whea 
the  contact  with  the  sheet  and  the  mat  on  the  bamboo  floor  of  the  bedstead,  a com- 
bination iniquitous  as  the  naked  floor — becomes  wearisome.  It  rests  the  legs  to 
pull  on  your  back,  and  tuck  under  your  knees.  In  the  total  absence  of  bed  cov- 
ering, beyond  a thin  night  shirt,  the  three  red  rolls  are  not  to  be  despised.  The 
object  of  the  bed  is  to  keep  cool,  and  if  you  do  find  the  exertion  of  getting  onto — not 
into — the  bed  produces  a perspiration,  and  the  mosquito  bar  threatens  suffocation, 
reliance  may  be  had  that  if  you  can  compose  yourself  on  top  of  the  sheet  (which 
feels  like  a hard  wood  floor,  when  the  rug  gives  way  on  the  icy  surface  and  you  fall) 
and  if  you  use  the  three  rolls  of  hard  substance,  covered  with  red  silk,  discreetly  and 
considerately,  in  finding  a position,  and  if  you  permit  the  windows — no  glass — fifteen 
feet  by  twelve,  broadcast,  as  it  were,  to  catch  the  breath  of  the  river  and  the  park; 
if  you  can  contrive  with  infinite  quiet,  patience  and  pains  to  go  to  sleep  for  a few 
hours,  you  will  be  cool  enough;  and  when  awakened  shivering  there  is  no  blanket 
near,  and  if  you  must  have  cover,  why  get  under  the  sheet,  next  the  Manila  mat,  and 
there  you  are!  Then  put  your  troublesome  and  probably  aching  legs  over  the 
bigger  red  roll,  and  take  your  repose!  Of  course,  when  in  the  tropics  you  cannot 
expect  to  bury  yourself  in  bedelothing,  or  to  sleep  in  fur  bags  like  an  arctic  ex- 
plorer. The  hall  in  front  of  your  door  is  twelve  feet  wide  and  eighty  long,  lined 
with  decorative  chairs  and  sofas,  and  in  the  center  of  the  hotel  is  a spacious  dining 
room.  The  Spaniard  doesn’t  want  breakfast.  He  wants  coffee  and  fruit — maybe 
a small  banana — something  sweet,  and  a crumb  of  bread.  The  necessity  of  the  hour 


LIFE  IN  MANILA. 


is  a few  cigarettes.  His  refined  system  does  not  require  food  until  later.  At  12 
o’clock  he  lunches,  and  eats  an  abundance  of  hot  stuff — fish,  flesh  and  fowl— fiery 
stews  and  other  condolences  for  the  stomach.  This  gives  strength  to  consider  the 
wrongs  of  Spain  and  the  way,  when  restored  to  Madrid,  the  imbeciles,  who  allowed 
the  United  States  to  capture  the  last  sad  fragments  of  the  colonies,  sacred  to  Spanish 
honor,  shall  be  crushed  by  the  patriots  who  were  out  of  the  country  when  it  was 
ruined.  It  will  take  a long  time  for  the  Spaniards  to  settle  among  factions  the  ac- 
counts of  vengeance.  One  of  the  deeper  troubles  of  the  Spaniards  is  that  they  take 
upon  themselves  the  administration  of  the  prerogatives  of  him  who  said  “Vengeance 
is  mine.”  The  American  end  of  the  dining  room  contains  several  young  men  who 
speak  pigeon  Spanish,  and  Captains  Strong  and  Coudert  are  rapidly  becoming  ex- 
perts, having  studied  the  language  in  school,  and  also  on  the  long  voyage  out. 
There  are  also  a group  of  resident  Englishmen  and  a pilgrim  from  Norway,  but  at 
several  tables  are  Americans  who  know  no  Spanish  and  are  mad  at  the  Spaniards 
on  that  provocation  among  other  things. 

There  is,  however,  a connecting  link  and  last  resort  in  the  person  of  a young 
man — a cross  between  a Jap  and  Filipino.  He  is  slender  and  pale,  but  not  tall. 
His  hair  is  roached,  so  that  it  stands  up  in  confusion,  and  he  is  wearied  all  the  time 
about  the  deplorable  “help.”  It  is  believed  he  knows  better  than  is  done — always  a 
source  of  unhappiness.  His  name  is  Francisco;  his  reputation  is  widespread.  He  is 
the  man  who  “speaks  English” — and  is  the  only  one — and  it  is  not  doubted 
that  he  knows  at  least  a hundred  words  of  our  noble  tongue.  He  says,  “What  do 
you  want?”  “Good  morning,  gentlemen”;  “What  can  I do  for  you?”  “Do  you 
want  dinner?”  “No,  there  is  no  ice  till  6 o’clock.”  He  puts  the  Americans  in  mind 
of  better  days.  Behind  this  linguist  is  a little  woman,  whose  age  might  be  twenty 
or  sixty,  for  her  face  is  so  unutterably  sad  and  immovable  in  expression  that  there 
is  not  a line  in  it  that  tells  you  anything  but  that  there  is  to  this  little  woman  a bit- 
terly sad,  mean,  beastly  world.  She  must  be  grieving  over  mankind.  It  is  her 
duty  to  see  that  no  spoon  is  lost,  and  not  an  orange  or  banana  wasted,  and  her  mourn- 
ful eyes  are  fixed  with  the  intensity  of  despair  upon  the  incompetent  waiters,  who, 
when  hard  pressed  by  wild  shouts  from  American  officers,  frantic  for  lack  of  proper 
nourishment,  fall  into  a panic  and  dance  and  squeal  at  each  other;  and  then  the 
woman  of  fixed  sorrow,  her  left  shoulder  thin  and  copper-colored,  thrust  from  her 
low-necked  dress,  her  right  shoulder  protected,  is  in  the  midst  of  the  pack,  with  a 
gliding  bound  and  the  ferocity  of  a cat,  the  sadness  of  her  face  taking  on  a tinge 
of  long-suffering  rage.  She  whirls  the  fools  here  and  there  as  they  are  wanted. 
Having  disentangled  the  snarl,  she  returns  to  the  door  from  which  her  eyes  com- 


54 


LIFE  IN  MANILA. 


maud  both  the  pantry  and  the  dining-room  to  renew  her  solemn  round  of  mournful 
vigilance.  The  Americans  are  outside  her  jurisdiction.  She  has  no  more  idea  what 
they  are  than  Christopher  Columbus,  when  he  was  discovering  America,  knew  where 
he  was  going.  When  Francisco  does  not  know  what  the  language  (English)  hurled 
at  him  means  he  has  a far-away  look,  and  may  be  listening  to  the  angels  sing,  for  he 
is  plaintive  and  inexpressive.  He  looks  so  sorry  that  Americans  cannot  speak  their 
own  language  as  he  speaks  English!  But  there  are  phrases  delivered  by  Americans 
that  he  understands,  such  as,  “Blankety,  blank,  blank — you  all  come  here.”  Fran- 
cisco does  not  go  there,  but  with  humble  step  elsewhere,  affecting  to  find  a pressing 
case  for  his  intervention,  but  when  he  can  no  longer  avoid  your  eye  catching  him 
he  smiles  a sweet  but  most  superior  smile,  such  as  becomes  one  who  speaks  English 
and  is  the  responsible  man  about  the  house. 

There  never  was  one  who  did  more  on  a capital  of  one  hundred  words.  His 
labors  have  been  lightened  slightly,  for  the  Americans  have  picked  up  a few  Span- 
ish words,  such  as,  “Ha  mucher,  mucher — don’t  you  know?  Hielo,  hielo!”  Hielo 
is  ice,  and  after  the  “mucher”  is  duly  digested  the  average  waiter  comes,  by  and  by, 
with  a lump  as  big  as  a hen’s  egg  and  is  amazed  by  the  shouts  continuing  “hielo, 
hielo!”  pronounced  much  like  another  and  wicked  word. 

“Oh,  blanketination  mucher  mucher  hielo!”  The  Filipinos  cannot  contemplate 
lightly  the  consumption  of  slabs  of  ice.  The  last  words  I heard  in  the  dining-room 
of  the  Hotel  Oriental  were  from  a soldier  with  two  stars  on  each  shoulder: 
“Francisco,  oh,  Francisco,”  and  the  little  woman  with  left  shoulder  exposed  turned 
her  despairing  face  to  the  wall,  her  sorrow  too  deep  for  words  or  for  weeping. 


CHAPTER  III. 


FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 

Across  the  Continent — An  American  Governor-General  Steams  Through  the  Golden 
Gate — He  Is  a Minute-Man — Honolulu  as  a Health  Resort — The  Lonesome 
Pacific — The  Skies  of  Asia — Dreaming  Under  the  Stars  of  the  Scorpion — ■ 
The  Southern  Cross. 

Spain,  crowded  between  the  Mediterranean  and  the  Atlantic,  was  the  world’s 
“West”  for  many  centuries,  indeed  until  Columbus  found  a further  West,  hut  he 
did  not  go  far  enough  to  find  the  East  Indies.  The  United  States  is  now  at  work  in 
both  the  East  and  West  Indies. 

Our  Manila  expeditions  steamed  into  the  sunsets,  the  boys  pointing  out  to  each 
other  the  southern  cross.  The  first  stage  of  a journey,  to  go  half  round  the  world  on 
a visit  to  our  new  possession,  was  by  the  annex  boat  from  Brooklyn,  and  a rush  on 
the  Pennsylvania  train,  that  glimmers  with  gold  and  has  exhausted  art  on  wheels, 
to  Washington,  to  get  the  political  latitude  and  longitude  by  observation  of  the  two 
domes,  that  of  the  Capitol,  and  the  library,  and  the  tremendous  needle  of  snow  that 
is  the  monument  to  Washington,  and  last,  but  not  least,  the  superb  old  White  House. 

The  next  step  was  across  the  mountains  on  the  Baltimore  and  Ohio,  the  short 
cut  between  the  East  and  the  West,  traversed  so  often  by  George  Washington  to  get 
good  land  for  the  extension  of  our  national  foundations.  The  space  between  Cin- 
cinnati and  Chicago  is  cleared  on  the  “Big  Four”  with  a bound  through  the  shadow 
of  the  earth,  between  two  rare  days  in  June,  and  the  next  midnight,  the  roaring 
train  flew  high  over  the  Missouri  River  at  Omaha,  and  by  daylight  far  on  the  way  to 
Ogden.  The  country  was  rich  in  corn  and  grass,  and  when  one  beholds  the  fat 
cattle,  lamentations  for  the  lost  buffalo  cease.  It  is  a delight  to  see  young  orchards 
and  farmhouses,  and  cribs  and  sheds  fortified  against  tornadoes  by  groves,  laid  out 
with  irritating  precision  to  confront  the  whirling  storms  from  west  and  south. 
The  broad  bad  lands  in  which  the  tempests  are  raised  devour  the  heart  of  the 
continent. 

I made  note  of  the  888-mile  post  beyond  Omaha,  hut  the  1,000-mile  telegraph 

* 

pole  and  tree  glided  away  while  I was  catching  the  lights  and  shadows  on  a fear- 
fully tumbled  landscape.  The  alkali  has  poisoned  enormous  tracts,  and  the  tufts  of 
sagebrush  have  a huge  and  sinister  monotony.  Looking  out  early  in  the  morning 
there  was  in  our  track  a “gaunt  grey  wolf”  with  sharp  ears,  unabashed  by  the  roar 


55 


56 


FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 


of  the  train.  His  species  find  occasional  scraps  along  the  track  and  do  not  fear  the 
trains.  Then  I saw  something  glisten  in  the  herbage,  and  it  was  a rattlesnake,  if  it 
were  not  a whisky  bottle. 

The  gigantic  lumps  of  tawny  earth,  with  castellated  crags  of  stone,  ghostly  ruins 
one  would  say  of  cities  that  perished  thousands  of  years  before  the  bricks  were  made 
for  Babylon.  Profound  beds  forvanished  torrents  yawned  into  a scrap  of  green  valley, 
and  the  glitter  of  a thread  of  water.  A town  blossomed  from  a coal  mine,  and  there 
was  an  array  of  driven  wells  with  force  pumps  to  quench  the  thirst  of  seething  and 
raging  locomotives.  A turn  in  the  line  and  a beautiful  cloud  formation  like  billows 
of  white  roses,  massive,  delicately  outlined  fantastic  spires  like  marble  mountains, 
carved — ah!  the  cloud  comes  out  clear  as  if  it  were  a wall  of.  pearl,  and  there  are 
the  everlasting  mighty  hills  with  their  brows  of  exquisite  snow! 

These  are  lofty  reservoirs  from  which  the  long  days  glowing  with  sunshine  send 
down  streams  of  water  at  whose  touch  the  deserts  bloom.  The  eye  is  refreshed  as  we 
make  a closer  acquaintance  of  the  mountains.  "Where  water  flows  and  trees  “wag 
their  high  tops”  there  is  hope  of  homes.  There  are  canyons  that  cause  one  to  smile 
at  remembrances  of  what  were  considered  the  dizzy  gorges  of  the  Alleghenies.  There 
is  a glow  as  of  molten  lead  in  one  corner  of  a misty  valley  far  away.  It  is  Salt  Lake, 
the  Dead  Sea  of  America.  Beyond  this  at  an  immense  elevation  is  a lake  with  the  tinge 
of  the  indigo  sky  of  the  tropics.  If  one  could  stir  a portion  of  the  Caribbean  Sea  into 
Lake  Geneva,  the  correct  tint  could  be  obtained.  Thirty  miles  of  snow  sheds  an- 
nounce progress  in  the  journey  to  the  Pacific.  There  is  still  heat  and  dust,  but  beside 
the  road  are  villages;  and  there  are  even  fountains. 

Each  stream  is  a treasure,  and  its  banks  are  rich  with  verdure.  There  are  sleek 
cows  on  bright  grass.  The  mountains  are  no  longer  forbidding.  They  take  on  robes 
of  loveliness.  The  valleys  broaden  and  on  the  easy  slopes  there  are  orchards 
where  the  oranges  glisten.  There  are  clusters  of  grapes.  We  have  come  upon  that 
magic  land,  California.  There  is  golden  music  in  the  name.  This  is  a conquest. 
The  war  in  which  it  was  won  was  not  one  of  philanthropy.  We  gathered  an  empire. 

General  Merritt  never  minded  the  weather,  whether  the  wind  blew  or  not,  and 
instead  of  holding  his  ship  for  several  hours  after  the  appointed  time,  wanted  to 
know  five  minutes  after  10  o’clock  whether  the  time  for  starting  was  not  10  o’clock 
and  by  whom  the  boat  was  detained.  At  ten  minutes  after  10  the  gangplank  was 
swung  free,  with  a desperate  man  on  it  who  scrambled  on  with  the  help  of  long  legs 
and  a short  rope  As  the  ship  swung  from  the  dock  and  got  a move  on  there  were 
thousands  of  men  and  women  exalted  with  emotion,  and  there  were  crowded  steamers 
and  tugs  toppling  with  swarming  enthusiasts  resounding  with  brass  bands  and  flut« 


FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 


57 


tering  with  streaming  flags.  The  ladies  were  especially  frantic.  Spurts  of  white 
smoke  jetted  from  forts  and  there  were  ringing  salutes.  Steam  whistles  pitched  a 
tune  beyond  the  fixed  stars.  The  national  airs  with  thrilling  trumpet  tones  pierced 
the  din,  and  a multitude  of  voices  joined  with  the  hands  giving  words  and  tone  to  the 
magnetic  storm.  How  many  miles  the  Newport  was  pursued  I cannot  conjecture. 
There  were  tall  ladies  standing  on  the  high  decks  of  tugs  that  were  half  buried  in 
the  foam  of  the  bay,  but  as  long  as  they  could  hold  a “Star  Spangled  Banner”  in  one 
hand,  and  a few  handkerchiefs  in  another,  their  skirts  streaming  in  grace  and  defi- 
ance before  the  rising  gale,  they  sang  hosannas,  and  there  were  attitudes  both  of 
triumph  and  despair  as  the  fair  followers,  dashed  with  spray,  gave  up  the  chase,  pas- 
sionately kissing  their  hands  god-speed  and  good-by.  This  was  going  to  the  Indies 
through  the  Golden  Gate! 

A breakage  of  dishes,  that  sounded  as  though  the  ship  were  going  to  pieces,  belied 
the  prophesy  that  beyond  the  bar  there  was  to  be  no  moaning;  and  the  Pacific  would 
not  be  pacified.  However,  the  reputation  of  the  ocean  was  good  enough  to  go  to  sleep 
on,  but  the  berths  squirmed  in  sympathy  with  the  twisting  and  plunging  ship.  It 
was  not  a “sound  of  revelry  by  night,”  to  which  the  wakeful  listened  through  the 
dismal  hours,  and  in  the  morning  there  was  a high  sea — grand  rollers  crowned  with 
frothy  lace,  long  black  slopes  rising  and  smiting  like  waves  of  liquid  iron. 

The  Pacific  was  an  average  North  Atlantic,  and  it  was  explained  by  the  tale  that 
the  peaceful  part  of  this  ocean  is  away  down  South  where  the  earth  is  most  rotund, 
and  the  trade  winds  blow  on  so  serenely  that  they  lull  the  navigators  into  dreams  of 
peace  that  induce  a state  of  making  haste  slowly  and  a willingness  to  forget  and  be 
forgotten,  whether — 

Of  those  who  husbanded  the  golden  grain 
Or  those  who  flung  it  to  the  winds  like  rain. 

The  gulls  are  not  our  snowy  birds  of  the  Atlantic.  We  are  lonesome  out  here,  and 
the  Albatross  sweeps  beside  us,  hooded  like  a cobra,  an  evil  creature  trying  to  hoodoo 
us,  with  owlish  eyes  set  in  a frame  like  ghastly  spectacle  glasses. 

General  Merritt’s  blue  eyes  shone  like  diamonds  through  the  stormy  experiences 
while  the  young  staff  officers  curled  up  as  the  scientists  did  on  the  floor,  and  smiled  a 
sort  of  sickly  smile!  The  highest  compliment  that  can  be  paid  them  is  that  the 
group  of  officers  and  gentlemen  surrounding  the  commander  of  the  expedition  to 
the  Philippines,  express  his  own  character. 

It  was  funny  to  find  that  the  private  soldiers  were  better  served  with  food 
than  the  General  and  his  staff.  There  was  reform,  so  as  to  even  up  the  matter  of 
nations,  but  the  General  was  not  anxious  and  solicitous  for  better  food.  His  idea 


58 


FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 


of  the  correct  supper  after  a hard  day’s  service  is  a goodly  sized  sliced  onion  with  salt, 
meat  broiled  on  two  sticks,  hard  tack,  a tin  cup  of  coffee,  for  luxuries  a baked 
potato,  a pipe  of  tobacco,  a nip  of  whisky,  a roll  in  a blanket  and  a sleep  until  the 
next  day’s  duties  are  announced  by  the  bugle. 

As  the  gentlemen  of  the  staff  got  their  sea  legs,  and  flavored  the  narration  of 
their  experiences  with  humor,  I found  myself  in  a cloudy  state  and  mentioned  a 
small  matter  to  the  brigadier  surgeon,  who  whipped  out  a thermometer  and  took 
my  temperature,  and  that  man  of  science  gave  me  no  peace  night  or  day,  and  drove 
me  from  the  ship  into  Paradise — that  is  to  say  I was  ordered  to  stay  at 
Honolulu.  Through  a window  of  the  Queen’s  hospital  I saw  lumps  of 
tawny  gold  that  were  pomegranates  shaking  in  the  breeze,  another  tree 
glowed  with  dates,  and  a broad,  vividly  green  hedge  was  rich  with  scarlet  colors. 
1 was  duly  examined  by  physicians,  who  were  thorough  as  German  specialists.  I 
had,  in  the  course  of  a few  hours,  a nap,  a dish  of  broth,  a glass  of  milk,  a glass  of 
ice  water  and  an  egg  nog.  That  broth  flowed  like  balm  to  the  right  spot.  It  was 
chicken  broth.  When  I guzzled  the  egg  nog  I would  have  bet  ten  to  one  on  beat- 
ing that  fever  in  a week,  and  the  next  morning  about  4:30,  when  there  was  competi- 
tive crowing  by  a hundred  roosters,  I was  glad  of  the  concert,  for  it  gave  assurance  of 
a supply  of  chickens  to  keep  up  the  broth  and  the  eggs  that  disguised  the  whiskey. 

Two  days  later  I gave  up  the  egg  nog  because  it  was  too  good  for  me.  I knew 
1 did  not  deserve  anything  so  nice,  and  suspected  it  was  a beneficence  associated 
with  a cloud  on  my  brow.  I had  the  approval  of  the  hospital  physician  as  to  egg 
nog,  and  he  cut  off  a lot  of  dainties  sent  by  the  Honolulu  ladies,  who  must  have 
imagined  that  I was  one  of  the  heroes  of  the  war.  Their  mission  is  to  make 
heroes  happy.  I was  detained  under  the  royal  palms,  and  other  palms  that  were 
planted  by  the  missionaries,  four  weeks,  and  got  away  on  the  ship  Peru  with  Major- 
General  Otis,  and  when  we  had  gone  on  for  a fortnight,  as  far  as  from  the  Baltic 
to  Lake  Erie,  we  saw  some  rocks  that  once  were  Spanish  property. 

As  we  left  Honolulu  the  air  was  already  a-glitter  with  Star  Spangled  Banners. 
There  are  three  great  points  to  be  remembered  as  to  the  annexation  of  Hawaii: 

1.  There  is  not  to  be  a continuance  of  the  slavery  of  Asiatics  in  the  new 
possession. 

2.  “Manhood  suffrage”  is  not  to  be  extended  to  Asiatics,  often  actually  as  under 
strictly  conventional  constitutional  construction. 

3.  The  archieplago  is  to  be  a United  States  territory,  but  not  a State  of  the 

United  States.  Ex-President  Harrison  says  in  his  most  interesting  book:  “This 

Country  of  Ours,*  which  should  be  one  of  our  national  school  books: 


FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 


59 


“Out  of  the  habit  of  dealing  with  the  public  domain  has  come  the  common 
thought  that  all  territory  that  we  acquire  must,  when  sufficiently  populous,  be 
erected  into  States.  But  why  may  we  not  take  account  of  the  quality  of  the  people 
as  well  as  of  their  numbers,  if  future  acquisitions  should  make  it  proper  to  do  so?  A 
territorial  form  of  government  is  not  so  inadequate  that  it  might  not  serve  for  an 
indefinite  time.” 

It  is  to  be  remarked  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  that  they  did  not  possess  the 
original  riches  of  timber  that  distinguished  the  West  Indies,  especially  Cuba,  where 
Columbus  found  four  varieties  of  oranges.  One  of  the  features  of  Hawaiian  forestry 
is  the  Royal  Palm,  but  it  was  not  indigenous  to  the  islands.  The  oldest  of  the  stately 
royalists  is  not  of  forty  years’  growth,  and  yet  they  add  surprising  grace  to  many 
scenes,  and  each  year  will  increase  their  height  and  enhance  their  beauty. 

Hawaiians  will  be  saved  from  extinction  by  miscegenation.  There  will  be  no 
harm  done  thpse  feeble  people  by  the  shelter  of  the  flag  of  the  great  republic.  The 
old  superstitions  prevail  among  them  to  an  extent  greater  than  is  generally  under- 
stood. I had  the  privilege  of  visiting  an  American  home,  the  background  of  which 
was  a rugged  mountain  that  looked  like  a gigantic  picture  setting  forth  the  features 
of  a volcanic  world.  Far  up  the  steep  is  a cave  in  which  the  bones  of  many  of  the 
old  savages  were  deposited  in  the  days  of  civil  war  and  inhuman  sacrifices.  The 
entrance  was  long  ago — in  the  days  the  Hawaii  people  describe  as  “Before  the  Mis- 
sionaries.” The  hole  going  to  the  holy  cavern  was  closed,  but  there  is  still  pious 
watching  over  the  place  of  bones,  and  if  there  are  climbers  of  the  mountain  not  to  be 
trusted  with  the  solemn  secrets  of  ancient  times,  they  are  stalked  by  furtive  watch- 
men of  the  consecrated  bones,  and  no  doubt  the  ever  alert  sentinels  would  resist 
violation  of  the  sepulchre  in  the  rocks;  and  the  natives  are  careful  to  scatter 
their  special  knowledge  that  the  spot  is  haunted  by  supernatural  shapes  and  powers. 
The  Americans  living  in  the  midst  of  these  mysteries  are  rather  proud  of  the  ghosts 
they  never  see,  but  have  to  put  up  with  the  haunting  guard  still  ministering  to 
the  gods  that  dwelt  in  the  shrines  where  the  shadows  of  extinct  volcanoes  fall,  long 
before  the  masterful  missionaries  planted  their  first  steps  in  the  high  places. 

After  twenty-two  days’  steaming  from  San  Francisco — Queen’s  Hospital  time  not 
counted — we  were  directly  south  of  China’s  Yellow  Sea,  and  within  a few  hours  of 
sighting  the  isle  of  Luzon. 

Only  at  Honolulu,  all  the  way  from  San  Francisco,  was  there  a sail  or  a smoke  ncl 
of  a vessel  of  the  Philippine  expedition.  All  the  long  days  and  nights  the  eye  swept 
the  horizon  for  companionship,  finding  only  that  of  our  associates  in  adventure,  and 
very  little  of  them.  Even  the  birds  seem  to  shrink  from  the  heart  of  the  watery 


60 


FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 


world  spread  between  America  and  Asia;  and  the  monsters  of  the  deep  are  absent. 
One  day,  about  a thousand  miles  from  California,  a story  spread  of  a porpoise  at 
play,  but  the  lonely  creature  passed  astern  like  a bubble.  Bryant  sang  of  the  water 
fowl  that  flew  from  zone  to  zone,  guided  in  certain  flight  on  the  long  way  over  which 
our  steps  are  led  aright,  but  the  Pacific  zones  are  too  broad  for  even  winged  wan- 
derers. The  fish  that  swarm  on  our  coast  do  not  seem  to  find  home  life  or  sporting 
places  in  this  enormous  sea.  Only  the  flying  fish  disturb  the  silky  scene  and  flutter 
with  silver  wings  over  the  sparkling  laces  that  glisten  where  the  winds  blow  gently, 
and  woo  the  billows  to  cast  aside  the  terrors  of  other  climes  and  match  the  sky  of 
blue  and  gold  in  beauty;  but,  unlike  the  stars,  the  waves  do  not  differ  in  glory,  and 
the  spread  of  their  splendor,  when  they  seem  to  roll  over  a conquered  universe,  ap- 
peals to  the  imagination  with  the  solemn  suggestion  not  that  order  rules  but  that 
old  chaos  settles  in  solemn  peace.  The  days  terminate  on  this  abyss  in  marvelous 
glories.  The  glowing  spectacle  is  not  in  the  west  alone,  but  the  gorgeous  conflagra- 
tion of  the  palaces  we  build  in  dreams  spreads  all  around  the  sky.  The  scene  one 
evening  in  the  vicinity  of  the  sun  departing  in  Asia  to  light  up  the  morning  of  the 
everlasting  to-morrow  touching  America  with  magical  riches,  was  that  of  Niagara 
Falls  ten  thousand  times  magnified  and  turned  to  molten  gold,  that  burned  with 
inconceivable  luster,  while  the  south  and  north  and  east  were  illuminated  with 
strange  fires  and  soft  lights,  fading  and  merged  at  last  in  the  daffodil  sky.  Then  the 
west  became  as  a forest  of  amazing  growth,  and  the  ship  entered  its  dusky  recesses 
like  a hunter  for  game  such  as  the  world  never  saw — and  we  looked  upon  the  slow- 
fading  purple  islands  that  are  the  northern  fringes  of  the  greater  one  of  the  Philip- 
pines, and  studied  the  rather  faint  and  obscure  Southern  Cross  and  the  stately  sheen 
of  the  superb  constellation  of  the  Scorpion.  It  is  a pity  to  have  to  say  that  the 
Cross  of  the  South  is  a disappointment — has  to  be  explained  and  made  impressive  by  a 
diagram.  It  is  more  like  a kite  than  a cross;  has  a superfluous  star  at  one  corner,  and 
nosupport  at  all  of  the  idea  of  being  like  a cross  unless  it  is  worked  up  and  picked  into 
the  fancy.  The  North  Star  shines  on  the  other  side  of  the  ship,  and  the  Great 
Dipper  dips  its  pointers  after  midnight,  into  the  mass  of  darkness  that  is  the  sea 
when  the  sun  and  moon  are  gone. 

The  voyage  from  Honolulu  to  the  farther  Pacific  was  not  so  long  that  we  forgot 
the  American  send-off  we  got  in  that  Yankee  city.  The  national  airs  sounded  forth 
gloriously  and  grand.  Flags  and  hankerehiefs  fluttered  from  dense  masses  of  spec- 
tators, and  our  colors  were  radiant  above  the  roofs.  There  was,  as  usual,  a mist  on  the 
mountains,  and  over  Pearl  Harbor  glowed  the  arch  of  the  most  vivid  rainbow  ever 
seen;  and  Honolulu  is  almost  every  day  dipped  in  rainbows.  This  was  a wonder  of 


FROM  LONG  ISLAND  TO  LUZON. 


61 


splendor.  The  water  changed  from  a sparkling  green  to  a darkly  luminous  blue. 
From  the  moment  the  lofty  lines  of  the  coast — our  mountains  now— faded,  till  the 
birds  came  out  of  the  west,  the  Pacific  Ocean  justified  its  name.  The  magnificent 
monotony  of  its  stupendous  placidity'  was. not  broken  except  by  a few  hours  of 
rutiled  rollers  that  tell  of  agitations  that,  if  gigantic,  are  remote. 

The  two  thousand  and  one  hundred  miles  from  California  to  Honolulu  seemed  at 
first  to  cover  a vast  space  of  the  journey  from  our  Pacific  coast  to  the  Philippines,  but 
appeared  to  diminish  in  importance  as  we  proceeded  and  were  taught  by  the  persistent 
trade  winds  that  blew  our  way,  as  if  forever  to  waft  us  over  the  awful  ocean  whose 
perpetual  beauty  and  placidity  were  to  allure  us  to  an  amazing  abyss,  from  which 
it  was  but  imaginative  to  presume  that  we,  in  the  hands  of  infinite  forces,  should  ever 
be  of  the  travelers  that  return.  Similar  fancies  beset,  as  all  the  boys  remember — the 
crews  of  the  caravels  that  carried  Columbus  and  his  fortunes.  There  were  the 
splendors  of  tropical  skies  to  beguile  us;  the  sea  as  serene  as  the  sky  to  enchant  us! 
What  mighty  magic  was  this  that  put  a spell  upon  an  American  army,  seeking  be- 
yond the  old  outlines  of  our  history  and  dreams,  to  guide  us  on  unfamiliar  paths? 
What  was  this  awakening  in  the  soft  mornings,  to  the  thrilling  notes  of  the  bugle? 
The  clouds  were  not  as  those  we  knew  in  other  climes  and  years.  We  saw  no  penciling 
of  smoke  on  the  edges  of  the  crystal  fields  touched  up  with  dainty  ripples  too  exquisite 
to  be  waves — that  which  is  a delight  for  a moment  and  passes  but  to  come  again,  in 
forms  too  delicate  to  stay  for  a second,  save  in  those  pictures  that  in  the  universe  fill 
the  mind  with  memories  that  are  like  starlight.  The  glancing  tribes  of  flying  fish 
became  events.  We  followed  the  twentieth  parallel  of  longitude  north  of  the  equator, 
right  on,  straight  as  an  arrow’s  flight  is  the  long  run  of  the  ship — her  vapor  and  the 
bubbles  that  break  from  the  waters  vanishing,  so  that  we  were  as  trackless  when  we 
had  passed  one  breadth  after  another  of  the  globe,  as  the  lonesome  canoes  of  the  In- 
dians on  the  Great  Lakes. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


INTERVIEW  WITH  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 

The  Insurgent  Leader’s  Surroundings  and  Personal  Appearance — His  Reserves  and 
Ways  of  Talking — The  Fierce  Animosity  of  the  Filipinos  Toward  Spanish 
Priests — A Probability  of  Many  Martyrs  in  the  Isle  of  Luzon. 

Practically  all  persons  in  the  more  civilized — and  that  is  to  say  the  easily  accessi- 
ble— portions  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  with  perhaps  the  exception  of  those  leading- 
insurgents  who  would  like  to  enjoy  the  opportunities  the  Spaniards  have  had  for  the 
gratification  of  greed  and  the  indulgence  of  a policy  of  revenge,  would  be  glad  to 
see  the  Americans  remain  in  Manila,  and  also  in  as  large  a territory  as  they  could 
command. 

Spaniards  of  intelligence  are  aware  that  they  have  little  that  is  desirable  to  an- 
ticipate in  case  the  country  is  restored  to  them  along  with  their  Mausers  and  other 
firearms,  great  and  small,  according  to  the  terms  of  capitulation.  They  get  their 
guns  whether  we  go  and  leave  them  or  we  stay  and  they  go.  It  is  obvious  that 
the  insurgents  have  become  to  the  Spaniards  a source  of  anxiety  attended  with 
terrors.  The  fact  that  they  allowed  themselves  to  be  besieged  in  Manila  by  an  equal 
number  of  Filipinos  is  conclusive  that  their  remn  is  over,  and  they  are  not  passion- 
ately in  favor  of  their  own  restoration.  Their  era  of  cruel  and  corrupt  government 
is  at  an  end,  even  if  we  shall  permit  them  to  make  the  experiment.  Their  assumed 
anxiety  to  stay,  is  false  pretense.  They  will  be  hurt  if  they  do  not  go  home. 

The  exasperation  of  the  Filipinos  toward  the  church  is  a phenomenon,  and  they 
usually  state  it  with  uncandid  qualifications  of  the  inadequate  definition  of  the 
opinions  and  policy  made  by  General  Aguinaldo.  Representations  of  my  representa- 
tive  character  as  an  American  journalist,  that  gave  me  an  importance  I do  not  claim 
or  assume  to  have,  caused  the  appearance  at  my  rooms,  in  Manila,  of  insurgents  of 
high  standing  and  comprehensive  information,  and  of  large  fortunes  in  some  cases. 
I was  deeply  impressed  by  their  violent  radicalism  regarding  the  priests.  At  first 
thev  made  no  distinction,  but  said  flatly  the  priests  were  the  mischiefmakers,  the 
true  tyrants,  and  next  to  the  half-breed  Filipinos  crossed  with  Chinese — who  are 
phenomenal  accumulators  of  pecuniary  resources — tne  money-makers,  who  profited 
wrongfully  by  the  earnings  of  others. 

And  so  “the  priests  must  go,”  they  said,  and  have  no  choice  except  that  of  o.e- 


62 


INTERVIEW  WITH  GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


63 


portation  or  execution.  In  few  words,  if  they  did  not  go  away  they  would  be  killed. 
When  close  and  urgent  inquiry  was  made,  the  native  priests  were  *not  included  in 
the  application  of  this  rule.  The  Spanish  priests  were  particularly  singled  out  for 
vengeance,  and  with  them  such  others  as  had  been  “false  to  the  people”  and  treach- 
erous in  their  relations  to  political  affairs. 

The  number  to  be  exiled  or  executed  was  stated  at  3,000.  The  priests  are  pan- 
icky about  this  feeling  of  the  natives,  as  is  in  evidence  in  their  solicitude  to  get  away. 
They  at  least  have  no  hope  of  security  if  the  Spaniards  should  regain  the  mastery  of 
the  islands.  Two  hundred  and  fifty  of  them  in  vain  sought  to  get  passage  to  Hong- 
kong in  one  boat.  I was  informed  on  authority  that  was  unquestionable  that  the 
eviction  or  extermination  of  the  Spanish  priests  was  one  of  the  inevitable  results  of 
Filipine  independence — the  first  thing  to  be  done. 

It  was  with  three  objects  in  view  that  I had  an  interview  with  General  Aguin- 
aldo:  (1)  To  ascertain  exactly  as  possible  his  feeling  and  policy  toward  the 

United  States  and  its  assertion  of  military  authority;  (2)  to  inquire  about  his  position 
touching  the  priests,  (3)  and  to  urge  him  to  be  at  pains  to  be  represented  not  only  at 
Washington,  but  at  Paris.  As  regards  the  latter  point,  it  was  clear  that  the  people 
of  the  Philippines,  whatever  they  might  be,  ought  to  be  represented  before  the 
Paris  conference.  No  matter  what  their  case  was,  it  should  be  personally  presented, 
even  if  the  representatives  were  witnesses,  against  rather  than  for  themselves.  In  the 
interest  of  fair  play  and  the  general  truth  the  Philippine  population  should  put  in 
an  appearance  at  the  seat  of  the  government  of  the  United  States  for  the  informa- 
tion of  the  President,  and  at  the  scene  of  the  conference  to  testify;  and  I was  sure 
it  would  appear  in  all  cases  that  they  were  at  least  better  capable  of  governing 
themselves  than  the  Spaniards  to  govern  them.  There  could  be  no  form  of  gov- 
ernment quite  so  bad  as  that  of  the  fatal  colonial  system  of  Spain,  as  illustrated 
in  the  Philippines  and  in  the  Americas. 

General  Aguinaldo  was  neither  remote  nor  inaccessible.  His  headquarters 
were  in  an  Indian  village,  just  across  the  bay,  named  Bacoor,  and  in  less 
than  an  hour  a swift  steam  launch  carried  Major  Bell,  of  the  bureau  of  informa- 
tion, a gallant  and  most  industrious  and  energetic  officer,  and  myself,  to  water  so  shal- 
low that  we  had  to  call  canoes  to  land  in  front  of  a church  that  before  the  days  of 
Dewey  was  riddled  by  the  fire  of  Spanish  warships  because  occupied  by  insurgents. 
The  walls  and  roof  showed  many  perforations.  The  houses  of  the  village  were  of 
bamboo,  and  there  were  many  stands  along  the  hot  and  dusty  street  on  which  fruit 
was  displayed  for  sale. 


64 


INTERVIEW  WITH  GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


The  General’s  house  was  about  as  solid  a structure  as  earthquakes  permit,  its  roof 
of  red  tile  instead  of  the  usual  straw.  His  rooms  were  in  the  second  story,  reached 
by  a broad  stairway,  at  the  top  of  which  was  a landing  of  liberal  dimensions  and  an 
ante-room.  The  General  was  announced  at  home  and  engaged  in  writing  a letter 
to  General  Merritt — then  his  rather  regular  literary  exercise.  There  were  a dozen 
insurgent  soldiers  at  the  door,  and  as  many  more  at  the  foot  and  head  of  the  stairs, 
with  several  officers,  all  in  military  costume,  the  privates  carrying  Spanish  Mausers 
and  the  officers  wearing  swords.  We  were  admitted  to  an  inner  room,  with  a window 
opening  on  the  street,  and  told  the  General  would  see  us  directly.  Meanwhile 
well-dressed  ladies  of  his  family  passed  through  the  audience  room  from  the  General’s 
office  to  the  living  rooms,  giving  a pleasant  picture  of  domesticity. 

The  door  from  the  study  opened  and  a very  slender  and  short  young  man  entered 
with  a preoccupied  look  that  quickly  became  curious.  An  attendant  said  in  a low 
voice,  “General  Aguinaldo.”  He  was  unexpectedly  small — could  weigh  but  little 
over  100  pounds — dressed  in  pure  white,  and  his  modesty  of  bearing  would  have  be- 
come a maiden.  The  first  feeling  was  a sort  of  faint  compassion  that  one  with  such 
small  physical  resources  should  have  to  bear  the  weighty  responsibilities  resting 
upon  him.  Major  Bell  had  often  met  him,  and  introduced  me.  The  General  was 
gratified  that  I had  called,  and  waited  for  the  declaration  of  my  business.  He 
had  been  informed  of  my  occupation;  the  fact  that  I had  recently  been  in  Wash- 
ington and  expected  soon  to  be  there  again;  was  from  Ohio,  the  President’s  state,  a 
friend  of  his,  and  had  written  a book  on  Cuba,  a task  which  gave  me,  as  I had 
visited  the  Island  of  Cuba  during  the  war,  an  acquaintance  with  the  Spanish  system 
of  governing  colonies. 

The  interpreter  was  a man  shorter  than  the  General,  but  not  quite  so  slight. 
His  hair  was  intensely  black  and  he  wore  glasses.  He  is  an  accomplished  linguist, 
speaks  English  with  facility  and  is  acknowledged  by  the  priests  to  be  the  equal 
of  any  of  them  in  reading  and  speaking  Latin.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  while 
Aguinaldo  is  not  a man  of  high  education  he  has  as  associates  in  his  labors  for 
Philippine  independence  a considerable  number  of  scholarly  men.  It  is  related  that 
in  a recent  discussion  between  a priest  and  an  insurgent,  the  latter  stated  as  a 
ground  of  rebellion  that  the  Spaniards  did  nothing  for  the  education  of  the  people, 
and  was  asked,  “Where  did  you  get  your  education?”  He  had  been  taught  by  the 
Jesuits. 

My  first  point  in  talking  with  Aguinaldo  was  that  the  people  of  the  Philippines 
ought  to  be  strongly  represented  in  Paris,  and  of  the  reasons  briefly  presented,  the 
foremost  wee  that  they  sought  independence,  and  should  be  h^arri  kotore  Hie  com- 


BRIGADIER-GENERAL  F.  V.  GREENE, 


MASACUE.  TOWN  IN  CAVITE  BURNING  GOVERNMENT  BUILDING  IN  PAMPANGA, 


INTEKVIEW  WITH  GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


67 


mission  by  which  their  fate  would  be  declared  for  the  present,  so  far  as  it  could  be, 
by  a tribunal  whose  work  was  subject  to  revision.  The  general’s  information  was  that 
the  Paris  conference  would  be  opened  September  15,  an  error  of  a fortnight,  and  his 
impression  was  that  the  terms  regarding  the  Philippines  would  be  speedily  settled, 
so  that  there  could  not  be  time  to  send  to  Paris,  but  there  had  been  a determination 
reached  to  have  a man  in  Washington. 

It  is  to  be  taken  into  account  that  this  interview  was  before  anything  had  been 
made  known  as  to  the  mission  which  General  Merritt  undertook,  and  that  in  a few 
days  he  set  forth  to  perform,  and  that  the  terms  of  the  protocol  had  not  been 
entirely  published  in  Manila.  I told  the  general  it  was  not  possible  that  the  Phil- 
ippine problem  could  speedily  be  solved,  and  made  known  to  him  that  the  transport 
China,  which  holds  the  record  of  quick  passage  on  the  Pacific,  was  to  sail  for  San 
Francisco  in  three  days,  and  he  would  do  well  to  have  his  men  for  Washington 
and  Paris  go  on  her  if  permission  could  be  obtained,  as  there  was  no  doubt  it  could, 
and  I mentioned  the  time  required  to  reach  Washington  and  Paris — that  one  could 
be  on  a trans- Atlantic  steamer  in  New  York  six  hours  after  leaving  Washington, 
that  the  Philippine  commissioners  going  to  Paris  should  make  it  a point  to  see  the 
President  on  the  way,  and  the  whole  matter  one  of  urgency,  but  it  was  certainly  not 
too  late  to  act. 

The  General  said  it  had  been  thought  a representative  of  the  islands  and  of  the 
cause  of  the  people  should  go  to  Washington,  but  the  man  was  in  Hongkong.  He 
could,  however,  be  telegraphed,  so  that  he  could  catch  the  China  at  Nagasaka,  Japan, 
where  she  would  have  to  stop  two  days  to  take  coal.  The  Washington  commissioner 
might  go  to  Paris,  but  instructions  could  not  reach  him  before  he  left  Hongkong,  as 
it  would  not  be  desirable  to  telegraph  them.  Upon  this  I stated  if  it  suited  his  con- 
venience and  he  would  send  instructions  by  me,  I was  going  on  the  China,  and  would 
charge  myself  with  the  special  confidential  care  of  his  dispatches  and  deliver  them  to 
the  commissioner  at  the  coaling  station,  when  he  should  join  the  ship;  and  if  it  was 
the  desire  of  the  General  to  have  it  done  I would  telegraph  the  President  that  Phil- 
ippine commissioners  were  on  the  way.  These  suggestions  were  received  as  if  they 
were  agreeable,  and  esteemed  of  value. 

The  conversation  turned  at  this  point  to  the  main  question  of  the  future  govern- 
ment of  the  Philippines,  and  I inquired  what  would  be  satisfactory  to  the  General, 
and  got,  of  course,  the  answer,  “Philippine  independence.”  But  I said  after  the 
United  States  had  sent  a fleet  and  destroyed  the  Spanish  fleet  and  an  army  in 
full  possession  of  Manila  she  was  a power  that  could  not  be  ignored;  and  what  would 
be  thought  of  her  assuming  the  prerogative  of  Protector?  She  could  not  escape  re- 


68 


INTERVIEW  WITH  GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


sponsibility.  His  views  as  to  the  exact  line  of  demarkation  or  distinction  between 
the  rights  of  the  United  States  and  those  of  the  people  of  the  islands  should  be 
perfectly  clear,  for  otherwise  there  would  be  confusion  and  possibly  contention  in 
greater  matters  than  now  caused  friction. 

I endeavored  to  indicate  the  idea  that  there  might  be  an  adjustment  on  the 
line  that  the  people  of  the  Philippines  could  manage  their  local  matters  in  their  own 
way,  leaving  to  the  United  States  imperial  affairs,  the  things  international  and  all 
that  affected  them,  the  Filipinos  looking  to  the  administration  of  localities.  I had 
asked  questions  and  stated  propositions  as  if  it  were  the  universal  consent  that  General 
Aguinaldo  was  the  dictator  for  his  people  and  had  the  executive  word  to  say;  but 
when  it  came  to  drawing  the  fine  lines  of  his  relations  with  the  United  States  as 
the  embodiment  of  a revolutionary  movement,  he  became  shy  and  referred  to  those 
who  had  to  be  consulted. 

His  words  were  equivalent  to  saying  his  counselors  must,  in  all  matters  of 
moment,  be  introduced.  It  came  to  the  same  thing  at  last  as  to  his  commissioner 
or  commissioners  to  Washington  or  Paris,  one  or  both,  and  he  also  asserted  the  pur- 
pose of  having  the  congress  elected  assemble  at  a railroad  town — Moroles,  about  fifty 
miles  north  of  Manila — a movement  it  is  understood  that  is  under  the  guidance  of 
others  than  the  General,  the  bottom  fact  being  that  if  there  should  be  a Philippine 
Republic  Aguinaldo’s  place,  in  the  judgment  of  many  who  are  for  it,  would  be 
not  that  of  chief  magistrate,  but  the  head  of  the  army.  There  are  others  and  many 
of  them  of  the  opinion  that  he  is  not  a qualified  soldier.  The  congress  assembled  at 
Moroles,  and  has  made  slow  progress. 

It  may  as  well  be  remembered,  however,  that  the  distinctions  of  civil  and  military 
power  have  been  always  hard  to  observe,  in  Central  and  South  American  states, 
whose  early  Spanish  education  has  been  outgrown  gradually,  and  with  halting  and 
bloody  steps.  General  Aguinaldo,  then  engaged  in  evolving  a letter  to  General  Mer- 
ritt, has  since  issued  proclamations  that  yield  no  share  to  the  United  States  in 
the  native  government  of  the  islands.  But  there  are  two  things  definitely  known,  as 
if  decreed  in  official  papers,  and  probably  more  so;  that  the  Filipinos  of  in- 
fluential intelligence  would  be  satisfied  with  the  direction  of  local  affairs  and  gladly 
accept  the  protectorate  of  the  United  States  on  the  terms  which  the  people  of  the 
United  States  may  desire  and  dictate. 

The  greater  matter  is  that  whenever  it  is  the  fixed  policy  of  the  United  States  tc 
accept  the  full  responsibility  of  ruling  the  Philippines,  neither  Aguinaldo  nor 
any  other  man  of  the  islands  would  have  the  ability  to  molest  the  steady,  peaceable, 
beneficent  development  of  the  potentiality  of  our  system  of  justice  to  the  people,  and 


INTERVIEW  WITH. GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


69 


the  preservation  by  and  through  the  popular  will  of  the  union  of  liberty  under  the 
law,  and  order  maintained  peaceably  or  forcibly  according  to  needs. 

In  continuation  of  his  explanation  that  he  had  to  refer  matters  to  others  called 
his  counselors,  disclaiming  the  presumption  in  my  questions  of  his  personal  responsi- 
bility for  the  conduct  of  the  native  insurrection,  General  Aguinaldo  said  with  the 
greatest  deliberation  and  the  softest  emphasis  of  any  of  his  sayings,  that  the  insurgents 
were  already  suspicious  of  him  as  one  who  was  too  close  a friend  of  the  Americans, 
and  yielded  too  much  to  them,  and  that  there  was  danger  this  feeling  might  grow 
and  make  way  with  his  ability  to  do  all  that  he  would  like  in  the  way  of  keeping 
the  peace.  There  were,  he  said,  inquiries  to  the  effect:  What  had  the  insurgents  got 
for  what  they  had  done  in  the  capture  of  Manila?  Were  they  not  treated  by  the 
Americans  with  indifference? 

Major  Bell  interposed  to  say  that  the  Americans  were  in  the  Philippines  not  as 
politicians,  but  as  soldiers,  and  had  the  duty  of  preserving  order  by  military  oc- 
cupation, and  it  was  not  possible  there  could  be  maintained  a double  military  au- 
thority— two  generals  of  equal  powers  in  one  city  under  martial  law.  There  must 
he  one  master  and  no  discussion.  The  United  States  could  take  no  secondary  atti- 
tude or  position — would  treat  the  insurgents  with  great  consideration,  but  they  of 
necessity  were  exclusively  responsible  for  the  carrying  out  of  the  provisions  of  the 
capitulation. 

This  was  exactly  to  the  point,  and  the  interpreter  cut  his  rendering  of  it,  using 
but  few  words,  and  they  did  not  cheer  up  the  General  and  those  about  him.  Evi- 
dently they  want  to  know  when  and  where  they  realize.  It  had  been  noticeable 
that  the  greater  importance  Aguinaldo  attaches  to  what  he  is  saying  the  lower 
his  voice  and  the  more  certainly  he  speaks  in  a half  whisper  with  parted  lips,  show- 
in  teeth  and  tongue;  and  he  has  a surprising  faculty  of  talking  with  the  tip  of  his 
tongue,  extended  a very  little  beyond  his  lips.  There  was  something  so  reserved  as  to 
be  furtive  about  his  mouth-,  but  his  eyes  were  keen,  straight  and  steady,  showing  deci- 
sion, but  guarding  what  he  regarded  the  niceties  of  statement.  However,  his  mean- 
ing that  there  were  insurgents  who  were  finding  fault  with  him  was  not  so  much 
indicative  of  a rugged  issue  as  a confession  of  impending  inabilities. 

He  had  nothing  to  say  in  response  to  Major  Bell’s  explicit  remark  about  the  one- 
man  and  one-country  military  power,  but  the  action  of  the  insurgents  in  removing 
their  headquarters — or  their  capital,  as  they  call  it — to  a point  forty  miles  from 
Manila,  proves  that  they  have  come  to  an  understanding  that  the  soldiers  of  the 
United  States  are  not  in  the  Philippines  for  their  health  entirely,  or  purely  in  the 
interest  of  universal  benevolence.  The  Filipinos  must  know,  too,  that  they  could 


70 


INTERVIEW  WITH  GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


never  themselves  have  captured  Manila.  It  is  not  inapt  to  say  that  the  real  center 
of  the  rebellion  against  Spain  is,  as  it  has  been  for  years,  at  Hongkong. 

I reserved  what  seemed  the  most  interesting  question  of  the  interview 
with  the  Philippine  leader  to  the  last.  It  was  whether  a condition  of  pacification  was 
the  expulsion  of  the  Catholic  priests  as  a class.  This  was  presented  with  reference  to 
the  threats  that  had  been  made  in  my  hearing  that  the  priests  must  go  or  die,  for 
they  were  the  breeders  of  all  trouble.  Must  all  of  them  be  removed  in  some  way  or 
another?  If  not,  where  would  the  line  be  drawn?  The  lips  of  the  Gen- 
eral were  parted  and  his  voice  quite  low  and  gentle,  the  tongue  to  a re- 
markable degree  doing  the  talking,  as  he  replied,  plainly  picking  words 

cautiously  and  measuring  them.  The  able  and  acute  interpreter  dealt  them  out 

rapidly,  and  his  rendering  gave  token  that  the  Filipinos  have  already  had  lessons  in 
diplomacy — even  in  the  Spanish  style  of  polite  prevarication — or,  if  that  may  be  a 
shade  too  strong,  let  us  say  elusive  reservation — the  use  of  language  that  is  more 
shady  than  silence,  the  framing  of  phrases  that  may  be  interpreted  so  as  not  to  close 
but  to  continue  discussion  and  leave  wide  fields  for  controversy.  The  General  did  not 
refer  to  his  counselors,  or  the  congress  that  is  in  the  background  and  advertised  as  if 
it  were  a new  force. 

The  words  of  the  interpreter  for  him  were: 

“The  General  says  the  priests  to  whom  objection  is  made,  and  with  whom  we 
have  a mortal  quarrel,  arc  not  our  own  priests,  but  the  Spaniards’  and  those  of  the 
orders.  We  respect  the  Catholic  church.  We  respect  our  own  priests,  and,  if  they 
are  friends  of  our  country,  will  protect  them.  Our  war  is  not  upon  the  Catholic 
church,  but  upon  the  friars,  who  have  been  the  most  cruel  enemies.  We  cannot  have 
them  here.  They  must  go  away.  Let  them  go  to  Spain.  We  arc  willing  that  they 
may  go  to  their  own  country.  We  do  not  want  them.  There  is  no  peace  until 
they  go.” 

I said  my  information  was  that  the  objectionable  Orders  expressly  proscribed 
by  the  insurgents  were  the  Dominicans,  Augustines,  Franciscans  and  Recollects,  but 
that  the  Jesuits  were  not  included.  This  was  fully  recited  to  the  General,  and  with 
his  eyes  closing  and  his  mouth  whispering  close  to  the  interpreter’s  cheek  he  gave  his 
answer,  and  it  was  quickly  rendered: 

“The  Jesuits,  too,  must  go.  They  also  are  our  enemies.  We  do  not  want  them. 
They  betray.  They  can  go  to  Spain.  They  may  be  wanted  there,  not  here;  but  not 
here,  not  here.” 

The  question  whether  the  friars  must  make  choice  between  departure  and  death 
was  not  met  directly,  but  with  repetitions — that  they  might  be  at  home  in  Spain,  but 


INTERVIEW  WITH  GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


71 


could  not  be  a part  of  tlie  independent  Philippines;  and,  significantly,  they  should 
be  willing  to  go  when  wanted,  and  would  be.  Two  Catholic  priests — Americans,  not 
Spaniards — were  at  this  moment  waiting  in  the  ante  room,  to  ask  permission  for 
the  priests  Aguinaldo  has  in  prison  to  go  back  to  Spain,  and  the  General  could  not 
give  an  answer  until  he  had  consulted  his  council.  Probably  he  would  not  dare 
to  part  with  the  priests,  and  an  order  from  him  would  be  disregarded.  They  have 
many  chances  of  martyrdom,  and  some  of  them  have  already  suffered  mutilation. 

Something  had  been  said  about  my  cabling  the  President  as  to  the  Filipinos’ 
determination  to  send  a representative  to  Paris,  and  I had  tendered  my  good  offices 
in  bearing  instructions  to  a commissioner  from  Hongkong  to  meet  the  China  at 
Nagasaki,  the  Japanese  railway  station,  where  the  American  transports  coal  for  their 
long  voyage  across  the  Pacific.  But  that  matter  had  been  left  in  the  air.  General 
Aguinaldo  had  said  he  would  be  obliged  if  I would  telegraph  the  President,  and  I 
thought  if  the  decision  was  that  there  was  to  be  a Philippine  representative  hurried  to 
Paris,  it  was  something  the  President  would  be  glad  to  know.  I was  aware  there 
might  be  a difficulty  in  getting  permission  for  a special  messenger  to  go  on  the  China 
to  Japan  to  meet  the  commissioners  going  from  Hongkong,  and  I would  be  willing 
to  make  the  connection,  as  I had  offered  the  suggestion.  But  it  was  necessary  to  be 
absolutely  certain  of  General  Aguinaldo’s  decision  before  I could  cable  the  President; 
therefore,  as  I was,  of  course,  in  an  official  sense  wholly  irresponsible,  I could  com- 
municate with  him  without  an  abrasion  of  military  or  other  etiquette.  It  was  the 
more  needful,  as  it  would  be  a personal  proceeding,  that  I should  be  sure  of  the 
facts.  Therefore  I asked  the  General,  whose  time  I had  occupied  more  than  an 
hour,  whether  he  authorized  me  to  telegraph  the  President  that  a commission  was 
going  to  Paris,  and  desired  me  to  render  any  aid  in  conveying  information. 

The  General  was  troubled  about  the  word  “authorized,”  and  instead  of  saying 
so  concluded  that  I must  have  a deep  and  possibly  dark  design  and  so  he  could  not 
give  me  the  trouble  to  cable.  The  assurance  that  it  would  not  be  troublesome  did  not 
remove  the  disquiet.  I could  not  be  troubled,  either,  as  a bearer  of  dispatches.  The 
General  could  not  authorize  a telegram  without  consulting.  In  truth,  the  General 
had  not  made  up  his  mind  to  be  represented  in  Paris,  holding  that  it  would  be 
sufficient  to  have  an  envoy  extraordinary  in  Washington. 

Others,  without  full  consideration,  in  my  opinion,  concur  in  this  view.  I can  im- 
agine several  situations  at  Paris  in  which  a representative  Filipino  would  be  of  service 
to  the  United  States,  simply  by  standing  for  the  existence  of  a state  of  facts  in 
the  disputed  islands.  I dropped  the  matter  of  being  a mediator,  having  planted  the 
Paris  idea  in  the  mind  of  the  Philippine  leader,  who  is  of  the  persuasion  that  he  is 


INTERVIEW  WITH  GEN.  AGUINALDO. 


/2 

the  dictator  of  his  countrymen,  for  the  sake  of  his  country,  until  he  wishes  to  he 
evasive,  and  then  he  must  consult  others  who  share  the  burdens  of  authority,  and  told 
him  when  taking  my  leave  I would  like  to  possess  a photograph  with  his  autograph 
and  the  Philippine  flag.  In  a few  minutes  the  articles  were  in  my  hands,  and  passing 
out,  there  were  the  American  priests  in  the  ante-room,  the  next  callers  to  enter 
the  General’s  apartment.  Their  business  was  to  urge  him  to  permit  the  Catholic 
priests  held  as  prisoners  by  the  insurgents — more  than  100,  perhaps  nearly  200  in 
number — to  go  home. 

When  the  news  came  that  General  Merritt  had  been  ordered  to  Paris,  and  would 
pass  through  the  Red  sea  en  route,  taking  the  China  to  Hongkong  to  catch  a penin- 
sular and  oriental  steamer,  I telegrahed  the  fact  to  General  Aguinaldo  over  our  mili- 
tary wires  and  his  special  wire,  and  his  commissioner,  duly  advised,  became,  with 
General  Merritt’s  aid,  at  Hongkong  a passenger  on  the  China. 

He  is  well  known  to  the  world  as  Senor  Filipe  Agoncello,  who  visited  Wash- 
ington City,  saw  the  President  and  proceeded  to  Paris. 


CHAPTER  V. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 

Correspondence  With  Aguinaldo  About  It — Notes  by  Senor  Eelipe  Agoncillo — Re- 
lations Between  Admiral  Dewey  and  Senor  Aguinaldo — Terms  of  Peace 
Made  by  Spanish  Governor-General  with  Insurgents,  December,  1897 — Law 
Suit  Between  Aguinaldo  and  Artacho — Aguinaldo’s  Proclamation  of  May 
24,  1898. 

When  General  Merritt  decided  to  bold  the  China  for  a day  to  take  him  to  Hong- 
kong on  the  way  to  Paris,  I telegraphed  Aguinaldo  of  the  movements  of  the  ship, 
and  received  this  dispatch  from  the  General: 

“War  Department,  United  States  Volunteer  Signal  Corps,  sent  from  Bakoor 
August  29,  1898. — To  Mr.  Murat  Halstead,  Hotel  Oriente,  Manila:  Thankful  for 
your  announcing  China’s  departure.  We  are  to  send  a person  by  her  if  possible, 
whom  I recommend  to  you.  Being  much  obliged  for  the  favor. 

“A.  G.  ESCAMILLA,” 
“Private  Secretary  to  General  Aguinaldo.” 

On  the  same  day  the  General  sent  the  following  personal  letter: 

“Dear  Sir:  The  bearer,  Dr.  G.  Apacible,  is  the  person  wrhom  was  announced  to 
you  in  the  telegram. 

“I  am  desirous  of  sending  him  to  Hongkong,  if  possible,  by  the  China,  recom- 
mending him  at  the  same  time  to  your  care  and  good  will.  Thanking  you  for  the 
favor,  I’m  respectfully  yours,  EMILIO  AGUINALDO  Y FAMY. 

“Mr.  Murat  Halstead,  Manila. 

“Bakoor,  29th  August,  1898.” 

General  Aguinaldo  proceeded  vigorously  to  make  use  of  his  knowledge  that 
the  China  'would  go  to  Hongkong  for  General  Merritt  and  sent  his  secretary  and 
others  to  me  at  the  Hotel  Oriente,  but  they  arrived  after  I had  left  the  house. 
They  came  to  the  China  and  General  Merritt  had  not  arrived  and  did  not  appear 
until  within  a few  minutes  of  the  start.  Then  the  deputation  from  the  insurgent 
chieftain  had  an  interview  with  him,  asking  that  two  of  their  number  should  go  to 
Hongkong  on  the  China  to  express  fully  the  views  of  the  insurgent  government  to 
to  the  commissioner,  Don  Felipe  Agoncillo,  chosen  to  represent  the  Filipinos  at 
Washington  and  Paris  and  to  ask  that  he  be  allowed  to  go  to  the  United  States  on  the 
China.  When  the  committee  saw  General  Merritt  he  was  taking  leave  of  Admiral 

73 


u 


THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 


Dewey,  and  the  General,  who  had  not  heard  of  this  movement  until  that  moment — 
the  question  being  entirely  new — invited  the  opinion  of  the  Admiral,  who  said  thers 
was  “certainly  no  objection,”  and  on  the  contrary,  it  would  be  very  well  to  permit 
the  passage  of  the  deputation  to  Hongkong  and  of  the  commissioner  appointed  from 
that  city  to  Washington.  General  Merritt  at  once  in  half  a dozen  words  gave  the 
order,  and  the  journey  began. 

General  Greene,  who  reads  and  translates  Spanish  with  facility  and  whose  Span- 
ish speech  is  plain,  treated  with  marked  courtesy  the  Filipino  committee  to  Hong- 
kong and  thence  the  commissioner  and  his  secretary  from  Hongkong  to  San  Fran- 
cisco, on  the  way  to  Washington  and  Paris.  General  Greene,  while  according  dis- 
tinction to  the  representatives  of  the  insurgents,  stated  to  them  that  his  attentions 
were  personal  and  he  could  not  warrant  them  official  recognition  at  Washington 
or  anything  more  than  such  politeness  as  gentlemen  receive  from  each  other.  The 
commissioner  was  Don  Felipe  Agoncillo,  and  his  secretary,  Sixto  Lopez. 

Saturday,  September  24,  the  Salt  Lake  newspapers  contained  stories  to  the 
effect  that  the  Germans  had  entered  into  an  alliance  offensive  and  defensive  with 
the  Aguinaldo  government  and  would  furnish  equipments  for  an  army  of  150,000 
men.  We  were  on  the  Union  Pacific  Railroad  at  the  time,  and  I called 
the  attention  of  Don  Felipe  Agoncillo  to  this  remarkable  intelligence  and 
asked  him  what  he  thought  of  it.  He  said  emphatically  that  it  was  “Nothing,” 
“No  true,”  “Nothing  at  all,”  and  he  laughed  at  the  comic  idea.  There 
was  also  in  the  Salt  Lake  newspapers  a statement  that  the  Aguinaldo  ‘government’  had 
sent  to  President  McKinley  a letter  strongly  expressing  good-will  and  gratitude. 
There  did  not  seem  to  be  much  news  in  this  for  Don  Felipe,  but  it  gave  him  much 
pleasure,  and  he,  not  perhaps  diplomatically  but  enthusiastically,  pronounced  it  good. 
WHAT  AGONCILLO  APPROVED. 

The  dispatch  marked  with  his  approbation  by  the  Philippine  commissioner  was 
the  following  from  Washington,  under  date  of  September  23: 

“The  President  doubtless  would  be  glad  to  hear  any  views  these  Filipinos 
might  care  to  set  forth,  being  fresh  from  the  islands  and  thoroughly  acquainted 
with  the  wishes  of  the  insurgents.  But  it  would  be  plainly  impolitic  and  inconsistent 
for  the  President,  at  this  date  and  pending  the  conclusion  of  the  peace  confer- 
ence at  Paris,  to  allow  it  to  be  understood,  by  according  a formal  reception  to  the 
delegates,  that  he  had  thereby  recognized  the  Philippine  government  as  an  inde- 
pendent nationality.  Ilis  attitude  toward  the  Filipinos  would  be  similar  to  that 
assumed  by  him  toward  the  Cubans.  As  the  Filipinos  have  repeatedly,  by  public 
declaration,  sought  to  convey  the  impression  that  the  United  States  representatives 


THE  PIIILIITINE  MISSION. 


75 


io  Manila  have  at  some  time  during  the  progress  of  the  war  recognized  Aguinalda 
as  an  independent  ally,  and  entered  into  formal  co-operation  with  him,  it  may  be 
stated  that  the  government  at  Washington  is  unaware  that  any  such  thing  has 
happened.  Admiral  Dewey,  who  was  in  command  of  all  the  United  States  forces 
during  the  most  critical  period,  expressly  cabled  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy  that 
he  had  entered  into  no  formal  agreement  with  Aguinaldo.  If  General  Otis  followed 
his  instructions,  and  of  that  there  can  be  no  doubt,  he  also  refrained  from  entering 
into  any  entangling  agreements.  As  for  Consul-General  Wildman,  any  under- 
taking he  may  have  assumed  with  Aguinaldo  must  have  been  upon  his  own  per- 
sonal and  individual  responsibility,  and  would  be  without  formal  standing,  inas- 
much as  he  has  not  the  express  authorization  from  the  State  Department  abso- 
lutely requisite  to  negotiations  in  such  cases.  Therefore,  as  the  case  now  stands, 
the  peace  commissioners  are  free  to  deal  with  the  Philippine  problem  at  Paris 
absolutely  without  restraint  beyond  that  which  might  be  supposed  to  rise  from  a 
sense  of  moral  obligation  to  avoid  committing  the  Filipinos  again  into  the  hands 
of  their  late  rulers.” 

Senor  Agoncillo,  the  commissioner  of  the  Philippine  insurgents  at  Paris,  made, 
in  conversations  on  the  steamer  China,  when  crossing  the  Pacific  Ocean  from 
Nagasaka  to  San  Francisco,  this  statement  in  vindication  of  Aguinaldo,  and  it  is  the 
most  complete,  authoritative  and  careful  that  exists  of  the  relations  between  Admiral 
Dewey  and  the  insurgent  leader: 

BRIEF  NOTES  BY  SENOR  AGONCILLO. 

“On  the  same  day  that  Admiral  Dewey  arrived  at  Hongkong  Senor  Aguinaldo 
was  in  Singapore,  whither  he  had  gone  from  Hongkong,  and  Mr.  Pratt,  United 
States  Consul-General,  under  instructions  from  the  said  Admiral,  held  a confer- 
ence with  him,  in  which  it  was  agreed  that  Senor  Aguinaldo  and  other  revolutionary 
chiefs  in  co-operation  with  the  American  squadron  should  return  to  take  up  arms 
against  the  Spanish  government  of  the  Philippines,  the  sole  and  most  laudable  desire 
of  the  Washington  government  being  to  concede  to  the  Philippine  people  absolute 
independence  as  soon  as  the  victory  against  the  Spanish  arms  should  be  obtained. 

“By  virtue  of  this  argument  Senor  Aguinaldo  proceeded  by  the  first  steamer  to 
Hongkong  for  the  express  purpose  of  embarking  on  the  Olympia  and  going  to 
Manila;  but  this  intention  of  his  was  not  realized,  because  the  American  squadron 
left  Hongkong  the  day  previous  to  his  arrival.  Admiral  Dewey  having  received  from 
his  government  an  order  to  proceed  immediately  to  Manila.  This  is  what  Air. 
Wildman,  United  States  Consul-General  in  Hongkong,  said  to  Senor  Aguinaldo  ia 
&e  interview  which  took  place  between  them.  A few  days  after  the  Spanish 


7b* 


THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 


squadron  had  been  totally  destroyed  in  the  Bay  of  Manila  by  the  American  squad- 
ron, the  latter  obtaining  a most  .glorious  triumph,  which  deserved  the  fullest  con- 
gratulations and  praise  of  the  Philippine  public,  the  McCullough  arrived  at  Hongkong 
and  her  commander  said  to  Senor  Aguinaldo  that  Admiral  Dewey  needed  him 
(le  necesitaba)  in  Manila  and  that  he  brought  an  order  to  take  him  on  board  said 
transport,  as  well  as  other  revolutionary  chiefs  whose  number  should  be  determined 
by  Senor  Aguinaldo,  and,  in  fact,  he  and  seventeen  chiefs  went  to  Cavite  on  the 
McCullough. 

“Senor  Aguinaldo  began  his  campaign  against  the  Spaniards  the  very  day  that 
he  received  the  1,902  Mauser  guns  and  200,000  cartridgegs,  which  came  from  Hong- 
kong. The  first  victory  which  he  obtained  from  the  Spaniards  was  the  surrender 
or  capitulation  of  the  Spanish  General,  Senor  Pena,  who  was  the  Military  Governor  of 
Cavite,  had  his  headquarters  in  the  town  of  San  Francisco  de  Malabon,  and  his 
force  was  composed  of  1,500  soldiers,  including  volunteers. 

“The  revolutionary  army  in  six  days’  operations  succeeded  in  getting  possession 
of  the  Spanish  detachments  stationed  in  the  villages  of  Bakoor,  Imus,  Benakayan, 
Noveleta,  Santa ’Cruz  de  Malabon,  Rosario  and  Cavite  Viejo. 

“On  June  9 last  the  whole  province  of  Cavite  was  under  the  control  of  the  pro- 
visional revolutionary  government,  including  many  Spanish  prisoners  and  friars, 7,000 
guns,  great  quantities  of  ammunition  and  some  cannon. 

“At  the  same  time  that  the  province  of  Cavite  was  being  conquered  other  revolu- 
tionary chiefs  were  carrying  on  campaigns  in  the  Batangas,  Laguna,  Tayabas,  Nueva 
Eeiza,  Bulcan,  Batangas  Pampanga  and  Morong,  which  were  under  control  of  the  rev- 
olutionary army  by  June  12,  and  such  progress  was  made  by  the  Philippine  revolution 
in  the  few  days  of  campaign  against  the  Spaniards  that  by  August  3 last  it  held 
under  conquest  fifteen  important  provinces  of  the  island  of  Luzon;  these  provinces 
are  being  governed  by  laws  emanating  from  the  provisional  revolutionary  government 
and  in  all  of  them  perfect  order  and  complete  tranquility  reign. 

“It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  Spanish  government  has  sent  to  Senor  Aguinaldo 
various  emissaries,  who  invited  him  to  make  common  cause  with  Spain  against  the 
United  States,  promising  him  that  the  government  of  the  Spanish  nation  would  con- 
cede to  him  anything  he  might  ask  for  the  Philippine  people.  But  Senor  Aguinaldo 
has  invariably  replied  to  those  emissaries  that  it  was  too  late  and  that  he  could  not 
consider  any  proposition  from  the  Spanish  government,  however  beneficial  it  might 
be  to  the  Philippines,  because  he  had  already  pledged  his  word  of  honor  in  favor  of 
certain  representatives  of  the  government  at  Washington. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 


77 


“In  view  of  this  positive  resolution  of  Senor  Aguinaldo  there  began  forthwith  the 
intrigues  of  the  Spanish  enemy  directed  against  the  life  of  Senor  Aguinaldo. 

PEACE  CONVENTION  OF  DECEMBER,  1896. 

“Senor  Aguinaldo,  in  his  own  name  and  in  that  of  the  other  chiefs  and  subor- 
dinates, obligated  himself  to  lay  down  their  arms,  which,  according  to  an  inventory, 
were  to  be  turned  over  to  the  Spanish  government,  thus  terminating  the  revolution. 
His  Excellency  the  Governor  and  Captain-General,  Don  Fernando  Primo  de  Rivera, 
as  the  representative  of  His  Majesty’s  government  in  the  Philippines,  obligated 
himself  on  his  side  (1)  to  grant  a general  amnesty  to  all  those  under  charges  or 
sentenced  for  the  crime  of  rebellion  and  sedition  a>nd  other  crimes  of  that  category; 
(2)  to  introduce  into  the  Philippines  all  reforms  necessary  for  correcting  in  an  effec- 
tive and  absolute  manner  the  evils  which  for  so  many  years  had  oppressed  the  country, 
in  political  and  administrative  affairs;  and  (3)  an  indemnity  of  $800,000,  payable  at 
the  following  dates:  A letter  of  credit  of  the  Spanish  Filipine  Bank  for  $400,000 
against  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank  in  Hongkong  was  to  be  delivered  to  Senor 
Aguinaldo  on  the  same  day  that  he  should  leave  Biak-va-Bato,  where  he  had  estab- 
lished his  headquarters,  and  should  embark  on  the  steamer  furnished  by  the  Spanish 
government  (this  letter  of  credit  was  in  point  of  fact  delivered);  $200,000  was  to  be 
paid  to  the  said  Senor'  Aguinaldo  as  soon  as  the  revolutionary  general,  Senor  Ricarte, 
should  receive  his  telegram  ordering  him  to  give  up  his  arms,  with  an  inventory 
thereof,  to  the  commissioner  designated  by  his  excellency  the  Governor  and  Captain- 
General,  Don  Fernando  Primo  de  Rivera;  and  the  remaining  $200,000  should  be 
due  and  payable  when  the  peace  should  be  a fact,  and  it  should  be  understood  that 
peace  was  a fact  when  the  Te  Deum  should  be  sung  by  order  of  his  excellency  the 
Governor  and  Captain-General  of  the  Philippines. 

“Senor  Aguinaldo  complied  in  every  respect,  so  far  as  he  was  concerned,  with  the 
peace  agreement.  But  the  Spanish  government  did  not  observe  a similar  conduct, 
and  this  has  been  deplored  and  still  is  deeply  deplored  by  the  Philippine  people. 
The  general  amnesty  which  was  promised  has  remained  completely  a dead  letter. 
Many  Filipinos  are  still  to  be  found  in  Fernando  Po  and  in  various  military  prisons 
in  Spain  suffering  the  grievous  consequences  of  the  punishment  inflicted  upon  them 
unjustly  and  the  inclemencies  of  the  climate  to  which  they  are  not  accustomed. 
Some  of  these  unfortunates,  who  succeeded  in  getting  out  of  those  prisons  and  that 
exile,  are  living  in  beggary  in  Spain,  without  the  government  furnishing  them  the 
necessary  means  to  enable  them  to  return  to  the  Philippines. 

“In  vain  has  the  Philippine  public  waited  for  the  reforms  also  promised.  After 
the  celebration  of  the  compact  of  June,  and  the  disposition  of  the  arms  of  the  revolu- 


78 


THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 


tionists  the  Governor-General  again  began  to  inflict  on  the  defenseless  natives  of  the 
country  arbitrary  arrest  and  execution  without  judicial  proceedings  solely  on  the 
ground  that  they  were  merely  suspected  of  being  secessionists;  proceedings  which 
indisputably  do  not  conform  to  the  law  and  Christian  sentiments. 

“In  the  matter  of  reforms  the  religious  orders  again  began  to  obtain  from  the 
Spanish  government  their  former  and  absolute  power.  Thus  Spain  pays  so  dearly 
for  her  fatal  errors  in  her  own  destiny! 

“In  exchange  for  the  loftiness  of  mind  with  which  Senor  Aguinaldo  has  rigidly 
carried  out  the  terms  of  the  peace  agreement,  General  Primo  de  Eivera  had  the 
cynicism  to  state  in  the  congress  of  his  nation  that  he  had  promised  no  reform  to 
Senor  Aguinaldo  and  his  army,  but  that  he  had  only  given  them  a piece  of  bread 
in  order  that  they  might  be  able  to  maintain  themselves  abroad.  This  was  re- 
echoed in  the  foreign  press,  and  Senor  Aguinaldo  was  accused  in  the  Spanish  press 
of  having  allowed  himself  to  be  bought  with  a handful  of  gold,  selling  out  his  country 
at  the  same  time.  There  were  published,  moreover,  in  those  Spanish  periodicals  car- 
icatures of  Senor  Aguinaldo  which  profoundly  wounded  his  honor  and  his  patriotism. 

“Senor  Aguinaldo  and  the  other  revolutionists  who  reside  in  Hongkong  agreed 
not  to  take  out  one  cent  of  the  $400,000  deposited  in  the  chartered  bank  and  the 
Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank,  the  only  amount  which  Senor  Aguiualdo  received 
from  the  Spanish  government  on  account  of  the  stipulated  indemnity,  but  to  use  it 
for  arms  in  order  to  carry  on  another  revolution  in  the  Philippines,  in  case  the  Span- 
ish government  should  fail  to  carry  out  the  peace  agreement,  at  least  in  so  far  as  it 
refers  to  general  amnesty  and  reforms.  All  the  above  named  revolutionists,  Senor 
Aguinaldo  setting  the  example,  resolved  to  deny  themselves  every  kind  of  comfort 
during  their  stay  in  Hongkong,  living  in  the  most  modest  style,  for  the  purpose  of 
preventing  a reduction  by  one  single  cent  of  the  above  named  sum  of  $400,000, 
which  they  set  aside  exclusively  for  the  benefit  of  their  country. 

LAW  SUIT  BETWEEN  DON  J.  AETACHO  AND  DON  E.  AGUINALDO. 

“Senor  Artacho,  induced  by  the  father  solicitor  of  the  Dominicans  and  the  Con- 
sul-General of  Spain,  filed  in  the  courts  of  that  colony  a summons  against  Don  E. 
Aguinaldo,  asking  for  a division  of  the  above-mentioned  $400,000  between  those 
revolutionary  chiefs  who  resided  in  Hongkong.  Artacho  and  three  others,  who 
joined  the  revolution  in  its  last  days  and  rendered  little  service  to  it,  were  the  only 
ones  who  desired  a division  of  this  money;  whereas  forty-seven  revolutionaries,  many 
of  whom  were  most  distinguished  chiefs,  were  opposed  to  it,  supporting  the  resolu- 
tion which  Senor  Aguinaldo  had  previously  taken  in  regard  to  it.  Senor  Aguinaldo, 
in  order  to  avoid  all  scandal,  did  everything  possible  to  avoid  appearing  in  court 


THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 


79 


answering  the  summons  of  Artacho,  who,  realizing  that  his  conduct  had  made  himself 
hated  by  all  Filipinos,  agreed  in  a friendly  arrangement  to  withdraw  his  suit,  receiv- 
ing in  exchange  $5,000;  in  this  way  were  frustrated  the  intrigues  of  the  solicitor  of 
the  Dominican  order  and  of  the  Spanish  Consul,  who  endeavored  at  any  cost  to 
destroy  the  $400,000  by  dividing  it  up. 

“'Artacho  is  now  on  trial  before  a judicial  court  on  charges  preferred  by  various 
revolutionists  for  offenses  which  can  be  proved;  he  has  no  influence  in  the  revolu- 
tionary party.” 

PROCLAMATION  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 

MAY  24TH,  1898. 

Filipinos: 

The  Great  Nation  North  America,  cradle  of  true  liberty  and  friendly  on  that 
account  to  the  liberty  of  our  people,  oppressed  and  subjugated  by  the  tyranny  and 
despotism  of  those  who  have  governed  us,  has  come  to  manifest  even  here  a pro- 
tection which  is  decisive,  as  well  as  disinterested,  towards  us  considering  us  endowed 
with  sufficient  civilization  to  govern  by  ourselves  this  our  unhappy  land.  To  main- 
tain this  so  lofty  idea,  which  we  deserve  from  the  now  very  powerful  Nation  North 
America,  it  is  our  duty  to  detest  all  those  acts  which  belie  such  an  idea,  as  pillage, 
robbery  and  every  class  of  injury  to  persons  as  well  as  to  things.  With  a view  to 
avoiding  international  conflicts  during  the  period  of  our  campaign,  I order  as  follows: 

Article  I.  The  lives  and  property  of  all  foreigners,  including  Chinese  and  all 
Spaniards  who  either  directly  or  indirectly  have  joined  in  taking  arms  against  us  are 
to  be  respected. 

Article  II.  The  lives  and  property  of  those  who  lay  down  their  arms  are  also 
to  be  respected. 

Article  III.  Also  are  to  be  respected  all  sanitary  establishments  and  ambulances, 
and  likewise  the  persons  and  things  which  may  be  found  either  in  one  or  the 
other,  including  the  assistants  in  this  service,  unless  they  show  hostility. 

Article  IY.  Those  who  disobey  what  is  prescribed  in  the  preceding  articles  will 
be  tried  by  summary  court  and  put  to  death,  if  such  disobedience  shall  cause  assas- 
sination, fire,  robbery  and  violation. 

Given  at  Cavite,  the  24th  of  May,  1898. 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

It  is  to  be  remarked  of  this  semi-official  statement  that  Admiral  Dewey  did  not 
make  any  promises  he  could  not  fulfill  to  Aguinaldo;  did  not  assume  to  speak  for 
the  President  or  the  army  of  the  United  States,  but  gave  guns  and  ammunition  to 
the  insurgents,  who  aided  him  in  maintaining  a foothold  on  the  shore.  The  insur- 


80 


THE  PHILIPPINE  MISSION. 


gents  did  not  win  Dewey’s  victory,  but  aided  to  improve  it.  Without  the  aid  of  the 
American  army  Manila  might  have  been  destroyed,  but  could  not  have  been  captured 
intact.  General  Merritt  settled  the  question  of  the  status  of  the  insurgent  army  with, 
respect  to  the  capture  of  Manila  in  a summary  and  sound  way  when  he  said  there 
could  be  but  one  military  authority  in  a military  government,  and  as  the  command- 
ing general  of  the  Philippine  expedition  of  the  United  States,  he  was  that  authority. 


OFFICIAL  MAP  OF  THE  ISLE  OF  LUZON,  PREPARED  BY  THE  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 


ADJUTANT  GENERALS  OFFICE . MILITARY  INFORMATION  DIVISION. 


RtfUK 


OFFICIAL  MAP  BY  THE  WAR  DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  SEAT  OF  WAR  IN  THE  PHILIPPI 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


85 


Article  Y.  The  Chiefs  of  each  town  after  consulting  the  opinion  of  their  re- 
spective assemblies,  will  meet  and  elect  by  majority  of  votes  the  Chief  of  the  Prov- 
ince and  three  councilors  for  the  three  branches  above  mentioned. 

The  Chief  of  the  Province  as  President,  the  Chief  of  the  town  which  is  the 
capital  of  the  Province,  as  Vice  President,  and  the  above  named  councilors  will 
constitute  the  Provincial  Council,  which  will  supervise  the  carrying  out  of  the 
instructions  of  this  government  in  the  territory  of  the  Province,  and  for  the  general 
interest  of  the  Province,  and  will  propose  to  this  government  the  measures  which 
should  be  adopted  for  the  general  welfare. 

Article  VI.  The  above  named  chiefs  will  also  elect  by  majority  of  votes  three 
representatives  for  each  one  of  the  Provinces  of  Manila  and  Cavite,  two  for  each 
one  of  the  Provinces  classified  as  terminal  in  Spanish  legislation,  and  one  for  each 
one  of  the  other  Provinces  and  Politico-Military  commands  of  the  Philippine  Archi- 
pelago. 

The  above  named  representatives  will  guard  the  general  interests  of  the  Archi- 
pelago and  the  particular  interests  of  their  respective  Provinces,  and  will  constitute 
the  Revolutionary  Congress,  which  will  propose  to  this  government  the  measures  con- 
cerning the  preservation  of  internal  order,  and  external  security  of  these  islands, 
and  will  be  heard  by  this  government  on  all  questions  of  grave  importance.  The  de- 
cision of  which  will  admit  of  delay  or  adjournment. 

Article  VII.  Persons  elected  to  any  office  whatsoever  in  the  form  prescribed 
in  the  preceding  article  can  not  perform  the  functions  of  the  same  without  the  previ- 
ous confirmation  by  this  government,  which  will  give  it  in  accordance  with  the  cer- 
tificates of  election. 

Representatives  will  establish  their  identity  by  exhibiting  the  above  named 
certificates. 

Article  VIII.  The  Military  Chiefs  named  by  this  government  in  each  Province 
will  not  intervene  in  the  government  and  administration  of  the  Province,  but  will 
confine  themselves  to  requesting  of  the  Chiefs  of  Provinces  and  towns  the  aid  which 
may  be  necessary  both  in  men  and  resources,  which  are  not  to  be  refused  in  case  of 
actual  necessity. 

Nevertheless,  when  the  Province  is  threatened  or  occupied  by  the  enemy  in 
whole  or  in  part,  the  military  chief  of  highest  rank  therein  may  assume  powers  of 
the  Chief  of  the  Province,  until  the  danger  has  disappeared. 

Article  IX.  The  government  will  name  for  each  Province  a commissioner, 
specially  charged  with  establishing  therein  the  organization  prescribed  in  this  decree, 
in  accordance  with  instructions  which  this  government  will  communicate  to  him. 


86 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


Those  military  chiefs  who  liberate  the  towns  from  the  Spanish  domination  are  com- 
missioners by  virtue  of  their  office. 

The  above  named  commissioners  will  preside  over  the  first  meetings  held  in 
each  town  and  in  each  Province. 

Article  X.  As  soon  as  the  organization  provided  in  the  decree  has  been  estab- 
lished all  previous  appointments  to  any  civil  office,  whatsoever,  no  matter  what  their 
origin  or  source,  shall  be  null  and  void,  and  all  instructions  in  conflict  with  the 
foregoing  are  hereby  annulled. 

Given  at  Cavite,  the  18th  of  June,  1898. 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

No.  2. 

For  the  execution  and  proper  carrying  out  of  what  is  prescribed  in  the  decree 
of  this  government  concerning  the  management  of  the  Provinces  and  towns  of  the 
Philippine  Archipelago,  I decree  as  follows: 

INSTRUCTIONS. 

Concerning  the  Management  of  the  Provinces  and  towns. 

(Then  follow  45  rules  concerning  the  elections,  formation  of  the  police,  the 
courts  and  the  levying  and  collection  of  taxes.) 

Given  at  Cavite,  20th  of  June,  1898. 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

No.  3. 

DON  EMILIO  AGUINALDO  Y FAMY, 

President  of  the  Revolutionary  Government  of  the  Philippines,  and  General  in  Chief 

of  Its  Army. 

This  government  desiring  to  demonstrate  to  the  Philippine  people  that  one  of 
its  ends  is  to  combat  with  a firm  hand  the  inveterate  vices  of  the  Spanish  administra- 
tion, substituting  for  personal  luxury  and  that  pompous  ostentation  which  have 
made  it  a mere  matter  of  routine,  cumbrous  and  slow  in  its  movements,  another 
administration  more  modest,  simple  and  prompt  in  performing  the  public  service:  I 
decree  as  follows: 


CHAPTER  I. 

OF  THE  REVOLUTIONARY  GOVERNMENT. 

Article  I.  The  dictatorial  government  will  be  entitled  hereafter  the  revolu- 
tionary government,  whose  object,  is  to  struggle  for  the  independence  of  the  Phil- 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


87 


ippines  until  all  nations,  including  the  Spanish,  shall  expressly  recognize  it,  and 
to  prepare  the  country  so  that  a true  republic  may  be  established. 

The  dictator  will  be  entitled  hereafter  President  of  the  Revolutionary  Govern- 
ment. 

Article  II.  Four  secretaryships  of  government  are  created;  one  of  foreign  af- 
fairs, navy  and  commerce;  another  of  war  and  public  works;  another  of  police  and 
internal  order,  justice,  education  and  hygiene;  and  another  of  finance,  agriculture, 
and  manufacturing  industry. 

The  government  may  increase  this  number  of  secretaryships,  when  it  shall  find 
in  practice  that  this  distribution  is  not  sufficient  for  the  multiplied  and  complicated 
necessities  of  the  public  service. 

Article  III.  Each  secretaryship  shall  aid  the  President  in  the  administration  of 
questions  concerning  the  different  branches  which  it  comprises. 

At  the  head  of  each  one  shall  be  a secretary  who  shall  not  be  responsible  for 
the  decrees  of  the  Presidency,  but  shall  sign  them  with  the  President,  to  give  them 
authority. 

But  if  it  shall  appear  that  the  decree  has  been  promulgated  on  the  proposition 
of  the  secretary  of  the  department,  the  latter  shall  be  responsible  conjointly  with  the 
President. 

Article  IY.  The  secretaryship  of  foreign  affairs  will  be  divided  into  three 
bureaus,  one  of  diplomacjq  another  of  navy  and  another  of  commerce. 

The  first  bureau  will  study  and  dispose  of  all  questions  pertaining  to  the  man- 
agement of  diplomatic  negotiations  with  other  powers  and  the  correspondence  of 
this  government  with  them.  The  second  will  study  all  questions  relating  to  the 
formation  and  organization  of  our  navy  and  the  fitting  out  of  such  expeditions  as  the 
necessities  of  the  revolution  may  require;  and  the  third  will  have  charge  of  every- 
thing relating  to  internal  and  external  commerce,  and  the  preliminary  work  which 
may  be  necessary  for  making  treaties  of  commerce  with  other  nations. 

Article  Y.  The  secretaryship  of  war  will  b'e  divided  into  two  bureaus;  one  of 
war,  properly  speaking,  and  the  other  of  public  works. 

The  first  bureau  will  be  subdivided  into  four  sections:  One  of  campaigns,  an- 
other of  military  justice,  another  of  military  administration,  and  another  of  mili- 
tary health. 

The  section  of  campaigns  will  have  charge  of  the  appointment  and  formation 
of  the  certificates  of  enlistment  and  service  of  all  who  serve  in  the  revolutionary 
militia;  of  the  direction  of  campaigns;  the  preparation  of  plans,  works  of  fortifi- 
cation, and  preparing  reports  of  battles;  of  the  study  of  military  tactics  for  th® 


88 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


army  and  the  organization  of  the  general  staff,  artillery  and  cavalry;  and  finally, 
of  the  determination  of  all  other  questions  concerning  the  business  of  campaigns  and 
military  operations. 

The  section  of  military  justice  will  have  charge  of  everything  relating  to  courts 
of  war  and  military  tribunals;  the  appointment  of  judges  and  counsel  and  the  de- 
termination of  all  questions  of  military  justice;  the  section  of  military  administration 
will  be  charged  with  the  furnishing  of  food  and  other  supplies  necessary  for  the  use  of 
the  army;  and  the  section  of  military  health  will  have  charge  of  everything  relating  to 
the  hygiene  and  healthfulness  of  the  militia. 

Article  VI.  The  other  secretaryships  will  be  divided  into  such  bureaus  as 
their  branches  may  require  and  each  bureau  will  be  subdivided  into  sections  accord- 
ing to  the  nature  and  importance  of  the  work  it  has  to  do. 

Article  VII.  The  secretary  will  inspect  and  supervise  all  the  work  of  his  sec- 
retaryship and  will  determine  all  questions  with  the  President  of  the  government. 

At  the  head  of  each  bureau  will  be  a director  and  in  each  section  an  officer  pro- 
vided with  such  number  of  assistants  as  may  be  specified. 

Article  VIII.  The  President  will  appoint  the  secretaries  of  his  own  free  choice 
and  in  concert  with  them  will  appoint  all  the  subordinate  officials  of  each  secretary- 
ship. 

In  order  that  in  the  choice  of  persons  it  may  be  possible  to  avoid  favoritism,  it 
must  be  fully  understood  that  the  good  name  of  the  country  and  the  triumph  of 
the  revolution  require  the  services  of  persons  truly  capable. 

Article  IX.  The  secretaries  may  be  present  at  the  revolutionary  congress  in 
order  that  they  may  make  any  motion  in  the  name  of  the  President  or  may  be  in- 
terpolated publicly  by  any  one  of  the  representatives;  but  when  the  question  which 
is  the  object  of  the  motion  shall  be  put  to  vote  or  after  the  interpolation  is  ended 
they  shall  leave  and  shall,  not  take  part  in  the  vote. 

Article  X.  The  President  of  the  government  is  the  personification  of  the 
Philippine  people,  and  in  accordance  with  this  idea  it  shall  not  be  possible  to  hold 
him  responsible  while  he  fills  the  office. 

His  term  of  office  shall  last  until  the  revolution  triumphs,  unless,  under  ex- 
traordinary circumstances,  he  shall  feel  obliged  to  offer  his  resignation  to'  congress, 
in  which  case  congress  will  elect  whomsoever  it  considers  most  fit. 

O 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


89 


CHAPTER  II. 

OF  THE  REVOLUTIONARY  CONGRESS. 

Article  XI.  The  Revolutionary  Congress  is  the  body  of  representatives  of  the 
Provinces  of  the  Philippine  Archipelago  elected  in  the  manner  prescribed  in  the 
decrees  of  the  18th,  present  month. 

Nevertheless,  if  any  Province  shall  not  be  able  as  yet  to  elect  representatives  be- 
cause the  greater  part  of  its  towns  shall  have  not  yet  succeeded  in  liberating  them- 
selves from  Spanish  domination,  the  government  shall  have  power  to  appoint  as  pro- 
visional representatives  for  this  Province  those  persons  who  are  most  distinguished  for 
high  character  and  social  position,  in  such  numbers  as  are  prescribed  by  the  above 
named  decree,  provided  always  that  they  are  natives  of  the  Province  which  they 
represent  or  have  resided  therein  for  a long  time. 

Article  XII.  The  representatives  having  met  in  the  town  which  is  the  seat 
of  the  revolutionary  government,  and  in  the  building  -which  may  be  designated, 
will  proceed  to  its  preliminary  labors,  designating  by  plurality  of  votes  a commission 
composed  of  five  individuals  charged  with  examining  documents  accrediting  each 
representative,  and  another  commission,  composed  of  three  individuals,  who  will 
examine  the  documents  which  the  five  of  the  former  commission  exhibit. 

Article  XIII.  Gn  the  following  day  the  above  named  representatives  will  meet 
again  and  the  two  commissions  will  read  their  respective  reports  concerning  the 
legality  of  the  said  documents,  deciding  by  an  absolute  majority  of  votes  on  the 
character  of  those  which  appear  doubtful. 

This  business  completed,  it  will  proceed  to  designate,  also  by  absolute  majority, 
a President,  a Vice  President,  and  two  secretaries,  who  shall  be  chosen  from  among 
the  representatives,  whereupon  the  congress  shall  be  considered  organized,  and  shall 
notify  the  government  of  the  result  of  the  election. 

Article  XIV.  The  place  where  congress  deliberates  is  sacred  and  inviolable,  and 
no  armed  force  shall  enter  therein  unless  the  President  thereof  shall  ask  therefor  in 
order  to  establish  internal  order  disturbed  by  those  who  can  neither  honor  them- 
selves nor  its  august  functions. 

Article  XV.  The  powers  of  congress  are:  To  watch  over  the  general  interest 
of  the  Philippine  people,  and  the  carrying  out  of  the  revolutionary  laws;  to  discuss 
and  vote  upon  said  laws;  to  discuss  and  approve  prior  to  their  ratification  treaties  and 
loans;  to  examine  and  approve  the  accounts  presented  annually  by  the  secretary 
of  finance,  as  well  as  extraordinary  and  other  taxes  which  may  hereafter  be  im- 
posed. 


90 


PROCLAMATIONS  OP  GENERAL  AGTTINALDO. 


Article  XYI.  Congress  shall  also  be  consulted  in  all  grave  and  important  ques- 
tions, the  determination  of  which  admits  of  delay  or  adjournment;  but  the  President 
of  the  government  shall  have  power  to  decide  questions  of  urgent  character,  hut  in 
that  case  he  shall  give  account  by  message  to  said  body  of  the  decision  which  he 
has  adopted. 

Article  XVII.  Every  representative  shall  have  power  to  present  to  congress 
any  project  of  a law,  and  every  secretary  on  the  order  of  the  President  of  the  gov- 
ernment shall  have  similar  power. 

Article  XVIII.  The  sessions  of  congress  shall  he  public,  and  only  in  cases 
which  require  reserve  shall  it  have  power  to  hold  a secret  session. 

Article  XIX.  In  the  order  of  its  deliberations,  as  well  as  in  the  internal  gov- 
ernment of  the  body  the  instructions  which  shall  be  formulated  by  the  congress 
itself  shall  be  observed.  The  President  shall  direct  the  deliberations  and  shall  not 
vote  except  in  case  of  a tie,  when  he  shall  have  the  casting  vote. 

Article  XX.  The  President  of  the  government  shall  not  have  power  to  in- 
terrupt in  any  manner  the  meeting  of  congress,  nor  embarrass  its  sessions. 

Article  XXI.  The  congress  shall  designate  a permanent  commission  of  justice 
which  shall  be  presided  over  by  the  auxiliary  vice  president  or  each  of  the  secre- 
taries, and  shall  be  composed  of  those  persons  and  seven  members  elected  by  plurality 
of  votes  from  among  the  representatives. 

This  commission  shall  judge  on  appeal  the  criminal  cases  tried  by  the  Provin- 
cial courts;  and  shall  take  cognizance  of  and  have  original  jurisdiction  in  all  cases 
against  the  secretaries  of  the  government,  the  chiefs  of  Provinces  and  towns,  and  the 
Provincial  judges. 

Article  XXII.  In  the  office  of  the  secretary  of  congress  shall  he  kept  a book 
of  honor,  wherein  shall  be  recorded  special  services  rendered  to  the  country,  and 
considered  as  such  by  said  body.  Every  Philippino,  whether  in  the  military  or  civil 
service,  may  petition  congress  for  notation  in  said  book,  presenting  duly  accredited 
documents  describing  the  service  rendered  by  him  on  behalf  of  the  country,  since 
the  beginning  of  the  present  revolution.  For  extraordinary  services,  which  may  be 
rendered  hereafter,  the  government  will  propose  said  notation  accompanying  the 
proposal  with  the  necessary  documents  justifying  it. 

Article  XXIII.  The  congress  will  also  grant,  on  the  proposal  of  the  government 
rewards  in  money,  which  can  be  given  only  once  to  the  families  of  those  who  were 
victims  of  their  duty  and  patriotism,  as  a result  of  extraordinary  acts  of  heroism. 

Article  XXIV.  The  acts  of  congress  shall  not  take  effect  until  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  government  orders  their  fulfillment  and  execution.  Whenever  the  said 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


91 


President  shall  be  of  the  opinion  that  any  act  is  unsuitable  or  against  public  policy, 
or  pernicious,  he  shall  explain  to  congress  the  reasons  against  its  execution,  and 
if  the  latter  shall  insist  on  its  passage  the  President  shall  have  power  to  oppose 
his  veto  under  his  most  rigid  responsibility. 

CHAPTER  III. 

OF  MILITARY  COURTS  AND  JUSTICE. 

Article  XXY.  When  the  chiefs  of  military  detachments  have  notice  that  any 
soldier  has  committed  or  has  perpetrated  any  act  of  those  commonly  con- 
sidered as  military  crimes,  he  shall  bring  it  to  the  knowledge  of  the  commandant  of 
the  Zone,  who  shall  appoint  a judge  and  a secretary,  who  shall  begin  suit  in  the  form 
prescribed  in  the  instructions  dated  the  20th  of  the  present  month.  If  the  accused 
shall  be  of  the  grade  of  lieutenant  or  higher,  the  said  commandant  shall  himself  be 
the  judge,  and  if  the  latter  shall  be  the  accused,  the  senior  commandant  of  the 
Province  shall  name  as  judge  an  officer  who  holds  a higher  grade,  unless  the  same 
senior  commandant  shall  himself  have  brought  the  suit.  The  judge  shall  always  be- 
long to  the  class  of  chiefs. 

Article  XXVI.  On  the  conclusion  of  the  preliminary  hearing,  the  senior  com- 
mandant shall  designate  three  officers  of  equal  or  higher  rank  to  the  judge  and  the 
military  court  shall  consist  of  the  said  officers,  the  judge,  the  councilor  and  the 
President.  The  latter  shall  be  the  commandant  of  the  Zone,  if  the  accused  be  of  the 
grade  of  sergeant  or  less,  and  the  senior  commandant  if  he  be  of  the  grade  of  lieu- 
tenant or  higher.  This  court  shall  conduct  the  trial  in  the  form  customary  in  the 
Provincial  courts,  but  the  judgment  shall  be  appealable  to  the  higher  courts  of  war. 

Article  XXVII.  The  superior  court  shall  be  composed  of  six  members,  who 
shall  hold  rank  not  less  than  brigadier  generals,  and  the  judge  advocate.  If  the  num- 
ber of  generals  present  in  the  capitol  of  the  revolutionary  government  shall  not  be 
sufficient  the  deficiency  shall  be  supplied  by  representatives  designated  and  commis- 
sioned by  congress.  The  president  of  the  court  shall  be  the  general  having  the  high- 
est rank  of  all,  and  should  there  he  more  than  one  having  equal  rank,  the  president 
shall  be  elected  from  among  them  by  absolute  majority  of  votes. 

Article  XXVIII.  The  superior  court  shall  have  jurisdiction  in  all  cases  affect- 
ing the  higher  commandants,  the  commandants  of  Zones  and  all  officers  of  the  rank 
of  major  or  higher. 

Article  XXIX.  Commit  Military  Crimes:  1st.  Those  who  fail  to  grant  the 


92 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


necessary  protection  to  foreigners,  both  in  their  persons  and  property,  and  those 
who  similarly  fail  to  afford  protection  to  hospitals  and  ambulances,  including  persons 
and  effects  which  may  be  found  in  possession  of  one  or  the  other,  and  those  engaged 
in  the  service  of  the  same,  provided  always  they  commit  no  hostile  act.  2d.  Those  who 
fail  in  the  respect  due  tc  the  lives,  money  and  jewels  of  enemies  who  lay  down  their 
arms,  and  of  prisoners  of  war.  3d.  Filipinos  who  place  themselves  in  the  service  of 
the  enemy  acting  as  spies  or  disclosing  to  them  secrets  of  war  and  the  plans  of 
revolutionary  positions  and  fortifications,  and  those  who  present  themselves  under 
a flag  of  truce  without  justifying  properly  their  office  and  their  personality;  and  4th, 
those  who  fail  to  recognize  a flag  of  truce  duly  accredited  in  the  forms  prescribed 
by  international  law. 

Will  Commit  also  Military  Crimes:  1st.  Those  who  conspire  against  the  unity  of 
the  revolutionists,  provoking  rivalry  between  chiefs  and  forming  divisions  and  armed 
bands.  2d.  Those  who  solicit  contributions  without  authority  of  the  government 
and  misappropriate  the  public  funds.  3d.  Those  who  desert  to  the  enemy,  or  are 
guilty  of  cowardice  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  being  armed;  and,  4th,  those  who 
seize  the  property  of  any  person  who  has  done  no  wrong  to  the  revolution,  violate 
women  and  assassinate  or  inflict  serious  wounds  on  unarmed  persons  and  commit 
robberies  or  arson. 

Article  XXX.  Those  who  commit  the  crimes  enumerated  will  be  considered 
as  declared  enemies  of  the  revolution,  and  will  incur  the  penalties  prescribed  in 
the  Spanish  penal  code,  and  in  the  highest  grade. 

If  the  crime  shall  not  be  found  in  the  said  code,  the  offender  shall  be  imprisoned 
until  the  revolution  triumphs  unless  the  result  of  this  shall  be  an  irreparable  dam- 
age, which  in  the  judgment  of  the  tribunal  shall  be  a sufficient  cause  for  imposing 
the  penalty  of  death. 

ADDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 

The  government  will  establish  abroad  a revolutionary  committee,  composed  of  a 
number  not  yet  determined  of  persons  most  competent  in  the  Philippine  Archipelago. 
This  committee  will  be  divided  into  three  delegations;  one  of  diplomacy,  another  of 
the  navy  and  another  of  the  army. 

The  delegation  of  diplomacy  will  manage  and  conduct  negotiations  with  foreign 
cabinets  with  a view  to  the  recognition  of  the  belligerency  and  independence  of  the 
Philippines. 

The  delegation  of  the  navy  will  be  charged  with  studying  and  organizing  the 
Philippine  navy  and  preparing  the  expenditures  which  the  necessities  of  the  revolu- 
tion may  require. 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


93 


The  delegation  of  the  army  will  study  military  tactics  and  the  best  form  of  or- 
ganization for  the  general  staff,  artillery  and  engineers  and  whatever  else  may  be 
necessary  in  order  to  fit  out  the  Philippine  Army  under  the  conditions  required  by 
modern  progress. 

Article  XXXII.  The  government  will  issue  the  necessary  instructions  for  the 
proper  execution  of  the  present  decree. 

Article  XXXIII.  All  decrees  of  the  dictatorial  government  in  conflict  with 
the  foregoing  are  hereby  annulled. 

Given  at  Cavite,  the  23d  of  June,  1898. 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

INSTRUCTIONS. 

Desiring  to  bring  about  a proper  execution  of  the  decree  dated  the  23d  of  the 
present  month,  and  to  jirovide  that  the  administrative  measures  shall  not 
result  hereafter  in  the  paralysis  of  public  business,  but  that,  on  the  con- 
trary, it  shall  constitute  the  best  guarantee  of  the  regularity,  promptitude  and  fit- 
ness in  the  transaction  of  public  business,  I give  the  following  instructions  and 
decree: 

(Then  follow  ten  rules  concerning  the  details  of  installing  the  government.) 

Cavite,  the  27th  of  June,  1898. 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

MESSAGE  OF  THE  PRESIDENT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  REVOLUTION. 

If  it  is  true,  as  it  is  true,  that  political  revolutions  properly  understood,  are  the  vio- 
lent means  which  people  employ  to  recover  the  sovereignty  which  naturally  belongs  to 
them,  usurped  and  trampled  upon  by  a tyrannical  and  arbitrary  government, _no 
revolution  can  be  more  righteous  than  that  of  the  Philippines,  because  the  people 
have  had  recourse  to  it  after  having  exhausted  all  the  pacific  means  which  reason  and 
experience  could  suggest. 

The  ancient  Kings  of  Castile  felt  obliged  to  consider  the  Philippines  as  a 
brother  people,  united  to  the  Spanish  in  a perfect  participation  of  aims  and  interests, 
so  much  so  that  when  the  Constitution  of  1812  was  promulgated,  at  Cadiz,  on  ac- 
count of  the  War  of  Spanish  Independence,  these  islands  were  represented  in  the 
Spanish  Cortez;  but  the  interests  of  the  Monastic  corporations  which  have  always 
fcund  unconditional  support  in  the  Spanish  Government,  overcame  this  sacred  duty 
and  the  Philippines  remained  excluded  from  the  Spanish  Constitution,  and  the 
people  at  the  mercy  of  the  discretionary  or  arbitrary  powers  of  the  Governor-General. 

In  this  condition  the  people  claimed  justice,  begged  of  the  metropolis  the  recog- 
nition and  restitution  of  their  secular  rights  by  means  of  reforms  which  should 


94 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


assimilate  in  a gradual  and  progressive  manner,  the  Philippines  to  the  Spaniards;  hut 
their  voice  was  quickly  throttled  and  their  sons  received  as  the  reward  of  their  self- 
denial,  deportation,  martyrdom  and  death.  The  religious  corporations  with  whose 
interests,  always  opposed  to  those  of  the  Philippine  people,  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment has  been  identified,  scoffed  at  these  pretensions  and  answered  with  the  knowl- 
edge of  that  Government  that  Spanish  liberties  have  cost  blood. 

What  other  recourse  then  remained  to  the  people  for  insisting  as  in  duty  hound 
on  regaining  its  former  rights?  No  alternative  remained  except  force  and,  con- 
vinced of  that,  it  has  had  recourse  to  revolution. 

And  now  it  is  not  limited  to  asking  assimilation  to  the  Spanish  Political  Consti- 
tution, hut  it  asks  a definite  separation  from  it;  it  struggles  for  its  independence  in 
the  firm  belief  that  the  time  has  arrived  in  which  it  can  and  ought  to  govern  itself. 

There  has  been  established  a Revolutionary  Government,  under  wise  and  just  laws, 
suited  to  the  abnormal  circumstances  through  which  it  is  passing,  and  which,  in 
proper  time,  will  prepare  it  for  a true  Republic.  Thus  taking  as  a sole  model  for 
its  acts,  reason,  for  its  sole  end,  justice,  and,  for  its  sole  means,  honorable  labor,  it 
calls  all  Philippines  its  sons  without  distinction  of  class,  and  invites  them  to  unite 
firmly  with  the  object  of  forming  a noble  society,  not  based  upon  blood  nor  pom- 
pom titles,  but  upon  the  work  and  personal  merit  of  each  one;  a free  society,  where 
exist  neither  egotism  nor  personal  politics  which  annihilate  and  crush,  neither  envy 
nor  favoritism  which  debase,  neither  fanfaronade  nor  charlatanism  which  are 
ridiculous. 

And  it  could  not  be  otherwise.  A people  which  has  given  proofs  of  suffering  and 
valor  in  tribulation  and  in  danger,  and  of  hard  work  and  study  in  peace,  is  not  des- 
tined to  slavery;  this  people  is  called  to  be  great,  to  be  one  of  the  strongest  arms  of 
Providence  in  ruling  the  destinies  of  mankind;  this  people  has  resources  and  energy 
sufficient  to  liberate  itself  from  the  ruin  and  extinction  into  which  the  Spanish 
Government  has  plunged  it,  and  to  claim  a modest  but  worthy  place  in  the  concert 
of  free  nations. 

Given  at  Cavite  the  23d  of  June,  1898. 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

TO  FOREIGN  GOVERNMENTS. 

The  Revolutionary  Government  of  the  Philippines,  on  its  establishment,  ex- 
plained, through  the  message  dated  the  23d  of  June  last,  the  true  causes  of  the  Phil- 
ippine Revolution*  showing,  according  to  the  evidence,  that  this  popular  movement 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


95 


is  the  result  of  the  laws  which  regulate  the  life  of  a people  which  aspires  to  progress 
and  to  perfection  by  the  sole  road  of  liberty. 

The  said  Revolution  now  rules  in  the  Provinces  of  Cavite,  Batangas,  Mindoro, 
Tayabas,  Laguna,  Morong,  Bulacan,  Bataan,  Pampanga,  Neuva-Ecija,  Tarlac,  Pan- 
gasinan.  Union,  Infanta,  and  Zambal.es,  and  it  holds  besieged  the  capital  of  Manila. 

In  these  Provinces  complete  order  and  perfect  tranquility  reign,  administered  by 
the  authorities  elected  by  the  Provinces  in  accordance  with  the  organic  decrees 
dated  the  18th  and  23d  of  June  last. 

The  Revolution  holds,  moreover,  about  9,000  prisoners  of  war,  who  are  treated  in 
accordance  with  the  customs  of  war  between  civilized  nations  and  humane  senti- 
ments, and  at  the  end  of  the  war  it  has  more  than  30,000  combatants  organized  in 
the  form  of  a regular  army. 

In  this  situation  the  chiefs  of  the  towns  comprised  in  the  above  mentioned  Prov- 
inces, interpreting  the  sentiments  which  animate  those  who  have  elected  them, 
have  proclaimed  the  Independence  of  the  Philippines,  petitioning  the  Revolutionary 
Government  that  will  entreat  and  obtain  from  foreign  Governments  recognition 
of  its  belligerency  and  its  independence,  in  the  firm  belief  that  the  Philippine  people 
have  already  arrived  at  that  state  in  which  they  can  and  ought  to  govern  themselves. 

This  is  set  forth  in  the  accompanying  documents,  subscribed  by  the  above 
named  chiefs. 

Wherefore,  the  undersigned,  by  virtue  of  the  powers  which  belong  to  him  as 
President  of  the  Revolutionary  Government  of  the  Philippines  and  in  the  name  and 
representation  of  the  Philippine  people,  asks  the  support  of  all  the  powers  of  the 
civilized  world,  and  earnestly  entreats  them  to  proceed  to  the  formal  recognition 
of  the  belligerency  of  the  Revolution  and  the  Independence  of  the  Philippines; 
since  they  are  the  means  designated  by  Providence  to  maintain  the  equilibrium 
between  peoples,  sustaining  the  weak  and  restraining  the  strong,  to  the  end  that  by 
these  means  shall  shine  forth  and  be  realized  the  most  complete  justice  in  the 
indefinite  progress  of  humanity. 

Given  at  Bacoor,  in  the  Province  of  Cavite,  the  6th  day  of  August,  1898. 

The  President  of  the  Revolutionary  Government, 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

STATEMENT. 

The  undersigned  chiefs  of  towns  comprising  the  Provinces  hereinafter  named, 
elected  as  such  in  the  manner  prescribed  by  the  decree  of  the  18th  and  the  instruc- 


96 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


tions  dated  the  20th  of  June  last,  after  having  been  confirmed  in  their  respective 
offices  by  the  President  of  the  Government  and  having  taken  the  prescribed  oath 
before  him,  have  met  in  full  assembly  previously  called  for  that  purpose  for  the 
purpose  of  discussing  the  solemn  proclamation  of  Philippine  independence. 

The  discussion  took  place  with  the  prudence  and  at  the  length  which  so  impor- 
tant a question  demands  and,  after  suitable  deliberation,  the  following  declarations 
were  unanimously  adopted: 

The  Philippine  Revolution  records  on  the  one  hand  brilliant  feats  of  arms, 
realized  with  singular  courage  by  an  improvised  army  almost  without  arms,  and  on 
the  other  the  no  less  notable  fact  that  the  people,  after  the  combat,  have  not  entered 
upon  great  excesses  nor  pursued  the  enemy  further;  but  have  treated  him,  on  the 
contrary,  with  generosity  and  humanity,  returning  at  once  to  their  ordinary  and 
tranquil  life. 

Such  deeds  demonstrate,  in  an  indisputable  manner,  that  the  Philippine  people 
was  not  created,  as  all  believed,  for  the  sole  purpose  of  dragging  the  chains  of  servi- 
tude, but  that  it  has  a perfect  idea  of  order  and  justice,  shuns  a savage  life,  and  loves  a 
civilized  life. 

But  what  is  most  surprising  in  this  people  is  that  it  goes  on  giving  proofs  that  it 
knows  how  to  frame  laws,  commensurate  with  the  progress  of  the  age,  to  respect 
them  and  obey  them,  demonstrating  that  its  national  customs  are  not  repugnant  to 
this  progress;  that  it  is  not  ambitious  for  power  nor  honors  nor  riches  aside  from  the 
rational  and  just  aspirations  for  a free  and  independent  life,  and  inspired  by  the 
most  lofty  idea  of  patriotism  and  national  honor;  and  that  in  the  service  of  this 
idea  and  for  the  realization  of  that  aspiration  it  has  not  hesitated  in  the  sacrifice  of 
life  and  fortune. 

These  admirable — and  more  than  admirable,  these  wonderful — deeds  necessarily 
engender  the  most  firm  and  ineradicable  convictions  of  the  necessity  of  leaving  the 
Philippines  free  and  independent,  not  only  because  they  deserve  it,  but  because  they 
are  prepared  to  defend,  to  the  death,  their  future  and  their  history. 

Filipinos  are  fully  convinced  that  if  individuals  have  need  of  material,  moral 
and  intellectual  perfection  in  order  to  contribute  to  the  welfare  of  their  fellows, 
peoples  require  to  have  fullness  of  life;  they  need  liberty  and  independence  in  order 
to  contribute  to  the  indefinite  progress  of  mankind.  It  has  struggled  and  will 
struggle,  with  decision  and  constancy,  without  ever  turning  back  or  retrograding 
before  the  obstacles  which  may  arise  in  its  path,  and  with  unshakable  faith  that  it 
will  obtain  justice  and  fulfill  the  laws  of  Providence. 

And  neither  will  it  be  turned  aside  from  the  course  it  has  hitherto  followed  by 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


97 


the  unjustifiable  imprisonment,  tortures,  assassinations,  and  the  other  vandal  acts 
committed  by  the  Spaniards  against  the  persons  of  peaceful  and  defenseless  Fili- 
pinos. The  Spaniards  believe  themselves  released  from  every  legal  obligation 
toward  the  Filipinos  for  the  sole  reason  that  the  belligerency  of  the  Revolution 
lias  not  been  recognized,  taking  no  account  of  the  fact  that  over  and  above  every 
law,  whether  written  or  prescriptive,  are  placed  with  imprescriptible  characters, 
culture,  national  honor  and  humanity.  No;  the  Filipinos  have  no  need  ever  to 
make  use  of  reprisals  because  they  seek  independence  with  culture,  liberty  with 
unconditional  respect  for  the  law,  as  the  organ  of  justice,  and  a name  purified  in 
the  crucible  of  human  sentiments. 

In  virtue  of  the  foregoing  considerations  the  undersigned,  giving  voice  to  the 
unanimous  aspiration  of  the  people  whom  they  represent,  and  performing  the  offices 
received  from  them  and  the  duties  pertaining  to  the  powers  with  which  they  are 
invested, 

Proclaim  solemnly  in  the  face  of  the  whole  world  the  Independence  of  the 
Philippines; 

Recognize  and  respect  Senor  Don  Emilio  Aguinaldo  y Famy  as  President  of  the 
Revolutionary  Government,  organized  in  the  manner  prescribed  by  decree  of  the 
23d  and  instructions  of  the  27th  of  June  last,  and  beg  the  said  President  that  he  will 
ask  and  obtain  from  foreign  Governments  the  recognition  of  its  belligerency  and 
independence,  not  only  because  this  act  constitutes  a duty  of  justice,  but  also  because 
to  no  one  is  it  permitted  to  contravene  natural  laws  nor  stifle  the  legitimate  aspira- 
tion of  a people  for  its  amelioration  and  dignification. 

Given  in  the  Province  of  Cavite  the  1st  day  of  August,  of  the  year  of  our  Lord 
1898,  and  the  first  year  of  Philippine  independence. 

Follow  the  signatures  of  the  local  Presidents  of  the  Provinces  of  Cavite  and  many 
others. 

The  undersigned,  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  certifies,  That  the  present  document 
is  a literal  copy  of  the  original,  which  is  deposited  in  the  Secretaryship  under  his 
charge;  in  proof  of  which  he  signs  it,  with  the  approval  of  the  President  of  the  Revo- 
lutionary Government  in  Bacoor,  the  6th  day  of  August,  1898. 

El  Presidente  del  G.  R., 

EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 

El  Secretano  del  Interior, 
LEANDRO  IBARRA. 


98 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGUINALDO. 


LETTER  FROM  SENOR  AGUINALDO  TO  GENERAL  ANDERSON. 

July  23d,  1898. 

To  Brigadier-General  T.  M.  Anderson,  U.  S.  A.,  etc.,  etc.,  Cavite. 

In  answer  to  the  letter  of  your  Excellency  dated  the  22nd  of  the  present  month, 
I have  the  honor  to  manifest  to  you  the  following: 

That  even  supposing  that  the  effects  existing  in  the  storehouse  of  Don  Antonio 
Osorio  were  subject  to  capture,  when  I established  myself  in  the  plaza  (town)  of 
Cavite,  Admiral  Dewey  authorized  me  to  dispose  of  everything  that  I might  find  in 
the  same,  including  the  arms  which  the  Spanish  left  in  the  arsenal.  But  as  he  was 
aware  that  said  effects  belonged  to  the  personal  property  (ownership)  of  a Filipino, 
who  traded  with  them  by  virtue  of  a contribution  to  the  Spanish  Government,  I 
would  not  have  touched  them  had  not  the  owner  placed  them  at  my  disposition  for 
the  purposes  of  the  war. 

I came  from  Ilong  Kong  to  prevent  my  countrymen  from  making  common  cause 
with  the  Spanish  against  the  North  Americans,  pledging,  before,  my  word  to  Ad- 
miral Dewey  to  not  give  place  to  (to  allow)  any  internal  discord  because  (being)  a 
judge  of  their  desires  I had  the  strong  conviction  that  I would  succeed  in  both 
objects;  establishing  a government  according  to  their  desires. 

Thus  it  is  that  at  the  beginning  I proclaimed  the  dictatorship,  and  afterwards, 
when  some  of  the  Provinces  had  already  liberated  themselves  from  Spanish  domina- 
tion, I established  a revolutionary  government  that  to-day  exists,  giving  it  a demo- 
cratic and  popular  character,  as  far  as  the  abnormal  circumstances  of  war  permitted, 
in  order  that  they  (the  Provinces)  might  be  justly  represented  and  administered  to 
their  satisfaction. 

It  is  true  that  my  government  has  not  been  acknowledged  by  any  of  the  foreign 
powers;  but  we  expect  that  the  great  North  American  nation,  which  struggled  first 
for  its  independence  and  afterwards  for  the  abolition  of  slavery,  and  is  now  actually 
struggling  for  the  independence  of  Cuba,  would  look  upon  it  with  greater  benevo- 
lence than  any  other  nation.  Because  of  this  we  have  always  acknowledged  the  right 
of  preference  as  to  our  gratitude. 

Debtor  to  the  generosity  of  the  North  Americans,  and  to  the  favors  which  we 
have  received  through  Admiral  Dewey,  and  being  more  desirous  than  any  other  of 
preventing  any  conflict  which  would  have  as  a result  foreign  intervention  which 
must  be  extremely  prejudicial  not  alone  to  ray  nation,  but  also  to  that  of  Your  Ex- 
cellency, I consider  it  my  duty  to  advise  you  of  the  undesirability  of  disembark- 
ing North  American  troops  in  the  places  conquered  by  the  Filipinos  from  the 


PROCLAMATIONS  OF  GENERAL  AGTJINALDO. 


99 


Spanish,  without  previous  notice  to  this  government,  because  as  no  formal  agree- 
ment yet  exists  between  the  two  nations,  the  Philippine  people  might  consider  the 
occupation  of  its  territories,  by  North  American  troops  as  a violation  of  its  rights. 

I comprehend  that  without  the  destruction  of  the  Spanish  squadron  the  Phil- 
ippine revolution  would  not  have  advanced  so  rapidly;  because  of  this  I take  the 
liberty  of  indicating  to  Your  Excellency  the  necessities  that  before  disembarking 
troops  you  should  communicate  in  writing  to  this  government  the  places  that  are  to 
be  occupied,  and  also  the  object  of  the  occupation,  that  the  people  may  he  advised 
in  due  form  and  (thus)  prevent  the  commission  of  any  transgression  against  friend- 
ship. I can  answer  for  my  people,  because  they  have  given  me  evident  proofs  of  their 
absolute  confidence  in  my  government,  but  I cannot  answer  for  that  which  another 
nation,  whose  friendship  is  not  well  guaranteed,  might  inspire  in  it  (the  people); 
and  it  is  certain  that  I do  this  not  as  a menace,  but  as  a further  proof  of  the  true 
and  sincere  friendship  which  I have  always  professed  to  the  North  American  peo- 
ple in  the  complete  security  that  it  will  find  itself  completely  identified  with  our 
cause  of  liberty. 

I am,  with  respect. 


Your  obedient  servant, 

EMILIO  AGTJINALDO. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


INTERVIEW  WITH  THE  ARCHBISHOP  OP  MANILA. 

Insurgents’  Deadly  Hostility  to  Spanish.  Priests — The  Position  of  the  Archbishop 
as  He  Defined  It — Iiis  Expression  of  Gratitude  to  the  American  Army — His 
Characterization  of  the  Insurgents — A Work  of  Philippine  Art — The  Sin- 
cerity of  the  Archbishop’s  Good  Words. 

The  intense  feeling  by  the  Philippine  insurgents  against  the  Spanish  priests 
made  it  seem  very  desirable  to  see  the  Archbishop  of  Manila,  and  he  informed  two 
American  priests  that  he  would  have  pleasure  in  making  an  expression  of  his  views 
to  me  to  be  placed  before  the  people  of  the  United  States.  He  had  been  charged 
with  extreme  vindictiveness  and  the  responsibility  of  demanding  thatthe  city  should  be 
defended  to  the  last  extremity,  when  actually,  in  the  consultation  of  dignitaries  that 
took  place,  and  the  surrender  of  the  capital  was  demanded  by  Generali  Merritt  and 
Admiral  Dewey,  he  declared  the  situation  hopeless  and  that  it  was  a plain  duty  to 
prevent  the  sacrifice  of  life.  He  was  overruled  by  the  peculiar  folly  that  has  caused 
Spain  in  the  course  of  the  war  to  inflict  heavy  and  avoidable  losses  upon  herself. 
Indeed,  the  war  originated  in  the  Spanish  state  of  mind  that  it  was  necessary  to  open 
fire  and  shed  blood  for  the  honor  of  the  arms  of  Spain.  The  Spanish  officers  knew 
they  could  not  save  Manila  from  the  hands  of  the  Americans  while  the  command  of 
the  sea  by  our  fleet  was  indisputable  and  we  had  unlimited  reserves  to  draw  upon  to 
strengthen  the  land  forces, irrespective  of  the  swarms  of  insurgents  pressing  in  the  rear 
and  eager  to  take  vengeance  for  centuries  of  mismanagement  and  countless  personal 
grievances.  It  was  the  acknowledgment  of  the  Spanish  Captain-General,  when  he 
received  the  peremptory  summons  from  Merritt  and  Dewey  to  give  up  the  city,  that 
there  was  no  place  of  refuge  for  the  women  and  children,  the  sick  and  the  wounded; 
and  yet  it  was  insisted  that  the  honor  of  Spain  required  bloodshed — not  much,  per- 
haps, but  enough  to  prove  that  the  army  of  Spain  was  warlike.  When  the  American 
army  had  been  reinforced  so  as  to  have  8,000  men  ready  to  take  the  field,  General 
Merritt  and  Admiral  Dewey  had  a conference  and  agreed  to  send  the  Spaniards  in 
authority  a formal  notification  that  in  forty-eight  hours  they  would  bombard  and 
assail  the  defenses  of  the  city  of  Manila  if  it  were  not  surrendered.  The  Spanish 
reply  was  that  the  Americans  could  commence  operations  at  once,  but  there  was  no 
place  where  the  women  and  children,  the  wounded  and  the  sick  could  go  to  find  a 

100 


MURAT  HALSTEAD,  THE  AUTHOR,  AS  HE  APPEARED 
IN  MANILA. 


CATHEDRAL  OB’  MANILA  AFTER  EARTHQUAKE. 


SPANISH  REINFORCEMENTS  CROSSING  BRIDGE  OVER  PASIG  RIVER. 


INTERVIEW  WITH  THE  ARCHBISHOP  OF  MANILA. 


103 


place  of  security.  This  was  tantamount  to  a declaration  that  the  Spaniards  were 
sliding  into  a surrender,  but  wanted  to  make  a claim  to  the  contrary. 

The  residence  of  the  Archbishop  is  within  the  walled  city  and  a very  sub- 
stantial edifice,  the  stone  work  confined  to  the  lower  story  and  hardwood  timber 
freely  used  in  massive  form  instead  of  stone.  His  grace  was  seated  at  a small  table  in 
a broad  hall,  with  a temp  and  writing  material  before  him.  He  is  imposing  as  a 
man  of  importance  and  his  greeting  was  cordial  to  kindliness.  He  said  his  ac-knowl 
edgments  were  personally  due  the  American  people  for  the  peace  of  mind  he  had 
enjoyed  during  the  occupation  of  the  city  by  the  army  of  the  United  States,  for  its 
establishment  of  order  and  the  justice  in  administration  that  relieved  good  citizens 
from  oppression  and  alarm.  He  was  glad  to  have  Americans  know  his  sensibility  on 
this  subject,  and  wanted  me  to  convey  his  sentiments  to  the  President. 

When  asked  what  it  was  that  caused  the  insurgents  to  be  so  ferocious  against  the 
priests  and  resolved  on  their  expulsion  or  destruction  he  said  the  rebels  were  at  once 
false,  unjust  and  ungrateful.  They  had  been  lifted  from  savagery  by  Catholic  teach- 
ers, 'who  had  not  only  been  educators  in  the  schools  but  teachers  in  the  fields.  The 
same  Catholic  Orders  that  were  singled  out  for  special  punishment  had  planted  in  the 
islands  the  very  industries  that  were  sources  of  prosperity,  and  the  leaders  of  the 
insurgents  had  been  largely  educated  by  the  very  men  whom  now  they  persecuted. 
Some  of  the  persecutors  had  been  in  Europe  and  became  revolutionists  in  the  sense 
of  promoting  disorder  as  anarchists.  It  was  the  antagonism  of  the  church  to  mur- 
derous anarchy  that  aroused  the  insurgents  of  the  Philippines  to  become  the  deadly 
enemies  of  priests  and  church  orders.  It  was  true  in  Spain,  as  in  the  Philippines, 
that  the  anarchists  were  particularly  inflamed  against  the  church.  His  grace  did  not 
seem  to  have  heard  of  the  American  anarchist,  but  the  European  revolutionist  has 
received  a large  share  of  his  attention. 

Ele  produced  a box  of  cigars,  also  a bottle  of  sherry,  and  chatted  comfortably  and 
humorously.  There  was  one  thing  then  that  he  had  in  his  heart — that  his  anxiety 
for  peace  and  appreciation  of  order  as  enjoyed  under  the  American  military  govern- 
ment should  be  recorded  and  responsibly  reported  to  the  people  of  the  United 
States.  The  American  priests  had  informed  him  that'  I was  a friend  of  long  standing 
of  President  McKinley,  and  he  again  enjoined  that  I should  declare  his  senti- 
ments to  the  President.  A beautiful  work  of  wood  carving  was  shown  on  an  easel, 
which  had  a frame  of  hard  wood,  the  whole,  easel  and  frame,  with  elaborately 
wrought  ornamentation,  cut  out  of  one  tree.  It  was  at  once  strong  and 
graceful,  simple  and  decorative.  The  picture  was  a gold  medallion,  raised  on  a 
late  of  silver,  an  excellent  likeness  of  his  grace.  It  was  evident  that  the  refine- 


104 


INTERVIEW  WITH  THE  ARCHBISHOP  OF  MANILA. 


merits  of  art  were  known  to  “these  barbarians  of  the  Philippines/’  for  their  works 
testified. 

His  grace  announced  that  he  would  return  my  call,  and  his  convenience  being 
consulted,  the  time  was  fixed  for  him  to  appear  at  11  o’clock  the  next  day,  Sunday, 
and  he  came  accordingly,  accompanied  by  three  priests,  the  chaplain  of  the  First 
California,  Father  Daugherty  who  sailed  with  General  Merritt  to  Manila,  and  Father 
Boyle,  the  superintendent  of  the  famous  observatory  founded  by  the  Jesuits,  who 
was  a typical  Irishman  of  a strong  and  humorously  hearty  type.  Father  Boyle  had 
one  of  the  most  perfect  methods  of  speaking  English  in  the  Irish  way  that  I have 
ever  heard,  and  admitted  that  he  had  resided  in  England  long  enough  to  be  born 
there;  and  this  was  great  fun.  It  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  the  institution  he  repre- 
sented is  illustrious. 

The  cathedral  of  Manila  is  within  the  walled  city  and  of  immense  proportions. 
It  was  shattered  by  an  earthquake,  and  in  its  reconstruction  wood  rather  than 
marble  was  used  for  the  supporting  pillars  within,  but  no  one  would  find  out  that  the 
stately  clusters  of  columns  were  not  from  the  quarries  rather  than  the  forests,  unless 
personally  conducted  to  the  discovery.  Here  2,000  Spanish  soldiers,  held  under  the 
articles  of  capitulation,  were  quartered,  consumed  their  rations  and  slept,  munching 
and  dozing  all  around  the  altar  and  pervading  the  whole  edifice.  The  other  great 
churches,  five  in  number,  in  the  walled  city,  were  occupied  in  the  same  way.  The 
Archbishop  was  anxious  tc  have  the  soldiers  otherwise  provided  with  shelter,  and 
if  not  all  of  them  could  be  restored  to  their  ordinary  uses  it  was  most  desirable,  in 
his  opinion,  the  cathedral  should  be. 

It  is  estimated  that  2,000  of  the  American  soldiers  in  the  expeditionary  force  are 
Catholics,  and  Father  Daugherty  was  anxious  to  preach  to  them  in  English.  During 
the  call  upon  me  by  the  Archbishop  this  subject  was  discussed,  and  the  suggestion 
made  that  the  Americans  had  tents  in  great  number  that  they  did  not  occupy  and 
that  would  probably  not  be  preserved  by  keeping  them  stored  in  that  hot  and  trying 
climate.  They  might  be  pitched  on  the  Luneta,  which  is  beside  the  sea,  and  the  town 
thus  relieved  of  13,000  men,  who,  herded  in  churches,  produced  unsanitary  condi- 
tions. This  seemed  reasonable,  and  the  policy  of  the  change  would  have  a tendency 
to  develop  an  element  of  good-will  not  to  be  despised  and  rejected.  It  might  be 
that  the  cathedral  alone  could  be  cleared  without  delay  or  prejudice  with  a pleasant 
effect,  and  if  so  why  not?  His  grace  was  certainly  diplomatic  and  persuasive  in 
staring  the  case,  and  his  attendants  were  animated  with  zeal  that  the  Americans 
should  have  the  credit  of  re-opening  the  cathedral  for  worship.  It  was  true  the 
Spanish  garrison  first  occupied  it,  but  if  the  necessity  that  its  ample  roof  should 


INTERVIEW  WITH  THE  ARCHBISHOP  OF  MANILA. 


105 


protect  soldiers  from  the  torrential  rains  had  existed  perhaps  it  had  ceased  to  he 
imperative.  The  matter  was  duly  presented  to  the  military  authorities,  and  the 
objection  found  to  immediate  action  that  the  Spanish  prisoners  of  war  should  not 
for  the  time  be  located  outside  the  walled  city.  They  must  he  held  where  they  could 
he  handled. 

Coincident  with  the  call  of  the  Archbishop  came  Captain  Coudert,  of  the  dis- 
tinguished family  of  that  name  in  New  York,  and  his  grace  was  deeply  interested 
in  that  young  man  and  warmly  expressed  his  gratification  in  meeting  an  American 
officer  of  his  own  faith.  The  Archbishop  is  a man  of  a high  order  of  capacity,  and 
his  influence  has  been  great.  His  position  is  a trying  one,  for  it  would  be  quite 
impossible  for  him  to  remain  in  Manila  if  the  insurgents  should  become  the  masters 
of  the  situation.  The  claim  of  hostile  natives  that  the  Spanish  priests  have  an 
influence  in  matters  of  state  that  make  them  a ruling  class  is  one  that  they  urge 
when  expressing  their  resolve  that  the  Friars  must  go.  The  Spanish  policy,  espe- 
cially in  the  municipal  governments,  has  been  to  magnify  the  office  of  the  priests  in 
political  functions.  The  proceedings  of  a meeting  of  the  people  in  order  to 
receive  attention  or  to  have  legal  standing  must  be  certified  by  a priest.  It  is  the 
Spanish  priest  that  is  wanted  in  matters  of  moment,  and  the  laws  make  his  pres- 
ence indispensable.  The  Spanish  priests  are,  therefore,  identified  in  the  public  mind 
with  all  the  details  of  misgovernment.  The  civilized  Filipinos  profess  Christianity 
and  faith  in  the  native  priests,  carefully  asserting  the  distinction.  In  his  conversation 
with  me.  General  Aguinaldo  repeatedly  referred  to  the  necessity  of  consulting 
his  advisers,  and  said  he  had  to  be  careful  not  to  offend  many  of  his  followers,  who 
thought  he  had  gone  very  far  in  his  friendship  for  the  United  States.  He  gave 
emphasis  to  the  assertion  that  they  were  “suspicious”  of  him  on  that  account.  It  was 
my  judgment  at  first  that  the  General,  in  stopping  short  when  a question  was  dif- 
ficult and  referring  to  the  Council  he  had  to  consult,  was  showing  a capacity  for 
finesse,  that  he  really  had  the  power  to  do  or  to  undo,  though  he  has  not  a personal 
appearance  of  possible  leadership.  Now  this,  even,  has  been  modified.  His  Council 
seems  to  be  the  real  center  of  power.  When  I was  talking  with  Aguinaldo  there 
were  two  American  priests  waiting  to  propose  the  deportation  of  his  prisoners  who 
were  priests,  and  he  had  to  refer  that  question.  The  Council  has  decided  to  keep 
the  priests  in  confinement,  and  it  is  remarked  that  the  General  desired  to  give  up 
his  prisoners  and  was  false  in  saying  he  favored  sending  them  to  Spain.  There  are 
misapprehensions  in  this  association.  He  has  no  doubt  thought  well  of  holding  fast 
his  most  important  hostages.  If  he  personally  desired  to  release  the  priests,  he 
probably  would  not  venture  to  do  it.  He  is  not  so  silly  as  to  believe  in  his  own 


106 


INTERVIEW  WITH  THE  ARCHBISHOP  OF  MANILA. 


inviolability  by  bullets,  and  digestion  of  poisons;  and  those  who  are  such  savages  as 
to  confide  in  these  superstitions  are  not  unlikely  to  try  experiments  just  to  strengthen 
their  faith.  The  potentiality  of  Aguinaldo  as  a personage  is  not  so  great  as  has  been 
imagined,  and  if  he  attempts  a rally  against  the  American  flag  he  will  be  found  full 
of  weakness. 

The  Archbishop,  I was  told,  had  much  pleasure  in  meeting  an  American  he 
was  assured  would  attempt  to  be  entirely  just,  and  present  him  according  to  his  own 
declarations  to  the  people  of  the  United  States.  He  knew  very  well,  unquestionably, 
the  stories  circulated  in  the  American  camps,  that  his  voice  had  been  loudest  and 
last  in  urging  hopeless  war,  in  telling  impossible  tales  of  visionary  Spanish  rein- 
forcements, and  denouncing  the  Americans  as  “niggers”  and  “pigs.”  It  is  a fact 
that  Spaniards  have  cultivated  the  notion  among  the  rural  Filipinos,  that  Americans 
are  black  men,  and  pigs  is  their  favorite  epithet  for  an  American.  The  radical 
enemies  of  His  Grace  are,  no  doubt,  responsible  for  unseemly  stories  about  his 
animosities,  for  that  he  and  those  around  him  were  sincere  in  their  respect  for,  and 
gratitude  toward  the  American  army  of  occupation,  for  its  admirable  bearing  and 
good  conduct,  was  in  itself  too  obviously  true  to  be  doubted. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

The  Responsibility  of  Admiral  Dewey— We  Owe  It  to  Ourselves  to  Hold  the  Philip- 
pines— Prosperity  Assured  by  Our  Permanent  Possession — The  Aguinaldo 
Question — Character  Study  of  the  Insurgent  Leader — How  Affairs  Would' 
Adjust  Themselves  for  Us— Congress  Must  Be  Trusted  to  Represent  the 
People  and  Firmly  Establish  International  Policy. 

If  Admiral  Dewey,  after  obeying  the  order  of  the  President  to  destroy  the  Span- 
ish fleet  at  Manila,  had  steamed  away  and  sought  a station  to  get  coal  to  drive  him 
somewhere  else,  there  would  have  been  no  Philippine  question  on  the  other  side  of 
tiie  world  from  Washington  City.  The  Admiral  desired  to  keep  open  telegraphic 
communication,  and  made  a proposition  to  that  effect,  but  .the  Spanish  authorities 
curtly  refused.  Then  the  cable  was  cut  by  order  of  the  Admiral,  a section  removed, 
and  both  ends  marked  by  buoys.  Reflection  caused  the  Spaniards  to  regret  that 
they  had  not  consented  to  keep  open  the  cable,  that  it  might  be  used  under  restric- 
tions by  both  belligerents.  They  mentioned  their  change  of  mind,  and  were  told 
they  were  too  late.  The  American  Admiral  may  have  been  apprehensive,  and  he  had 
reason  to  be,  that  the  Spaniards,  knowing  they  would  be  crushed  in  the  West  Indies 
if  they  risked  a decisive  naval  engagement  there,  might  send  all  their  available  ships 
of  war  to  the  Philippines,  and  secure  a superiority  of  force,  possibly  to  destroy  their 
enemies  at  Manila.  It  is  clear  now  that  this  is  what  the  Spaniards  ought  to  have 
tried  to  do.  The  Americans  were  committed  to  the  blockade  of  Cuba,  occupying 
all  the  vessels  of  war  they  had  at  hand,  and  the  whole  fleet  of  Spain  could  have  been 
in  the  Suez  Canal,  on  the  way  to  Manila  when  the  movement  was  known  to  our  navy 
department.  Then  Admiral  Dewey  would,  of  course,  have  been  warned  by  way  of 
Hong  Kong  and  a dispatch  boat,  that  he  should  put  to  sea  and  take  care  of  his  men 
and  ships.  The  result  might  have  been  the  temporary  restoration  of  the  Philippines 
to  Spain.  Our  Admiral,  six  hundred  miles  from  Hongkong,  the  closest  cable  con- 
nection, could  not  afford  fo  leave  Manila  in  direct  communication  with  Madrid.  It 
was  for  this  reason  and  not  that  he  desired  to  keep  out  of  way  or  orders,  as  some  able 
publicists  have  kindly  promulgated,  that  the  Admiral  cut  the  cable. 

The  gravest  of  his  responsibilities  came  upon  him  after  his  victory  freed  the 
harbor  of  declared  enemies,  and  placed  the  great  city  at  his  mercy.  If  the  Spaniard* 

107 


108 


WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


used  their  big  Krupp  guns  against  his  ships,  he  could  bombard  the  city  and  burn  it. 
He  held  the  keys  to  the  Philippines,  with  Manila  under  his  guns,  and  the  question 
before  him  then  was  the  same  before  the  country  now.  The  question  that  inces- 
santly presses  is,  whether  the  Dewey  policy  is  to  be  confirmed,  and  the  logic  of  the 
stay  in  the  harbor,  and  the  dispatch  of  troops  to  take  the  town  made  good.  We  hold 
the  keys  of  the  Philippines.  Shall  we  continue  to  do  so?  This  question  transcends 
in  immediate  importance — inevitable  consequence — remote  as  well  as  near,  all  the 
war  with  Spain  has  raised.  So  broad  a matter  should  not  be  rested  on  narrow 
grounds,  nor  decided  with  haste.  It  ought  to  be  scrutinized  in  all  its  bearings,  and 
all  susceptibilities  and  material  affairs  regarded,  for  it  will  affect  all  the  people  for 
all  time. 

What  are  the  Philippines?  They  are  the  richest  prize  of  soil  and  climate  that 
has  been  at  hazard  in  the  world  for  many  years — one  that  would  be  seized,  if  it  could 
be  done  without  war,  by  any  of  the  great  nations  other  than  our  own  without  hesi- 
tation. The  only  scruple  we  need  entertain,  the  sole  reason  for  deliberation,  is  be- 
cause it  is  a duty  of  the  government  to  be  sure  when  there  are  imperial  considera- 
tions to  be  weighed,  that  the  people  should  be  consulted.  It  was  on  this  account 
distinctly,  that  the  President  knew  the  issue  of  the  permanency  of  the  possession  of 
the  Philippines  was  one  of  peculiar  novelty  and  magnitude,  that  he  permitted  it 
to  exist.  Spain  must  have  been  as  acquiescent  in  this  as  in  yielding  the  independ- 
ence of  Cuba,  and  the  concession  to  us  without  any  intermediate  formality  of  Porto 
Rico.  It  is  not  inconsistent  with  the  policy  of  magnanimity  that  is  generally  an- 
ticipated after  the  victory  of  a great  power  over  a lesser  one,  that  we  should  hold 
the  Philippines.  We  have  only  to  keep  the  power  we  have  in  peace,  andiet  it  work 
as  a wholesome  medicine,  and  all  the  islands  of  the  group  of  which  Manila  is  the  cen- 
tral point,  will  be  ours  without  conflict.  In  our  system  there  is  healing  for  wounds, 
and  attraction  for  the  oppressed.  The  holding  of  the  islands  by  Spain  would  signi- 
fy the  continued  shedding  of  blood,  and  drainage  of  the  vital  resources  of  the 
peninsula.  As  against  Spain  the  Philippines  will  be  united  and  desperate  unto 
death,  while  they  would  without  coercion  walk  hand  in  hand  with  us,  and  become  the 
greatest  of  our  dependencies — not  states,  but  territories. 

It  would  be  an  act  of  mercy  to  Spain  to  send  her  soldiers  and  priests  from  the 
Philippines,  home.  Even  if  we  consent  that  she  may  keep  her  South  Sea  possession, 
she  will  lose  it  as  she  has  all  the  rest,  for  the  story  of  the  Philippines  is  that  of  Span- 
ish South  and  Central  America,  and  the  modern  story  of  Cuba  is  the  old  one  of  all 
countries  South  and  West  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  around  by  way  of  the  Oceana 
to  Argentina,  Mexico,  Venezuela,  Peru,  Chili,  and  the  rest  had  the  same  bloody 


WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


109 


stream  of  history  to  trace,  and  sooner  or  later  the  tale  must  all  be  told.  Since 
Spain  has  already  surrendered  Cuba  and  Porto  Eico,  the  record  of  the  Philippines 
is  the  last  chapter  of  her  colonial  experiences,  by  which  she  has  dazzled  and  dis- 
gusted the  world,  attaining  from  the  plunder  of  dependencies  wealth  that  she  in- 
rested  in  oppressive  warfare  to  sustain  a depraved  despotism  and  display  a grandeur 
that  was  unsound,  sapping  her  own  strength  in  colonial  enterprises  that  could  not  be 
other  than  without  profit,  because  the  colonies  were  the  property  of  the  crown, 
and  the  prey  of  caste. 

The  Spanish  nation  was  forbidden  by  their  government,  not  of  the  people  or  for 
the  people,  to  profit  by  the  colonies,  and  the  viceroys,  the  captain-generals,  and  the 
whole  official  class  were  corrupted,  and  inefficient  in  all  things,  except  methods  of 
tyranny  to  procure  a harvest  of  gold  and  silver  not  from  the  mines  of  the  metals  alone, 
bur  from  the  industries,  whatever  they  were.  The  people  at  large  were  allowed 
no  share  in  their  own  earnings,  beyond  a subsistence  so  scanty  that  deep  humiliation 
and  grievous  hardship  were  the  fateful  rewards  of  labor. 

It  was  because  the  colonial  policy  of  Spain  impoverished  and  degraded  the  Span- 
iards at  home,  through  the  injustice,  greed  and  profligacy  of  those  abroad,  that  the 
huge  structure,  once  so  great  an  imposition  upon  mankind,  a rotten  fabric  so  gilt  that 
the  inherent  weakness  was  disguised,  has  finally  fallen  into  universal  and  irretrievable 
ruin. 

It  is  well  Spain  should  retain  the  Canaries  and  the  Balearic  group,  for  they  are  as 
Spanish  as  any  peninsular  province,  and  legitimately  belong  therefore  to  the  kingdom. 
The  application  of  this  principle  excludes  Spain  from  the  Philippines,  and  their  des- 
have  been  committed  by  the  failure  of  war  to  our  hands.  There  is  no  nation  that  will 
dispute  our  peaceable  possession  of  the  Philippines.  Any  other  nation’s  proprietor- 
ship will  be  challenged.  Our  authoritative  presence  in  the  islands  will  be  a guarantee 
of  peace.  Any  other  assertion  of  supremacy  will  be  the  signal  for  war.  Our  as- 
sumption of  sovereignty  over  the  islands  would  quickly  establish  tranquility.  Any 
other  disposition  of  the  burning  questions  now  smoldering  will  cause  an  outburst  of 
the  flames  of  warfare.  The  Spaniards  in  Manila  have  been  transient.  They  are  not 
rooted  in  the  soil.  They  all  come  and  go  like  Captain-Generals,  a mere  official  class, 
with  the  orders  of  the  Church  participating  actively  in  secular  concerns,  more  active 
as  politicians  than  as  teachers  of  religion.  In  the  view  of  the  native  population  it  is  as 
indispensable  that  the  priests  of  Spain  shall  return  to  their  native  land  as  that  the 
soldiers  should  go.  The  deportation  of  these  people  would  remove  classes  of  consumers 
and  not  affect  unfavorably  a productive  industry,  or  the  prosperity  of  a self-sustain- 
ing community,  and  there  would  be  but  rare  instances  of  the  severance  of  family  ties. 


110  WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

It  will  be  said  of  the  affirmation  that,  the  avowal  of  the  possession  of  the  Philip- 
pines as  a responsibility  without  end  would  be  a peace  measure,  and  anything  else 
make  for  war,  does  not  take  into  account  the  attitude  of  the  Philippine  Dictator,  by 
proclamation.  General  Aguinaldo,  and  his  followers.  We  desire  to  speak  with  respect 
of  the  General,  for  he  has  shown  in  trying  times,  under  strong  temptations,  the  pres- 
ence in  his  character  of  personal  integrity  in  public  matters,  and  reference  is  made 
to  his  refusal  to  consent  to  the  division  among  insurgents  alleged  to  be  leaders,  of 
the  money  paid  by  the  Spaniards  for  the  disarmament  of  the  rebels,  when  two  years 
ago  there  was  an  agreement  upon  the  terms  of  a truce.  This  money  transaction  has 
been  referred  to  as  the  sale  of  their  cause  by  Aguinaldo  and  his  associates,  as  if  they, 
as  individuals,  had  pocketed  the  usufruct  of  the  bargain.  The  money  was  paid  by 
Spain  as  an  earnest  of  her  sincerity,  the  Captain-General  representing  the  force 
and  good  faith  of  the  kingdom,  in  granting  reforms  to  the  Philippines.  On  condi- 
tion of  insurgent  disarmament  the  people  of  the  island  were  to  be  allowed  representa- 
tion in  the  Spanish  Cortes,  the  orders  of  the  Church  were  to  he  removed  from  rela- 
tions to  the  Government  that  were  offensive  to  the  people.  There  was  a long  list  of 
articles  of  specification  of  the  reforms  that  were  to  he  granted,  the  usual  liberality  of 
words  of  promise  always  bestowed  by  Spain  upon  her  colonists.  The  representatives 
of  Spain  denied  nothing  that  was  asked;  and  to  give  weight  to  the  program  of  con- 
cessions, there  was  paid  in  hand  to  Aguinaldo,  through  a transaction  between  banks 
in  Manila  and  Hongkong,  four  hundred  thousand  dollars,  the  first  installment  of 
eight  hundred  thousand  dollars  agreed  upon.*  The  Spaniards  probably  understood 
that  they  were  bribing  the  insurgents  and  paying  a moderate  sum  to  cheaply  end 
the  war;  and  it  did  not  cost  the  authorities  of  Spain  anything,  for  they  exacted  the 
money  from  the  Manila  Bank  of  Spain,  and  still  owe  the  hank.  Aguinaldo’s  under- 
standing, acted  upon,  was  different.  He  accepted  the  money  as  a war  fund,  and  has 
held  and  defended  it  for  the  purchase  of  arms,  and  resumed  hostilities  when  all 
promises  of  reform  were  broken,  and  nothing  whatever  done  beyond  the  robbery  of 
the  hank  to  bribe  the  rebel  chiefs,  which  was  the  Spanish  translation.  Of  course,  it 
was  claimed  by  the  enemies  of  Aguinaldo  that  he  was  bought  and  paid  for,  but  he 
has  maintained  the  fund,  though  there  were  those  professors  of  rebellion,  who  made 
claims  to  a share  of  the  money.  The  second  installment  of  the  money  that  the  rebels 
were  to  have  been  paid  is  yet  an  obligation  not  lifted,  and  the  hostilities  were  revived 
as  soon  as  the  craft  of  the  Spanish  negotiators  in  promising  everything  because 

* In  another  chapter  of  this  story  of  the  Philippines  will  be  found  Senor  Filipa 
Agoncello’s- personal  account  of  this  affair. 


TOY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Ill 


they  meant  to  do  nothing,  became  obvious.  The  actual  proceedings  in  this  case  can 
be  summed  up  in  a sentence:  The  Spaniards  took  four  hundred  thousand  dollars 
out  of  the  Bank  of  Spain  and  gave  it  to  the  insurgents,  for  a temporary  armistice. 
General  Aguinaldo,  though  he  appears  very  well  in  refusing  to  employ  the  money 
paid  by  Spain  as  a bribe  for  himself,  has  not  the  elements  of  enduring  strength  as 
the  leader  of  the  insurgents.  As  against  the  Spaniards  he  can  keep  the  field,  and 
carry  on  a destructive  guerilla  warfare,  hopeless  on  both  sides,  like  that  going  on  in 
Cuba,  when  that  island  was  invaded  by  the  American  army.  But  as  against  Ameri- 
can rule  the  Philippines  would  cease  to  be  insurgents.  The  islanders  will  not  be 
controlled  by  sentimentalism.  Government  by  the  United  States  would  differ  from 
that  by  Spain,  as  the  two  nations  are  different  in  character,  in  the  nature  of  their 
political  institutions,  in  their  progressive  movement.  America  is  all  active  and  free, 
and  her  freedom  would  be  extended  to  the  islanders.  The  transformation  would  be 
one  from  the  paralysis  of  despotism  to  the  life  of  liberty.  The  words  despotism  and 
freedom  would  instantly  have  a distinct  business  meaning.  Make  known  in  the  city 
of  Manila  that  the  Americans  will  abandon  it,  and  the  reviving  hopes  of  the  men  of 
affairs  would  be  instantly  clouded,  and  the  depression  deepen  into  despondency  and 
despair.  Let  it  be  the  news  of  the  day  that  the  Americans  will  stay,  and  the  intelli- 
gence of  the  city  would  regard  its  redemption  as  assured,  every  drooping  interest  re- 
vive, and  an  era  of  prosperity  unknown  under  the  dismal  incompetency  of  Spain, 
open  at  once.  It  is  legitimate  that  there'  should  be  freedom  of  speech  as  to  the 
details  of  the  proceedings.  If  our  Government  should  do  what  Admiral  Dewey  did 
when  he  was  the  master  of  Manila,  because  he  had  annihilated  the  Spanish  fleet  and 
had  the  power  to  destroy  the  city — cast  anchor  and  stay  where  we  are  already  in 
command— the  task  is  neither  so  complex  nor  costly  as  its  opponents  claim.  Our 
territorial  system  is  one  easy  of  application  to  colonies.  We  have  had  experience  of  it 
from  the  first  days  of  our  Government.  There  is  no  commandment  that  a Territory 
shall  become  a State  in  any  given  time,  or  ever.  We  can  hold  back  a Territory,  as 
we  have  Arizona  and  New  Mexico,  or  hasten  the  change  to  Statehood  according  to  the 
conditions,  and  the  perfect  movement  of  the  machinery  requires  only  the  pres- 
ence in  Congress  of  dominant  good  sense.  Congress  is  easily  denounced,  but  no  one  has 
found  a substitute  for  it,  and  it  is  fairly  representative  of  the  country.  Congress  will 
never  gamble  away  the  inheritance  of  the  people.  It  will  probably,  in  spite  of  all 
shortcomings,  have  its  average  of  ability  and  utility  kept  up.  Congress  may  go 
wrong,  but  will  not  betray.  Our  outlying  possessions  must  be  Territories  until  they 
are  Americanized,  and  we  take  it  Americans  know  what  that  word  means.  If  a 
specification  is  wanted  as  a definition,  we  have  to  say  the  meaning  is  just  what  has 


112 


WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


happened  in  California  since  our  flag  was  there.  In  the  case  of  the  Philippines,  if 
we  stick,  and  we  do  not  see  how  we  can  help  doing  so,  the  President  will,  in  regular 
course,  appoint  a Territorial  Governor,  and  as  a strong  Government  capable  of  quick 
and  final  decisions  must  be  made,  the  Governor  should  be  a military  man,  and  have  a 
Jiberal  grant,  by  special  Act  of  Congress,  of  military  authority.  He  should  he  a 
prompt,  and  all  around  competent  administrator.  He  will  not  have  to  carry  on  war 
offensive  or  defensive.  He  need  not  he  in  a hurry  to  go  far  from  Manila.  He  will 
not  be  molested  there.  The  country  will  gravitate  to  him.  The  opponents  of  the 
Republican  form  of  Government,  as  it  is  in  the  United  States  and  the  Territories  of 
the  Nation  will  become  insignificant  in  the  Philippines.  They  will  have  no  griev- 
ances, except  some  of  them  may  not  he  called  at  once  to  put  on  the  trappings  of 
personal  potentiality.  General  Aguinaldo  would  find  all  the  reforms  the  Spanish 
promised  when  they  paid  him  four  hundred  thousand  dollars  to  prove  their  good 
intentions,  free  as  the  air.  lie  could  not  make  war  against  the  benignancy  of  a 
Government,  Republican  in  its  form  and  its  nature,  which  simply  needs  a little 
time,  some  years  maybe,  before  erasing  the  wrongs  that  have  had  a growth  of  cen- 
turies. The  American  Governor-General  need  not  send  out  troops  to  conquer  dis- 
tricts,coercing  the  people.  The  people  will  soon  be  glad  to  see  the  soldiers  of  the 
United  States,  the  representatives  of  the  downfall  and  departure  of  the  instruments 
of  Spain.  Aguinaldo  and  his  party  have  a Congress.  It  might  be  an  approved 
beginning  of  a Territorial  Legislature,  and  the  insurgent  General  might  be  the  pre- 
siding officer.  There  would  be  abundant  reason  for  the  auspicious  exercise  of  all  his 
rights  in  the  public  service.  As  for  the  cost  of  the  Philippines  under  our  Govern- 
ment, that  would  fall  upon  the  treasury  of  the  United  States.  There-  can  be  no 
doubt  that  it  would  be  for  several  years  a considerable  sum,  but  the  public  men  who 
favored  peace  for  the  liberation  of  Cuba,  did  not  make  counting  the  cost  the  most 
prominent  feature  of  the  war  they  advocated,  but  accepted  the  fact  that  the 
national  honor  and  fame,  the  glory  of  heroism  and  deeds  of  daring  and  sacrifice,  are 
priceless,  and  their  achievement  beyond  price.  There  is  to  be  said  under  this  head, 
that  the  Philippine  Islands  are  of  natural  riches  almost  without  parallel.  The  great 
isle  of  Luzon  teems  with  productions  that  have  markets  the  world  over,  and  it  is 
commonplace  for  the  savages  in  the  mountains  to  come  out  of  their  fastnesses  with 
nuggets  of  gold  to  make  purchases.  Cotton,  sugar,  rice,  hemp,  coffee  and  tobacco,  all 
tropical  fruits  and  woods,  are  of  the  products.  There  is  profusion  of  the  riches  that 
await  the  freedom  of  labor  and  the  security  of  capital,  and  the  happiness  of  the 
people.  Under  American  government  the  Philippines  would  prosper,  and  it  would 
be  one  of  our  tasks  to  frame  legislation.  The  laws  of  Congress  would  be  the  higher 


.WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


113 


code  of  law,  and  the  Philippines  would  desire,  and  be  invited,  of  course,  to  send  their 
ablest  men  to  be  Territorial  representatives  in  the  Congress  of  the  United  States.  In 
the  name  of  peace,  therefore,  and  in  behalf  of  the  dignity  and  authority  of  this  Nation 
— in  mercy  to  the  Spaniards,  in  justice  to  the  Filipinos,  it  is  due  ourselves,  and 
should  have  the  favor  of  all  who  would  see  our  country  expand  with  the  ages,  and 
walking  in  the  footsteps  of  Washington  and  Jefferson,  finding  the  path  of  empire 
that  of  freedom  and  taking  our  place  as  a great  Power,  accepting  the  logic  of  our 
history,  and  the  discharge  of  the  duties  of  destiny — we  should  hold  on  to  the  Philip- 
pines— and  when  the  great  distance  of  those  islands  from  this  continent  is  men- 
tioned, remember  that  the  Pacific  may  now  be  crossed  in  as  few  days  as  was  the 
Atlantic  forty  years  ago. 

The  labor  questions  and  the  silver  questions  even  come  into  the  Philippines  prob- 
lem to  be  scanned  and  weighed.  In  Eastern  Asia,  which  we  have  invaded,  and  a 
part  of  which  we  have  appropriated  for  a time,  the  people  use  silver  for  the  measure 
of  value,  and  in  the  islands  that  interest  us,  as  they  do  not  deal  in  the  mysteries  of 
rupees,  but  in  dollars,  the  facts  in  the  case  are  plainly  within  the  common  under- 
standing. In  Manila  the  Mexican  dollar  goes  in  ordinary  small  exchanges,  payment 
of  wages  and  settlement  of  bills,  for  fifty  cents;  but  the  banks  sell  the  Mexicans 
twenty-one  of  them  for  ten  gold  dollars — an  American  eagle!  So  far  as  the  native 
people  go,  labor  and  produce  are  counted  in  silver,  and  the  purchaser,  or  employer 
gets  as  much  for  a silver  dollar  as  for  a gold  dollar.  The  native  will  take  ten  dollars 
in  gold  for  ten  dollars  only  in  all  settlements  of  accounts,  and  would  just  as  willingly 
— even  more  so,  accept  ten  Mexican  dollars  as.  ten  American  dollars  in  gold  coin. 
Salaries  are  paid  and  goods  delivered  according  to  the  silver  standard.  Of  course,  in 
due  time  this  state  of  things  will  pass  away,  if  we  hold  to  the  gold  standard,  but  as  the 
case  stands  the  soldiers  and  sailors  of  our  army  and  fleet,  paid  under  the  home  stand- 
ard, receive  double  pay,  and  get  double  value  received  for  clothing,  tobacco  and  what- 
ever they  find  they  want — indeed,  for  the  necessaries  and  luxuries  of  life.  The  double 
standard  in  this  shape  is  not  distasteful  to  the  boys. 

We  have  both  theories  and  conditions  confronting  us  in  these  aspects  of  the  silver 
and  labor  questions.  The  Oriental  people  are  obdurate  in  their  partiality  for  silver. 
It  is  the  cheaper  labor  that  adheres  to  the  silver  standard,  partially,  it  is  held,  because 
silver  is  the  more  convenient  money  for  the  payment  of  small  sums.  But  labor  can- 
not be  expected,  at  its  own  expense,  to  sustain  silver  for  the  profit  of  capital,  or  rather 
of  the  middle  man  between  labor  and  capital.  Labor,  so  far  as  it  is  in  politics  in  this 
country,  should  not,  without  most  careful  study  and  deliberation,  conclude  that  its 
force  in  public  affairs  would  be  abated,  and  its  policy  of  advancing  wages  antagonized 


114 


WHY  WE  HOLD  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


by  the  absorption  of  the  Philippines  in  our  country.  On  the  contrary,  the  states- 
manship that  is  representative  of  labor  may  discover  that  it  is  a great  fact,  one  of 
the  greatest  of  facts,  that  the  various  countries  and  continents  of  the  globe  are  being 
from  year  to  year  more  and  more  closely  associated,  and  that  to  those  intelligently 
interested,  without  regard  to  the  application  of  their  views  of  justice  or  expediency, 
in  the  labor  and  silver  questions — the  convictions,  the  fanaticisms,  of  the  vast  silver 
nations — and  enormous  multitudes  of  the  people  of  Asia,  touching  the  silver  standard 
— and  the  possible  progress  of  labor,  as  a guiding  as  well  as  plodding  ability  in- 
creases incessantly  in  interest,  and  must  grow  in  inheritance.  As  the  conditions  of 
progressive  civilization  are  developed  our  interests  cannot  be  wholly  dissevered  from 
those  of  the  Asiatics.  We  would  be  unwise  to  contemplate  the  situation  of  to-day  as 
one  that  can  or  should  perpetuate  itself.  Suppose  we  accept,  the  governing  responsi- 
bility in  the  Philippines.  It  it  not  beyond  the  range  of  reasonable  conjecture  that 
American  labor  can  educate  the  laborers  of  the  Philippines  out  of  their  state  of  servi- 
tude as  cheap  laborers,  and  lead  them  to  co-operate  rather  than  compete  with  us,  and 
not  to  go  into  the  silver  question  further  than  to  consent  that  it  exists,  and  is  in  the 
simplest  form  of  statement,  whether  the  change  in  the  market  value  of  the  two 
money  metals  is  natural  or  artificial.  It  is  necessary  in  common  candor  to  state  that 
the  most  complete  solution  of  the  money  metal  embarrassments  would  be  through 
the  co-operation  of  Asia  and  America.  Europe  is  for  gold,  Asia  for  silver,  and  the 
Americas  divided.  Japan  is  an  object  lesson,  her  approximation  to  the  gold  stand- 
ard has  caused  in  the  Empire  an  augmentation  of  the  compensation  of  labor.  This 
is  not  wholly  due  to  the  change  in  the  standard.  The  war  with  China,  the  increase 
in  the  army  and  navy,  and  the  absorption  of  laborers  in  Formosa,  the  new  country  of 
Japan,  have  combined  with  the  higher  standard  of  value,  to  elevate  wages.  All  facts 
are  of  primary  excellence  in  the  formation  of  the  policies  of  nations. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 

Area  and  Population — Climate — Mineral  Wealth — Agriculture — Commerce  and 
Transportation — Revenue  and  Expenses — Spanish  Troops — Spanish  Navy — ■ 
Spanish  Civil  Administration — Insurgent  Troops — Insurgent  Civil  Adminis- 
tration— United  States  Troops — United  States  Navy — United  States  Civil 
Administration — The  Future  of  the  Islands. 

General  Frank  Y.  Greene  made  an  exhaustive  study  of  all  reports  of  an  official 
character  regarding  the  area,  population,  climate,  resources,  commerce,  revenue  and 
expenses  of  the  Philippines  Islands,  and  prepared  a memorandum  for  the  general 
information  that  is  the  most  thorough  and  complete  ever  made,  and  is  the  latest  and 
highest  authority  on  all  the  subjects  to  which  it  relates,  and  they  include  the  solid 
information  the  business  men  of  the  United  States  want  respecting  our  Asiatic 
associations.  The  memorandum  is  herewith  submitted  in  substance,  and  all  the 
particulars  of  public  concern. 

AREA  AND  POPULATION. 

These  islands,  including  the  Ladrones,  Carolinas  and  Palaos,  which  are  all  under 
the  Government  of  Manila,  are  variously  estimated  at  from  1,200  to  1,300  in  number. 
The  greater  portion  of  these  are  small  and  of  no  more  value  than  the  islands  off  the 
coast  of  Alaska.  The  important  islands  are  less  than  a dozen  in  number,  and  90  per 
cent,  of  the  Christian  population  live  on  Luzon  and  the  five  principal  islands  of  the 
Visayas  group. 

The  total  population  is  somewhere  between  7,000,000  and  9,000,000.  This  in- 
cludes the  wild  tribes  of  the  mountains  of  Luzon  and  of  the  islands  in  the  extreme 
south.  The  last  census  taken  by  the  Spanish  Government  was  on  December  31,  1887, 
and  this  stated  the  Christian  population  to  be  6,000,000  (in  round  numbers).  This  is 
distributed  as  follows: 


Per 

Area.  Population.  Sq.  Mile. 

Luzon 44,400  3,426,000  79 

Panay 4,700  735,000  155 

Cebu 2,400  504,000  210 

Leyte 3,300  279,000  71 

Bohol 1,300  245,000  188 

Negros 3,300  242,000  73 


59,800 

115 


5,422,000 


91 


116 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


The  density  of  population  in  these  six  islands  is  nearly  50  per  cent,  greater  than 
in  Illinois  and  Indiana  (census  of  1890),  greater  than  in  Spain,  about  one-half  as 
great  as  in  France,  and  one-third  as  great  as  in  Japan  and  China,  the  exact  figures 
being  as  follows: 


Per 

Area.  Population.  Sq.  Mile. 

Illinois 56,000  3,826,351  68 

Indiana 35,910  2,192,494  61 


91,910  6,018,755  64 

Spain 197,670  17,565,632  88 

France 204,092  38,517,975  189 

Japan 147,655  42,270,620  286 

China 1,312,328  383,253,029  292 

The  next  most  important  islands,  in  the  order  of  population,  are: 

Per 

Area.  Population.  Sq.  Mile. 

Mindanao 34,000  209,000  6 

Samar 4,800  186,000  38 

Mindoro 4,000  67,000  17 

Nomblon 600  35,000  58 

Masbate 1,400  21,000  15 


44,800  518,000  11 

Various  smaller  islands,  including  the  Carolinas,  Ladrones  and  Palaos,  carry  the 
total  area  and  Christian  population  to — 

140,000  6,000,000  43 

This  is  considerably  greater  than  the  density  of  population  in  the  States  east  of 
the  Rocky  Mountains.  Owing  to  the  existence  of  mountain  ranges  in  all  the 
islands,  and  lack  of  communication  in  the  interior,  only  a small  part  of  the  surface  is 
inhabited.  In  many  provinces  the  density  of  population  exceeds  200  per  square 
mile,  or  greater  than  that  of  any  of  the  United  States,  except  Massachusetts  and 
Rhode  Island.  The  total  area  of  the  Philippines  is  about  the  same  as  that  of  Japan, 
but  its  civilized  population  is  only  one-seventh. 

In  addition  to  the  Christian  population,  it  is  estimated  (in  the  Official  Guide) 
that  the  islands  contain  the  following: 


Chinese  (principally  in  Manila) 75.000 

Moors  or  Mohametans  in  Paragon  and  Jok 100,000 

Moors  or  Mohametans  in  Mindanao  and  Basilan 209,000 

Heathen  in  the  Philippines 830,000 

Heathen  in  the  Carolinas  and  Palaos 50,000 


1,264,000 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


117 


The  Official  Guide  gives  a list  of  more  than  thirty  different  races,  each  speaking 
a different  dialect;, but  five-sixths  of  the  Christian  population  are  either  Tagalos  or 
Visayas.  All  the  races  are  of  the  Malay  type.  Around  Manila  there  has  been 
some  mixture  of  Chinese  and  Spanish  blood  with  that  of  the  natives,  resulting  in 
the  Mestizos  or  Half-breeds,  but  the  number  of  these  is  not  very  great. 

As  seen  in  the  provinces  of  Cavite  and  Manila,  the  natives  (Tagalos)  are  of  small 
stature,  averaging  probably  5 feet  4 inches  in  height,  ind  120  pounds  in  weight  for 
the  men,  and  5 feet  in  height,  and  100  pounds  in  v eight  for  the  women.  Their 
skin  is  coppery  brown,  somewhat  darker  than  that  of  the  mulatto.  They  seem  to 
be  industrious  and  hard-working,  although  less  so  than  the  Chinese.  By  the  Span- 
iards they  are  considered  indolent,  crafty,  untruthful,  cowardly  and  cruel,  but  the 


ORIENTAL  HOTEL,  MANILA. 


hatred  between  the  Spaniards  and  the  native  races  is  so  intense  and  bitter  that  the 
Spanish  opinion  of  the  natives  is  of  little  or  no  value.  To  us  they  seem  industrious 
and  docile,  but  there  are  occasional  evidences  of  deceit  and  untruthfulness  in  their 
dealings  with  us.  The  bulk  of  the  population  is  engaged  in  agriculture,  and  there 
.were  hardly  any  evidences  of  manufactures,  arts  or  mining.  The  greater  number 
seemed  to  be  able  to  read  and  write,  but  I have  been  unable  to  obtain  any  exact 
figures  on  this  subject.  They  are  all  devout  Roman  Catholics,  although  they  hate 
the  monastic  orders. 

In  Manila  (and  doubtless  also  in  Cebu  and  Iloilo)  are  many  thousands  of  edu- 
cated natives,  who  are  merchants,  lawyers,  doctors  and  priests.  They  are  well  in- 
formed and  have  accumulated  property.  They  have  not  traveled  much,  but  there 
is  said  to  be  quite  a numerous  colony  of  rich  Filipinos  in  Madrid,  as  well  as  in 


118 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


Paris  and  London.  The  bibliography  of  the  Philippines  is  said  to  number  4,500 
volumes,  the  greater  part  of  which  have  been  written  by  Spanish  priests  and  mis- 
sionaries. The  number  of  books  on  the  subject  in  the  English  language  is  probably 
less  than  a dozen. 

CLIMATE. 

The  climate  is  one  of  the  best  known  in  the  tropics.  The  islands  extend  from 
5 to  SI  deg.  north  latitude,  a id  Manila  is  in  14d.  35m.  The  thermometer  during 
July  and  August  rarely  went  below  79  or  above  85.  The  extreme  ranges  in  a year 
are  said  to  be  01  and  97,  and  the  annual  mean,  81.  There  are  three  well-marked 
seasons,  temperate  and  dry  from  November  to  February,  hot  and  dry  from  March  to 
May,  and  temperate  and  wet  from  June  to  October.  The  rainy  season  reaches  its 
maximum  in  July  and  August,  when  the  rains  are  constant  and  very  heavy.  The 
total  rainfall  has  been  as  high  as  114  inches  in  one  year. 

Yellow  fever  appears  to  be  unknown.  The  diseases  most  fatal  among  the 
natives  are  cholera  and  smallpox,  both  of  which  are  brought  from  China.  Low 
malarial  fever  is  brought  on  by  sleeping  on  the  ground  or  being  chilled  by  remaining, 
without  exercise,  in  wet  clothes;  and  diarrhea  is  produced  by  drinking  bad  water  or 
eating  excessive  quantities  of  fruit.  Almost  all  of  these  diseases  are  preventable  by 
proper  precautions,  even  by  troops  in  campaign.  The  sickness  in  our  troops  was 
very  small,  much  less  than  in  the  cold  fogs  at  camp  in  San  Francisco. 

MINERAL  WEALTH. 

Very  little  is  known  concerning  the  mineral  wealth  of  the  islands.  It  is  stated 
that  there  are  deposits  of  coal,  petroleum,  iron,  lead,  sulphur,  copper  and  gold  in 
the  various  islands,  but  little  or  nothing  has  been  done  to  develop  them.  A few 
concessions  have  been  granted  for  working  mines,  but  the  output  is  not  large.  The 
gold  is  reported  on  Luzon,  coal  and  petroleum  on  Cebu  and  Iloilo,  and  sulphur  on 
Leyte.  The  imports  of  coal  in  1894  (the  latest  year  for  which  the  statistics  have 
been  printed)  were  91,511  tons,  and  it  came  principally  from  Australia  and  Japan. 
In  the  same  year  the  imports  of  iron  of  all  kinds  were  9,G32  tons. 

If  the  Cebu  coal  proves  to  be  good  quality  there  is  a large  market  for  it  in  com- 
petition with  the  coal  from  Japan  and  Australia. 

AGRICULTURE. 

Although  agriculture  is  the  chief  occupation  of  the- Philippines,  yet  only  one- 
ninth  of  the  surface  is  under  cultivation.  The  soil  is  very  fertile,  and  even  after 
deducting  the  mountainous  areas,  it  is  probable  that  the  area  of  cultivation  can  be 
very  largely  extended,  and  that  the  islands  can  support  a.  population  equal  to  that  of 
Japan  (42,000,000). 


THE  8UETAN  OF  JQEQ  IN  MINDANAO, 


A BEHEADED  SPANIARD— SIGN  OF  THE  ORDER  OF  KATIPUNAN. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


The  chief  products  are  rice,  corn,  hemp,  sugar,  tobacco,  cocoanuts  and  cacao. 
Coffee  and  cotton  were  formerly  produced  in  large  quantities — the  former  for  export 
and  the  latter  for  home  consumption;  hut  the  coffee  plant  has  been  almost  exter- 
minated by  insects,  and  the  home  made  cotton  clothes  have  been  driven  out  by  the 
competition  of  those  imported  from  England.  The  rice  and  corn  are  principally  pro- 
duced in  Luzon  and  Mindoro,  and  are  consumed  in  the  islands;  the  rice  crop  is  about 

765.000  tons;  it  is  insufficient  for  the  demand  and  45,000  tons  of  rice  were  im- 
ported in  1894,  the  greater  portion  from  Saigon,  and  the  rest  from  Hongkong  and 
Singapore;  also  8,669  tons  (say  60,000  barrels)  of  flour,  of  which  more  than  two- 
thirds  came  from  China  and  less  than  one-third  from  the  United  States. 

The  cacao  is  raised  in  the  southern  islands,  the  best  quality  of  it  in  Mindanao. 
The  production  amounts  to  only  150  tons,  and  it  is  all  made  into  chocolate  and 
consumed  in  the  islands. 

The  sugar  cane  is  raised  in  the  Visayas.  The  crop  yielded,  in  1894,  about 

235.000  tons  of  raw  sugar,  of  which  one-tenth  was  consumed  in  the  islands  and 
the  balance,  or  210,000  tons,  valued  at  $11,000,000,  was  exported,  the  greater  part 
to  China,  Great  Britain  and  Australia. 

The  hemp  is  produced  in  southern  Luzon,  Mindoro,  the  Visayas  and  Mindanao. 
It  is  nearly  all  exported  in  bales.  In  the  year  1894  the  amount  was  96,000  tons, 
valued  at  $12,000,000. 

Tobacco  is  raised  in  all  the  islands,  but  the  best  quality  and  the  greatest  amount 
in  Luzon.  A large  amount  is  consumed  in  the  islands,  smoking  being  universal 
among  the  women  as  well  as  the  men,  but  the  best  quality  is  exported.  The  amount, 
in  1894,  was  7,000  tons  of  leaf  tobacco,  valued  at  $1,100,000,  and  1,400  tons  of 
manufactured  tobacco,  valued  at  $1,750,000.  Spain  takes  30  per  cent,  and  Egypt 
10  per  cent  of  the  leaf  tobacco.  Of  the  manufactured  tobacco,  70  per  cent,  goes  to 
China  and  Singapore,  10  per  cent,  to  England,  and  5 per  cent,  to  Spain. 

Cocoanuts  are  grown  in  southern  Luzon  and  are  used  in  various  ways.  The 
products  are  largely  used  in  the  islands,  but  the  exports,  in  1894,  were  valued  at 
$2,400,000. 

Cattle,  goats  and  sheep  have  been  introduced  from  Spain,  but  they  are  not 
numerous.  Domestic  pigs  and  chickens  are  seen  around  every  hut  in  the  farming 
districts. 

The  principal  beast  of  burden  is  the  carabac  or  water  buffalo,  which  is  used  for 
ploughing  rice  fields,  as  well  as  drawing  heavy  loads  on  sledges  or  on  carts. 

Large  horses  are  almost  unknown,  but  there  are  great  numbers  of  native  ponies, 
from  nine  to  twelve  hands  high,  but  possessing  strength  and  endurance  far  beyond 


122 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


COMMERCE  AND  TRANSPORTATION. 

The  internal  commerce  between  Manila  and  the  different  islands  is  quite  large, 
hut  I was  unable  to  find  any  official  records  giving  exact  figures  concerning  it.  It  is 
carried  on  almost  entirely  by  water,  in  steamers  of  500  to  1,000  tons.  There  are 
regular  mail  steamers,  once  in  two  weeks,  on  four  routes,  viz.;  Northern  Luzon, 
Southern  Luzon,  Yisayas  and  Mindanao;  also  a steamer  every  two  months  to  the 
Carolinas  and  Ladrones,  and  daily  steamers  on  Manila  Bay.  These  lines  are  all  sub- 
sidized. To  facilitate  this  navigation  extensive  harbor  works  have  been  in  progress  at 
Manila  for  several  years,  and  a plan  for  lighting  the  coasts  has  been  made,  calling 
for  forty-three  principal  lights,  of  which  seventeen  have  already  been  constructed 
in  the  most  substantial  manner,  besides  sixteen  lights  of  secondary  importance. 

There  is  only  one  line  of  railway,  built  by  English  capital,  running  from  Manila 
north  to  Dagupan,  a distance  of  about  120  miles.  The  roads  in  the  immediate 
vicinity  of  Manila  are  macadamized  and  in  fairly  good  order;  elsewhere  they  are 
narrow  paths  of  soft,  black  soil,  which  becomes  almost  impassable  in  the  rainy  sea- 
son. Transportation  is  then  effected  by  sledges,  drawn  through  the  mud  by  carabacs. 
There  are  telegraph  lines  connecting  most  of  the  provinces  of  Luzon  with  Manila, 
and  cables  to  the  Yisayas  and  southern  islands,  and  thence  to  Borneo  and  Singapore, 
as  well  as  a direct  cable  from  Manila  to  Hongkong.  The  land  telegraph  lines  are 
owned  by  the  Government,  and  the  cables  all  belong  to  an  English  company,  which 
receives  a large  subsidy.  In  Manila  there  is  a narrow  gauge  street  railway,  operated 
by  horse-power,  about  eleven  miles  in  total  length;  also  a telephone  system,  and 
electric  lights. 

Communications  with  Europe  are  maintained  by  the  Spanish  Trans-Atlantic 
Company  (subsidized),  which  sends  a steamer  every  four  weeks  from  Manila  and 
Barcelona,  making  the  trip  in  about  twenty-seven  days.  The  same  company  also 
sends  an  intermediate  steamer  from  Manila  to  Singapore,  meeting  the  French  Mes- 
sagoric  each  way.  There  is  also  a non-subsidized  line  running  from  Manila  to 
Hongkong  every  two  weeks,  and  connecting  there  with  the  English,  French  and 
German  mails  for  Europe,  and  with  the  Pacific  mail  and  Canadian  Pacific  steamers 
for  Japan  and  America. 

There  has  been  no  considerable  development  of  manufacturing  industries  in  the 
Philippines.  The  only  factories  are  those  connected  with  the  preparation  of  rice, 
tobacco  and  sugar.  Of  the  manufactures  and  arts,  in  which  J apan  so  excels,  there  is 
no  evidence. 

The  foreign  commerce  amounted,  in  1894,  to  $28,558,552  in  imports,  and 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


123 


$33,149,984  in  exports,  80  per  cent,  of  which  goes  through  Manila.  About  60  per 
cent,  of  the  trade  is  carried  in  British  vessels,  20  per  cent,  in  Spanish  and  10  per 
cent,  in  German. 

The  value  of  the  commerce  with  other  countries  in  1894  was  as  follows: 


IN  MILLIONS  OF  DOLLARS  (SILVER). 


Spain 

Great  Britain. . 

China 

Germany 

Saigon 

United  States. . 

France 

Singapore 

J apan 

Australia 

Other  Countries 


Imports. 

10.5 

. ...  7.1 
. ...  4.6 

1.9 

9 

7 

7 

4 

2 

1 

1.5 


Exports. 

2.9 

8.7 

6.8 


7.4 

1.2 

1.7 

1.2 

2.6 

.6 


25.6  33.1 


It  is  interesting  to  note  that  next  to  Great  Britain  we  are  the  largest  customers 
of'  the  Philippines,  and  that  they  export  to  us  nearly  three  times  as  much  as  to 
Spain.  On  the  other  hand  Spain  sells  to  the  Philippines  fifteen  times  as  much 
as  we  do. 

The  articles  of  import  and  their  value  in  1894  were  as  follows: 


IN  MILLIONS  OF  DOLLARS  (SILVER). 

Other 

Great  Ger-  United  Coun- 


Spain.  Britain. 

China. 

many. 

States. 

tries. 

Total. 

Cotton  Goods.. 

...  3.9 

4.0 

.4 

.3 

. . 

.7 

9.3 

Cotton  Yarns.. 

. . . 1.2 

.9 

.2 

.1 

# , 

.1 

2.5 

Wines 

...  1.8 

.1  1.9 

Russia. 

Mineral  Oils . . . 

...  , , 

. , 

.2 

# , 

.4 

.8 

1.4 

Iron 

. . . .2 

.7 

, . 

.2 

# . 

.1 

1.2 

Rice 

, , 

1.0 

# # 

. , 

.1 

1.1 

Flour 

. , . . 

, , 

.7 

. , 

.2 

.9 

Sweet  Meats . . . 

. . . .5 

, ' 

, , 

. , 

. . 

.3 

.8 

Paper 

..  . .4 

• • 

• • 

.1 

, . 

.2 

.7 

Linen  Goods.  . . 

. . . .1 

.1 

.1 

. . 

. , 

.3 

.6 

Hats 

. . . .1 

, , 

, , 

.3 

. . 

.2 

.6 

Other  Articles. 

...  2.3 

1.4 

2.0 

.9 

.1 

.9 

7.6 

— 





— 

— 

— 

10.5 

7.1 

4.6 

1.9 

.7 

3.8 

28.6 

124  THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 

The  articles  of  export  and  their  value  in  1894  were  as  follows: 


IN  MILLIONS  OF  DOLLARS  (SILVER). 

Other 

Great  United  Aus-  Coun- 

Spain.  Britain.  China.  States,  tralia.  tries.  Total. 


Hemp 5.3  .9  6.6  .6  1.1“  14.5 

Sugar 4 2.7  4.0  .7  1.9  1.3b  11.0 

Man’f.  Tobacco 2 .1  .7  ..  .1  .7a  1.3 

Leaf  Tobacco 1.1  ..  ..  ..  ..  .3  1.4 

Coffee 3 . . .1  . . . . . . .4 

Coeoanuts .6  .1  ..  ..  ..  .7 

Other  Articles 9 . . 1.0  .1  . . 1.3  3.3 


2.9  8.7  6.8  7.4  2.6  4.7  33.16 

“Principally  to  Singapore. 
b Principally  to  Japan. 

With  these  islands  in  our  possession  and  the  construction  of  railroads  in  the 
interior  of  Luzon,  it  is  probable  that  an  enormous  extension  could  be  given  to  this 
commerce,  nearly  all  of  which  would  come  to  the  United  States.  Manila  cigars  of 
the  best  quality  are  unknown  in  America.  They  are  but  little  inferior  to  the  best 
of  Cuba,  and  cost  only  one-third  as  much.  The  coffee  industry  can  be  revived  and 
the  sugar  industry  extended,  mainly  for  consumption  in  the  far  East.  The  mineral 
resources  can  be  explored  with  American  energy,  and  there  is  every  reason  to  be- 
lieve that  when  this  is  done  the  deposits  of  coal,  iron,  gold  and  lead  will  be  found  very 
valuable.  On  the  other  hand,  we  ought  to  be  able  to  secure  the  greater  part  of 
the  trade  which  now  goes  to  Spain  in  textile  fabrics,  and  a considerable  portion  of 
that  with  England  in  the  same  goods  and  in  iron. 


REVENUE  AND  EXPENSES. 

The  budget  for  the  fiscal  year  ending  June  30,  1897,  was  as  follows: 


INCOME. 


1st.  Direct  Taxes $8,496,170 

2nd.  Indirect  Taxes  (Customs) 6,200,550 

3rd.  Proceeds  of  Monopolies 1,222,000 

4th.  Lottery 1,000,000 

5th.  Income  of  Government  Property 257,000 

6th.  Sundry  Receipts 298,300 


Total...., $17,474,020 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


125 


EXPENSES. 

1st.  General  Expenses,  Pensions  and  Interest $1,506,686 

2nd.  Diplomatic  and  Consular  Service 74,000 

3rd.  Clergy  and  Courts 1,876,740 

4th.  War  Department 6,035,316 

5th.  Treasury  Department 1,392,414 

6th.  Navy  Department 3,562,716 

7th.  Civil  Administration 2,195,378 

8th.  Education 614,395 


Total $17,258,145 

The  Direct  Taxes  were  as  follows: 

1st.  Eeal  Estate,  5 per  cent,  on  income $ 140,280 

2nd.  Industry  and  Commerce 1,400,700 

3rd.  Cedalas  (Poll  Tax) 5,600,000 

4th.  Chinese  Poll  Tax 510,190 

5th.  Tribute  from  Sultan  of  Jolo 20,000 

6th.  Railroads.  10  per  cent,  of  Passenger  Receipts 32,000 

7th.  Income  Tax,  10  per  cent,  on  Public  Salaries 730,000 

8th.  Sundry  Taxes 63,000 


Total ,$8,496,170 

Indirect  Taxes  were  as  follows: 

1st.  Imports $3,600,000 

2nd.  Exports 1,292,550 

3rd.  Loading  Tax 410,000 

4th.  LTnloading  Tax 570,000 

5th.  Fines  and  Penalties ' 27,000 

6th.  Special  Tax  on  Liquors,  Beer,  Vegetables,  Flour, 

Salt  and  Mineral  Oils 301,000 


Total $6,200,550 

Monopolies: 

1st.  Opium  Contract $ 576,000 

2nd.  Stamped  Paper  and  Stamps 646,000 


Total $1,222,000 

Lottery: 

1st.  Sale  of  Tickets,  Less  Cost  of  Prizes $ 964,000 

2nd.  Unclaimed  Prizes 30,000 

3rd.  Sundry  Receipts 6,000 


Total $1,000,000 

Income  of  Government  Property: 

1st.  Forestry  Privileges $ 170,000 

2nd.  Sale  and  Rent  of  Public  Land  and  Buildings 85,000 

3rd.  Mineral  Privileges 2,00® 


Total 


$257,00® 


126 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  APE. 


Sundry  Receipts: 

1st.  Mint  (Seignorage) 
2nd.  Sundries 


$200,000 

98,300 


Total 


$298,300 


The  largest  source  of  income  is  th  Cedala  or  Poll  Tax.  Every  man  and  woman 
above  18  years  of  age,  residing  in  the  Philippines,  whether  Spanish  subject  or  for- 
eigner, is  required  to  have  in  his  or  her  possession  a paper  stating  name,  age,  and 
occupation,  and  other  facts  of  personal  identity.  Failure  to  produce  and  exhibit 
this  when  called  upon  renders  anyone  liable  to  arrest  and  imprisonment.  This 


paper  is  obtained  from  the  internal  revenue  office  annually,  on  payment  of  a cer- 
tain sum,  varying,  according  to  the  occupation  and  income  of  the  person  from 
$0.75  to  $20.00,  and  averaging  about  $3.00  for  each  adult.  An  extra  sum  of  2 per 
cent,  is  paid  for  expenses  of  collection.  The  tax  is  collected  at  the  Tribunal  in  each 
pueblo,  and  20  per  cent,  is  retained  for  expenses  of  local  administration,  and  80  pei 
cent,  paid  to  the  General  Treasury.  This  tax  falls  heavily  on  the  poor  and  lightly 
on  the  rich.  The  tax  on  industry  and  commerce  is  similarly  graded  according  to  the 
volume  of  business  transacted  by  each  merchant  or  mercantile  corporation.  The  tax 
on  real  estate  is  absurdly  low  and  levied  only  on  municipal  property  and  on  the 
rent,  not  the  value. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


127 


The  tax  on  imports  is  specific  and  not  ad  valorum;  it  amounts  to  about  13  per  cent, 
of  estimated  values.  The  free  list  is  very  small,  nearly  everything  of  commercial 
value  which  is  imported  being  subject  to  duty.  The  revenue  from  imports  has 
increased  from  $566,143  in  1865,  to  $3,695,446  in  1894.  It  was  about  the  same  in 
1897.  On  the  other  hand  the  export  tax,  which  was  nothing  in  1892,  the  load- 
ing tax,  which  was  nothing  in  1893,  and  the  unloading  tax,  which  was  nothing  in 
1894,  have  all  been  increased  in  the  last  few  years  in  order  to  meet  the  expenses  of 
suppressing  the  insurrection.  These  three  items  yielded  nearly  $2,700,000  in  1897. 

The  monopoly  of  importing  and  selling  opium  is  sold,  by  auction,  to  the  highest 
bidder  for  a term  of  three  years.  The  present  contract  runs  until  1899,  and  yields 
$48,000  per  month. 

Every  legal  document  must  be  drawn  up  on  paper  containing  a revenue  stamp, 
engraved  and  printed  in  Spain,  and  every  note,  check,  draft,  bill  of  exchange,  receipt 
or  similar  document  must  bear  a revenue  stamp  in  order  to  be  valid.  These  stamps 
and  stamped  paper  yielded  a revenue  of  $646,000  in  1897. 

The  lottery  is  conducted  by  the  Government — the  monthly  drawings  taking  place 
in  the  Treasury  (Hacienda)  Department.  The  sale  of  tickets  yielded  $1,000,000 
over  and  above  prizes  in  1897. 

In  a report  to  General  Merritt,  on  August  29th,  I recommended  that  the  opium 
contract  be  cancelled  and  the  lottery  abandoned  during  our  occupation  of  Manila; 
and  as  the  poll  tax  and  the  tax  on  industry  and  commerce  had  been  paid  for  the 
most  part  in  the  early  part  of  the  yeai,  our  chief  sources  of  revenue  were  from  the 
custom  house,  the  sale  of  stamps  and  stamped  paper,  and  the  sale  of  such  licenses  as 
the  law  allowed  (amusements,  liquor  saloons,  etc.),  for  the  benefit  of  the  city  of 
Manila  as  distinguished  from  the  general  revenue.  I estimated  the  total  at  about 
$500,000  per  month. 

The  expenses  of  administering  the  military  government  of  occupation  (apart 
from  the  expenses  of  the  army)  will  consist  of  the  current  expenses  of  the  office 
at  the  Provost  Marshal  General’s  office  and  its  various  bureaus — at  the  custom  house, 
internal  revenue  office,  and  other  offices — and  the  salaries  of  interpreters  and  minor 
employes  who  are  anxious  to  resume  work  as  soon  as  they  dare  do  so.  An  estimate 
of  these  expenses  was  being  prepared  at  the  time  I left,  but  was  not  completed.  It 
can  hardly  exceed  $200,000  per  month  and  may  be  much  less.  This  should  leave 
$300,000  (silver)  excess  of  income  per  month,  to  go  towards  the  military  expenses 
of  occupation. 

As  soon  as  it  is  decided  that  we  are  to  retain  the  islands  it  will  be  necessary  to 
make  a careful  study  of  the  sources  of  revenue  and  items  of  expenses  for  all  the 


128 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


islands,  with  a view  to  thoroughly  understanding  the  subject,  before  introducing  the 
extensive  changes  which  will  be  necessary. 


The  standard  of  value  has  always,  until  within  a few  years,  been  the  Mexican 
milled  dollar.  The  Spanish  dollar  contains  a little  less  silver  and,  in  order  to 
introduce  it  and  profit  by  the  coinage,  the  Spaniards  prohibited  the  importation  of 
Mexican  dollars  a few  years  since.  Large  numbers  of  Mexican  dollars  remained 


in  that  country,  however,  and  others  were  smuggled  in.  The  two  dollars  circulate 
at  equal  value. 

All  valuations  of  goods  and  labor  are  based  on  the  silver  dollar,  and  a change  to 
the  gold  standard  would  result  in  great  financial  distress  and  many  failures  among 
the  banks  and  mercantile  houses  in  Manila.  Their  argument  is  that  while  an 
American  ten-dollar  gold  piece  will  bring  twenty-one  silver  dollars  at  any  bank  or 
house  having  foreign  connections,  yet  it  will  not  buy  any  more  labor  or  any  more 
hemp  and  sugar  from  the  original  producer  than  ten  silver  dollars.  The  products  of 
the  country  are  almost  entirely  agricultural,  and  the  agricultural  class,  whether  it 
sells  its  labor  or  its  products,  would  refuse  to  accept  any  less  than  the  accustomed 
wages  or  prices,  on  account  of  being  paid  in  the  more  valuable  coin.  The  result 


CURRENCY. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


129 


of  the  change  would  be  that  the  merchant  or  employe  would  have  to  pay  double 
for  what  he  buys,  and  would  receive  no  increase  for  what  he  sells.  While  trade 
would  eventually  adjust  itself  to  the  change,  yet  many  merchants  would  be  ruined  in 
the  process  and  would  drag  some  banks  down  with  them. 

The  Mexican  dollar  is  the  standard  also  in  Hongkong  and  China,  and  the  whole 
trade  of  the  Far  East  has,  for  generations,  been  conducted  on  a silver  basis.  Japan 
has,  within  the  last  year,  broken  away  from  this  and  established  the  gold  standard, 
but  in  doing  so  the  relative  value  of  silver  and  gold  was  fixed  at  32J  to  1,  or  about 
the  market  rate. 


I was  unable  to  obtain  any  precise  information  in  regard  to  the  colonial  debt. 
The  last  book  on  statistics  of  imports  and  exports  was  for  the  fiscal  year  1894,  and 
the  last  printed  budget  was  for  1896-7,  which  was  approved  by  the  Queen  Regent  in 
August,  1896.  Subsequent  to  this  date,  according  to  the  statements  made  to  me  by 
foreign  bankers,  the  Cortes  authorized  two  colonial  loans  of  $14,000,000  (silver) 
each,  known  as  Series  A and  Series  B.  The  proceeds  were  to  be  used  in  suppressing 
the  insurrection.  Both  were  to  be  secured  by  a first  lien  on  the  receipts  of  the 
Manila  custom  house. 

Series  A is  said  to  have  been  sold  in  Spain  and  the  proceeds  to  have  been  paid  into 
the  Colonial  Office;,  but  no  part  of  them  has  ever  reached  the  Philippines.  Possibly 


PUBLIC  DEBT. 


130 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


a portion  of  it  was  used  in  sending  out  the  25,000  troops  which  came  from  Spain 
to  the  Philippines  in  the  autumn  of  1896. 

Series  B was  offered  for  sale  in  Manila,  hut  was  not  taken.  An  effort  was  then 
made  to  obtain  subscribers  in  the  Provinces,  but  with  little  or  no  success.  The 
Government  then  notified  the  depositors  in  the  Public  Savings  Bank  (a  branch  of 
the  Treasury  Department  similar  to  the  postal  savings  bureaus  in  other  countries) 
that  their  deposits  would  no  longer  be  redeemed  in  cash,  hut  only  in  Series  B bonds. 
Some  depositors  were  frightened  and  took  bonds,  others  declined  to  do  so.  Then 
came  the  blockade  of  Manila  and  all  business  was  practically  suspended. 

No  printed  report  has  been  made  concerning  the  debt,  and  I was  unable  to 
obtain  any  satisfactory  statement  of  the  matter  from  the  treasury  officials. 

The  exact  in  regard  to  the  Scries  A bonds  can  be  learned  in  Madrid;  but  it  will 
be  difficult  to  learn  how  many  of  Series  B were  issued  and  what  consideration  was 
received  for  them. 

As  already  stated,  both  series  of  bonds  rest  for  security  on  the  receipts  of  the 
Manila  custom  house. 

SPANISH  TROOPS. 

The  Spanish  prisoners  of  war  number  about  13,000,  including  about  100  officers. 
The  infantry  arms  are  about  32,000,  the  greater  part  Mauser  model  1895,  caliber  28, 
and  the  others  Remingtons,  model  1889,  caliber  43.  The  ammunition  is  about 
22,000,000  rounds.  The  field  artillery  consists  of  about  twelve  breech-loading  steel 
guns,  caliber  3 5-10  inches,  and  ten  breech-loading  mountain  guns,  caliber  3 2-10 
inches.  There  are  six  horses  (ponies)  for  each  gun,  but  the  harness  is  in  bad  order. 
Ammunition,  about  sixty  rounds  per  gun,  with  possibly  more  in  the  arsenals.  There 
are  about  500  cavalry  ponies,  larger  than  the  average  of  native  horses,  with  saddles 
and  equipments  complete.  There  is  also  a battalion  of  engineers.  rl  he  fortifications 
of  the  walled  city  are  a fine  sample  of  the  Vauban  type,  on  which  military  engineers 
expended  so  much  ingenuity  150  years  ago,  and  of  which  Spain  possessed  so  many 
in  her  Flemish  dominions.  The  first  walls  of  Manila  were  built  about  1590,  but 
the  present  fortifications  date  from  a short  time  after  the  capture  and  occupation  of 
the  place  by  the  English,  in  1T62-64.  They  consist  of  bastions  and  curtains,  deep, 
wet  ditch,  covered  way,  lunettes,  demilunes,  hornworks,  and  all  the  scientific  acces- 
sories of  that  day.  They  are  in  a good  state  of  preservation,  and  mount  se\eral 
hundred  bronze  guns,  but  they  are  chiefly  of  interest  to  the  antiquarian.  On  the 
glacis  facing  the  bay,  and  also  on  the  open  space  just  south  of  the  walls,  are 
mounted  9-inch  breech  loaders,  four  in  all,  made  at  Hoatoria,  Spain,  in  1884. 
They  are  well  mounted,  between  high  traverses,  in  which  are  bomb-proof  magazines. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


131 


These  guns  are  practically  uninjured,  and  Admiral  Dewey  has  the  breech  blocks. 
While  not  as  powerful  as  the  guns  of  the  present  day  of  the  same  caliber,  they  are 
capable  of  effective  service.  Their  location,  however,  is  very  faulty,  as  they  are  on 
the  shore  of  the  bay,  with  all  the  churches,  public  buildings  and  most  valuable 
property  immediately  behind  them.  On  the  day  after  the  naval  battle  Admiral 
Dewey  sent  word  to  the  Governor-General  that  if  these  guns  fired  a shot  at  any  of 
his  vessels  he  would  immediately  reply  with  his  whole  squadron.  Owing  to  their 
location,  this  meant  a bombardment  of  the  city.  This  threat  was  effective;  these 
guns  were  never  afterward  fired,  not  even  during  the  attack  of  August  13th,  and  in 
return  the  navy  did  not  fire  on  them,  but  directed  all  their  shells  at  the  forts  and 
trenches  occupied  by  the  troops  outside  of  the  suburbs  of  the  city. 

Within  the  walled  city  are  the  cathedral  and  numerous  churches,  convents  and 
monasteries,  the  public  offices,  civil  and  military,  military  workshops  and  arsenals, 
barracks  for  artillery,  cavalry  and  engineers,  storehouses  and  a few  dwellings 
and  shops. 

The  infantry  barracks  are  outside  of  the  walls,  four  in  number;  viz.:  Neysing, 
Fortin,  Calzada  and  Fruita.  They  are  modern  and  well  constructed,  and  will 
accommodate  about  4,000  men.  They  are  now  occupied  by  the  United  States  troops. 

Under  the  terms  of  the  armistice  the  arms  laid  down  by  the  Spanish  troops  on 
August  14th  are  to  be  returned  to  them  whenever  they  evacuate  the  city,  or  the 
American  army  evacuates  it.  All  other  public  property,  including  horses,  artillery, 
public  funds,  munitions,  etc.,  is  surrendered  to  the  United  States  unconditionally. 

The  question  of  sending  back  the  troops  to  Spain  is  left  absolutely  to  the 
decision  of  the  authorities  in  Washington.  They  are  all  within  the  walled  city,  but 
as  the  public  buildings  are  insufficient  to  accommodate  them,  they  are  quartered  in 
the  churches  and  convents.  These  buildings  are  not  adapted  for  this  purpose; 
they  have  no  sinks,  lavatories,  kitchens  or  sleeping  apartments,  and  there  is  great 
danger  of  an  epidemic  of  sickness  if  the  troops  are  not  soon  removed. 

Pending  their  removal  they  are  being  fed  with  rations  furnished  by  the  United 
States  Commissary  Department,  and  the  officers  receive  from  the  United  States  suf- 
ficient money  for  their  support. 

SPANISH  NAYY. 

At  the  outbreak  of  the  war  the  naval  force  in  the  Philippines  consisted  of 

10  Cruisers. 

19  Gunboats. 

4 Armed  Launches. 

3 Transports. 

1 Survey  Boat. 


37 


182 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


Of  these  Admiral  Dewey  destroyed,  on  May  1st,  ten  cruisers  and  one  transport, 
and  he  has  since  captured  two  gunboats.  The  Spaniards  have  sunk  one  transport 
and  two  or  three  gunboats  in  the  Pasig  River.  There  remain  thirteen  or  fourteen 
gunboats,  which  are  scattered  among  the  islands.  They  are  of  iron,  from  140  to  200 
tons  each,  are  armed  with  one  breech-loading  rifle,  caliber  3 6-10  inches,  and  two  to 
four  machine  guns,  each  caliber  44-100  to  1 inch.  One  of  the  captured  boats,  the 
Callao,  under  command  of  Lieutenant  Tappan,  United  States  Navy,  and  a crew 
of  eighteen  men,  rendered  very  efficient  service  in  the  attack  of  August  13th.  These 
boats  would  all  be  useful  in  the  naval  police  of  the  islands.  They  will,  however,  prob- 
ably be  scuttled  by  the  Spaniards  before  the  islands  are  surrendered. 

The  Navy  Yard  at  Cavite  has  barracks  for  about  1,500  men  (now  occupied  by 
United  States  troops)  and  has  shops  and  ways  for  light  work  and  vessels  of  less  than 
1,000  tons.  Many  of  the  gunboats  above  mentioned  were  built  there.  The  shal- 
low depth  of  water  in  Canacoa  or  Cavite  Bay  would  prevent  the  enlargement  of  this 
naval  station  to  accommodate  large  vessels,  and  the  plan  of  the  Spaniards  was  to 
create  a large  naval  station  in  Subig  Bay,  on  which  considerable  money  has  already 
bec-n  spent. 

SPANISH  CIVIL  ADMINISTRATION. 

The  Government  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  including  the  Ladrones,  Carolinas 
and  Palaos,  is  vested  in  the  Governor-General,  who,  in  the  language  of  the  Spanish 
Official  Guide, or  Blue  Book,  “is  the  sole  and  legitimate  representative  in  these  islands 
of  the  supreme  power  of  the  Government  of  the  King  of  Spain,  and,  as  such,  is  th 
supreme  head  of  all  branches  of  the  public  service,  and  has  authority  to  inspect  ani 
supervise  the  same,  not  excepting  the  courts  of  justice”  The  office  is  held  by  4 
Lieutenant-General  in  the  Spanish  army,  and  he  is  also  Vice  Royal  Patron  of  the 
Indies,  exercising  in  these  islands  the  ecclesiastical  functions  conferred  on  the  King 
of  Spain  by  various  Bulls  of  the  Popes  of  Rome,  Captain-General-in-Chief  of  the 
Army  of  the  Philippines,  Inspector-General  of  all  branches  of  the  service,  Com- 
mander-in-Chief  of  the  Naval  Forces,  and  President  of  all  corporations  and  societies 
which  partake  of  an  official  character. 

What  corresponds  to  his  Cabinet,  or  Ministry,  consists  of 

(a)  The  Archbishop  of  Manila  and  four  Bishops,  who  administer  ecclesiastical 
affairs  in  the  five  dioceses  into  which  the  islands  are  divided  for  this  purpose;  the 
appointment  of  parish . priests  and  curates,  however,  is  vested  in  the  Governor- 
General.  The  various  religious  orders  which  exercise  so  large  an  influence  in  the 
politics  and  business  of  the  islands,  viz.:  Augustinians,  Dominicans,  Recollects, 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


133 


Franciscans,  Capuchins,  Benedictines  and  Jesuits,  are  all  under  the  management  of 
the  Bishops,  subject  to  the  supervision  of  the  Pope,  and  the  prerogatives  of  the  King 
as  Royal  Patron,  which  prerogatives  are  exercised  by  the  Governor-General  as 
Viceroy. 

(b)  The  High  Court  of  Justice  in  Manila,  which  is  the  Court  of  Appeals  in  civil 
and  governmental  eases  for  all  the  islands.  There  are  two  principal  criminal  courts 
in  Cebu  and  Vigan  (northern  Luzon)  and  appeal  in  criminal  cases  lies  to  these 
courts  or  to  the  High  Court  of  Manila.  In  every  Province  there  is  a court  of 
primary  jurisdiction  in  both  civil  and  criminal  cases. 

(c)  The  General,  second  in  command,  who  is  a General  of  Division  in  the 
Spanish  army.  He  is  the  sub-inspector  of  all  branches  of  the  military  service,  is 
Military  Governor  of  the  Province  and  city  of  Manila  and  commands  all  the  troops 
stationed  therein,  and  in  the  absence  or  sickness  of  the  Captain  General  he  com- 
mands all  the  military  forces  in  the  islands. 

(d)  The  General  Commandant  of  Dock  Yards  and  Squadron.  This  post  is  filled 
by  a Vice  Admiral  in  the  Spanish  navy,  and  he  commands  the  naval  forces,  ships  and 
establishments  in  the  islands. 

(e)  The  Minister  of  Finance,  or  Intendente  General  de  Hacienda,  who  is  charged 
with  the  collection  of  customs  and  internal  taxes,  the  expenditures  of  public  money, 
and  the  audit  and  control  of  public  accounts. 

(f)  The  Minister  of  the  Interior,  or  Director  General  of  Civil  Administration, 
who  is  charged  with  all  public  business  relating  to  public  instruction,  charities, 
health,  public  works,  forests,  mines,  agriculture,  industry  and  commerce,  posts  and 
telegraphs  and  meteorology. 

For  the  purpose  of  local  administration  the  islands  are  divided  into  Provinces  and 
Districts,  classified  as  follows: 

19  Civil  Governments. 

24  Political-Military  Governments. 

23  Political-Military  Commands. 

15  Military  Commands. 

The  most  important  of  the  Provinces  are  Manila,  with  a population  of  400,238 
(of  which  10  per  cent,  are  Chinese),  and  Cebu,  with  504,076;  and  the  least  important 
districts  are  Balabas  and  Corregidor,  with  420  and  320  respectively. 

The  governor  or  commandant  has  supreme  control  within  his  province  or  dis- 
trict of  every  branch  of  the  public  service,  including  the  Courts  of  J ustice,  and  each 
reports  to  the  Governor  General.  The  Guardia  Civil  or  Gendarmerie,  is  subject 
only  to  his  orders,  and  for  arrests  and  imprisonment  for  political  offenses,  he  is  re- 
sponsible, not  to  the  law,  but  to  the  Governor  General  and  the  King, 


134 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


The  Civil  Governments  are  governed  by  Civil  Governors,  of  the  rank  in  tee 
Spanish  Civil  Service  of  Chiefs  of  Administration  of  the  second  class.  The  Politi- 
cal Military  Governments  and  Commands  are  in  charges  of  military  and  naval  officers 
of  various  grades,  according  to  their  size  and  importance;  ranging  from  General  of 
Division  at  Mindanao,  Brigadier-Generals  at  Cebu  and  Iloilo,  Captain  in  the  navy 
at  Paragua,  down  to  Lieutenant  at  Balabas  and  Corregidor. 

The  Civil  or  Military  Governor  is  assisted  by  a secretary,  a judge,  an  administrator 
of  finances,  a postmaster  and  a captain  of  police. 

The  affairs  of  cities  are  managed  by  a council  (Ayuntamiento)  consisting  of  a 
president,  a recorder  (Sindico),  one  or  more  mayors  (Alcaldo),  six  to  ten  aldermen 
(Regidores)  and  a secretary. 

Outside  of  the  cities  each  province  or  district  is  divided  into  a number  of  vil- 
lages or  parishes  (Pueblos);  the  total  number  of  these  is  1,055;  in  each  there  is  a 
parish  priest,  a municipal  captain,  a justice  of  the  peace,  a school  master  and  school 
mistress.  The  number  of  cities  is  very  small,  and  the  social  life  of  the  community 
depends  almost  wholly  on  the  form  of  government  of  the  Pueblos,  or  villages.  In 
1893  this  was  reorganized  with  the  alleged  intention  of  giving  local  self-govern- 
ment. The  scheme  is  complicated  and  curious  and  only  an  outline  of  it  can  be  given 
here.  It  is  contained  in  full  in  the  Royal  Decree  of  May  19,  1893,  a long  document, 
supplemented  by  still  longer  regulations  for  carrying  the  same  into  effect. 

In  brief  every  Pueblo  in  which  there  are  paid  more  than  1,000  Cedillas  (poll  tax) 
shall  have  a municipal  tribunal  consisting  of  five  members,  by  whom  its  local  affairs 
and  funds  shall  be  managed.  The  members  are  a 

Municipal  Captain. 

Senior  Lieutenant. 

Lieutenant  of  Police. 

Lieutenant  of  Agriculture. 

Lieutenant  of  Cattle. 

And  the  Tillage  Priest  is  required  to  attend  all  the  important  meetings. 

The  Captain  holds  office  for  four  years,  and  is  eligible  for  indefinite  re-election; 
the  Lieutenants  hold  office  for  four  years  also,  one-half  of  them  going  out  of  office 
every  two  years,  and  they  are  ineligible  for  re-election  until  two  years  after 
the  expiration  of  their  term.  Both  Captains  and  Lieutenants  are  elected,  on 
a day  designated  by  the  Governor,  and  in  presence  of  the  village  priest,  and  out 
going  Captain,  by  the  Principalia,  or  body  of  principal  men  of  the  village.  The  viL 
Iage  is  subdivided  into  Barangayes,  or  group  of  about  100  families  each,  and  for  each 
Barangay  there  is  a Chief  or  Headman  (Cabeza),  who  is  appointed  by  the  Governor, 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  APE. 


135 


on  the  recommendation  of  the  Municipal  Tribunal.  The  Principalia  :s  made  up  of 

Former  Municipal  Captains. 

Former  Municipal  Lieutenants. 

Former  Gobernadorcilles. 

Chiefs  of  Barangayes. 

All  inhabitants  paying  more  than  $50  annually  in  taxes. 

The  Principalia  choose  the  12  electors  as  follows: 

G from  the  Chiefs  of  Barangayes. 

3 from  Former  Municipal  Captains. 

3 from  the  largest  taxpayers. 

The  electors  hold  office  for  six  years,  and  one-third  go  out  of  office  every  two 
years. 

The  municipal  Captain  must  be  a resident  of  the  village,  more  than  25  years  of 
age,  read  and  speak  Spanish  and  be  a Chief  of  Barangay.  While  the  Municipal 
Tribunal  nominally  controls  the  local  affairs,  yet  the  Captain  has  the  right  to  sus- 
pend all  its  acts  which  he  considers  against  the  public  welfare,  and  report  the  mat- 
ter to  the  Provincial  Governor,  who  has  power  to  rescind  them;  the  Captain  appoints 
all  village  employes,  and  removes  them  at  will;  he  can  also  fine  and  punish  them 
for  petty  offenses;  he  issues  orders  to  the  police  and  collects  the  taxes.  He  holds  a 
commission  as  Delegate  or  Kepresentative  of  the  Governor  General,  and,  in  fact,  he 
exercises  within  his  little  bailiwick  the  same  supreme  power  that  the  governor  ex- 
ercises in  the  province,  and  the  Governor  General  in  the  whole  Archipelago. 

In  each  province  there  is  a Junta  or  Council,  whose  membership  consists  of 

The  Administrator  of  Finance. 

Two  Vicars. 

The  Public  Physician. 

The  latter  Four  Members  must  be  residents  of  the  Capital  of  the  Province,  and 
they  are  elected  by  the  Municipal  Captains,  from  a list  of  names  submitted  to  them 
by  the  Junta  with  the  approval  of  the  Governor. 

The  functions  of  this  Junta  or  Council  are  solely  those  of  inspection  and  advice. 
It  watches  over  affairs  of  the  Municipal  Tribunals,  and  reports  to  the  Governor  its 
advice  and  recommendations  concerning  them.  The  Municipal  Captain  is  obliged 
to  deposit  the  taxes  in  the  Provincial  Treasur}-,  the  keys  of  which  are  held  by  three 
members  of  the  Council;  he  draws  out  the  money  in  accordance  with  the  municipal 
budget,  and  his  accounts  must  be  approved  by  his  lieutenants,  countersigned  by  the 
village  priest,  passed  upon  by  the  Provincial  Council,  and  finally  approved  by  the 
Governor. 

The  Governor  has  power  to  suspend  the  Municipal  Captain  or  any  of  his  col- 
leagues for  a period  of  three  months,  and  the  Governor  General  can  remove  one  or 


136 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


all  of  them  from  office  at  will;  and  “in  extraordinary  cases  or  for  reasons  of  public 
tranquility,  the  Governor  shall  have  power  to  decree,  without  any  legal  process, 
the  abolition  of  the  Municipal  Tribunals.”  (Article  45.) 

In  December,  189G,  General  Polavieja  issued  a decree,  suspending  the  elections 
which  were  to  take  place  that  month  for  one-third  of  the  municipal  electors,  and 
directed  the  Governors  of  Provinces  to  send  in  names  of  persons  suitable  for  ap- 
pointment, together  with  the  recommendations  of  the  village  priest  in  each  case. 

An  examination  of  this  unique  scheme  of  village  government  shows  that  one-half 
of  the  electors  are  to  be  chosen  from  persons  holding  a subordinate  office  and  ap- 
pointed by  the  Governor;  that  the  village  priest  must  be  present  at  all  elections 
and  important  meetings;  that  the  Captain  has  all  the  responsibility,  and  he  must 
also  be  of  the  class  holding  a subordinate  office  by  appointment  of  the  governor; 
that  the  acts  of  Municipal  Tribunal  can  be  suspended  by  the  Captain  and  rescinded 
by  the  Governor;  and,  finally,  if  the  Municipal  Tribunal  is  offensive  to  the  Governor 
General  he  can  either  remove  its  members  and  appoint  others  in  their  place  or  can 
abolish  it  altogether. 

Such  is  the  Spanish  idea  of  self-government;  the  Minister  of  the  Colonies,  in 
submitting  the  decree  to  the  Queen  Regent,  expatiated  on  its  merits  in  giving  the  na- 
tives such  full  control  of  their  local  affairs,  and  expressed  the  confident  belief  that 
it  would  prove  “most  beneficent  to  these  people  whom  Providence  has  confided  to 
the  generous  sovereignty  of  the  Spanish  monarchs.” 

This  scheme  of  government  by  Municipal  Tribunals  was  highly  approved  by  the 
natives,  except  that  feature  of  it  which  placed  so  much  power  in  the  hands  of  the 
Governor  and  Governor  General.  This,  however,  was  the  essence  of  the  matter, 
from  the  Spanish  standpoint,  and  these  portions  of  the  Decree  were  the  ones  most 
fully  carried  out.  The  natives  complained,  on  the  one  hand,  of  the  delay  in  put- 
ting the  Decree  into  operation,  and  on  the  other  hand  that  so  much  of  it  as  was 
established  was  practically  nullified  by  the  action  of  the  Governors.  Seeing  that 
the  Tribunals  had  really  no  power,  the  members  soon  turned  their  sessions  (which 
the  Decree  required  to  be  secret)  iuto  political  meetings  in  favor  of  the  insurrec- 
tion. So  the  whole  project  is  thus  far  a failure:  and  the  local  administration  is  in 
considerable  disorder,  apart  from  that  caused  by  the  insurgents.  In  point  of  fact  self- 
government  and  representation  are  unknown  in  these  islands.  The  Archbishop  and 
the  four  Bishops  are  appointed  by  the  Pope;  the  Governor  General,  military  and 
naval  officers  and  all  officials  with  a salary  exceeding  about  $2,000  (silver)  are  ap- 
pointed by  the  King  or  the  Minister  of  the  Colonies.  Yet  all  the  expenses  are 
paid  from  the  Philippine  Treasury;  the  salaries  «f  »H  «ftb4als,  military,  naval,  eivil 


MILITARY  HEROES  OF  SANTIAGO  AND  PORTO  RICO. 
tPhoto  of  Roosevelt  Copyrighted  by  Rockwood.) 

("Photo  of  Shafter  Copyrighted  by  Chas.  Parker.) 


mm 


1 OWA 


(JAPTAIN  (HADV 

.Vi?\v  yo'RK 


XdMIK  VL  >\MRf°S 


Captain  Pm i up 
Texas 


OF  SANTIAGO. 


1 fit. 

1'  'lfprS5'\  W 

- m m | 

i •; 

’-f 

\MW 

i 

(Photo  of  Hobson  Copyrighted  by  Falk.) 


189 


TTTTT1  PTT, 1 

-lXLIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 

and  ecclesiastical  , 

, „ „ the  expenses  and  pensions  ot  the  army,  navy  and  church,  the 

cost  of  the  dm):  . , , . 

. .plomatie  and  consular  service  in  Japan.  China  and  Singapore,  even  a 
portion  ofm1  D r ’ 

^ 1 the  expenses  of  the  Colonial  office,  Madrid,  and  of  pensions  paid  to  the 

Mants  of  Columbus — all  come  out  of  the  taxes  raised  in  the  islands.  The 

nahte 

^ ,aves  have  no  place  in  the  government,  except  clerks  in  the  public  offices  at 
. /lanila  and  the  petty  positions  in  the  villages  and  the  Ayentamientos  of  cities,  where 
their  powers  and  responsibilities,  as  we  have  seen,  are  at  all  times  limited  and 
subject  to  revocation  whenever  disapproved  by  the  Governor. 

Though  the  population  of  the  islands  is  40  per  cent,  of  that  of  Spain,  they  have  no 
representation  in  the  Cortes. 


There  is  a widespread  report,  almost  universally  believed  by  native  Filipinos 
and  by  foreign  merchants,  and  even  acknowledged  by  many  Spaniards,  that  pecu- 
niary dishonesty  and  corruption  exist  throughout  the  whole  body  of  Spanish  office- 
holders, from  the  highest  to  the  lowest.  Forced  contributions  are  said  to  be  levied 
on  the  salaries  of  minor  officials;  the  Regimental  Paymasters  and  Commissaries  are 
said  to  have  sold  part  of  the  regimental  stores  for  their  own  profit,  the  Collector  of 
Customs  and  the  Minister  of  Finance  to  have  imposed  or  remitted  fines  at  the  Cus. 


140 


ARE. 

THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  TELL 


non-payment  of 

tom  House  and  Internal  Revenue  Office,  according  to  payment  0?Si:e(y”  from  at- 
presents  by  merchants,  the  judges  and  court  officials  to  have  “borrofbwaj  fs  re- 
torneys  large  sums  which  are  never  paid,  and  even  the  Governor  Germ^s  the 
ported  to  have  organized  a regular  system  of  smuggling  in  Mexican  dollafl^ff. 
importation  of  which  was  prohibited  by  law,  on  a fixed  scale  of  payment  to  himsr  t 
The  current  report  is  that  Weyler  carried  away  over  $1,000,000  as  his  savings  during 
the  three  years  from  1888  to  1891  that  he  held  the  office  of  Governor  General,  on 
a salary  of  $40,000  a year.  Of  the  proof  of  these  reports  I have  naturally  no  per- 
sonal knowledge,  but  they  are  matters  of  common  talk  and  belief,  and  they  have  been 
stated  to  me  by  responsible  persons,  who  have  long  resided  in  the  islands. 

As  above  stated,  the  Governor  General  is  supreme  head  of  every  branch  of  the 
public  service,  not  excepting  the  Courts  of  Justice.  How  this  power  was  exercised  is 
shown  in  the  hundreds  of  executions  for  alleged  political  offenses,  which  took  place 
during  the  years  1895,  1896  and  1897,  by  the  thousands  deported  to  Mindanao  and 
Fernando  Po,  and  by  the  number  of  political  prisoners  in  jail  at  the  time  of  our 
entry  into  Manila.  On  the  first  examination  which  General  McArthur,  as  Military 
Governor,  made  of  the  jail,  about  August  22nd,  he  released  over  60  prisoners  con- 
fined for  alleged  political  offenses.  One  of  them  was  a woman  who  had  been  impris- 
oned for  eleven  years,  by  order  of  the  Governor  General,  but  without  any  charges 
ever  having  been  presented  against  her;  another  was  a woman  who  had  been  in  jail 
for  three  years  on  a vague  charge,  never  formulated,  of  having  carried  a basket  of 
cartridges  to  an  insurgent. 

The  day  of  reckoning  for  three  centuries  of  this  sort  of  government  came  when 
Admiral  Dewey  destroyed  the  Spanish  squadron  on  May  1st,  1898.  An  insur- 
rection had  been  in  progress  from  August,  1896,  to  December,  1897.  Unable  to  sup- 
press it  the  Government  had  made  a written  treaty  with  the  insurgent  leaders,  pay- 
ing them  a large  sum  of  money  and  promising  to  introduce  various  reforms  on  con- 
dition that  they  would  leave  the  country.  Hardly  had  the  Spanish  officials  recov- 
ered from  this  when  the  appalling  disaster  of  the  destruction  of  their  fleet  occurred 
under  their  very  eyes. 

Then  followed  in  rapid  succession  the  naval  blockade,  the  arrival  of  the  insurgent 
leaders  from  Hongkong,  the  raising  of  the  insurgent  army,  which  blockaded  Manila 
on  the  land  side,  and  finally,  the  American  troops.  At  the  end  of  104  days  after  the 
destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleet,  the  city  surrendered  to  a combined  land  and  naval 
attack  of  the  American  forces.  On  the  day  after  the  capitulation,  the  American 
Commander  in  Chief  issued  his  proclamation  establishing  a military  government,  ap- 
pointed a Military  Governor,  a Minister  of  Finance,  a Collector  of  Customs,  Col- 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


Ill 


lector  of  Internal  Revenue,  Postmaster  and  Judge  of  the  Provost  Court;  took  pos- 
session of  all  public  funds  (about  $900,000),  and  all  public  offices,  and  as  rapdcfly 
as  possible  put  this  government  in  operation. 

The  machinery  of  the  Spanish  Government  was  thoroughly  disorganized  when 

« 

we  entered  Manila.  The  Courts  of  Justice,  except  the  inferior  criminal  courts,  had 
not  been  in  session  since  early  in  May;  the  officials  had  been  cut  off  from  commu- 
nication with  the  other  islands  and  with  Spain  for  over  three  months;  there  had 
been  no  customs  to  collect,  and,  owing  to  the  entire  suspension  of  business,  hut 
little  internal  revenue;  a forced  loan  of  $2,000,000  for  military  purpose  had  been  ex- 
tracted from  the  Spanish-Philippine  Bank,  and  yet  the  troops  were  several  months 
in  arrears  of  pay;  all  government  offices  outside  the  walled  city  had  been  moved  to 
temporary  quarters  within  the  walls  and  their  records  had  been  lost  or  thrown  into 
confusion;  the  officials  seeing  the  inevitable  end  in  sight,  were  intent  only  on  plan- 
ning for  their  return  to  Spain. 

This  disorganization  was  completed  when  the  American  Military  officers  took 
charge  of  the  Government,  and  every  Spanish  official,  without  exception,  refused 
absolutely  to  continue  in  service.  They  were  immediately  dismissed  and  dispersed. 

The  situation  thus  created  is  without  precedent  in  American  history.  When 
Scott  captured  the  City  of  Mexico  it  was  acknowledged  on  both  sides  that  his  occu- 
pation was  only  to  he  temporary,  and  there  were  no  insurgents  to  deal  with.  When 
the  Americans  entered  California  they  found  only  a scanty  population,  who  were 
soon  outnumbered  by  the  American  immigrants.  Rut  in  the  Philippine  Islands 
there  is  a population  of  more  than  7,000,000,  governed  by  an  alien  race,  whose  rep- 
resentatives present  in  the  Islands,  including  military  and  naval  forces,  clergy  and 
civil  employes  do  not  exceed  30,000  in  number.  Against  this  Government  an 
insurrection  is  in  progress,  which  claims  to  have  been  successful  in  provinces  con- 
taining a population  of  about  2,000,000.  The  city  and  province  of  Manila,  with 
a population  of  400,000  more,  have  been  captured  and  occupied  by  a foreign  army, 
but  whether  its  occupation  is  to  be  temporary  or  permanent  has  not  yet  been  decided. 

Finally,  the  Government  officials  of  all  classes  refuse  to  perforin  their  functions; 
the  desire  of  most  of  them  is  to  escape  to  Spain.  It  was  stipulated  in  the  capitula- 
tion that  they  should  have  the  right  to  do  so  at  their  own  expense,  and  numbers  of 
them,  as  well  as  friars,  have  already  taken  their  departure.  The  Spanish  officials 
have  intense  fear  of  the  Insurgents;  and  the  latter  hate  them,  as  well  as  the  friars, 
with  a virulence  that  can  hardly  be  described.  They  have  fought  them  with  suc- 
cess, and  almost  without  interruption  for  two  years,  and  they  will  continue  to  fight 
them  with  increased  vigor  and  still  greated  prospects  of  success,  if  any  attempt  is 


142 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


MANILLA  AND  ITS  OUTSKIRTS.  SHOWING  MALATE. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


148 

made  to  restore  the  Spanish  Government.  In  its  present  disorganized  condition 
the  Spanish  Government  could  not  successfully  cope  with  them;  on  the  other  hand, 
it  would  not  surrender  to  them.  The  result,  therefore,  of  an  attempted  restoration 
of  Spanish  power  in  any  of  the  islands  would  simply  be  civil  war  and  anarchy,  lead- 
ing inevitably  and  speedily  to  intervention  by  foreign  nations  whose  subjects  have 
property  in  the  islands  which  they  would  not  allow  to  be  destroyed. 

INSURGENT  TROOPS. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  give  figures  for  the  exact  numbers  of  insurgent  troops.  In 
his  message  to  foreign  governments  of  August  6th,  asking  for  recognition  of  belliger- 
ency and  independence,  Aguinaldo  claims  to  have  a force  of  30,000  men,  organized 
into  a regular  army.  This  included  the  force  in  the  provinces  of  Luzon  outside  of 
Manila.  What  was  in  evidence  around  Manila  varied  from  10,000  to  15,000.  They 
were  composed  of  young  men  and  boys,  some  as  young  as  fifteen  years  of  age,  re- 
cruited in  the  rural  districts,  having  no  property  and  nothing  to  lose  in  a civil  war. 
They  have  received  no  pay  and,  although  Aguinaldo  speaks  in  his  proclamation  of 
his  intention  and  ability  to  maintain  order  wherever  his  forces  penetrate,  yet  the 
feeling  is  practically  universal  among  the  rank  and  file  that  they  are  to  be  com- 
pensated for  their  time  and  services  and  hardships  by  looting  Manila. 

Their  equipment  consists  of  a gun,  bayonet  and  cartridge  box;  their  uniform  of  a 
straw  hat,  gingham  shirt  and  trousers  and  bare  feet;  their  transportation  of  a few 
ponies  and  carts,  impressed  for  a day  or  week  at  a time;  for  quarters  they  have  taken 
the  public  building  in  each  village  or  pueblo,  locally  known  as  the  Tribunal,  and 
the  churches  and  convents;  from  those  details  are  sent  out  to  man  the  trenches. 
Their  food  while  on  duty  consists  of  rice  and  banana  leaves,  cooked  at  the  quarters 
and  sent  out  to  the  trenches.  After  a few  days  or  a week  of  active  service  they  return 
to  their  homes  to  feed  up  or  work  on  their  farms,  their  places  being  taken  by  others 
to  whom  they  turn  over  their  guns  and  cartridges.  Their  arms  have  been  ob- 
tained from  various  sources,  from  purchases  in  Hongkong,  from  the  supply  which 
Admiral  Dewey  found  in  the  arsenal  at  Cavite,  from  capture  made  from  the  Span- 
iards. They  are  partly  Mausers  and  partly  Remingtons.  Their  ammunition  was 
obtained  in  the  same  way.  They  have  used  it  freely  and  the  supply  is  now  rather 
short.  To  replenish  it  they  have  established  a cartridge  factory  at  the  village  of 
Imus,  about  ten  miles  south  of  Cavite,  where  they  have  400  people  engaged  in 
re-loading  cartridges  with  powder  and  lead  found  at  Cavite,  or  purchased  abroad. 
They  have  no  artillery,  except  a few  antique  Columbiads  obtained  from  Cavite,  and 
no  cavalry.  Their  method  of  warfare  is  to  dig  a trench  in  front  of  the  Spanish 
position,  cover  it  with  mats  as  a protection  against  the  sun  and  rain,  and  during 


144 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


the  night  put  their  guns  on  top  of  the  trench  above  their  heads  and  fire  in  the  gen- 
eral direction  of  the  enemy.  When  their  ammunition  is  exhausted  they  go  off  in  a 
body  to  get  a fresh  supply  in  baskets  and  then  return  to  the  trenches. 

The  men  are  of  small  stature,  from  5 feet  to  5 feet  6 inches  in  height,  and  weigh 
from  110  to  130  pounds.  Compared  with  them  our  men  from  Colorado  and  Cali- 
fornia seemed  like  a race  of  giants.  One  afternoon  just  after  we  entered  Manila  a 
battalion  of  the  insurgents  fired  upon  the  outposts  of  the  Colorado  regiment,  mis- 
taking them,  as  they  claimed,  for  Spaniards.  The  outpost  retreated  to  their  support, 
and  the  Filipinos  followed;  they  eafily  fell  into  an  ambush  and  the  support,  number- 
ing about  fifty  men,  surrounded  the  250  Filipinos,  wrenched  the  guns  out  of  their 
hands  and  marched  them  off  as  unarmed  prisoners — all  in  the  space  of  a few  min- 
utes. Such  a force  can  hardly  be  called  an  army,  and  yet  the  service  which  it  lias 
rendered  should  not  be  underestimated.  Between  2,000  and  3,000  Spanish  native 
troops  surrendered  to  it  during  the  months  of  June  and  July.  It  constantly  annoyed 
and  harrassed  the  Spaniards  in  the  trenches,  keeping  them  up  at  night  and  wearing 
them  out  with  fatigue;  and  it  invested  Manila  early  in  July  so  completely  that  all 
supplies  were  cut  off  and  the  inhabitants  as  well  as  the  Spanish  troops  were  forced 
to  live  on  horse  and  buffalo  meat,  and  the  Chinese  population  on  cats  and  dogs.  It 
captured  the  water  works  of  Manila  and  cut  off  the  water  supply,  and,  if  it  had  been 
in  the  dry  season,  would  have  inflicted  great  suffering  on  the  inhabitants  for  lack  of 
water.  These  results,  it  is  true,  were  obtained  against  a dispirited  army,  containing 
a considerable  number  of  native  troops  of  doubtful  loyalty.  Yet,  from  August,  1896, 
to  April,  1897,  they  fought  25,000  of  the  best  regular  troops  sent  out  from  Spain, 
inflicting  on  them  a loss  of  over  150  officers  and  2,500  men,  killed  and  wounded, 
and  they  suffered  still  greater  losses  themselves.  Nevertheless,  from  daily  contact 
with  them  for  six  weeks,  I am  very  confident  that  no  such  results  could  have  been 
obtained  against  an  American  army,  which  would  have  driven  them  back  to  the 
hills  and  reduced  them  to  a petty  guerilla  warfare.  If  they  attack  the  American 
army  this  will  certainly  be  the  result,  and,  while  these  guerilla  bands  might  give 
some  trouble  so  long  as  their  ammunition  lasted,  yet,  with  our  navy  guarding  the 
coasts  and  our  army  pursuing  them  on  land,  it  would  not  be  long  before  they  were 
reduced  to  subjection. 

INSURGENT  CIVIL  ADMINISTRATION. 

In  August,  1896,  an  insurrection  broke  out  in  Cavite,  under  the  leadership  of 
Emilio  Aguinaldo,  and  soon  spread  to  other  provinces  on  both  sides  of  Manila.  It 
continued  with  varying  successes  on  both  sides,  and  the  trial  and  execution  of 
numerous  insurgents,  until  December,  1897,  when  the  Governor-General,  Primo  de 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


145 


Rivera,  entered  into  written  agreement  with  Aguinaldo,  the  substance  of  the  docu- 
ment, which  is  in  possession  of  Senor  Felipe  Agoneillo,  who  accompanies  me  to 
Washington,  being  attached  hereto  and  marked  “A.”  In  brief,  it  required  that 
Aguinaldo  and  the  other  insurgent  leaders  should  leave  the  country,  the  Government 
agreeing  to  pay  them  $800,000  in  silver,  and  promising  to  introduce  numerous 
reforms,  including  representation  in  the  Spanish  Cortes,  freedom  of  the  press, 
amnesty  for  all  insurgents,  and  the  expulsion  of  secularization  of  the  monastic 
orders.  Aguinaldo  and  his  associates  went  to  Hongkong  and  Singapore.  A portion 
of  the  money,  $400,000,  was  deposited  in  banks  at  Hongkong,  and  a lawsuit  soon 
arose  between  Aguinaldo  and  one  of  his  subordinate  chiefs,  named  Artacho,  which  is 
interesting  on  account  of  the  very  honorable  position  taken  by  Aguinaldo.  Artacho 
sued  for  a division  of  the  money  among  the  insurgents,  according  to  rank.  Aguin- 
aldo claimed  that  the  money  was  a trust  fund  and  was  to  remain  on  deposit  until  it 
was  seen  whether  the  Spaniards  would  carry  out  their  promised  reforms,  and  if  they 
failed  to  do  so  it  was  to  be  used  to  defray  the  expenses  of  a new  insurrection.  The 
suit  was  settled  out  of  court  by  paying  Artacho  $5,000. 

No  steps  have  been  taken  to  introduce  the  reforms,  more  than  2,000  insurgents 
who  had  been  deported  to  Fernando  Po  and  other  places  are  still  in  confinement,  and 
Aguinaldo  is  now  using  the  money  to  carry  on  the  operations  of  the  present  insur- 
rection. 

On  the  24th  day  of  April  Aguinaldo  met  the  United  States  Consul  and  others 
at  Singapore  and  offered  to  begin  a new  insurrection  in  conjunction  with  the  opera- 
tions of  the  United  States  navy  at  Manila.  This  was  telegraphed  to  Admiral  Dewey 
and,  by  his  consent,  or,  at  his  request,  Aguinaldo  left  Singapore  for  Hongkong  on 
April  26th,  and,  when  the  McCullough  went  to  Hongkong  early  in  May  to  carry  the 
news  of  Admiral  Dewey’s  victory,  it  took  Aguinaldo  and  seventeen  other  revolu- 
tionary chiefs  or.  board  and  brought  them  to  Manila  Bay.  They  soon  after  landed  at 
Cavite,  and  the  Admiral  allowed  them  to  take  such  guns,  ammunition  and  stores  as 
lie  did  not  require  for  himself.  With  these  and  some  other  arms  which  he  had 
brought  from  Hongkong  Aguinaldo  armed  his  followers,  who  rapidly  assembled  at 
Cavite  and,  in  a few  weeks,  he  began  moving  against  the  Spaniards.  Part  of  them 
surrendered,  giving  him  more  arms,  and  the  others  retreated  to  Manila. 

Soon  afterwards  two  ships,  which  were  the  private  property  of  Senor  Agoncillc 
and  other  insurgent  sympathizers,  were  converted  into  cruisers  and  sent  with  insur- 
gent troops  to  Subig  Bay  and  other  places,  to  capture  provinces  outside  of  Manila. 
They  were  very  successful,  the  native  militia  in  Spanish  service  capitulating  wit! 
their  arms  in  nearly  every  case  without  serious  resistance.  On  the  18th  of  Jun© 


146 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


Aguinaldo  issued  a proclamation  from  Cavite  establishing  a Dictatorial  Government, 
with  himself  as  Dictator.  In  each  village  or  pueblo  a Chief  (Jefe)  was  to  be  elected, 
and  in  each  ward  a Nendrum  (Cabeza);  also  in  each  pueblo  three  delegates,  one  of 
Police,  one  of  Justice,  and  one  of  Taxes.  These  were  to  constitute  the  Junta,  or 
Assembly,  and  after  consulting  the  Junta  the  Chiefs  of  pueblos  were  to  elect  a Chief 
of  Province  and  three  Counsellors,  one  of  Police,  one  of  Justice,  and  one  of  Taxes.' 
They  were  also  to  elect  one  or  more  Representatives  from  each  Province  to  form  the 
Revolutionary  Congress.  This  was  followed  on  June  20th  by  a decree  giving  more 
detailed  instructions  in  regard  to  the  elections.  On  June  23d  another  decree  fol- 
lowed, changing  the  title  of  the  Government  from  Dictatorial  to  Revolutionary, 
and  of  the  chief  officer  from  Dictator  to  President;  announcing  a Cabinet  with  a 
Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs,  Marine  and  Commerce,  another  of  War  and  Public 
Works,  another  of  Police  and  Internal  Order,  Justice,  Instruction  and  Hygiene,  and 
another  of  Taxes,  Agriculture  and  Manufactures;  the  powers  of  the  President  and 
Congress  were  defined,  and  a code  of  military  justice  was  formulated.  On  the  same 
date  a manifesto  was  issued  to  the  world  explaining  the  reasons  and  purposes  of 
the  Revolution.  On  June  2~th  another  decree  was  issued  containing  instructions  in 
regard  to  elections.  On  August  Gth  an  address  was  issued  to  Foreign  Governments, 
stating  that  the  Revolutionary  Government  was  in  operation  and  control  in  fifteen 
Provinces,  and  that  in  response  to  the  petition  of  the  duly  elected  Chiefs  of  these 
Provinces  an  appeal  is  made  for  recognition  of  belligerency  and  independence. 
Translations  of  these  various  documents  are  all  apended,  marked  “B,”  “C,”  “D,” 
“E,”  “F,”  “G”  and  "H.” 

The  scheme  of  Government  is  set  forth  in  the  decree  of  June  23d,  marked  “D.” 
An  examination  of  this  document  shows  that  it  provides  a Dictatorship  of  the 
familiar  South  American  type.  All  power  is  centered  in  the  President,  apd  he  is 
not  responsible  to  any  one  for  his  acts.  He  is  declared  to  be  “the  personification  of 
the  Philippine  public,  and  in  this  view  cannot  be  held  responsible  while  he  holds 
office.  Ilis  term  will  last  until  the  Revolution  triumphs.”  He  appoints  not  only  the 
heads  of  the  departments,  but  all  their  subordinates,  and  without  reference  to  Con- 
gress. This  body  is  composed  of  a single  Chamber  of  Representatives  from  each 
Province.  The  election  is  to  be  conducted  by  an  agent  of  the  President,  and  the 
qualifications  of  electors  are  “those  inhabitants  most  distinguished  for  high  character, 
social  position  and  honorable  conduct.” 

If  any  Province  is  still  under  Spanish  rule  its  Representative  is  to  be  appointed 
by  the  President.  Congress  is  to  deliberate  on  “all  grave  and  transcendental  ques- 
tions, whose  decision  admits  of  delay  and  adjournment,  but  the  President  may 


148 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


decide  questions  of  urgent  character,  giving  the  reasons  for  his  decision  in  a message 
to  Congress.”  The  acts  of  Congress  are  not  binding  until  approved  by  the  President, 
and  he  has  power  of  absolute  veto. 

Congress  was  to  hold  its  first  session  at  Saloles  about  September  28th. 

While  this  scheme  of  Government  is  a pure  despotism,  yet  it  claims  to  be  only 
temporary,  and  intended  to  “prepare  the  country  so  that  a true  Republic  may  be 
established.”  It  also  provides  a rude  form  of  governmental  machinery  for  managing 
the  affairs  of  the  Provinces.  To  what  extent  it  has  actually  gone  into  operation  it  is 
difficult  to  say.  Aguinaldo  claims,  in  his  address  of  August  Gth,  that  it  is  in  force  in 
fifteen  Provinces,  whose  aggregate  population  is  about  2,000,000.  They  include  the 
island  of  Mindoro  and  about  half  of  Luzon.  None  of  those  (except  Cavite)  have  yet 
been  visited  by  Americans,  and  all  communication  with  them  by  the  Spanish  Gov- 
ernment at  Manila  has  becm  cut  off  since  May  1st. 

In  the  province  of  Cavite  and  that  portion  of  the  Province  of  Manila  outside  of 
the  city  and  of  its  suburbs,  which  was  occupied  by  the  insurgent  troops  as  well  as 
those  of  the  United  States,  their  military  forces,  military  headquarters,  etc.,  were 
very  much  in  evidence,  occupying  the  principal  houses  and  churches  in  every  village 
and  hamlet,  but  there  were  no  signs  of  Civil  Government  or  administration.  It  was 
reported,  however,  that  Aguinaldo’s  agents  were  levying  taxes  or  forced  contributions 
not  only  in  the  outside  villages,  but  (after  we  entered  Manila)  by  means  of  secret 
agents,  in  the  market  places  of  the  city  itself.  At  Aguinaldo’s  headquarters,  in 
Bacoor,  there  were  signs  of  activity  and  business,  and  it  was  reported  that  his  Cabi- 
net officers  were  in  constant  session  there. 

Aguinaldo  never  himself  failed  to  claim  all  the  prerogatives  due  to  his  alleged 
position  as  the  de  facto  ruler  of  the  country.  The  only  general  officer  who  saw  him 
or  had  any  direct  communication  with  him  was  General  Anderson.  lie  did  much 
to  thwart  this  officer  in  organizing  a native  wagon  train  and  otherwise  providing  for 
his  troops,  and  he  went  so  far,  in  a letter  of  July  23d  (copy  herewith  marked  “J”), 
as  to  warn  General  Anderson  not  to  land  American  troops  on  Philippine  soil  without 
his  consent — a notice  which,  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  say,  was  ignored.  The  day 
before  the  attack  on  Manila  he  sent  staff  officers  to  the  same  General,  asking  for  our 
plans  of  attack,  so  that  their  troops  could  enter  Manila  with  us.  The  same  request 
had  previously  been  made  to  me  by  one  of  his  Brigade  Commanders,  to  which  I 
replied  that  I was  not  authorized  to  give  the  information  desired. 

Aguinaldo  did  not  call  upon  General  Merritt  on  his  arrival,  and  this  enabled  the 
latter  to  avoid  any  communication  with  him,  either  direct  or  indirect,  until  after 
Manila  had  been  taken.  General  Merritt  then  received  one  of  Aguinaldo  s staff 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


149 


officers  in  his  office  as  Military  Governor.  The  interview  lasted  more  than  an  hour. 
General  Merritt  referred  to  his  proclamation  as  showing  the  conditions  under  which 
the  American  troops  had  come  to  Manila  and  the  nature  of  the  Military  Government, 
which  would  be  maintained  until  further  orders  from  Washington.  He  agreed  upon 
the  lines  outside  of  the  city  of  Manila,  up  to  which  the  insurgent  troops  could  come, 
but  no  further  with  arms  in  their  hands.  He  asked  for  possession  of  the  water  works, 
which  was  given,  and,  while  expressing  our  friendship  and  sympathy  for  the  Philip- 
pine people,  he  stated  very  positively  that  the  United  States  Government  had  placed 
at  his  disposal  an  ample  force  for  carrying  out  his  instructions,  and  even  if  the 
services  of  Aguinaldo’s  forces  had  been  needed  as  allies  he  should  not  have  felt  at 
liberty  to  accept  them. 

The  problem  of  how  to  deal  with  Aguinaldo’s  Government  and  troops  will  nec- 
essarily be  accompanied  with  embarrassment  and  difficulty,  and  will  require  much 
tact  and  skill  in  its  solution.  The  United  States  Government,  through  its  Naval 
Commander,  has,  to  some  extent,  made  use  of  them  for  a distinct  military  purpose, 
viz.:  to  harass  and  annoy  the  Spanish  troops,  to  wear  them  out  in  the  trenches,  to 
blockade  Manila  on  the  land  side,  and  to  do  as  much  damage  as  possible  to  the 
Spanish  Government  prior  to  the  arrival  of  our  troops,  and  for  this  purpose  the 
Admiral  allowed  them  to  take  the  arms  and  munitions  which  he  had  captured  at 
Cavite,  and  their  ships  to  pass  in  and  out  of  Manila  Bay  in  their  expeditions  against 
other  Provinces.  But  the  Admiral  has  been  very  careful  to  give  Aguinaldo  no 
assurances  of  recognition  and  no  pledges  or  promises  of  any  description.  The  services 
which  Aguinaldo  and  his  adherents  rendered  in  preparing  the  way  for  attack  on 
Manila  are  certainly  entitled  to  consideration,  but,  after  all,  they  were  small  in  com- 
parison with  what  was  done  by  our  fleet  and  army. 

There  is  no  reason  to  believe  that  Aguinaldo’s  Government  has  any  elements  of  . 
stability.  In  the  first  place,  Aguinaldo  is  a young  man  of  twenty-three  years.  Prior 
to  the  insurrection  of  1896  he  had  been'  a schoolmaster,  and  afterward  Goberna- 
doreillo  and  Municipal  Captain  in  one  of  the  pueblos  in  the  Province  of  Cavite.  He 
is  not  devoid  of  ability,  and  he  is  surrounded  by  clever  writers.  But  the  educated 
and  intelligent  Filipinos  of  Manila  say  that  not  only  is  he  lacking  in  ability  to  be  at 
the  head  of  affairs,  but  if  an  election  for  President  was  held  he  would  not  even  be 
a candidate.  He  is  a successful  leader  of  insurgents,  has  the  confidence  of  young 
men  in  the  country  districts,  prides  himself  on  his  military  ability,  and  if  a Republic 
could  be  established  the  post  he  would  probably  choose  for  himself  would  be  General- 
ia-Chief  of  the  Army. 

In  the  next  place,  Aguinaldo’s  Government,  or  any  entirely  independent  Govern- 


150 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


ment,  does  not  command  the  hearty  support  of  the  large  body  of  Filipinos,  both  in 
Manila  and  outside,  who  have  property,  education  and  intelligence.  Their  hatred  of 
the  Spanish  rule  is  very  keen  and  they  will  co-operate  with  Aguinaldo  or  any  one 
else  to  destroy  it.  But  after  that  is  done  they  fully  realize  that  they  must  have 
the  support  of  some  strong  nation  for  many  years  before  they  will  he  in  a position  to 
manage  their  own  affairs  alone.  The  nation  to  which  they  all  turn  is  America,  and 
their  ideal  is  a Philippine  Republic,  under  American  protection — such  as  they 
have  heard  is  to  be  granted  to  Cuba.  But  when  it  comes  to  defining  their  ideas  of 
protection  and  the  respective  rights  and  duties  of  each  under  it,  what  portion  of  the 
Government  is  to  he  administered  by  them  and  what  portion  by  us;  how  the  revenues 
are  to  he  collected,  and  in  what  proportion  the  expenses  are  to  he  divided;  they 
have  no  clear  ideas  at  all;  nor  is  it  expected  that  they  should  have,  after  generations 
of  Spanish  rule  without  any  experience  in  self  government.  The  sentiment  of  this 
class,  the  educated  native  with  property  at  stake,  looks  upon  the  prospect  of  Aguin- 
aldo’s  Government  and  forces  entering  Manila  with  almost  as  much  dread  as  the 
foreign  merchants  or  the  Spaniards  themselves. 

Finally,  it  must  be  remembered  that  this  is  purely  a Tagalo  insurrection.  There 
are  upwards  of  thirty  races  in  the  Philippines,  each  speaking  a different  dialect, 
but  five-sixths  of  the  entire  Christian  population  is  composed  of  the  Tagalos  and 
Visayas.  The  former  live  in  Mindoro  and  the  southern  half  of  Luzon,  and  the  latter 
in  Cebu,  Iloilo  and  other  islands  in  the  center  of  the  group.  The  Tagalos  are  more 
numerous  than  the  Visayas,  but  both  races  arc  about  equal  in  civilization,  intelli- 
gence and  wealth.  It  is  claimed  by  Aguinaldo’s  partisans  that  the  Visayas  are  in 
sympathy  with  his  insurrection  and  intend  to  send  representatives  to  the  congress. 
But  it  is  a fact  that  the  Visayas  have  taken  no  active  part  in  the  present  insurrec- 
tion nor  in  that  of  1596,  that  the  Spanish  Government  is  still  in  full  control  at 
Cebu  and  Iloilo,  and  in  the  Viscayas  islands,  and  that  Aguinaldo  has  a-  yet  made  no 
effort  to  attack  them.  The  Visayas  number  nearly  2.000,000,  or  about  as  many 
ns  the  population  of  all  the  Tagalo  Provinces,  which  Aguinaldo  claims  to  have  cap- 
tured. There  is  no  evidence  to  show  that  they  will  support  his  pretensions,  and 
many  reasons  to  believe  that  on  account  of  racial  prejudices  and  jealousies  and  other 
causes  they  will  oppose  him. 

Upon  one  point  all  are  agreed,  except  possibly  Aguinaldo  and  his  immediate  ad- 
herents, and  that  is  that  no  native  government  can  maintain  itself  without  the  active 
support  and  protection  of  a strong  foreign  government.  This  being  admitted  it  is 
difficult  to  see  how  anv  foreign  government  can  give  this  protection  without  taking 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


151 


such  an  active  part  in  the  management  of  affairs  as  is  practically  equivalent  to 
governing  in  its  own  name  and  for  its  own  account. 

UNITED  STATES  TROOPS  AND  NAVY. 

1 assume  that  the  reports  received  at  the  War  and  Navy  Departments  give  all 
the  desired  information  in  regard  to  the  military  forces  of  the  United  States. 

At  the  time  I left  (August  30th)  the  Eighth  Corps  consisted  of  two  divisions, 
numbering  in  all  about  12,000  men,  with  10  field  guns  and  G mountain  guns.  No 
wagons  or  animals  had  then  arrived. 

One  regiment  was  stationed  within  the  walled  city  guarding  its  gates,  and  the 
captured  guns  and  ammunition;  a small  force  was  at  Cavite,  and  the  bulk  of  the 
troops  were  in  Manila,  outside  of  the  walled  city.  They  were  quartered  in  the  Span- 
ish barracks,  which  were  all  in  good  condition,  and  in  convents  and  private  houses. 
The  health  of  the  troops  was  excellent,  notwithstanding  the  extraordinary  hardships 
to  which  they  had  been  subjected  in  the  trenches  before  entering  Manila. 

Admiral  Dewey  had  under  his  command  the  Charleston,  Monterey  and  Monad- 
nock,  which  arrived  in  July  and  August,  the  Callao  and  Leyte,  which  had  been 
captured  from  the  Spaniards,  and  the  ships  which  were  in  the  battle  of  May  1st, 
viz:  Olympia,  Boston,  Baltimore,  Raleigh,  Concord,  Petrel  and  McCullough.  The 
health  of  the  squadron  was  excellent.  The  Olympia  and  Concord  were  being  docked 
and  cleaned  at  Hongkong.  Permission  to  use  the  docks  at  Nagansaki  during  the 
suspension  of  hostilities  had  been  declined. 

UNITED  STATES  CIVIL  ADMINISTRATION. 

We  entered  Manila  on  the  afternoon  of  August  13th.  On  the  14th  the  capitula- 
tion was  signed,  and  the  same  day  General  Merritt  issued  his  proclamation  estab- 
lishing a Military  Government.  On  the  15th  General  McArthur  was  appointed 
Military  Commander  of  the  walled  city  and  Provost  Marshal  General  of  the  City  of 
Manila  and  its  suburbs,  and  on  the  17th  I was  appointed  to  take  charge  of  the 
duties  performed  by  the  intendente  General  de  Hacienda,  or  Minister  of  Finance,  and 
all  fiscal  affairs.  Representatives  of  the  Postoffice  Department  had  arrived  on  the 
Steamship  China  in  July  and  they  immediately  took  charge  of  the  Manila  Post- 
office,  which  was  opened  for  business  on  the  16th.  The  Custom  House  was  opened 
on  the  18th,  with  Lieutenant-Colonel  Whittier  as  Collector,  and  the  Internal  Rev- 
enue office,  with  Major  Bement  as  Collector  on  the  22nd.  Captain  Glass  of  the 
Navy  was  appointed  Captain  of  the  Port,  or  Naval  Officer,  and  took  charge  of 
the  office  on  August  19th.  The  collections  of  customs  during  the  first  ten  clays 


152 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  AEE. 


exceeded  $100,000.  The  collection  of  internal  revenue  was  small  owing  to  the 
difficulty  and  delay  in  ascertaining  what  persons  had  or  had  not  paid  their  taxes 
for  the  current  year.  The  administration  of  Water  Works  was  put  in  charge  of 
Lieutenant  Connor,  of  the  Engineers,  on  August  25th,  the  Provost  Court  with  Lieu- 
tenant-Colonel Jewett,  Judge  Advocate  United  States  Volunteers,  sitting  as  Judge, 
was  appointed  and  held  its  first  session  on  August  23rd. 

The  Provost  Marshal  General  has  charge  of  the  Police,  Fire,  Health  and  Street 
Cleaning  Departments,  and  the  issuing  of  licenses.  The  Guardia  Civil,  or  Gendar- 
merie of  the  City,  proving  indifferent  and  inefficient,  they  were  disarmed  and  dis- 
banded; the  13th  Minnesota  regiment  was  detailed  for  police  duty,  and  one  or  more 
companies  stationed  in  each  Police  Station,  from  which  patrolmen  were  sent  out 
on  the  streets  to  take  the  place  of  the  sentries  who  had  constantly  patrolled  them 
from  the  hour  of  entering  the  city. 

The  shops  were  all  closed  when  we  entered  on  Saturday  afternoon,  the  13th;  on 
Monday  some  of  them  opened,  and  by  Wednesday  the  Banks  had  resumed  business, 
the  newspapers  were  published,  and  the  merchants  were  ready  to  declare  goods  at 
the  Custom  House,  the  tram  cars  were  running  and  the  retail  shops  were  all  open 
and  doing  a large  business.  There  was  no  disorder  or  pillage  of  any  kind  in  the 
city.  The  conduct  of  the  troops  was  simply  admirable,  and  left  no  ground  for 
criticism.  It  was  noted  and  commented  upon  by  the  foreign  naval  officers  in  the 
most  favorable  terms,  and  it  so  surprised  the  Spanish  soldiers  that  a considerable 
number  of  them  applied  for  permission  to  enlist  in  our  service. 

At  the  time  I left  General  McArthur  fully  established  his  office  as  Provost 
Marshal  General,  and  was  organizing  one  by  one  the  various  bureaus  connected  with 
it,  all  with  United  States  military  officers  in  charge;  the  Provost  Court  was  in  daily 
session,  sentencing  gamblers  and  persons  guilty  of  petty  disturbances,  and  a mili- 
tary commission  had  just  been  ordered  to  try  a Chinaman  accused  of  burglary. 

In  various  public  offices  I collected  the  following  Spanish  funds: 


At  the  General  Treasury $795,517.71 

At  the  Mint 62,856.08 

At  the  Internal  Revenue  Office 24,077.60 


$882,451.39 

Of  this  amount  there  was  in 

Gold  Coin $ 4,200.00 

Gold  Bars, 3,806.08 

Silver  Coin 190,634.81 

Copper  Coin 297,300.00 

Spanish  Bank  Notes 216,305.00 

Accepted  Checks 170,205.50 


$882,451.33 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


153 


The  money  was  counted  by  a board  of  officers  and  turned  over  to  Major  C.  H. 
Whipple,  Paymaster  IT.  S.  A.,  as  custodian  of  Spanish  Public  Funds.  A few  thou- 
sand dollars  in  other  public  offices  were  still  to  be  collected. 

The  money  received  at  the  Custom  House  and  other  offices  is  turned  in  daily, 
at  the  close  of  business,  to  Major  Whipple.  Money  for  current  expenses  is  furnished 
to  heads  of  departments  on  their  requisition,  by  warrant  drawn  by  the  Intendente 
General  on  the  Custodian  of  Spanish  Public  Funds.  The  heads  of  the  departments 
are  to  submit  their  vouchers  and  accounts  monthly  to  an  auditing  department,  which 
was  being  organized  when  I left. 

All  these  public  offices  and  funds  were  surrendered  to  me  only  on  threat  of 
using  force  and  on  granting  permission  to  file  a formal  written  protest.  None  of 
these  had  been  received  at  the  time  I left,  but  the  ground  of  verbal  protest  was 
that  the  officials  recognized  no  authority  in  these  islands  but  the  Governor  General 
appointed  by  the  King  of  Spain,  and  without  his  order  they  were  unwilling  to  sur- 
render them.  On  the  other  hand,  I recognized  no  authority  of  the  Spanish  Gov- 
ernor General  who  was  merely  a prisoner  of  war;  I acted  under  the  orders  of  Gen- 
eral Merritt  as  the  United  States  Military  Governor,  and  in  accordance  with  the 
terms  of  capitulation.  The  claim  will  probably  be  made  by  the  Spanish  officials  that 
as  we  captured  Manila  a few  hours  after  the  peace  protocol  had  been  signed  at 
Washington,  this  property  still  belongs  to  the  Spaniards.  But  I believe  that  the 
law  in  such  cases  was  clearly  defined  in  decisions  made  by  the  United  States  Su- 
preme Court  in  1815.  We  captured  Manila,  and  the  capitulation  (under  which 
these  funds  became  United  States  property)  was  signed  by  both  parties,  before  either 
had  received  any  notice  of  the  protocol  of  suspension  of  hostilities. 

On  the  opening  of  the  Custom  House  several  important  questions  arose  for  im- 
mediate decision.  The  first  was  in  regard  to  Mexican  dollars.  The  importation  of 
these  has  for  several  years  been  prohibited,  with  a view  of  forcing  the  Spanish  coin- 
age (which  contains  less  silver)  into  circulation.  The  large  English  banks  repre- 
sented that  there  was  a scarcity  of  currency,  owing  to  the  amount  which  had  been 
hoarded  and  sent  away  during  the  seige,  and  they  agreed  in  consideration  of  being 
allowed  to  import  Mexican  dollars  free  of  duty,  to  guarantee  the  notes  and  accepted 
checks  of  the  Spanish  bank,  which  should  be  received  by  us  in  payment  of  customs 
up  to  $200,000  at  any  one  time.  The  Spanish  bank  was  in  difficulty,  owing  to  the 
enormous  amount  which  the  Government  had  taken  from  it  under  the  form  of  a 
forced  loan,  and  any  discrimination  on  our  part  against  it  would  result  in  its  failure, 


154 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  APE. 


entailing  widespread  financial  disturbance.  As  there  seemed  no  reason  against  al- 
lowing the  importation  of  Mexican  dollars  and  many  in  favor  of  it,  I recommended 
that  the  Custom  House  continue  to  receive  the  notes  and  checks  of  this  bank  in 
payment  of  customs  (for  which  we  were  amply  protected  by  the  guarantee  of  the 
strong  English  banks)  and  with  General  Merritt’s  approval  wrote  to  these  banks  au- 
thorizing them  to  import  Mexican  dollars  free  of  duty  until  further  notice. 

The  next  question  was  in  regard  to  the  rate  of  duties  on  imports  and  exports. 
After  a careful  consideration  of  the  matter,  I recommended  that  the  tariff  be  not 
changed  until  the  question  had  been  fully  studied  and  ample  notice  given.  Gen- 
eral Merritt  approved  this  and  the  customs  are  being  collected  on  the  Spanish  tariff. 

About  a week  after  the  Custom  House  was  opened  certain  parties  came  to  me 
representing  that  Consul  General  Wildman,  of  Hongkong,  had  informed  them 
that  United  States  goods  would  be  admitted  free  of  duty  in  Manila,  that  acting  on 
this  they  had  purchased  a cargo  of  American  illuminating  oil  in  Hongkong,  and 
that  the  payment  of  the  heavy  duty  on  it  ($30  per  ton,  or  about  8c  per  gallon) 
would  ruin  them.  On  consulting  Lieutenant  Colonel  Crowder,  Judge  Advocate  of 
the  Eighth  Army  Corps,  he  pointed  out  the  language  of  paragraph  5 of  General 
Merritt’s  proclamation,  which  followed  literally  the  instructions  of  the  President, 
viz:  “The  Port  of  Manila  will  be  open  while  our  military  occupation  may  continue, 
to  the  commerce  of  all  neutral  nations  as  well  as  our  own,  in  articles  not  contra- 
band of  war,  and  upon  payment  of  the  prescribed  rates  of  duty  which  may  be  in 
force  at  the  time  of  the  importation.” 

Under  this  there  was  clearly  no  authority  for  discriminating  in  favor  of  American 
goods,  either  coming  direct  from  a United  States  Port  or  by  transshipment  at  Hong- 
kong. 

The  Collector  of  Customs  was  directed  to  act  accordingly. 

Another  question  was  in  regard  to  the  importation  of  Chinamen  into  Manila.  The 
Consul  at  Hongkong  telegraphed  to  know  if  they  would  be  admitted.  As  there 
had  been  no  time  for  examining  the  treaties  and  laws  in  force  on  this  subject,  I 
replied  with  General  Merritt’s  approval  that  for  the  present  it  was  not  practicable  to 
admit  Chinese  laborers  into  Manila. 

Another  very  important  question  which  arose  was  in  regard  to  trade  with  the 
other  Philippine  islands.  Nearly  all  the  hemp  and  the  greater  part  of  the  sugar 


FILIPINA  PREPARING  FOR  A SIESTA. 


LOADING  BUFFALOES  IN  LUZON  WITH  PRODUCE. 





THE  PHILIPPINE  AUTHOR-MARTYR,  HIS  WIFE  AND  HIS  EXECUTION. 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  ARE. 


157 


is  grown  in  the  Visayas.  The  hemp  is  bought  by  foreign  merchants  in  Manila,  who 
bring  it  there  from  the  other  islands,  and  export  it,  paying  large  duties  to  the  Manila 
Custom  House.  These  merchants  were  anxious  to  bring  up  their  stock,  of  which 
a large  amount  had  accumulated  during  the  war,  and  ship  it  abroad.  The  ships  en- 
gaged in  this  island  trade  were  idle  in  the  Pasig.  They  belonged  to  a Spanish 
corporation,  owned  entirely  by  Scotch  capital,  and  had  a Spanish  Register.  The 
owners  were  ready  to  transfer  them  to  the  American  flag.  Could  these  vessels  be 
allowed  to  clear  for  the  ports  of  Cebu  and  Uoio,  which  were  in  Spanish  possession? 
The  Judge  Advocate  advised  me  that  they  could  not,  without  the  express  authority 
of  the  President.  I so  notified  the  owners  of  the  ships  and  the  hemp  merchants. 
The  day  before  I left  Manila,  however,  Admiral  Dewey  received  a cable  from  the 
Navy  Department  stating  that  Spanish  ships  had  been  granted  the  privilege  of  trad- 
ing to  American  ports  during  the  suspension  of  hostilities,  and  that  American  ships 
could  be  granted  a similar  privilege  for  Spanish  ports.  I understood  that  on  the 
strength  of  this  cable  General  Otis  intended  to  allow  the  United  States  Consul  at 
Manila  to  grant  these  vessels  an  American  Register  and  then  allow  them  to  clear 
for  the  other  islands.  I do  not  know  what  the  arrangement,  if  any  was  made,  in 
regard  to  the  payment  of  export  duties  at  Iloilo.  Clearly  the  hemp  cannot  pay 
export  duties  at  both  Iloilo  and  Manila,  and  the  Spaniards  are  not  likely  to  allow 
it  to  leave  Iloilo  free  while  we  collect  an  export  duty  on  it  at  Manila.  Incidentally, 
this  illustrates  the  complications  and  loss  that  will  arise  if  the  islands  are  subdivided. 
The  principal  merchants  for  all  the  islands  are  at  Manila,  and  90  per  cent,  of  the 
duties  in  imports  and  exports  are  collected  at  its  Custom  House.  A large  part  of 
the  imports  are  redistributed  through  the  islands;  and  all  the  hemp  and  sugar,  which 
form  the  principal  exports,  come  to  Manila  from  other  islands.  If,  then,  we  re- 
tain Luzon  and  give  the  other  islands  back  to  Spain  or  some  other  nation,  that  na- 
tion will  impose  import  and  export  duties  on  everything  coming  from  or  to  Manila. 
The  foreign  trade  of  that  city  as  a distributing  and  collecting  point  for  all  the  islands 
will  be  lost,  and  its  prosperity  will  be  destroyed;  moreover,  the  Government  revenue 
from  that  trade  will  be  lost. 

In  view  of  the  fact  that  Spanish  officials  declined  to  co-operate  or  assist  in  any 
way  in  the  American  government  of  Manila,  the  ease  and  rapidity  with  which  order 
was  maintained,  the  machinery  of  government  put  in  operation  and  business  re- 
established, after  our  entry  into  Manila  is  very  remarkable.  For  every  position  in 
the  Government  sendee,  legal,  administrative,  financial,  mechanical,  clerical,  men 
could  be  found  in  our  volunteer  ranks  who  were  experienced  in  just  that  class  of 


158 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS  AS  THEY  AEE. 


work  at  home,  and  they  took  charge  of  their  Spanish  positions  with  promptness  and 
confidence. 

Even  in  the  matter  of  language  no  serious  difficulty  was  encountered,  for  no  less 
than  30  good  interpreters  were  found  in  the  California  and  Colorado  regiments. 

The  Military  Government  as  now  organized  and  administered,  fulfills  all  the  re- 
[uirements  of  preserving  order  and  collecting  the  public  revenue. 

The  civil  courts,  however,  have  yet  to  be  organized,  and  their  organization  will 
present  many  difficulties. 


CHAPTER  X. 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 

The  Pith  of  the  Official  Reports  of  the  Capture  of  Manila,  by  Major-General  Wesley 
Merritt,  Commanding  the  Philippine  Expedition;  General  Frank  V.  Greene, 
General  Arthur  McArthur,  and  General  Thomas  Anderson,  With  the  Arti- 
cles of  Capitulation,  Showing  How  8,000  Americans  Carried  an  Intrenched 
City  With  a Garrison  of  13,000  Spaniards,  and  Kept  Out  14,000  Insurgents — 
The  Difficulties  of  American  Generals  With  Philippine  Troops. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  events  in  the  records  of  the  fall  of  cities,  that 
carried  with  them  decisive  factors  affecting  nations,  is  that  of  the  conquest  of 
Manila,  by  the  army  and  navy  of  the  United  States  in  the  memorable  year  of  1898. 
The  victory  of  Admiral  George  Dewey  May  1st,  in  the  hay  of  Manila,  nigh  Cavite, 
has  been  celebrated  in  every  clime  and  in  all  languages,  and  the  great  story  is 
related  in  this  book  as  one  of  universal  fame,  and  given  in  outline  and  also  in  pen 
pictures  meant  to  show  the  local  coloring,  and  these  are  incidents  most  illustrative 
that  are  not  familiar.  The  names  of  the  ships  and  the  officers  of  the  victorious 
fleet,  and  the  force  of  the  contending  squadrons  in  men  and  guns  are  herewith  pre- 
sented as  an  indisputable  record. 

Admiral  Dewey  held  on  to  his  command  of  the  bay  and  city  of  Manila,  braving 
all  dangers — and  they  were  many — and  as  fast  as  the  army  could  be  organized  and 
equipped,  reinforcements  were  forwarded.  General  Wesley  Merritt  was  appointed 
the  Commander  in  Chief  of  the  expedition  to  the  Philippines,  and  arrived  at  Cavite, 
July  25th.  The  official  history  of  the  operations  that  forced  the  surrender  of 
the  old  Spanish  capital  in  the  East  Indies  has  not  received  the  public  attention  its 
unusual  and  instructive  character  demands,  because  the  reports  were  not  received 
in  the  States  and  given  to  the  public  until  the  Paris  peace  commission  was  assem- 
bling, and  this  singularly  suggestive  detail  has  been  almost  neglected.  It  is  here 
for  the  first  time  consecutively  arranged,  annotated  and  adjusted,  so  as  to  tell 
the  whole  story.  The  part  played  by  the  insurgents  is  one  that  has  not  been  stated 
by  authority  and  with  precision  combining  narrative  form  with  the  internal  evidence 
of  authenticity. 

The  first  expeditionary  force  of  the  United  States  to  arrive  was  that  of  Genera] 
Thomas  Anderson,  on  June  30,  sixty  days  after  Dewey’s  victory.  The  second  ex- 
peditionary force,  under  General  Frank  Y.  Greene,  arrived  July  17,  and  the  third. 

159 


ICO 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


under  General  McArthur,  July  30th,  five  days  later  than  General  Merritt,  who 
found  Rear  Admiral  George  Dewey’s  war  ships  “anchored  in  line  off  Cavite,  and  just 
outside  of  the  transports  and  supply  vessels  engaged  in  the  military  service.”  He 
was  “in  full  control  of  the  navigation  of  the  bay,  and  his  vessels  passed  and  re- 
passed within  range  of  the  water  batteries  of  the  town  of  Manila  without  drawing 
the  fire  of  the  enemy.”  This  immunity  of  protected  cruisers  from  the  fire  of  nine- 
inch  Ivrupp  guns  with  an  abundance  of  ammunition  that  was,  and  some  that  was 


not  serviceable,  was  due  to  the  terrible  prestige  of  the  American  Admiral  and  the 
consequent  power  of  his  word  that  if  fired  upon  he  would  destroy  the  city.  An- 
derson’s Americans  were,  General  Merritt  reports,  disposed  as  follows: 

The  Second  Oregon,  detachments  of  California  Heavy  Artillery,  Twenty-third 
Infantry,  and  Fourteenth  Infantry  occupied  the  town  of  Cavite;  while  Brigadier 
General  F.  Y.  Greene,  United  States  Volunteers,  was  encamped  with  his  brigade, 
consisting  of  the  Eighteenth  Infantry.  Third  United  States  Artillery,  Company  A, 
Engineer  Battalion,  First  Colorado,  First  California,  First  Nc1  r'  ha.  Tenth  Penn- 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


161 


sylvania,  and  Batteries  A and  B of  the  Utah  Artillery,  along  the  line  of  the  bay  shore 
near  the  village  of  Paranaque,  about  five  miles  by  water  and  twenty-five  miles  by  the 
roads  from  Cavite. 

The  Major  General  commanding  visited  General  Greene’s  camp  and  made  a re- 
connaissance of  the  position  held  by  the  Spanish,  and  also  the  opposing  lines  of 
the  insurgent  forces,  finding  General  Greene’s  command  encamped  on  a strip 
of  sandy  land  running  parallel  to  the  shore  of  the  bay  and  not  far  distant  from  the 
beach,  but  owing  to  the  great  difficulties  of  landing  supplies  “the  greater  portion 
of  the  force  had  shelter  tents  only,  and  were  suffering  many  discomforts,  the  camp 
being  in  a low,  flat  place,  without  shelter  from  the  heat  of  the  tropical  sun  or  ade- 
quate protection  during  the  terrific  downpours  of  rain  so  frequent  at  this  season.” 
The  General  commanding  was  at  once  struck  “by  the  exemplary  spirit  of  patient, 
even  cheerful,  endurance  shown  by  the  officers  and  men  under  such  circumstances, 
and  this  feeling  of  admiration  for  the  manner  in  which  the  American  soldier,  vol- 
unteer and  regular  alike,  accept  the  necessary  hardships  of  the  work  they  have 
undertaken  to  do,  has  grown  and  increased  with  every  phase  of  the  difficult  and  try- 
ing campaign  which  the  troops  of  the  Philippine  expedition  have  brought  to  such 
a brilliant  and  successful  conclusion.” 

The  left  or  north  flanks  of  General  Green’s  camp  extended  to  a point  on  the 
“Calle  Real,”  about  3,200  yards  from  the  outer  line  of  Spanish  defenses  of  the  city  of 
Manila.  This  Spanish  line  began  at  the  powder  magazine,  or  old  fort  San  Antonio, 
within  a hundred  yards  of  the  beach  and  just  south  of  the  Malate  suburb  of  Manila, 
and  stretched  away  to  the  Spanish  left  in  more  or  less  detached  works,  eastward, 
through  swamps  and  rice  fields,  covering  all  the  avenues  of  approach  to  the  town 
and  encircling  the  city  completely.” 

General  Merritt  defines  with  firmness  and  perspicuity  his  position  regarding  the 
Filipinos  in  these  terms: 

“The  Filipinos,  or  insurgent  forces  at  war  with  Spain,  had,  prior  to  the  arrival 
of  the  American  land  forces,  been  waging  desultory  warfare  with  the  Spaniards  for 
several  months,  and  were  at  the  time  of  my  arrival  in  considerable  force,  variously 
estimated  and  never  accurately  ascertained,  but  probably  not  far  from  12,000  men. 
These  troops,  well  supplied  with  small  arms,  with  plenty  of  ammunition  and  several 
field  guns,  had  obtained  positions  of  investment  opposite  to  the  Spanish  line  of  de- 
tached works  throughout  their  entire  extent;  and  on  the  particular  road  called  the 
“Calle  Real,”  passing  along  the  front  of  General  Greene’s  brigade  camp  and  running 
through  Malate  to  Manila,  the  insurgents  had  established  an  earthwork  or  trench 
within  800  yards  of  tbe  powder-magazine  fort.  They  also  occupied  as  well  the 


162 


OFFICIAL  HISTOBY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


road  to  the  right,  leading  from  the  village  of  Passay,  and  the  approach  by  the  beach 
was  also  in  their  possession.  This  anomalons  state  of  affairs,  namely,  having  a line  of 
qnasi-hostile  native  troops  between  our  forces  and  the  Spanish  position,  was,  of 
course,  very  objectionable,  but  it  was  difficult  to  deal  with,  owing  to  the  peculiar 
condition  of  our  relations  with  the  insurgents,  which  may  be  briefly  stated  as  follows: 

“Shortly  after  the  naval  battle  of  Manila  Bay,  the  principal  leader  of  the  in- 
surgents, General  Emilio  Aguiualdo,  came  to  Cavite  from  Hongkong,  and,  with  the 
consent  of  pur  naval  authorities,  began  active  work  in  raising  troops  and  pushing  the 
Spaniards  in  the  direction  of  the  city  of  Manila.  Having  met  with  some  success,  and 
the  natives  flocking  to  his  assistance,  he  proclaimed  an  independent  government 
of  republican  form,  with  himself  as  president,  and  at  the  time  of  my  arrival  in  the 
islands  the  entire  edifice  of  executive  and  legislative  departments  and  subdivision 
of  territory  for  administration  purposes  had  been  accomplished,  at  least  on  paper,  and 
the  Filipinos  held  military  possession  of  many  points  in  the  islands  other  than  those 
in  the  vicinity  of  Manila. 

“As  General  Aguinaldo  did  not  visit  me  on  my  arrival,  nor  offer  his  services  as 
a subordinate  military  leader,  and  as  my  instructions  from  the  President  fully  con- 
templated the  occupation  of  the  islands  by  the  American  land  forces,  and  stated 
that  “the  powers  of  the  military  occupant  are  absolute  and  supreme  and  imme- 
diately operate  upon  the  political  condition  of  the  inhabitants,”  I did  not  consider 
it  wise  to  hold  any  direct  communication  with  the  insurgent  leader  until  I should 
be  in  possession  of  the  city  of  Manila,  especially  as  I would  not  until  then  be  in 
a position  to  issue  a proclamation  and  enforce  my  authority,  in  the  event  that  his 
pretensions  should  clash  with  my  designs. 

“For  these  reasons  the  preparations  for  the  attack  on  the  city  were  pressed,  and 
military  operations  conducted  without  reference  to  the  situation  of  the  insurgent 
forces.  The  wisdom  of  this  course  was  subsequently  fully  established  by  the  fact  that 
when  the  troops  of  my  command  carried  the  Spanish  intrenchments,  exteuding 
from  the  sea  to  the  Pasay  road  on  the  extreme  Spanish  right,  we  were  under  no 
obligations,  by  prearranged  plans  of  mutual  attack,  to  turn  to  the  right  and  clear 
the  front  still  held  against  the  insurgents,  but  were  able  to  move  forward  at  once 
and  occupy  the  city  and  suburbs.’’ 

General  Anderson  was  the  first  officer  of  the  American  army  to  arrive,  and  says 
Admiral  Dewey  gave  him  “every  possible  assistance,”  and  favored  him  “with  a 
clear  statement  of  the  situation.”  On  the  second  day  after  he  appeared  at  Cavite, 
which  was  one  day  after  General  Merritt’s  departure  from  San  Francisco,  he  had 
“on  interview  with  the  insurgent  chief,  Aguinaldo,  and  learned  from  him  that  the 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA 


163 


Spanish  forces  had  withdrawn,  driven  back  by  bis  army  as  he  claimed,  to  a line  of 
defense  immediately  around  the  city  and  its  suburbs.  He  estimated  the  Spanish 
forces  at  about  14,000  men,  and  his  own  at  about  the  same  number.  He  did  not 
seem  pleased  at  the  incoming  of  our  land  forces,  hoping,  as  I believe,  that  he  could 
take  tlm  city  with  his  own  army,  with  the  co-operation  of  the  American  fleet. 

‘'Believing  that  however  successful  the  insurgents  may  have  been  in  guerilla  war- 
fare against  the  Spaniards,  that  they  could  not  carry  their  lines  by  assault  or  (re- 
duce the  city  by  siege,  and  suspecting,  further,  that  a hearty  and  effective  co-opera- 
tion could  not  he  expected,  I had  at  once  a series  of  reconnaissances  made  to  exactly 
locate  the  enemy’s  lines  of  defense  and  to  ascertain  their  strength.” 

The  date  of  the  impression  made  on  General  Anderson’s  mind  as  to  the  dis- 
pleasure of  Aguinaldo  is  important.  The  insurgent  chief  would  have  preferred 
the  military  distinctions  to  have  been  reserved  for  himself.  General  Anderson  says 
of  the  Spanish  attacks  on  General  Greene’s  lines: 

“These  conflicts  began  on  the  night  of  July  31,  as  soon  as  the  enemy  had  realized 
that  we  had  taken  the  places  of  the  Filipinos,  and  began  a system  of  earthworks  to 
the  front  of  their  old  line.  It  may  have  been  merely  coincident,  but  these  attacks 
and  sorties  began  at  the  time  the  Captain  General  of  Manila  was  relieved  by  his 
second  in  command.  For  more  than  six  weeks  the  insurgents  had  kept  up  a bick- 
ering infantry  fire  on  the  Spanish  trenches,  firing  occasionally  some  old  siege  pieces 
captured  by  Admiral  Dewey  at  Cavite  and  given  to  Aguinaldo.  These  combats  were 
never  serious,  and  the  Spaniards,  so  far  as  I know,  made  no  sorties  upon  them. 
But  there  is  no  doubt  of  the  fact  that  the  Spaniards  attacked  our  lines  with  force 
and  vindictiveness,  until  they  were  informed  that  the  bringing  on  of  a general  en- 
gagement would  lead  to  a bombardment  of  the  city.  After  this  there  was  for  several 
days  a tacit  suspension  of  hostilities.” 

As  to  the  situation  of  General  Greene,  Brigadier  General  Merritt  says: 

“The  difficulty  in  gaining  an  avenue  of  approach  to  the  Spanish  line  lay  in  the 
fact  of  my  disinclination  to  ask  General  Aguinaldo  to  withdraw  from  the  beach  and 
the  ‘Calle  Real,’  so  that  Greene  could  move  forward.  This  was  overcome  by  in- 
structions to  General  Greene  to  arrange,  if  possible,  with  the  insurgent  brigade  com- 
mander in  his  immediate  vicinity  to  move  to  the  right  and  allow  the  American  forces 
unobstructed  control  of  the  roads  in  their  immediate  front.  No  objection  was 
made,  and  accordingly  General  Greene’s  brigade  threw  forward  a heavy  outpost 
line  on  the  “Calle  Real”  and  the  beach  and  constructed  a trench,  in  which  a portion 
of  the  guns  of  the  Utah  batteries  was  placed. 

“The  Spanish,  observing  this  activity  on  our  part,  made  a very  sharp  attack  with 


ATTACK  ON  MANILA,  SHOWING  POSITIONS'  OF  WAR  SHIPS  AND  TROOPS. 

At  Described  by  the  Herald’s  Corrcs.^adent*. 


164 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


'ELEVEN  THOUSAND  PRISONERS  TAKEN  AT  MANILA' 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


165 


miantry  and  artillery  on  the  night  of  July  31.  The  behavior  of  our  troops  during 
this  night  attack  was  all  that  could  be  desired,  and  I have,  in  cablegrams  to  the 
War  Department,  taken  occasion  to  commend  by  name  those  who  deserve  special 
mention  for  good  conduct  in  the  affair.  Our  position  was  extended  and  strengthened 
after  this  and  resisted  successfully  repeated  night  attacks,  our  forces  suffering, 
however,  considerable  loss  in  wounded  and  killed,  while  the  losses  of  the  enemy, 
owing  to  the  darkness,  could  not  be  ascertained. 

“The  strain  of  the  night  fighting  and  the  heavy  details  for  outpost  duty  made 
it  imperative  to  re-enforce  General  Greene’s  troops  with  General  MacArthur’s  brig- 
ade, which  had  arrived  in  transports  on  the  31st  of  July.  The  difficulties  of  this 
operation  can  hardly  be  overestimated.  The  transports  were  at  anchor  off  Cavite, 
five  miles  from  a point  on  the  beach  where  it  was  desired  to  disembark  the  men. 
Several  squalls,  accompanied  by  floods  of  rain,  raged  day  after  day,  and  the  only 
way  to  get  the  troops  and  supplies  ashore  was  to  load  them  from  the  ship’s  side 
into  native  lighters  (called  ‘cascos’)  or  small  steamboats,  move  them  to  a point  oppo- 
site the  camp,  and  then  disembark  them  through  the  surf  in  small  boats,  or  by  run- 
ning the  lighters  head  on  to  the  beach.  The  landing  was  finally  accomplished,  after 
days  of  hard  work  and  hardship;  and  I desire  here  to  express  again  my  admiration 
for  the  fortitude  and  cheerful  willingness  of  the  men  of  all  commands  engaged  in 
this  operation. 

“Upon  the  assembly  of  MacArthur’s  brigade  in  support  of  Greene’s,  I had 
about  8,500  men  in  position  to  attack,  and  I deemed  the  time  had  come  for  final 
action.  During  the  time  of  the  night  attacks  I had  communicated  my  desire  to  Ad- 
miral Dewey  that  he  would  allow  his  ships  to  open  fire  on  the  right  of  the  Spanish 
line  of  intrenchments,  believing  that  such  action  would  stop  the  night  firing  and  loss 
of  life,  but  the  Admiral  had  declined  to  order  it  unless  we  were  in  danger  of  losing 
our  position  by  the  assaults  of  the  Spanish,  for  the  reason  that,  in  his  opinion,  it 
would  precipitate  a general  engagement,  for  which  he  was  not  ready.  Now,  how- 
ever, the  brigade  of  General  MacArthur  was  in  position  and  the  Monterey  had 
arrived,  and  under  date  of  August  6 Admiral  Dewey  agreed  to  my  suggestion  that 
we  should  send  a joint  letter  to  the  Captain  General  notifying  him  that  he  should 
remove  from  the  city  all  non-combatants  within  fort}T-eight  hours.” 

The  joint  note  of  General  Merritt  and  Admiral  Dewey  was  as  follows: 

HEADQUARTERS  U.  S.  LAND  AND  NAVAL  FORCES, 
Manila  Bay,  Philippine  Islands,  August  7,  1898. 
The  General  in  Chief  Commanding  Spanish  Forces  in  Manila. 

Sir:  We  have  the  honor  to  notify  your  excellency  that  operations  of  the  land 


166 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


and  naval  forces  of  the  United  States  against  the  defenses  of  Manila  may  begin  at 
any  time  after  the  expiration  of  forty-eight  hours  from  the  hour  of  receipt  by  you  of 
this  communication,  or  sooner  if  made  necessary  by  an  attack  on  your  part. 

This  notice  is  given  in  order  to  afford  you  an  opportunity  to  remove  all  non- 
combatants  from  the  city.  Very  respectfully, 

WESLEY  MERRITT, 
Major-General,  United  States  Army, 
Commanding  Land  Forces  of  the  United  States. 

GEORGE  DEWEY, 
Rear-Admiral,  United  States  Navjr, 
Commanding  United  States  Naval  Forces  on  Asiatic  Station. 

The  notable  words  in  this  are  those  “against  the  defenses  of  Manila,”  instead 
of  against  the  city  itself — the  usual  way — the  city  was  to  be  spared  if  possible. 

Manila,  August  7,  1898. 

The  Governor-General  and  Captain-General  of  the  Philippines  to  the  Major-General 
of  the  Army  and  the  Rear  Admiral  of  the  Navy,  commanding,  respectively,  the 
Military  and  Naval  Forces  of  the  United  States. 

Gentlemen:  I have  the  honor  to  inform  your  excellencies  that  at  half-past  12 
to-day  I received  the  notice  with  which  you  favor  me,  that  after  forty-eight  hours 
have  elapsed  you  may  begin  operations  against  this  fortified  city,  or  at  an  earlier  hour 
if  the  forces  under  your  command  are  attacked  by  mine. 

As  your  notice  is  sent  for  the  purpose  of  providing  for  the  safety  of  non-com- 
batants, I give  thanks  to  your  excellencies  for  the  humane  sentiment  you  have 
shown,  and  state  that,  finding  myself  surrounded  by  insurrectionary  forces,  I am 
without  places  of  refuge  for  the  increased  numbers  of  wounded,  sick,  women,  and 
children  who  are  now  lodged  within  the  walls. 

Very  respectfully,  and  kissing  the  hands  of  your  excellencies, 

FORMIRE  JAUDENES, 

Governor-General  and  Captain-General  of  the  Philippines. 

The  second  paragraph  of  the  Governor-General  and  Captain-General’s  letter  indi- 
cates a sense  of  helplessness,  and  credits  the  insurgents  with  surrounding  the  city  so 
that  there  was  no  refuge.  August  9th  there  was  a second  joint  note  from  Major- 
General  Merritt  and  Rear  Admiral  Dewey,  in  the  terms  following: 

“The  Governor-General  and  Captain-General  of  the  Philippines. 

“Sir:  The  inevitable  suffering  in  store  for  the  wounded,  sick,  women,  and 

children  in  the  event  that  it  becomes  our  duty  to  reduce  the  defenses  of  the  walled 
town  in  which  they  are  gathered,  will,  we  feel  assured,  appeal  successfully  to  the 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


1G7 

sympathies  of  a general  capable  of  making  the  determined  and  prolonged  resistance 
which  your  excellency  has  exhibited  after  the  loss  of  your  naval  forces  and  without 
hope  of  succor. 

“We  therefore,  submit,  without  prejudice  to  the  high  sentiments  of  honor  and 
duty  which  your  excellency  entertains,  that  surrounded  on  every  side  as  you  are  by 
a constantly  increasing  force,  with  a powerful  fleet  in  your  front  and  deprived  of  all 
prospect  of  reinforcement  and  assistance,  a most  useless  sacrifice  of  life  would  result 
in  the  event  of  an  attack,  and  therefore  every  consideration  of  humanity  makes  it 
imperative  that  you  should  not  subject  your  city  to  the  horrors  of  a bombardment. 
Accordingly,  we  demand  the  surrender  of  the  city  of  Manila  and  the  Spanish  forces 
under  your  command.” 

The  Captain-General  wanted  time  to  hear  from  Madrid,  and  was  refused. 

The  language  of  General  Greene,  in  stating  the  fact  that  he  took  possession  of 
the  intrenchments  of  the  insurgents,  is  in  these  words: 

“On  the  morning  of  July  29,  in  compliance  with  verbal  instructions  received  the 
previous  day  from  the  Adjutant-General  of  the  Eighth  Army  Corps,  I occupied  the 
insurgent  trenches,  from  the  beach  to  the  Calle  Real,  with  one  battalion  Eighteenth 
United  States  Infantry,  one  battalion  First  Colorado  Infantry,  and  four  guns — • 
two  from  each  of  the  Utah  batteries — these  trenches  being  vacated  at  my  request 
by  the  insurgent  forces  under  Brigadier-General  Noriel.  As  these  trenches  were 
badly  located  and  insufficient  in  size  and  strength,  I ordered  another  line  constructed 
about  100  yards  in  advance  of  them,  and  this  work  was  completed,  mainly  by  the 
First  Colorado,  during  the  night  of  July  29-30.  The  length  of  this  line  was  only 
270  yards,  and  on  its  right  were  a few  barricades,  not  continuous,  occupied  by  the 
insurgents,  extending  over  to  the  large  rice  swamp,  just  east  of  the  road  from  Pasay 
to  Paco  (shown  on  the  accompanying  map).  Facing  these  was  a strong  Spanish 
line,  consisting  of  a stone  fort,  San  Antonio  de  Abad,  near  the  beach,  intrenchments 
of  sandbags  and  earth  about  seven  feet  high  and  10  feet  thick,  extending  in  a curved 
direction  for  about  1,200  yards  and  terminating  in  a fortified  blockhouse,  known 
as  No  11,  beyond  our  right  on  the  Pasay  road.  It  faced  our  front  and  enveloped  our 
right  flank.” 

General  Greene,  reporting  the  fighting  on  his  front,  says  of  the  Spanish  position 
and  first  attack. 

Mounted  in  and  near  the  stone  fort  were  seven  guns  in  all,  viz.,  three  bronze  field 
guns  of  3.6  inches  caliber,  four  bronze  mountain  guns  of  3.2  inches  caliber,  and  in  the 
vicinity  of  Blockhouse  No.  14  were  two  steel  mountain  guns  of  3.2  inches  caliber. 


168 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


169 


The  line  was  manned  throughout  its  length  by  infantry,  with  strong  reserves  at 
Malate  and  at  the  walled  city  in  its  rear. 

Shortly  before  midnight  of  July  31-August  1 the  Spaniards  opened  a heavy  and 
continuous  fire  with  both  artillery  and  infantry  from  their  entire  line.  Our  trenches 
were  occupied  that  day  by  the  two  battalions  of  the  Tenth  Pennsylvania  Infantry, 
one  foot  battery  (II),  nearly  200  strong,  of  the  Third  Artillery,  and  four  guns,  two 
of  Battery  A and  two  of  Battery  B,  Utah  Artillery.  For  about  an  hour  and  a half 
the  firing  on  both  sides,  with  artillery  and  infantry,  was  very  heavy  and  continuous, 
our  expenditure  of  ammunition  being  ICO  rounds  of  artillery  and  about  60,000 
rounds  of  infantry.  That  of  the  Spaniards  was  nearly  twice  as  much. 

The  American  loss  was  ten  killed  and  forty-three  wounded. 

General  Greene  says:  “Major  Cuthbertson,  Tenth  Pennsylvania,  reports  that 

the  Spaniards  left  their  trenches  in  force  and  attempted  to  turn  our  right  flank, 
coming  within  200  yards  of  his  position.  But  as  the  night  was  intensely  dark,  with 
incessant  and  heavy  rain,  and  as  no  dead  or  wounded  were  found  in  front  of  his 
position  at  daylight,  it  is  possible  that  he  was  mistaken  and  that  the  heavy  fire  to 
which  he  was  subjected  came  from  the  trenches  near  Block  House  14,  beyond  his 
right  flank,  at  a distance  of  about  700  yards.  The  Spaniards  used  smokeless  powder, 
the  thickets  obscured  the  flash  of  their  guns,  and  the  sound  of  the  Mauser  bullets 
penetrating  a bamboo  pole  is  very  similar  to  the  crack  of  the  rifle  itself. 

'•This  attack  demonstrated  the  immediate  necessity  of  extending  our  intrench- 
ments  to  the  right  and,  although  not  covered  by  my  instructions  (which  were  to 
occupy  the  trenches  from  the  bay  to  Calle  Real,  and  to  avoid  precipitating  an  en- 
gagement), I ordered  the  First  Colorado  and  one  battalion  of  the  First  California, 
which  occupied  the  trenches  at  9 a.  m.,  August  1,  to  extend  the  line  of  trenches  to 
the  Pasay  road.  The  work  was  begun  by  these  troops,  and  continued  every  day 
by  the  troops  occupying  the  trenches  in  turn,  until  a strong  line  was  completed  by 
August  12,  about  1,200  yards  in  length,  extending  from  the  bay  to  the  east  side  of 
the  Pasay  road.  Its  left  rested  on  the  bay  and  its  right  on  an  extensive  rice  swamp, 
practically  impassible.  The  right  flank  was  refused,  because  the  only  way  to  cross 
a smaller  rice  swamp,  crossing  the  line  about  700  yards  from  the  beach,  was  along 
a cross-road  in  rear  of  the  general  line.  As  finally  completed  the  works  were  very 
strong  in  profile,  being  five  to  six  feet  in  height  and  eight  to  ten  feet  in  thickness  at 
the  base,  strengthened  by  bags  filled  with  earth. 

“The  only  material  available  was  black  soil  saturated  with  water,  and  without  the 
bags  this  was  washed  down  and  ruined  in  a day  by  the  heavy  and  almost  incessant 
rains.  The  construction  of  these  trenches  was  constantly  interrupted  by  the  enemy’s 


170 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


fire.  They  were  occupied  by  the  troops  iu  succession,  four  battalions  being  usually 
sent  out  for  a service  of  twenty-four  hours,  and  posted  with  three  battalions  in 
the  trenches,  and  one  battalion  in  reserve  along  the  crossroad  to  Pasay;  Cossack  posts 
being  sent  out  from  the  latter  to  guard  the  camp  against  any  possible  surprise  from 
the  northeast  and  east.  The  service  in  the  trenches  was  of  the  most  arduous  char- 
acter, the  rain  being  almost  incessant,  and  the  men  having  no  protection  against  it; 
they  were  wet  during  the  entire  twenty-four  hours,  and  the  mud  was  so  deep  that 
the  shoes  were  ruined  and  a considerable  number  of  men  rendered  barefooted.  Until 
the  notice  of  bombardment  was  given  on  August  7,  any  exposure  above  or  behind  the 
trenches  promptly  brought  the  enemy’s  fire,  so  that  the  men  had  to  sit  in  the  mud 
under  cover  and  keep  awake,  prepared  to  resist  an  attack,  during  the  entire  tour 
of  twenty-four  hours. 

“After  one  particularly  heavy  rain  a portion  of  the  trench  contained  two  feet  of 
water,  in  which  the  men  had  to  remain.  It  could  not  be  drained,  as  it  was  lower  than 
an  adjoining  rice  swamp,  in  which  the  water  had  risen  nearly  two  feet,  the  rainfall 
being  more  than  four  inches  in  twenty-four  hours.  These  hardships  were  all  en- 
dured by  the  men  of  the  different  regiments  in  turn,  with  the  finest  possible  spirit 
and  without  a murmur  of  complaint.” 

This  is  a vivid  picture  of  hard  service.  General  Greene  continues: 

“August  7 the  notice  of  bombardment  after  forty-eight  hours,  or  sooner  if  the 
Spanish  fire  continued,  was  served,  and  after  that  date  not  a shot  was  fired  on  either 
side  until  the  assault  was  made  on  August  13.  It  was  with  great  difficulty,  and  in 
some  cases  not  without  force,  that  the  insurgents  were  restrained  from  opening  fire 
and  thus  drawing  the  fire  of  the  Spaniards  during  this  period. 

“Owing  to  the  heavy  storm  and  high  surf  it  was  impossible  to  communicate 
promptly  with  the  division  commander  at  Cavite,  and  1 received  my  instructions 
direct  from  the  major-general  commanding,  or  his  staff  officers,  one  of  whom  visited 
my  camp  every  day,  and  I reported  direct  to  him  in  the  same  manner.  My  instruc- 
tions were  to  occupy  the  insurgent  trenches  near  the  beach,  so  as  to  be  in  a good 
position  to  advance  on  Manila  when  ordered,  but  meanwhile  to  avoid  precipitating 
an  engagement,  not  to  waste  ammunition,  and  (after  August  1)  not  to  return  the 
enemy’s  fire  unless  convinced  that  he  had  left  his  trenches  and  was  making  an  attack 
iii  force.  These  instruction-  were  given  daily  iu  the  most  positive  terms  to  the  officer 
commanding  in  the  trenches,  and  in  the  main  they  were  faithfully  carried  out. 

“More  ammunition  than  necessary  was  expended  on  the  nights  of  August  2 and 
5,  but  iu  both  cases  the  trenches  were  occupied  by  troops  under  fire  for  the  first  time, 
and  in  the  darkness  and  rain  there  was  ground  to  believe  that  the  heavy  fire  indicated 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


171 


a real  attack  from  outside  the  enemy’s  trenches.  The  total  expenditure  of  ammuni- 
tion  on  our  side  in  the  four  engagements  was  about  150,000  rounds,  and  by  the  enemy 
very  much  more. 

“After  the  attack  of  July  31-August  1,  I communicated  by  signal  with  the  cap- 
tain of  the  U.  S.  S.  Raleigh,  anchored  about  3,000  yards  southwest  of  my  camp,  ask- 
ing if  he  had  received  orders  in  regard  to  the  action  of  his  ship  in  case  of  another 
attack  on  my  troops.  He  replied: 

“Both  Admiral  Dewey  and  General  Merritt  desire  to  avoid  general  action  at  pres- 
ent. If  attack  too  strong  for  you,  we  will  assist  you,  and  another  vessel  will  come 
and  offer  help. 

“In  repeating  this  message,  Lieutenant  Tappan,  commanding  U.  S.  S.  Callao, 
anchored  nearer  the  beach,  sent  me  a box  of  blue  lights,  and  it  was  agreed  that  if  I 
burned  one  of  these  on  the  beach  the  Raleigh  would  at  once  open  fire  on  the  Spanish 
fort.” 

General  Merritt  speaks  of  the  Colorado  skirmishers  leaving  their  breastworks 
when  the  navy  ceased  firing  on  the  13th  of  August,  and  advancing  swiftly,  finding  the 
Spanish  trenches  deserted,  “but  as  they  passed  over  the  Spanish  works  they  were  met 
by  a sharp  fire  from  a second  line,  situated  in  the  streets  of  Malate,  by  which  a num- 
ber of  men  were  killed  and  wounded,  among  others  the  soldier  who  pulled  down  the 
Spanish  colors  still  flying  on  the  fort  and  raised  our  own.” 

General  Greene  is  complimentary  to  the  officers  and  who  conducted  the  recon- 
naissances while  he  was  at  Camp  Dewey  twenty-five  days,  and  states: 

“Captain  Grove  and  Lieutenant  Means,  of  the  First  Colorado,  had  been  partic- 
ularly active  in  this  work  and  fearless  in  penetrating  beyond  our  lines  and  close  to 
those  of  the  enemy.  As  the  time  for  attack  approached,  these  officers  made  a careful 
examination  of  the  ground  between  our  trenches  and  Fort  San  Antonio  de  Abad, 
and,  finally,  on  August  11,  Major  J.  F.  Bell,  United  States  Volunteer  Engineers, 
tested  the  creek  in  front  of  this  fort  and  ascertained  not  only  that  it  was  fordable, 
but  the  exact  width  of  the  ford  at  the  beach,  and  actually  swam  in  the  bay  to  a point 
from  which  he  could  examine  the  Spanish  line  from  the  rear.  With  the  information 
thus  obtained  it  was  possible  to  plan  the  attack  intelligently.  The  position  as- 
signed to  my  brigade  extended  from  the  beach  to  the  small  rice  swamp,  a front  of 
about  700  yards. 

“After  the  sharp  skirmish  on  the  second  line  of  defense  of  the  Spaniards,  and  after 
Greene’s  brigade  moved  through  Malate,  meeting  a shuffling  foe,  the  open  space  at 
the  luneta,  just  south  of  the  walled  city,  was  reached  about  1 p.  m.  A white  flag  was 
flying  at  the  southwest  bastion,  and  I rode  forward  to  meet  it  under  a heavy  fire 


172 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


from  our  right  and  rear  on  the  Paco  road.  At  the  bastion  I was  informed  that  officers 
representing  General  Merritt  and  Admiral  Dewey  were  qn  their  way  ashore  to  receive 
the  surrender,  and  I therefore  turned  cast  to  the  Paco  road.  The  firing  ceased  at 
this  time,  and  on  reaching  this  road  I found  nearly  1,000  Spanish  troops  who  had 
retreated  from  Santa  Ana  through  Pac-o,  and  coming  up  the  Paco  road  had  been 
firing  on  our  flank.  I held  the  commanding  officers,  but  ordered  these  troops  to 
march  into  the  walled  city.  At  this  point,  the  California  regiment  a short  time  be- 
fore had  met  some  insurgents  who  had  fired  at  the  Spaniards  on  the  walls,  and  the 
iatter  in  returning  the  fire  had  caused  a loss  in  the  California  regiment  of  1 killed 
and  2 wounded. 

“My  instructions  were  to  march  past  the  walled  city  on  its  surrender,  cross  the 
bridge,  occupy  the  city  on  the  north  side  of  the  Pasig,  and  protect  lives  and  property 
there.  While  the  white  flag  was  flying  on  the  walls  yet,  very  sharp  firing  had  just 
taken  place  outside,  and  there  were  from  5,000  to  0,000  men  on  the  walls,  with  arms 
in  their  hands,  only  a few  yards  from  us.  I did  not  feel  justified  in  leaving  this  force 
in  my  rear  until  the  surrender  was  dearly  established,  and  I therefore  halted  and 
assembled  my  force,  prepared  to  force  the  gates  if  there  was  any  more  firing.  The 
Eighteenth  Infantry  andTirst  California  were  sent  forward  to  hold  the  bridges  a few 
yards  ahead,  but  the  second  battalion,  Third  Artillery,  First  Nebraska,  Tenth  Penn- 
sylvania, and  First  Colorado  were  all  assembled  at  this  point.  While  this  was  being 

0 

done  I received  a note  from  Lieutenant-Colonel  Whittier,  of  General  Merritt’s  staff, 
written  from  the  Captain-General’s  office  within  the  walls,  asking  me  to  stop  the 
firing  outside,  as  negotiations  for  surrender  were  in  progress.” 

And  General  Greene  continues:  “I  then  returned  to  the  troops  outside  the  walls 
and  sent  Captain  Birkhimer’s  battalion  of  the  Third  Artillery  down  the  Paco  road 
to  prevent  any  insurgents  from  entering.  Feeling  satisfied  that  there  would  be  no 
attack  from  the  Spanish  troops  lining  the  walls,  I put  the  regiments  in  motion  toward 
the  bridges,  brushing  aside  a considerable  force  of  insurgents  who  had  penetrated 
the  city  from  the  direction  of  Paco,  and  were  in  the  main  street  with  their  flag  expect- 
ing to  march  into  the  walled  city  and  plant  it  on  the  walls.  After  crossing  the 
bridges  the  Eighteenth  United  States  Infantry  was  posted  to  patrol  the  principal 
streets  near  the  bridge,  th«  First  California  was  sent  up  the  Pasig  to  occupy  Quiapo, 
San  Miguel,  and  Malaeanan,  and  with  the  First  Nebraska  I marched  down  the  river 
to  the  Captain  of  the  Port’s  office,  where  I ordered  the  Spanish  flag  hauled  down  and 
the  American  flag  raised  in  its  place.” 

The  insurgents  were  disposed  to  disregard  the  white  flag  and  the  process  of  the 
capitulation,  but  “a  considerable  force”  of  them  was  “brushed  aside.”  General 


UNITED  STATES  PEACE  COMMISSIONERS. 


FLOWERS  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA.  175 


INTERIOR  OF  THE  FORTIFICATIONS  OF 


176 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


Greene’s  losses  before  Manila  were  16  killed  and  66  wounded;  his  force  5,100.  He 
remarks:  “The  resistance  encountered  on  the  13th  was  much  less  than  anticipated 
and  planned  for,  hut  had  the  resistance  been  greater  the  result  would  have  been 
the  same,  only  the  loss  would  have  been  greater.  Fortunately,  the  great  result  of 
capturing  this  city,  the  seat  of  Spanish  power  in  the  East  for  more  than  three  hun- 
dred years,  was  accomplished  with  a loss  of  life  comparatively  insignificant.” 

Captain  T.  B.  Mott,  detached  from  General  Merritt’s  temporarily,  served  on 
General  Greene’s  stall,  and  received  this  mention: 

“In  posting  troops  in  the  trenches,  in  making  reconnoissances,  in  transmitting 
orders  unde*  fire,  and  in  making  reports,  he  has  uniformly  exhibited  courage,  mili- 
tary ability,  and  sound  judgment,  the  qualities,  in  short,  which  are  most  valuable  in 
a staff  officer.” 

Captain  Bates,  Lieutenant  Schieflie,  and  Captain  D.  F.  Millet,  artist  and  autlior, 
are  praised  for  activity,  intelligence  and  valuable  service.  Millet  was  with  Greene 
before  Plevna,  during  the  Kusso-Turkish  campaign.  Greene  was  appointed  .the 
senior  member  of  the  committee  to  arrange  the  terms  of  the  capitulation. 

General  Anderson  had  instructions  to  extend  his  line  to  crowd  the  insurgents 
out  of  their  trenches  with  their  consent,  but  this  was  not  attempted,  for  that  would 
have  brought  on  an  engagement  prematurely.  Anderson  had  purchased  wire-cutters 
with  insulated  handles  in  San  Francisco,  and  they  were  useful.  Anderson  had  his 
trenches  with  the  insurgents.  MeArthur’sdivision  was  before  a “circulated  line  of  earth- 
worksfaced with  sand  bags, ’’and  the  problem  of  the  advance  was  made  difficult  because 
“we  could. not  be  sure  whether  our  first  attack  was  to  be  tentative  or  serious,  this 
depending  on  action  of  the  navy;  second,  from  our  orders  not  to  displace  the  in- 
surgents without  their  consent  from  their  position  to  the  right  of  their  guns  on  the 
Pasav  road.  This  to  the  very  last  the  insurgent  leaders  positively  refused  to  give. 
Yet,  if  we  could  not  go  far  enough  to  the  right  to  silence  their  field  guns  and 
carry  that  part  of  their  line,  they  would  have  a fatal  cross  fire  on  troops  attacking 
blockhouse  No.  14.  I therefore  directed  General  MacArthur  to  put  the  three  2.10 
inch  guns  of  Battery  B.  Utah  Volunteer  Artillery,  in  the  emplacement  of  the  insur- 
gent gun  and  to  place  the  Astor  Battery  behind  a high  garden  wall  to  the  right  of 
the  Pasay  road,  to  be  held  there  subject  to  orders. 

“I  assumed  that  when  the  action  became  hot  at  this  point,  as  I knew  it  would 
be,  that  the  insurgents  would  voluntarily  fall  back  from  their  advanced  position, 
and  that  the  Astor  Battery  and  its  supports  could  take  position  without  opposition.” 
General  Anderson  got  a message  from  General  MacArthur.  “I  knew  from  this 
that  he  wished  to  push  the  insurgents  aside  and  put  in  the  Astor  Battery.  1 the* 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


177 


authorized  him  to  attack,  which  he  did,  and,  soon  after,  the  Twenty-third  Infantry 
and  the  Thirteenth  Minnesota  carried  the  advance  line  of  the  enemy  in  the  most 
gallant  manner,  the  one  gun  of  the  Utah  Battery  and  the  Astor  Battery  lending 
most  effective  assistance.” 

It  was  General  Anderson’s  opinion  that  MacArthur  should  counter  march  and 
go  to  Malate  by  the  beach,  but  he  had  gone  too  far,  for  “the  guns  of  the  Astor  Bat- 
tery had  been  dragged  to  the  front  only  after  the  utmost  exertions,  and  were  about 
being  put  into  battery.  At  the  same  time  I received  a telegram  stating  that  the 
insurgents  were  threatening  to  cross  the  bamboo  bridge  on  our  right;  and  to  prevent 

this  and  guard  our  ammunition  at  Pasay,  I ordered  an  Idaho  battalion  to  that  point.” 

# 

Again  the  insurgents  were  making  mischief,  and  General  Anderson,  as  well  as 
General  Greene  had  the  experience  of  the  continuance  of  fire  when  the  white  flag  was 
flying.  The  loss  of  General  Anderson  in  the  taking  of  the  city  was  nineteen  men 
killed  and  one  hundred  and  three  wounded.  He  concludes  by  saying: 

“The  opposition  we  met  in  battle  was  not  sufficient  to  test  the  bravery  of  our 
soldiers,  but  all  showed  bravery  and  dash.  The  losses  show  that  the  leading  regi- 
ments of  the  First  Brigade — Thirteenth  Minnesota,  Twenty-third  Infantry,  and 
the  Astor  Battery — met  the  most  serious  opposition  and  deserve  credit  for  their 
success.  The  Colorado,  California,  and  Oregon  regiments,  the  Regulars,  and  all  the 
batteries  of  the  Second  Brigade  showed  such  zeal  that  it  seems  a pity  that  they  did 
not  meet  foemen  worthy  of  their  steel.” 

General  MacArthur  says:  “Several  hours  before  the  operations  of  the  day  were 
intended  to  commence,  there  was  considerable  desultory  firing  from  the  Spanish 
line,  both  of  cannon  and  small  arms,  provoked  no  doubt  by  Filipino  soldiers,  who 
insisted  upon  maintaining  a general  fusilade  along  their  lines.” 

General  Mac  Art  bur’s  personal  mention  is  remarkably  spirited,  and  makes  stir- 
ring reading.  AVe  quote: 

“The  combat  of  Singalong  can  hardly  be  classified  as  a great  military  event, 
but  the  involved  terrain  and  the  prolonged  resistance  created  a very  trying  situa- 
tion, and  afforded  an  unusual  scope  for  the  display  of  military  qualities  by  a large 
number  of  individuals. 

“The  invincible  composure  of  Colonel  Ovenshine,  during  an  exposure  in  danger- 
ous space  for  more  than  an  hour,  was  conspicuous  and  very  inspiring  to  the  troops; 
and  the  efficient  manner  in  which  he  took  advantage  of  opportunities  as  they  arose 
during  the  varying  aspects  of  the  fight  was  of  great  practical  value  in  determining 
the  result. 

“The  cool,  determined,  and  sustained  efforts  of  Colonel  Reeve,  of  the  Thirteenth 


178 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


Minnesota,  contributed  very  materially  to  the  maintenance  of  the  discipline  and 
.narked  efficiency  of  his  regiment. 

“The  brilliant  manner  in  which  Lieutenant  March  accepted  and  discharged  the 
responsible  and  dangerous  duties  of  the  dajq  and  the  pertinacity  with  which,  as- 
sisted by  his  officers  and  men,  he  carried  his  guns  over  all  obstacles  to  the  very  front 
of  the  firing  line,  was  an  exceptional  display  of  warlike  skill  and  good  judgment, 
indicating  the  existence  of  many  of  the  best  qualifications  for  high  command  in 
battle  • 

“The  gallant  manner  in  which  Captain  Sawtelle,  brigade  quartermaster,  vol- 
unteered to  join  the  advance  party  in  the  rush;  volunteered  to  command  a firing 
line,  for  a time  without  an  officer,  and  again  volunteered  to  lead  a scout  to  ascer- 
tain the  presence  or  absence  of  the  enemy  in  the  hlocklmuse,  was  a fine  display  of 
personal  intrepidity. 

“The  efficient,  fearless,  and  intelligent  manner  in  which  Lieutenant  Neman, 
Twenty-first  United  States  Infantry,  acting  assistant  adjutant-general  of  the  brigade, 
and  Second  Lieutenant  Whitworth,  Eighteenth  United  States  Infantry,  aid,  executed 
a series  of  dangerous  and  difficult  orders,  was  a fine  exemplification  of  staff  work 
under  fire. 

“The  splendid  bravery  of  Captains  Bjornstad  and  Seebach,  and  Lieutenant 
Laekore,  of  the  Thirteenth  Minnesota,  all  wounded,  and,  finally,  the  work  of  the 
soldiers  of  the  first  firing  line,  too,  all  went  to  make  up  a rapid  succession  of  in- 
dividual actions  of  unusual  merit.” 

Major  General  Merritt's  account  of  the  capture  of  the  city  must  he  given  in 
full,  for  there  are  no  words  wasted,  and  he  clears  the  field  of  all  confusion. 

“The  works  of  the  second  line  soon  gave  way  to  the  determined  advance  of 
Greene’s  troops,  and  that  officer  pushed  his  brigade  rapidly  tlr  jugh  Malate  and  over 
the  bridges  to  occupy  Ilinondo  and  San  Miguel,  as  contemplated  in  his  instructions. 
In  the  meantime  the  brigade  of  General  MacArthur,  advancing  simultaneously  on 
the  Pasay  road,  encountered  a very  sharp  fire,  coming  from  the  blockhouses, 
trenches,  and  woods  in  his  front,  positions  which  it  was  very  difficult  to  carry,  ow- 
ing to  the  swampy  condition  of  the  ground  on  both  sides  of  the  roads,  and  the 
heavy  undergrowth  concealing  the  enemy.  With  much  gallantry  and  excellent  judg- 
ment on  the  part  of  the  brigade  commander  and  the  troops  engaged  these  difficulties 
were  overcome  with  a minimum  loss  (see  report  of  brigade  commander  appended), 
and  MacArthur  advanced  and  held  the  bridges  and  the  town  of  Malate,  as  was 
contemplated  in  his  instructions. 

“The  city  of  Manila  was  now  in  our  possession,  excepting  the  walled  town,  but 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


179 


shortly  after  the  entry  of  our  troops  into  Malate  a white  flag  was  displayed  on  the 
walls,  whereupon  Lieutenant-Colonel  C.  A Whittier,  United  States  Volunteers,  of 
my  staff,  and  Lieutenant  Brumby,  LTnited  States  Navy,  representing  Admiral  Dewey, 
were  sent  ashore  to  communicate  with  the  Captain-General.  I soon  personally  fol- 
lowed these  officers  into  the  town,  going  at  once  to  the  palace  of  the  Governor-Gen- 
eral, and  there,  after  a conversation  with  the  Spanish  authorities,  a preliminary  agree- 
ment of  the  terms  of  capitulation  was  signed  by  the  Captain-General  and  myself. 
This  agreement  was  subsequently  incorporated  into  the  formal  terms  of  capitula- 
tion, as  arranged  by  the  officers  representing  the  two  forces,  a copy  of  which  is  hereto 
appended  and  marked. 

“Immediately  after  the  surrender  the  Spanish  colors  on  the  sea  front  were  hauled 
down  and  the  American  flag  displayed  and  saluted  by  the  guns  of  the  navy.  The 
Second  Oregon  Regiment,  which  had  proceeded  by  sea  from  Cavite,  was  disem- 
barked and  entered  the  walled  town  as  a provost  guard,  and  the  colonel  was  directed 
to  receive  the  Spanish  arms  and  deposit  them  in  places  of  security.  The  town  was 
filled  with  the  troops  of  the  enemy  driven  in  from  the  intrenchments,  regiments 
formed  and  standing  in  line  in  the  streets,  but  the  work  of  disarming  proceeded 
quietly  and  nothing  unpleasant  occurred. 

“In  leaving  the  subject  of  the  operations  of  the  13th,  I desire  here  to  record  my 
appreciation  of  the  admirable  manner  in  which  the  orders  for  attack  and  the  plan 
for  occupation  of  the  city  were  carried  out  by  the  troops  exactly  as  contemplated.  I 
submit  that  for  troops  to  enter  under  fire  a town  covering  a wide  area,  to  rapidly 
deploy  and  guard  all  principal  points  in  the  extensive  suburbs,  to  keep  out  the  in- 
surgent forces  pressing  for  admission,  to  quietly  disarm  an  army  of  Spaniards  more 
than  equal  in  numbers  to  the  American  troops,  and  finally  by  all  this  to  prevent 
entirely  all  rapine,  pillage,  and  disorder,  and  gain  entire  and  complete  possession  of 
a city  of  300,000  people  filled  with  natives  hostile  to  the  European  interests,  and 
stirred  up  by  the  knoAvledge  that  their  own  people  were  fighting  in  the  outside 
trenches,  was  an  act  which  only  the  law-abiding,  temperate,  resolute  American  sol- 
dier, well  and  skillfully  handled  by  his  regimental  and  brigade  commanders,  could' 
accomplish. 

The  trophies  of  Manila  were  nearly  $900,000,000,  of  which  $240,000,000  were 
copper  coin,  13,000  prisoners  and  22,000  arms. 

Three  days  after  the  surrender,  General  Merritt  received  news  of  the  protocol,  and 
soon  was  ordered  to  Paris.  In  parting  he  says  of  the  insurgent  chief  that  he  had 
written  communication  with  him  on  various  occasions,  and  “he  recognized  my  author- 
ity as  military  governor  of  the  town  of  Manila  and  suburbs,  and  made  professions 


±80 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA 


of  his  willingness  to  withdraw  his  troops  to  a line  which  I might  indicate,  but  at 
the  same  time  asking  certain  favors  for  himself.  The  matters  in  this  connection  had 
not  been  settled  at  the  date  of  my  departure.  Doubtless  much  dissatisfaction  is 
felt  by  the  rank  and  file  of  the  insurgents  that  they  have  not  been  permitted  to  enjoy 
the  occupancy  of  Manila,  and  there  is  some  ground  for  trouble  with  them  owing 
to  that  fact,  but  notwithstanding  many  rumors  to  the  contrary,  I am  of  the  opinion 
that  the  leaders  will  be  able  to  prevent  serious  disturbances,  as  they  are  sufficiently 
intelligent  and  educated  to  know  that  for  them  to  antagonize  the  United  States  would 
be  to  destroy  their  only  chance  of  future  political  improvement. 

The  Commanding  General's  personal  acknowledgments  are  very  handsome,  as 
follows: 

“Brigadier-General  R.  P.  Hughes,  my  inspector-general  at  San  Francisco,  was 
especially  noticeable  in  accomplishing  the  instruction  of  the  green  troops  that  came 
to  the  city,  many- of  them  without  arms,  clothing,  or  equipment  of  any  kind.  Ilis 
services  will  undoubtedly  be  duly  recognized  by  Major-General  Otis,  with  whom  I 
left  him  to  continue  the  good  work. 

“I  desire  especially  to  express  my  acknowledgments  to  Brigadier-General  Bab- 
cock. my  adjutant-general  and  chief  of  staff,  for  his  most  valuable  services  from 
the  inception  of  the  campaign  in  San  Francisco  to  the  close  of  the  work  at  the  pres- 
ent time.  This  officer  is  too  well  known  to  require  special  mention  of  his  services 
in  any  one  direction.  He  was  my  right  arm,  not  only  in  the  office  but  in  the  field, 
and  much  of  the  success  that  has  attended  the  expedition  is  due  to  his  individual  ef- 
forts. 

‘•I  desire  especially  to  mention  Major  McClure  and  Major  Whipple,  of  the  pay  de- 
partment, who  volunteered  their  services  after  they  had  completed  their  legitimate 
duties,  and  performed  excellent  work  whenever  called  upon.  Major  McClure  was 
especially  important  in  his  services  immediately  after  the  surrender,  taking  long 
rides  under  my  orders  to  the  Spanish  lines,  and  bearing  instructions  to  them  which 
resulted  in  effecting  their  withdrawal  in  such  manner  as  to  prevent  the  incursion  of 
the  insurgents  in  the  northern  portions  of  the  city.  Other  officers  have  been  named 
in  my  special  reports  end  have  been  recommended  for  brevets  and  promotion. 

‘T  especially  call  attention  to  the  services  of  Captain  Mott,  as  mentioned  in  the 
report  of  Brigadier-General  Greene.  He  was  cheerful,  willing,  intelligent,  and  ener- 
getic in  the  discharge  of  the  multifarious  duties  imposed  upon  him  in  connection 
with  our  troops  and  trenches  during  the  rainy  season,  and  in  the  final  action  showed 
those  rare  characteristics  which  stamp  him  as  a very  superior  soldier/’ 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


181 


182  OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 

THE  TERMS  OF  CAPITULATION. 

The  undersigned  having  been  appointed  a commission  to  determine  the  details 
of  the  capitulation  of  the  city  and  defenses  of  Manila  and  its  suburbs  and  the  Span- 
ish forces  stationed  therein,  in  accordance  with  the  agreement  entered  into  the  pre- 
vious day  by  Major  General  Wesley  Merritt,  United  States  Army,  American  com- 
mander in  chief  in  the  Philippines,  and  Ilis  Excellency  Don  Fermin  Jaudenes, 
acting  General  in  chief  of  the  Spanish  Army  in  the  Philippines,  have  agreed  upon  the 
following: 

1.  The  Spanish  troops,  European  and  native,  capitulate  with  the  city  and  its 
defenses,  with  all  the  honors  of  war,  depositing  their  arms  in  the  places  designated 
by  the  authorities  of  the  United  States,  and  remaining  in  the  quarters  designated 
and  under  the  orders  of  their  officers,  and  subject  to  the  control  of  the  aforesaid 
United  States  authorities,  until  the  conclusion  of  a treaty  of  peace  between  the  two 
belligerent  nations. 

All  persons  included  in  the  capitulation  remain  at  liberty,  the  officers  remain- 
ing in  their  respective  homes,  which  shall  be  respected  as  long  as  they  observe  the 
regulations  prescribed  for  their  government  and  the  laws  in  force. 

2.  Officers  shall  retain  their  side  arms,  horses,  and  private  property. 

3.  All  public  horses  and  public  property  of  all  kinds  shall  be  turned  over  to  staff 
officers  designated  by  the  I nited  States. 

4.  Complete  returns  in  duplicate  of  men  by  organizations,  and  full  lists  of  public 
property  and  stores  shall  be  rendered  to  the  United  States  within  ten  days  from  this 
date. 

5.  All  questions  relating  to  the  repatriation  of  officers  and  men  of  the  Spanish 
forces  and  of  their  families,  and  of  the  expenses  which  said  repatriation  may  occasion, 
shall  be  referred  to  the  Government  of  the  United  States  at  Washington. 

Spanish  families  may  leave  Manila  at  any  time  convenient  to  them. 

The  return  of  the  arms  surrendered  by  the  Spanish  forces  shall  take  place  when 
they  evacuate  the  city  or  when  the  American  Army  evacuates. 

6.  Officers  and  men  included  in  the  capitulation  shall  be  supplied  by  the  United 
States,  according  to  their  rank,  with  rations  and  necessary  aid  as  though  they  were 
prisoners  of  war,  until  the  conclusion  of  a treaty  of  peace  between  the  United  States 
and  Spain. 

All  the  funds  in  the  Spanish  treasury  and  all  other  public  funds  shall  be  turned 

over  to  the  authorities  of  the  l nited  States.  , 

7.  This  city,  its  inhabitants,  its  churches  and  religious  worship,  its  educational 


OFFICIAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  CONQUEST  OF  MANILA. 


183 


establishments,  and  its  private  property  of  all  descriptions  are  placed  under  the 
special  safeguard  of  the  faith  and  honor  of  the  American  Army. 

F.  V.  GREENE, 

Brigadier-General  of  Volunteers,  United  States  Army. 

B.  P.  LAMBERTON, 
Captain,  United  States  Navy. 
CHARLES  A.  WHITTIER, 
Lieutenant-Colonel  and  Inspector-General. 

E.  H.  CROWDER, 

Lieutenant-Colonel  and  Judge-Advocate. 
NICHOLAS  DE  LA  PETRA, 
Auditor  General  Excmo. 

CARLOS, 

Coronet  de  Ingenieros. 

JOSE, 

Coronel  de  Estado  Major. 

The  Spaniards  wanted  a long  array  of  specifications  as  to  what  the  Americans 
might  and  should  not  do,  but  finally  were  struck  with  the  sufficiency  of  the  shining 
simple  words,  “under  the  special  safeguard  of  the  faith  and  honor  of  the  American 

Army.” 


CHAPTER  XI. 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MEEEITT. 

The  Official  Gazette  Issued  at  Manila — Orders  and  Proclamations  Showing  the 
Policy  and  Detail  of  the  Administration  of  Major-General  Wesley  Merritt, 
Who,  as  Commander  of  the  Philippine  Expedition,  Became,  Under  the  Cir- 
cumstances of  the  Capture  of  Manila,  the  Governor  of  That  City. 

GENERAL  MERRITT’S  PROCLAMATION  TO  THE  FILIPINOS. 

Headquarters  Department  of  the  Pacific,  August  14,  1898. 

To  the  People  of  the  Philippines: 

I.  War  has  existed  between  the  United  States  and  Spain  since  April  21  of  this 
year.  Since  that  date  you  have  witnessed  the  destruction  by  an  American  fleet 
of  the  Spanish  naval  power  in  these  islands,  the  fall  of  the  principal  city,  Manila,  and 
its  defenses,  and  the  surrender  of  the  Spanish  army  of  occupation  to  the  forces 
of  the  United  States. 

II.  The  commander  of  the  United  States  forces  now  in  possession  has  instruc- 
tions from  his  Government  to  assure  the  people  that  he  has  not  come  to  wage  war 
upon  them,  nor  upon  any  part  or  faction  among  them,  but  to  protect  them  in  their 
homes,  in  their  employments,  and  in  their  personal  and  religious  rights.  All  persons 
who,  by  active  aid  or  honest  submission,  co-operate  with  the  United  States  in  its 
efforts  to  give  effect  to  this  beneficent  purpose,  will  receive  the  reward  of  its  support 
and  protection. 

III.  The  government  established  among  you  by  the  United  States  is  a govern- 
ment of  military  occupation;  and  for  the  present  it  is  ordered  that  the  municipal 
laws  such  as  affect  private  rights  of  persons  and  property,  regulate  local  institutions, 
and  provide  for  the  punishment  of  crime,  shall  be  considered  as  continuing  in  force, 
so  far  as  compatible  with  the  purposes  of  military  government,  and  that  they  be 
administered  through  the  ordinary  tribunals  substantially  as  before  occupation,  but 
by  officials  appointed  by  the  government  of  occupation. 

IV.  A Provost-Marshal-General  will  be  appointed  for  the  city  of  Manila  and 

184 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


185 


its  outlying  districts.  This  territory  will  be  divided  into  sub-districts,  and  there 
will  be  assigned  to  each  a Deputy-Provost-Marshal. 

The  duties  of  the  Provost-Marshal-General  and  his  deputies  will  be  set  forth 
in  detail  in  future  orders.  In  a general  way  they  are  charged  with  the  duty  of  making 
arrests  of  military,  as  well  as  civil  offenders,  sending  such  of  the  former  class  as 
are  triable  by  courts-martial  to  their  proper  commands,  with  statements  of  their 
offenses  and  names  of  witnesses,  and  detaining  in  custody  all  other  offenders  for 
trial  by  military  commission,  provost  courts,  or  native  criminal  courts,  in  accordance 
with  law  and  the  instructions  hereafter  to  be  issued. 

V.  The  port  of  Manila,  and  all  other  ports  and  places  in  the  Philippines  which 
may  be  in  the  actual  possession  of  our  land  and  naval  forces,  will  be  open,  while  our 
military  occupation  may  continue,  to  the  commerce  of  all  neutral  nations  as  well  as 
our  own,  in  articles  not.  contraband  of  war,  and  upon  payment  of  the  prescribed 
rates  of  duty  which  may  be  in  force  at  the  time  of  the  importation. 

VI.  All  churches  and  places  devoted  to  religious  worship  and  to  the  arts  and 
sciences,  all  educational  institutions,  libraries,  scientific  collections,  and  museums  are, 
so  far  as  possible,  to  be  protected;  and  all  destruction  or  intentional  defacement  of 
such  places  or  property,  of  historical  monuments,  archives,  or  works  of  science  and 
art,  is  prohibited,  save  when  required  by  urgent  military  necessity.  Severe  punish- 
ment will  be  meted  out  for  all  violations  of  this  regulation. 

The  custodians  of  all  property  of  the  character  mentioned  in  this  section  will 
make  prompt  returns  thereof  to  these  headquarters,  stating  character  and  location, 
and  embodying  such  recommendations  as  they  may  think  proper  for  the  full  protec- 
tion of  the  properties  under  their  care  and  custody,  that  proper  orders  may  issue 
enjoining  the  co-operation  of  both  military  and  civil  authorities  in  securing  such 
protection. 

VII.  The  Commanding  General,  in  announcing  the  establishment  of  military 
government,  and  in  entering  upon  his  duty  as  Military  Governor  in  pursuance  of  his 
appointment  as  such  by  the  government  of  the  United  States,  desires  to  assure 
the  people  that  so  long  as  they  preserve  the  peace  and  perform  their  duties  toward 
the  representatives  of  the  United  States  they  will  not  be  disturbed  in  their  persons 
and  property,  except  in  so  far  as  may  be  found  necessary  for  the  good  of  the  service 
of  the  United  States  and  the  benefit  of  the  people  of  the  Philippines. 

WESLEY  MERRITT, 

Major-General,  United  States  Army,  Commanding. 

The  general  orders  following  are  full  of  curious  interest,  as  they  declare  the  true 


180 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


intent  and  meaning  of  the  Philippine  Expedition,  and  define  the  situation  at  Manila, 
with  extraordinary  precision,  and  are  in  the  strictest  sense  by  authority: 


HEADQUARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  PACIFIC 

AND 

EIGHTH  ARMY  CORPS 


Manila  Bay,  August  9th,  1898. 

GENERAL  ORDERS,  No.  3. 

1.  In  view  of  the  extraordinary  conditions  under  which  this  Army  is  operat- 
ing, the  Commanding  General  desires  to  acquaint  the  officers  and  men  composing 
it,  with  the  expectations  which  he  entertains  as  to  their  conduct. 

You  are  assembled  upon  foreign  soil  situated  within  the  western  confines  of  a 
vast  ocean  separating  you  from  your  native  land.  Aou  have  come  not  as  despoilers 
and  oppressors,  but  simply  as  the  instruments  of  a strong  free  government,  whose 
purposes  are  beneficent  and  which  has  declared  itself  in  this  war,  the  champion  of 
those  oppressed  by  Spanish  misrule. 

It  is  therefore  the  intention  of  this  order  to  appeal  directly  to  your  pride  in  your 
position  as  representatives  of  ft  high  civilization,  in  the  hope  and  with  the  firm 
conviction  that  you  will  so  conduct  yourselves  in  your  relations  with  the  inhabi- 
tants of  these  islands,  ns  to  convince  them  of  the  lofty  nature  of  the  mission  which 


you  come  to  execute. 

It  is  not  believed  that  any  acts  of  pillage,  rapine,  or  violence  will  be  committed 
by  soldiers  or  other  in  the  employ  of  the  United  States,  but  should  there  be  persons 
with  this  command  who  prove  themselves  unworthy  of  this  confidence,  their  acts 
will  be  considered  not  only  as  crimes  against  the  sufTerers,  but  as  direct  insults 
to  the  United  States  flag,  and  they  will  be  punished  on  the  spot  with  the  maximum 
penalties  known  to  military  law. 

By  Command  of  Major-General  Merritt: 

J.  B.  BABCOCK. 

Adjutant-General. 


Official: 

BENTLEY  MOTT,  Aid. 


HEADQUARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  PACIFIC 

AND 


EIGHTH  ARMY  CORPS. 

Manila,  P.  I.,  August  15th,  1898. 


GENERAL  ORDERS,  No.  4. 

1.  In  addition  to  his  duties  as  Division  Commander,  Brigadier-General  T.  M 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


Anderson,  U.  S.  Vols.,  is  hereby  assigned  to  the  command  of  the  District  of  Cavite 
and  will  remove  his  headquarters  to  that  point.  The  garrison  of  the  District  of 
Cavite  will  be  augmented  upon  the  arrival  of  the  next  transports  containing  troops 
for  this  command. 

2.  In  addition  to  his  duties  as  Brigade  Commander,  Brigadier-General  Arthur 
MacArthur,  U.  S.  Vols.,  is  hereby  appointed  Military  Commandant  of  the  walled 
city  of  Manila,  and  Provost-Marshal-General  of  the  City  of  Manila,  including  all  the 
outlying  districts  within  the  municipal  jurisdiction.  General  MacArthur  will  remove 
his  headquarters  within  the  walled  city  and  will  bring  with  him  one  strong  regiment 
of  his  command  to  take  station  within  the  walled  town.  The  Commanding  Officer 
of  the  2nd  Oregon  Vol.  Inf.,  now  stationed  in  the  walled  city,  will  report  to  General 
MacArthur,  and  the  Companies  of  the  2nd  Oregon  Vol.  Inf.,  now  at  Cavite,  will, 
upon  being  relieved  by  other  troops,  be  sent  to  Manila  to  join  the  regiment.  Gen- 
eral MacArthur  will  relieve  the  Civil  Governor  of  his  functions,  and  take  possession 
of  the  offices,  clerks  and  all  machinery  of  administration  of  that  office,  retaining  and 
employing  the  present  subordinate  officers  of  civil  administration  until,  in  his  judg- 
ment, it  is  desirable  to  replace  them  by  other  appointments. 

3.  Colonel  James  S.  Smith,  1st  California  Vol.  Inf.,  in  addition  to  his  duties 
as  Remimental  Commander,  is  appointed  Deputy  Provost-Marshal  for  the  Districts  of 
the  city  north  of  the  Pasig  River,  and  will  report  to  General  MacArthur.  Colonel 
S.  Ovenshine,  23rd  U.  S.  Inf.,  is  appointed  Deputy  Provost-Marshal  for  the  dis- 
tricts of  the  city,  including  Ermita  and  Malate,  outside  of  the  walled  town  and 
south  of  the  Pasig  River,  and  will  report  to  General  MacArthur. 

4.  Under  paragraphs  “3”  and  “4”  of  the  terms  of  capitulation,  full  lists  of  pub- 
lic property  and  stores,  and  returns  in  duplicate  of  the  men  by  organizations,  are 
to  be  rendered  to  the  United  States  within  ten  days,  and  public  horses  and  public 
property  of  all  kinds  are  to  be  turned  over  to  the  staff  officers  of  the  United  States 
designated  to  receive  them.  Under  these  paragraphs  the  Chief  of  Artillery  at  these 
headquarters,  and  the  Chiefs  of  the  Staff  Departments,  will  take  possession  of  the 
public  property  turned  over  as  above,  pertaining  to  their  respective  departments. 

The  returns  of  the  prisoners  will  be  submitted  to  the  Military  Commandant 
of  the  City,  who  will  assign  the  men  for  quarters  in  such  public  buildings  and  bar- 
racks as  are  not  required  for  the  use  of  United  States  troops.  The  horses  and  private 
property  of  the  officers  of  the  Spanish  forces  are  not  to  be  disturbed.  The  Chief 
Paymaster  at  these  headquarters  will  turn  over  such  portion  of  the  Spanish  public 
runds  received  by  him,  by  virtue  of  this  order,  to  the  administration  of  his  office. 

5.  All  removals  and  appointments  of  subordinate  officers  of  civil  administration, 


188 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


aud  transfers  of  funds  authorized  by  this  order,  must  receive  the  approval  of  the 
Commanding  General,  before  action  is  taken. 

6.  The  Chief  Quartermaster  and  Chief  Commissary  of  Subsistence  at  these 
headquarters  will  establish  depots  of  supply  in  Manila  with  as  little  delay  as  possible. 
Quartermaster  and  Subsistence  depots  will  also  he  retained  at  Cavite. 

By  Command  of  Major-General  Merritt: 

J.  B.  BABCOCK, 
Adjutant-General. 

Official: 

BENTLEY  MOTT,  Aid. 


IIEADQ CARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  TIIE  PACIFIC 

AND 

EIGHTH  ARMY  CORPS. 

Manila,  P.  I.,  August  17th,  1898. 

GENERAL  ORDERS  No.  5. 

1.  In  addition  to  the  command  of  his  Brigade,  Brigadier-General  F.  V.  Greene, 
U.  S.  Yols.,  will  perform  the  duties  hitherto  performed  by  the  Intendentc  General  de 
Hacienda,  and  will  have  charge,  subject  to  instructions  of  the  Major  General  Com- 
manding, of  all  fiscal  affairs  of  the  Government  of  Manila. 

2.  Lieutenant-Colonel  C.  A.  Whittier,  U.  S.  Yols.,  is  appointed  Collector  of 
Customs,  and  the  Chief  Paymaster,  Department  of  the  Pacific,  will  designate  a 
bonded  officer  of  the  Pay  Department  as  custodian  of  all  public  funds.  Both  of 
these  officers  will  report  to  Brigadier-General  Greene  for  instructions. 

By  Command  of  Major-General  Merritt: 

J.  B.  BABCOCK, 
Adjutant-General. 

Official: 

BENTLEY  MOTT,  Aid.  

HEADQUARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  PACIFIC 

AND 

EIGHTH  ARMY  CORPS. 

Manila,  P.  I.,  August  17th,  1898. 

GENERAL  ORDERS,  No.  6. 

The  Major-General  Commanding  desires  to  congratulate  the  troops  of  this  com- 
mand upon  their  brilliant  success  in  the  capture,  by  assault,  of  the  defenses  of  Ma- 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


189 


nila,  on  Saturday,  August  13,  a date  hereafter  to  be  memorable  in  the  history'  of 
American  victories. 

After  a journey  of  seven  thousand  miles  by  sea,  the  soldiers  of  the  Philippine 
Expedition  encountered  most  serious  difficulties  in  landing,  due  to  protracted  storms 
raising  high  surf,  through  which  it  was  necessary  to  pass  the  small  boats  which 
afforded  the  only  means  of  disembarking  the  army  and  its  supplies.  This  great  task, 
and  the  privations  and  hardships  of  a campaign  during  the  rainy  season  in  tropical 
lowlands,  were  accomplished  and  endured  by  all  the  troops,  in  a spirit  of  soldierly 
fortitude,  which  has  at  all  times  during  these  days  of  trial,  given  the  Commanding 
General  the  most  heartfelt  pride  and  confidence  in  his  men.  Nothing  could  be  finer 
than  the  patient,  uncomplaining  devotion  to  duty  which  all  have  shown. 

Now  it  is  his  pleasure  to  announce  that  within  three  weeks  after  the  arrival  in 
the  Philippines  of  the  greater  portion  of  the  forces,  the  capital  city  of  the  Spanish 
possessions  in  the  East,  held  by  Spanish  veterans,  has  fallen  into  our  hands,  and  he 
feels  assured  that  all  officers  and  men  of  this  command  have  reason  to  be  proud  of 
the  success  of  the  expedition. 

The  Commanding  General  will  hereafter  take  occasion  to  mention  to  the  Home 
Government,  the  names  of  officers,  men  and  organizations,  to  whom  special  credit 
is  due. 

By  Command  of  Major-General  Merritt: 

J.  B.  BABCOCK, 

Ad  j utant-General, 

Official: 

BENTLEY  MOTT,  Aid. 


HEADQUARTERS  OF  THE  PROVOST-MARSHAL-GENERAL 

AND 

MILITARY  COMMANDANT. 

Citv  of  Manila,  P.  I.,  August  18th,  1898. 

GENERAL  ORDERS,  NO.  1. 

•a 

1.  In  obedience  to  the  provisions  of  General  Orders,  No.  3,  dated  Headquarters 
Department  of  the  Pacific  and  Eighth  Army  Corps,  Manila,  P.  I.,  August  loth,  1898, 
the  undersigned  hereby  assumes  the  office  and  duties  of  Military  Commandant  of 
the  walled  city  of  Manila;  Provost-Marshal-General  of  the  city  of  Manila,  including 
the  outlying  districts  within  the  municipal  jurisdiction,  and  also  the  functions  of 
Civil  Governor. 

2.  Until  further  orders  the  preservation  of  law  and  order  throughout  the  city 
will  be  maintained  according  to  the  arrangements  which  now  obtain. 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


3.  The  location  of  these  Headquarters  will  be  at  the  office  of  the  Civil  Governor, 
corner  of  San  Juan  de  Letran  and  Anda  Streets,  and  to  the  above  address  will  be 
referred  all  papers  requiring  action  by  the  undersigned.  To  insure  prompt  investiga- 
tion, all  claims,  complaints,  and  petitions  should  be  presented  in  the  English  lan- 
guage. 

4.  Major  Harry  C.  Hale,  Assistant  Adjutant-General  U.  S.  Volunteers;  aide  de 
camp  to  the  Commanding  General,  having  been  assigned  for  temporary  duty  at  these 
Headquarters,  is  hereby  appointed  Adjutant-General  to  the  undersigned. 

5.  Colonel  S.  Overshine  having  been  appointed  by  proper  authority  Deputy  Pro- 
vost-Marshal of  the  districts  of  the  city  (including  Ermita  and  Malate)  outside  of  the 
walled  town  and  south  of  the  Fasig  river,  will  organize  and  establish  his  office  as 
soon  as  possible,  and  report  the  location  thereof  to  these  Headquarters. 

G.  Colonel  James  S.  Smith,  1st  California  Volunteer  Infantry,  having  been 
appointed  by  proper  authority  Deputy  Provost-Marshal  of  the  districts  of  the  city 
north  o£  the  Pasig  river,  will  organize  and  establish  his  office  as  soon  as  possible  and 
report  location  thereof  to  these  Headquarters. 

(Sgd.)  ARTHUR  MACARTHUR, 
Brigadier-General  U.  S.  Volunteers. 

Military  Commandant  and  Provost-Marshal-General. 


The  Official  Gazette  of  Aug.  23  is  a record  of  the  organization  of  the  Military 
Government  of  Manila. 

OFFICE  CHIEF  OF  TOLICE. 

MANILA,  P.  I. 

ORDER  No.  1. 

By  command  of  Brigadier-General  MacArthur  and  Military  Commandant,  the 
Thirteenth  Regiment  Minnesota  Volunteer  Infantry  is  designated  to  perform  the 
police  duty  of  this  city  and  the  commanding  officer  thereof  is  appointed  Chief  of 
Police,  and  Major  Ed.  S.  Bean,  Inspector  of  Police. 

Companies  D,  G,  J and  S arc  hereby  detailed  to  at  once  take  charge  of  the 
police  stations  and  perform  the  necessary  duties  pertaining  to  the  position  of  polic« 
and  maintenance  of  order. 

C.  McC.  REEVE, 

Colonel  13th  Regiment  Minnesota  Volunteer  Infantry  and  Chief  of  Police. 
Aug.  22d,  1898. 


DINING  ROOM  IN  GENERAL  MERRITT’S  PALACE  AT  MANILA,, 


VICTIMS  REPORTED  DEAD  AFTER  AN  EXECUTION. 


AN  EXECUTION  ENTERTAINMENT  ON  THE  LUNETA, 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


193 


OFFICE  CHIEF  OF  POLICE. 
MANILA,  P.  I. 


ORDER  No.  2. 

1.  The  following  is  published  for  the  information  of  the  police  of  this  city: 

2.  Bulletin  boards  will  be  kept  in  all  stations  and  all  orders  issued  from  this 
office  will  be  posted  thereon. 

3.  Armed  native  and  Spanish  soldiers  must  be  disarmed  before  being  allowed  to 
pass  through  gates,  either  way. 

4.  Arrest  drunk  and  disorderly  persons. 

5.  Spanish  officers  are  allowed  to  wear  their  side  arms. 

6.  Commanding  officers  will  have  their  respective  districts  patroled  at  least  once 
each  hour  during  the  day  and  night. 

7.  Shoes  must  be  blacked  and  all  brasses  bright  and  shining  at  all  times. 

8.  Be  courteous  in  your  contact  with  both  natives  and  Spaniards  and  see  that 
all  soldiers  of  other  commands  observe  this  rule. 

9.  Particular  attention  must  be  given  by  men  at  the  gates  to  the  saluting  of  of* 
ficers  in  passing  through,  and  particularly  so  to  the  general  officers. 

ED.  S.  BEAN, 

Major  13th  Regiment  Minnesota  Volunteer  Infantry,  and  Inspector  of  Police. 

Aug.  22d,  1898. 

Approved, 


REEVE, 


Colonel  13th  Regiment  Minnesota  Volunteer  Infantry  and  Chief  of  Police. 


HEADQUARTERS  OF  THE  PROVOST-MARSHAL  AND  MILITARY 

COMMANDANT. 


Adjutant-General’s  Office,  City  of  Manila,  P.  I.,  August  22nd,  1898. 
GENERAL  ORDERS,  No.  3. 

Colonel  McC.  Reeve,  13th  Minnesota  Volunteer  Infantry,  is  hereby  directed  to  re- 
lieve the  Commandante  of  the  Guardia  Civil  Veterana  of  his  functions,  and  will  take 
possession  of  his  office  and  will  employ  such  officers  and  soldiers  of  his  regiment  as 
may  be  necessary  for  the  adequate  police  protection  of  this  city. 

By  Command  of  Brigadier-General  MacArthur, 
Provost-Marshal-General  and  Military  Commandant, 

HARRY  a HALE, 
Assistant  Adjutant-General, 


194 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


ORDER  No.  3. 

OFFICE  CHIEF  OF  POLICE. 

MANILA,  P.  I. 

To  Commanding  Officer. 

STATIONS. 

Notify  all  livery  stables  and  other  places  in  your  districts,  depositing  large  quan- 
tities of  manure  and  other  refuse  in  the  streets,  that  they  must  cart  it  away  daily, 
themselves. 

Failure  to  do  so  will  result  in  the  arrest  of  the  offending  party. 

ED.  S.  BEAN, 

Major  13th  Minnesota  Volunteers,  and  Inspector  of  Police. 
August  22d,  1898. 

Approved 

REEVE, 

Colonel  13th  Minnesota  Volunteers,  and  Chief  of  Police. 


HEADQUARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  PACIFIC 

AND 

EIGHTH  ARMY  CORPS. 

Manila,  Philippine  Islands,  August  22nd,  1898. 

GENERAL  ORDERS,  No.  8. 

I.  For  the  maintenance  of  law  and  order  in  those  portions  of  the  Philippines  oc- 
cupied or  controlled  by  the  Army  of  the  United  States,  and  to  provide  means  to 
promptly  punish  infraction  of  the  same.  Military  Commissions  and  Provost  Courts, 
composed  and  constituted  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  war,  will  be  appointed 
from  time  to  time  as  occasion  may  require. 

II.  The  local  courts,  continued  in  force  for  certain  purposes  in  proclamation 
from  these  headquarters,  dated  August  14th,  1898,  shall  not  exercise  jurisdiction 
over  any  crime  or  offense  committed  by  any  person  belonging  to  the  Army  of  the 
United  States,  or  any  retainer  of  the  Army,  or  person  serving  with  it,  or  any  per- 
son furnishing  or  transporting  supplies  for  the  Army;  nor  over  any  crime  or  offense 
committed  on  either  of  the  same  by  any  inhabitant  or  temporary  resident  of  said 
territory.  In  such  cases,  except  when  Courts  Martial  have  jurisdiction,  jurisdiction 
to  try  and  punish  is  vested  in  Military  Commissions  and  the  Provost  Court,  as  here- 
inafter set  forth. 

III.  The  crimes  and  offenses  triable  by  Military  Commission  are  murder,  man- 
slaughter, assault  and  battery  with  intent  to  kill,  robbery,  rape,  assault  and  battery 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


1U5 

with  intent  to  rape,  and  such  other  crimes,  offenses,  or  violations  of  the  laws  of  war 
as  may  be  referred  to  it  for  trial  by  the  Commanding  General.  The  punishment 
awarded  by  Military  Commission  shall  conform,  as  far  as  possible,  to  the  laws  of  the 
United  States,  or  the  custom  of  war.  Its  sentence  is  subject  to  the  approval  of  the 
Commanding  General. 

IY.  The  Provost  Court  has  jurisdiction  to  try  all  other  crimes  and  offenses, 
referred  to  in  Section  II  of  this  order;  not  exclusively  triable  by  Courts  Martial  or 
Military  Commission,  including  violations  of  orders  or  the  laws  of  war,  and  such 
cases  as  may  be  referred  to  it  by  the  Commanding  General.  It  shall  have  power  to 
punish  with  confinement,  with  or  without  hard  labor,  for  not  more  than  six  (6) 
months,  or  with  fine  not  exceeding  Two  Hundred  and  Fifty  Dollars  ($250.00)  or 
both.  Its  sentence  does  not  require  the  approval  of  the  Commanding  General, 
but  may  be  mitigated  or  remitted  by  him. 

Y.  The  Judge  of  the  Provost  Court  will  be  appointed  by  this  Commanding  Gen- 
eral. When  in  the  opinion  of  the  Provost  Court  its  power  of  punishment  is  inade- 
quate, it  shall  certify  the  case  to  the  Commanding  General  for  his  consideration 
and  action. 

By  Command  of  Major-General  Merritt: 

J.  B.  BABCOCK, 

Ad  j utant-General. 

Official: 

BENTLEY  MOTT,  Aid. 


HEADQUARTERS  DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  PACIFIC. 

AND 

EIGHTH  ARMY  CORPS. 

Manila,  P.  I.,  August  22nd,  1898. 

SPECIAL  ORDERS,  No.  32. 

1.  Upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Intendente  General  de  Hacienda,  Major 
R.  B.  C.  Bement,  Engineer  Officer,  U.  S.  Volunteers,  is  hereby  appointed  Adminis- 
trator de  Hacienda  (Collector  of  Internal  Revenue),  and  will  report  without  delay 
to  Brigadier-General  F.  Y.  Greene,  U.  S.  Volunteers,  Intendente  General,  Manila. 

2.  The  following  orders  are  confirmed:  Special  Orders  No.  5,  Headquarters 

Second  Division,  Eighth  Army  Corps,  August  6th,  1898,  placing  First  Lieutenant 
W.  G.  Haan,  3rd  U.  S.  Artillery,  in  command  of  a separate  battery  to  be  organized 


196 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


by  details  from  batteries  of  3rd  U.  S.  Artillery,,  to  man  the  Hotchkiss  revolving  can- 
non brought  on  the  transport  Ohio. 

3.  Private  H.  J.  Green,  Company  E,  2nd  Oregon  Volunteer  Infantry,  detailed 
on  special  duty  at  these  headquarters,  will  be  paid  commutation  of  rations  at  the 
rate  of  seventy-five  cents  per  diem,  it  being  entirely  impracticable  for  him  to  cook 
or  utilize  rations.  He  will  also  be  paid  commutation  of  quarters  at  the  usual  rate. 
Both  commutations  to  be  paid  while  this  man  is  employed  on  his  present  duty 
and  stationed  in  this  city,  and  to  date  from  and  inclusive  of  the  16th  inst. 

4.  Corporal  Jerome  Patterson,  Company  H,  23rd  U.  S.  Infantry,  Corporal 
James  Maddy,  Company  F,  2nd  Oregon  Volunteer  Infantry,  Private  Emmett  Man- 
ley,  Company  D,  23rd  U.  S.  Infantry,  Private  Robert  M.  Nichols,  Company  A,  1st 
Idaho  Volunteer  Infantry,  Private  P.  H.  Sullivan,  Company  F,  23rd  U.  S.  Infantry, 
are  hereby  detailed  on  special  duty  at  these  Headquarters,  and  will  report  at  once 
to  the  Adjutant-General  for  duty. 

5.  Lieutenant-Colonel  Charles  L.  Jewett,  Judge  Advocate,  U.  S.  Volunteers, 
is  hereby  appointed  Judge  of  the  Provost  Court,  for  the  city  of  Manila.  He  will 
hold  the  sessions  of  his  court  at  the  headquarters  of  the  Provost-Marshal-General. 
The  Quartermaster  Department  will  provide  the  necessary  offices  and  office  furni- 
ture. 

The  Provost  Court  will  be  attended  by  one  or  more  Assistant  Provost-Marsbal,  to 
be  detailed  by  the  Provost-Marshal-General,  who  will  be  charged  with  the  duty 
of  enforcing  its  orders  and  executing  its  processes.  The  form  of  accusation  in  the 
Provost  Court  will  be  substantially  the  same  as  that  used  in  Courts  Martial,  and 
a record  of  all  cases  tried,  assimilated  to  that  of  the  summary  court,  will  be  kept. 

6.  Upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Chief  Commissary  of  the  Department  of 
the  Pacific,  the  issue  to  Spanish  Prisoners  by  Major  S.  A.  C'loman,  C.  S.,  U.  S.  \ols., 
Depot  Commissary,  Cavite,  P.  I.,  of  one  (1)  box  of  soap  (60  lbs.  net)  is  hereby  con- 
firmed. 

7.  Sergeant  Charles  H.  Burritt,  Company  C,  1st  Wyoming  Volunteer  Infantry, 
will  report  to  Lieutenant  Morgareidge,  1st  W3’oming  Volunteer  Infantry,  on  board 
Steamer  Ohio,  for  temporary  duty  in  unloading  commissary  supplies. 

Upon  completion  of  this  duty  Sergeant  Burritt  will  rejoin  his  Company. 

8.  Lieutenant  Charles  H.  Sleeper,  1st  Colorado  Volunteer  Infantry,  is  hereby 
appointed  Deputy  Collector  of  Internal  Revenue,  and  will  report  to  Major  R.  B.  C. 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


197 


Bement,  U.  S.  Vols.,  Administrator  cle  Iiaciena  (Collector  of  Internal  Revenue), 
for  instructions. 

9,  Lieutenant-Colonel  Charles  L.  Potter,  U.  S.  Vols.,  Chief  Engineer  Officer, 
Eighth  Army  Corps,  will  assume  charge  of  the  water  supply  of  this  city,  and  will 
report  to  Brigadier-General  Arthur  MacArthur,  U.  S.  Vols.,  Military  Commandant 
of  Manila,  for  instructions. 

By  Command  of  Major-General  Merritt: 

J.  B.  BABCOCK, 

Ad  j utant-General. 

Official : 

BENTLEY  MOTT,  Aid. 

The  responsibilities  of  General  Merritt  in  his  Manila  campaign  were  graver 
than  the  country  understands,  and  his  success  was  regarded  as  so  much  a matter 
of  course  that  there  has  been  forgetfulness  to  take  into  account  the  many  circum- 
stances that  gave  anxiety  preceding  decisions  that  seem  easy  now  that 
they  have  been  vindicated  by  events.  The  departure  from  San  Fran- 
cisco of  the  Major-General  commanding  the  Philippine  expedition  was  as  well 
known  to  the  Spanish  as  to  the  American  cabinet,  and  there  is  reason  to  think  there 
were  no  important  particulars  of  the  sailing  of  the  third  division  of  our  Philippine 
soldiers  unknown  to  enemies.  There  were  in  gold  coin,  a million  and  a half  dol- 
lars in  the  strong  box  of  Merritt’s  ship,  the  Newport.  The  Spanish  spies  were  not  as 
well  posted  as  an  average  hackman,  if  they  did  not  report  the  shipment  of  gold. 
It  would  have  been  a triumph  for  Spain  to  have  captured  the  commanding  general 
and  the  gold,  the  Astor  Battery  and  the  regular  recruits  with  the  headquarters  ship, 
The  Spanish  were  known  to  have  a gunboat  or  two  lurking  in  the  islands  within 
striking  distance  of  our  transports,  unarmed  vessels — except  a few  deck  pieces  of 
field  artillery — with  more  than  a thousand  men  on  each.  General  Merritt  wanted  the 
escort  of  ships  of  war  to  make  all  secure,  and  application  to  Admiral  Dewey  to 
send  one  of  his  war  boats,  brought  the  statement  that  he  could  not  spare  a ship. 
Just  at  that  time  he  heard  of  the  run  by  Camara  with  the  Cadiz  fleet  Eastward  on  the 
Mediterranean,  and  soon  he  had  word  that  the  Pelayo  and  her  companions  were  in 
the  Suez  canal.  General  Greene  had  not  arrived  at  Manila  at  that  time,  and  the 
monitors  Monterey  and  Monadnock  were  getting  along  slowly.  Dewey  knew  he 
would  have  to  evacuate  the  scene  of  his  victory  in  case  Camara  was  fully  committed 
to  go  to  Manila,  and  wait  for  the  Monitors,  and  when  he  got  them  he  said  he  would 
return  and  sink  another  Spanish  fleet,  but  that  was  something  it  might  be  critical  to 


198 


THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  GENERAL  MERRITT. 


explain,  and  General  Merritt,  after  leaving  San  Francisco,  did  not  get  any  news  for 
twenty-six  days.  All  that  time  he  would  have  had  no  justification  for  surprise  if 
he  had  been  attacked  by  a Spanish  gunboat,  and  if  the  Spaniards  had  pushed  on  their 
Rapide — the  converted  German  liner  the  Normania — she  could  have  been  handled  to 
cut  off  the  American  reinforcements  on  the  way  to  the  camps  of  the  little  American 
army  already  landed.  When  General  Merritt  reached  Cavite,  he  found  the  situation 
difficult  for  the  army  and  pushed  things  as  the  only  way  to  get  out  of  trouble.  He 
had  two  armies  to  deal  with,  one  the  Spaniards,  fiercely  hostile,  and  the  other,  the 
Filipinos,  factional  and  jealous,  each  outnumbering  by  five  thousand  the  American 
forces  with  which  the  city  was  assailed  and  finally  captured.  There  was  no  time  lost, 
and  if  there  had  been  any  delay,  even  two  days,  the  peace  protocol  would  have  found 
our  army  in  the  trenches,  and  the  city  belonging  to  the  Spaniards.  It  -was  the  energy 
of  General  Merritt,  heartily  shared  by  his  division  commanders,  that  prevented  this 
embarrassment,  which  would  have  been  a moral  and  military  misfortune.  We  have 
given  the  General’s  orders  to  his  troops  and  the  Filipinos  after  the  fall  of  the  city — 
also  his  original  statement  of  policy,  and  noted  how  cleverly  they  supported  each 
other,  and  how  smoothly  the  work  of  organization  and  administration  is  carried  on 
the  world  is  well  aware.  The  orders  deputing  the  officers  to  discharge  certain  duties 
are  plain  business.  There  was  no  departure  from  the  strict,  straight  line  of  military 
government,  and  the  threatened  entanglements  firmly  touched  passed  away.  There 
was  nothing  omitted,  or  superfluous,  and  the  purpose  and  programme  of  policy  wms 
made  clear  by  events.  The  confusion  overcome  by  the  genius  of  common  sense  there 
was  order,  all  rights  respected,  the  administration  was  a success  from  the  beginning 
and  continued,  and  is  to  be  continued — security  is  established,  there  is  public  con- 
fidence in  the  air — the  “faith  and  honor  of  the  army”  are  inviolable,  Manila  is  ours, 
and  there  is  peace.  If  war  comes  in  that  quarter  of  the  globe  we  shall  stand  on 
ground  that  earthquakes  cannot  shake. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 

Why  the  Boys  Had  a Spell  of  Home  Sickness — Disadvantages  of  the  Tropics — Ad- 
miral Dewey  and  his  Happy  Men — How  Our  Soldiers  Passed  the  Time  on  the 
Ships — General  Merritt’s  Headquarters — What  Is  Public  Property — The 
Manila  Water  Supply — England  Our  Friend — Maj-ir- General  Otis,  General 
Merritt’s  Successor. 

The  American  soldiers  in  the  Philippines  were  most  devoted  and  cheerful,  patient 
under  hardship  and  pleasantly  satisfied  that  they  were  as  far  to  the  front  as  anybody 
and  seeing  all  there  was  to  see  during  the  siege  of  Manila.  They  were  out  in  tropical 
rains,  and  the  ditches  they  waded  were  deep  with  mud  unless  filled  with  water. 
They  were  harassed  by  the  Spanish  with  the  long-range  Mausers  at  night  and  in- 
sufficiently provided  a part  of  the  time  with  rations.  At  best  they  had  a very  rough 
experience,  but  kept  their  health  and  wanted  to  go  into  the  city  with  a rush.  They 
would  rather  have  taken  chances  in  storming  the  place  than  sleep  in  the  mud,  as  they 
did  for  twenty  days. 

When  the  defenders  of  Manila  concluded  that  the  honor  of  Spain  would  be 
preserved  by  the  shedding  of  only  a little  blood  in  a hopeless  struggle  and  fell  back 
from  very  strong  positions  before  the  advance  of  skirmish  lines,  and  the  American 
columns  entered  the  city,  keeping  two  armies — the  Spaniards  and  the  insurgents — 
apart,  and,  taking  possession,  restored  order  and  were  sheltered  in  houses,  it  soon 
began  to  occur  to  the  boys,  who  came  out  of  the  wet  campaign  looking  like  veterans 
and  feeling  that  they  had  gained  much  by  experience,  that  they  were  doing  garrison 
duty  and  that  it  was  objectionable.  The  soldiers  who  arrived  on  the  Peru,  City  of 
Pueblo  and  Pennsylvania  were  shocked  that  they  had  missed  the  fight  and  dis- 
gusted with  the  news  of  peace.  They  had  made  an  immense  journey  to  go  actively 
into  war,  and  emerged  from  the  ocean  solitude  to  police  a city  in  time  of  peace.  It  was 
their  notion  that  they  lacked  occupation;  that  their  adventure  had  proved  an  enter 
prise  that  could  not  become  glorious. 

The  romance  of  war  faded.  Unquiet  sensations  were  produced  by  the  stories  that 
there  was  nothing  to  do  but  go  home,  and  they  would  soon  be  placed  aboard  the 
transports  and  homeward  bound.  Besides,  the  climate  was  depressing.  The  days 
were  hot  and  the  nights  were  not  refreshing.  The  rations  were  better  and  there  were 
dry  places  to  sleep,  but  there  was  no  inspiring  excitement,  and  it  was  not  a life  worth 


199 


200 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


living.  War — “the  front” — instead  of  offering  incomparable  varieties,  became  tedious 
— it  was  a bore,  in  fact.  How  could  a crowded  city  and  thronged  streets  be  at- 
tractive in  a military  sense,  or  the  scene  of  patriotic  sacrifice,  when  the  most  arduous 
duty  was  that  of  police?  Was  it  for  this  they  had  left  homes  in  Oregon,  Montana, 
Pennsylvania,  Wisconsin,  Tennessee,  Nebraska,  Utah,  California  and  Colorado? 

There  came  an  episode  of  homesickness.  It  was  about  time  in  a soldier’s  life  to 
contrast  it  with  the  farms  and  the  villages,  the  shops,  mines  and  manufactories. 
They  were  kept  busy  on  guard  and  in  caring  for  themselves,  in  activities  as  the  mas- 
ters of  a strange  community,  but  the  novelties  of  the  tropics  lost  their  flavor.  What 
did  a man  want  with  oranges  when  there  were  apples?  What  was  a rice  swamp  com- 
pared with  a corn  field?  Think  of  the  immeasurable  superiority,  as  a steady  thing, 
of  an  Irish  potato  to  a banana,  or  a peach  to  a pineapple!  What  was  a Chinese 
pony  alongside  a Kentucky  horse,  or  a water  buffalo  with  the  belly  of  a hippopotamus 
and  horns  crooked  as  a saber  and  long  as  your  arm  to  one  wrho  had  seen  old-fashioned 
cows,  and  bulls  whose  bellowing  was  as  the  roaring  of  lions?  The  miserable  but 
mighty  buffaloes  were  slower  than  oxen  and,  horns  and  all,  tame  as  sheep — the 
slaves  of  serfs! 

As  for  the  Chinese,  if  there  were  no  other  objection,  they  should  be  condemned 
because  too  numerous — faithful,  perhaps,  in  a way,  but  appearing  with  too  much  fre- 
quency in  the  swarming  streets.  And  the  women,  with  hair  hanging  down  their 
backs,  one  shoulder  only  sticking  out  of  their  dresses,  the  skin  shining  like  a 
scoured  copper  kettle;  a skirt  tight  around  the  hips  and  divided  to  show  a petticoat 
of  another  tint,  a jacket  offering  further  contrasts  in  colors,  slippers  flapping  under 
naked  heels,  faces  solemn  as  masks  of  death  heads — oh,  for  the  rosy  and  jolly  girls 
we  left  behind  us  in  tears!  How  beautiful  were  the  dear  golden-haired  and  blue-eyed 
blondes  of  other  days!  The  boys  wanted  at  least  tobacco  and  aerated  waters  to 
soothe  themselves  with,  and  if  there  was  not  to  be  any  more  fighting,  what  was  the 
matter  with  going  home? 

They  also  serve,  however,  who  only  stand  and  wait — there  are  no  soldiers 
or  sailors  in  the  world  who  are  in  a position  of  greater  interest 
and  usefulness  than  those  of  the  American  army  and  navy  who 

hold  fast  with  arms  the  capital  city  of  the  Philippines.  The  army,  though  much 

exposed,  has  not  suffered  severely  from  sickness.  There  has  been  an  intense  and  pro- 
tracted strain  upon  the  men  of  the  ships,  but  they  have  recovered  from  the  amiable 
weakness  for  home,  and  they  are  not  merely  well;  they  are  more  than  plain  health}7 — 

they  are  hearty  and  happy!  There  is  the  light  of  good  times  in  their  faces.  One 

thing  in  their  favor  is  they  have  not  been  allowed  to  eat  unwholesome  food,  and  the 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


201 


floors  of  the  warboats  and  every  piece  of  metal  or  wood  that  is  in  sight  is  polished 
and  glistening  with  cleanliness.  The  soldiers  will  feel  better  when  the  postoffice  is  in 
working  order  and  they  will  do  better  by  their  organs  of  digestion  when  they  are 
not  deluged  with  fizz — that  is,  pop,  and  beer  made  without  malt,  and  the  strange, 
sweetish  fruits  that  at  first  were  irresistible  temptations. 

“Come  with  me  and  see  the  men  oi  the  Olympia,”  said  Admiral  Dewey,  “and  see 
how  happy  they  are,  though  they  have  been  shut  up  here  four  months.”  And  the 
men  did  look  jolly  and  bright,  and  proud  of  the  Admiral  as  he  of  them,  and  they 
were  pleased  when  he  noticed,  kindly,  the  hostile  little  monkey,  who  is  the  mascot, 
and  the  other  day  bit  the  Captain. 

The  health  of  the  boys  was  preserved  at  sea  by  systematic  exercise.  Not  a 
transport  crossed  the  Pacific  that  was  not  converted  into  a military  school,  and  each 
floating  schoolhouse  had  about  1,000  nupils.  They  were  put  through  gymnastics 
and  calisthenics  when,  as  a rule,  they  were  barefooted  and  wore  no  clothes  but  their 
undershirts  and  trousers.  There  was  even  a scarcity  of  suspenders.  The  drill- 
masters  were  in  dead  earnest,  and  their  voices  rang  out  until  the  manifestation  of 
vocal  capacity  excited  admiration.  The  boys  had  to  reach  suddenly  for  heaven  with 
both  hands  and  then  bring  their  arms  to  their  sides  with  swinging  energy.  Then 
they  had  to  strike  out  right  and  left  to  the  order  “Right!”  “Left!”  until  the  sergeant 
was  satisfied.  Next  each  foot  had  to  be  lifted  and  put  down  cpuickly  at  the  word  of 
command;  then  it  was  needful  that  the  legs  should  be  widely  separated  in  a jump 
and  closed  up  with  vigor;  then  the  spinal  columns  swayed  forward  and  back  and  all 
the  joints  and  muscles  had  something  to  do.  This  was  no  laughing  matter  to  any 
one,  though  it  was  funny  enough  from  the  ordinary  standpoint  of  civil  life.  This 
medicine  was  taken  day  after  day,  and  seemed  to  vindicate  itself. 

It  was  esteemed  a good  thing  for  the  boys  to  perspire  from  exercise.  There  was 
no  trouble,  though,  when  south  and  west  of  Honolulu,  in  having  substantially  Turk- 
ish baths  in  the  bunks  at  night,  and  there  were  queer  scenes  on  deck — men  by  hun- 
dreds scantily  clothed  and  sleeping  in  attitudes  that  artists  might  have  chosen  to 
advantage  for  life  studies.  It  was  necessary  for  those  who  walked  about,  during  the 
hours  thus  given  to  repose,  where  the  enlisted  men  took  their  rest  with  their  under- 
shirts and  drawers  around  them,  to  be  careful  not  to  tramp  on  the  extended  limbs. 
Once  I feared  I had  hit  a soldier’s  nose  with  my  heavy  foot  when  stepping  over  him 
tn  a low  light,  and  was  gratified  that  my  heel  had  merely  collided  with  a big  boy’s 
thumb.  He  had  gone  to  sleep  with  his  head  protected  by  his  hand.  I paused  long 
enough  to  note  that  the  sheltering  hand  if  clinched  would  have  been  a mighty  and 
6miting  fist;  and  1 was  doubly  pleased  that  I had  not  tramped  on  his  big  nose. 


202 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


Not  infrequently,  when  we  were  steaming  along  the  20th  parallel  of  north  lati- 
tude— that  is  to  say,  well  in  the  torrid  zone — and  were  wafted  hy  the  trade  winds  that 
were  after  us  at  about  our  own  speed,  heavy  showers  came  up  in  the  night  and 
spoiled  the  luxurious  content  of  those  who  wrere  spread  on  the  decks.  The  hoys  got 
in  good  form  through  the  longest  journey  an  army  ever  made — for  the  distance  is 
greater  from  the  United  States  to  the  Philippines  than  from  Spain — and  every  week 
the  skill  of  a soldier  in  acquiring  the  lessons  of  the  climate  and  the  best  methods  of 
taking  care  of  himself  wall  become  more  useful,  and  the  tendency  will  he  to  settle 
down  to  the  business  of  soldiering,  make  the  best  of  it  and  accept  it  as  educational— 
an  experience  having  in  it  the  elements  of  enduring  enjoyments.  “The  days  when 
I was  in  Manila,  away  down  in  the  south  seas,  hut  a little  -way  from  the  island  from 
which  came  the  wild  man  of  Borneo,”  will  he  pleasant  in  remembrance,  and  there  will 
be  perpetually  an  honorable  distinction  in  identification  with  an  ambitious  yet  gen- 
erous enterprise,  one  of  the  most  remarkable  a nation  can  undertake — not  excepting 
the  Roman  conquests  all  around  the  Mediterranean,  and  that  touched  the  northern 
sea,  invading  England. 

In  the  later  days  of  August  there  were  in  the  prisons  of  Manila,  which  answer  to 
the  penitentiary  and  jail  in  the  American  States,  2,200  prisoners,  one  of  whom  was  a 
Spaniard!  The  prisons  are  divided  only  by  a high  wall  and  contain  many  compart- 
ments to  assist  in  classification.  There  are  considerable  spaces  devoted  to  airing 
the  prisoners,  and  one  in  which  the  privileged  are  permitted  to  amuse  themselves 
with  games.  The  guard  consisted,  when  I visited  the  place,  of  sixty-three  soldiers 
from  Pennsylvania.  There  were  many  women  imprisoned.  One  who  had  been  shut 
up  for  more  than  a year  was  taken  into  custody  because  she  had  attempted  rather 
informally  to  retake  possession  of  a house  of  which  she  had  been  proprietor  and  out 
of  which  she  had  been  fraudulently  thrown.  Her  crime  was  a hysterical  assertion  of 
her  rights  and  her  uninvited  tenants  were  Spaniards. 

One  of  the  buildings  contained  the  criminals  alleged  to  he  desperate,  and  as  they 
stood  at  the  windows  the  chains  on  their  right  legs  were  in  sight.  It  was  plainly 
seen  in  several  cases  that  the  links  of  the  chains  used  were  about  three  inches  long 
and  that  three  or  four  turns  were  taken  around  the  right  ankle.  In  a group  of  pris- 
oners waiting  for  supper  to  be  handed  them  in  pans  in  the  open  air  a large  number 
wore  chains.  Many  of  the  prisoners  were  incarcerated  as  insurgents,  having  offended 
hy  refusing  to  espouse  the  Spanish  cause  or  hy  some  other  capital  criminality  in  that 
fine  of  misconduct!  A commission  was  investigating  their  eases  and  the  Filipinos 
who  had  not  satisfied  the  Spanish  requirements  were  represented  hy  an  able  lawyei, 
rho  was  well  informed  and  disposed  to  do  justice.  Sixty-two  of  the  inmates  of  th* 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


203 


penitentiary  held  for  discontent  with  the  Spanish  system  of  government  were  to  be 
discharged  as  soon  as  the  papers  could  be  made  out. 

Many  most  interesting  questions  arise  in  connection  with  the  capitulation  of  the 
Spanish  army.  It  was  agreed  that  the  Spaniards,  upon  surrendering  and  giving  up 
the  public  property,  should  he  entitled  to  the  honors  of  war.  It  was  expressly 
understood  that  the  arms  the  troops  gave  up  were  to  he  retained.  In  case  the  Ameri- 
cans abandoned  the  islands  or  the  Spaniards  departed  the  rifles  should  be  given  them, 
and  usage  would  seem  to  determine  that  this  return  of  wapons  must  include  the 
Mausers  in  the  hands  of  the  troops  now  prisoners  of  war  and  the  cartridges  they 
would  carry  if  they  took  the  field. 

' Then  arises  a difficulty  as  to  the  precise  meaning  of  the  words  “public  property.” 
There  were  laid  down  by  the  Spaniards  about  12,000  Mausers  and  Remingtons,  and 
there  were  10,000  in  the  arsenals — 22,000  in  all.  It  is  admitted  that  12,000  per- 
sonally surrendered  rifles  go  back  to  the  Spaniards,  whether  they  or  we  go  away  from 
the  islands — as  one  or  the  other  is  sure  to  do — but  the  10,000  stand  of  arms  in  the 
arsenals  come  under  the  head  of  “public  property,”  and  so  should  be  retained  per- 
manently by  the  Americans.  The  number  of  ball  cartridges  a soldier  starting  out  to 
make  a march  carries  is  100.  There  were  surrendered  more  than  500  rounds  to  the 
man.  The  public  money  was  public  property,  of  course,  and  General  Greene  de- 
manded the  keys  to  the  vault  containing  it.  The  Spanish  authorities  objected,  hut 
yielded  after  presenting  a written  protest.  The  money  consisted  of  Spanish  and 
Mexican  dollars,  a lot  of  silver  bars  and  change  fused  into  one  mass,  and  some 
gold  in  the  same  state,  also  $247,000  in  copper  coin,  which  was  regarded,  under  the 
old  dispensation,  good  stuff  to  pay  poor  wages  to  poor  men  and  women. 

There  are  some  fine  points  about  customs.  The  American  flag  floats  over  the  city, 
and  the  importers  and  exporters  want  to  know  what  the  charges  are  and  how  much 
the  private  concessions  must  be.  Some  of  these  people  ran  around  for  several  days 
with  the  object  of  placing  a few  hundred  Mexican  dollars  in  the  hands  of  officials, 
where  they  would  do  the  most  good,  and  could  not  find  anybody  ready  to  confer 
special  favors  for  hard  cash.  These  pushing  business  men  had  been  accustomed  to 
meet  calls  for  perquisites,  and  did  not  feel  safe  for  a moment  without  complying  with 
that  kind  of  formality.  They  turned  away  embarrassed  and  disappointed,  and  were 
surprised  to  learn  that  they  were  on  a ground  floor  that  was  wide  enough  to  accommo- 
date everybody. 

It  should  be  mentioned  in  this  connection,  also,  a Mexican  dollar  passes  in  Manila 
for  50  cents  American.  The  price  of  Mexican  dollars  in  the  banks  of  San  Francisco 
and  Honolulu  is  46  and  47  cents.  The  way  it  works  is  illustrated  in  paying  in  a res- 


204 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


taurant  for  a lunch — say  for  two.  If  the  account  is  $2  you  put  down  a $5  United 
States  gold  piece  and  receive  in  change  eight  Mexican  dollars.  If  you  buy  cigars  at 
$40  per  1,000  a $20  American  gold  piece  pays  the  $40  bill.  There  is  now  pretty  free 
coinage  of  Mexican  dollars  and  they  answer  admirably  as  50-cent  coins.  That  is  one 
of  the  ways  in  which  free  coinage  of  silver  removes  prejudices  against  the  white 
metal;  no  one  thinks  of  objecting  to  a Mexican  dollar  as  a half-dollar,  and  our  boys, 
paid  in  American  gold,  have  a feeling  that  their  wages  are  raised  because  all  over 
the  city  one  of  their  dollars  counts  two  in  the  settlement  of  debts.  These  useful 
American  dollars  are  admitted  free  of  duty. 

The  headquarters  of  the  American  administration  in  Manila  are  in  the  city  hall, 
situated  in  the  walled  city,  with  a park  in  front  that  plainly  has  been  neglected  for 
some  time.  It  also  fronts  upon  the  same  open  square  as  the  cathedral,  while  beyond 
are  the  Jesuit  College  and  the  Archbishop’s  palace.  Just  around  the  corner  is  a 
colossal  church,  and  a triangular  open  space  that  has  a few  neglected  trees  and  ought 
to  be  beautiful  but  is  not.  A street  railroad  passes  between  the  church  and  the 
triangle,  and  the  mule  power  is  sufficient  to  carry  at  a reasonable  rate  a dozen 
Spanish  officers  and  as  many  Chinamen.  The  fare  is  1 cent  American — that  is,  2 
cents  Philippine — and  the  other  side  of  the  river  you  are  entitled  to  a transfer,  but 
the  road  is  short  and  drivers  cheap.  There  is  a system  of  return  coupons  that  I do 
not  perfectly  understand.  The  truth  about  the  street  railway  system  is  that  there  is 
very  little  of  it  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  city,  but  the  average  ride  costs  about  1 
cent.  If  the  Americans  stay  there  is  an  opening  for  a trolley  on  a long  line. 

There  is  no  matter  of  business  that  does  not  depend  upon  the  question:  Will 
the  Americans  stay?  If  they  do  all  is  well;  if  they  do  not  all  is  ill,  and  enterprise 
not  to  be  talked  of. 

The  most  important  bridge  across  the  Pasig  is  the  bridge  of  Spain.  The  street 
railway  crosses  it.  The  carriages  and  the  coolies,  too,  must  keep  to  the  left.  It  is  the 
thoroughfare  between  the  new  and  old  cities,  and  at  all  hours  of  the  day  is  thronged. 
It  is  a place  favored  by  the  native  gig  drivers  to  whip  heavily  laden  coolies  out  of  the 
way.  A big  Chinaman  with  powerful  limbs,  carrying  a great  burden,  hastens  to  give 
the  road  to  a puny  creature  driving  a puny  pony,  lashing  it  with  a big  whip,  and 
scrambles  furiously  away  from  a two-wheeler  whirling  along  a man  able  to  pay  a 
10-cent  fare. 

In  other  days  when  one  passed  this  bridge  he  faced  the  botanical  gardens,  which 
had  a world-wide  reputation,  an  attraction  being  a wonderful  display  of  orchids. 
There  were  also  beautiful  trees;  now  there  are  only  stumps,  disfigurements  and  deso- 
lation— some  of  the  horrors  of  war.  The  gardens  were  laid  waste  by  the  Spaniards 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


205 


as  a military  precaution.  As  they  seem  to  have  known  that  they  could  not  or  would 
not  put  up  a big  fight  for  the  city,  what  was  the  use  of  the  destructiveness  displayed 
in  the  gardens,  parks  and  along  the  boulevards?  The  fashion  of  taking  a garden  and 
making  a desert  of  it  and  calling  it  one  of  the  military  necessities  of  war  is,  how- 
ever, not  peculiar  to  the  chieftains  of  Spain. 

Crossing  the  bridge  of  Spain  to  the  walled  city  and  turning  to  the  right  there 
are  well-paved  streets  bordered  with  strips  of  park  beside  the  river,  that  is  rushing 
the  same  wray  if  you  are  going  to  headquarters;  and  the  object  that  tells  where  to 
turn  off  to  find  the  old  gateway  through  the  wall,  with  a drawbridge  over  the  grassy 
moat,  is  a Monument  to  Alphonse,  whose  memory  it  is  the  habit  of  these  people  to 
celebrate.  Approaching  the  city  hall  (headquarters)  there  is  a white-walled  hospital 
to  note;  then  comes  a heavy  mass  of  buildings  on  a narrow  street,  and  the 
small  square  already  styled  in  this  article  a park,  and  we  arrive  at  the  grand  en- 
trance of  the  official  edifice.  The  room  devoted  to  ceremony  is  so  spacious  that  one 
must  consent  that  magnitude  is  akin  to  grandeur.  There  is  the  usual  double  stair- 
way and  a few  stone  steps  to  overcome.  On  the  right  and  left  under  the  second  lift 
of  stairs  were  corded  the  Spanish  Mausers  and  Remingtons  and  many  boxes  of  car- 
tridges. I have  several  times  noticed  soldiers  tramping  on  loose  cartridges  as  though 
they  had  no  objection  at  all  to  an  explosion.  You  can  tell  the  Mauser  ammunition,  be- 
cause the  cartridges  arein  clips  of  five,  and  the  little  bullets  famous  for  their  long  flight 
are  covered  with  nickel.  The  Remington  bullets  are  bigger  and  coated  with  brass. 
Something  has  been  said  to  the  effect  that  the  Remington  balls  used  by  the  Span- 
iards are  poisonous  and  that  it  is  uncivilized  to  manufacture  them.  The  object 
of  the  Mauser  and  Remington  system  in  covering  the  bullets,  the  one  with  nickel 
and  the  other  with  brass,  is  not  to  poison,  but  to  prevent  the  lead  from  fouling  the 
rifles.  The  point  is  almost  reached  in  modern  guns  of  2,000  and  3,000  yards  range 
where  the  friction  of  the  gun  barrel  and  the  speed  of  the  missile  at  the  muzzle  are 
sufficient  to  fuse  unprotected  lead,  and  at  any  rate  so  much  of  the  soft  material 
would  soon  be  left  in  the  grooves  as  to  impair  accuracy  and  endanger  the  structure  of 
the  arm. 

Right  ahead  when  the  first  stairs  are  cleared  is  a splendid  hall,  with  a pair  of 
gilded  lions  on  a dais,  and  some  of  the  boys  had  adorned  these  beasts  with  crowns  of 
theatrical  splendor.  The  arms  of  Spain  are  conspicuous,  and  in  superb  medallions 
illustrious  warriors,  statesmen,  authors,  artists  and  navigators,  look  down  from  the 
walls  upon  desks  now  occupied  by  American  officers.  Above  this  floor  the  stairs 
are  blocks  of  hardwood,  the  full  width  of  the  stairway  and  the  height  of  the  step, 
and  this  earthquake  precaution  does  not  detract  from  the  dignity  of  the  building,  ioi 


206 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


the  woodwork  is  massive  and  handsome.  A marvelous  effect  might  be  produced 
in  some  of  the  marble  palaces  of  private  citizens  in  our  American  cities  by  the  con- 
struction of  stairways  with  the  iron-hard  and  marble-brilliant  wood  that  is  abundant 
in  Puerto  Rico,  Cuba  and  Luzon.  The  hall  in  which  the  city  council  met,  now  the 
place  of  the  provost-marshal’s  court,  is  furnished  in  a style  that  puts  to  shame  the 
frugality  displayed  in  the  council  chambers  of  our  expensively  governed  American 
cities,  where  men  of  power  pose  as  municipal  economists. 

In  the  elevated  chair  of  the  President,  faced  by  the  array  of  chairs  of  the 
Spanish  councilmen,or  aldermen,  sits  the  provost-marshal  judge,  and  before  him  come 
the  soldiers  who  have  forgotten  themselves  and  the  culprits  arrested  by  the  patrol. 
On  the  wall  above  him  is  a full-length  likeness  of  the  Queen  Regent — a beautiful, 
womanly  figure,  with  a tender  and  anxious  mother’s  solicitous  face.  She  looks  down 
with  sad  benignity  upon  the  American  military  government.  There  is  also  a por- 
trait of  the  boy  king,  who  becomes  slender  as  he  gains  height,  and  rather  sickly 
than  strong.  It  may  be  that  too  much  care  is  taken  of  him. 

In  the  corner  room  at  the  end  of  the  corridor  Major-General  Otis  received  at 
his  desk  the  news  that  Generals  Merritt  and  Greene  were  ordered  home,  and  that 
he  was  the  major-general  commanding  and  the  chief  of  the  civil,  as  well  as  the  military 
department  of  the  government,  lie  had  already  found  much  to  do  and  tackled  the 
greater  task  with  imperturbable  spirit  and  a habit  of  hard  workwith,his  friends  say, no 
fault  but  a habit  that  is  almost  impracticable  of  seeing  for  himself  almost  everything 
he  is  himself  held  responsible  for.  If  he  has  a weakness  of  that  sort  he  has  a rare 
opportunity  to  indulge  it  to  the  full  extent  of  his  personal  resources.  He  certainly 
dispatches  business  rapidly,  decides  the  controverted  points  quickly  and  has  a clear 
eye  for  the  field  before  him.  Ilis  record  is  a good  one.  When  the  war  of  the  States 
came  on  he  was  a New  York  lawyer — his  home  is  at  Rochester.  Near  the  close  of 
the  war  he  was  wounded  on  the  Weldon  road,  along  which  Grant  was  extending 
his  left  wing  to  envelop  Petersburg.  He  was  struck  by  a musket  ball  almost  an  inch 
from  the  end  of  the  nose,  and  the  course  of  it  was  through  the  bones  of  the  face 
under  the  right  eye,  passing  out  under  the  right  ear.  He  was  “shot  through  the 
head,”  and  suffered  intensely  for  a long  time,  but  maintained  his  physical  vitality 
and  mental  energy.  His  face  is  but  slightly  marked  by  this  dreadful  wound.  He 
has  been  a hard  student  all  his  life,  and  is  an  accomplished  soldier,  as  well  as  an 
experienced  lawyer.  His  judicial  sendees  in  court-martials  have  been  highly  esti- 
mated. Altogether  he  is  well  equipped  for  executing  the  various  duties  of  his  posi- 
tion. He  will  “hold  the  fort  in  good  shape.”  In  an  adjacent  room,  Assistant  Ad- 
jutant-General Strong,  son  of  the  ex-mayor  of  New  York,  a young  man  of  much  ex- 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


207 


perience  in  the  national  guard  and  a sharp  shooter,-  sticks  to  business  with  zeal  and 
knowledge,  and  in  a very  few  days  established  a reputation  as  a helper. 

So  much  has  been  said  in  disparagement  of  the  “sons  of  somebodies”  that  it  is 
a pleasure  to  put  in  evidence  the  cleverness  and  intelligent  industry  of  Captain 
Strong,  late  of  the  69th  New  York,  and  of  Captain  Coudert,  of  New  York. 

General  Merritt  took  possession  of  the  palace  of  the  governor-general,  overlook- 
ing the  river,  a commodious  establishment,  with  a pretentious  gate  on  the  street,  a 
front  yard  full  of  shrubbery  and  rustling  with  trees,  a drive  for  carriages  and  doors 
for  their  occupants  at  the  side  and  a porte  cochere,  as  the  general  said  with  a twinkle 
of  his  eye,  for  the  steam  launch  which  was  a perquisite  of  the  Governor.  The  com- 
manding general  of  the  Philippine  expedition  enjoyed  the  life  on  the  river,  along 
which  boats  were  constantly  passing,  carrying  country  supplies  to  the  city  and 
returning.  The  capacity  of  canoes  to  convey  fruit  and  vegetables  and  all  that  the 
market  called  for  was  an  unexpected  disclosure.  There  were  unfailing  resources 
up  the  river  or  a multitude  of  indications  were  inaccurate.  The  General’s  palace  is 
more  spacious  than  convenient;  the  dining  room  designed  for  stately  banquets, 
but  the  furniture  of  the  table  was  not  after  the  manner  of  feasts,  though  the  best  the 
country  afforded,  and  the  supply  of  meat  improved  daily,  while  the  fruit  told  of 
the  kindly  opulence  of  the  tropics. 

There  was  a work  of  art  in  the  palatial  headquarters  that  the  commanding  gen- 
eral highly  appreciated — a splendid  but  somber  painting  of  the  queen  regent  in  her 
widow’s  weeds,  holding  the  boy  king  as  a baby  on  her  right  shottlder,  her  back  turned 
to  the  spectator,  gloomy  drapery  flowing  upon  the  carpet,  her  profile  and  pale 
brow  and  dark  and  lustrous  hair  shown,  her  gaze  upon  the  child  and  his  young  eyes 
fixed  upon  the  spectator.  This  picture  has  attracted  more  attention  than  any  other 
in  Manila,  and  the  city  is  rich  in  likenesses  of  the  queen  mother  and  the  royal  boy, 
who,  without  fault  have  upon  them  the  heavy  sorrows  of  Spain  in  an  era  of  mis- 
fortune and  humiliation;  and  it  will  take  some  time  for  the  Spanish  people,  highly 
or  lowly  placed,  to  realize  that  the  loss  of  colonies,  as  they  have  held  them,  is  a bless- 
ing to  the  nation  and  offers  the  only  chance  of  recuperation  and  betterment  in  Spain’s 
reputation  and  relations  with  the  world. 

The  governor-general’s  palace,  with  General  Merritt  for  General,  was  a workshop, 
and  the  highly  decorated  apartments,  lofty  and  elaborate,  were  put  to  uses  that  had 
an  appearance  of  being  incongruous.  The  cot  of  the  soldier,  shrouded  in  a mosquito 
bar,  stood  in  the  midst  of  sumptuous  furniture,  before  towering  mirrors  in  showy 
frames,  and  from  niches  looked  down  marble  statues  that  would  have  been  more 
at  home  in  the  festal  scenes  of  pompous  life  in  the  sleepy  cities  of  dreamy  lands. 


208 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


There  was  no  more  striking  combination  than  a typewriting  machine  mounted  on 
a magnificent  table,  so  thick  and  resplendent  with  gold  that  it  seemed  one  mass  of 
the  precious  metal — not  gilt,  but  solid  bullion — and  the  marble  top  had  the  irides- 
cent glow  of  a sea  shell.  This  was  in  the  residence  of  the  General,  his  dining  and 
smoking  rooms  and  bedrooms  for  himself  and  staff,  the  actual  headquarters  being 
next  door  in  the  residence  of  the  secretary-general.  Here  was  a brilliant  exhibition 
of  mirrors,  upon  some  of  which  were  paintings  of  dainty  design  and  delicate  execu- 
tion, queerly  effective.  The  tall  glasses  stood  as  if  upon  mantles.  There  were  other 
glasses  that  duplicated  their  splendors;  through  the  open  doors  down  the  street, 
which  was  the  one  for  the  contemplation  of  the  gorgeous — and  down  the  street 
means  into  the  modern  end  of  the  city — was  the  residence  of  the  Spanish  Admiral 
of  the  annihilated  fleet,  Montijo.  It  had  been  the  property  of  and  was  the  creation 
of  a German,  who  got  rich  and  got  away  in  good  time  with  $1,000,000  or  more,  sell- 
ing his  house  to  one  of  the  rich  Chinese,  who  had  the  fortune,  good,  bad  or  in- 
different, to  become  the  landlord  of  the  Admiral  whose  ships  disappeared  in  a vast 
volume  of  white  vapor  on  the  May  morning  when  the  Americans  came  and  intro- 
duced themselves. 

General  Greene’s  headquarters  were  in  the  house  the  German  merchant  built, 
the  Chinese  millionaire  bought,  and  the  Admiral,  without  a fleet  since  the  1st  of  May, 
rented.  The  furnishing  was  rich;  there  were  frescoes  that  were  aglow  with  the  tropic 
birds  and  window  curtains  that  were  dreams.  The  vast  mansions  of  the  ex-officials 
were  not,  however,  such  as  would  have  been  sought  as  accommodations  for  the  man- 
agement of  the  military  and  other  affairs,  and  there  was  much  lacking  to  comfort; 
but  as  the  hotels  after  the  siege  were  not  tolerable,  the  officers  had  to  discover 
houses  in  which  they  could  develop  resources,  and  the  public  property  was  that  of 
those  who  conquered  to  the  extent  to  which  it  had  belonged  to  those  displaced. 

The  Americans  got  out  of  the  chaotic  hotels  soon  as  possible,  for  there  were 
some  things  in  them  simply  not  endurable.  They  rent  houses  and  employ 
servants  and  set  up  housekeeping.  The  newspaper  correspondents  have  been  driven 
to  this,  and  they  are  comparatively  happy.  They  have  found  ponies  almost  a ne- 
cessary of  life,  and  food  that  is  fair  is  attainable,  while  the  flowing  hydrants  remove 
a good  deal  of  privation  and  apprehension.  The  water  is  from  an  uncontaminated 
stream,  and  though  slightly  roiled  after  heavy  rainfalls,  it  is  not  poisonous,  and 
that  is  what  many  American  and  European  cities  cannot  truthfully  say  of  their 
water  supplies.  The  demand  for  houses  by  the  Americans  has  raised  the  views  of  the 
proprietors.  The  street  on  which  the  official  Spaniards  meant  to  flourish,  as  M eyler, 
Blanco  and  others  bad  done  before  them,  and  had  not  time  to  reap  a harvest  of 


GIRL'S  COSTUME  TO  SHOW  ONE  SHOULDER.  SAVAGE  NATIVE  HUNTERS. 


THE  AMERICAN  ARMY  IN  MANILA. 


211 


plunder  before  the  days  of  doom  came,  would  be  called  by  the  citizens  of 
Cleveland,  0.,  the  Euclid  avenue  of  the  town.  It  runs  out  to  the  old  fort  where 
the  Spaniards  made  their  stand  “for  the  honor  of  the  arms  of  Spain.”  The  English 
and  German  and  Chinese  successful  men  reside  in  this  quarter.  The  majority  of 
those  who  have  provided  themselves  with  houses  by  the  river  and  fronting  on  the 
street  most  approved,  looking  out  through  groves  and  gardens,  are  Chinese  half- 
castes,  claiming  Chinese  fathers  and  Philippine  mothers.  These  are  the  most  ra- 
pacious and  successful  accumulators,  and  they  would  all  be  glad  to  see  the  Americans 
stay,  now  that  they  are  there,  and  have  shown  themselves  so  competent  to  appreciate 
desirable  opportunities  and  understand  the  ways  and  means,  the  acquirements  and 
the  dispensations  of  prosperity  as  our  troops  entered  the  city  by  the  principal  resi- 
dence street,  it  was  noticed  that  guards  were  loft  at  all  the  houses  that  displayed  the 
British  flag— a reward  for  English  courtesy,  and  the  feeling  of  the  troops  that  the 
British  are  our  friends. 


CHAPTER.  XIII. 


THE  WHITE  UNIFORMS  OF  OUR  HEROES  IN  THE  TROPICS. 

The  Mother  Hubbard  Street  Fashion  in  Honolulu,  and  That  of  Riding  Astride — • 
Spoiling  Summer  Clothes  in  Manila  Mud — The  White  Raiment  of  High  Offi- 
cers— Drawing  the  Line  on  Nightshirts — Ashamed  of  Big  Toes — Dewey  and 
Merritt  as  Figures  of  Show — The  Boys  in  White. 

Recent  experiences  of  the  United  States  excite  attention  to  the  fashions  of  the 
tropics.  In  Florida  our  soldiers  who  invaded  Cuba  were  in  a degree  and  sense  accli- 
mated for  the  temperature  of  the  island  that  has  been  for  so  long  “so  near,  and 
yet  so  far,”  so  wet  and  yet  so  hot.  But  the  troops  of  the  Philippine  expedition  were 
not  prepared  by  the  chilly  blasts  from  the  mountains  of  California  for  the  ex- 
ceedingly soft  airs  of  Hawaii,  though  Honolulu  was  a pleasant  introductory  school 
to  Manila.  Our  new  possession  two  thousand  miles  from  the  continent,  has 
been  preparing  for  the  destiny  realized  for  two  generations,  and  the  American  ladies 
who  dwell  in  the  islands  of  perpetual  summer  in  the  Pacific,  have  not  submitted 
wholly  to  the  dominion  of  the  climate  and  composed  themselves  to  languish  in  loose 
and  gauzy  garments  when  on  the  streets.  But  the  Honolulu  women,  in  general, 
who  largely  are  in  the  possession  of  luxuriant  proportions,  are  enveloped  in  the 
blandishments  of  Mother  Hubbards,  and  do  not  even  tie  strings  about  themselves 
to  shosv  wdiere  they  would  have  spectators  to  infer  their  waists  ought  to  be.  They 
go  about  flowing  and  fluttering  in  freedom,  and  have  all  the  advantages  due  the 
total  abandonment  of  corsets,  and  suffer  none  of  the  horrors  of  tight  lacing  re- 
corded in  medical  publications.  The  Mother  Hubbard  gown  is  not  without  its  at- 
tractions, but  we  can  hardly  say  they  are  too  obvious,  and  slender  figures  are  lost  in 
voluminous  folds  that  are  billowy  in  the  various  ways  and  means  of  embracing  the 
evolutions  of  beauty.  And  the  native  singers  seem  fully  justified  in  throwing  the  full 
force  of  their  lungs  and  the  rapture  of  their  souls  into  the  favorite  chorus,  “The 
Honolulu  Girls  Are  Good  Enough  for  Me.”  The  refrains  of  the  Hawaiian  songs 
are  full  of  a flavor  of  pathos,  and  there  is  the  cry  of  sorrows,  that  seem  to  be  in 
the  very  air,  but  belong  to  other  ages.  The  Honolulu  females  of  all  races  have 
flung  away  side  saddles  with  their  corsets,  and  bestride  horses  and  mules  wfith  the 
confidence  in  the  rectitude  of  their  intentions  that  so  besets  and  befits  the  riders  of 
jficycles.  People  would  stare  with  disapproval  in  Honolulu  to  see  a woman  riding 

212 


THE  WHITE  UNIFORMS  OF  OUR  HEROES  IN  THE  TROPICS.  213 


with  both  legs  on  the  same  side  of  a horse,  and  those  wandering  abroad  in  the  vol- 
uminous folds  of  two  spacious  garments  disapprove  the  unusual  and  unseemly 
spectacle. 

It  is  as  hot  in  some  parts  of  Texas,  Arizona  and  California  as  in  any  of  the  isl- 
ands of  the  seas  of  the  South,  but  we  had  not  been  educated  in  the  art  of  clothing 
armies  for  service  in  the  torrid  zone,  until  the  Philippine  expedition  was  under- 
taken, and  we  were  making  ready  for  challenging  the  Spaniards  in  their  Cuban  fast- 
nesses, when  it  speedily  was  in  evidence  that  we  wanted  something  more  than  blue 
cloth  and  blankets.  The  Spanish  white  and  blue  stuff  and  straw  hats  were  to 
our  eyes  unsightly  and  distasteful,  and  we  began  with  a variety  of  goods.  Our  army 
hats  were  found  good,  but  we  tried  nearly  all  things  before  holding  onto  anything 
as  sufficient  for  trousers  and  coats.  The  officers  on  long  journeys  speedily  resolved, 
if  we  may  judge  from  the  results,  that  the  suit  most  natty  and  nice  for  wear  within 
twenty  degrees  of  the  Equator  was  the  perfect  white,  and  so  the  snowy  figures  below 
shoulder  straps  became  familiar.  This  did  not,  of  course,  indicate  acute  stages  of 
active  service.  Never  were  campaigns  -more  destructive  of  good  looks  in  clothing, 
than  those  in  assailing  Santiago  and  Manila,  in  which  the  thin  stuffs  were  tested  in 
torrential  rain  and  ditches  full  of  mud.  The  compensation  was  that  the  volunteers 
fresh  from  the  camps  of  instruction,  put  on  in  a few  days  the  appearance  of  veteran 
campaigners.  In  Manila  there  was  an  edifying  contrast  between  the  Spaniards  who 
had  surrendered  and  the  Americans  who  did  not  pause  when  the  Mausers  were  fired 
into  their  ranks,  not  with  the  faintest  hope  of  successful  resistance,  but  for  the 
“honor  of  Spain.”  The  Spanish  soldiers  had  been  well  sheltered  and  came  out  in 
fairly  clean  clothes,  while  the  soldiers  of  our  nation  closed  up  dingy  ranks,  suited 
for  hunting  in  swamps  and  thickets,  their  coats,  hats  and  trousers  the  color  of 
blasted  grass  and  decayed  leaves.  The  passage  of  the  line  from  the  new  to  the  old 
clothes  was  sudden,  and  the  gallant  boys  in  blue  were  not  in  the  least  disconsolate 
over' the  discoloration  of  their  uniforms,  having  reached  the  stage  where  it  was  a 
luxury  to  sleep  on  a floor  or  pavement,  without  wasting  time  to  find  a soft  or 
quiet  spot. 

The  sombre  taste  of  the  Spanish  ladies  in  dress,  so  famous  and  effective  that 
the  black  mantillas  and  skirts,  and  the  fans  that  do  such  execution  in  the  hands 
of  the  dark-eyed  coquettes,  as  to  have  sway  where  empires  have  been  lost  and  won — 
control  Cuba,  but  does  not  dominate  the  Philippines.  The  Pope  of  the  period,  it  will 
be  remembered,  divided  the  new  worlds  discovered  by  the  navigators  of  Spain  and 
Portugal,  awarding  to  the  best  of  his  knowledge,  by  a line  drawn  south  from  the 
southern  shore  of  the  Caribbean  Sea.  Portugal  holding  that  to  the  eastward  and 


214  THE  WHITE  UNIFORMS  OF  OUR  HEROES  IN  THE  TROPICS. 

Spain  that  to  the  westward.  Hence  the  separation  of  South  America  between 
Brazil  and  the  rest  of  the  central  and  south  American  states,  to  await  the  inevitable 
end  of  the  evolutions  that  were  the  revolutions  of  independence.  Magellines,  a 
Portuguese,  who,  being  slighted  in  his  own  country,  went  over  to  the  Spaniards, 
and  pointed  out  that  by  sailing  west  the  east  would  be  attained,  and  so  found  the 
straits  that  bear  his  name,  and  the  Ladrones  and  Philippines,  annihilating  the 
Papal  boundary  line  by  taking  and  breaking  it  from  the  rear. 

The  conquest  of  the  Philippines  by  the  Spaniards  has  not  been  complete  as  a 
military  achievement  or  the  enforcement  of  the  adoption  of  customs  and  costumes 
according  to  the  habits  and  taste  of  the  conquerors,  who  have  nibbled  at  the  edges 
of  the  vast  archipelago,  greater  in  its  length  and  breadth  and  its  natural  riches  than 
the  West  Indies.  The  Spanish  ladies  in  the  Philippines  are  dressed  as  in  the  an- 
cient cities  of  their  own  renowned  peninsula.  The  Filipinos  are  of  the  varied 
styles  that  adorn  Africans  and  the  Asiatics.  They  are  gay  in  colors  and  curious 
in  the  adjustment  of  stuffs,  from  the  flimsy  jackets  to  the  fantastic  skirts.  The  first 
essential  in  the  dress  of  a Filipino  is  a jacket  cut  low,  the  decolette  feature  being 
obscured  to  some  extent  by  pulling  out  one  shoulder  and  covering  the  other,  taking 
the  chances  of  the  lines  that  mark  the  concealment  and  disclosure  of  breast  and  hack. 
There  is  no  expression  of  immodesty.  The  woman  of  the  Philippines  is  sad  as  she 
is  swarthy,  and  her  melancholy  eyes  are  almost  always  introspective,  or  glancing  far 
away,  and  revising  the  disappointed  dreams  of  long  ago.  Profounder  grief  than  is 
read  in  the  faces  of  bronze  and  copper  no  mourning  artist  has  wrought  nor  gloomy 
poet  written.  Below  the  jacket,  the  everlasting  blazer,  is  a liberal  width  of  cloth 
tightly  drawn  about  the  loins,  stomach  and  hips,  making  no  mistake  in  revelations 
of  the  original  outline  drawings,  or  the  flexibilities  which  the  activities  display. 
There  are  two  skirts,  an  outer  one  that  opens  in  front,  showing  the  tunic,  which  is 
of  a color  likely  to  be  gaudy  and  showing  strangely  with  the  outer  one.  The 
feet  are  exposed,  and  if  not  bare,  clothed  only  in  clumsy  slippers  with  toe  pieces,  and 
neither  heels  nor  uppers.  Women  carry  burdens  on  their  heads,  and  walk  erect 
and  posed  as  if  for  snap  photographs.  The  young  girls  are  fond  of  long  hair, 
black  as  cannel  coal,  and  streaming  in  a startling  cataract  to  the  hips.  It  seems  that 
the  crop  of  hair  is  unusually  large,  and  it  shines  with  vitality,  as  the  breeze  lifts  it 
in  the  sunshine.  The  Philippine  boys  are  still  more  lightly  clad  than  the  girls,  who 
have  an  eye  to  queer  combinations  of  colors,  and  the  revelation  of  the  lines  that 
distinguish  the  female  form  without  flagrant  disclosure.  There  is  much  Philippine 
dressing  that  may  under  all  the  surroundings  be  called  modest,  and  the  prevalent  ex- 
pression of  the  Filipino  is  that  of  fixed  but  bewildered  grief.  The  males  are  rather 


PUBLIC  BUILDINGS  IN  MANILA. 


S-OKT  WEYLER  BUJU’  GENERAL  aWEYLER  WHILE  GOVERNOR  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


THE  WHITE  UNIFORMS  OP  OUR  HEROES  IN  THE  TROPICS.  211 


careless,  and  display  unstinted  the  drawings  of  legs,  that  are  copper-colored 
and  more  uniform  in  tint  than  symmetry.  Two  or  three  rags  do  a surprisingly  ex- 
tensive service,  and  all  the  breezes  cause  the  fluttering  of  fantastic  but  scanty 
raiment.  It  is  a comfort  to  return  to  a country  where  people  wear  clothing  not 
as  a flimsy  and  inadequate  disguise.  What  will  be  the  influence  of  our  armies 
sent  to  the  tropics,  upon  the  dress  of  Americans?  It  is  a question  that  may  he 
important.  The  “wheel”  has  introduced  knickerbockers  and  promises  to  result  in 
knee  breeches.  On  the  transports  that  have  traversed  the  Pacific  the  soldiers  were 
fond  of  taking  exercise  in  undershirts  and  drawers  only  and  they  swarmed  from  their 
bunks  at  night,  to  sleep  on  deck,  sometimes  condescending  to  spread  blankets  to 
take  the  edge  off  the  cruelty  of  the  hard  wood,  but  reluctant  to  be  encumbered 
with  undershirts.  Their  favorite  night  dress  was  drawers  only,  and  they  acted 
upon  the  false  theory  that  one  cannot  take  cold  at  sea.  The  authority  of  officers 
was  often  necessary  to  impress  the  average  soldier  that  he  ought  to  have  an  under- 
shirt between  his  skin  and  the  sky.  The  boys  were  during  their  long  voyage  very 
sparing  in  the  use  of  shoes  and  stockings,  and  it  has  perhaps  never  before  oc- 
curred in  American  experiences  that  there  was  such  an  opportunity  to  study  the 
infinite  variety  of  the  big  toe,  and,  indeed,  of  all  the  toes.  In  active  army  service 
the  care  of  the  feet  is  essential.  The  revelations  on  shipboard  disclose  the  evils  of  ill- 
fitting  shoes  to  be  most  distracting.  One  of  the  claims  of  West  Point  for  high 
consideration  is  in  teaching  the  beauty  of  white  trousers,  and  our  tropical  army 
experiences  will  extend  the  fashion.  When  General  Merritt  and  Admiral  Dewey 
parted  on  the  deck  of  the  China  in  Manila  harbor,  both  were  clad  in  spotless  white, 
their  caps,  coats  and  trousers  making  a showy  combination.  There  was  also  a group 
of  sea  captains  who  had  gathered  to  give  the  Captain  of  the  China  a good  send-off, 
and  they  with  the  staff  officers,  were  all  in  radiant  white.  There  was  not  a boy 
in  blue  among  them.  The  illustrious  General  and  Admiral  reminded  me  of  Gabriel 
Ravel,  when  in  his  glory  as  The  White  Knight.  It  would  be  hard  to  say  which  wore 
the  nattier  cap,  but  that  of  the  Admiral  was  of  the  more  jaunty  cut,  while  the 
General — gold  cord  for  a band  and  gold  buttons,  especially  became  his  blue  eyes. 
If  the  officers  of  the  army,  navy  and  transports  could  be  photographed  as  they  stood 
in  dazzling  array,  as  if  hewn  from  marble,  the  fashion  plate  resulting  would  be  in- 
comparably attractive,  and  in  the  summers  to  come  we  shall  find  among  the  in- 
fluences of  our  tropical  adventure  and  possessions  a heightening  of  the  colors  worn 
by  American  ladies,  and  a whitening  of  the  suits  of  gentlemen,  involving  the  ne- 
cessity of  “calling  in”  white  coats,  as  well  as  straw  hats  on  stated  days  in  early 
September. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 

Dr.  Jose  Rizal,  the  Most  Distinguished  Literary  Man  of  the  Philippines,  Writer  of 
History,  Poetry,  Political  Pamphlets,  and  Novels,  Shot  on  the  Luneta  of 
Manila — A Likeness  of  the  Martyr — The  Scene  of  His  Execution,  from  a 
Photograph — His  Wife  Married  the  Day  Before  His  Death — Poem  Giving 
His  Farewell  Thoughts,  Written  in  His  Last  Hours — The  Works  That  Cost 
Him  His  Life — The  Vision  of  Friar  Rodriguez. 

There  is  history,  romance  and  tragedy  in  the  martyrdom  of  Dr.  Rizal,  whose  ex- 
ecution by  shooting  on  the  Luneta  two  years  ago  is  a notable  incident  of  the  cruel- 
ties of  Spanish  rule.  This  was  on  account  of  the  scholarship,  the  influence,  the 
literary  accomplishments,  and  the  personal  distinction  of  the  man.  Dr.  Rizal  was 
easily  the  foremost  writer  his  race  and  country  has  produced.  He  was  a poet,  nov- 
elist, political  essayist,  and  historian,  and  his  execution  was  for  the  crime  of  loving 
his  country,  opposing  the  Spaniards,  criticising  and  lampooning  the  priests.  He  is 
called  the  Tagalo  Martyr,  for  he  was  of  the  tribe  of  Malay  origin,  the  most  numerous 
and  rebellious  in  the  Philippine  Islands.  His  fate  was  shocking.  He  was  an  intelli- 
gent, learned  man,  an  enthusiastic  patriot,  who  had  been  educated  in  Spain  and 
France.  For  writing  a book  against  Spanish  oppression  he  was  exiled  to  the  Island 
of  Dapitan.  There  he  met  a young  woman  of  Irish  parentage,  with  whom  he  fell 
in  love.  They  were  engaged  to  be  married,  when,  on  some  pretext,  the  Doctor 
was  brought  back  to  Manila,  sent  to  Madrid  to  be  tried,  and  then  sent  back  to 
Manila.  The  unhappy  girl  to  whom  he  was  betrothed  tells  the  rest  of  the  story: 

“Everyone  knew  that  Dr.  Rizal  was  innocent.  All  that  could  be  brought  against 
him  was  the  publication  of  his  book,  and  the  Spanish  officials  who  tried  him  had 
never  even  read  it.  Nevertheless,  he  was  condemned  to  death.  I then  asked  per- 
mission to  be  married  to  him,  and  they  granted  my  request,  thinking  to  add  to 
the  horror  of  his  martyrdom.  The  marriage  was  celebrated  by  a friar  the  same  day 
on  which  he  was  sentenced.  I passed  the  whole  night  on  my  knees  in  prayer  before 
the  prison  door,  which  shut  my  husband  from  me.  When  morning  dawned,  the 
Doctor  came  out,  surrounded  by  soldiers,  his  hands  bound  behind  his  back.  They 
took  him  to  the  Luneta,  the  fashionable  promenade  of  the  city,  where  all  military 
executions  take  place.  The  lieutenant  in  command  of  the  firing  party  asked  my 

218 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


219 


husband  where  he  would  prefer  to  be  shot.  He  replied  ‘Through  the  heart.’  Tm- 
possible/  said  the  lieutenant.  ‘Such  a favor  is  granted  only  to  men  of  rank.  You 
will  be  shot  in  the  back.’  A moment  after  my  husband  was  dead.  The  soldiers 
shouted,  ‘Hurrah  for  Spain/  and  I,  ‘Hurrah  for  the  Philippines  and  death  to  Spain.’ 
I asked  for  the  body.  It  was  refused  me.  Then  I swore  to  avenge  his  death.  I 
secured  a revolver  and  dagger  and  joined  the  rebels.  They  gave  me  a Mauser  rifle, 
and  the  Philippines  will  be  free.” 

In  his  poem,  filled  with  his  last  thoughts — his  exalted  dreams  that  had  faded, 
his  patriotic  sentiments  that  were  bloody  dust  and  ashes,  his  love  for  the  woman  he 
was  allowed  to  marry  a few  hours  before  he  was  shot,  his  woeful  love  for  his  troop 
of  devoted  friends,  who  would  have  died  for  him  and  with  him  if  the  sacrifice  then 
and  there  had  not  been  hopeless — it  will  be  discovered  that  he  was  a true  poet,  and 
we  give  one  of  his  stories  that  was  hostile  to  the  orders  of  the  Church,  and  a satire 
on  Spanish  rule,  showing  why  he  was  a martyr. 

The  following  is  a prose  translation  from  the  Spanish  of  the  poem  Dr.  Rizal  wrote 
the  night  before  he  was  executed: 

MY  LAST  THOUGHTS. 

Farewell!  my  adored  country;  region  beloved  of  the  sun;  pearl  of  the  Orient 
sea;  our  lost  Eden!  I cheerfully  give  for  thee  my  saddened  life,  and  had  it  been 
brighter,  happier  and  more  rosy,  I would  as  willingly  give  it  for  thy  sake. 

Unhesitatingly  and  without  regret  others  give  thee  their  lives  in  frenzied  fight  on 
the  battlefield.  But  what  matter  the  surroundings!  Be  they  cypress,  laurel  or  lilies, 
scaffold  or  open  country,  combat  or  cruel  martyrdom,  it  is  all  the  same,  when  for 
country  and  home’s  redress. 

I die  while  watching  the  flushing  skies  announce  through  dark  mantle  the 
advent  of  a day.  Should  it  need  purple  to  tint  its  dawn,  here  is  my  blood;  I gladly 
will  shed  it  if  only  it  be  gilded  by  a ray  of  new-born  light. 

My  dreams  while  only  a boy,  and  when  of  vigor  full,  a youth,  were  always  to 
see  thee,  jewel  of  the  Orient  sea!  thy  black  eyes  dry,  thy  frownless  face  uplifted, 
and  spotless  thine  honor. 

Dream  of  my  life!  My  fervent  anxiety!  Shouts  the  soul  that  soon  is  to  depart, 
Hail!  It  is  glorious  to  fall  to  give  thee  flight;  to  die  to  give  thee  life;  to  die  under  thy 
skies,  and  in  thy  maternal  bosom  eternally  to  sleep. 

Shouldst  thou  find  some  day  over  my  grave,  a lonesome,  humble  flower,  blossom- 


220 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


ing  through  the  dense  foliage,  take  it  to  your  lips  and  kiss  my  soul.  Let  me  feel  upon 
my  forehead  under  the  cold  tomb  your  warm  and  tender  breath. 

Let  the  moon  with  her  soft  and  silent  light  watch  over  me;  let  dawn  spread 
its  fulgent  splendor;  let  the  wind  moan  with  solemn  murmur.  And  should  a bird 
descend  and  repose  upon  my  cross,  let  it  there  proclaim  a canticle  of  peace. 

Let  the  burning  sun  evaporate  the  dew,  spreading  through  space  the  notes  of  my 
songs.  Let  a friendly  being  mourn  my  early  end,  praying  on  calm  evenings,  when 
thou  also,  oh,  dear  country!  should  pray  to  God  for  me. 

Pray  for  all  those  who  died  unhonored;  for  those  who  suffered  unequaled  tor- 
ments; for  our  poor  mothers  who  silently  grieve;  for  orphans  and  for  widows;  for 
prisoners  in  torture;  and  pray  for  thyself  that  thou  mayest  attain  thy  final  re- 
demption. 

And  when  the  dark  shades  of  night  enwrap  the  cemetery,  and  the  dead  are  left 
alone  to  watch,  do  not  disturb  their  rest,  do  not  disturb  their  mystery.  Shouldst 
thou  hear  chords  of  a zither,  it  is  I,  beloved  country!  who  sings  to  thee. 

And  when  my  grave,  by  all  forgotten,  is  marked  by  neither  cross  nor  stone,  let 
the  ploughman  scatter  its  mould;  and  my  ashes  before  returning  to  nothing  will 
become  the  dust  of  your  soil. 

Then,  I will  not  mind  if  thou  castest  me  into  oblivion.  Thy  atmosphere,  thy 
Bpaee,  thy  valleys  I will  cross.  A vibrating,  limpid  note  I will  be  in  your  ear;  aroma, 
color,  rumor,  song,  a sigh,  constantly  repeating  the  essence  of  my  faith. 

My  idolized  country!  grief  of  my  griefs!  My  adored  Philippines!  Hear  my  last 
farewell.  I leave  them  all  with  thee;  my  fathers  and  my  loves.  I go  where  there 
are  no  slaves,  no  oppressors,  no  executioners;  where  faith  is  not  death;  where  He 
who  reigns  is  God. 

Farewell!  fathers  and  brothers,  parts  of  my  soul!  Friends  of  my  infancy  in  the 
lost  home.  Give  thanks  that  I should  rest  from  the  fatiguing  day.  Farewell,  sweet 
stranger,  my  friend,  my  joy.  Farewell,  beloved  beings.  To  die  is  to  rest. 

JOSE  RIZAL. 

THE  VISION  OF  FRIAR  RODRIGUEZ. 

Comfortably  seated  in  an  arm  chair  one  night,  satisfied  with  himself  as  well  as  with 
his  supper,  Friar  Jose  Rodriguez  dreamed  of  the  many  pennies  that  the  sale  of 
his  little  books  was  drawing  from  the  pockets  of  the  Filipinos,  when  suddenly,  and 
as  if  by  enchantment,  the  yellow  light  of  the  lamp  gave  a brilliant,  white  flash,  the 
air  was  filled  with  soft  perfume,  and  without  his  being  ible  to  explain  how  or 
wherefrom,  a man  appeared. 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


221 


This  was  an  old  man  of  medium  height,  dark  complected  and  thin,  whose  white 
beard  was  a contrast  to  his  glittering  vivacious  eyes,  which  gave  his  face  extreme 
animation.  Over  his  shoulder  he  wore  a long  cape;  a mitre  on  his  head  and  a crosier 
in  his  hand  gave  him  the  aspect  of  a Bishop. 

At  sight  of  him,  Friar  Rodriguez  yawning,  murmured: 

“Dreams  of  my  fertile  imagin — !” 

The  vision  did  not  permit  him  to  finish  the  exclamation,  but  gave  him  a whack 
between  the  shoulders. 

“Eh!  This  is  no  joke!”  exclaimed  Friar  Rodriguez,  stroking  with  one  hand  the 
afflicted  part  while  with  the  other  he  rubbed  his  eyes. 

“I  see!  It  is  no  dream!  But  partner!” 

Incensed  at  such  familiarity,  the  strange  personage  began  poking  Friar  Rodriguez 
severely  with  his  crosier  on  the  stomach.  The  latter,  satisfied  by  this  time  that 
the  thrashing  was  in  earnest,  exclaimed: 

“Here!  Here!  Friar  Pedro  (Peter) — Is  that  the  way  you  cancel  indulgencies? 
That  was  not  the  agreement.” 

The  strange  Bishop,  aroused  to  a high  pitch  of  anger,  stopped  his  poking  and 
started  to  knock  Friar  Rodriguez  on  the  head,  believing  it  to  be  a more  sensitive 
part.  Unfortunately,  Friar  Rodriguez’s  head  was  too  hard  for  anything,  and  the 
crosier  fell,  broken  in  two  pieces.  At  last!  said  the  poor  friar,  who,  pale  and  deadly 
frightened,  had  fallen  on  his  knees  and  was  trying  to  creep  away  on  all  fours. 

At  sight  of  his  pitiful  condition,  the  stranger  seemed  satisfied,  and,  placing  on 
a table  the  broken  crosier,  said  with  contempt: 

“Homo  sine  homine,  membra  sine  spiritu!  Et  iste  appellatur  filius  meus!” 

At  the  sound  of  that  potent  voice  and  language,  unknown  to  him,  Friar  Rod- 
riguez appeared  confounded.  The  stranger  could  not  be  Friar  Pedro  (Peter)  nor  any 
brother  in  disguise!  Impossible! 

“Et  tamen  (the  stranger  continued),  tanta  est  vanita  vestra,  ut  ante  me  Patrem 
vestrum — sed  video,  loguor  et  non  audis!” 

And  shaking  in  disgust  his  head,  the  vision  continued  speaking  in  Castillian, 
but  with  a foreign  accent. 

“And  are  you  they  who  call  themselves  my  sons?  Has  your  haughtiness  reached 
such  a degree  that  you  not  only  pretend  to  be  feared  and  worshiped  by  governors  and 
governed,  but  neither  recognize  nor  respect  me,  whose  name  you  dishonor,  and 
whose  condignity  you  abuse?  How  do  I find  you?  Insolent  with  the  unfortunate 
and  cowardly  towards  those  who  do  not  fear  you!  Surge  et  audi!” 


222 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


His  voice  was  so  imperative  and  his  command  so  expressive,  that  Friar  Rodriguez, 
although  shaking  with  tremor,  made  every  effort  to  stand  against  a corner  of  the 
room. 

Moved  by  this  proof  of  obedience,  so  rarely  found  amongst  those  who  make  a 
vow  of  humility,  the  stranger,  full  of  contempt,  repressed  a sigh  and  proceeded  in  a 
more  familiar  manner,  hut  without  losing  dignity. 

“For  you  and  for  your  nonsense  I have  been  obliged  to  leave  that  region,  and 
come  here!  And  what  trouble  I had  to  distinguish  and  find  you  amongst  the  others! 
With  hut  little  difference,  you  are  all  alike.  'Empty  heads  and  replete  stomachs!’ 
UP  THERE,  they  did  not  cease  to  tease  me  about  you  all  and  most  especially  on 
your  account.  It  was  useless  to  appear  unconcerned.  It  was  not  only  Lopez  de  Re- 
calde  (Ignatius  of  Loyole)  who  with  his  eternal  smile  and  humble  looks  made  fun 
of  me;  nor  Domingo  (Dominic)  with  his  aristocratic  pretensions  and  little  stars  of 
false  jewelry  on  his  forehead,  who  laughed  at  me;  but  even  the  great  simpleton  of 
Francisco  (Francis),  do  you  understand?  tried  to  poke  fun  at  me;  at  me,  who  has 
thought,  argued  and  written  more  than  all  of  them  together! 

“Your  order  is  great  and  powerful,”  said  Ignatius,  bending  his  head.  “It  re- 
sembles one  of  the  Egyptian  pyramids;  great  at  the  base  (you  are  the  base),  but 
the  higher  it  goes  the  smaller  it  becomes — what  a difference  between  the  base  and  the 
apex!”  he  murmured,  while  walking  away.  “Doctor,”  said  Dominic,  “why  did  you 
not  do  with  your  science  as  I did  with  the  nobility  I left  as  inheritance  to  my  sons? 
We  would  all  he  better  off!” 

“Mon  ami,  came  and  said  Francis.  If  God  should  order  me  again  to  earth,  to 
preach  as  before  amongst  brutes  and  animals,  I would  preach  in  your  convents.” 
And  after  saying  this  he  roared  in  such  a manner  that  although  small  and  thin,  it 
seemed  as  though  he  would  burst. 

“In  vain  I answered  them  that  their  sons  were  no  better  than  you  are,  and  that 
were  we  to  look  for  skeletons  in  the  closets,  we  had  better  wall  every  crevice.  But 
of  no  use.  How  could  I argue  against  three,  moreover,  having  you  to  defend!  Three, 
did  I say?  Why!  Even  Peter,  the  old  fisherman,  attracted  by  the  laughter,  left 
his  porter’s  lodge  and  came  to  upbraid  me  for  the  trick  you  have  played  on  his 
priests,  taking  away  from  them  all  their  parishes,  regardless  of  the  fact  that  they 
had  been  in  these  islands  long  before  you,  and  that  they  were  the  first  to  baptise 
in  Cebu  and  in  Luzon. 

"Of  course,”  he  said,  “as  my  sons  are  lazy  and  in  dissension  among  themselves, 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


223 


and  yours  lie  and  stout  louder,-  they  make  themselves  believed  by  the  ignorant.  But 
I shall  be  glad  when  my  descendants  are  extinct.” 

“And  so  shall  I!  And  I!  I wish  it  was  all  over  with  mine!”  shouted  at  once  sev- 
eral voices. 

“But  old  Peter’s  revenge  did  not  stop  at  that.  Yesterday  he  played  a hard  joke 
on  me.  He  not  only  confiscated  a package  that  a Tagalo  (*)  brought  with  him, 
but  instead  of  directing  him  to  the  imbecile’s  department,  he  took  him  where  we 
all  were.  The  poor  Tagalo  carried  with  him  a large  collection  of  little  hooks  written 
by  you,  which  were  given  him  by  his  Priest,  who  told  him  they  represented  so  much 
indulgency  for  his  next  life.  As  soon  as  the  Indian  had  arrived  everyone  UP 
THERE  knew  he  had  brought  books  written  by  an  Augustinian  monk,  and  they 
were  snatched  away.  I tried  to  hide  myself,  hut  I could  not.  What  laughter  and 
what  jokes!  The  little  angels  came  in  a body;  the  Celestial  Father’s  Orchestra  lost 
its  time;  the  Virgins,  instead  of  watching  their  music  sheets  read  the  hooks  and  sang 
most  discordantly,  and  even  old  Anthony’s  little  pig  began  grunting  and  twisting 
his  tail. 

“I  felt  ashamed;  I could  see  every_  one  point  their  finger  at  me  and  laugh. 
But,  in  spite  of  all  this  Zarathustra,  the  grave  and  serious  Zarathustra,  did  not 
laugh.  With  a humiliating  pride  he  asked  me: 

“ Ts  that  your  son,  he  who  pretends  that  my  religion  is  paganish,  and  that  I 
am  a pagan?  Have  your  sons  degenerated  to  such  a degree  as  to  confound  my  pure 
religion,  root  of  the  most  perfect  creeds,  with  Polytheism  and  Idolatry?  Do  they 
know  that  paganism  is  derived  from  pagani,  which  means  inhabitant  of  the  fields, 
who  always  were  faithful  to  the  Greek  and  Roman  Polytheism?  You  may  answer 
that  they  do  not  know  Latin!  If  so,  make  then  speak  more  modestly.  Tell  them 
that  paganus  comes  from  pagus,  from  which  the  words  pages,  payes,  paien,  paese,  pais 
(country),  are  derived.  Tell  those  unfortunate  that  the  Zend-Avesta  religion  was 
never  professed  by  the  rural  inhabitants  of  the  Roman  country.  Tell  them  that  my 
religion  is  monotheist,  even  more  so  than  the  Roman  Catholic  religion,  which  not 
only  accepted  the  dualism  of  my  creed,  but  has  deified  several  creatures.  Tell  them 
that  Paganism  in  its  widest  and  most  corrupted  sense,  duly  meant  Polytheism; 
that  neither  my  religion  nor  that  of  Moses  nor  Mohammed  were  ever  Pagan  religions. 
Tell  them  to  read  your  own  works,  where  in  every  page  you  refer  to  the  Pagans.  Re- 
peat to  them  that  which  you  said  in  speaking  of  the  religion  of  the  Manechees  (a 

(*)  Tagalo. — Name  of  one  of  the  tribes  of  Indians  inhabiting  the  Philippine 
Islands. — Trans.  Note. 


224 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


corruption  of  my  doctrine  by  you  professed)  which  influenced  your  works  and  prevails 
yet  in  your  religion,  and  which  at  one  time  caused  the  Roman  Catholic  Church 
to  vacillate.  YYs;  I linked  the  principle  of  Good  and  Evil  together — Ahura-Mazda; 
God!  But  this  is  not  to  admit  of  two  Gods,  as  you,  yourself  said.  To  speak  of  health 
and  sickness  is  not  to  admit  two  healths.  And  what?  Have  they  not  copied  my 
principle  of  evil  in  Satan,  prince  of  darkness?  Tell  them  that  if  they  do  not  know 
Latin  to  at  least  study  the  religions,  since  they  fail  to  recognize  the  true  one!’ 

“Thus  spoke  Zarathustra,  or  Zoroaster.  Then,  Voltaire — Voltaire,  who  had  heard 
what  you  were  saying  about  his  death,  accosted  me,  and  grasping  me  by  the  hand, 
effusively  thanked  me. 

“‘Why  so?’  I asked  him. 

“‘Your  sons,  mon  cher  Docteur  de  l’Eglise,’  he  answered,  ‘have  proved  and  con- 
tinue proving  by  facts,  that  which  I maintained.  And  what  was  it  that  you  main- 
tained? That  besides  being  ignorant,  they  were  liars. 

“To  this  I could  not  reply,  for  he  was  right.  You  should  know  that  he  died  when 
84  years  of  age,  possessed  of  all  his  faculties,  and  with  so  lucid  a mind  that  when 
nearing  his  end  and  being  importuned  to  make  confession,  he  said:  ‘Let  me  die  in 
peace’ — and  died.  But  the  worst  of  it  all  is,  that  Voltaire  has  been  pleading  with 
God  to  take  you  to  Heaven  alive  and  clothed,  and  when  asked  why  so,  he  answered 
‘So  that  we  may  have  some  fun.’ 

“On  learning  of  all  the  indulgences  that  the  Archbishop  had  allowed  on  your 
books,  to  allure  buyers,  old  Peter,  thumping  his  bald  head,  exclaimed: 

“ ‘Why  did  I not  think  of  granting  indnlgencies  with  the  fish  I sold,  when  a 
fisherman?  We  would  have  been  rich,  and  Judas,  instead  of  selling  the  Master, 
would  have  sold  sardines  and  tinapa!  (* *)  I would  not  have  been  obliged  to  cowardly 
apostatize,  and  would  not  have  suflered  martyrdom.  Verily,  I say,  that  my  friend 
down  BELOW  leaves  me  behind  in  the  matter  of  knowing  how  to  make  money; 
and  yet  I am  a Jew.’ 

“ ‘Of  course,  don’t  you  know  that  your  friend  BELOV  is  a Gallego.'’  (*)  Said  a 


(*)  Tinapa.— Small  white-bait  fish,  which,  mixed  with  rice,  constitutes  the  daily 
diet  of  the  lower  class  of  natives  in  the  Philippine  Islands. — Irans.  Xote. 

(*)  Gallego. — Native  of  Galicia,  northwestern  Province  in  Spain.  On  account 
of  their  healthy  and  robust  constitution,  the  lower  class  of  Gallego  are  found  em- 
ployed in  the  hardest  work  throughout  the  country,  where  physical  strength  is  nec- 
essary, although  they  are  considered  slow  and  lazy.  Their  predominant  charac- 
teristic seems  to  be  an  insatiable  greed  of  hoarding  money.  Trans.  Xote. 


THE  DESTRUCTION  OF  CERVERA’S  SQUADRON  AT  SANTIAGO. 


THE  LUNETA FAVORITE  OUTING  GROUNDS  OF  MANILA,  AND  A PLACE  FOR  EXECUTING  INSURGENTS- 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


227 


little  old  man  who  had  been  UP  THERE  but  a few  years.  His  name  was  Tasio, 
and,  addressing  himself  to  me,  he  continued: 

“'You  are  a great  Doctor,  and  although  you  have  contradicted  yourself  many 
times,  I hold  you  as  a privileged  character  of  vast  erudition,  for,  having  written 
your  books,  Retractationum,  and  Confesiones;  and  since  you  are  so  different  from 
your  sons  who  try,  when  defending  themselves,  to  make  black  appear  white,  and 
white  green,  I will  state  my  complaints,  so  that  you,  as  their  Father,  may  put  a 
stop  to  it  all. 

“ 'There  exists  on  earth  an  unfortunate,  who,  amongst  many  foolish  acts,  has 
committed  the  following: 

" '1st.  He  holds  solidary  of  all  that  I have  said  during  my  earthly  life,  an  Indian 
called  Rizal,  only  because  said  Indian  has  quoted  my  words  in  a book  that  he  wrote. 
As  you  can  see,  should  we  follow  such  a system  of  reasoning,  Rizal  would  also 
agree  with  the  views  expressed  by  friars,  policemen,  etc.,  and  you,  yourself,  Holy 
Doctor,  would  also  be  solidary  of  all  that  you  ascribe  to  heretics,  Pagans,  and  above 
all,  to  Manichees. 

''  '2nd.  He  wants  me  to  think  as  he  himself  does,  since  he  quotes  me  as  saying 
‘The  Bible  and  the  Holy  Gospel.’  It  may  be  well  that  he,  as  all  fanatics,  should 
believe  that  these  are  one  and  the  same  thing.  But  I,  having  studied  the  original 
Hebraic  Bible,  know,  that  it  does  not  contain  the  Gospel.  That  the  Jewish  Bible, 
being  a history  of  creation,  treasure  and  patrimony  of  Jewish  people,  the  Jews,  who 
do  not  accept  the  Gospel,  should  be  authority.  That  as  the  Latin  translation  is 
incorrect,  the  Catholics  could  not  lay  down  the  Law,  notwithstanding  their  habit  of 
appropriating  everything  to  themselves,  and  of  misconstruing  to  their  advantage 
the  translation  of  the  original  text.  Besides,  the  Gospels,  with  the  exception  of  that 
written  by  Saint  Mathew,  were  written  in  Greek  later  than  the  Bible,  and  conflict 
in  every  respect  with  the  Law  of  Moses,  as  proved  by  the  enemitv  between  Jews 
and  Christians.  How,  then,  could  I,  knowing  all  this,  express  myself  as  a fanatic,  or 
as  an  ignorant  monk?  I do  not  exact  from  any  monk  the  speech  of  a free-thinker 
and  therefore,  they  should  not  exact  that  I express  myself  as  a monk  would.  Why 
do  they  want  me  to  consolidate  under  one  name  two  distinct  things,  which, 
to  a certain  extent  contradict  each  other?  Let  the  Christians  do  so. 
but  I must  not,  and  cannot.  If  I call  them  separately,  it  is  in 
accordance  with  the  thought  inspiring  two  works,  two  legislations,  two  religions, 
on  which  they  want  to  found  the  Catholic  Religion.  Your  son,  moreover,  reasons 


228 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


finely,  when  he  says:  T did  not  know  that  the  Gospels  were  different  from  the 
Bible,  and  not  a principal  part  of  it.’  Tell  him,  Holy  Father,  that  in  every  country 
a part,  no  matter  how  principal  may  it  he,  is  always  different  from  the  whole,  for  in- 
stance: The  principal  thing  in  Friar  Rodriguez  is  his  habit;  but  his  habit  is  dif- 
ferent from  Friar  Rodriguez,  as  otherwise  there  would  be  one  dirty  Friar  Rodriguez, 
another  shining,  another  creased,  another  wide,  short,  long,  greasy,  etc.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  habit  is  different  from  the  monk,  because  a piece  of  cloth,  no  matter  how 
dirty,  could  never  be  presumptuous,  despotic,  ignorant  or^obseurautistic. 

“‘3d.  To  prove  the  existence  of  a Purgatory,  he  quotes:  ‘Saint  Mathew  says  in 

Chapter  twelfth,  thirty-sixth  verse .’  But  he  quotes  wrongly,  as  from  that  verse 

cannot  be  derived  the  existence  of  a Purgatory,  nor  anything  of  its  kind.  The  He- 
brew text  says:  ‘Wa  ’ebif  ’omar  lakam  kij  ’al  kal  abar  reg  ashar  idabbru  ’abaschim 
yittbu  heschboun  biom  hammisehphat’;  the  Greek  text,  ‘Lego  de  hynun  hote  pan 
rema  argon,  ho  ean  lalesosin  hoi  anthropoi,  apodosousi  peri  auton  logon  en  liemera 
kriseos.’  All  these  translated  into  Latin  say:  ‘Dicto  autem  vobis,  quoniam  omne 
verbum  otiosum  quod  locuti  fuerint  homines,  reddent  rationem  dc  eo  in  die  judicii,’ 
which,  translated  into  English  means,  ‘AND  I SAY  TO  YOU,  THAT  ON  THE 
DAY  OF  JUDGMENT,  MEN  SHALL  HAVE  TO  ACCOUNT  FOR  EVERY 
IDLE  WORD.’  From  all  these  texts,  you  can  see,  Holy  Doctor,  that  the  only  thing 
to  be  derived  is  that  on  the  Day  of  Judgment,  Friar  Rodriguez  will  have  to  give 
such  an  account  of  himself,  that  very  likely  it  will  take  him  two  days  to  account  for 
all  the  nonsense  lie  has  said. 

“ ‘I  imagine  that  your  son,  instead  of  the  thirty-sixth  verse,  meant  to  quote  the 
thirty-  second,  which  says:  “And  all  who  shall  say  word  against  the  son  of  man 
will  be  forgiven;  but  he  who  says  word  against  the  Holy  Ghost,  shall  not  be  par- 
doned; neither  in  this  life  nor  in  the  next.”  From  this  they  have  tried  to  derive  the 
existence  of  a Purgatory.  What  a fertile  imagination! 

“ ‘4th.  Because  Saint  Ireneus,  St.  Clement  of  Alexandria,  and  Origcnes,  three  in 
all,  although  not  being  the  first  Christian,  had  some  remote  idea  of  Purgatory,  it 
does  not  follow  that  the  Christians  of  the  first  century  did  believe  in  it,  unless 
it  could  be  previously  established  that  throe  persons  represent  a totality,  even  if 
amongst  such  a totality  existed,  contradictory  ideas.  But,  as  a proof  that  wa$  it  not 
so,  you,  yourself,  Holy  Doctor,  being  their  father,  having  flourished  in  the  fourth  and 
fifth  century,  and  supposed  to  be  the  greatest  amongst  the  Fathers  of  the  Church, 
denied  most  emphatically,  in  various  instances,  the  existence  of  a Purgatory.  In 
your  CCXCV  cermon,  beginning  by:  ‘Frecuenter  charitatem  vestra,’  etc.,  you  said 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


229 


very  decidedly:  ‘Nemo  se  slecipiat  fratres;  DUO  enim  LOCA  sunt  et  TER1US  non 
est  ullus.  Qui  cum  Christo  reguare  non  meruerit,  cum  diabolo  ABSQUE  DUBITA- 
TIONE  ULLA  perebit.’  This  translated  means,  ‘Do  not  deceive  yourselves,  breth- 
ren; there  are  but  two  places  for  the  soul  and  there  is  no  third  place.  He  who 
should  not  deserve  to  live  with  Christ,  UNDOUBTEDLY  will  perish.’ 

“ ‘Further  on,  in  de  Consolatione  mortuorum,  you  say:  ‘Sed  recedus  anima  quoe 
carnalibus  oculis  non  videtur,  ab  angelis  susciptur  et  collocatur,  aut  in  sinu,  Abrahae, 
si  fidelis  est,  aut  in  carcerio  inferni  custodia  si  pcccatrix  est.’  This  means,  ‘But 
at  the  departure  of  that  soul  which  the  eyes  of  the  flesh  cannot  see,  the  angels 
will  receive  and  carry  it  to  the  Bosom  of  Abraham,  if  it  has  been  faithful;  or  to 
Hell,  if  sinful.’  On  the  other  hand,  I could  quote  a large  number  of  your  own 
texts  showing  that  for  you,  Purgatory  was  not  an  impossibility.  Add  to  all  this  what 
Saint  Fulgentius,  who  flourished  after  you  during  the  fifth  and  sixth  century,  says 
in  Chapter  XIV.,  of  his  ‘de  incarnalione  et  gratia,’  etc.:  ‘Quicumque  regnum  Dei 
non  ingreditur,  poenis  oeternis  crueiatur.’  That  is  to  say,  ‘He  who  could  not  enter 
the  Kingdom  of  God,  will  suffer  eternal  punishment.’ 

“ ‘5th.  Your  son  either  cannot  read,  or  else  acts  in  bad  faith;  otherwise,  how  could 
he,  from  my  estatement,  ‘The  Protestants  DO  NOT  BELIEVE  in  it;  neither  do 
the  Greek  Fathers,  because  they  miss,’  etc.,  try  to  make  ‘The  Greek  Fathers  DID 
NOT  believe  in  a Purgatory?’ 

“ ‘How  could  he  deduct  from  a present,  a past  tense  and  twist  the  sentences  to 
make  from  it  ‘The  Holy  Greek  Fathers?’ 

“ ‘I  used  ‘BELIEVE,’  the  present  tense,  although  in  my  time  the  HOLY  GREEK 
FATHERS  did  not  exist,  but  simply  the  fathers  belonging  to  the  Greek  Church. 
Moreover,  as  I was  following  an  historical  order,  how  could  I refer  to  the  Protest- 
ants, first,  and  to  the  HOLY  GREEK  FATHERS  afterwards,  who  believed  what 
they  wished,  and  who  at  the  time  of  my  earthly  life  were  a past  to  me? 

“ ‘And  enwrapped  in  such  bad  faith,  he  dares  to  qualify  as  a slanderer,  imposter 
and  ignoramus,  the  man  who  only  quoted  me! 

“ ‘But  such  proceeding  is  worthy  of  Friar  Rodriguez,  who,  following  his  system 
of  confusing  a part  with  the  whole,  tries  to  condemn  another’s  book,  and  mistakes 
the  rays  of  the  sun  for  the  sun  itself,  all  with  the  purpose  of  slandering  the  author 
and  calling  him  Freemason. 

“ ‘Tell  me,  Holy  Doctor,  after  what  I have  told  you,  who  is  the  real  ignoramus,  im- 
postor and  slanderer? 

“ ‘6th.  Instead  of  accusing  others  of  ignorance,  and  presuming  to  know  every- 


280 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OP  SPEECH. 


thing,  he  should  he  careful,  because  he  has  not  even  read  your  books,  notwith- 
standing you  are  his  father,  and  that  it  is  his  duty  to  know  what  you  have  said. 
Should  he  have  done  so,  he  would  neither  have  written  so  much  nonsense  nor  would 
he  have  shoun  the  shallowness  of  his  knowledge,  which,  by  the  way,  he  derives 
fiom  some  little  books,  which,  to  propagate  and  maintain  obscurantism,  were 
published  in  Cataluna,  (*)  by  Sarda  y Salvany.’- 

d hus  v as  old  Tasio  expressing  himself,  when  the  voice  of  the  Almighty  was 
heard  summoning  me  to  His  presence. 

“Trembling,  I approached,  and  prostrated  myself  at  His  feet.’ 

Go  to  Earth,  said  the  voice,  'and  tell  those  who  call  themselves  your  sons  that 
I,  having  created  millions  of  suns,  around  which,  thousands  of  worlds,  inhabited  by 
millions  of  millions  of  beings,  created  by  my  infinite  Mercy,  gyrate,  cannot  be  an 
instrument  to  the  fulfilment  of  a few  ungrateful  creatures’  passions,  simply  handfuls 
of  dust  caried  away  by  a gust  of  wind;  insignificant  particles  of  the  inhabitants  of 
one  of  my  smallest  worlds! 

“Tell  them  that  my  Name  must  not  be  used  to  extend  the  misery  or  ignor- 
ance of  their  brothers,  nor  shall  they  restrain  in  my  Name,  intelligence  and  thought, 
which  I created  free.  That  they  must  not  commit  abuses  in  my  Name,  cause  a 
tear,  nor  a single  drop  of  blood  to  be  shed.  That  they  must  not  represent  me  as 
being  cruel,  revengeful,  subject  to  their  whims  and  executor  of  their  will.  Not 
to  represent  me,  The  Fountain  of  Goodness,  as  a tyrant,  or  an  unkind  Father, 
pretending  that  they  are  the  only  possessors  of  Light  and  Eternal  Life.  How?  I, 
who  have  given  to  each  being  air,  light,  life  and  love,  that  he  may  be  happy,  could 
I deny  to  one  of  the  most  transcendental,  true  happiness,  for  the  sake  of  others?  Im- 
pious! Absurd!  Tell  them  that  I,  who  am  All,  and  apart  from  whom  nothing 
exists,  nor  could  exist,  I have  not  and  cannot  have  enemies.  Nothing  equals  me, 
and  no  one  can  oppose  my  will! 

“ Tell  them  that  their  enemies  are  not  my  enemies;  that  I have  never  identi- 
fied Myself  with  them,  and  that  their  maxims  are  vain,  insensible,  blasphemous! 
Toll  them  that  I pardon  error,  but  punish  iniquity;  that  I will  forgive  a sin  against 
me,  but  will  prosecute  those  who  should  torture  an  unfortunate.  That  being  in- 
finitely Powerful,  all  the  sins  of  all  the  inhabitants  of  all  the  worlds,  thousands 
of  times  centuplicated,  can  never  dim  an  atom  of  my  glory.  But  the  least  in- 
jury to  the  poor  and  oppressed  I will  punish,  for  I have  not  created  man  to  make 
him  unhappy  nor  the  victim  of  his  brothers.  I am  the  Father  of  all  existent;  I 


(*)  Cataluna. — Province  of  Spain,  which  capital  is  Barcelona. — Trans.  Note^ 


4PMIBAL  DEWEY’S  FLEET  THAT  WON  THE  BATTLE  OF  MANILA  BAYi 


THE  MONUMENT  OF  MAGELUNOS  IN  THE  WALLED  CITY. 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


233 


know  the  destiny  of  every  atom;  let  me  love  all  men,  whose  miseries  and  needs  I 
know.  Let  each  one  perform  his  duty,  that  I,  The  God  of  Mercy,  know  my  own 
will.’ 

“Thus  spoke  the  Almighty;  and  I came  here  to  fulfill  his  command.  Now, 
I say  to  you: 

“That  the  miseries  of  the  unhappy  Indian  whom  you  have  impoverished  and 
stupefied,  have  reached  the  Throne  of  the  Highest.  THERE  have  arrived  so  many 
intelligences  obscured  and  impaired  by  you!  The  cry  of  so  many  exiles,  tortured,  and 
killed  at  your  instigation!  The  tears  of  so  many  mothers  and  the  miseries  of  so 
many  orphans,  combined  with  the  noise  of  your  orgies!  Know  that  there  is  a God, 
(perhaps  you  doubt  His  existence,  and  only  use  His  name  to  advance  your  ends) 
who  will  some  day  call  you  to  account  for  all  your  iniquities.  Know  that  He  needs 
not  the  money  of  the  poor,  nor  is  it  necessary  to  worship  Him  by  burning  candles 
and  incense,  saying  masses  or  believing  blindly  what  others  say,  contrary  to  common 
sense. 

“No!  His  luminary  is  greater  than  your  own  sun;  His  flowers  more  fragrant 
than  those  on  earth.  He  suffices  to  Himself.  He  created  intelligence  for  no  sub- 
servient purpose;  but  that  with  its  use,  man  could  be  happy  in  raising  himself  to 
Him.  He  needs  no  one.  He  created  man,  not  for  His  sake,  but  for  man’s  own.  He 
is  happy  for  all  eternity! 

“You  obstinately  uphold  the  existence  of  a Purgatory,  using  even  the  most  ig- 
noble weapons  and  means  to  defend  your  belief.  Why,  instead  of  wasting  your  time 
in  affirming  the  existence  of  that  which  you  never  saw,  do  you  not  preach  and 
practice  love  and  charity  amongst  yourselves?  Why  not  preach  words  of  comfort 
and  hope,  to  somewhat  soothe  the  miseries  of  life,  instead  of  frightening  your 
brothers  by  tales  of  future  punishment?  Why?  Because  Christ’s  True  Doctrine 
would  bring  you  no  earthly  wealth,  and  all  that  you  look  for  is  gold,  and  gold! 
And  to  satisfy  your  end  and  bleed  the  timid  souls,  of  money,  you  have  invented  a 
Purgatory!  Why  afflict  orphans  and  widows  with  dreadful  tales'  of  the  next  life, 
only  to  extort  from  them  a few  cents?  Have  you  forgotten  what  the  Apostle  said? 
‘Nolo  vos  ignorare,  fratres,  de  dormientibus,  ut  non  c-ontristenuni,  sicut  qui  spem 
non  habent,’  which  means,  ‘T  do  not  wish  you  to  ignore,  brethren,  that  which  con- 
cerns those  who  sleep,  that  you  may  not  be  saddened,  like  those  who  have  lost  all 
hope.’  Also,  that  I,  myself,  have  said?  ‘Hoec  enim  est  Christianoe  fidei  summa; 
vitam  veram  expectare  post  mortem,’  that  is  ‘Here  is  then  the  summary  of  the  Chris- 
tian faith:  to  hope  for  a true  life  after  death.’  But  you,  lacking  in  charity,  and  for 


234 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


a vile,  greedy  interest,  live  in  opposition  to  Christ,  and  pretend  to  be  able  to  mould 
Divine  Judgment.  All  the  strength  of  your  philosophy  seems  to  be  derived  from 
your  own  theory,  which  denies  the  existence  of  souls  sufficiently  sinners  to  be  con- 
demned, or  pure  enough  to  enter  the  Kingdom  of  God!  By  whose  authority  do  you 
pretend  to  oppose  the  judgment  of  Him  who  weighs  and  considers  the  smallest 
thought?  Who  knows  it  is  impossible  to  expect  perfection  from  beings  made  of 
clay,  subject  to  the  miseries  and  oppressions  of  earthly  life?  Who  told  you  that 
He  will  judge  as  you,  with  your  narrow,  limited  intelligence,  do?  That  the  miseries 
of  this  life  are  not  expiations  of  sins? 

“Cease  in  your  avaricious  hoarding  of  wealth!  You  have  now  enough.  Do  not 
wrench  from  the  poor  his  last  mouthful  of  bread. 

“Remember  what  Saint  Fulgentius  said:  Tit  si  mithetur  in  stagnum  ignis  et 

sulphuris  qui  nudum  vestimento  non  tegit,  quid  passures  est  qui  vestimento  crudelis 
expoliat?  Et  si  rerum  suarem  avarus  possessor  requiem  non  habebit,  quomodo 
aliaenarum  rerum  insatiabilis  raptor?’  Meaning,  ‘And  if  he  who  never  clothed  the 
naked  is  sent  to  the  pond  of  fire  and  sulphur,  where  will  he,  who  cruelly  stripped 
them,  go?  And  if  the  greedy  possessor  of  his  own  wealth  may  never  rest,  how 
shall  it  be  with  the  thief,  insatiable  in  his  greed  for  the  wealth  of  others?’ 

“Preach  then,  the  religion  of  nope  and  Promises,  as  you,  above  all,  are  in  need  of 
pardon  and  forgiveness.  Do  not  speak  of  rigor,  nor  condemn  others,  lest  God  should 
hear  and  judge  you  according  to  the  laws  by  you  formulated.  Bear  always  in  mind 
Christ’s  words,  ‘Vae  vobis  scribae  et  Pharisae  hypocrite  qui  clauditis  regnum  coel- 
orum  ante  homines;  vos  non  intratis,  nee  introeunts  sinitis  intrare!’  This  means, 
’Woe  to  you,  Scribes  and  Pharisees,  who  close  to  men  the  Kingdom  of  God,  and 
neither  enter  nor  allow  others  to  enter!’ 

“Now,  to  you  personally,  I will  say:  You  are  an  unfortunate  fool,  who  speak 
numberless  absurdities,  although  I could  not  expect  aught  else  from  you,  and  would 
not  punish  you  for  them.  But  you  have  had  the  audacity  of  not  only  insulting 
others,  by  which  you  forgot  truth  and  charity,  but  praised  yourself  and  called  at- 
tention to  your  own  praise. 

“Referring  to  yourself,  you  said.  This  Father,  whom  I well  know  (liar,  you  do 
not  even  know  yourself),  although  he  may  appear  a little  hard  headed  (a  little  hard- 
headed?  Ask  my  crosier  if  your  head  is  not  harder  than  stone),  never  speaks  in 
vain  (this  is  true;  every  word  you  say  causes  as  much  laughter  on  earth  as  in 
Heaven),  nor  uses  words  without  first  thinking  (if  such  is  true,  your  intelligence  is 
very  limited). 


A MARTYR  TO  THE  LIBERTY  OF  SPEECH. 


235 


“For  such  foolish  vanity  I ought  to  punish  you  severely,  so  that  you  would  stop 
forever  your  senseless  writings,  saving  me  the  trouble  of  coming  to  reprimand  you 
at  every  instance. 

“Were  I to  judge  you  according  to  your  own  theory,  you  should  at  least  go 
to  your  Purgatory.  But,  after  all,  you  are  not  so  had,  as  many  learned  persons  are 
made  to  laugh  at  your  writings. 

“It  would  he  well  for  your  pride  if  you  allowed  the  Indians  to  pass  by  you  without 
taking  off  their  hats  or  kissing  your  hand.  But  then,  they  would  be  imprisoned 
or  exiled,  and  it  would  not  do  to  increase  the  wrong  you  do  them. 

“Shall  I make  you  lame  and  dumb?  Ho!  Your  brothers  would  claim  it  was  a 
trial  of  your  forbearance,  to  which  God  had  submitted  you.  Ho;  you  won’t  catch  me 
on  that! 

“What  shall  I do  with  you?” 

The  old  Bishop  meditated  for  a few  moments,  and  then,  he  exclaimed: 

“Ah!  How  I know!  Your  own  sin  shall  be  your  punishment! 

“I  condemn  you  to  continue  saying  and  writing  nonsense  for  the  rest  of  your 
life,  so  that  the  world  may  laugh  at  you,  and  also,  that  on  the  Day  of  Judgment 
you  may  be  judged  according  to  your  deserts!” 

“Amen!”  replied  Friar  Rodriguez. 

The  vision  then  disappeared;  the  light  of  the  lamp  regained  its  yellowish  flame, 
and  the  soft  perfume  dispersed. 

On  the  following  day  Friar  Rodriguez  started  writing  greater  nonsense,  with  re- 
newed energy. 

Amen! 

JOSE  RIZAL. 

Note. — The  foregoing  admirable  translations  from  the  writings  o±  Dr.  Rizal  were 
made  by  Mr.  F.  M.  de  Rivas,  of  Chicago. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


No  Mystery  About  the  Cause  of  the  War — The  Expected  and  the  Inevitable  Has 
Happened — The  Tragedy  of  the  Maine — Vigilant  Wisdom  of  President  Mc- 
Kinley— Dewey’s  Prompt  Triumph — The  Battles  at  Manila  and  Santiago 
Compared — General  Shatter  Tells  of  the  Battle  of  Santiago — Report  of  Wain- 
w right  Board  on  Movements  of  Sampson’s  Fleet  in  the  Destruction  of  Cer- 
vera’s  Squadron — Stars  and  Stripes  Raised  Over  Port©  Rico — American  and 
Spanish  Fleets  at  Manila  Compared. — Text  of  Peace  Protocol. 

The  war  between  Spain  and  the  United  States  was  a long  time  coming,  and  there 
is  no  more  mystery  about  its  cause  than  doubt  as  to  its  decisions.  It  was  foretold 
in  every  chapter  of  the  terrible  stories  of  the  conflicts  between  the  Spaniards  and 
their  colonists,  largely  of  their  blood,  in  Central  and  South  America.  The  causes 
of  war  in  Cuba,  and  the  conduct  of  warfare  by  Spain  in  that  island  were  the  same 
that  resulted  in  revolutionary  strife  in  Mexico  and  Peru,  and,  indeed,  all  the  na- 
tions in  the  Americas  that  once  were  swayed  by  the  sovereignty  of  Spain.  The  last 
of  the  islands  of  the  Spanish  possessions  in  the  hemisphere  introduced  to  the  civil- 
ized world  by  Columbus  were  lost  by  the  western  peninsula  of  Europe,  symbolized 
and  personified  in  the  Crown,  as  the  first  crumbling  fragments  of  the  colonial  em- 
pires of  Spain  fell  away  from  her.  Only  in  the  case  of  Cuba  there  was  the  direct 
intervention  of  the  United  States  to  establish  “a  stable  government”  in  the  distracted 
island,  desolated  by  war,  pestilence  and  famine,  that  had  evolved  conditions,  of  terri- 
ble misery  incurable  from  within,  and  of  inhumane  oppression  that  should  be  re- 
sented by  all  enlightened  people.  It  had  long  been  realized  by  the  thoughtful  men 
of  Spain  capable  of  estimating  the  currents  of  events,  that  the  time  must  come,  and 
was  close  at  hand,  when  the  arms  of  the  United  States  would  be  directed  to  the 
conquest  of  Cuba.  It  was  not  only  in  the  air  that  this  was  to  be,  it  was.  written  in 
the  history  of  Spanish  America,  and  more  than  that,  there  was  not  an  Atlas  that 
did  not  proclaim  in  the  maps  of  the  continents  of  the  V estern  world,  that  Cuba  would 
and  in  the  largest  sense  of  right  should,  become  a part  of  the  United  States,  and 
must  do  so  in  order  to  be  redeemed  from  the  disabilities  deeply  implanted,  and 
released  from  having  the  intolerable  burdens  imposed  by  the  rule  of  Spain.  The 
consciousness  of  the  Spaniards,  that  the  shadow  of  the  United  States  lowered  over  the 
misgovern ment  of  Cuba,  and  that  there  was  a thunder-cloud  in  the  north  that 

236 


EVENTS  OE  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAP. 


237 


must  burst — with  more  than  the  force  of  the  hurricanes  that  spin  on  their  dizzy  way 
of  destruction  from  the  Caribbean  Sea — aroused  the  fury  of  passion,  of  jealous 
hatred  and  thirst  for  revenge,  in  anticipation  of  the  inevitable,  that  caused  the  catas- 
trophe of  the  blowing  up  of  the  Maine,  and  kindled  with  the  flame  of  the  explosion, 
the  conflagration  of  warfare  in  the  Indies  West  and  East,  that  has  reddened  the 
seas  and  the  skies  with  the  blood  of  Spain  and  the  glow  of  America’s  victory  both 
in  the  Antilles  and  the  Philippines,  wiping  from  the  face  of  the  earth  the  last 
vestiges  of  the  colonial  imperialism  of  Spain  that  gave  her  mediaeval  riches  and 
celebrity,  for  which — as  the  system  always  evil  became  hideous  with  malignant 
growth,  so  that  each  colony  was  a cancer  on  the  mother  country — there  has  been 
exacted  punishment  of  modern  poverty,  and  finally  the  humiliation  of  the  haughty, 
with  no  consolation  for  defeat,  but  the  fact  that  in  desperate  and  forlorn  circum- 
stances there  were  seen  glimpses  of  the  ancient  valor  in  Spanish  soldiers,  that  was 
once  their  high  distinction  among  the  legions  of  embattled  Europe. 

The  United  States  was  not  ready  for  war.  Our  regular  army  was  a 16  to  120  Span- 
ish troops  in  Cuba,  our  field  guns  1 to  6 of  Blanco’s  batteries,  our  siege  train  no- 
where, and  fortified  cities  to  assail;  and  the  ability  and  industry  of  the  Spaniards 
as  well  as  their  skill  and  strength  in  surveying  and  fortifying  military  lines,  and  their 
food  resources  were  dangerously  undervalued.  The  war  was  rushed  upon  the  coun- 
try, contrary  to  the  calm  executive  judgment  of  the  President.  The  army  and  navy 
were  admirable  but  faulty  in  hasty  equipment,  the  navy  a perfect  machine  in  itself, 
but  without  docks  and  arsenals  in  the  right  place  for  the  supply  of  a fleet  in  the 
old  battle  field  of  European  navies,  the  West  Indies.  The  energies  of  the  Govern- 
ment were  put  forth  as  soon  as  the  war  was  seriously  threatened,  and  the  mighty 
people  arose  and  swiftly  as  the  aptitudes  of  Americans  in  emergencies  could  be  applied, 
deficiencies  were  supplied.  The  first  stroke  of  arms  came  as  a dazzling  flash  from  the 
far  southwest,  in  the  story  of  the  smashing  victory  of  Dewey  at  Manila.  That 
splendid  officer,  gentleman  and  hero  did  not  signal  his  fleet  as  Nelson  at  Trafalgar, 
that  every  man  was  expected  to  do  his  duty,  but  he  reported  that  every  man  did 
his  duty;  and  the  East  Indian  fleet  of  Spain  vanished,  smashed,  burned  and  sunken 
by  a thunderbolt!  The  theory  of  war  countenanced  by  the  impetuous  and  demanded 
by  the  presumptuous,  was  that  our  aggressive  forces  must  attack  Havana.  In  and 
around  that  city  were  an  enormous  garrison,  abundant  military  stores,  forty  miles’ 
of  trenches  defended  by  sixty  thousand  men;  and  far  more  to  be  dreaded  the  deadly 
climate,  the  overwhelming  rains,  the  deep  rank  soil  soaked  under  the  tropical  sun 
and  the  dense  vegetation,  and  still  more  the  pestilence — the  ghastly  Yellow  Fever, 


238 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


and  scarcely  less  poisonous  and  fatal  pernicious  malarial  fevers,  and  dysenteries 
that  exhausted  as  fast  as  fever  consumed.  Fortunately,  it  was  decided  that  the  place 
to  attack  Havana  was  Santiago,  and  there  the  regular  army,  with  the  exception 
of  the  regiments  sent  to  the  Philippines,  was  ordered  and  in  due  time  reinforced  by 
volunteers,  safely  embarked  and  disembarked,  to  become  the  winners  on  bloody  fields 
and  receive  the  surrender  of  the  Spanish  garrisons  of  the  city  and  province  of  Santi- 
ago. The  vaunted  fleet  of  Cervera,  having  attempted  flight,  perished — the  wrecks  of 
his  fine  ships  strewing  the  southern  coast  of  Cuba,  where  they  remain  as  memorials, 
like  and  unlike  the  distorted  iron  that  was  the  Maine,  in  the  harbor  of  Havana,  and 
as  the  shattered  and  charred  remnants  of  the  fleet  of  Montejo,  at  Manila,  still  cumber 
the  waters  of  the  bay  off  Cavite,  telling  the  story  of  the  glory  of  our  victorious  heroes 
there. 

The  responsibility  of  the  Chief  Magistrate  of  the  United  States  in  the  late  war 
was  remarkable.  Everything  of  moment  was  referred  to  him  from  the  Cabinet 
officers  of  the  Government,  and  he  gave  all  the  closest  attention,  making,  after 
conscientious  consideration,  the  decisions  that  determined  the  course  of  action 
taken.  This  was  true  in  unusual  measure  of  the  Treasury,  State,  War  and  Navy 
Departments. 

It  is  well  the  President  resisted  while  he  could  the  “rush  line”  in  Congress,  that 
strove  headlong  for  war,  and  strenuously  urged  in  the  time  gained  essential  prepara- 
tions, and  that  he  pressed  the  war  the  day  it  was  declared  with  a hurry  message  to 
Admiral  Dewey,  who  won  his  immortal  victory  on  the  other  side  of  the  world  within 
a week  of  his  orders  by  cable  to  “destroy”  the  squadron  of  the  enemy  that  might  be 
found  somewhere  on  the  west  coast  of  Luzon. 

Nearer  home  there  was  a harder  task.  The  Spanish  army  in  Cuba  was  much 
more  formidable  on  the  defensive  than  in  the  offensive.  There  were  greater  num- 
bers of  soldiers  of  a better  class  in  the  service  of  Spain  on  the  island,  than  had  been 
supposed, and  they  did  not  lack,  in  the  degree  believed,  discipline,  ammunition  or  pro- 
visions. The  Spaniards  had  an  effective  field  artillery,  more  than  one  hundred  guns, 
and  their  Mauser  rifles  were  excellent,  far-reaching;  and,  in  field  ammunition,  they 
were  ahead  of  us  in  smokeless  powder.  Our  regiments  would  have  given  way  before 
the  Spanish  rifles,  that  told  no  tales  except  with  bolts,  that  flew  invisible,  fatal  arrows, 
from  the  jungles, if  theAmerican  soldier  had  not  been  of  stuff  that  was  like  pure  steel, 
and  marched  unflinchingly  through  the  deadly  hail,  regarding  the  bitter  pelting  as 
a summons  to  “come  on”  and  carry  the  trenches  and  ambuscades  by  storm.  The 
incapacitv  of  the  Spaniards  to  put  down  the  Cuban  Rebellion  caused  grave  mis- 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


239 


apprehensions,  both  as  to  the  Spanish  and  Cuban  soldiery,  for  few  Americans  un- 
derstand the  conditions  of  the  interminable  guerilla  warfare,  the  particular  mili- 
tary accomplishment  of  the  Spanish  race,  impotent  in  all  save  the  destructive  effect 
upon  those  not  engaged  in  it.  In  Congress  no  impression  could  he  made  of  the  real 
feebleness  of  the  Cubans,  except  in  bushwhacking,  and  it  is  still  a puzzle  that  the 
immense  masses  of  Spanish  troops  should  be  so  helpless  against  the  insurgents,  and 
yet  so  troublesome  in  harassing  invaders.  The  Cuban  army  was  not  a myth,  cer- 
tainly, but  it  has  been  a disappointment  to  those  who  were  swift  in  shouting  its 
praises,  upon  information  given  by  the  Cuban  Key  West  Bureau  of  News  novelettes. 
It  was  well  that  the  attack  on  Spain  in  the  West  Indies  was  directed  upon  Santiago 
and  Porto  Rico.  The  former  manifestly  was  a point  that  commanded  the  central 
waters  of  the  West  Indies;  recently  there  have  been  expressions  of  surprise  that 
the  expedition  to  Porto  Rico,  finally  and  handsomely  led  by  Major  General  Miles, 
commanding  the  army  of  the  United  States,  was  so  delayed.  Investigation  from  the 
inside  will  duly  determine  that  no  harm  was  done  in  that  case  by  loss  of  time.  Santi- 
ago was  pointed  out  by  many  circumstances  as  the  vital  spot  of  Spanish  power  in 
America,  where  a mortal  blow  might  be  delivered.  It  was  in  the  province  where 
the  insurgents  had  greater  strength  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  island.  It  was 
so  situated  that  our  fleet  in  that  locality  was  close  to  the  Windward  Passage,  east 
of  Cuba,  where  Columbus  was  at  once  perplexed  and  triumphant,  and  to  Hayti,  Ja- 
maica and  Porto  Rico;  and  there  were  several  landings  where  it  would  be  possible  to 
disembark  troops,  protected  by  the  fire  of  our  ships.  More  than  that,  Santiago  is  the 
old  capital  of  Cuba,  the  place  where  the  head  of  the  Cuban  church  abides,  and  the 
scene  of  the  Virginius  Massacre — altogether  having  a place  in  history  almost  equal 
to  that  of  Havana.  It  was  not  doubted  the  sanitary  situation  of  the  east  end  of 
Cuba  was  better  than  that  of  the  west  end.  Experience  shows  that  this  easy  as- 
sumption w'as  questionable.  If  we  omit  the  great  plague  spot,  the  city  of  Havana, 
it  will  appear  that  Santiago  is  in  a region  as  pestilential  as  can  be  found  in  the  prov- 
inces of  Havana  and  Pinar  del  Rio.  More  than  all  other  associations  and  conspicui- 
ties,  the  attention  of  the  world  was  directed  to  Santiago  because  Cervera’s  elusive 
fleet,  short  of  coal  and  provisions,  and  overmatched  by  the  United  States  navy,  took 
refuge  in  the  deep  harbor,  hoping  to  clean  his  ships,  get  supplies  and  escape  with 
coal  enough  to  open  a new  career.  The  Spaniards  were  too  slow,  and  the  only 
ships  of  Spain  that  showed  a sign  of  the  spirit  of  enterprise  and  the  capacity  of 
adventure,  were  bottled  up  by  a relentless  blockade.  Lieutenant  Hobson  became 
famous  in  a night  in  his  most  hazardous  effort  to  use  the  Merrimac  as  a cork  for 


240 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


the  bottle,  but  fortunately  left  a gap  through  which  the  Spaniards  made  haste  to  their 
doom.  When  the  second  fleet  of  Spain  was  destroyed,  all  chance  of  disputing  our 
supremacy  at  sea,  or  of  doing  anything  to  guard  Spanish  interests  either  in  the 
East  or  West  Indies,  was  extinguished. 

There  has  been  no  marked  features  of  contention  as  to  the  battles  of  Manila, 
except  in  the  case  of  the  gratuitous  observations  of  critical  persons,  whose  feelings 
have  been  disturbed,  that  the  storming  of  the  town  was  not  bloody  enough.  The 
victory,  however,  was  all  the  greater,  for  the  casualty  lists  were  not  long,  owing  to 
the  management  of  the  Commanding  General  and  the  heroic  Admiral,  who  won  a 
battle  famous  as  that  at  New  Orleans,  with  less  bloodshed,  but  as  Jackson’s  victory 
was  not  belittled  because  he  lost  but  half  a dozen  men  killed,  the  victories  at  Manila 
should  not  be  slighted.  The  Santiago  battles,  however,  have  stirred  controversies, 
and  there  is  a great  mass  of  literature,  official  and  other,  subject  to  endless  examina- 
tion, and  perhaps  so  voluminous  as  to  confuse  readers  for  some  generations.  The 
leading  and  indisputable  facts  are,  that  the  Spaniards  fought  well  on  land,  but 
were  ineffectual  afloat,  in  their  attempts  to  inflict  injuries,  though  they  put  to  sea 
in  dashing  style,  and  did  not  flinch  in  efforts  to  evade  a superior  force,  until  the  fire 
of  the  Americans  crushed  them.  In  the  incidents  of  warfare  on  the  hills  around 
and  the  waves  before  Santiago,  it  is  fair  to  say  that  the  Spaniards  redeemed  them- 
selves from  imputation  of  timidity,  and  fought  in  a manner  not  unworthy  of  the 
countrymen  of  the  Garrison  of  Morro  Castle,  Havana,  whose  gallantry  in  resisting 
the  army  and  fleet  of  England,  in  1762,  commanded  the  respectful  regard  of  their 
conrpierers,  and  is  a glorious  chapter  in  the  story  of  Spain.  The  Santiago  events  were 
most  honorable  to  American  arms,  and  it  would  lessen  the  splendor  of  the  rep- 
utation of  the  American  soldiers  if  one  failed  to  do  justice  to  the  sturdy  fighters  they 
overcame.  It  is  too  early  or  too  late  for  participation  in  the  debates  whether  civil  or 
acrimonious,  as  to  the  merits  or  faults  of  those  engaged  at  Santiago,  further  than  to 
quote  that  golden  sentence  from  the  report  of  Commodore  Schley,  that  there  was 
“glory  enough  to  go  around.”  We,  whatever  is  said,  remember  what  was  done  on  those 
hills  that  have  an  everlasting  place  in  history.  There  forever  is  to  be  application  of 
marvelous  propriety,  of  the  mournful  and  noble  lines  of  Kentucky’s  poet,  Theodore 
O’Hara: 

“On  Fame’s  eternal  camping  ground 
Their  silent  tents  are  spread, 

And  Glory  guards  with  solemn  round 
The  bivouac  of  the  dead.” 

There  was  a speedy  realization  by  the  country,  and  all  the  intelligent  peoples 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


241 


of  the  earth,  when  our  troops  were  embarked  for  the  Santiago  campaign,  that  the 
crisis  of  the  war  was  at  hand.  No  American  thought  of  failure.  The  only  ques- 
tions were  as  to  the  power  of  the  defense  of  Cuba  by  Spain,  and  the  cost  to  us  in 
men  and  money  to  overcome  the  defenders.  Those  who  knew  the  most  about  the  con- 
ditions in  Cuba  had  the  least  confidence  in  the  efficiency  of  the  Cuban  Army.  The 
only  body  of  organized  Cubans  of  importance  was  that  under  command  of  Garcia,  and 
it  was  the  province  of  which  he  was  in  partial  occupation  that  we  invaded  in  force. 
The  public  had  been  considerably  interested  and  entertained  by  the  rousing  ac- 
counts of  the  various  naval  bombardments  of  Spanish  shore  fortresses.  But  the 
firing  from  our  ships  had  not  materially  shaken  the  Spanish  defenses.  The  sea  power 
had  not  shattered  the  shore  lines,  but  found  abundant  occupation  in  guarding 
transports  and  protecting  the  troops  when  landing.  It  would  have  been  an  act  of  the 
most  gross  imprudence  and  incompetency  to  have  put  an  army  ashore  unless  the 
supremacy  of  the  navy  on  the  sea  was  absolute.  More  than  that,  our  own  cities 
had  to  be  assured  that  they  were  secure  from  attack.  On  the  3 1st  of  May  orders  were 
issued  for  the  embarkation  of  the  army  of  invasion  as  followTs: 

1.  The  Fifth  Army  Corps. 

2.  The  Battalion  of  Engineers. 

3.  The  detachment  of  the  Signal  Corps. 

4.  Five  squadrons  of  cavalry,  to  be  selected  by  the  commanding  general  of  the 
cavalry  division,  in  accordance  with  instruction  previously  given. 

5.  Four  batteries  of  light  artillery,  to  be  commanded  by  a major,  to  be  selected 
by  the  commanding  officer  of  the  light  artillery  brigade. 

6.  Two  batteries  of  heavy  artillery,  to  be  selected  by  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  siege  artillery  battalion,  with  eight  (8)  siege  guns  and  eight  (8)  field  mortars. 

7.  The  Battalion  of  Engineers,  the  infantry,  and  cavalry,  will  be  supplied,  with 
500  rounds  of  ammunition  per  man. 

8.  All  troops  will  carry,  in  addition  to  the  fourteen  (14)  days’  field  rations  now 
on  hand,  ten  (10)  days’  travel  rations. 

9.  The  minimum  allowance  of  tentage  and  baggage  as  prescribed  in  General 
Orders  54,  A.  G.  0.,  current  series,  will  be  taken. 

10.  In  addition  to  the  rations  specified  in  paragraph  8 of  this  order,  the  chief 
commissary  will  provide  sixty  (60)  days’  field  rations  for  the  entire  command. 

11.  All  recruits  and  extra  baggage,  the  latter  to  be  stored,  carefully  piled  and 
covered,  will  be  left  in  camp,  in  charge  of  a commissioned  officer,  to  be  selected  by 


242 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISII-AMERICAN  WAR. 


the  regimental  commander.  Where  there  are  no  recruits  available  the  necessary 
guard  only  will  be  left. 

12.  Travel  rations  will  be  drawn,  at  once,  by  the  several  commands,  as  indicated 
in  paragraph  8. 

This  was  by  command  of  Major-General  Shafter.  There  were  delays  on  account 
of  inadequate  facilities  for  embarkation  at  Tampa  and  Port  Tampa.  Orders  for 
General  Shafter  to  move  with  not  less  than  10,000  men  were  issued  on  the  7th,  and 
there  was  delay  on  account  of  reports  of  Spanish  ships  of  war  ready  to  strike  a 
blow  at  the  transports.  Twelve  squadrons  of  cavalry  not  mounted  were  added  to 
the  troops  designated  in  the  general  order,  and  June  14th  the  expedition  sailed  with 
815  officers  and  16,072  enlisted  men,  and  had  a smooth  and  uneventful  passage. 
There  were  several  demonstrations  for  the  deception  of  the  enemy,  in  one  of  which 
500  Cubans  were  employed.  General  Shafter  was  committed  by  the  movements  and 
the  ground,  as  he  says  in  his  official  report: 

“To  approach  Santiago  from  the  east  over  a narrow  road,  at  first  in  some  places 
not  better  than  a trail,  running  from  Daiquiri  through  Siboney  and  Sevilla,  and 
making  attack  from  that  quarter,  was,  in  my  judgment,  the  only  feasible  plan,  and 
subsequent  information  and  results  confirmed  my  judgment.” 

The  disembarkation  commenced  June  22nd,  and  all  men  were  ordered  to  carry 
“on  the  person  the  blanket  roll  (with  shelter  tent  and  poncho),  three  days’  field  ra- 
tions (with  coffee,  ground),  canteens  filled,  and  100  rounds  of  ammunition  per  man. 
Additional  ammunition,  already  issued  to  the  troops,  tentage,  baggage,  and  com- 
pany cooking  utensils  left  under  charge  of  the  regimental  quartermaster,  with  one 
non-commissioned  officer  and  two  privates  from  each  company, 

Two  days  were  occupied  in  getting  the  troops  ashore,  and  the  first  engagement 
was  on  the  morning  of  the  24th,  General  Young’s  brigade  taking  the  advance, 
and  finding  a Spanish  force  strongly  intrenched  on  the  Santiago  road  three  miles 
from  Siboney.  Young’s  force  was  964  officers  and  men.  The  enemy  were  driven 
from  the  field.  Our  loss,  1 officer  and  15  men  killed,  and  6 officers  and  46  men 
wounded.  Spanish  loss  reported  9 killed  and  27  wounded.  General  Shafter  says 
the  engagement  had  “an  inspiring  effect  upon  the  men,  and  “gave  us  a well- 
watered  country  further  to  the  front,  on  which  to  encamp  our  troops,”  and  the  rest  of 
the  month  was  occupied  in  attempting  to  land  rations  enough  to  have  a reserve, 
and  “it  was  not  until  nearly  two  weeks  after  the  army  landed  that  it  was  possible  to 
place  on  shore  three  days’  supplies  in  excess  of  those  required  for  the  daily  con- 
sumption.” 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMEKICAN  WAR 


243 


General  Shafter  reconnoitered,  and  formed  his  plan  of  battle  June  30th,  and 
reports  that  in  the  opening  of  the  engagement  on  July  1st  “the  artillery  fire  from  El 
Pozo  was  soon  returned  by  the  enemy’s  artillery.  They  evidently  had  the  range  of 
this  hill,  and  their  first  shells  killed  and  wounded  several  men.  As  the  Spaniards 
used  smokeless  powder  it  was  very  difficult  to  locate  the  position  of  their  pieces, 
while,  on  the  contrary,  the  smoke  caused  by  our  black  powder  plainly  indicated  the 
position  of  our  battery.” 

The  advantages  the  Spaniards  had  in  the  use  of  smokeless  powder  were  con- 
spicuous throughout  the  scenes  of  fighting  both  at  Santiago  and  Manila.  We  had, 
however,  at  Santiago  a war  balloon  of  the  actual  service,  of  which  General  Shafter 
says:  “General  Kent  forced  the  head  of  his  column  alongside  of  the  cavalry  col- 

umn as  far  as  the  narrow  trail  permitted,  and  thus  hurried  his  arrival  at  the  San 
Juan  and  the  formation  beyond  that  stream.  A few  hundred  yards  before  reaching 
the  San  Juan  the  road  forks,  a fact  that  was  discovered  by  Lieutenant-Colonel  Derby 
of  my  staff,  who  had  approached  well  to  the  front  in  a war  balloon.  This  informa- 
tion he  furnished  to  the  troops,  resulting  in  Sumner  moving  on  the  right-hand 
road,  while  Kent  was  enabled  to  utilize  the  road  to  the  left.” 

General  Shafter  officially  makes  the  following  reference  to  his  illness  at  the  time: 

“My  own  health  was  impaired  by  overexertion  in  the  sun  and  intense  heat  of 
the  day  before,  which  prevented  me  from  participating  as  actively  in  the  battle  as 
I desired;  but  from  a high  hill  near  my  headquarters  I had  a general  view  of  the 
battlefield,  extending  from  El  Caney  on  the  right  to  the  left  of  our  lines  on  San 
Juan  Hill.  My  staff  officers  were  stationed  at  various  points  on  the  field,  rendering 
frequent  reports,  and  through  them  by  the  means  of  orderlies  and  the  telephone, 
I was  enabled  to  transmit  my  orders. 

“After  the  brilliant  and  important  victory  gained  at  El  Caney,  Lawton  started 
his  tried  troops,  who  had  been  fighting  all  day  and  marching  much  of  the  night  be- 
fore, to  connect  with  the  right  of  the  cavalry  division.  Night  came  on  before  this 
movement  could  be  accomplished.  In  the  darkness  the  enemy’s  pickets  were  en- 
countered, and  the  Division  Commander  being  uncertain  of  the  ground  and  as  to 
what  might  be  in  his  front  halted  his  command  and  reported  the  situation  to  me. 
This  information  was  received  about  12:30  a.  m.,  and  I directed  General  Lawton  to 
return  by  my  headquarters  and  the  El  Pozo  House  as  the  only  certain  way  of  gain- 
ing his  new  position. 

“This  was  done,  and  the  division  took  position  on  the  right  of  the  cavalry  early 


244 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMEEICAN  WAR. 


next  morning,  Chaffee’s  brigade  arriving  first,  about  half-past  7,  and  the  other 
brigades  before  noon.” 

Of  the  hottest  of  the  fight  on  the  1st  of  July,  General  Shafter  reports:  “Great 
credit  is  due  to  Brigadier-General  II.  S.  Hawkins,  who,  placing  himself  between 
his  regiments,  urged  them  on  by  voice  and  bugle  calls  to  the  attack  so  brilliantly 
executed. 

“In  this  fierce  encounter  words  fail  to  do  justice  to  the  gallant  regimental  com- 
manders and  their  heroic  men,  for,  while  the  generals  indicated  the  formations  and 
the  points  of  attack,  it  was,  after  all,  the  intrepid  bravery  of  the  subordinate  officers 
and  men  that  planted  our  colors  on  the  crest  of  San  Juan  Hill  and  drove  the  enemy 
from  his  trenches  and  blockhouses,  thus  gaining  a position  which  sealed  the  fate 
of  Santiago. 

“In  this  action  on  this  part  of  the  field  most  efficient  service  was  rendered  by 
Lieutenant  John  II.  Parker,  Thirteenth  Infantry,  and  the  Gatling  gun  detachment 
under  his  command.  The  fighting  continued  at  intervals  until  nightfall,  but  our 
men  held  resolutely  to  the  positions  gained  at  the  cost  of  so  much  blood  and  toil. 

“I  am  greatly  indebted  to  General  Wheeler,  who,  as  previously  stated,  returned 
from  the  sick  list  to  duty  during  the  afternoon.  Ilis  cheerfulness  and  aggressive- 
ness made  itself  felt  on  this  part  of  the  battlefield,  and  the  information  he  furnished 
to  me  at  various  stages  of  the  battle  proved  to  be  most  useful.” 

The  report  of  the  General  Commanding  of  the  further  fighting  is  a model  of 
forcible  brevity,  in  these  paragraphs: 

“Soon  after  daylight  on  July  2 the  enemy  opened  battle,  but  because  of  the  in- 
trenchments  made  during  the  night,  the  approach  of  Lawton’s  division,  and  the 
presence  of  Bates’  brigade,  which  had  taken  position  during  the  night  on  Kent’s  left, 
little  apprehension  was  felt  as  to  our  ability  to  repel  the  Spaniards. 

“It  is  proper  here  to  state  that  General  Bates  and  his  brigade  had  performed 
most  arduous  and  efficient  service,  having  marched  much  of  the  night  of  June  30- 
July  1,  and  a good  part  of  the  latter  day,  during  which  he  also  participated  in  the 
battle  of  El  Caney,  after  which  he  proceeded,  by  way  of  El  Pozo,  to  the  left  of  the 
line  at  San  Juan,  reaching  his  new  position  about  midnight. 

“All  day  on  the  2d  the  battle  raged  with  more  or  less  fury,  but  such  of  our  troops 
as  were  in  position  at  daylight  held  their  ground,  and  Lawton  gained  a strong  and 
commanding  position  on  the  right. 

“About  10  p.  m.,  the  enemy  made  a vigorous  assault  to  break  through  my  lines, 
but  he  was  repulsed  at  all  points. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


245 


“On  the  morning  of  the  3d  the  battle  was  renewed,  but  the  enemy  seemed  to 
have  expended  his  energy  in  the  assault  of  the  previous  night,  and  the  firing  along 
the  lines  was  desultory;”  and  this  was  stopped  by  a letter  sent  by  General  Shatter, 
saying  he  would  he  obliged  to  “shell  Santiago,”  if  not  surrendered,  and  non-com- 
batants would  he  given  until  10  o’clock  July  4th  to  leave  the  city.  The  reply  of 
the  Spanish  General  was  that  he  would  not  surrender.  Then  foreign  consuls  came 
ivithin  our  lines  asking  more  time  to  remove  the  women  and  children.  The  lan- 
guage of  General  Shatter  reporting  the  situation  at  the  time  and  the  events  follow- 
ing, is  here  reproduced  as  of  permanent  interest: 

“My  first  message  went  in  under  a flag  of  truce  at  12:30  p.  m.  I was  of  the  opin- 
ion that  the  Spaniards  would  surrender  if  given  a little  time,  and  I thought  this  re- 
sult would  be  hastened  if  the  men  of  their  army  could  be  made  to  understand  they 
would  be  well  treated  as  prisoners  of  war.  Acting  upon  this  presumption,  I deter- 
mined to  offer  to  return  all  the  wounded  Spanish  officers  at  El  Caney  who  were’  able 
to  hear  transportation,  and  who  were  willing  to  give  their  paroles  not  to  serve  against 
the  forces  of  the  United  States  until  regularly  exchanged.  This  offer  was  made  and 
accepted.  These  officers,  as  well  as  several  of  the  wounded  Spanish  privates,  27 
;n  all,  were  sent  to  their  lines  under  the  escort  of  some  of  our  mounted  cavalry.  Our 
.roops  were  received  with  honors,  and  I have  every  reason  to  believe  the  return  of  the 
Spanish  prisoners  produced  a good  impression  on  their  comrades. 

“The  cessation  of  firing  about  noon  on  the  3d  practically  terminated  the  battle  of 
Santiago. 

“A  few  Cubans  assisted  in  the  attack  at  El  Caney,  and  fought  valiantly,  but 
Iheir  numbers  were  too  small  to  materially  change  the  strength,  as  indicated  above. 
The  enemy  confronted  us  with  numbers  about  equal  to  our  own;  they  fought  ob- 
stinately in  strong  and  intrenched  positions,  and  the  results  obtained  clearly  indicate 
the  intrepid  gallantry  of  the  companjq  officers  and  men,  and  the  benefits  derived  from 
the  careful  training  and  instruction  given  in  the  company  in  recent  years  in  rifle  prac- 
tice and  other  battle  exercises.  Our  losses  in  these  battles  were  22  officers  and  208 men 
killed,  and  81  officers  and  1,203  men  wounded;  missing,  79.  The  missing,  with  few 
exceptions,  reported  later. 

“The  arrival  of  General  Escario  on  the  night  of  July  2,  and  his  entrance  into  the 
city  was  not  anticipated,  for  although  it  was  known,  as  previously  stated,  that  Gen- 
eral Pando  had  left  Manzanillo  with  reinforcements  for  the  garrison  of  Santiago, 
it  was  not  believed  his  troops  could  arrive  so  soon.  General  Garcia,  with  between 
four  and  five  thousand  Cubans,  was  intrusted  with  the  duty  of  watching  for  and 


246 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


intercepting  the  reinforcements  expected.  This,  however,  he  failed  to  do,  and  Escario 
passed  into  the  city  along  on  my  extreme  right  and  near  the  hay.” 

On  the  11th,  when  the  firing  ceased  and  was  not  resumed  “the  sickness  in  the 
army  was  increasing  very  rapidly,  as  a result  of  exposure  in  the  trenches  to  the  in- 
tense heat  of  the  sun  and  the  heavy  rains.  Moreover,  the  dews  in  Cuba  are  almost 
equal  to  rains.  The  weakness  of  the  troops  was  becoming  so  apparent  I was  anxious 
to  bring  the  siege  to  an  end,  hut  in  common  with  most  of  the  officers  of  the  army 
1 did  not  think  an  assault  would  he  justifiable,  especially  as  the  enemy  seemed  to 
be  acting  in  good  faith  in  their  preliminary  propositions  to  surrender. 

“July  12  I informed  the  Spanish  Commander  that  Major-General  Miles,  Com- 
mander-in-Chief  of  the  American  army,  had  just  arrived  in  my  camp,  and  requested 
him  to  grant  us  a personal  interview  on  the  following  day.  lie  replied  he  would 
be  pleased  to  meet  us.  The  interview  took  place  on  the  13th.” 

The  Spanish  raised  many  points,  as  is  their  habit,  and  were  tenacious  about  re- 
taining their  arms,  but  yielded,  and  “the  terms  of  surrender  finally  agreed  upon 
included  about  12,000  Spanish  troops  in  the  city  and  as  many  more  in  the  surren- 
dered district.” 

July  17th  “we  met  midway  between  the  representatives  of  our  two  armies,  and 
the  Spanish  Commander  formally  consummated  the  surrender  of  the  city  and  the 
24,000  troops  in  Santiago  and  the  surrendered  district. 

“After  this  ceremony  I entered  the  city  with  my  staff  and  escort,  and  at  12 
o’clock  noon  the  American  flag  was  raised  over  the  Governor’s  palace.” 

The  men  and  material  surrendered  by  the  Spaniards  at  Santiago  largely  exceeded 
the  two  English  armies  and  their  equipments  at  Saratoga  and  Yorktown. 

The  yellow  fever  appeared  in  the  American  camp  at  Siboney  July  4th,  and  the 
fact  was  soon  known  to  the  army.  General  Sbaftcr  says  of  the  wounded  and  sick: 
“They  received  every  attention  that  it  was  possible  to  give  them.  The  medical  of- 
ficers without  exception  worked  night  and  day  to  alleviate  the  suffering,  which 
was  no  greater  than  invariably  accompanies  a campaign.  It  would  have  been  better 
if  we  had  more  ambulances,  but  as  many  were  taken  as  was  thought  necessary,  judg- 
ing from  previous  campaigns.” 

General  Joe  Wheeler's  report  of  the  action  of  July  1st  is  a paper  full  of  striking 
points.  The  movement  into  battle  began  in  wading  the  San  Juan  river  under  heavy 
fire,  and  the  General  soys: 

“We  were  as  much  under  fire  in  forming  the  line  as  we  would  be  by  an  advance, 
and  I therefore  pressed  the  command  forward  from  the  covering  which  it  was  formed. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


247 


It  merged  into  open  space,  in  full  view  of  the  enemy,  who  occupied  breastworks  and 
batteries  on  the  crest  of  the  hill  which  overlooked  Santiago,  officers  and  men  falling 
at  every  step.  The  troops  advanced  gallanty,  soon  reached  the  foot  of  the  hill  and 
ascended,  driving  the  enemy  from  their  works  and  occupying  them  on  the  crest  of  the 

hill. 

“Colonel  Carroll  and  Major  Wessels  were  both  wounded  during  the  charge,  hut 
Major  Wessels  was  enabled  to  return  and  resume  command.  General  Wyckoff,  com- 
manding Kent’s  Third  Brigade,  was  killed  at  12:10.  Lieutenant-Colonel  Worth  took 
command  and  was  wounded  at  12:15.  Lieutenant-Colonel  Liscum  then  took  com- 
mand and  was  wounded  at  12:20,  and  the  command  then  devolved  upon  Lieutenant- 
Colonel  Ewers,  Ninth  Infantry. 

“Upon  reaching  the  crest  I ordered  breastworks  to  be  constructed,  and  sent  to 
the  rear  for  shovels,  picks,  spades,  and  axes.  The  enemy’s  retreat  from  the  ridge  was 
precipitate,  but  our  men  were  so  thoroughly  exhausted  that  it  was  impossible  for 
them  to  follow.  Their  shoes  were  soaked  with  water  by  wading  the  San  Juan  River; 
they  had  become  drenched  with  rain,  and  when  they  reached  the  crest  they  were  ab- 
solutely unable  to  proceed  further.  Notwithsatnding  this  condition  these  exhausted 
men  labored  during  the  night  to  erect  breastworks,  furnished  details  to  bury  the 
dead  and  carry  the  wounded  back  in  improvised  litters.” 

Wheeler’s  loss  was  6 officers  and  40  men  killed,  29  officers  and  288  men  wounded, 
and  10  men  missing — total  372,  out  of  a force  of  127  officers  and  2,536  men. 

General  Bates  says  that  after  his  brigade  remained  for  some  time  in  the  first 
cross  road  after  wading  the  San  Juan  river:  “We  moved  to  the  right  to  assault  a 
small  hill,  occupied  upon  the  top  by  a stone  fort  and  well  protected  by  rifle  pits. 
General  Chaffee’s  brigade  charged  them  from  the  right,  and  the  two  brigades,  join- 
ing upon  the  crest,  opened  fire  from  this  point  of  vantage,  lately  occupied  by  the 
Spanish,  upon  the  village  of  El  Caney. 

“From  this  advantageous  position  the  Spanish  were  easily  driven  from  place  to 
place  in  the  village  proper,  and  as  fast  as  they  sought  shelter  in  dne  building  were 
driven  out  to  seek  shelter  elsewhere.  The  sharp-shooters  of  my  command  were  en- 
abled to  do  effective  work  at  this  point.  The  town  proper  was  soon  pretty  thoroughly 
cleaned  out  of  Spanish,  though  a couple  of  blockhouses  upon  the  hill  to  the  right  of 
the  town  offered  shelter  to  a few,  and  some  could  be  seen  retreating  along  a mountain 
road  leading  to  the  northwest.  A part  of  these  made  a stand  in  a field  among  some 
bowlders. 

General  Lawton  observes:  “The  light  battery  first  opened  on  a column  of  Span* 


248 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


isli  troops,  which  appeared  to  he  cavalry  moving  westward  from  El  Caney,  and  about 
2 miles  range,  resulting,  as  was  afterwards  learned,  in  killing  16  in  the  column.” 

The  General  has  much  to  say  of  a pleasing  personal  nature. 

The  report  of  General  Kent  is  of  extraordinary  merit  for  the  exact  detail  and 
local  color.  Colonel  McClernand,  he  says,  “pointed  out  to  me  a green  hill  in  the 
distance  which  was  to  be  my  objective  on  my  left,”  and  as  he  moved  into  action, 
“I  proceeded  to  join  the  head  of  my  division,  just  coming  under  heavy  lire.  Ap- 
proaching the  First  Brigade  I directed  them  to  move  alongside  the  cavalry  (which  was 
halted).  We  were  already  suffering  losses  caused  by  the  balloon  near  by  attracting 
fire  and  disclosing  our  position. 

“The  enemy’s  infantry  fire,  steadily  increasing  in  intensity,  now  came  from  all 
directions,  not  only  from  the  front  and  the  dense  tropical  thickets  on  our  flanks,  but 
from  sharpshooters  thickly  posted  in  trees  in  our  rear,  and  from  shrapnel  apparently 
aimed  at  the  balloon.  Lieutenant-Colonel  Derby,  of  General  Shaffer’s  staff,  met  me 
about  this  time  and  informed  me  that  a trail  or  narrow  way  had  been  discovered  from 
the  balloon  a short  distance  back  leading  to  the  left  to  a ford  lower  down  the  stream. 
I hastened  to  the  forks  made  by  this  road,  and  soon  after  the  Seventy-first  New 
York  Regiment  of  Hawkins’  brigade  came  up.  I turned  them  into  the  by  path  in- 
dicated by  Lieutenant-Colonel  Derby,  leading  to  the  lower  ford,  sending  word  to  Gen- 
eral Hawkins  of  this  movement.  This  would  have  speedily  delivered  them  in  their 
proper  place  on  the  left  of  their  brigade,  but  under  the  galling  fire  of  the  enemy  the 
leading  battalion  of  this  regiment  was  thrown  into  confusion  and  recoiled  in  dis- 
order on  the  troops  in  the  rear.” 

The  Second  and  Third  Battalions  “came  up  in  better  order,”  but  there  was 
some  delay,  and  General  Kent  says: 

“I  had  received  orders  some  time  before  to  keep  in  rear  of  the  cavalry  division. 
Their  advance  was  much  delayed,  resulting  in  frequent  halts,  presumably  to  drop 
their  blanket  rolls  and  due  to  the  natural  delay  in  fording  a stream.  Ihese  delays 
under  such  a hot  fire  grew  exceedingly  irksome,  and  I therefore  pushed  the  head 
of  my  division  as  quickly  as  I could  toward  the  riverain  column  files  of  twos  parallel 
in  the  narrow  way  by  the  cavalry.  This  quickened  the  forward  movement  and  en- 
abled me  to  get  into  position  as  speedily  as  possible  for  the  attack.  Owing  to  the  con- 
gested condition  of  the  road,  the  progress  of  the  narrow  columns  was,  however,  pain- 
fully slow.  I again  sent  a staff  officer  at  a gallop  to  urge  forward  the  troops  in  rear.” 

The  Second  Brigade  and  Third  “moved  toward  Fort  San  Juan,  sweeping  through 
a zone  of  most  destructive  fire,  scaling  a steep  and  difficult  hill,  and  assisting  in 


RAILROAD  STATION  NORTH  OF  MANILA— SPANIARDS  AIRING  THEMSELVES, 


«WPC** 


THE  BATTLE  OF  MANILA  BAY-IN 'THE  HEAT  OF  THE  RAGING  FIGHT. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


251 


capturing  the  enemy’s  strong  position  (Fort  San  Juan)  at  1:30  p.  m.  This  crest  was 
about  125  feet  above  the  general  level,  and  was  defended  by  deep  trenches  and  a loop- 
holed  brick  fort  surrounded  by  barbed-wire  entanglements.” 

General  Hawkins,  after  General  Kent  reached  the  crest,  “reported  that  the  Sixth 
and  Sixteenth  Infantry  had  captured  the  hill,  which  I now  consider  incorrect. 
Credit  is  almost  equally  due  the  Sixth,  Ninth,  Thirteenth,  Sixteenth,  and  Twenty- 
■'  fourth  regiments  of  infantry.  Owing  to  General  Hawkins’  representations,  I for- 
warded the  report  sent  to  corps  headquarters  about  3 p.  m.  that  the  Sixth  and 
Sixteenth  infantry  regiments  captured  the  hill.  The  Thirteenth  Infantry  captured 
the  enemy’s  colors  waving  over  the  fort,  but,  unfortunately,  destroyed  them,  distrib- 
uting the  fragments  among  the  men,  because,  as  was  asserted,  Tt  was  a bad  omen,’ 
two  or  three  men  having  been  shot  while  assisting  private  Arthur  Agnew,  Company 
H,  Thirteenth  Infantry,  the  captor.  All  fragments  which  could  be  recovered  are  sub- 
mitted with  this  report. 

“I  have  already  mentioned  the  circumstances  of  my  Third  Brigade’s  advance 
across  the  ford,  where  in  the  brief  space  of  ten  minutes  it  lost  its  brave  commander 
(killed)  and  the  next  two  ranking  officers  by  disabling  wounds.  Yet,  in  spite  of 
these  confusing  conditions  the  formations  were  effected  without  hesitation,  although 
under  a stinging  fire,  companies  acting  singly  in  some  instances,  and  by  battalion  and 
regiments  in  others,  rushing  through  the  jungle,  across  the  stream  waist  deep,  and 
over  the  wide  bottom  thickly  set  with  barbed  wire.” 

General  Kent  says: 

“The  bloody  fighting  of  my  brave  command  can  not  be  adequately  described  in 
words.  The  following  list  of  killed,  wounded,  and  missing  tells  the  story  of  their 
valor: 

“July  1st  the  loss  was  12  officers  and  77  men  killed,  32  officers  and  463  men 
wounded,  58  men  missing.  Total  loss,  642.” 

The  following  day  the  Spaniards  resumed  the  battle,  and  the  losses  of  Kent’s 
command  on  the  2nd  and  3d  of  July  made  up  a total  loss  in  three  days  of  99  killed 
and  597  wounded,  and  62  missing.  General  Shafter  said  that  before  closing  his 
report  he  desired  to  dwell  upon  “the  natural  obstacles  I had  to  encounter,  and 
wdiich  no  foresight  could  have  overcome  or  obviated.  The  rocky  and  precipitous 
coast  afforded  no  sheltered  landing  places,  the  roads  were  mere  bridle  paths,  the 
effect  of  the  tropical  sun  and  rains  upon  unacclimated  troops  was  deadly,  and  a dread 
of  strange  and  unknown  diseases  had  its  effect  on  the  army. 

“The  San  Juan  and  Aguadores  rivers  would  often  suddenly  rise  so  as  to  prevent 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISII-AMEE1CAN  WAR. 


the  passage  of  wagons,  and  then  the  eight  pack  trains  with  the  command  had  to 
be  depended  upon  for  the  victualing  of  my  army,  as  well  as  the  20,000  refugees,  who 
could  not  in  the  interests  of  humanity  be  left  to  starve  while  we  had  rations.” 

During  the  Chicago  Peace  Jubilee,  General  Shatter  made  an  address  at  the  Ar- 
mory of  the  First  Illinois  Volunteers,  and,  released  from  the  continual  forms  of 
official  reports,  added  much  of  interest  to  the  story  of  Santiago.  He  says  of  the 
send-off : 

“We  were  twice  embarked  and  twice  taken  back  to  Tampa  and  disembarked.  On 
the  first  occasion  the  cause  was  the  appearance  of  Admiral  Cervera’s  fleet;  it  requir- 
ing the  entire  navy  that  was  disposable  to  go  after  that  fleet,  and  the  second  time  by 
a report  that  afterwards  turned  out  to  be  incorrect,  that  in  the  St.  Nicholas  channel, 
through  which  we  would  have  to  go,  some  Spanish  cruisers  had  been  seen.” 

When  ordered  to  Tampa  to  command  the  first  Cuban  expedition,  he  continued: 

“I  took  the  troops  that  I thought  best  fitted  and  prepared  for  that  service. 
There  were  some  magnificent  regiments  of  volunteers,  but  to  part  of  them  I had 
issued  arms  only  two  or  three  days  before.  They  were  not  properly  equipped,  and 
lacked  experience.  As  I had  the  choice,  1 took  all  of  the  regulars  that  were  there, 
and  with  them  three  regiments  of  volunteers.  They  were  magnificent  men,  as  per- 
fect as  men  could  be,  but,  as  you  know  who  served  in  ’61,  poorly  prepared  to  take 
care  of  themselves  at  first.  Ton  recollect  it  was  months  bcfoie  \\c  were  prepared,  and 
we  made  numerous  mistakes  that  led  to  sickness  and  death.  Jhe  same  things  have 
occurred  again,  and  they  always  will  continue  with  troops  that  are  not  used  to  the 
field,  and  in  this  campaign  men  were  taken  directly  from  their  camps  immediately 
after  being  mustered  in,  and  put  into  the  most  difficult  campaign  of  modern  military 
history. 

“I  practically  had  the  entire  regular  army  of  the  United  States,  twenty  of  the 
twenty-five  regiments  of  infantry,  five  of  the  ten  regiments  of  cavalry,  and  the  bat- 
teries of  artillery,  with  three  regiments  of  volunteers,  the  Seventy-first  New  York, 
the  Second  Massachusetts,  and  the  regiment  known  as  Roosevelt’s  rough  riders. 
The  last  were  practically  seasoned  soldiers.  They  were  men  from  the  frontier,  men 
who  had  been  accustomed  for  years  to  taking  a little  sack  of  corn  meal  on  their 
saddles,  and  a blanket,  and  going  out  to  sleep  out  of  doors  for  a week  or  a month 
at  a time.  Of  course,  they  knew  how  to  care  for  themselves  in  camp. 


“Early  in  June  I was  called  to  the  telephone  in  Tampa,  and  told  from  the  Presi- 
dent’s mansion  in  Washington  to  proceed  immediately  with  not  less  than  10,000  men 
to  Santiago:  that  news  had  been  received  that  day  that  the  fleet  of  Cervera  was  surely 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


253 


within  that  harbor,  and  that  if  10,000  men  could  be  placed  there  at  once  the  fleet 
and  the  city  could  be  captured  in  forty-eight  hours.  The  horses  and  mules  had  been 
taken  off  from  the  ships  as  well  as  the  men,  and  the  time  consumed  in  reloading  the 
horses  and  mules  allowed  me  to  embark  17,000  men  nearly.  That  was  very  fortunate 
for  me  and  our  cause.” 

On  arrival  off  Santiago,  he,  “with  Admiral  Sampson,  went  down  the  coast  about 
twenty  miles,  and  saw  General  Garcia,  and  asked  him  his  opinion  of  the  country, 
what  his  force  was,  and  whether  he  was  disposed  to  assist.  I found  him  very  willing 
and  very  glad  to  offer  his  services  at  once,  with  3,000  men  that  he  had  with  him  and 
another  thousand  that  he  had  up  the  country  a little  further,  which  were  to  join  us 
immediately.  In  sailing  along  the  coast,  looking  for  a landing  place,  I selected  two 
places — Siboney,  a little  indentation  in  the  coast  about  twelve  or  thirteen  miles  east 
of  Santiago,  and  another  little  bay  about  eight  miles  further  east,  where  small  streams 
entered  into  the  sea,  making  a valley  and  a sandbar  about  150  to  200  yards  in  extent. 
All  the  rest  of  the  coast  is  abrupt,  perpendicular  walls  of  rock  from  ten  to  thirty  feet 
high,  against  which  the  waves  were  dashing  all  the  time,  and  where  it  is  utterly  im- 
possible to  land. 

“We  had  the  earnest  and  able  support  of  the  navy  and  their  assistance  in  dis- 
embarking, and  the  next  morning  were  bombarding  the  two  little  places  and  driv- 
ing the  few  hundred  Spanish  soldiers  that  were  there  away.  We  began  disembark- 
ing, and  before  the  end  of  the  day  the  men  were  on  shore,  with  2,000  horses  and 
mules  that  we  had  to  throw  overboard  to  get  ashore,  and  the  artillery.” 

The  General  noted  the  loss  of  17,000  troops  out  of  21,000  in  the  English  army 
that  besieged  Havana  in  1762,  at  the  same  time  of  year  that  he  landed  at  Santiago, 
and  remarked: 

“I  knew  that  my  entire  army  would  be  sick  if  it  stayed  long  enough;  that  it  was 
simply  a question  of  getting  that  town  just  as  soon  as  possible.  I knew  the  strength, 
the  courage,  and  the  will  of  my  men,  or  I thought  I did,  and  the  result  shows  that 
I was  not  mistaken.  It  was  a question  of  starting  the  moment  we  landed  and  not 
stopping  until  we  reached.the  Spanish  outposts,  and,  therefore,  as  soon  as  a division 
was  put  on  shore  it  was  started  on  the  march. 

“On  the  21th  the  first  engagement  took  place,  in  which  we  had  between  800 
and  900  men  on  the  American  side  and  probably  1,000  or  1,200  on  the  Spanish.  The 
enemy  was  strongly  intrenched,  showing  only  their  heads,  while  the  American 
to  rees  had  to  march  exposing  their  whole  bodies  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

“It  is  announced  by  military  experts  as  an  axiom  that  trained  troops  armed  with 


254 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


the  present  breech-loading  and  rapid-firing  arm  cannot  be  successfully  assailed  by 
any  troops  who  simply  assault.  Of  course  you  can  make  the  regular  approaches  and 
dig  up  to  them.  The  fallacy  of  that  proposition  was  made  very  manifest  that  day 
when  the  men  composing  the  advance  marched  as  deliberately  over  those  breast- 
works as  they  ever  did  when  they  fought  with  arms  that  you  could  only  load  about 
twige  in  a minute  and  of  the  range  of  only  200  or  300  yards. 

“This  army  was  an  army  of  marksmen.  For  fifteen  years  the  greatest  attention 
has  been  paid  to  marksmanship,  and  I suppose  four-fifths  of  all  the  men  in  that  army 
wore  on  their  breasts  the  marksman’s  badge.  I had  given  orders,  knowing  that 
the  noise  of  firing  is  harmless  and  that  shots  put  in  the  air  are  harmless — I had 
given  the  strictest  orders  to  all  officers  that  their  men  should  be  told  not  to  fire 
a shot  unless  they  could  see  something  moving,  and  the  firing  was  to  be  bv  individ- 
uals, what  is  called  file  firing, individual  firing.  The  Spanish  troops,  not  so  well  drilled 
in  firing  as  ours,  used  volley  firing,  which  is  very  effective  against  large  bodies  of  troops 
massed  and  moving  over  a plain,  but  utterly  inefficient  when  used  against  skirmishers 
moving  over  a rough  country.  In  that  battle,  which  lasted  two  hours,  less  than  ten 
rounds  of  ammunition  per  man  was  fired  by  my  men,  and  the  losses,  notwithstanding 
my  men  were  exposed,  their  whole  bodies,  while  the  enemy  were  in  trenches,  where 
only  their  heads  could  be  seen,  were  about  equal. 

“I  saw  the  commander  of  that  force  a few  days  later  in  Santiago,  and  in  talking 
about  it  he  said  to  me:  ‘Your  men  behaved  very  strange.  We  were  much  sur- 
prised. They  were  whipped,  but  they  didn't  seem  to  know  it;  they  continued  to  ad- 
vance (laughter  and  applause),  and  we  had  to  go  away.’  He  was  quite  right  about 
it.  They  did  have  to  go  away. 

“On  the  29th  we  had  reached  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  peaks  in  front  of 
Santiago,  about  a mile  and  a half  from  the  city.  On  the  30th  I carefully  recon- 
noitered  the  ground  as  much  as  one  could  in  the  dense  undergrowth,  and  determined 
where  I would  make  my  attack,  which  was  simply  directed  in  front,  and  to  make 
a direct  assault.  There  was  no  attempt  at  strategy,  and  no  attempt  at  turning  their 
flanks.  It  was  simply  going  straight  for  them.  In  that  I did  not  misjudge  my 
men,  and  that  is  where  I succeeded  so  well.  (Applause.)  If  we  had  attempted  to 
flank  tliem  out  or  dig  them  out  by  regular  parallels  and  get  close  to  them  my  men 
would  have  been  sick  before  it  could  have  been  accomplished,  and  the  losses  would 
have  been  many  times  greater  than  they  were. 

“The  only  misfortune. as  I judged  it,  of  the  first  day  s fight, but  which  I have  since 
learned  was  for  the  best,  was  that  immediately  on  our  right,  and  what  would  be  in 


SUBURB  OF  MANILA,  SHOWING  A BUFFALO  MARKET  CART 


THE  CATHEDRAL  AT  MANILA. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


257 


Our  real  when  we  attacked  the  town,  was  a little  village  called  El  Caney,  four  miles 
and  a half  from  Santiago,  and  whence  the  best  road  in  the  country  connected  with 
Santiago.  I did  not  know  the  exact  force  there,  but  it  was  estimated  to  be  1,000,  and 
perhaps  a little  more,  and  it  would,  of  course,  have  been  very  hazardous  to  have 
left  that  force  so  near  in  our  rear. 

“Instead  of  finishing  the  affair  by  9 o’clock,  as  we  expected,  it  took  until  4:30 
o clock  in  the  afternoon  before  the  last  shot  was  fired,  and  then  after  a loss  of  nearly 
a hundred  killed  and  250  wounded  on  our  side  and  the  almost  total  annihilation  of 
the  force  opposed  to  us.  They  had  an  idea  that  they  would  be  killed,  and  when  men 
believe  that  it  is  hard  to  capture  them.  Just  at  the  close  of  the  battle  three  or  four 
hundred  did  attempt  to  escape,  but  ran  out  in  front  of  a brigade  that  they  did  not 
see,  and  in  the  course  of  about  three  or  four  hundred  yards  most  of  them  were  dead 
or  mortally  wounded,  so  that  probably  not  more  than  twenty  men  on  the  other  side 
escaped  from  that  battle.  It  was  a most  desperate  struggle. 

“Men  were  killed  in  the  trenches  by  being  knocked  on  the  head  with  muskets,  and 
one  man  I was  shown  two  days  later  with  what  would  be  called  a tremendous  head 
on  him,  and  the  interpreter  asked  him  how  that  had  occurred,  and  he  doubled  up 
his  fist  and  spoke  of  the  soldier  that  had  hit  him  as  a black  man,  that  he  had  dropped 
his  gun  and  hit  him  in  the  head  with  his  fist.  That  was  pretty  close  work. 

“Meanwhile  the  battle  in  front  of  Santiago  progressed,  with  three  divisions  on  our 
side,  one  of  dismounted  cavalry  and  two  of  infantry.  It  was  beautifully  fought. 
Every  man  knew  what  he  had  to  do,  and  so  did  every  officer.  The  orders  were  that 
.immediately  upon  being  deployed  they  were  to  attack.  They  did  it.  Every  man 
kept  going,  and  when  one’s  comrade  dropped  the  rest  kept  going.  The  result  was 
that  in  about  two  hours  the  line  -was  taken,  and  practically  that  afternoon  the  bat- 
tle of  Santiago  was  ended,  for  those  men  never  advanced  beyond  that  point. 

“During  the  night  I brought  up  the  division  of  General  Lawton  that  had  been 
on  the  right  at  Caney  and  put  them  on  the  extreme  right,  where  I had  intended  to 
have  them  the  day  before,  and  where,  had  they  been,  we  should  probably  have  taken 
the  town  and  have  gotten  only  the  men  that  were  there,  and  not  the  12,000  that 
were  far  beyond  our  reach  tvho  were  surrendered  a few  days  later. 

“On  the  morning  of  the  2d  a weak  attempt  was  made  upon  our  lines.  In  that 
the  Spaniards  had  to  expose  themselves,  while  my  men  were  covered.  The  fight 
lasted  but  a little  while,  and  they  retreated. 

“On  the  morning  of  July  3 I thought  we  had  so  much  of  an  advantage  that  I 
could  notify  the  enemy,  first,  that  I wanted  a surrender  and,  second,  if  they  declined 


258 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISII-AMERICAN  WAR. 


to  surrender  that  they  could  have  twenty-four  hours  to  get  the  women  and  children 
out  of  town.  Of  course,  civilized  people  do  not  fire  on  towns  filled  with  women 
and  children  if  they  will  come  out  if  it  can  he  avoided.  The  Spanish  commander 
declined  very  promptly  to  surrender,  hut  said  he  would  notify  the  women  and  chil- 
dren and  those  that  desired  to  go,  hut  he  wanted  twenty-four  hours  more,  and  said 
there  were  a great  many  people  to  go  out.  They  began  to  stream  out  at  once,  and 
for  forty-eight  hours  old  men,  women,  and  children  poured  out  until  it  was  estimated 
that  at  least  20,000  people  passed  through  our  lines  and  out  into  the  woods  in  the 
rear.  Of  course,  there  was  an  immense  amount  of  suffering,  and  numbers  died, 
especially  of  the  old.  Fortunately  we  were  enabled  to  give  them  some  food,  enough 
so  that  they  existed,  hut  at  that  time,  with  the  Cuban  forces  that  I had,  I was  issuing 
daily  45,000  rations.  Forty-five  thousand  people  are  a good  many  to  feed  when  you 
have  such  fearful  roads  and  food  could  only  he  carried  on  the  hacks  of  mules. 

“On  that  morning  of  the  3d,  about  an  hour  after  the  time  for  surrendering, 
Cervera’s  fleet  left  the  harbor,  and  went  out,  as  you  know,  to  total  annihilation.  It 
was  not  more  than  twenty  or  thirty  minutes  after  they  left  the  mouth  of  the  harbor 
before,  so  far  as  we  could  hear,  the  firing  had  ceased,  and  1,700  men  were  prisoners, 
600  were  killed,  and  three  or  four  battleships  and  some  torpedo  boats  were  either  on 
the  rocks  or  in  the  bottom  of  the  sea — a most  wonderful  victory,  never  equaled  be- 
fore in  naval  history,  and  due  mainly  to  the  magnificent  marksmanship  of  our  men, 
which  covered  the  Spanish  decks  with  such  a hail  of  iron  that  no  sailors  on  earth 
could  stand  against  it. 

“Two  days  after  this  I saw  General  Torah  and  I was  convinced  from  conversation 
with  him  that  he  was  going  to  surrender.  I had  no  one  but  myself  to  take  the 
responsibility,  in  fact,  I did  not  want  anyone  else  to  do  it,  but  while  I was  convinced 
myself  it  was  hard  to  convince  others.  I knew  that  we  could  capture  the  town  at  any 
time,  that  we  had  it  surrounded  so  that  they  could  not  possibly  get  away,  although 
on  the  night  of  July  2 2,800  men  marched  in.  I had  understood  there  were  8,000, 
but  when  we  counted  them  a few  days  afterward  there  were  only  2,800.  I knew  that 
if  we  carried  that  town  by  force  a thousand  men  at  least  would  be  lost  to  the  Ameri- 
can army,  and  a thousand  good  American  men  are  a good  many  to  expend  in  cap- 
turing a Spanish  town  (applause),  and  I did  not  propose  to  do  it  if  I could  possibly 
talk  them  out  of  it. 

“General  Toral  knew  just  as  well  as  I did  that  I knew  just  what  he  had— that 
he  was  on  his  last  rations,  and  that  nothing  but  plain  rice,  that  we  had  his  retreat  cut 

off,  that  we  had  the  town  surrounded,  that  he  could  not  hurt  us,  while  we  could 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPAXlSH-AMEKICAN  WAP.  250 

bombard  him  and  do  some  little  damage,  perhaps,  and  that  it  was  only  a question 
of  a few  days. 

I found  out  a few  days  later  what  the  hitch  was  which  caused  the  delay,  for 
General  Toral  had  told  me  that  he  had  been  authorized  by  Blanco,  the  Governor- 
General,  to  enter  into  negotiations  and  make  terms  for  surrender,  and  in  Cuba  you 
know  General  Blanco  was  in  supreme  command.  His  authority  was  such  that  he 
could  even  set  aside  a law  of  Spain.  Knowing  that,  I felt  sure  that  after  very  little 
delay  they  would  surrender.  They  desired  to  get  permission  from  the  Madrid  gov- 
ernment to  return  to  Spain.  It  was  that  that  delayed  them.  Immediately  upon 
receiving  the  permission  to  return  to  Spain  they  surrendered. 

I had  in  line  when  the  fighting  was  going  on,  about  13,000  men — not  more  than 
that  at  any  time.  Inside  the  Spanish  trenches  there  were  about  10,000.  There 
were  11,500  surrendered,  and  I think  about  1,500  of  them  were  sick.  The  dispro- 
portion, considering  the  difference  of  situation,  is  not  very  great.  In  fact,  I think 
that  10,000  American  soldiers  could  have  kept  100,000  Spaniards  out  had  they  been 
in  the  same  position  (applause),  although  I do  not  wish  to  disparage  the  bravery 
of  the  Spanish  troops.  They  are  gallant  fellows,  but  they  have  not  the  intelligence 
and  do  not  take  the  initiative  as  do  the  American  soldiers;  and  they  have  not  the 
bull-dog  pluck  that  hangs  on  day  after  day. 

“Toral  made  the  first  proposition  to  surrender.  He  said  if  I would  let  him  take 
his  men  and  such  things  as  they  could  carry  on  their  persons  and  on  a few  pack 
mules  that  they  had  and  guarantee  him  safe  conduct  to  Holguin,  which  was  fifty- 
two  miles  away  to  the  north  and  in  the  interior,  they  would  march  out.  I told  him, 
of  course,  that  was  out  of  the  question;  that  I could  not  accept  any  such  terms 
as  that,  but  I would  submit  it  to  the  President.  I did  so,  and  was  very  promptly 
informed  that  only  unconditional  surrender  would  be  received,  but  I was  at  liberty 
to  say  to  General  Toral  that  if  they  would  surrender  they  would  be  carried,  at  the 
expense  of  the  United  States  government,  back  to  Spain.  When  that  proposition  was 
made  to  him  I could  see  his  face  lighten  up  and  the  faces  of  his  staff,  who  were  there. 
They  were  simply  delighted.  Those  men  love  their  country  intensely,  they  had  been 
brought  to  Cuba  against  their  will,  and  had  stayed  there  three  years,  poorly  clad, 
not  paid  at  all,  and  not  well  fed,  and  the  prospect  of  going  back  to  their  homes  had 
as  much  to  do  with  conforming  their  views  to  our  wishes  as  anjdhing  that  was  done 
during  the  campaign. 

“Meanwhile  ten  or  twelve  days  had  elapsed  and  I had  received  quite  a number  of 
volunteer  regiments — two  from  Michigan,  the  First  District  of  Columbia,  a Massachu- 


260 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERlCAN  WAR. 


setts  regiment,  and  an  Ohio  regiment,  the  Eighth  Ohio — all  splendid  troops  and  well 
equipped,  and  while  they  were  not  there  at  the  hardest  of  the  fighting  they  were  there 
during  the  suffering,  and  everything  that  soldiers  were  called  upon  to  do  they  did 
like  men. 

“It  is  a great  deal  harder  to  stand  up  day  after  day  and  see  companions  go  from 
sickness  and  disease  than  it  is  to  face  the  perils  of  battle. 

“When  I told  General  Toral  that  we  would  carry  his  men  back  he  said:  ‘Does 
that  include  my  entire  command?’  I said:  ‘What  is  your  command  and  where  are 
they?’  lie  replied  the  Fourth  Army  Corps;  11,500  men  in  the  city,  3,000  twenty 
miles  in  the  rear  of  us;  7,500  he  said  were  up  the  coast  less  than  sixty  miles,  and 
about  1,500  125  to  150  miles  off  on  the  northeastern  coast. 

“There  were  3,440  odd,  and  at  a place  less  than  sixty  miles  east  there  were 
7,500  and  a few  over,  because  we  counted  them  and  took  their  arms.  The  result  of 
that  surrender  was  as  unexpected  to  us  as  probably  it  was  to  every  person  in  the 
United  States.  There  was  simply  a little  army  there,  which  had  gone  down  to  as- 
sist the  navy  in  getting  the  Spanish  fleet  out  and  capturing  that  town,  and  we  ex- 
pected no  other  result,  from  it  than  victory  at  the  spot  at  the  utmost,  but  in  at- 
tacking the  limb  we  got  the  whole  body.  It  was  expected  that,  beginning  about  the 
first  of  October,  the  objective  point  of  the  campaign  was  to  be  Havana,  where  we 
knew  there  were  from  125,000  to  150,000  men,  and  it  was  expected  that  about  the 
first  of  October  a large  army  would  be  sent  over  there,  and  the  battle  that  would 
decide  the  war  would  be  fought  in  the  vicinity  of  Havana.  I think  that  was  the 
universal  feeling.  The  loss  of  that  city  and  of  those  24,000  men — 23,376,  to  be  ac- 
curate— so  dispirited  them  that  within  a week  the  proposition  of  Spain  to  close  the 
war  was  made,  and,  happily,  the  war  was  ended. 

“The  difficulties  of  that  campaign  were  not  in  the  fighting.  That  was  the  easiest 
part  of  it.  The  difficulties  were  in  getting  food  and  medicine  to  the  front.  There 
was  but  a single  road,  a muddy  and  terrible  road,  and  with  five  or  six  wagons  going 
over  it  the  sixth  wagon  would  be  on  the  axle  tree,  and  in  taking  up  some  artillery  I 
had  fourteen  horses  on  one  battery  that  was  usually  drawn  by  four,  and  even  with 
that  number  it  went  out  of  sight,  and  we  had  to  leave  it  and  dig  it  out  after  the 
water  had  subsided.” 

Admiral  Sampson’s  report,  dated  August  3d,  was  published  October  23d,  and 
covers  the  conduct  of  the  fleet  under  his  command,  in  its  operations  in  the  IVest 
Indies,  for  about  two  months  prior  to  the  destruction  of  Admiral  Cervera's  ships  on 
July  3.  It  was  made  up  largely  of  official  dispatches  and  the  movements  of  the 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


fleet,  with  explanations  and  comment  by  the  Admiral,  and  begins  with  a statement 
of  the  determination  reached  by  the  Navy  department  to  send  a squadron  to  the 
Windward  Passage  for  the  purpose  of  observation,  because  of  the  information  re- 
ceived of  the  sailing,  on  April  29,  of  Admiral  Cervera’s  squadron  from  the  Cape 
Verde  Islands. 

On  the  voyage  eastward  from  the  naval  base  at  Key  West,  which  began  on  May 
4,  Admiral  Sampson  reports  there  was  experienced  endless  trouble  and  delay  because 
of  the  inefficiency  of  the  two  monitors  accompanying  the  other  ships,  and  which  had 
to  be  taken  in  tow.  Their  coal  supply  was  so  small  that  it  wras  at  once  evident  that 
they  must  either  frequently  coal  or  be  towed.  The  Admiral  says: 

“Had  the  sea  been  rough,  or  had  the  enemy  appeared  at  this  juncture,  the  squad- 
ron would  have  been  in  a much  better  position  for  an  engagement  had  the  monitors 
been  elsewhere.  Subsequently,  when  engaging  the  batteries  of  San  Juan,  it  was  evi- 
dent that  their  shooting  was  bad. 

“Owing  to  the  quick  rolling  of  these  vessels,  even  in  a moderate  sea,  they  were 
unable  to  fire  with  any  degree  of  accuracy.” 

Among  the  telegrams  received  by  the  Admiral  from  the  department  at  Wash- 
ington when  off  Cape  Haytien  was  the  following: 

Washington,  D.  C.,  May  6. — Do  not  risk  or  cripple  your  vessels  against  fortifica- 
tions as  to  prevent  from  soon  afterwards  successfully  fighting  Spanish  fleet,  com- 
posed of  Pelayo,  Carlos  V.,  Oquendo,  Vizcaya,  Maria  Teresa,  Cristobal  Colon,  four 

deep  sea  torpedo  boats,  if  they  should  appear  on  this  side.  LONG. 

* 

It  was  determined  to  go  to  Porto  Rico,  and  the  squadron  arrived  off  San  Juan 
on  the  morning  of  the  12th  and  the  bombardment  of  that  place  ensued.  Regarding 
his  action  at  this  place  the  Admiral  says: 

“It  was  clear  to  my  own  mind  that  the  squadron  would  not  have  any  great  diffi- 
culty in  forcing  the  surrender  of  the  place,  but  the  fac-t  that  we  should  be  held  several 
days  in  completing  arrangements  for  holding  it;  that  part  of  our  force  would  have 
to  be  left  to  await  the  arrival  of  troops  to  garrison  it;  that  the  movements  of  the 
Spanish  squadron,  our  main  objective,  were  still  unknown;  that  the  flying  squadron 
was  still  north  and  not  in  a position  to  render  any  aid;  that  Havana,  Cervera’s 
natural  objective,  was  thus  open  to  entry  by  such  force  as  his,  while  we  were  a thou- 
sand miles  distant,  made  our  immediate  movement  toward  Havana  imperative. 

“I  thus  reluctantly  gave  up  the  project  against  San  Juan  and  stood  westward 
for  Havana.” 

Several  telegrams  are  here  presented,  based  on  reports  that  Cervera’s  squadron 


m 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAS. 


had  returned  to  Cadiz  and  they  had  in  view  “to  return  and  capture  San  Juan,  the  de- 
sire to  do  so  and  occupy  the  place  being  assured  in  the  event  of  Admiral  Cervera’s 
failure  to  cross  the  Atlantic.” 

Shortly  after  news  was  received  that  the  Spanish  fleet  had  appeared  off  Curacoa, 
West  Indies,  and  the  squadron  under  orders  from  the  department  proceeded  to  Key 
West,  to  which  place  the  flying  squadron  under  Commodore  (now  Admiral)  Schley 
had  already  been  ordered. 

Arrangements  were  then  hurriedly  made  and  the  flying  squadron,  augmented  by 
the  other  vessels  under  Commodore  Schley,  was  sent  off  Cienfuegos,  where  it  was  be- 
lieved the  enemy  would  go,  in  which  ease  an  effort  was  to  be  made  to  engage  and 
capture  him.  Sampson  was  given  the  choice  either  of  the  command  of  the  block- 
ading squadron  off  Havana  or  at  Cienfuegos,  Schley  in  either  case  to  remain  with 
his  own  squadron. 

From  messages  received  by  the  Admiral  from  the  department  about  May  20  it  ap- 
pears that  reports  had  reached  the  United  States  that  the  Spanish  fleet  was  at  San- 
tiago, so  the  department  advised  Sampson  to  send  immediately  word  to  Schley  to 
proceed  to  that  place,  leaving  one  small  vessel  off  Cienfuegos. 

On  May  21  instructions  were  written  by  Samnson  for  Commodore  Schley  and 
sent  to  him  via  the  Marblehead  regarding  the  possibility  of  the  Spanish  fleet  being 
at  Santiago.  They  are  in  part  as  follows: 

United  States  Flagship  New  York,  First  Eate,  Key  West,  Fla.,  May  21. — Sir: 
Spanish  squadron  is  probably  at  Santiago  de  Cuba — four  ships  and  three  torpedo  boat 
destroyers.  If  you  are  satisfied  they  are  not  at  Cienfuegos  proceed  with  all  dispatch, 
but  cautiously,  to  Santiago  de  Cuba,  and  if  the  enemy  is  there  blockade  him  in  port. 
You  will  probably  find  it  necessary  to  establish  communication  with  some  of  the 
inhabitants — fishermen  or  others — to  learn  definitely  that  the  ships  are  in  port,  it 
being  impossible  to  see  into  it  from  the  outside. 

The  Admiral  said  he  felt  much  concerned  as  to  the  delivery  of  these  orders 
and  sent  a duplicate  by  the  Hawk  with  an  additional  memorandum.  The  Admiral 
suggested  that  if  the  information  did  not  reach  Commodore  Schley  before  daylight 
of  May  23  to  mask  the  real  direction  he  should  take  as  much  as  possible.  He  adds: 
“Follow  the  Spanish  squadron  whichever  direction  they  take.” 

The  Admiral  off  Havana  gives  copies  of  orders  of  battle  which  were  to  be  fol- 
lowed in  the  event  that  Cervera  left  Santiago  on  the  approach  of  Schley’s  fleet  from 
Cienfuegos  and  attempted  to  cruise  around  the  coast  to  Havana,  in  which  case  tfi® 
Havana  squadron  would  attempt  to  intercept  him  by  going  east  about  200  miles  b»- 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


263 


yond  the  junction  of  Santiren  and  Nicholas  Channels.  Strict  orders  were  given  for 
screening  lights  and  to  see  that  none  were  accidentally  shown. 

The  squadron  was  to  cruise  generally  to  the  eastward  in  the  day  and  westward 
during  the  night. 

On  May  23,  as  shown  by  the  report.  Commodore  Schley  expressed  the  belief  that 
the  Spaniards  were  at  Cienfuegos.  On  the  27th  the  Admiral  sent  word  to  Schley, 
directing  him  to  proceed  with  all  possible  speed  to  Santiago  because  of  information 
received  that  the  Spaniards  were  there.  The  same  time  orders  were  sent  to  have  the 
collier  Sterling  dispatched  to  Santiago  with  an  expression  of  opinion  that  the 
Commodore  should  use  it  to  obstruct  the  channel  at  its  narrowest  part  leading  into 
the  harbor. 

The  details  of  the  plan  were  left  to  the  Commodore’s  judgment,  as  he  (Sampson) 
had  “the  utmost  confidence  in  his  ability  to  carry  this  plan  to  a successful  conclusion, 
and  earnestly  wished  him  good  luck.” 

Sampson  apparently  felt  certain  of  the  presence  of  the  Spaniards  at  Santiago  and 
urged  that  the  harbor  must  be  blockaded  at  all  hazards.  Schley  in  the  meantime  had 
proceeded  to  Santiago,  although  it  appears  not  the  same  day  Admiral  Sampson  ex- 
pected. 

At  one  time  Commodore  Schley  contemplated  going  to  Key  West  with  the 
squadron  for  coal,  but  this  was  abandoned,  his  collier  having  been  temporarily  re- 
paired, and  the  necessity  for  a trip  to  Key  West  being  avoided  Santiago  was  then 
blockaded. 

Admiral  Sampson  arrived  at  Santiago  June  1st.  June  8 the  Admiral  urged  upon 
the  department,  as  he  had  previously  done,  to  expedite  the  arrival  of  the  troops  for 
Santiago,  the  difficulty  of  blockading  the  Spanish  ships  daily  increasing. 

In  a memorandum  dated  June  15,  the  Admiral  says: 

“The  Commander-in-Chief  desires  again  to  call  the  attention  of  the  commanding 
officers  to  the  positions  occupied  by  the  blockading  fleet,  especially  during  the  day- 
time, and  it  is  now  directed  that  all  ships  keep  within  a distance  of  the  entrance  to 
Santiago  of  four  miles,  and  this  distance  must  not  be  exceeded. 

“If  the  vessel  is  coaling  or  is  otherwise  restricted  in  its  movements  it  must  never- 
theless keep  within  this  distance.  If  at  any  time  the  flagship  makes  signal  which 
is  not  visible  to  any  vessel,  such  vessel  mn?t  at  once  approach  the  flagship  or  re- 
treating vessel  to  a point  where  it  can  read  the  signal 

“Disregard  of  the  directions  which  have  already  been  given  cn  this  head  has  led 
to  endless  confusion.  Many  times  during  the  day  the  fleet  is  so  scattered  that  it 


264 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISII-AM EKICAN  WAR. 


would  be  perfectly  possible  for  tlie  enemy  to  come  out  of  the  harbor  and  meet  w;ith 
little  opposition. 

“The  Commander-in-Chief  hopes  that  strict  attention  will  be  given  this  order.” 

In  the  order  of  battle  incidental  to  the  landing  of  Shafter’s  army  corps  June  22, 
when  ships  were  sent  to  shell  the  beach  and  cover  the  landing  of  the  men,  the  follow- 
ing occurs: 

“The  attention  of  commanding  officers  of  all  vessels  engaged  in  blockading 
Santiago  de  Cuba  is  earnestly  called  to  the  necessity  of  the  utmost  vigilance  from  this 
time  forward,  both  as  to  maintaining  stations  and  readiness  for  action  and  as  to  keep- 
ing a close  watch  upon  the  harbor  mouth.  If  the  Spanish  Admiral  ever  intends 
to  attempt  to  escape  that  attempt  will  be  made  soon.” 

The  Admiral  says  trouble  was  experienced  in  the  landing  of  Shafter’s  army  on 
account  of  the  wandering  proclivities  of  some  of  the  transports.  The  progress  of  the 
disembarkation  was  rendered  somewhat  difficult  by  a heavy  sea,  the  heaviest  during 
the  three  weeks  the  fleet  had  been  stationed  there,  owing  to  a stiff  blow  off  the  coast 
of  Jamaica. 

According  to  a dispatch  to  Secretary  Long,  dated  June  26,  the  channel  at  Santi- 
ago not  having  been  obstructed  by  the  sinking  of  the  Merrimac,  Admiral  Sampson 
was  preparing  a torpedo  attack  to  hasten  the  destruction  of  the  Spanish  vessels, 
although  he  regretted  resorting  to  this  method  because  of  its  difficulties  and  small 
chance  of  success.  lie  would  not  do  this,  he  says,  were  the  present  force  to  be  kept 
there;  as  it  then  insured  a capture,  which  he  believed  would  terminate  the  war. 

There  was  contemplated  at  this  time  sending  a fleet  to  the  Spanish  coast;  and 
this  expedition  was  to  consist  of  the  Iowa,  Oregon,  Newark,  Yosemite,  Yankee,  and 
Dixie,  and  they  were  to  go  to  the  Azores  for  orders,  en  route  to  Tangier,  Morocco. 
The  colliers  were  to  join  the  fleet  at  the  Azores. 

On  June  30  the  Admiral  received  a communication  from  Major-General  Shatter 
announcing  that  he  expected  to  attack  Santiago  the  following  morning,  and  asking 
that  he  (Sampson)  bombard  the  forts  at  Aguadores  in  support  of  a regiment  of  in- 
fantry, and  make  such  demonstrations  as  he  thought  proper  at  the  harbor’s  mouth, 
so  as  to  keep  as  many  of  the  enemy  there  as  possible. 

This  request  was  complied  with,  and  on  July  1 General  Shafter  asked  that  the 
Admiral  keep  up  his  fight  on  the  Santiago  water  front.  On  July  2 the  following 
was  received  from  General  Shafter. 

“Terrible  fight  yesterday,  but  my  line  is  now  strongly  intrenched  about  three- 
lourths  of  a mile  from  town.  I urge  that  you  make  effort  immediately  to  force  the 


AN  INSURGENT  OUTLOOK  NEAR  MANILA- 


DISPLAY  IN  MANILA  PHOTOGRAPH  GALLERY.  INSURGENT  LEADERS. 


GROUP  OF  FILIPINOS  WHO  WANT  INDEPENDENCE. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMEKICAN  WAR. 


267 


entrance  to  avoid  future  losses  among  my  men,  which  are  already  heavy.  You  can 
now  operate  with  less  loss  of  life  than  I can.  Please  telephone  answer.”  . 

A reply  was  telephoned  General  Shatter  from  Admiral  Sampson,  through  Lieu- 
tenant Stanton,  which  said  the  Admiral  had  bombarded  the  forts  at  the  entrance  of 
Santiago  and  also  Punta  Gorda  battery  inside,  silencing  their  fire,  and  asked  whether 
he  (Shatter)  wanted  further  firing  on  the  Admiral’s  part.  The  explanation  was  made 
that  it  was  impossible  to  force  an  entrance  until  the  channel  was  cleared  of  mines 
—a  work  of  some  time  after  the  forts  were  taken  possession  of  by  the  troops.  To 
this  General  Shatter  replied: 

“It  is  impossible  for  me  to  say  when  I can  take  batteries  at  entrance  of  harbor. 
If  they  arc  as  difficult  to  take  as  those  which  we  have  been  pitted  against  it  will  be 
some  time  and  at  great  loss  of  life.  I am  at  a loss  to  see  why  the  navy  cannot 
work  under  a destructive  fire  as  well  as  the  army.  My  loss  yesterday  was  over  500 
men.  By  all  means  keep  up  fire  on  everything  in  sight  of  you  until  demolished.  I 
expect,  however,  in  time  and  with  sufficient  men  to  capture  the  forts  along  the  bay.” 

On  the  2nd  of  July,  Sampson  wrote  to  Shatter. 

“An  officer  of  my  staff  has  already  reported  to  you  the  firing  which  we  did  this 
morning,  but  I must  say  in  addition  to  what  he  told  you  that  the  forts  which  we 
silenced  were  not  the  forts  which  would  give  you  any  inconvenience  in  capturing  the 
city,  as  they  cannot  fire  except  to  seaward.  They  cannot  even  prevent  our  entrance 
into  the  harbor  of  Santiago.  Our  trouble  from  the  first  has  been  the  channel  to  the 
harbor  is  well  strewn  with  observation  mines,  which  would  certainly  result  in  the 
sinking  of  one  or  more  of  our  ships  if  we  attempted  to  enter  the  harbor,  and  by  the 
sinking  of  a ship  the  object  of  attempting  to  enter  the  harbor  would  be  defeated  by 
the  preventing  of  further  progress  on  our  part. 

“It  was  my  hope  that  an  attack  on  your  part  of  these  shore  batteries  from  the 
rear  would  leave  us  at  liberty  to  drag  the  channel  for  torpedoes. 

“If  it  is  your  earnest  desire  that  we  should  force  our  entrance  I will  at  once 
prepare  to  undertake  it.  I think,  however,  that  our  position  and  yours  would  be  made 
more  difficult  if,  as  is  possible,  we  fail  in  our  attempt. 

“We  have  in  our  outfit  at  Guantanamo  forty  countermining  mines,  which  I will 
bring  here  with  as  little  delay  as  possible,  and  if  we  can  succeed  in  freeing  the  en- 
trance of  mines  by  their  use  I will  enter  the  harbor. 

“This  work,  which  is  unfamiliar  to  us,  will  require  considerable  time. 

“It  is  not  so  much  the  loss  of  men  as  it  is  the  loss  of  ships  which  has  until  now 
deterred  me  from  making  a direct  attack  upon  the  ships  within  the  port,” 


268 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


The  Admiral  says  he  began  making  preparations  to  countermine,  and,  with  the 
object  of  arranging  an  attack  upon  the  batteries  at  the  entrance  a visit  was  arranged 
to  General  Shafter,  so  that  the  matter  might  be  thoroughly  discussed,  and  com- 
bined action  take  place. 

He  adds:  “I  had  in  view  the  employment  of  the  marines  for  an  assault  on 

either  the  Morro  or  Socapa  battery,  while  at  the  same  time  assaulting  the  defenses  at 
the  entrance  with  the  fleet.” 

The  Admiral  says  of  the  sortie  and  destruction  of  Cervera’s  fleet: 

“This  event  closes  the  purely  naval  campaign,  crowning  with  complete  success 
the  anxious  work  of  almost  exactly  two  months.” 

The  error  of  Commodore  Schley  as  to  the  location  of  Cervera’s  fleet,  his  hesi- 
tation in  accepting  the  report  of  the  Spaniards’  presence  at  Santiago,  appears  to  have 
caused  the  advancement  of  Admiral  Sampson  and  subordinated  Schley.  Out  of  this 
came  differences  of  opinion  about  facts  among  the  close  friends  of  the  two  dis- 
tinguished officers.  Schley  was  close  at  hand  when  Cervera’s  run  from  Santiago 
took  place,  while  Sampson  was  out  of  the  way  on  other  duty,  and  Schley  has  been 
charged  with  an  evasive  movement  of  the  New  York  just  then  that  lost  valuable  time. 
It  is  related  by  the  Washington  staff  correspondent  of  the  Chicago  Times-IIerald  that 
just  after  the  battle  of  Santiago,  Commodore  Schley  went  aboard  the  Iowa 
and  hailed  Captain  Evans  with  the  remark  that  it  had  been  a great  day  for  the  Amer- 
ican navy. 

“But  why  didn’t  you  obey  orders  and  close  in  on  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  instead 
of  heading  out  to  sea?"  inquired  Evans. 

Commodore  Schley's  reply  was  that  he  was  afraid  the  "\  izcaja  would  1am  the 
Brooklyn.  This  colloquy  referred  to  a striking  maneuver  of  the  flagship  Brooklyn 
early  in  the  engagement  at  Santiago,  which  has  been  commented  on  before.  In  jus- 
tice to  Commodore  Schley  the  navy  department  officers  admit  the  Spanish  officers 
after  the  battle  said  that  it  had  been  their  purpose,  on  emerging  from  the  harbor,  to 
have  the  Vizcaya  ram  the  Brooklyn,  believing  that  the  Spanish  cruisers  could  outrun 
the  remaining  vessels  in  the  American  fleet,  most  of  which  were  battleship?,  sup- 
posed to  be  of  a lower  rate  of  speed  than  the  Spanish  cruiser?. 

The  action  of  the  Vizcaya  as  she  headed  toward  the  Brooklyn  indicated  her  de- 
termination to  carry  out  this  programme.  But  the  remark  of  Captain  Evans  to  tho 
nominal  commander  of  the  squadron  would  under  ordinary  circumstances  have 
been  an  act  of  insubordination  and  only  illustrates  the  feeling  of  some  of  the  cap- 
tains of  the  fleet  toward  the  Commodore. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


2(59 


It  has  been  said  that  Schley,  being  ordered  to  Key  West  when  Cervera  ap- 
peared in  Cuban  waters,  “proceeded  to  Cienfuegos,  which  was  thought  to  be  the  des- 
tination of  the  Spanish  warships.  That  port  commanded  the  only  direct  railroad  con- 
nection with  Havana,  and  had  the  Spanish  fleet  gone  there  Admiral  Cervera  could 
have  relieved  General  Blanco  with  money  and  munitions  of  war  and  received  in 
return  supplies  necessary  for  his  squadron.  It  is  believed  even  now  tbat  had  the 
Spanish  ships  been  properly  supplied  and  equipped  they  would  have  gone  to  Cien- 
fuegos instead  of  to  Santiago.  But  subsequent  developments  have  shown  that 
Admiral  Cervera  was  permitted  to  take  only  enough  coal  to  carry  him  to  the  nearest 
port,  Santiago.” 

Schley  credited  Cervera  with  knowing  enough  to  know  that  Cienfuegos  was 
the  better  port  for  his  purposes,  and  therefore  adhered  to  his  opinion,  and  Sampson 
was  made  his  superior  officer.  So  important  have  the  differences  seemed  that  the 
Wainwright  Board  was  convened  to  investigate  the  parts  taken  in  the  Santiago  naval 
battle  respectively  by  Admiral  Sampson  and  Admiral  Schley.  But  in  official  phrase 
this  board  was  convened  for  the  purpose  of  determining  the  position  and  courses 
of  the  ships  engaged  in  the  action  at  Santiago  July  3,  and  reporting  to  the  Secretary 
of  the  Navy. 

The  report  is: 

“U.  S.  F.  S.  New  York,  First  Rate,  Navy  Yard,  New  York,  Oct.  8,  1898. — Sir: 
In  obedience  to  your  order  of  Sept.  2,  1898,  appointing  us  a board  to  plot  the  posi- 
tions of  the  ships  of  Admiral  Cervera’s  squadron  and  those  of  the  United  States 
fleet  in  the  battle  of  July  3,  off  Santiago  de  Cuba,  we  have  the  honor  to  submit  the 
following  report,  accompanied  by  a chart,  showing  the  positions  of  the  ships  at  seven 
different  times. 

“These  times,  as  taken  by  the  United  States  ships  engaged,  with  the  incidents 
noted,  are  as  follows: 

“No.  1,  9:35  a.  m. — Maria  Teresa  came  out  of  the  harbor. 

“No.  2,  9:50  a.  m. — Pluton  came  out. 

“No.  3,  10:15  a.  m. — Maria  Teresa  turned  to  run  ashore. 

“No.  4,  10:20  a.  m. — Oquendo  turned  to  run  ashore. 

“No.  5,  10:30  a.  m. — Furor  blew  up  and  Pluton  turned  to  run  ashore. 

“No.  6,  11:05  a.  m. — Vizcaya  turned  to  run  ashore. 

“No.  7,  1:15  p.  m. — Colon  surrendered. 

“The  chart  selected  by  the  board  for  plotting  is  H.  O.  chart  No.  716,  1885,  West 
Indies,  eastern  part  of  Bahama  Islands,  with  part  of  Cuba  and  north  coast  of  San 


270 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR 


Domingo.  This  selection  was  made  after  a careful  comparison  with  all  other  charts 
at  hand,  as  the  positions  of  the  principal  headlands  and  inlets  and  the  distances  be- 
tween them  on  it  agree  more  nearly  with  the  observation  of  members  of  the  board 
than  those  given  by  any  other. 

“The  positions  of  the  United  States  ships  were  established  by  known  bearings 
and  distances  from  the  Morro  at  No.  1,  with  the  exception  of  the  New  York,  whose 
position  is  plotted  by  the  revolutions  of  its  engines  during  a run  of  forty-five  minutes 
cast  from  its  position,  southeast  half  south  of  the  Morro,  6,000  yards.  Position  at  No. 
2 is  plotted  by  all  ships  according  to  their  relative  bearings  from  each  other,  the 
operations  of  their  engines  from  9:35  to  9:50,  the  evidence  of  the  officers  on  board 
them,  and  the  ranges  used  in  firing  at  the  Spanish  ships.  Position  No.  3 is  plotted 
from  observations  of  the  officers  of  the  United  States  ships,  with  regard  to  their 
nearness  to  each  other,  and  relative  bearings  of  themselves  from  Teresa,  with 
ranges  in  use  at  the  time,  the  performance  of  the  engines,  and  general  heading 
of  the  ships.  Position  No.  4 same  as  No.  3,  substituting  Oquendo  for  Teresa.  Posi- 
tion Nos.  5,  6,  and  7 are  plotted  on  the  same  general  plan. 

“Before  plotting  these  positions  the  board  took  each  ship  separately  and  discussed 
the  data  for  the  position  under  consideration — this  data  being  obtained  from  the 
report  of  the  commanding  officers,  notes  taken  during  the  action,  and  the  evidence 
of  the  members  of  the  board.  In  reconciling  differences  of  opinion  in  regard  to  dis- 
tances, bearings,  ranges,  etc.,  full  liberty  was  given  to  the  representative  of  the  ships 
under  discussion  to  bring  in  any  argument  or  data  he  considered  necessary,  and  the 
board  submits  this  report  with  a feeling  that,  under  the  circumstances,  it  is  as  nearly 
correct  as  is  possible  so  long  after  the  engagement.  Very  respectfully, 

“RICHARD  VAINVRIGIIT, 
“Lieutenant  Commander,  U.  S.  N.,  Senior  Member. 

“S.  P.  COMLY, 
“Lieutenant,  U.  S.  N. 
“L.  C.  HEILNER, 
“Lieutenant,  U.  S.  N. 

“W.  H.  SCHUETZE, 
“Lieutenant,  U.  S.  N. 

• “A.  C.  HODGSON, 
“Lieutenant,  U.  S.  N. 

“V.  H.  ALLEN, 
“Lieutenant,  U.  S.  N. 
“EDWARD  E.  CAPEHART, 
“Lieutenant,  U.  S.  N. 


“To  the  Commander-in-Chief.” 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


271 


Measurements  upon  the  chart  showing  the  positions  of  the  vessels  at  the  speci- 
fied times  named  in  the  report  will  give  as  fair  an  idea  of  the  work  of  the  board  as 
can  be  made  without  the  chart  itself. 

“Position  No.  1,  9:35  a.  m.  When  the  Maria  Teresa  came  out  of  the  harbor  the 
New  York  was  nine  miles  east  of  Morro,  accompanied  by  the  Hist  and  Ericsson.  The 
Brooklyn  was  three  miles  southwest  of  Morro,  being  two  and  two-tenths  miles  from 
the  shore  west  of  the  mouth  of  the  harbor.  The  Texas  was  eight-tenths  of  a mile 
east  of  the  Brooklyn;  the  Iowa  one  and  eight-tenths  miles  east  and  south  of  the 
Brooklyn,  and  the  Oregon  a half  mile  east  of  the  Iowa,  the  Iowa  being  three  miles 
directly  south  of  Morro.  The  Indiana  was  two  and  two-tenths  miles  southwest  of  Mor- 
ro and  the  Gloucester  one  mile  almost  directly  north  of  the  Indiana,  a mile  and  four- 
tenths  from  Morro. 

“Position  No.  2,  9:50  a.  m.  When  the  Pluton  came  out  all  the  Spanish  vessels 
had  come  out  of  the  harbor  and  their  positions  were:  Maria  Teresa  two  and  a half 
miles  southwest  of  Morro,  the  Vizcaya,  Colon  and  Oquendo,  in  the  order  named, 
behind  the  Teresa  and  from  four-tenths  to  half  a mile  apart.  The  position  of  the 
American  vessels  were:  The  New  York  had  moved  up  two  and  one-tenth  miles 

westward.  The  Brooklyn  had  started  north,  swerved  to  the  northeast  and  toward 
the  mouth  of  the  harbor,  and  was  turning  east  on  the  swing  it  made  to  the  right  and 
around  to  the  westward  course;  it  was  eight-tenths  of  a mile  from  the  Vizcaya.  At 
position  No.  2 the  Texas  first  went  east  a half  mile,  swinging  toward  the  harbor, 
then  turning  to  the  left  it  is  at  No.  2 a half  mile  directly  north  of  the  first  position. 
The  Iowa  moved  by  a varying  course  northwest  and  was  a mile  and  four-tenths 
from  the  Vizcaya,  the  Oregon  being  two-tenths  of  a mile  behind  the  Iowa,  the 
Indiana  three-tenths  behind  the  Iowa.  The  Gloucester’s  first  start  was  half  a mile 
directly  away  from  the  harbor,  but  swinging  to  the  right,  had  advanced  toward  the 
Spanish  ships,  being  one  and  seven-tenths  miles  from  the  nearest,  the  Oquendo. 

“Position  No.  3,  10:15  a.  m.  Maria  Teresa  turned  to  run  ashore.  It  was  five  and 
one-half  miles  from  Morro.  The  Vizcaya  was  two  and  three-tenths  miles  westward 
from  the  Teresa,  the  Oquendo  one  and  two-tenths  miles,  and  the  Colon  one  and 
four-tenths  miles  in  advance  of  the  Teresa.  The  American  vessels  were  as  follows: 
The  New  York  had  come  within  three  miles  of  Morro,  being  southeast  of  that 
point.  The  Brooklyn  had  made  its  swing  to  the  westward,  crossing  its  track,  and  was 
two  and  one-half  miles  south  and  wrest  of  the  Teresa,  and  one  and  three-tenths 
miles  directly  south  of  the  Colon,  and  one  and  one-tenth  miles  and  a little  behind 
the  Vizcaya,  one  and  three-tenths  miles  and  a little  in  advance  of  the  Oquendo.  The 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


T-.'xas  was  one  and  two-tenths  miles  from  the  Teresa,  a little  behind  it,  and  one  and 
four-tenths  miles  from  and  behind  the  next  Spanish  ship,  the  Oquendo.  The  Iowa 
was  one  and  one-tenth  miles  from  the  Teresa  and  a little  closer  in,  but  not  quite 
as  far  west  as  the  Texas.  The  Oregon  had  pulled  up  and  passed  the  Texas  and 
Iowa,  being  a little  further  in  shore  than  the  Texas  and  a little  further  out  than  the 
Iowa.  It  was  in  advance  of  the  Teresa,  being  one  and  seven-tenths  miles  from  that 
vessel,  six-tenths  of  a mile  from  and  directly  in  the  line  of  the  Oquendo,  seven-tenths 
of  a mile  from  the  Colon,  and  one  and  two-tenths  miles  behind  the  Vizcaya.  The  In- 
diana was  two  miles  from  the  Texas  and  two  and  six-tenths  miles  from  the  Oquendo, 
the  nearest  Spanish  vessel.  The  Gloucester  had  moved  up  six-tenths  of  a mile  and 
was  just  a mile  directly  south  of  Morro. 

“Position  No.  4,  10:20  a.  m.  Oquendo  turned  to  run  ashore.  Only  five  minutes 
elapsed  from  position  No.  3.  All  vessels  had  been  running  westward  without  material 
changes  in  their  positions.  The  Colon  had  run  one  and  three-tenths  miles,  the 
Vizcaya  about  one-tenth  of  a mile  less,  and  swerved  to  the  left,  bringing  it  to  within 
one  and  one-tenth  miles  of  the  Brooklyn.  The  Iowa  was  the  same  distance,  but  al- 
most directly  astern,  and  the  Oregon  was  one  and  three-tenths  miles  from  the  Viz- 
caya, but  farther  out  to  sea.  The  Iowa  was  eight-tenths  of  a mile  from  the  Oquendo, 
the  Oregon  nine-tenths  of  a mile  from  the  same  vessel,  and  both  somewhat  in  ad- 
vance of  the  doomed  Spanish  ship.  The  Indiana  had  advanced  eight-tenths  of  a 
mile  and  was  two  and  six-tenths  miles  away  from  the  Oquendo,  the  nearest  Spanish 
ship.  The  New  York  had  advanced  nearly  a mile,  but  was  not  yet  abreast  of  Morro. 
The  Gloucester  had  run  over  two  miles  and  was  now  well  west  of  Morro,  but  five 
miles  east  of  the  Oquendo. 

“Position  No.  5,  10:30  a.  m.  Furor  blew  up  and  Pluton  turned  to  run  ashore. 
This  is  ten  minutes  later  than  position  No.  4.  The  Gloucester  had  run  a little  more 
than  two  miles,  and  was  four-tenths  of  a mile  from  the  Furor  and  but  little  further 
from  the  riuton.  The  New  York  had  run  two  and  two-tenths  miles,  and  was  three 
and  three-tenths  miles  from  the  Furor,  the  nearest  Spanish  ship,  and  two  and  two- 
tenth.'  miles  south  and  a little  west  of  Morro.  The  Colon  had  run  two  and  nine- 
tenths  miles,  and  the  Vizcaya  two  and  seven-tenths  miles.  The  Brooklyn  had  run 
two  and  three-tenths  miles,  and  was  one  and  two-tenths  miles  from  the  Vizcaya 
and  one  and  six-tenths  miles  from  the  Colon,  which  was  running  nearer  the  shore.  The 
Oregon  had  sailed  two  and  a half  miles,  and  was  one  and  one-half  miles  from  the 
Vizcaya,  and  about  the  same  distance  from  the  Colon.  The  Texas  was  one  and  two- 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


27:5 


tenths  miles  astern  of  the  Oregon,  two  and  four-tenths  miles  from  the  Oregon. 
The  Indiana  was  one  and  one-half  miles  astern  of  the  Texas. 

“Position  No.  6,  11:05  a.  m.  Vizcaya  turned  to  run  ashore.  In  thirty-five 
minutes  the  Vizcaya  had  sailed  about  seven  miles,  and  was  off  the  mouth  of  the 
Aserradero  River.  The  Colon  had  run  five  and  one-half  miles  further,  and  was  more 
than  that  distance  in  advance  of  any  of  the  American  vessels.  The  Brooklyn  was  one 
and  three-tenths  miles  distant  from  the  Vizcaya  and  slightly  behind  it.  The  Oregon 
was  one  and  a half  miles  from  the  Vizcaya,  but  nearer  the  shore  and  somewhat  more 
astern  of  the  enemy.  The  Texas  was  two  and  seven-tenths  miles  from  the  Vizcaya 
and  directly  astern  of  the  Oregon.  The  Iowa  was  three  and  two-tenths  miles  directly 
astern  of  the  Vizcaya.  The  New  York  was  five  miles  behind  the  Iowa.  The  Ericsson 
had  kept  along  with  the  New  York  all  the  time,  and  was,  at  this  position,  one-half 
a mile  in  advance  of  it.  The  Indiana  was  nearly  four  miles  behind  the  Iowa. 

“Position  No.  7,  1:15  p.  m.  The  Colon  surrendered.  In  the  two  hours  and  ten 
minutes  from  the  last  position  given  the  vessels  had  coursed  westward  a great  dis- 
tance. The  Colon  had  run  twenty-six  and  one-half  miles  and  was  off  the  Tarquino 
River.  The  Brooklyn  was  the  nearest  American  vessel.  It  had  sailed  twenty-eight 
and  one-half  miles  and  was  three  and  four-tenths  miles  from  the  Colon.  The  Oregon  was 
four  and  one-half  miles  from  the  Colon  and  more  in  shore  than  the  Brooklyn.  The  Tex- 
as was  three  and  four-tenths  milesbehind  the  Oregon.  TheNew  York  was  nine  and  one- 
half  miles  from  the  Colon.  No  one  of  the  other  vessels  had  come  up  save  the  Vixen, 
which  was  abreast  of  the  New  York.  This  little  vessel  in  the  beginning  of  the  fight 
steamed  out  to  sea  and  sailed  westward  on  a course  about  two  and  one-quarter  miles 
from  that  of  the  nearest  Spanish  ships. 

“The  tracings  of  the  chart  show  that  the  Spanish  vessels  sailed  on  courses  not 
more  than  three-tenths  of  a mile  apart  until  the  Oquendo  ran  ashore.  Then  the  Viz- 
caya veered  out  to  sea  and  the  Colon  kept  nearer  the  shore,  their  courses  being  about 
seven-tenths  of  a mile  apart.  Up  to  the  time  the  Oquendo  went  ashore  the  Iowa, 
Indiana,  Oregon,  and  Texas  sailed  on  courses  within  three-tenths  of  a mile  of  each 
other,  the  Iowa  being  the  nearest  and  the  Texas  the  farthest  from  the  course  of  the 
Spanish  ships.  The  Brooklyn’s  course  was  from  three-tenths  to  one-half  of  a mile 
outside  that  of  the  Texas.  The  swing  to  the  right  which  the  Brooklyn  made  at  the 
beginning  of  the  engagement  shows  an  oval  four-tenths  of  a mile  across.  It  crossed 
the  courses  of  the  Texas,  Oregon,  and  Indiana  twice  while  making  the  turn,  but 
before  these  vessels  had  gone  over  them.  The  course  of  the  New  York  after  passing 
Morro  was  nearer  the  shore  than  any  other  United  States  vessel  except  the  Glouces- 


274 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


ter,  and  a mile  behind  where  the  Oquedo  turned  to  run  ashore  it  passed  inside 
the  courses  of  the  Spanish  vessels.  Ten  miles  west  of  the  Vizcaya  disaster  it  crossed 
the  Colon’s  track,  but  followed  close  the  course  of  that  vessel  until  the  latter  sur- 
rendered. 

“The  Iowa,  Indiana,  and  Ericsson  did  not  go  further  west  than  where  the  Viz- 
caya ran  ashore.  The  Gloucester  stopped  by  the  Maria  Teresa  and  Oquendo,  as 
also  did  the  Hist.  The  latter  vessel  was  not  able  to  keep  pace  with  the  New  York 
and  Ericsson,  the  vessels  it  was  with  at  the  beginning;  of  the  battle.” 

Major  General  Nelson  A.  Miles  was  carrying  on,  as  a master  of  the  art  and  sci- 
ence of  war,  a prospering  campaign  in  Porto  Rico,  when  the  protocol  of  peace  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  Spain  was  signed,  and  “the  war  drum  throbbed”  no 
longer.  It  is  the  testimony  of  those  who  have  studied  the  management  of  the  inva- 
sion of  Porto  Rico  by  the  military  head  of  the  army,  that  it  was  going  on  guided 
with  consummate  skill  when  the  war  closed.  The  American  forces  had  the  pleasure 
in  Porto  Rico  of  moving  in  a country  that  had  not  been  desolated  as  Cuba  was.  The 
island  was  a tropical  picture  of  peace,  only  the  glitter  of  armies  breaking  the  spell. 
The  defenders  had  the  help  of  good  roads,  by  which  they  could,  on  the  inner  lines, 
shift  their  columns  with  rapidity  and  ease.  But  the  Porto  Rico  people  were  largely 
favorable  to  United  States  sovereignty — just  as  the  Cubans  would  be  if  it  were  not 
for  the  selfishness  and  jealousies,  hatreds  and  scheming,  regardless  of  the  favor  or 
prosperity  of  the  people,  that  the  most  deplorable  warfare  known  in  the  later  years 
of  the  earth  has  engendered.  It  was  on  October  18,  1898,  that  the  American 
flag  was  raised  over  San  Juan  de  Porto  Rico.  The  telegram  of  the  Associated  Press 
contained  this  announcement  of  the  ceremony  and  symbol  by  which  was  announced 
the  glorious  initial  chapter  of  a new  dispensation  that  adds  to  America’s  territory  one 
of  the  loveliest  islands  of  the  sea: 

San  Juan  de  Forto  Rico,  Oct.  18. — Promptly  at  noon  to-day  the  American  flag 
was  raised  over  San  Juan.  The  ceremony  was  quiet  and  dignified,  unmarred  by  dis- 
order of  any  kind. 

The  Eleventh  Regular  Infantry,  with  two  batteries  of  the  Fifth  Artillery,  landed 
this  morning.  The  latter  proceeded  to  the  forts,  while’the  infantry  lined  up  on  the 
docks.  It  was  a holiday  for  San  Juan,  and  there  were  many  people  in  the  streets. 

Rear  Admiral  Schley  and  General  Gordon,  accompanied  by  their  staffs,  pro- 
ceeded to  the  palace  in  carriages.  The  Eleventh  infantry  Regiment  and  band,  with 
Troop  II  of  the  Sixth  United  States  Cavalry,  then  marched  through  the  streets  and 
formed  in  the  square  opposite  the  palace. 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


275 


At  11:40  a.  m.  General  Brooke,  Admiral  Schley,  and  General  Gordon,  the  United 
States  Evacuation  Commissioners,  came  out  of  the  palace,  with  many  naval  officers, 
and  formed  on  the  right  side  of  the  square.  The  streets  behind  the  soldiers  were 
thronged  with  townspeople,  who  stood  waiting  in  dead  silence. 

At  last  the  city  clock  struck  the  hour  of  12  and  the  crowds,  almost  breathless  and 
with  eyes  fixed  upon  the  flagpole,  watched  for  developments.  At  the  sound  of  the 
first  gun  from  Fort  Morro,  Major  Dean  and  Lieutenant  Castle,  of  General  Brooke’s 
staff,  hoisted  the  Stars  and  Stripes,  while  the  hand  played  the  “Star  Spangled 
Banner.” 

All  heads  were  hared  and  the  crowds  cheered.  Fort  Morro,  Fort  San  Cristobal, 
and  the  United  States  revenue  cutter  Manning,  lying  in  the  harbor,  fired  twenty-one 
guns  each. 

Senor  Munoz  Rivera,  who  was  President  of  the  recent  autonomist  council  of 
secretaries,  and  other  officials  of  the  late  insular  government,  were  present  at  the  pro- 
ceedings. 

Congratulations  and  handshaking  among  the  American  officers  followed.  En- 
sign King  hoisted  the  Stars  and  Stripes  over  the  intendencia,  hut  all  other  flags  on  the 
various  public  buildings  were  hoisted  by  military  officers.  Simultaneously  wTith  the 
raising  of  the  flag  over  the  Captain  General’s  palace  many  others  were  hoisted  in 
different  parts  of  the  city. 

Washington,  D.  C.,  Oct.  18. — The  War  Department  has  received  the  following 
to-day: 

“San  Juan,  Porto  Rico,  Oct.  18. — Secretary  of  War,  Washington,  D.  C.:  Flags 
have  been  raised  on  public  buildings  and  forts  in  this  city  and  saluted  with  national 
salutes.  The  occupation  of  the  island  is  now  complete. 

“BROOKE,  Chairman.” 

The  two  Spanish  fleets — of  the  East  and  West  Indies,  were  annihilated,  the  for- 
mer May  1st,  and  the  latter  July  2nd,  two  months  and  two  days  between  the  events. 
The  respective  fleets  in  Manila  bay  were  as  follows: 


AMERICAN  FLEET. 


Name. 

Class. 

Armament. 

Men  and 
Officers 

Olympia 

, .Four  8-in.,  ten  5-in.,  24 R.  F 

Baltimore 

. .Four  8-in.,  six  6-in.,  10  R.  F. , . . 

395 

Boston 

. .Two  8-in.,  six  6-in.,  10  R.  F 

Raleigh 

,. One  6-in.,  ten  5-in.,  14  R.  F...., 

295 

Concord 

. .Six  6-in.,  9 R.  F 

150 

Petrel 

. .Four  6-in.,  7 R.  F 

100 

McCulloch. ........ 

..Four  4-in 

EVENTS  OF  TPIE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


27  b 


SPANISH  FLEET. 


Name. 

Class. 

Armament. 

Men  ane 
Officers 

*Reina  Cristina 

. Steel  Cruiser 

. . Six  6.2-in.,  two  2.7.,  13  R.  F 

370 

Castilla 

.Wood  Cruiser 

, . Four  5.9,  two  4.7,  two  3.4,  two  2.9, 12  R.  F.  .300 

Don  Antonio  de  Ulloa. 

Iron  Cruiser 

.Four  4.7,  5 R.  F 

173 

Don  Juan  de  Austria. . 

.Iron  Cruiser 

..Four  4.7,  two  2.7,  21  R.  F 

173 

Isla  de  Luzon 

. Steel  Ptd.  Cruiser. 

. .Six  4.7,  8 R.  F 

164 

Isla  de  Cuba 

. Steel  Ptd.  Cruiser. , 

..Six  4.7,  8 R.  F 

164 

Velasco 

.Won  Cruiser 

. . Three  6-in.,  two  2.7,  two  R.  F. . . 

173 

Marques  del  Duero  . . . . 

.Gunboat 

. .One  6.2,  two  4.7,  1 R.  F 

98 

General  Lezo 

.Gunboat  

. .One  3.5,  1 R.  F 

El  Correo 

.Gunboat 

. . Three  4.7,  4 R.  F 

116 

Quiros 

.Gunboat 

..4  R.  F 

Villalobos 

.Gunboat 

,.4  R F 

60 

Two  torpedo  boats  and  two  transports. 

The  American  squadron  was  thus  officered: 

Acting  Rear  Admiral  George  Dewey,  Commander-in-Chief. 

Commander  B.  P.  Lamberter,  Chief-of-Staff. 

Lieutenant  L.  M.  Brumby,  Flag  Lieutenant. 

Ensign  H.  H.  Caldwell,  Secretary. 

OLYMPIA  (Flagship). 

Captain,  Charles  V.  Gridley.  » 

Lieutenant-Commander,  S.  C.  Paine. 

Lieutenants:  C.  G.  Calkins,  V.  S.  Nelson,  G.  S.  Morgan,  S.  M.  Strite. 

Ensigns:  M.  M.  Taylor,  F.  B.  Upham,  W.  P.  Scott,  A.  G.  Kavanagh,  II.  V. 
Butler. 

Medical  Inspector,  A.  F.  Price;  Passed  Assistant  Surgeon,  J.  E.  Page;  Assistant 
Surgeon,  C.  II.  Kindlcbcrger;  Pay  Inspector,  D.  A.  Smith;  Chief  Engineer,  J.  En- 
twistle;  Assistant  Engineer,  S.  II.  DcLany;  Assistant  Engineer,  J.  F.  Marshall,  Jr.; 
Chaplain,  J.  B.  Frazier:  Captain  of  Marines,  W.  P.  Biddle;  Gunner,  L.  J.  G.  Kuhl- 
wein;  Carpenter,  W.  Macdonald;  Acting  Boatswain,  E.  J.  Norcott. 

THE  BOSTON. 

Captain,  F.  Wildes. 

Lieutenant-Commander,  J.  A.  Norris. 

Lieutenants:  J.  Gibson,  W.  L.  Howard. 

Ensigns:  S.  S.  Robinson,  L.  H.  Everhart,  J.  S.  Doddridge. 

Surgeon,  M.  IT.  Crawford;  Assistant  Surgeon,  R.  S.  Balkeman;  Paymaster,  J.  R. 
Martin;  Chief  Engineer.  G.  B.  Ransom;  Assistant  Engineer.  L.  J.  James;  First  Lieu- 
tenant of  Marines,  R.  McM.  Dutton;  Gunner,  J.  C.  Evans;  Carpenter,  I.  H.  Hilton. 


EVENTS  OP  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


277 


U.  S.  STEAMSHIP  BALTIMORE. 

Captain,  N.  M.  Dyer. 

Lieutenant-Commander,  G,  Bloeklinger. 

Lieutenants:  W.  Braunersreuther,  F.  W.  Kellogg,  J.  M.  Ellicott,  C.  S-  Stan- 
worth. 

Ensigns:  G.  H.  Hayward,  M.  J.  McCormack,  TJ.  E.  Irwin. 

Naval  Cadets,  D.  W.  Wurtsbaugh,  I.  Z.  Wettersoll,  C.  M.  Tozer  T.  A Karney; 
Passed  Assistant  Surgeon,  F.  A.  Heiseler;  Assistant  Surgeon,  R.  K.  Smith;  Pay 
Inspector,  E.  Bellows;  Chief  Engineer,  A.  C.  Engard;  Assistant  Engineers,  II.  B, 
Price,  H.  I.  Cone;  Naval  Cadet  (engineer),  C.  P.  Burt;  Chaplain.  T.  S.  K.  Free- 
man; First  Lieutenant  of  Marines,  D.  Williams;  Acting  Boatswain,  II.  R.  Braytonj 
Gunner,  L.  J.  Connelly;  Acting  Gunner,  L.  J.  Waller;  Carpenter,  0.  Bath. 

U.  S.  STEAMSHIP  RALEIGH. 

Captain,  J.  B.  Coghlan. 

Lieutenant-Commander,  F.  Singer. 

Lieutenants:  W.  Winder,  B.  Tappan,  H.  Rodman,  C.  B.  Morgan. 

Ensigns:  F.  L.  Chidwick,  P.  Babin. 

Surgeon,  E.  H.  Marsteller;  Assistant  Surgeon,  D.  N.  Carpenter;  Passed  Assistant 
Paymaster,  S.  R.  Heap;  Chief  Engineer,  F.  II.  Bailey;  Passed  Assistant  Engineer, 
A.  S.  Halstead;  Assistant  Engineer,  J.  R.  Brady;  First  Lieutenant  of  Marines,  T.  C. 
Treadwell;  Acting  Gunner,  G.  D.  Johnstone;  Acting  Carpenter,  T.  E.  Kiley. 

THE  CONCORD. 

Commander,  A.  S.  Walker. 

Lieutenant-Commander,  G.  P.  Colvocoreses. 

Lieutenants:  T.  B.  Howard,  P.  W.  Hourigan. 

Ensigns:  L.  A.  Kiser,  W.  C.  Davidson,  0.  S.  Knepper. 

Passed  Assistant  Surgeon,  R.  G.  Broderick;  Passed  Assistant  Paymaster,  E.  D. 
Ryan;  Chief  Engineer,  Richard  Inch;  Passed  Assistant  Engineer,  II.  W.  Jones;  As- 
sistant Engineer,  E.  H.  Dunn. 

THE  PETREL. 

Commander,  E.  P.  Wood. 

Lieutenants:  E.  M.  Hughes,  B.  A.  Fiske,  A.  N.  Wood,  C.  P.  Plunkett. 

Ensigns:  G.  L.  Fermier,  W.  S.  Montgomery. 

Passed  .Assistant  Surgeon,  C.  D.  Brownell;  Assistant  Paymaster,  G.  G.  SiebeRs; 
Passed  Assistant ’Engineer,  R.  T.  Hall. 


278 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


The  marvel  of  the  naval  engagements  that  disarmed  Spain  in  both  the  Indies,  is 
that  only  one  American  was  killed  in  the  Santiago  action,  and  the  only  man  who 
lost  his  life  on  Dewey’s  fleet  was  overcome  by  heat.  The  Spaniards  were  deceived 
as  well  as  surprised  at  Manila,  the  deception  being  their  dependence  upon  the  belief 
that  the  Americans  would  take  it  for  granted  that  the  falsified  official  charts  were  cor- 
rect, and  stand  off.  The  course  of  the  American  fleet,  finding  with  the  lead  on  the 
first  round  32  feet  of  water  where  the  chart  said  15,  dismayed  the  enemy.  The 
Spanish  had  hut  one  chance  to  cripple  Dewey,  and  that  was  by  closing  with  him, 
but  they  never  seem,  except  in  the  case  of  the  flagship,  to  have  contemplated  taking 
the  offensive. 

In  the  course  of  the  war  crowded  with  victory,  two  Spanish  fleets  were  destroyed, 
two  Spanish  armies  surrendered,  thirty-six  thousand  soldiers  and  sailors  of  Spain 
made  prisoners  of  war,  the  only  heavy  losses  of  Americans  were  at  Santiago,  and 
they  happened  because  in  the  terrible  climate  of  Cuba  in  summer,  for  those  unaccus- 
tomed to  it  and  fweed  to  be  in  the  rain  and  sleep  on  the  ground,  it  was  necessary  to 
carry  the  enemy’s  lines  of  defense  by  assault,  because  it  was  certain  that  delay  would 
be  destruction  of  the  troops.  The  campaign  was  hurried  and  short,  but  such  was  the  ■ 
effect  of  the  few  weeks  spent  in  Cuba  that,  bloody  as  were  the  first  days  of  July,  the 
weeks  succeeding  witnessed  the  death  from  sickness  of  more  soldiers  than  fell  in 
battle. 

Not  until  November  5,  1898,  did  the  State  Department  make  public  the  complete 
text  of  the  Protocol  between  the  United  States  and  Spain  for  the  preliminary  set- 
tlement of  the  war.  A copy  was  cabled  to  this  country  from  the  French  translation, 
but  the  department  here  never  gave  out  the  text  of  the  document  in  official  form. 
The  Protocol  textually  is  as  follows: 

“Protocol  of  agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Spain,  embodying  the 
terms  of  a basis  for  the  establishment  of  peace  between  the  two  countries,  signed  at 
Washington  Aug.  12,  1898.  Protocol:  William  R.  Day,  Secretary  of  State  of  the 
United  States,  and  his  Excellency,  Jules  Cambon,  Ambassador  Extraordinary  and 
Plenipotentiary  of  the  Republic  of  France  at  V ashington,  respectively  possessing 
for  this  purpose  full  authority  from  the  government  of  the  L nited  States  and  the 
government  of  Spain,  have  concluded  and  signed  the  following  articles,  embodying 
the  terms  on  which  the  two  governments  have  agreed  in  respect  to  the  matters  here- 
inafter set  forth,  having  in  view  the  establishment  of  peace  between  the  two  countries 
— that  is  to  say: 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH-AMERICAN  WAR. 


270 


ARTICLE  I. 

“Spain  will  relinquish  all  claim  of  sovereignty  over  and  title  to  Cuba. 

ARTICLE  II. 

“Spain  will  cede  to  the  United  States  the  Island  of  Porto  Rico  and  other  islands 
now  under  Spanish  sovereignty  in  the  West  Indies,  and  also  an  island  in  the  Ladrones, 
to  be  selected  by  the  United  States. 

ARTICLE  III. 

“The  United  States  will  occupy  and  hold  the  City,  Bay,  and  Harbor  of  Manila, 
pending  the  conclusion  of  a treaty  of  peace,  which  shall  determine  the  control,  dispo- 
sition, and  government  of  the  Philippines. 

ARTICLE  IV. 

“Spain  will  immediately  evacuate  Cuba,  Porto  Rico,  and  other  islands  now 
under  Spanish  sovereignty  in  the  West  Indies,  and  to  this  end  each  government 
will,  within  ten  days  after  the  signing  of  this  protocol,  appoint  commissioners,  and 
the  commissioners  so  appointed  shall,  within  thirty  days  after  the  signing  of  this 
protocol,  meet  at  Havana  for  the  purpose  of  arranging  and  carrying  out  the  details 
of  the  aforesaid  evacuation  of  Cuba  and  the  adjacent  Spanish  islands;  and  each 
government  will,  within  ten  days  after  the  signing  of  this  protocol,  also  appoint 
other  commissioners,  who  shall,  within  thirty  days  after  the  signing  of  this  protocol, 
meet  at  San  Juan,  Porto  Rico,  for  the  purpose  of  arranging  and  carrying  out  the 
details  of  the  aforesaid  evacuation  of  Porto  Rico  and  other  islands  now  under 
Spanish  sovereignty  in  the  West  Indies. 

ARTICLE  V. 

“The  United  States  and  Spain  will  each  appoint  not  more  than  five  commission- 
ers to  treat  of  peace,  and  the  commissioners  so  appointed  shall  meet  at  Paris  not 
later  than  Oct.  1,  1898,  and  proceed  to  the  negotiation  and  conclusion  of  a treaty 
of  peace,  which  treaty  shall  be  subject  to  ratification  according  to  the  respective 
constitutional  forms  of  the  two  countries. 


280 


EVENTS  OF  THE  SPANISH- AMERICAN  WAR. 


ARTICLE  VI. 

“Upon  the  conclusion  and  signing  of  this  protocol  hostilities  between  the  two 
countries  shall  he  suspended,  and  notice  to  that  effect  shall  he  given  as  soon  as 
possible  by  each  government  to  the  commanders  of  its  military  and  naval  forces. 

“Done  at  Washington  in  duplicate,  in  English  and  in  French,  by  the  undersigned, 
who  have  hereunto  set  their  hands  and  seals,  the  12th  day  of  August.  1898. 

“WILLIAM  R.  DAY. 

“JULES  C AMBON.” 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


L 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 

The  Lessons  of  War  in  the  Joy  Over  Peace  in  the  Celebrations  at  Chicago  and 
Philadelphia — Orations  by  Archbishop  Ireland  and  Judge  Emory  Speer — 
The  President’s  Few  Words  of  Thrilling  Significance — The  Parade  of  the 
Loyal  League,  and  Clover  Club  Banquet  at  Philadelphia — Address  by  the 
President — The  Hero  Hobson  Makes  a Speech — Fighting  Bob  Evans’  Start- 
ling Battle  Picture — The  Destruction  of  Cervera’s  Fleet — The  Proclama- 
tion of  Thanksgiving. 

The  lessons  of  war — that  which  has  been  through  it  accomplished  for  the  country 
— the  new  lands  over  which  our  sovereignty  is  established — the  gain  in  the  national 
character — the  increased  immensity  of  the  outlook  of  destiny,  found  impressive 
expression  in  the  peace  jubilee,  the  President  of  the  United  States  participating, 
and  interpreting  history  with  dignity,  in  great  Chicago,  the  giant  of  the  West  and 
North,  and  Philadelphia,  the  holy  city  of  Independence  Hall  and  the  liberty  bell. 

Of  the  celebrations  of  Peace  with  honor  anc[  victory,  the  first  was  that  at  Chi- 
cago, and  it  will  be  memorable  for  remarkable  speeches  in  which  many  orators  ros$ 
to  the  height  of  the  occasion,  their  speeches  worthy  of  celebrity  and  certain  to  give 
imperishable  passages  to  the  school  books  of  the  future.  We  have  to  pass  over 
much  of  meritorious  distinction,  and  confine  ourselves  in  the  selections  for  these 
pages,  to  the  utterances  of  the  President— Archbishop  Ireland,  whose  golden  periods 
of  Americanism  ring  through  the  land,  and  the  Southern  orator,  Judge  Emory  Speer, 
of  Georgia,  whose  patriotism  springs  forth  and  elevates  the  nobility  of  his  thought, 
and  touches  with  sacred  fire  the  ruddy  glow  of  his  eloquence. 

“Lead,  my  country,  in  peace!”  was  Archbishop  Ireland’s  passionate  exclamation, 
the  key-note  of  his  oration.  He  said: 

“War  lias  passed;  peace  reigns.  Stilled  over  land  and  sea  is  the  clang  of  arms; 
from  San  Juan  to  Manila,  fearless  and  triumphant,  floats  the  star  spangled  banner. 
America,  ‘Be  glad  and  rejoice,  for  the  Lord  hath  done  great  things.5  America, 
with  whole  heart  and  soul,  celebrate  thy  jubilee  of  peace. 

“Welcome  to  America,  sweet,  beloved  peace;  welcome  to  America,  honored, 
glorious  victory.  Oh,  peace,  thou  art  heaven’s  gift  to  men.  When  the  Savior  of  hu- 
manity was  born  in  Bethlehem  the  sky  sang  forth,  ‘Glory  to  God  in  the  highest; 
and  on  earth  peace  and  good  will  to  men.5  Peace  was  offered  to  the  world  through 

281 


2S2 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


Christ,  and  when  the  spirit  of  Christ  is  supreme,  there  is  universal  peace — peace 
among  men,  peace  among  nations. 

“Oh,  peace,  so  precious  art  thou  to  humanity  that  our  highest  ideal  of  social 
felicity  must  ever  be  thy  sovereignty  upon  earth.  Pagan  statesmanship,  speaking 
through  pagan  poetry,  exclaims:  ‘The  best  of  things  which  it  is  given  to  know 

is  peace;  better  than  a thousand  triumphs  is  the  simple  gift  of  peace.’  The  regen- 
erated world  shall  not  lift  up  sword  against  sword;  neither  shall  they  be  exercised 
any  more  in  war. 

“Peace  is  the  normal  flow  of  humanity’s  life,  the  healthy  pulsation  of  humanity’s 
social  organism,  the  vital  condition  of  humanity’s  growth  and  happiness. 

“ ‘0  first  of  human  blessings  and  supreme, 

Fair  Peace!  how  lovely,  how  delightful  thou. 
***** 

Oh  peace!  thou  soul  and  source  of  social  life, 

Beneath  whose  calm  inspiring  influence 
Science  his  views  enlarges,  art  refines, 

And  swelling  commerce  opens  all  her  ports. 

Blessed  be  the  man  divine  who  gave  us  thee.’ 

“The  praise  of  peace  is  proclaimed  beyond  need  of  other  words,  when  men  com 
fess  that  the  only  possible  justification  of  war  is  the  establishment  of  peace.  Peace, 
we  prize  thee. 

“ ‘But  the  better  thou, 

The  richer  of  delight,  sometime  the  more 
Inevitable  war.’ 

“ ‘Pasis  imponero  morem’ — to  enforce  the  law  of  peace:  this,  the  sole  moral 
argument  which  God  and  humanity  allow  for  war.  0 peace,  welcome  ag^in  to 
America. 

“War — how  dreadful  thou  art!  I shall  not,  indeed,  declare  thee  to  be  immoral, 
ever  unnecessary,  ever  accursed.  Xo;  I shall  not  so  arraign  thee  as  to  mete  plenary 
condemnation  to  the  whole  past  history  of  nations,  to  the  whole  past  history  ol 
my  own  America.  But  that  thou  art  ever  dreadful,  ever  barbarous,  I shall  not  deny. 
War!  Is  it  by  cunning  design — in  order  to  hide  from  men  thy  true  nature — that 
pomp  and  circumstance  attend  thy  march;  that  poetry  and  music  set  in  brightest 
colors,  the  rays  of  light  struggling  through  thy  heavy  darkness,  that  history  weaves 
into  threads  of  richest  glory  the  woes  and  virtues  of  thy  victims?  Stripped  of  thy 
show  and  tinsel,  what  art  thou  but  the  slaying  of  men? — the  slaying  of  men  by  the 
thousands,  aye,  often  by  the  tens,  by  the  hundreds  of  thousands. 

“With  the  steady  aim  and  relentless  energy  tasking  science  to  its  utmost  ingenu- 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


009 
£oo 

ity,  the  multitudes  of  men  to  their  utmost  endurance,  whole  nations  work  day  and 
night,  fitting  ourselves  for  the  quick  and  extensive  killing  of  men.  This  preparation 
for  war.  Armies  meet  on  the  field  of  battle;  shot  and  shell  rend  the  air;  men  fall  to 
the  ground  like  leaves  in  autumnal  storms,  bleeding,  agonizing,  dying;  the  earth  is 
reddened  by  human  blood;  the  more  gory  the  earth  beneath  the  tread  of  one  army 
the  louder  the  revel  of  victory  in  the  ranks  of  the  other.  This,  the  actual  conflict 
of  war.  From  north  to  south,  from  east  to  west,  through  both  countries  whose 
flags  were  raised  over  the  field  of  battle,  homes  not  to  be  numbered  mourned  in  soul- 
wrecking grief,  for  husband,  father,  son  or  brother  who  sank  beneath  the  foeman’s 
steel  or  yielded  life  within  the  fever  tent,  or  who,  surviving  shot  and  malady,  carries 
back  to  his  loved  ones  a maimed  or  weakened  body.  This,  the  result  of  war. 

“Reduced  to  the  smallest  sacrifice  of  human  life  the  carnage  of  the  battlefields, 
some  one  has  died  and  some  one  is  bereft.  ‘Only  one  killed,’  the  headline  reads. 
The  glad  news  speeds.  The  newsboys  cry:  ‘Killed  only  one.’  ‘He  was  my  son. 
What  were  a thousand  to  this  one — my  only  son.’ 

“It  was  Wellington  who  said:  ‘Take  my  word  for  it,  if  you  had  seen  but  one 
day  of  war  you  would  pray  to  Almighty  God  that  you  might  never  see  such  a thing 
again.’  It  was  Napoleon  who  said:  ‘The  sight  of  a battlefield  after  the  fight  is 

enough  to  inspire  princes  with  a love  of  peace  and  a horror  of  war.’ 

“War,  be  thou  gone  from  my  soul’s  sight!  I thank  the  good  God  that  thy 
ghastly  specter  stands  no  longer  upon  the  thresholds  of  the  homes  of  my  fellow 
countrymen  in  America,  or  my  fellow  beings  in  distant  Andalusia.  When,  I ask 
heaven,  shall  humanity  rise  to  such  heights  of  reason  and  of  religion  that  war  shall 
be  impossible,  and  stories  of  battlefields  but  the  saddening  echoes  of  primitive  ages 
of  the  race? 

“And  yet,  while  we  await  that  blessed  day,  when  embodied  justice  shall  sit  in 
judgment  between  peoples  as  between  individuals,  from  time  to  time  conditions  more 
repellant  than  war  may  confront  a nation,  and  to  remove  such  conditions  as  the 
solemn  dictates  of  reason  and  religion  impose  was  as  righteous  and  obligatory.  Let 
the  life  of  a nation  or  the  integrity  of  its  territory  be  menaced,  let  the  honor  of  a 
nation  be  assailed,  let  the  grievous  crime  against  humanity  be  perpetrated  within 
reach  of  a nation’s  flag  or  a nation’s  arm,  reiterated  appeals  or  argument  and  diplo- 
macy failing,  what  else  remains  to  a nation  which  is  not  so  base  as  to  court  death  or 
dishonor  but  to  challenge  the  fortunes  of  war  and  give  battle  while  strength  remains 
in  defense  of  ‘its  hearthstones  and  its  altars’?  War,  indeed,  is  dreadful;  but  let  it 
come;  the  sky  may  fall,  but  let  justice  be  done.  War  is  no  longer  a repudiation  of 


•284 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


pt-ace,  but  the  means  to  peace — to  the  soul  peace  a self-sacrificing  people  may  enjoy 
— peace  with  honor. 

“A  just  and  necessary  war  is  holy.  The  men  who  at  country’s  call  engage  in 
such  a war  are  the  country’s  heroes,  to  whom  must  be  given  unstinted  gratitude  and 
unstinted  praise.  The  sword  in  their  hands  is  the  emblem  of  self-sacrifice  and  of 
valor;  the  flag  which  bears  them  betokens  their  country  and  bids  them  pour  out 
in  oblation  to  purest  patriotism  the  life  blood  of  their  hearts;  the  shroud  which 
spreads  over  the  dead  of  the  battlefield  is  the  mantle  of  fame  and  of  glory. 

“Happy  the  nation  which  has  the  courage  of  a just  war,  no  less  than  that  of 
a just  peace,  whose  sons  are  able  and  willing  to  serve  her  with  honor  alike  in  war 
and  in  peace.  Happy  the  nation  whose  jubilee  of  peace,  when  war  has  ceased,  is  also 
a jubilee  of  victory. 

“ ‘We  love  peace,  not  war,  but  when  we  go  to  war  we  send  it  the  best  and  bravest 
of  the  country.’  These  words,  spoken  a few  days  ago  by  the  chief  magistrate  of 
America,  embody  a great  principle  of  American  life. 

Six  months  ago  the  congress  of  the  United  States  declared  that  in  the  name  of 
humanity  war  should  be  waged  in  order  to  give  to  the  island  of  Cuba  a stable  and 
independent  government.  Magnificent  patriotism  of  America.  The  people  of  the 
United  States  at  once  rose  in  their  might.  They  argued  not,  they  hesitated  not. 
America  had  spoken;  theirs  was  not  to  judge  but  to  obey.  In  a moment  the  money 
of  America,  the  lives  of  America,  were  at  the  disposal  of  the  chief  magistrate  of  the 
nation,  whose  embarrassment  was  the  too  generous  response  to  his  appeal  for  means 
to  bring  victory  to  the  nation’s  flag.  America  had  spoken.  Partisan  politics,  sectional 
disputes  instantly  were  stilled  beneath  the  majesty  of  her  voice.  Oft  it  had  been 
whispered  that  we  had  a North  and  a South.  When  America  spoke  we  knew  that  we 
were  but  one  people;  that  all  were  Americans.  It  had  been  whispered  that  social 
and  economic  lines  were  hopelessly  dividing  the  American  people,  and  that  patriotism 
was  retreating  before  the  growth  of  class  interests  and  class  prejudices. 

“But  when  America  spoke  there  was  no  one  in  the  land  who  was  not  an  Ameri- 
can; the  laborer  dropped  his  hammer;  the  farmer  turned  from  his  plow;  the  mer- 
chant forgot  his  counting-room;  the  millionaire  closed  the  door  of  his  mansion;  and 
side  by  side,  equal  in  love  of  country;  their  resolve  to  serve  her,  they  marched  to 
danger  and  to  death.  America  can  never  doubt  the  united  loyalty  of  her  whole 
population,  nor  the  power  which  such  united  loyalty  puts  into  her  hand. 

“And  what  may  I not  say  in  eulogy  of  the  sentiment  of  humanity,  that  in  union 
with  their  natriotism  swayed  the  hearts  of  the  American  people,  and  in  their  vision 


L 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE.  285 

invested  the  war  with  the  halo  of  highest  and  most  sacred  duty  to  fellow-men? 
I speak  of  the  great  multitude,  whom  we  name  the  American  people.  They  had  been 
told  of  dire  suffering  by  neighboring  people — struggling  for  peace  and  liberty;  they 
believed  that  only  through  war  could  they  acquit  themselves  of  the  sacred  duty  of 
rescuing  that  people  from  their  sufferings.  I state  a broad,  undeniable  fact.  The 
dominating,  impelling  motive  of  the  war  in  the  depths  of  the  national  heart  of  Amer- 
ica was  the  sentiment  of  humanity.  The  people  of  America  offered  their  lives 
through  no  sordid  ambition  of  pecuniary  gain,  of  conquest  of  territory,  of  national 
aggrandizement.  Theirs  was  the  high-born  ambition  to  succor  fellowmen. 

“What  strength  and  power  America  was  found  to  possess.  When  war  was  de- 
clared, so  small  was  her  army,  so  small  her  navy  that  the  thought  of  war  coming 
upon  the  country  affrighted  for  the  moment  her  own  citizens  and  excited  the  de- 
risive smiles  of  foreigners.  Of  her  latent  resources  no  doubt  was  possible;  but  how 
much  time  was  needed  to  utilize  them,  and,  meanwhile,  how  much  humiliation  was 
possible.  The  President  waved  his  wand;  instantly  armies  and  navies  were  created 
as  by  magic.  Within  a few  weeks  a quarter  of  a million  of  men  were  formed  into 
regiments  and  army  corps;  vessels  of  war  and  transport  ships  were  covering  the 
seas;  upon  water  and  land  battles  were  fought  and  great  victories  won,  from  one 
side  of  the  globe  to  the  other.  I know  not  of  similar  feats  in  history.  What  if  in  this 
bewildering  rush  of  a nation  to  arms  one  department  or  another  of  the  national 
administration  was  unable  to  put  in  a moment  its  hand  upon  all  the  details  which  a 
thoroughly  rounded  equipment  required?  The  wonder  is  that  the  things  that  were 
done  could  at  all  have  been  done,  and  that  what  was  done  so  quickly  could  have 
been  done  so  well.  The  wonder  is  that  this  sudden  creation  of  such  vast  military 
forces  was  possible,  even  in  America 

“What  prowess  in  action,  what  intellect  in  planning,  what  skill  in  execution,  were 
displayed  by  soldiers  and  seamen,  by  men  and  officers.  Magnificent  the  sweep  of 
Dewey’s  squadron  in  Manila  harbor.  Magnificent  the  broadsides  from  Sampson’s 
fleet  upon  Cervera’s  fleeing  ships.  Magnificent  the  charge  of  regiments  of  regular 
infantry,  and  of  Eoosevelt’s  riders  up  the  hills  of  El  Caney.  Never  daunted,  never 
calculating  defeat,  every  man  determined  to  die  or  conquer,  every  man  knowing  his 
duty,  how  to  do  it — the  soldiers  and  seamen  of  America  were  invincible.  Spanish 
fleets  and  Spanish  armies  vanished  before  them  as  mists  before  the  morning  sun; 
the  nations  of  the  earth  stood  amazed  in  the  presence  of  such  quick  and  decisive 
triumphs,  at  what  America  had  done  and  at  what,  they  now  understood,  America 
could  do. 


286 


•THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


The  war  is  ended.  It  would  ill  become  me  to  say  what  details  shall  enter  into 
the  treaty  of  peace  which  America  is  concluding  with  her  vanquished  foe.  I stand 
in  the  presence  of  the  chief  magistrate  of  the  republic.  To  him  it  belongs  by  right 
of  official  position  and  of  personal  wisdom  to  prescribe  those  details.  The  country 
has  learned  from  the  acts  of  his  administration  that  to  his  patriotism,  his  courage, 
his  prudence,  she  may  well  confide  her  safety,  her  honor,  her  destiny,  her  peace. 
Whatever  the  treaty  of  Sapin,  America  will  be  pleased  when  appended  to  this  treaty 
is  the  name  of  William  McKinley. 

“What  I may  speak  of  on  this  occasion  is  the  results  of  the  war,  manifest  even 
in  this  hour  to  America  and  to  the  world,  transcending  and  independent  of  all  treaties 
of  peace,  possessing  for  America  and  the  world  a meaning  far  mightier  than  mere  ac- 
cumulation of  material  wealth  or  commercial  concessions  or  territorial  extension. 

“To  do  great  things,  to  meet  fitly  great  responsibilities,  a nation,  like  a person, 
must  be  conscious  of  its  dignity  and  its  power.  The  consciousness  of  what  she  is 
and  what  she  may  be  has  come  to  America.  She  knows  that  she  is  a great  nation. 
The  elements  of  greatness  were  not  imparted  by  the  war;  but  they  were  revealed  to 
her  by  the  war,  and  their  vitality  and  their  significance  were  increased  through 
the  war. 

“To  take  its  proper  place  among  the  older  nations  of  the  earth  a nation  must 
be  known  as  she  is  to  those  nations.  The  world  to-day  as  ne’er  before  knows  and 
confesses  the  greatness  and  the  power  of  America.  The  world  to-day  admires  and 
respects  America.  The  young  giant  of  the  West,  heretofore  neglected  and  almost 
despised  in  his  remoteness  ancl  isolation,  has  begun  to  move  a;  becomes  his  stature; 
the  world  sees  what  he  is  and  pictures  what  he  may  be. 

“All  this  does  not  happen  by  chance  or  accident.  An  all-ruling  Providence 
directs  the  movements  of  humanity.  What  we  witness  is  a momentous  dispensation 
from  the  master  of  men.  ‘Magnus  ab  integro  saeelorum  nascitur  ordo — with  the 
revolution  of  centuries  there  is  born  to  the  world  a new  order  of  things,’  sang  the 
Mantuan  poet  at  the  birth  of  the  Augustan  age.  So  to-day  we  proclaim  a new  order 
of  tilings  has  appeared. 

“America  is  too  great  to  be  isolated  from  the  world  around  her  and  beyond  her. 
She  is  a world  power,  to  whom  no  world  interest  is  alien,  whose  voice  reaches 
afar,  whose  spirit  travels  across  seas  and  mountain  ranges  to  most  distant  continents 
and  islands — and  with  America  goes  far  and  wide  what  America  in  the  grandest 
ideal  represents — democracy  and  liberty,  a government  of  the  people,  by  the  people, 
for  the  puople.  This  is  Americanism  more  than  American  territory,  or  American 


THE  PRINCIPAL  GATE  TO  THE  WALLED  CITY. 


PUBLIC  SQUARE  IN  MANILA. 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


289 


shipping,  or  American  soldiery.  Where  this  grandest  ideal  of  American  life  is  not 
held  supreme  America  has  not  reached,  where  this  ideal  is  supreme  America  reigns. 
The  vital  significance  of  America’s  triumphs  is  not  understood  unless  by  those 
triumphs  is  understood  the  triumph  of  democracy  and  of  liberty. 

“If  it  was  ever  allowed  to  nations  to  rejoice  over  the  result  of  their  wars,  America 
may  rejoice  to-day.  Shall  we  then  chant  the  praises  of  war  and  change  this  jubilee 
of  peace  into  a jubilee  of  war?  Heaven  forbid! 

“ ‘We  love  peace,  not  war.’  The  greatness  of  America  makes  it  imperative  upon 
her  to  profess  peace — peace  to-day,  peace  to-morrow.  Her  mission  as  a world  power 
demands  that  she  be  a messenger,  an  advocate  of  peace  before  the  world.  Fain  would 
we  make  her  jubilee  of  peace  a jubilee  of  peace  for  all  nations.  At  least  the  message 
from  it  to  the  world  shall  be  a message  of  peace. 

“That  at  times  wonderful  things  come  through  war,  we  must  admit;  but  that 
they  come  through  war  and  not  through  the  methods  of  peaceful  justice,  we  must 
ever  regret.  When  they  do  come  through  war,  their  beauty  and  grandeur  are  dimmed 
by  the  memory  of  the  sufferings  and  carnage  which  were  their  price. 

“We  say  in  defense  of  war  that  its  purpose  is  justice;  but  is  it  worthy  of  Christian 
civilization  that  there  is  no  other  way  to  justice  than  war,  that  nations  are  forced 
to  stoop  to  the  methods  of  the  animal  and  savage?  Time  was  when  individuals  gave 
battle  to  one  another  in  the  name  of  justice;  it  was  the  time  of  social  barbarism. 
Tribunals  have  since  taken  to  themselves  the  administration  of  justice,  and  how 
much  better  it  is  for  the  happiness  and  progress  of  mankind. 

“It  is  force,  or  chance,  that  decides  the  issue  of  the  battle.  Justice  herself  is  not 
heard;  the  decision  of  justice  is  what  it  was  before  the  battle,  the  judgment  of  one 
party.  Must  we  not  hope  that  with  the  widening  influence  of  reason  and  of  religion 
among  men,  the  day  is  approaching  when  justice  shall  be  enthroned  upon  a great 
international  tribunal,  before  which  nations  shall  bow,  demanding  from  it  judgment 
and  peace?  Say  what  we  will,  our  civilization  is  a vain  boast. 

“ ‘Till  the  war  drum  throbs  no  longer,  and  the  battle  flags  are  furled 
In  the  parliament  of  man,  the  federation  of  the  world. 

There  the  common  sense  of  most  shall  hold  a fretful  realm  in  awe, 

And  the  kindly  earth  shall  slumber,  wrapt  in  universal  law.’ 

“It  is  America’s  great  soldier  who  said: 

“ ‘Though  I have  been  trained  as  a soldier,  and  have  participated  in  many  bat- 
tles, there  never  was  a time  -when,  in  my  opinion,  some  way  could  not  have  been 
found  of  preventing  the  drawing  of  the  sword.  I look  forward  to  an  epoch  when  * 


200 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


court,  recognized  by  all  nations,  will  settle  international  differences,  instead  of  keep- 
ing large  standing  armies,  as  they  do  in  Europe.’  Shall  we  not  allow  the  words  of 
General  Grant  to  go  forth  as  the  message  of  America? 

“Some  weeks  ago  the  Czar  of  Russia  said:  ‘The  maintenance  of  general  peace 
and  possible  reduction  of  the  excessive  armaments  which  weigh  upon  all  nations 
present  themselves  in  the  existing  condition  of  the  whole  world  as  an  ideal  towards 
which  the  endeavors  of  all  governments  should  he  directed,’  and  in  accordance  with 
those  views  he  invited  all  nations  to  send  representatives  to  an  international  peace 
congress,  in  which  the  question  of  reducing  the  armaments  of  the  several  countries 
of  the  world  and  otherwise  preparing  some  plan  for  the  prevention  of  wars  might  he 
discussed. 

“Shall  not  America  send  to  St.  Petersburg  a message  of  good  will,  a promise  of 
earnest  co-operation?  America,  great  and  powerful,  can  afford  to  speak  of  peace. 
Words  of  peace  from  her  will  he  the  more  gracious  and  timely,  as  they  who  do 
not  know  her  say  that,  maddened  by  her  recent  triumphs,  she  is  now  committed 
beyond  return  to  a policy  of  militarism  and  of  conquest. 

“Lead,  my  country,  in  peace — in  peace  for  thyself,  in  peace  for  the  world.  When 
war  is  necessary,  lead,  we  pray  thee,  in  war;  hut  when  peace  is  possible,  lead,  we  pray 
thee  yet  more,  lead  in  peace;  lead  in  all  that  makes  for  peace,  that  prepares  the 
world  for  peeae. 

“America,  the  eyes  of  the  world  are  upon  thee.  Thou  livest  for  the  world.  The 
new  era  is  shedding  its  light  upon  thee,  and  through  thee  upon  the  whole  world. 
Thy  greatness  and  thy  power  daze  me;  even  more,  thy  responsibilities  to  God  and 
to  humanity  daze  me — I would  say  affright  me.  America,  thou  failing,  democracy 
and  liberty  fail  throughout  the  world. 

“And  now  know,  in  the  day  of  thy  triumphs  and  victories,  what  guards  democ- 
racy and  liberty,  what  is  thy  true  grandeur.  Xot  in  commerce  and  industry,  not  in 
ships  and  in  armies,  are  the  safety  and  the  grandeur  of  nations,  and,  more  especially, 
of  republics.  Intelligence  and  virtue  build  up  nations  and  save  them;  without  in- 
telligence and  virtue,  material  wealth  and  victorious  armies  bring  corruption  to 
nations  and  precipitate  the  ruin  of  liberty. 

“And  now,  America,  the  country  of  our  pride,  our  love,  our  hope,  we  remit  thee 
for  to-day  and  for  to-morrow  into  the  hands  of  the  Almighty  God,  under  whose  pro- 
tecting hand  thou  canst  not  fail,  whose  commandments  are  the  supreme  rules  of 
truth  and  righteousness.” 

The  Archbishop  was  followed  by  Judge  Speer,  of  Georgia: 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


291 

"Mr.  President,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen:  Spain  had  long  been  our  near  and 

dangerous  neighbor.  Its  people  have  a degree  of  reverence  almost  superstitious 
for  monarchy,  and  regard  republican  institutions  with  great  disfavor.  It  has  been 
said  of  Spain  that  some  incurable  vice  in  her  organization,  or  it  may  be  in  the  tem- 
per of  her  people,  neutralizes  all  of  the  advantages  she  ought  to  derive  from  her 
sturdy  hardihood,  her  nearly  perfect  capacity  for  endurance  and  the  somber  genius 
alike  for  war,  for  art  and  for  literature,  which  has  so  often  marked  her  sons.  While 
this  seems  to  be  true,  the  Spaniard  is  not  only  a formidable  antagonist,  but  there  is 
a wealth  of  interest  and  charm  in  his  rich,  romantic  history  which  commands  the 
admiration  of  a generous  foeman.  This  must  be  accorded,  whether  we  contemplate 
that  ancient  people  as  they  alternately  resist  the  aggressions  of  Carthage  and  of 
Rome,  the  fierce  cavalry  of  Hamilcar,  the  legions  of  Scipio,  of  Pompey  and  of  Caesar, 
or  in  more  recent  times  the  achievements  of  their  renowned  infantry  which  broke  to 
fragments  the  best  armies  of  Europe,  or  the  infuriated  people  in  arms  against  the 
hitherto  unconquered  veterans  of  Napoleon,  or  but  now  as  with  patient  and  dogged 
courage,  with  flaming  volleys,  they  vainly  strive  to  hold  the  works  of  Caney  and 
San  Juan  against  the  irresistible  and  rushing  valor  of  the  American  soldier.  In  art 
the  Spaniard  has  been  not  less  famous.  In  the  royal  collection  of  Madrid,  in  the 
venerable  cathedrals  of  Seville,  in  the  Louvre,  in  the  London  National  Gallery,  the 
lover  of  the  beautiful  may  be  charmed  by  the  warmth  of  color,  the  accuracy  of  tech- 
nique, the  rounded  outline  and  saintly  salvation  of  Murillo. 

‘"Many  a quaint  moralist,  many  a stately  poet,  many  a priestly  chronicler  at- 
tests the  genius  of  Spanish  literature,  but  if  these  had  not  been,  Don  Quixote  and 
Sancho  Panza  had  been  its  title  to  immortality.  The  admirable  attributes  of  Span- 
ish character  nowhere  found  warmer  appreciation  than  with  our  own  countrymen. 
What  Prescott  did  for  the  statecraft,  and  stern  martial  renown  of  the  Spaniards, 
Washington  Irving,  with  melodious  prose  and  gentle  humor,  surpassed  in  his  kindly 
portrayal  of  Spanish  character  in  his  charming  romance,  The  Conquest  of  Granada. 
It  is  perhaps  due  to  the  drollery  and  Addisonian  humor  of  that -gifted  American  that 
we  have  never  been  able  to  estimate  the  Spaniard  quite  so  seriously  as  he  estimates 
himself,  or,  indeed,  as  his  stern  and  uncompromising  nature  deserves.  The  truth 
is,  Spanish  policy  has  ever  been  insidiously  and  persistently  inimical  to  the  Ameri- 
can people,  and  has  culminated  in  deeds  more  atrocious  than  those  which  have  ren- 
dered infamous  the  baleful  memory  of  Pedro  the  Cruel. 

“We  all  know  how  in  1492  his  holiness,  Alexander  VI.,  in  order  to  prevent  un- 
seemly collisions  between  Christian  princes,  published  a bull  by  which  he  as- 


202 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


signed  to  Spain  all  discoveries  lying  west  of  an  imaginary  line  drawn  300  leagues  to 
the  westward  of  the  Cape  Verde  islands.  All  discoveries  to  the  east  were  confined 
to  Portugal. 

“All  of  South  America  save  Brazil  and  the  two  Guineas,  all  Central  America, 
Mexico,  the  entire  territory  west  of  the  Mississippi,  now  embraced  by  the  United 
States,  beautiful  Cuba,  from  whose  eastern  province  of  Santiago  Ponce  de  Leon 
across  the  lucent  waves  of  the  tropical  sea  coveted  the  ambrosial  forests  and  fertile 
meadows  of  Porto  ltico,  whence  he  was  to  sail  to  the  floral  empire  of  Florida.  But 
this  was  not  all  of  Spain’s  magnificent  domain.  Far  across  the  waters  of  the  South 
Pacific  was  the  now  famous  cluster  of  islands  bearing  the  name  of  the  Spanish  king. 
And  from  their  great  cities,  via  Guam,  and  Hawaii  ,and  San  Francisco,  to  Acapulco, 
sailed  the  famous  Manila  fleet,  huge  galleons,  loaded  to  the  gunwales  with  the 
silken  and  golden  wealth  of  the  orient.  Where  are  her  colonies  now?  The  declara- 
tion of  the  senior  senator  from  the  noble  state  of  Illinois  has  been  fulfilled:  No 

race  outside  of  her  own  borders,  even  if  Spanish  by  origin,  has  ever  been  able  to 
endure  her  reign,  and  every  race  which  has  resisted  her  ultimately  succeeded  in 
withdrawing  from  her  control. 

“In  the  meantime  the  Americans,  as  declared  by  the  German  philosopher,  Lessing, 
were  building  in  the  new  world  the  lodge  of  humanity.  The  determined  malignity 
of  the  Spaniard  toward  the  adventurous  men  of  our  race  who  were  fringing  the 
Atlantic  coast  with  sparsely  peopled  and  widely  separated  settlements  was  promptly 
disclosed.  They  had  threatened  to  send  an  armed  ship  to  remove  the  Virginia 
planters.  They  laid  claim  to  Carolina,  and  they  directed  powerful  armed  expeditions 
against  the  young  colony  of  Georgia.  They  were  now  to  meet,  not  the  helpless 
savages  who  had  been  their  victims,  but  men  of  that  same  fighting  strain  who  in  this 
good  year  breasted  the  hail  of  death,  swarmed  up  the  heights  and  planted  the  colors 
on  the  intrenchments  of  Santiago. 

“That  field  where  the  Georgian  and  Spaniards  on  that  momentous  day  in  1712 
met  is  yet  called  the  Blood  Marsh.  The  commander  of  our  colonial  forces  was  .Tames 
Edward  Oglethorpe.  To  his  military  genius  and  the  heroism  of  his  slender  force  it 
due  the  fact  that  the  southern  territory  of  the  United  States  was  not  added  to  the 
dependencies  of  Spain.  That  illustrious  Englishman  should  ever  live  in  the  memory 
and  veneration  of  the  American  people.  He  did  more  to  exclude  the  Spaniards  from 
American  soil  than  any  other  man  of  the  English  speaking  race,  save  that  successor  of 
Washington,  the  president,  who  evinces  his  fervid  love  of  country  and  graces  the 
oc'.asion  by  his  presence  to-day. 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


293 


“Defeated  in  their  scheme  of  invasion,  the  Spaniards  remained  intensely  inimi- 
cal to  our  fathers.  What  more  striking  demonstration  of  that  superintending  provi- 
dence, which  administers  justice,  not  only  to  individuals,  but  to  nations,  than  the 
spectacle  in  this  mighty  city,  builded  on  the  heritage  of  which  Spain  would  have 
deprived  this  people  of  this  gathering  of  Americans  to  mark  the  epoch  when  the 
last  Spanish  soldier  has  been  driven  from  the  last  foot  of  soil  of  that  hemisphere 
discovered  by  Columbus.  May  we  not  justly  exclaim  with  the  psalmist  of  old: 
‘Oh,  clap  your  hands,  all  ye  people;  shout  unto  God  with  the  voice  of  triumph.’ 

“It  is  perhaps  impossible  for  Americans  of  this  day  and  time  to  conceive  how  vast 
was  the  control  Spain  might  have  exerted  over  the  destinies  of  our  republic.  The 
independence  of  the  United  States  had  been  recognized,  the  constitution  had  been 
adopted  and  the  government  organized,  and  yet  for  many  years  she  claimed  with- 
out dispute  the  peninsula  of  Florida,  thence  a strip  along  the  gulf  extending  to  and 
including  the  city  of  New  Orleans,  and  she  held  all  of  that  territory  west  of  the 
Mississippi  extending  from  the  Father  of  Waters  to  the  Pacific  ocean,  and  from  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico  northward  to  the  undefined  boundaries  of  the  British  possessions. 

“Even  as  it  is  to-day,  that  empire  mentioned  in  Bishop  Berkely’s  prophetic 
stanza,  ‘Westward  the  course  of  empire  takes  its  way,’  which  sprang  into  being  with 
the  first  shot  of  the  simple.  God-fearing  husbandmen  on  the  green  at  Lexington  ex- 
tends more  than  half  way  across  the  Pacific  ocean,  and  the  miner  or  the  fisherman 
standing  on  the  ultimate  island  of  Alaska  and  gazing  eastward  across  the  icy  waters 
may  with ‘the  naked  eye  behold  the  dominions  of  the  czar.  Nor  in  this  do  we  include 
those  distant  islands,  where  one  May  morning,  ever  to  be  famous  in  the  annals 
of  our  race,  the  spicy  breezes  that  blow  o’er  Manila  bay  were  rent  by  the  guns  of  the 
noble  Dewey  as  they  proclaimed  that  the  genius  of  liberty  had  come  to  rid  of  cruel- 
ty and  avarice  and  crime  that  charming  land  ‘where  every  prospect  pleases  and  only 
man  is  vile.’ 

“In  this  connection  may  it  not  be  well  for  us  and  for  some  of  our  distinguished 
representatives  now  in  Paris  to  consider  if  it  can  be  ever  possible  for  men  with  the 
American  and  Spanish  ideas  of  government  to  live  in  proximity  and  in  peace? 
Contrast  the  character  of  the  average  American  citizen  with  that  of  the  Spaniard. 
The  native  and  distinctive  modesty  of  the  national  character  forbids  me  to  pronounce 
an  extravagant  eulogium  upon  the  American  citizen,  but  behold  him  and  see  what 
he  has  done  and  can  do. 

“While  the  human  intellect  has  been  making  prodigious  and  unheard-of  strides, 
while  the  world  is  ringing  with  the  noise  of  intellectual  achievements,  Spain  sleeps 


294 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


i'll  uu i roubled,  unheeding,  impassive,  receiving  no  impression  upon  it.  There  she 
lies  at  the  farther  extremity  of  the  continent,  a huge  and  torpid  mass,  the  sole  rep- 
resentative now  remaining  of  the  feelings  and  knowledge  of  the  middle  ages.  And, 
what  is  the  worst  symptom  of  all,  she  is  satisfied  with  her  own  condition.  Though 
she  is  the  most  backward  country  in  Europe  she  believes  herself  to  be  the  foremost. 
She  is  proud  of  everything  of  which  she  ought  to  he  ashamed. 

“How  incompatible  is  the  temperament  of  the  American  and  the  Spaniard. 

“May  the  worn  and  wasted  followers  of  Gomez  and  Garcia  come  to  appreciate  the 
blessings  of  liberty  under  the  law.  No  other  wish  is  in  consonance  with  the  aims 
of  the  American  people.  We  would  not,  if  we  could,  he  their  masters.  The  gigantic 
power  of  the  country  has  been  put  forth  for  their  salvation  and  for  their  pacification. 
Connected  with  them  by  bonds  of  genuine  sympathy  and  indissoluble  interest,  we 
will  labor  with  them  to  secure  for  them  established  justice,  domestic  tranquility,  gen- 
eral welfare  and  the  blessings  of  liberty  to  themselves  and  to  their  posterity.  For  the 
common  defense,  in  the  blue  ether  above  the  beautiful  island  of  Cuba  is  poised  the 
eagle.’ 

‘Whose  golden  plume 

Floats  moveless  on  the  storm  and  in  the  blaze 
Of  sunrise  gleams  when  earth  is  wrapt  in  gloom.’ 

“It  was  not  enough,  however,  for  the  American  people  to  recognize  the  in- 
dependence of  the  Spanish- American  republics.  It  soon  became  our  duty  to  notify 
the  world  that  in  certain  eventualities  it  was  our  purpose  to  defend  their  national  ex- 
istence. The  holy  alliance,  as  it  was  termed,  had  been  formed.  The  great  powers 
who  signed  the  famous  compact  declared  its  purpose  to  maintain  as  Christian  doc- 
trine the  proposition  that  useful  or  necessary  changes  in  legislation,  or  in  the  ad- 
ministration of  states,  can  only  emanate  from  the  free  will  and  well-weighed  convic- 
tions of  those  whom  God  has  rendered  responsible  for  power.  Whom  had  God 
made  responsible  for  power?  What  is  a well-weighed  conviction?  These  are  ques- 
tions about  which  the  irreverent  Americans  might  perchance  differ  with  royalty. 
We  had  been  lead  to  believe,  and  yet  believe,  that  the  voice  of  the  people  is  the  voice 
of  God.  When,  therefore,  the  absolution  of  the  holy  alliance,  not  content  with 
smothering  a feeble  spark  of  liberty  in  Spain,  initiated  a joint  movement  of  their 
arms  against  the  Spanish-American  republics,  it  gave  the  people  of  our  country 
the  gravest  concern.  In  the  meantime  our  relations  with  Great  Britain  had  grown 
cordial.  That  they  may  grow  ever  stronger  and  more  cordial  should  be  the  prayer 
of  every  man  of  the  English  speaking  race.  An  unspeakable  blessing  to  mankind  of 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


295 


the  struggle  from  which  we  are  now  emerging  is  the  genuine  brotherly  sympathy  for 
the  people  of  the  United  States  flowing  from  that  land. 

“And  it  is  returned  in  no  unstinted  measure.  But  two  months  ago  the  flagship 
of  Admiral  Dewey  steamed  slowly  into  the  battle  line  at  Manila.  As  she  passed  the 
British  flagship  Immortalite  its  band  rang  out  the  inspiring  air  ‘See  the  Conquering 
Hero  Comes/  and  as  the  gorgeous  ensign  of  the  republic  was  flung  to  the  breeze  at 
the  peak  of  the  Olympia  there  now  came  thrilling  o’er  the  waters  from  our  kins- 
men’s ship  the  martial  strains  of  the  ‘Star  Spangled  Banner.’ 

“Finally,  when  our  gallant  seamen,  reposing  in  fancied  security  in  the  scorching 
blast  of  the  treacherous  explosion  were  cruelly  and  remorselessly  slain,  and  calm  in- 
vestigation had  developed  the  truth,  we  had  been  despicable  on  the  historic  page  had 
we  not  appealed  to  the  god  of  battle  for  retribution.  The  pious  rage  of  seventy  mil- 
lions of  people  cried  aloud  to  heaven  for  the  piteous  agony,  for  the  shameful  slaugh- 
ter of  our  brethren.  Our  noble  navy  was  swiftly  speeding  to  its  duty.  Poetic  genius 
bodied  forth  the  spirit  of  our  gallant  seamen  as  the  mighty  ships  sped  on  their  way. 

“Let  the  waters  of  the  orient  as  they  moan  through  the  shell-riven  wrecks  at 
Cavite,  the  booming  waves  of  the  Caribbean  as  fathoms  deep  it  sweeps  over  Pluton 
and  Furor  and  breaks  into  spray  on  the  shapeless  and  fire-distorted  steel  of  Yizcaya 
and  Oquendo,  tell  how  the  navy  has  paid  our  debt  to  Spain.  Nor  is  the  renown 
which  crowns  the  standards  of  our  army  one  whit  less  glorious.  Nothing  in  the  lucid 
page  of  Thucydides  nor  in  the  terse  commentaries  of  Caesar,  nothing  in  the  vivid 
narrative  of  Napier  or  the  glowing  battle  scenes  of  Allison,  can  surpass  the  story  how, 
spurning  the  chapparal  and  the  barbed  wire,  pressing  their  rifles  to  their  throbbing 
hearts,  toiling  up  the  heights,  and  all.  the  while  the  machine  guns  and  the  Mausers 
mowing  the  jungle  as  if  with  a mighty  reaper,  on  and  yet  right  on,  they  won  the 
fiery  crests,  and  Santiago  fell.  Well  may  we  exclaim  with  the  royal  poet  of  Israel: 
“ ‘Oh,  sing  unto  the  Lord  a new  song,  for  he  hath  done  marvelous  things;  his 
right  hand  and  his  holy  arm  hath  gotten  him  the  victory.’ 

“America!  Humane  in  the  hour  of  triumph,  gentle  to  the  vanquished,  grateful 
to  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  a reunited  people  forever: 

“ ‘Great  people.  As  the  sands  shalt  thou  become; 

Thy  growth  is  swift  as  morn,  when  night  must  fade 

The  multitudinous  earth  shall  sleep  beneath  thy  shade.’  ” 

The  band  burst  into  the  strains  of  “Dixie”  in  honor  of  the  Southern  birth  of 
Judge  Speer,  as  he  concluded  his  oration.  President  McKinley,  as  on  other  occasions 
during  the  program,  joined  in  the  hearty  applause.  Cries  of  “McKinley,”  “Me- 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


296 

Kin  ley,”  “The  President,”  “The  President,”  were  heard  all  over  the  hall,  and  in  a 
moment  it  was  seen  that  the  President  was  going  to  respond.  Every  one  stood  up. 
Ex-Governor  Oglesby  approached  the  front  of  the  box,  and  said,  “I  have  the  honor 
to  introduce  the  guest  of  the  occasion,  the  President.” 

“Leaning  forward,”  we  quote  the  Tribune,  “from  his  box  in  the  earnestness 
of  his  utterance,  speaking  in  the  tones  of  emotion  having  birth  in  the  fullness  of 
heart,  President  William  McKinley,  at  the  Auditorium  jubilee  meeting  yester- 
day morning  gave  to  the  people  a message  of  simple  thanks  and  significant  augury. 
Save  for  a wave  of  applause  at  the  mention  of  American  charity,  the  terse,  reverent 
address  was  heard  in  silence.  An  added  hush  fell  upon  the  intent  throng  when  the 
President  began  the  portentous  concluding  paragraph,  and  when  he  ceased  speak- 
ing and  stood  before  them  grave  and  masterful,  the  quiet  was  breathless,  tense  under 
the  force  of  repression.  Then  the  meaning  of  the  words  of  the  Executive  coursed 
from  heart  to  bfain,  and  men’s  minds  grasped  the  fact  that  they  had  heard  the  Presi- 
dent’s lips  declare  that  he  had  seen  the  direction  of  the  flow  of  the  currents  of  des- 
tiny, that  he  recognized  their  majesty,  and  that  his  purpose  was  in  harmony  with  the 
common  will — the  force  working  for  the  retention  of  the  conquered  islands  in  the 
distant  Pacific  and  for  the  policy  of  national  growth. 

“The  applause  broke  the  louder  for  the  preceding  calm  and  the  deeper  for  the 
inspiring  motive.  Hats  were  swung  and  handkerchiefs  waved.  Men  climbed  on 
chairs  to  lead  the  cheering  and  women  forgot  gloved  hands  and  applauded  with 
energy.  At  the  last,  ex-Governor  Richard  J.  Oglesby,  who  had  a seat  in  the  Presi- 
dent’s box,  led  in  three  cheers.” 

The  message  of  the  President  was: 

“Mv  Fellow  Citizens:  I have  been  deeply  moved  by  this  great  demonstaration. 
I have  been  deeply  touched  by  the  words  of  patriotism  that  have  been  uttered 
by  the  distinguished  men  so  eloquently  in  your  presence.  It  is  gratifying  to  all  of  us 
to  know  that  this  has  never  ceased  to  be  a war  of  humanity.  The  last  ship  that 
went  out  of  the  harbor  of  Havana  before  war  was  declared  was  an  American  ship 
that  had  taken  to  the  suffering  people  of  Cuba  the  supplies  furnished  by  American 
charitv,  and  the  first  ship  to  sail  into  the  harbor  cf  Santiago  was  another  American 
ship  bearing  food  supplies  to  the  suffering  Cubans. 

“I  am  sure  it  is  the  universal  prayer  of  American  citizens  that  justice  and  hu- 
manity and  civilization  shall  characterize  the  final  settlement  of  peace  as  they  have 
distinguished  the  progress  of  the  war. 

“My  countrymen,  the  currents  of  destiny  flotf  through  the  hearts  of  the  peopie. 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


207 


Who  will  check  them?  Who  will  divert  them?  Who  will  stop  them?  And  the 
movements  of  men,  planned  by  the  master  of  men,  will  never  he  interrupted  hy  the 
American  people.” 

The  Philadelphia  celebration  was  a scene  of  a demonstration  of  popular  interest 
and  patriotic  feeling  amazing  in  its  multitudinous  enthusiasm.  The  Loyal  League 
was  out  in  full  force,  the  parade  was  a prodigy  of  display,  and  the  Clover  Club  gave 
a brilliant  dinner,  and  the  cleverness  of  the  President’s  speech  carried  the  club  by 
storm.  He  said: 

“I  cannot  forego  making  acknowledgment  to  this  far-famed  club  for  the  per- 
mission it  has  granted  me  to  meet  with  you  here  to-night.  You  do  not  seem  half  so 
bad  at  this  stage  as  you  have  been  pictured.  No  one  can  unfold  the  future  of  the 
Clover  Club.  (Laughter.) 

It  has  been  so  gratifying  to  me  to  participate  with  the  people  of  the  city  of 
Philadelphia  in  this  great  patriotic  celebration.  It  was  a pageant  the  like  of  which  I 
do  not  believe  has  been  seen  since  the  close  of  the  great  Civil  War,  when  the  army 
of  Grant,  Sherman  and  Sheridan,  and  the  navy  of  Dupont,  Dalilgren  and  Porter 
gave  the  great  review  in  the  capital  city  of  the  nation.  And  I know  of  no  more  fit- 
ting place  to  have  a patriotic  celebration  than  in  this  great  city,  which  witnessed  the 
first  consecration  of  liberty  and  of  the  Republic.  As  I stood  on  the  great  reviewing 
stand,  witnessing  the  soldiers  and  sailors  passing  by,  my  heart  was  filled  only  with 
gratitude  to  the  God  of  battles,  who  has  so  favored  us,  and  gratitude  to  the  brave 
soldiers  and  sailors  who  had  won  such  signal  victories  on  land  and  on  sea,  and  had 
given  a new  meaning  to  American  valor. 

“It  has  been  especially  gratifying  to  me  to  participate  not  only  with  the  people 
of  Philadelphia,  but  with  the  people  of  the  great  West,  where  I have  recently  visited, 
in  doing  honor  to  the  American  army  and  the  American  navy.  No  nobler  soldiers  or 
sailors  ever  assembled  under  any  flag.  You  had  with  you  to-day  the  leaders  of  Santi- 
ago, Porto  Rico  and  Guantanamo.  We  unfortunately  had  none  of  the  heroes  of 
Manila  with  us.  But  I am  sure  that  our  hearts  go  out  to  them  to-night  and  to  the 
brave  Dewey  and  Otis  and  Merritt,  and  all  the  other  gallant  men  that  are  now  sustain- 
ing the  flag  in  the  harbor  city  of  Manila.” 

(A  voice,  “How  about  Hobson?”) 

“The  American  people  are  always  ready  for  any  emergency,  and  if  the  Merrimac 
is  to  be  sunk  there  is  an  American  officer  to  do  it.  He  succeeded  in  doing  what 
our  foe  has  been  unable  to  do,  sink  an  American  ship.  (Applause.) 

“I  ask  you,  gentlemen  of  the  Clover  Club,  to  unite  with_me  in  toasting  the 


298 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


Army  and  Navy  of  the  United  States,  without  whose  valor  and  sacrifice  we  could 
not  celebrate  the  victory  we  have  been  celebrating  to-day.  Not  only  the  men  at  the 
front,  not  only  the  men  on  the  battleships  and  in  the  battle  line,  hut  the  men  at 
home  with  ambition  to  go  to  tight  the  battles  of  American  civilization,  should  be 
the  recipients  of  the  gratitude  of  the  American  people.” 

Hobson  and  his  men  were  a great  feature  of  the  parade  in  the  four-in-hand. 
Hobson,  during  this  visit  to  Philadelphia  was  caught,  surrounded  and  captured  at 
his  hotel  and  was  forced  to  make  a speech,  of  which  there  is  this  report: 

“The  young  officer  was  plainly  embarrassed.  His  red  face  suggested  it,  his 
trembling  voice  told  it.  In  a low  tone  and  frequently  pausing,  as  if  from  a loss  of  a 
word,  he  said: 

“ ‘Your  reception  has  been  so  very  kind  that  it  seems  almost  as  if  I had  lost  the 
power  to  say  anything.’ 

“Someone  called  out:  ‘Never  mind,  you  had  nerve  enough  to  go  into  Santiago 
Harbor,’  and  then  the  crowd  gave  three  cheers  for  Hobson. 

“He  began  again.  ‘The  incident  you  have  referred  to  is  one  you  unduly  magnify. 
Believe  me,  it  was  really  nothing  more  than  a little  bit  of  work,  which  came  to  my 
men  and  to  me  to  do  in  the  ordinary  course  of  strategy  in  warfare.  That  was  all  it 
was,  a little  bit  of  work,  and  it  is  sheer  exaggeration  to  say  anything  else.’ 

“ ‘Can’t  agree  with  you!  Can’t  agree  with  }'ou!’  was  the  shouted  answer  from  the 
crowd.” 

At  the  Clover  Club  jubilee  dinner,  Captain  “Fighting  Bob”  Evans  gave  a won- 
derfully interesting  account  of  the  destruction  of  Cervera’s  fleet,  closing  with  a 
grim  picture  of  war  the  celebration  of  peace.  He  had  been  speaking  of  the  blockade 
of  Cuba,  and  insistently  called  upon  to  tell  about  Santiago,  said: 

“Of  our  little  scrap,  it  was  the  prettiest  mix-up  that  was  ever  seen.  I want  to 
say  that  no  fleet  ever  met  a braver  enemy  than  we  did  at  Santiago.  Those  Spaniards 
stood  up  and  got  killed  in  the  best  possible  shape.  Six  hundred  of  them  died  in  less 
than  thirty  minutes,  so  you  can  see  that  there  was  very  little  flinching  on  Cervera’s 
ships. 

“During  the  fight  there  were  two  very  interesting  moments,  the  first  when  the 
four  big  cruisers  of  the  enemy  came  outside  of  the  harbor,  firing  away  with  me- 
chanical regularity  and  presenting  a most  magnificent  spectacle.  They  were  not  hit- 
ting anything,  but  that  made  little  difference  at  that  time,  they  tried  hard  enough. 
As  we  closed  in,  there  came  a moment  when  the  fleeing  Spanish  ships  had  an  al- 
most perfect  chance  to  use  their  rams  od  our  vessels.  I submit  now  that  not  a single 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


299 


one  changed  his  course  a single  inch.  They  came  out  of  that  harbor  and  ran  away, 
and  that  was  all  they  attempted  to  do,  fighting  as  they  went. 

“The  second  point  was  when  ‘Dick’  Wainwright  misread  a signal.  I know  he 
won’t  admit  that  he  did  misread  it;  however,  I’ll  tell  you  the  incident.  In  the 
Gloucester  Wainwright  was  just  off  the  harbor  mouth  when  the  two  Spanish  tor- 
pedo boat  destroyers  were  noticed  making  straight  at  him.  The  Indiana  signaled 
‘The  enemy’s  torpedo  boats  are  coming  out.’  Wainwright  read  it  ‘Close  in  and 
attack  enemy’s  torpedo  boats,’  and  you  know  the  rest  of  the  story. 

“There  was  a dramatic  picture  which  I wrant  to  call  your  attention  to.  It  was 
after  the  Vizcaya  had  run  ashore,  and  I had  to  stop  the  Iowa,  some  400  yards  away. 
I saw  the  survivors  on  a sand  bar,  which  was  merely  a narrow  strip  of  about  200 
yards  from  shore,  on  either  side  of  a small  inlet.  On  one  side  a school  of  hungry 
sharks  were  making  fierce  rushes  toward  the  men,  and  on  the  other,  the  Cubans 
were  shooting  away,  utterly  regardless  of  the  fact  that  they  were  fighting  a helpless 
foe.  Out  in  front  we  were  not  supposed  to  he  very  friendly. 

“Finally,  I saw  Captain  Eulate,  of  the  destroyed  ship,  coming  toward  my  ves- 
sel in  a small  boat.  How  Eulate  is  what  you  call  a black  Spaniard,  one  of  those 
fellows  that  would  cry  as  though  his  heart  would  break  every  few  minutes  when  in 
trouble.  He  sat  in  the  stern  of  a small  boat  that  had  belonged  to  his  vessel.  She 
was  partly  stove  in  and  had  about  a foot  of  water,  or  I should  say  blood  and  water,  in 
her  bottom. 

“As  I looked  down  in  the  gangway  I think  it  was  the  most  horrible  sight  that 
I ever  witnessed.  In  the  bottom  of  the  boat  lay  two  dead  Spaniards,  one  with  his 
head  completely  shot  away.  The  Spanish  Captain  was  wounded  in  three  places,  and 
each  of  the  four  men  who  rowed  his  boat  was  more  oi  less  cut  up.  We  slung  a chair 
over  the  side  and  carefully  hauled  him  on  board. 

“As  he  came  up  to  the  starboard  gangway  the  marine  guard  saluted  and  he 
was  received  with  all  the  honors  of  his  rank.  As  he  stepped  toward  me  he  hurst  into 
tears,  threw  his  hands  up  in  the  air,  and  then,  with  a gesture  of  utter  despair,  hut 
with  all  the  grace  of  the  pretty  gentleman,  loosed  his  sword  belt  and  pressing  a fer- 
vent kiss  on  the  hilt  of  the  weapon  he  extended  it  toward  me.  Every  man  on  that 
ship  knew  that  that  Spaniard  was  giving  up  something  of  value  equal  to  his  life.  I 
am  not  very  good-natured,  hut  I could  not  take  that  sword.” 

This  met  with  loud  cries  of  “You  did  right,  Bob,”  and  one  lusty-lunged  individual 
announced  that  there  was  not  a man  in  the  country  that  would  take  it.  Captain 
Evans,  who  recognized  the  speaker,  a friend  from  the  rural  districts,  answered:  “Oh, 


THE  PEACE  JUBILEE. 


m 

you  don’t  know  what  some  of  those  up-country  Pennsylvanians  would  do.  It  was  a 
pretty  good  sword.” 

Continuing,  Captain  Evans. said:  “I  didn’t  know  exactly  what  to  do  with  the 
Spanish  Captain  to  get  him  into  our  sick  bay.  As  I was  about  to  ask  him  of  his 
wound  he  stepped  toward  the  gangway  and  looked  shoreward.  About  a quarter  of 
a mile  off  lay  the  once  magnificent  vessel  in  which  he  had  boasted  he  would  tow 
the  Brooklyn  back  to  Spain. 

“She  was  burning  fore  and  aft,  terrific  columns  of  flame  shooting  up  around 
her,  and  suddenly,  with  a burst  of  tears.  Captain  Eulate  kissed  his  hand  and  bade 
fond  farewell  to  the  burning  hulk  and  said  with  impassioned  voise,  ‘Adios  Viscaya.’ 
As  he  did  this  the  very  same  instant  there  came  a tremendous  roar  and  the  Vizcaya’s 
magazine  blew  her  superstructure  hundreds  of  feet  into  the  air.  Had  the  incident 
occurred  that  way  on  the  stage  anybody  would  have  said  it  was  too  well  timed. 

“He  turned  back  and  we  got  him  into  the  ship’s  hospital,  where  the  surgeons 
placed  him  on  his  stomach  to  shave  the  hair  around  a small  cut  on  the  back  of  his 
head.  I stood  alongside  of  him,  and  rolling  his  eyes  into  the  starboard  corner  he 
said  to  me,  with  a rather  comical  expression,  T think  I have  heard  of  you  before.’ 
I told  him  I did  not  know  how  that  could  have  been,  and  lie  asked:  ‘Did  you  not 
command  the  Indiana?’  ‘Yes,’  I said;  then  he  said,  shaking  his  head  as  well  as 
circumstances  would  permit,  ‘Yes,  I have  heard  of  you.  You  are  “Bob”  Evans.’ 

“I  have  often  wondered  just  what  he  referred  to.  I have  a notion  that  it  would 
fit  certain  remarks  regarding  certain  language  that  I was  credited  with  having  used 
in  reference  to  an  attack  on  Havana;  language,  by  the  way,  which  I never  used. 
As  I said  before,  the  battle  before  Santiago  was  the  prettiest  imaginable  kind  of  effect. 
Why,  two  torpedo  boat  destroyers  came  out,  and  inside  of  ten  minutes  we  had  them 
sounding.  One  sounded  in  200  fathoms  of  water  and  sunk  to  rest  there.  The  other 
preferred  a berth  with  her  nose  on  the  beach. 

“The  Maria  Teresa  and  Admiral  Oquendo  were  on  fire  inside  of  five  minutes  after 
the  fight  had  started.  They  made  beautiful  sweeps  toward  the  shore,  and  were  reg- 
ular Fourth  of  July  processions  as  they  swept  in  on  the  beach.  We  helped  them 
along  a bit  by  landing  a few  shells  in  the  stern.  It  was  a pretty  fight,  but  it  should 
never  be  forgotten  that  the  Spaniards  fought  their  ships  as  hard  and  with  as  much 
valor  as  any  men  in  any  ships  ever  fought.” 

After  the  first  cabinet  meeting  succeeding  the  peace  jubilee,  the  President  issued 
his  annual  Thanksgiving  proclamation: 


THE  PHAGE  JUBILEE. 


801 

“BY  THE  PRESIDENT  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

A PROCLAMATION. 

“The  approaching  November  brings  to  mind  the  custom  of  our  ancestors,  hal- 
lowed by  time  and  rooted  in  our  most  sacred  traditions,  of  giving  thanks  to  Almighty 
God  for  all  the  blessings  he  has  vouchsafed  to  us  during  the  past  year. 

“Few  years  in  our  history  have  afforded  such  cause  for  thanksgiving  as  this.  We 
have  been  blessed  by  abundant  harvests,  our  trade  and  commerce  have  been  won- 
derfully increased,  our  public  credit  has  been  improved  and  strengthened,  all  sec- 
tions of  our  common  country  have  been  brought  together  and  knitted  into  closer 
bonds  of  national  purpose  and  unity. 

“The  skies  have  been  for  a time  darkened  by  the  cloud  of  war;  but  as  we  were 
compelled  to  take  up  the  sword  in  the  cause  of  humanity,  we  are  permitted  to  re- 
joice that  the  conflict  has  been  of  brief  duration  and  the  losses  we  have  had  to 
mourn,  though  grievous  and  important,  have  been  so  few,  considering  the  great  re- 
sults accomplished,  as  to  inspire  us  with  gratitude  and  praise  to  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 
We  may  laud  and  magnify  His  holy  name  that  the  cessation  of  hostilities  came  so 
soon  as  to  spare  both  sides  the  countless  sorrows  and  disasters  that  attend  protracted 
war. 

“I  do,  therefore,  invite  all  my  fellow  citizens,  as  well  those  at  home  as  those  who 
may  be  at  sea  or  sojourning  in  foreign  lands,  to  set  apart  and  observe  Thursday,  the 
twenty-fourth  day  of  November,  as  a day  of  national  thanksgiving,  to  come  together 
in  their  several  places  of  worship,  for  a service  of  praise  and  thanks  to  Almighty  God 
for  all  the  blessings  of  the  year,  for  the  mildness  of  seasons  and  the  fruitfulness  of  the 
soil,  for  the  continued  prosperity  of  the  people,  for  the  devotion  and  valor  of  our 
countrymen,  for  the  glory  of  our  victory  and  the  hope  of  a righteous  peace,  and  to 
pray  that  the  Divine  guidance,  which  has  brought  us  heretofore  to  safety  and  honor, 
may  be  graciously  continued  in  the  years  to  come. 

“In  witness  whereof,  etc. 

(Signed)  “WILLIAM  M’KINLEY. 

“By  the  President: 

“JOHN  HAY,  Secretary  of  State.” 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

The  Abolishment  of  the  31st  of  December,  1844,  in  Manila — The  Mystery  of  the 
Meridian  180  Degrees  West — What  Is  East  and  West? — Gaining  and  Losing 
Days — The  Tribes  of  Native  Filipinos — They  Had  an  Alphabet  and  Songs 
of  Their  Own — The  Massacre  of  Magellan — His  Fate  Like  That  of  Captain 
Cook — Stories  of  Long  Ago  Wars — An  Account  by  a Devoted  Spanish  Writer 
of  the  Beneficent  Rule  of  Spain  in  the  Philippines — Aguinaldo  a Man  Not  of 
a Nation,  But  of  a Tribe — Typhoons  and  Earthquakes — The  Degeneracy  of 
the  Government  of  the  Philippines  After  It  Was  Taken  from  Mexico — “New 
Spain” — The  Perquisites  of  Captain-Generals — The  Splendor  of  Manila  a 
Century  Ago. 

The  31st  of  December  was  abolished  in  Manila  in  1814.  L'p  to  that  time  it  had 
been  retained  as  the  discoverers  fixed  it  by  pure  piety  and  patriotism.  Pope  Alex- 
ander VI  had  issued  a bull  on  the  1th  of  May,  1493,  dividing  the  world  into  two 
hemispheres,  which  was  quite  correct,  though  it  did  not  correspond  to  the  secular 
lines  of  more  modern  days.  The  gracious  object  of  Ilis  Holiness  was  to  keep  the 
peace  of  the  world  by  dividing  the  lands  taken  from  the  heathen  between  the 
Spaniards  and  Portuguese.  The  East  was  to  belong  to  Portugal.  The  line  was  drawn 
to  include  Brazil.  The  west  was  the  hunting  ground  for  heathen  of  Spain.  The 
claim  of  Spain  for  the  Philippines  was  that  they  were  west.  That  was  the  way 
Magellcnas  (Magellan),  the  Portuguese  navigator  sailed  through  the  straits  named 
for  him,  and  westward  found  the  alleged  Oriental  islands,  in  which  we,  the  people  of 
the  United  States,  are  now  so  much  interested.  When  sailing  into  the  sunset  seas 
he  picked  up  a day,  and  never  discovered  his  error  for  he  did  not  get  home,  and 
the  Captain  who  navigated  his  ship  did  not  know  he  was  out  of  time  with  the  Eu- 
ropean world  until  he  get  as  far  around  as  the  Cape  A crd  Islands.  An  added  day 
was  held  in  Manila,  as  a kind  of  affirmation  of  clear  title,  or  trade  mark  of  true 
righteousness,  on  the  part  of  Spain.  It  is  one  of  the  enduring  puzzles  in  going 
around  the  world  that  a day  is  gained  or  lost,  and  it  is  not  always  a sure  thing  wheth- 
er there  is  a loss  or  gain.  The  perplexing  problem  is  increased  in  its  persistence  if 
one  sails  westward  over  the  180  Meridian  west  from  Greenwich,  and  goes  beyond 
that  line  (which  is  not  the  one  drawn  by  Alexander  I) — say  to  the  Philippines, 
and  turns  back,  as  is  done  in  the  voyage  from  San  Irancisco  to  Manila,  and  vies 


versa. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


303 


In  this  case,  the  mystery  of  the  meridian  becomes  something  dreadful.  One 
loses  a day  going  west  and  gains  one  coming  east,  and  it  is  a difficulty  for  a clear 
mind  not  to  become  cloudy  over  the  account  of  loss  and  gain — or  perhaps  we  may 
say  profit  and  loss,  when  the  account  is  closed.  ‘'The  historian  of  the  Philippine 
Expedition”  lost  a Wednesday  going  out,  jumping  from  Tuesday  to  Thursday,  and 
found  an  extra  Thursday  on  the  return — celebrated  his  birthday  on  another  day  than 
that  on  which  he  was  born,  and  had  to  correct  the  ship  account  of  his  board  bill,  by 
adding  a day.  The  Captain’s  clerk  had  forgotten  it  because  it  was  not  in  the 
Almanac.  Ship  time  begins  a day  at  noon  (and  ends  another),  so  when  we  crossed 
the  meridian  180  degrees  west  at  2 p.  m.  by  the  sun,  and  the  day  was  Thursday 
and  to-morrow  was  Thursday  also,  the  forenoon  was  yesterday  by  the  ship.  There- 
fore, Thursday  was  yesterday,  to-day  and  to-morrow  on  the  same  day.  The  forenoon 
was  yesterday — from  12  to  2 p.  m.  was  to-day — and  from  2 p.  m.  to  midnight  was 
to-morrow!  It  is  no  wonder  “the  historian,”  whose  birthday  was  September  the  2nd, 
found  as  he  was  on  the  west  side  of  the  meridian  with  the  mystery  that  the  folks  at 
home  in  the  states  had  celebrated  it  for  him  two  days  ago — one  day  he  had  lost, 
and  the  other  they  had  gained.  Jagor,  the  historian  of  the  Philippines,  before  the 
days  when  Admiral  Dewey  grasped  the  reins  of  a thousand  islands,  and  a thousand 
to  spare,  says  in  his  “Philippine  Islands,”  that  “when  the  clock  strikes  12  in  Madrid, 
it  is  8 hours  18  minutes  and  41  seconds  past  8 in  the  evening  at  Manila.  The  latter  city 
lies  124  degrees  40  min.  15  sec.  east  of  the  former,  7 h.54  min.  35  sec.  from  Paris.  But 
it  depends  upon  whether  you  measure  time  by  moving  with  the  sun  or  the  other  way. 
If  westward  the  course  of  empire  takes  its  way,  Manila  is  a third  of  a day  catching  up 
with  Madrid  time.  If  we  face  the  morning  and  go  to  meet  it  Manila  is  ahead.  The 
absence  of  the  right  day  for  Sunday  has  long  been  gravely  considered  by  the  mis- 
sionaries who  have  gone  to  heathen  lands  beyond  the  mysterious  meridian  that 
spoils  all  the  holidays.  One  might  establish  a bank  on  that  line  and  play  between 
days,  but  there  is  only  one  little  speck  of  land  on  the  180  degree  meridian  from  pole 
to  pole. 

It  may  be  very  well  worth  considering  Avhether  the  United  States  should  not  re- 
establish the  31st  of  December  in  Manila,  and  assert  that  we  hold  title  to  the  Philip- 
pines not  only  by  the  victories  of  the  fleet  and  armies  of  the  United  States,  but 
by  the  favor  of  Alexander  YI,  whose  bull  the  Spaniards  disregarded  after  it  had 
grown  venerable  with  three  centuries  of  usage.  We  quote  a Spanish  historian  who 
colors  his  chapters  to  make  a favorable  show  for  his  country  on  this  subject, as  follows: 
“From  the  Spaniards  having  traveled  westwards  to  the  Philippines,  there  was  an 


304 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


error  of  a day  in  their  dates  and  almanacs.  This  was  corrected  in  1344,  when, 
by  order  of  the  Captain-General  and  the  Archbishop,  the  31st  of  December,  1844, 
was  suppressed,  and  the  dates  of  Manila  made  to  agree  with  those  of  the  rest  of 
the  world.  A similar  correction  was  made  at  the  same  time  at  Macao,  where  the 
Portuguese  who  had  traveled  eastward  had  an  error  of  a day  in  an  opposite  direc- 
tion.” It  will  be  noticed  that  the  authority  of  the  Archbishop  was  carefully  obtained 
and  quoted,  but  it  was  beyond  his  prerogative. 

The  early  history  of  the  Philippines  bears  few  traces  of  the  traditions  and  ro- 
mances of  the  natives,  but  they  were  in  possession  of  an  alphabet  when  “discovered,” 
and  were  then,  as  now,  fond  of  music,  singing  their  own  melodies.  The  Hawaiians 
were  enabled  to  get  their  old  stories  into  print  because  they  suddenly  fell  into 
the  hands  of  masterful  men  who  had  a written  language.  The  Icelanders  were  too 
literary  for  their  own  good,  for  they  spoiled  their  history  by  writing  it  in  poetry  and 
mixing  it  with  fiction,  losing  in  that  way  the  credit  that  belongs  to  them  of  being  the 
true  discoverers  of  America.  The  Filipinos  were  spared  this  shape  of  misfortune, 
not  that  they  lacked  imagination  within  a narrow  range  of  vision,  but  they  were 
wanting  in  expression,  save  in  unwritten  music.  Their  lyrical  poetry  was  not  ma- 
terialized. The  study  of  the  natives  must  be  studied  as  geolog}7  is.  Geology  and 
native  history  ha^e  been  neglected  in  the  Tagala  country.  The  rocks  of  the  Phil- 
ippines have  not  been  opened  to  be  read  like  books.  More  is  known  of  the  botany  of 
the  islands  than  of  the  formation  of  the  mountains  and  their  foundations.  The 
original  inhabitants  were  Xigritos — a dwarfish  race,  very  dark  and  tameless,  still  in 
existence,  but  driven  to  the  parts  of  the  country  most  inaccessible.  They  are  of 
the  class  of  dark  savages,  who  smoke  cigars  holding  the  fiery  ends  between  their 
teeth!  The  islands  were  invaded  and  extensively  harassed  by  Malay  tribes — the 
most  numerous  and  active  being  the  Tagala.  Of  this  tribe  is  General  Aguinaldo,  and 
it  is  as  a man  with  a tribe  not  a nation  that  he  has  become  conspicuous.  The  other 
tribes  of  Malays  will  not  sustain  him  if  he  should  be  wild  enough  to  want  to  make 
war  upon  the  United  States.  The  Tagalas  are  cock  fighters  and  live  on  the  lowlands. 
They  eat  rice  chiefly,  but  are  fond  of  ducks  and  chickens,  and  they  have  an  in- 
credibly acute  sense  of  smell,  not  a bad  taste  in  food,  and  do  not  hanker  to  get  trunk. 

The  Yisayas  are  also  a tribe.  The  Igolatas  are  next  to  the  Tagala  in  numbers 
and  energy.  They  show  traces  of  Chinese  and  Japanese  blood.  There  are  no  Afri- 
cans in  the  Philippines,  no  sign  of  their  blood.  This  may  be  attributed  to  Phillip;s 
prohibition  of  negro  slavery.  General  Greene,  of  New  York,  took  with  him  to 
Manila  a full-blooded  black  manservant,  and  he  was  a great  curiosity  to  the  Fili- 


BIT  OF  SCENERY  IN  MINDANAO,  SHOWING  TROPICAL  VEGETATION. 


FAKADE  OF  SPANISH  TROOPS  ON  ONE  OF  TUEIR  ANNUAL  EXPEDITIONS  TO  THE  SOUTHERN  ISLANDS. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


307 


pinos.  When  the  English  conquered  Manila  in  1762  they  had  Sepoy  regiments,  and 
held  the  city  eighteen  months.  A good  deal  of  Sepoy  blood  is  still  in  evidence.  The 
Chinese  have  been  growing  in  importance  in  the  Philippines.  Their  men  marry  the 
women  of  the  islands  and  have  large  families,  the  boys  of  this  class  being  wonder- 
fully thrifty.  The  children  of  Englishmen  by  the  native  women  are  often  hand- 
some, and  of  strong  organization.  The  females  are  especially  comely. 

The  early  history  of  the  islands  consists  of  accounts  of  contests  with  frontier 
rebels,  attacks  by  pirates,  and  reprisals  by  the  Spaniards,  great  storms  and  destructive 
earthquakes.  It  is  remarkable  that  Magellan  was,  like  Captain  Cook,  a victim  of 
sava'ges,  whose  existence  he  made  known  to  civilized  people,  falling  in  a sea-side 
contest.  Magellan  had  converted  a captive  chief  to  Christianity  and  baptised  him 
as  King  Charles.  More  than  two  thousand  of  his  subjects  were  converted  in  a day, 
and  the  great  navigator  set  forth  to  conquer  islands  for  the  dominion  of  the  Christian 
King,  who  lived  on  the  isle  of  Zebu.  The  Christian  monarch  was  entertained  and 
received  many  presents,  making  return  in  bags  of  gold  dust,  fruit,  oil  and  wine. 
His  Queen  was  presented  with  a looking  glass,  and  then  she  insisted  upon  baptism, 
and  so  great  was  the  revival  that  Magellan  set  out  to  capture  more  people  for  the 
newly  made  Christian  couple — invaded  the  island  of  Matau,  and  with  forty-two  men 
landed  where  the  water  was  shallow,  his  allies  remaining  afloat  by  invitation  of  Ma- 
gellan, to  see  how  the  Spaniards  disposed  of  enemies.  The  Spanish  landed  at  night, 
and  or  the  morning  found  a great  multitude  of  savages  opposed  to  them,  and  fought 
for  life,  but  were  overwhelmed  by  thousands  of  warriors.  The  Admiral  was  in  white 
armor,  a^d  fighting  desperately,  was  at  last  wounded  in  his  sword  arm,  and  then  in 
the  face,  and  leg.  He  was  deserted  by  his  men,  who  sought  to  save  themselves  in 
the  water,  and  killed  many  of  his  enemies,  but  his  helmet  and  skull  were  crushed  at 
one  blow  by  a frantic  savage  with  a huge  club.  There  were  thirty-two  Spaniards 
killed,  and  one  of  the  squadron  of  three  ships  was  burned  as  there  were  not  men 
enough  to  sail  all  the  vessels.  There  is  in  Manila,  in  the  walled  city,  where  it  is 
seen  every  day  by  thousands  of  American  soldiers,  a stately  monument  to  the  navi- 
gator who  found  the  Philippines,  and  whose  adventurous  discoveries  insured  him  im- 
mortality. His  first  landing  on  the  Philippines  wTas  March  12th,  1521,  less  than 
thirty  years  after  Columbus  appeared  in  the  West  Indies,  believing  that  he  was  in 
the  midst  of  the  ancient  East  Indies,  and  judging  from  the  latitude  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  the  island  empire  of  the  Great  Kahn.* 

*This  account  of  Magellan  is  from  Antonio  de  Marga’s  rare  volume  published  io. 
Mexico. 


308 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


“ After  the  death  of  Magellan,  Duarte  Barbosa  took  the  command  and  he  and 
twenty  of  his  men  were  treacherously  killed  by  the  Christian  King,  with  whom 
they  had  allied  themselves,  one  Juan  Serrano  was  left  alive  amongst  the  natives. 
Magellan’s  ‘Victory’  was  the  first  ship  that  circumnavigated  the  globe. 

“Magellanes  passed  over  to  the  service  of  the  King  of  Castile,  from  causes  which 
moved  him  thereto;  and  he  set  forth  to  the  Emperor  Charles  V.,  our  sovereign, 
that  the  Islands  of  Maluco  fell  within  the  demarcation  of  his  crown  of  Castile,  and 
that  the  conquest  of  them  pertained  to  him  conformably  to  the  concession  of  Pop: 
Alexander;  he  also  offered  to  make  an  expedition  and  a voyage  to  them  in  the  em- 
peror’s name,  laying  his  course  through  that  part  of  the  delimitation  which  belonged 
to  Castile,  and  availing  himself  of  a famous  astrologer  and  cosmographer  named 
Ruyfarelo,  wrhom  he  kept  in  his  service. 

“The  Emperor  (from  the  importance  of  the  business)  confided  this  voyage  and 
discovery  of  Magellanes,  with  the  ships  and  provisions  which  were  requisite  for  it, 
with  which  he  set  sail  and  discovered  the  straits  to  tvhich  he  gave  his  name.  Through 
these  he  passed  to  the  South  Sea,  and  navigated  to  the  islands  of  Tendaya  and  Sehu, 
where  he  was  killed  by  the  natives  of  Matan,  which  is  one  of  them.  His  ships  went 
on  to  Maluco,  where  their  crews  had  disputes  and  differences  with  the  Portuguese 
who  were  in  the  island  of  Terrenate;  and  at  last,  not  being  able  to  maintain  them- 
selves there,  they  left  Maluco  in  a ship  named  the  Victory,  which  had  remained  to 
the  Castilians  out  of  their  fleet,  and  they  took  as  Chief  and  Captain  Juan  Sebastian 
del  Cano,  who  performed  the  voyage  to  Castile,  by  the  way  of  India,  where  he  ar- 
rived with  very  few  of  his  men,  and  he  gave  an  account  to  His  Majesty  of  the  dis- 
covery of  the  islands- of  the  great  archipelago,  and  of  his  voyage.” 

The  work  of  De  Morga  has  value  as  a novelty,  as  it  is  more  than  a defense — a 
laudation  of  the  Spanish  rule  in  the  Philippines  in  the  sixteenth  century.  The 
t’t!e  page  is  a fab*  nromise  of  a remarkable  performance,  and  it  is  here  presented: 

THE 

PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS, 

MOLUCCAS,  SIAM,  CAMBODIA, 

JAPAN  AND  CHINA, 
at  the  close  of  the  Sixteenth  Century 
By  ANTONIO  DE  MORGA. 

Translated  from  the  Spanish,  with  Notes  and  a Preface,  and  a 
Letter  from  Luis  Vaez  De  Torres,  Describing  His  Voy- 
age Through  the  Torres  Straits,  by  the 

HON.  HENRY  E.  J.  STANLEY. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


309 


The  original  work  of  De  Morga  was  printed  in  Mexico  in  1609,  and  has  become 
extremely  rare;  there  is  no  copy  of  it  in  the  Bibliotheque  Imperiale  of  Paris.  This 
translation  is  from  a transcription  made  for  the  Hakluyt  Society  from  the  copy  in 
the  Grenville  Library  of  the  British  Museum;  the  catalogue  of  which  states  that 
“this  book,  printed  at  Mexico,  is  for  that  reason  probably  unknown  to  Bibliographers, 
though  a book  of  great  rarity.” 

The  translator  gives  a new  view  to  Americans  of  the  part  that  Spaniards  have 
played  in  the  Philippines.  He  plunges  deep  into  Iris  subject,  saying: 

“ The  great  point  in  which  Manila  has  been  a success,  is  the  fact  that  the  orig- 
inal inhabitants  have  not  disappeared  before  the  Europeans,  and  that  they  have 
been  civilized,  and  brought  into  a closer  union  with  the  dominant  race  than  is  to 
be  found  elsewhere  in  similar  circumstances.  The  inhabitants  of  the  Philippines 
previous  to  the  Spanish  settlement  were  not  like  the  inhabitants  of  the  great  Indian 
peninsula,  people  with  a civilization  as  old  as  that  of  their  conquerors.  Excepting 
that  they  possessed  the  art  of  writing,  and  an  alphabet  of  their  own,  they  do  not 
appear  to  have  differed  in  any  way  from  the  Dayaks  of  Borneo  as  described  by  Mr. 
Boyle  in  his  recent  book  of  adventures  amongst  that  people.  Indeed,  there  is  al- 
most a coincidence  of  verbal  expressions  in  the  descriptions  he  and  De  Morga  give 
of  the  social  customs,  habits,  and  superstitions  of  the  two  peoples  they  are  describ- 
ing; though  many  of  these  coincidences  are  such  as  are  incidental  to  life  in  similar 
circumstances,  they  are  enough  to  lead  one  to  suppose  a community  of  origin  of  the 
inhabitants  of  Borneo  and  Luzon.”  Mr.  Consul  Farren,  Manila,  March  13th,  1845, 
wrote  and  is  quoted  in  support  of  this  view  as  follows: 

“The  most  efficient  agents  of  public  order  throughout  the  islands  are  the  local 
clergy,  many  of  whom  are  also,  of  the  country.  There  are  considerable  parts  of 
these  possessions  in  which  the  original  races,  as  at  Ceylon,  retain  their  independence, 
and  are  neither  taxed  nor  interfered  with;  and  throughout  the  islands  the  power  of 
the  government  is  founded  much  more  on  moral  than  on  physical  influence.  The 
laws  are  mild,  and  peculiarly  favorable  to  the  natives.  The  people  are  indolent, 
temperate  and  superstitious.  The  government  is  conciliatory  and  respectable  in  its 
character  and  appearance,  and  prudent,  but  decisive  in  the  exercise  of  its  powers 
over  the  people;  and  united  with  the  clergy,  who  are  shrewd,  and  tolerant,  and 
sincere,  and  respectable  in  general  conduct,  studiously  observant  of  tKelr  ecclesiasti- 
cal duties,  and  managing  with  great  tact  the  native  character.” 

March  29,  1851,  Mr.  Consul  Farren  wrote:  “Without  any  governing  power 

whatever,  the  greatest  moral  influence  in  these  possessions  is  that  which  the  priests 


310 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


possess,  and  divide  among  the  monastic  orders  of  Augustines,  Recoletos,  Dominicans, 
and  Franciscans  (who  are  all  Spaniards),  and  the  assistant  native  clergy.  A popula- 
tion exceeding  3,800,000  souls  is  ranged  into  677  pueblos  or  parishes,  without 
reckoning  the  unsubdued  tribes.  In  577  of  those  pueblos  there  are  churches,  with 
convents  or  clerical  residences  attached,  and  about  500  of  them  are  in  the  personal 
incumbency  of  those  Spanish  monks.  The  whole  ecclesiastical  subdivisions  being 
embraced  in  the  archbishopric  of  Manila  and  three  bishoprics.” 

“The  Philippines  were  converted  to  Christianity  and  maintained  in  it  by  the 
monastic  orders,  energetically  protected  by  them  (and  at  no  very  past  period)  against 
the  oppressions  of  the  provincial  authorities,  and  are  still  a check  on  them  in  the 
interests  of  the  people.  The  clergy  are  receivers  in  their  districts  of  the  capitation 
tax  paid  by  the  natives,  and  impose  it;  they  are  the  most  economical  agency  of  the 
government.” 

The  Archbishop  of  Manila  is  substantially  of  this  judgment.  De  Morga  opens 
his  address  to  the  reader: 

“The  monarchy  of  Kings  of  Spain  has  been  aggrandized  by  the  zeal  and  care 
with  which  they  have  defended  within  their  own  hereditary  kingdoms,  the  Holy 
Catholic  Faith,  which  the  Roman  Church  teaches,  against  whatsoever  adversaries 
oppose  it,  or  seek  to  obscure  the  truth  by  various  errors,  which  faith  they  have 
disseminated  throughout  the  world.  Thus  by  the  mercy  of  God  they  preserve  their 
realms  and  subjects  in  the  purity  of  the  Christian  religion,  deserving  thereby  the 
glorious  title  and  renown  which  they  possess  of  Defenders  of  the  Faith.  Moreover, 
by  the  valor  of  their  indomitable  hearts,  and  at  the  expense  of  their  revenues 
and  property,  with  Spanish  fleets  and  men,  they  have  furrowed  the  seas,  and  dis- 
covered and  conquered  vast  kingdoms  in  the  most  remote  and  unknown  parts  of  the 
world,  leading  their  inhabitants  to  a knowledge  of  the  true  God,  and  to  the  fold 
of  the  Christian  Church,  in  which  they  now  live,  governed  in  civil  and  political 
matters  with  peace  and  justice,  under  the  shelter  and  protection  of  the  royal  arm 
and  power  which  was  wanting  to  them.  This  boast  is  true  of  Manila,  and  of  Manila 
alone  amongst  all  the  colonics  of  Spain  or  the  other  European  states.  If  the  natives 
of  Manila  have  been  more  fortunate  than  those  of  Cuba,  Fern,  Jamaica,  and  Mexico, 
it  has  been  owing  to  the  absence  of  gold,  which  in  other  places  attracted  adventurers 
so  lawless  that  neither  the  Church  nor  Courts  of  justice  could  restrain  them.” 

It  is  against  the  orders  named  as  worthy  exalted  praise  that  the  insurgents  are 
most  inflamed,  and  whose  expulsion  from  the  islands  is  certain  in  case  of  Philippine 
jurisdiction.  The  truth  appears  to  be  that  the  Spanish  Colonial  system  was  slower 


SPANIARDS  READY  TO  EXECUTE  INSURGENT  PRISONERS. 


AFTER  AN  EXECUTION— PROSTRATE  FORMS  ARE  MEN  SHOT, 


GROUP  OB’  THE  UNCONQUERABLE  MOHAMMEDANS. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


313 

in  t he  East  Indies  than  in  the  West  Indies  and  South  America  in  producing  the 
revolutionary  rebellion  that  was  its  logical  consequence,  and  the  friars  more  and 
more  became  responsible  for  official  oppression  and  gradually  became  odious. 

It  was  New  Spain — Mexico — that  ruled  the  Philippines,  until  Mexican  inde- 
pendence restricted  her  sovereignty.  When  a Commander-in-Chief  died  in  the  Phil- 
ippines, it  was  sufficient  to  find  amongst  his  papers  a sealed  dispatch,  as  Morga 
records,  “From  the  high  court  of  Mexico,  which  carried  on  the  government  when 
the  fleet  left  New  Spain,  naming  (in  case  the  Commander-in-Chief  died)  a successor 
to  the  governorship.”  It  was  in  virtue  of  such  an  appointment  that  Guido  de  La- 
bazarris,  a royal  officer,  entered  upon  those  duties,  and  was  obeyed.  He,  with  much 
prudence,  valor,  and  tact,  continued  the  conversion  and  pacification  of  the  islands, 
and  governed  them,  and  Morga  states  that  in  his  time  there  came  the  corsair  Lima- 
hon  from  China,  with  seventy  large  ships  and  many  men-at-arms,  against  Manila. 
He  entered  the  city,  and  having  killed  the  master  of  the  camp  Martin  de  Goiti, 
in  his  house,  along  with  other  Spaniards  who  were  in  it,  he  went  against  the  fortress 
in  which  the  Spaniards,  who  were  few  in  number,  had  taken  refuge,  with  the  object 
of  taking  the  country  and  making  himself  master  of  it.  The  Span- 
iards, with  the  succor  which  Captain  Joan  de  Salzado  brought  them 
from  Yigan,  of  the  men  whom  he  had  with  him  (for  he  had  seen  this  corsair 
pass  by  the  coast,  and  had  followed  him  to  Manila),  defended  themselves  so  valiantly, 
that  after  killing  many  of  the  people  they  forced  him  to  re-embark,  and  to  leave  the 
bay  in  flight,  and  take  shelter  in  the  river  of  Pangasinam,  whither  the  Spaniards 
followed  him.  There  they  burned  his  fleet,  and  for  many  days  surrounded  this 
corsair  on  land,  who  in  secret  made  some  small  boats  with  which  he  fled  and  put 
to  sea,  and  abandoned  the  islands. 

The  change  of  the  name  of  the  islands  from  Lazarus,  which  Magellan  called 
them,  to  the  Philippines  and  the  capture  of  the  native  town  of  Manila  and  its  con- 
version into  a Spanish  city  is  related  by  Morga  in  these  words: 

“One  of  the  ships  which  sailed  from  the  port  of  Navidad  in  company  with  the 
fleet,  under  the  command  of  Don  Alonso  de  Arellano,  carried  as  pilot  one  Lope 
Martin,  a mulatto  and  a good  sailor,  although  a restless  man;  when  this  ship  came 
near  the  islands  it  left  the  fleet  and  went  forward  amongst  the  islands,  and,  having 
procured  some  provisions,  without  waiting  for  the  chief  of  the  expedition,  turned 
back  to  New  Spain  by  a northerly  course;  either  from  the  little  inclination  which 
he  had  for  making  the  voyage  to  the  isles,  or  to  gain  the  reward  for  having  discovered 
the  course  for  returning.  He  arrived  speedily,  and  gave  news  of  having  seen  the 


314 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


islands,  and  discovered  the  return  voyage,  and  said  a few  things  with  respect  to  his 
coming,  without  any  message  from  the  chief,  nor  any  advices  as  to  what  happened 
to  him.  Don  Alonzo  de  Arellano  was  well  received  by  the  High  Court  of  Justice, 
which  governed  at  that  time,  and  was  taking  into  consideration  the  granting  of  a 
reward  to  him  and  to  his  pilot;  and  this  would  have  been  done,  had  not  the  flagship  of 
the  Commander-in-Cbief  arrived  during  this  time,  after  performing  the  same  voy- 
age, and  bringing  a true  narrative  of  events,  and  of  the  actual  condition  of  affairs, 
and  of  the  settlement  of  Sebu;  also  giving  an  account  of  how  Don  Alonzo  de  Arellano 
with  his  ship,  without  receiving  orders  and  without  any  necessity  for  it,  had  gone  on 
before  the  fleet  on  entering  among  the  isles,  and  had  never  appeared  since.  It  was 
also  stated  that,  besides  these  islands,  which  had  peacefully  submitted  to  Ilis  Majesty, 
there  were  many  others,  large  and  rich,  well  provided  with  inhabitants,  victuals  and 
gold,  which  they  hoped  to  reduce  to  subjection  and  peace  with  the  assistance  which 
was  requested;  and  that  the  Commander-in-C’hief  had  given  to  all  these  isles  the  name 
of  Philippines,  in  memory  of  Ilis  Majesty.  The  succor  was  sent  to  him  immediately, 
and  has  been  continually  sent  every  year  conformably  to  the  necessities  which 
have  presented  themselves;  so  that  the  land  was  won  and  maintained. 

‘‘The  Commander-in-Chief  having  heard  of  other  islands  around  Sebu  with 
abundance  of  provisions,  he  sent  thither  a few  Spaniards  to  bring  some  of  the  natives 
over  in  a friendly  manner,  and  rice  for  the  camp,  with  which  he  maintained  himself 
as  well  as  he  could,  until,  having  passed  over  to  the  island  of  Panay,  He  sent  thence 
Martin  de  Goiti,  his  master  of  the  camp,  and  other  captains,  with  the  men  that 
seemed  to  him  sufficient,  to  the  side  of  Luzon,  to  endeavor  to  pacify  it  and  bring  it 
under  submission  to  His  Majesty;  a native  of  that  island,  of  importance,  named 
Maomat  was  to  guide  them. 

“Having  arrived  at  the  Bay  of  Manila,  they  found  its  town  on  the  sea  beach  elos<  * 
to  a large  river,  in  the  possession  of,  and  fortified  by  a chief  whom  they  caliet 
Bajamora;  and  in  front  across  the  river,  there  was  another  large  town  named  Tondo, 
this  was  also  held  by  another  chief,  named  Rajamatanda.  These  places  were  fortified 
with  palms,  and  thick  arigues  filled  in  with  earth,  and  a great  quantity  of  bronze  can- 
non, and  other  large  pieces  with  chambers.  Martin  de  Goiti  having  began  to  treat 
with  the  chiefs  and  their  people  of  the  peace  and  submission  which  he  claimed  foi 
them,  it  became  necessary  for  him  to  break  with  them;  and  the  Spaniards  entered 
the  town  by  force  of  arms,  and  took  it,  with  the  forts  and  artillery,  on  the  day  of  Sta. 
Potenciana,  the  19th  of  May,  the  year  1511;  upon  which  the  natives  and  their  chiefs 
gave  in,  and  made  submission,  and  many  others  of  the  same  island  of  Luzon  did  the 


same. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


315 


“When  the  Commander-in-Chief,  Legazpi,  received  news  in  Panay  of  the  taking 
of  Manila,  and  the  establishment  of  the  Spaniards  there  he  left  the  affairs  of  Sebu, 
and  of  the  other  islands  which  had  been  subdued,  set  in  order;  and  he  entrusted  the 
natives  to  the  most  trustworthy  soldiers,  and  gave  such  orders  as  seemed  fitting  for 
the  government  of  those  provinces,  which  are  commonly  called  the  Yisayas  de  los 
Pintados,  because  the  natives  there  have  their  whole  bodies  marked  with  fire.  He  then 
came  to  Manila  with  the  remainder  of  his  people,  and  was  very  well  received  there; 
and  established  afresh  with  the  natives  and  their  chiefs  the  peace,  friendship  and 
submission  to  His  Majesty  which  they  had  already  offered.  The  Commander-in-Chief 
founded  and  established  a town  on  the  very  site  of  Manila  (of  which  Rajamora  made 
a donation  to  the  Spaniards  for  that  purpose),  on  account  of  its  being  strong  and  in 
a well  provisioned  district,  and  in  the  midst  of  all  the  isles  (leaving  it  its  name  of 
Manila,  which  it  held  from  the  natives).  He  took  what  land  was  sufficient  for  the 
city,  in  which  the  governor  established  his  seat  and  residence;  he  fortified  it  with 
care,  holding  this  object  more  especially  in  view,  in  order  to  make  it  the  seat  of 
government  of  this  new  settlement,  rather  than  considering  the  temperature  or  width 
of  the  site,  which  is  hot  and  narrow,  from  having  the  river  on  one  side  of  the  city, 
and  the  bay  on  the  other,  and  at  the  back  large  swamps  and  marshes,  which  make 
it  very  strong. 

“From  this  post  he  pursued  the  work  of  pacification  of  the  other  provinces  of 
this  great  island  of  Luzon  and  of  the  surrounding  districts;  some  submitting  them- 
selves willingly,  others  being  conquered  by  force  of  arms,  or  by  the  industry  of  the 
monks  who  sowed  the  Holy  Gospel,  in  which  each  and  all  labored  valiantly,  both 
in  the  time  and  governorship  of  the  adelantado  Miguel  Lopez  de  Legazpi,  and  in 
that  of  other  governors  who  succeeded  him.  The  land  was  entrusted  to  those  who 
had  pacified  it  and  settled  in  it,  and  heads  named,  on  behalf  of  the  crown,  of  the 
provinces,  ports,  towns,  and  cities,  which  were  founded,  together  with  other  special 
commissions  for  necessities  which  might  arise,  and  for  the  expenses  of  the  royal 
exchequer.  The  affairs  of  the  government,  and  conversion  of  the  natives,  were 
treated  as  was  fit  and  necessary.  Ships  wrere  provided  each  year  to  make  the  voyage 
to  New  Sapin,  and  to  return  with  the  usual  supplies;  so  that  the  condition  of  the 
Philippine  Islands,  in  spiritual  and  temporal  matters,  flourishes  at  the  present  day, 
as  all  know. 

“The  Commander-in-Chief,  Miguel  Lopez  de  Legazpi,  as  has  been  said,  discovered 
the  ' lands,  and  made  a settlement  in  them,  and  gave  a good  beginning  to  their 
subt/'tion  and  pacification.  He  founded  the  city  of  the  Most  Holy  Name  of  Jesus 


316 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


iu  the  provinces  of  the  Pintados,  and  after  that  the  city  of  Manila  in  the  island  of 
Luzon.  He  conquered  there  the  province  of  Ylocos;  and  in  its  town  and  port, 
called  Vigan,  he  founded  a Spanish  town,  to  which  he  gave  the  name  of  Villa 
Fernandina.  So  also  he  pacified  the  province  of  Pangasinan  and  the  island  of 
Mindoro.  lie  fixed  the  rate  of  tribute  which  the  natives  had  to  pay  in  all  the 
islands,  and  ordered  many  other  matters  relating  to  their  government  and  conversion, 
until  he  died,  in  the  year  of  1374,  at  Manila,  where  his  body  lies  buried  in  the  monas- 
tery of  St.  Augustine. 

“During  the  government  of  this  Guido  de  Labazarris,  trade  and  commerce  were 
established  between  great  China  and  Manila,  ships  coming  each  year  with  mer- 
chandise, and  the  governor  giving  them  a good  reception;  so  that  every  year  the 
trade  has  gone  on  increasing.” 

The  Encyclopaedia  Britannica  says  that  the  Island  Samai  was  called  Filipina  by 
Vellalohos,  who  sailed  from  Mexico  in  February,  1543.  The  capital  was  fixed  at 
Manila  in  1571,  a distinction  enjoyed  three  hundred  and  twenty-seven  years.  It  was 
in  a letter  of  Lagozpis  in  15G7  that  the  name  lias  Filipinos  appeared  for  the  first  time. 

The  Dutch  became  very  enterprising  and  venturesome  in  the  Asiatic  archipel- 
agoes and  gave  the  Philippines  much  attention,  having  many  fights  with  the  Span- 
iards. The  Ladrones  became  well  known  as  a resting  place  between  the  islands 
of  Philip  and  New  Spain — Mexico.  The  Chinese  Pirates  were  troublesome,  and  the 
Spaniards,  between  the  natives,  the  pirates  and  the  Dutchmen,  kept  busy,  and 
had  a great  deal  of  naval  and  military  instruction.  There  were  other  varieties  of  life 
of  an  exciting  character,  in  terrible  storms  and  earthquakes.  The  storm  season  is 
the  same  in  the  Philippines  as  in  the  West  Indies,  and  the  tempests  have  like  feat- 
ares.  October  is  the  cyclone  and  monsoon  month.  The  most  destructive  storm  in 
the  island  of  Luzon  of  record  was  October  31st,  1876.  Floods  rolled  from  the  mount- 
ains, and  there  was  a general  destruction  of  roads  and  bridges,  and  it  is  reported 
six  thousand  persons  were  killed. 

So  extensive  and  exposed  is  the  Bay  of  Manila,  it  is  one  hundred  and  twenty 
knots  in  circumference— that  it  is  not  properly  a harbor,  but  a stormy  sheet  of 
water.  Admiral  Dewey’s  fleet  has  had  low  steam  in  the  boilers  all  the  while  to  quickly 
apply  the  power  of  the  engines  for  safety  in  case  of  a visitation  from  the  dreaded 
typhoon,  which  comes  on  suddenly  as  a squall  and  rages  with  tornado  intensity. 

There  are  manv  volcanoes  in  the  islands,  and  they  exist  from  the  North  of 
Luzon  to  the  Sulus  in  the  extreme  South,  a distance  as  great  as  from  Scotland  to 
Sicily.  There  is  one  on  Luzon  that  bears  a close  resemblance  both  in  appearance 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


817 

and  phenomena  to  Vesuvius.  The  likeness  in  eruptions  is  startling.  The  city  of 
Manila  has  repeatedly  suffered  from  destroying  shocks,  and  slight  agitations  are 
frequent.  Within  historic  times  a mountain  in  Luzon  collapsed,  and  a river  was 
filled  up  while  the  earth  played  fountains  of  sand.  The  great  volcano  Taal,  45  miles 
south  of  Manila,  is  only  850  feet  high,  and  on  a small  island  in  a lake  believed  to  be 
a volcanic  abyss,  having  an  area  of  100  square  miles.  Monte  Cagua,  2,910  feet  high, 
discharges  smoke  continually.  In  1814  12,000  persons  lost  their  lives  on  Luzon, 
the  earth  being  disordered  and  rent  in  an  appalling  way.  There  were  awful  eruptions 
July  20  and  October  24,  1867,  forests  of  great  trees  buried  in  discharges  of  volcanoes. 
June  3,  1863,  at  31  minutes  after  7 in  the  evening,  after  a day  of  excessive  heat, 
there  was  a shock  at  Manila  lasting  30  seconds,  in  which  400  people  were  killed, 
2,000  wounded,  and  26  public  and  570  private  houses  seriously  damaged.  The 
greater  structures  made  heaps  of  fragments.  That  these  calamities  have  taught  the 
people  lessons  in  building  is  apparent  in  every  house,  but  one  wonders  that  they 
have  not  taken  even  greater  precautions.  The  forgetfulness  of  earthquake  experi- 
ences in  countries  where  they  are  familiar,  always  amazes  those  unaccustomed  to 
the  awful  agitations  and  troubled  with  the  anticipations  of  imagination.  How- 
ever, there  never  has  been  in  the  Philippines  structural  changes  of  the  earth  as  great 
as  in  the  center  of  the  United  States  in  the  huge  fissures  opened  and  remaining  lakes 
in  the  New  Madrid  convulsions. 

In  a surprising  extent  the  Spanish  government  in  the  Philippines  has  been  in  the 
hands  of  the  priests,  especially  the  orders  of  the  church.  In  the  early  centuries 
there  was  less  cruel  oppression  than  in  Mexico  and  Peru.  And  yet  there  is  in  the 
old  records  a free-handed  way  of  referring  to  killing  people  that  shows  a somewhat 
sanguinary  state  of  society  even  including  good  citizens. 

Bias  Ruys  de  Herman  Gonzales  wrote  to  Dr.  Morga  from  one  of  his  expeditions, 
addressing  his  friend: 

“To  Dr.  Antonio  de  Morga,  Lieutenant  of  the  Governor  of  the  Filipine  isles  of 
Luzon,  in  the  city  of  Manila,  whom  may  our  Lord  preserve.  From  Camboia.”  This 
was  in  Cochin  China,  one  of  the  Kings  being  in  trouble,  called  upon  Gonzales,  who 
sympathized  with  him  and  wrote  of  the  ceremony  in  which  he  assisted:  “I  came  at 
his  bidding,  and  he  related  to  me  how  those  people  wished  to  kill  him  and  deprive 
him  of  the  kingdom,  that  I might  give  him  a remedy.  The  Mambaray  was  the 
person  who  governed  the  kingdom,  and  as  the  king  was  a youth  and  yielded  to 
wine,  he  made  little  account  of  him  and  thought  to  be  king  himself.  At  last  I 
and  the  Spaniards  killed  him,  and  after  that  they  caught  his  sons  and  killed  them. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  TIIE  PHILIPPINES. 


318 

After  that  the  capture  of  the  Malay  Cancona  was  undertaken,  and  he  was  killed, 
and  there  was  security  from  this  danger  by  means  of  the  Spaniards.  We  then  re- 
turned to  the  war,  and  I learned  that  another  grandee,  who  was  head  of  a province, 
wished  to  rise  up,  and  go  over  to  the  side  of  Chupinanon;  I seized  him  and  killed 
him;  putting  him  on  his  trial.  With  all  this  the  King  and  kingdom  loved  us  very 
much,  and  that  province  was  pacified,  and  returned  to  the  King.  At  this  time 
a vessel  arrived  from  Siam,  which  was  going  with  an  embassy  to  Manila,  and  put  in 
here.  There  came  in  it  Padre  Fray  Pedro  Custodio.  The  King  was  much  delighted 
at  the  arrival  of  the  priest,  and  wished  to  set  up  a church  for  him.” 

Unquestionably  there  was  degeneracy  that  began  to  have  mastery  in  high  places, 
and  this  can  be  distinctly  made  out  early  in  this  century,  becoming  more  obvious 
in  depravity,  when  Spain  fell  into  disorder  during  the  later  years  of  the  Napoleonic 
disturbances,  and  the  authority  and  influence  of  Mexico  were  eliminated  from  Spain. 
1 may  offer  the  suggestion  and  allow  it  to  vindicate  its  own  importance,  that  if 
we  have  any  Philippine  Islands  to  spare,  we  should  turn  them  over  to  the  Republic 
of  Mexico,  taking  in  exchange  Lower  California  and  Sonora,  and  presenting  those 
provinces  to  California  to  be  incorporated  in  that  State  as  counties.  It  was  under 
Mexican  rule  that  the  Philippines  were  most  peaceable  and  flourishing. 

The  late  Government  of  the  islands  as  revealed  to  the  American  officers  who  came 
into  possession  of  Manila,  was  fearfully  corrupt.  It  was  proven  by  documents  and 
personal  testimony  not  impeachable,  that  a Captain-General’s  launch  had  been  used 
to  smuggle  Mexican  dollars,  that  the  annual  military  expedition  to  the  southern 
islands  was  a stated  speculation  of  the  C'aptain-Gcncral  amounting  to  $200,000, 
in  one  case  raised  to  $100,000,  that  the  same  high  official  made  an  excursion  to  all 
the  custom  houses  on  the  islands  ordered  the  money  and  books  aboard  his  ship  and 
never  returned  either,  that  one  way  of  bribery  was  for  presents  to  be  made  to  the 
wives  of  officials  of  great  power  and  distinction;  one  lady  is  named  to  whom 
business  men  when  presenting  a splendid  bracelet,  waited  on  her  with  two  that  she 
might  choose  the  one  most  pleasing,  and  as  she  had  two  white  arms,  she  kept  both. 

The  frequent  changes  in  Spanish  rulers  of  the  islands  are  accounted  for  by 
the  demand  for  lucrative  places,  from  the  many  favorites  to  whom  it  was  agreeable 
and  exemplary  to  offer  opportunities  to  make  fortunes.  It  goes  hard  with  the  de- 
posed Spaniards  that  they  had  no  chance  to  harvest  perquisites,  and  must  go  home 
poor.  This  is  as  a fountain  of  little  tears. 

The  city  of  Manila  is  not  lofty  in  buildings,  because  it  has  been  twice  damaged  to 
the  verge  of  ruin  by  earthquakes  and  many  times  searched  ar.d  shaken  by  tremen- 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


319 

i . tiyi®  gales,  aud  is  situated  on  the  lands  so  low  that  it  is  not  uplifted  to  the  gaze  of 
n.;.nkind — is  not  a city  upon  a hill,  and  yet  it  is  “no  mean  city.”  Antonio  de  Morga 
says: 

“Tjie  entrance  of  the  Spaniards  into  the  Philippines  since  the  year  1564,  and  the 
subjection  and  conversion  which  has  been  effected  in  them,  and  their  mode  of  govern- 
ment, tnd  that  which  during  these  years  His  Majesty  has  provided  and  ordered 
for  their  good,  has  been  the  cause  of  innovation  in  many  things,  such  as  are  usual 
to  kingdoms  and  provinces  which  charge  their  faith  and  sovereign.  The  first  has  been  ' 
that,  besi  sics  the  name  of  Philippines,  which  they  took  and  received  from  the  be- 
ginning c f their  conquest,  all  the  islands  are  now  a new  kingdom  and  sovereignty, 
to  which  His  Majesty  Philip  the  Second,  our  sovereign,  gave  the  name  of  New 
Kingdom  of  Castile,  of  which  by  his  royal  privilege,  he  made  the  city  of  Manila 
the  capita’,  giving  to  it,  as  a special  favor  among  others,  a coat  of  arms  with  a 
crown,  chosen  and  appointed  by  his  royal  person,  which  is  a scutcheon  divided 
across,  and  in  the  upper  part  a castle  on  the  red  field,  and  in  the  lower  part  a lion  of 
gold,  crowned  and  rampant,  with  a naked  sword  in  the  dexter  hand,  and  half  tne 
body  in  the  shape  of  a dolphin  upon  the  waters  of  the  sea,  signifying  that  the  Span- 
iards passed  over  them  with  arms  to  conquer  this  kingdom  for  the  crown  of  Castile. 

“The  Commander-in-Chief,  Miguel  Lopez  de  Legazpi,  first  governor  of  the 
Philippines,  founded  the  city  of  Manila,  in  the  isle  of  Luzon,  in  the  same  site  in  which 
Rajamora  had  his  town  and  fort  (as  has  been  said  more  at  length),  at  the  mouth  of 
the  river  which  pours  out  into  the  bay,  on  a point  which  is  formed  between  the 
•river  and  the  sea.  He  occupied  the  whole  of  it  with  this  towrn  and  divided  it  among 
the  Spaniards  in  equal  building  plots,  with  streets  and  blocks  of  houses  regularly 
laid  out,  straight  and  level  leaving  a great  place,  tolerably  square,  where  he  erected 
the  cathedral  church  and  municipal  buildings;  and  another  place  of  arms,  in  which 
stood  the  fort  and  there  also  the  royal  buildings;  he  gave  sites  to  the  monasteries  and 
hospital  and  chapels,  which  would  be  built,  as  this  was  a city  which  would  grow  and 
increase  every  da]7,  as  has  already  happened;  because  in  the  course  of  time  which 
passed  by,  it  has  become  as  illustrious  as  the  best  cities  of  all  those  parts. 

“The  whole  city  is  surrounded  by  a wall  of  hewn  stone  of  more  than  two  and  a 
half  yards  in  width,  and  in  parts  more  than  three,  with  small  towers  and  traverses  at 
intervals;  it  has  a fortress  of  hewn  stone  at  the  point,  which  guards  the  bar  and  the 
river,  with  a ravelin  close  to  the  water,  which  contains  a few  heavy  pieces  of  artillery 
which  command  the  sea  and  the  river,  and  other  guns  on  the  higher  part  of  the 
fort  for  the  defense  of  the  bar,  besides  other  middling-sized  field  guns  and  swivel 


320 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


gun.-,  with  vaults  for  supplies  and  munitions,  and  a powder  magazine,  with  its 
inner  space  well  protected,  and  an  abundant  well  of  fresh  water;  also  quarters  for 
soldiers  and  artillerymen  and  a house  for  the  Commandant.  It  is  newly  fortified 
on  the  land  side,  in  the  place  of  arms,  where  the  entrance  is  through  a good  wall, 
and  two  salient  towers  furnished  with  artillery  which  command  the  wall  and  gate. 
This  fortress  named  Santiago,  has  a detachment  of  thirty  soldiers,  with  their  officers, 
and  eight  artillerymen,  who  guard  the  gate  and  entrance  in  watches,  under  the 
command  of  an  alcalde  who  lives  within,  and  has  the  guard  and  custody  of  it. 

“There  is  another  fortress,  also  of  stone,  in  the  same  wall,  at  the  ditance  of  the 
range  of  a culverin,  at  the  end  of  the  wall  which  runs  along  the  shore  of  the  hay; 
this  is  named  Nuestra  Senora  de  Guia;  it  is  a very  large  round  block,  with  its  court- 
yard, water  and  quarters,  and  magazines  and  other  workshops  within;  it  has  an  out- 
work jutting  out  towards  the  beach,  in  which  there  are  a dozen  of  large  and  middle- 
sized  guns,  which  command  the  bay,  and  sweep  the  walls  which  run  from  it  to  the 
port  and  fort  of  Santiago.  On  the  further  side  it  has  a large  salient  tower  with 
four  heavy  pieces,  which  command  the  beach  further  on,  towards  the  chapel  of 
Nuestra  Senora  de  Guia.  The  gate  and  entrance  of  this  is  within  the  city,  it  is 
guarded  by  a detachment  of  twenty  soldiers,  with  their  officers,  and  six  artillery- 
men, a commandant,  and  his  lieutenant,  who  dwell  within. 

“On  the  land  side,  where  the  wall  extends,  there  is  a bastion  called  Sant 
Andres,  with  six  pieces  of  artillery,  which  can  fire  in  all  directions,  and  a few 
swivel  guns;  and  further  on  another  outwork  called  San  Gabriel,  opposite  the 
parian  of  the  Sangleys,  with  the  same  number  of  cannon,  and  both  these  works  have, 
some  soldiers  and  an  ordinary  guard. 

“The  wall  is  sufficiently  high,  with  battlements  and  turrets  for  its  defense  in 
the  modern  fashions;  they  have  a circuit  of  a league,  which  may  be  traversed  on 
the  top  of  the  walls,  with  many  stairs  on  the  inside  at  intervals,  of  the  same  stone- 
work, and  three  principal  city  gates,  and  many  other  posterns  to  the  river  and 
beach  for  the  service  of  the  city  in  convenient  places.  All  of  these  gates  are  shut 
before  nightfall  by  the  ordinary  patrol,  and  the  keys  are  carried  to  the  guard-room  of 
the  royal  buildings;  and  in  the  morning,  when  it  is  day,  the  patrol  returns  with 
them  and  opens  the  city. 

“The  royal  magazines  are  in  the  parade;  in  them  are  deposited  and  kept  all 
the  munitions  and  supplies,  cordage,  iron,  copper,  lead,  artillery,  arquebuses,  and 
other  things  belonging  to  the  royal  treasury,  with  their  special  officials  and  work- 
men, who  are  under  the  command  of  the  royal  officers 


RIDING  BUFFALOES  THROUGH  GROVES  OF  DATE  PALMS. 


A NATIVE  HOUSE. 


NATIVES  FISHING  FROM  A CANAL  BOAT. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


323 

“Close  to  these  magazines  is  the  powder  magazine,  with  its  master,  officials,  and 
convicts,  in  which,  on  ordinary  occasions,  thirty  mortars  grind  powder,  and  that 
which  is  damaged  is  refined. 

“In  another  part  of  the  city,  in  a convenient  situation,  is  the  cannon  foundry, 
with  its  moulds,  furnaces,  and  instrument  founders,  and  workmen,  who  carry  on 
the  works. 

“The  royal  buildings  are  very  handsome,  with  a good  view,  and  very  roomy, 
with  many  windows  opening  seaward  and  to  the  parade;  they  are  all  of  hewn  stone, 
with  two  courts  and  high  and  low  corridors  with  thick  pillars.” 

The  city  of  to-day  verifies  the  descriptive  talent  and  accuracy  of  this  writer. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 

Important  Facts  About  the  Lesser  Islands  of  the  Philippine  Archipelago — Loca- 
tion, Size  and  Population — Capitals  and  Principal  Cities — Rivers  and  Harbors 
— Surface  and  Soil — People  and  Products — Leading  Industries — Their  Com- 
merce and  Business  Affairs — The  Monsoons  and  Typhoons — The  Terrors  of 
the  Tempests  and  IIow  to  Avoid  Them. 

The  island  and  province  of  Mindoro  lies  in  the  strait  of  its  name  and  south  of 
Luzon.  It  has  in  the  center  an  elevated  plain,  we  quote  from  the  military 
notes  issued  by  the  War  Department,  from  which  many  sierras  extend  in 
different  directions  to  the  coast,  making  the  latter  rugged  and  dangerous.  The 
island  is  of  an  oval  form,  with  a prolongation  of  the  northern  portion  toward  the  west. 
Though  an  easy  day’s  sail  from  Manila,  it  is  one  of  the  least  populous  islands  of  the 
archipelago,  being  extremely  mountainous,  covered  with  dense  forests,  and  in  the 
more  level  parts  near  the  coast  full  of  marshes,  and  very  unhealthful.  The  inhabi- 
tants of  the  coast  arc  Tagals,  but  in  the  interior  there  is  a low  tribe  of  the  Malayan 
race,  probably  the  indigenes  of  the  island,  and  called  Manguianos,  speak- 
ing a peculiar  language  and  living  in  a very  miserable  manner  on  the 
products  of  a rude  agriculture.  There  are  also  said  to  be  some  Negritos,  but  of  these 
very  little  is  known.  There  are  many  short  streams.  The  island  is  110  miles  long 
and  has  an  area  of  3,087  square  miles.  The  population  is  106,170.  There  is  little 
known  of  the  mountains  of  the  interior,  as  the  inhabitants  dwell  mainly  on  the  coasts. 
Mindoro  constitutes  one  of  the  provinces  of  the  Philippines  under  an  alcalde. 

The  capital  is  Calapan,  with  a population  of  5,585.  It  is  situated  to  the  north, 
on  the  harbor  of  its  name,  defended  by  a fort  of  regular  construction;  it  has  about 
500  houses,  among  the  notable  stone  ones  being  the  parish,  court  house  and  jail, 
and  casa  real.  It  is  the  rsidence  of  the  alcalde  mayor  and  several  public  function- 
aries. The  city  is  situated  96  miles  from  Manila. 

Mount  Kalavite  is  a long-backed  promontory,  the  western  slope  of  which  forms 
Cape  Kalavite,  and  the  northern  slope  Point  del  Monte;  the  summit,  about  2,000  feet 
high,  appears  dome-shaped  when  seen  from  the  west,  but  from  the  north  or  south 
it  shows  a long  ridge  fairly  level;  the  western  end  of  this  ridge  is  the  highest  part. 

The  capital  of  the  province,  Calapan,  is  a coast  town.  The  inhabitants  are  occu- 

324 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


325 


pied  in  hunting,  fishing,  and  ordinary  weaving.  The  commerce  is  insignificant. 
Sand  hanks  extend  in  front  of  the  town  to  a distance  of  one-half  mile.  To  clear 
these,  the  northern  Silonai  islet  should  not  be  shut  out  by  Point  Calapan.  On  this 
line,  near  the  north  edge  of  the  banks,  the  soundings  are  36  to  46  fathoms. 

The  Semirara  Islands  form  a group  of  eight  islands,  all  surrounded  by  reefs. 

Semirara,  the  largest  of  the  group,  is  hilly,  about  512  feet  high  at  the  highest 
part.  The  west  coast  includes  several  little  bays  almost  entirely  obstructed  by  reefs, 
on  the  edge  of  which  are  depths  of  4f  to  13  fathoms;  and  off  the  town  of  Semirara, 
which  stands  on  the  top  of  the  hill  facing  the  largest  hay,  the  anchorage  is  very  bad, 
even  for  coasters.  The  east  coast  is  bordered  by  a reef,  which  extends  about  a mile 
from  the  northeast  part  of  the  island;  on  coming  from  the  north  this  coast  of  the 
island  must  not  be  approached  within  three  miles  until  the  town  of  Semirara  bears 
full  west.  There  is  anchorage  at  the  south  of  the  island  in  5 to  8 fathoms,  sand,  dur- 
ing the  northeast  monsoon.  Good  coal  for  steaming  purposes  was  found  on  the 
island  by  Captain  Yillavicencio,  of  the  Spanish  navy. 

Tablas  Island  is  mountainous,  and  on  its  northern  extremity  is  the  peak  Cabezo 
de  Tablas,  2,405  feet  high;  generally  the  coasts  are  clear  and  steep-to.  Off  the  north 
end  are  two  rocky  islets,  distant  one  cable  from  the  coast;  the  larger  one  is  clear  and 
steep,  the  smaller  one  has  rocks  around  it. 

The  west  coast  of  Mindoro  Island  has  no  soundings  off  it  excepting  in  the  bays, 
or  within  one  or  two  miles  of  the  shore  in  some  places.  In  the  interior  double  and 
treble  chains  of  mountains  extend  through  the  island,  and  some  low  points  of  land 
project  from  them  into  the  sea. 

Paluan  Bay  affords  excellent  shelter  in  the  northeast  monsoon,  and  is  also  a con- 
venient place  for  vessels  to  obtain  supplies  when  passing  through  Mindoro  Strait. 
The  bay  is  five  miles  wide  at  the  entrance,  of  a semi-circular  form,  running  back 
three  miles  in  a northerly  direction.  There  are  no  dangers  in  it. 

A small  river  disembogues  where  good  water  can  be  obtained  with  facility;  and 
on  the  beach  there  is  plenty  of  driftwood.  The  coral  projects  one-half  mile  from 
the  entrance  of  the  river,  and  has  10  and  12  fathoms  close  to  its  edge.  • 

Care  must  be  taken  when  working  into  Paluan  Bay,  for  the-  squalls  come  violently 
off  the  high  land,  and  very  sudden,  and  at  night  do  not  give  the  least  warning. 

The  Calamianes  are  a group  of  high  islands  lying  between  the  northeast  end 
of  Palawan  and  Mindoro,  and  extending  between  the  parallels  of  11  degrees  39  min- 
utes and  12  degrees  20  minutes  N.,  and  the  meridians  of  119  degrees  47  minutes 
gnd  120  degrees  23  minutes  E.  Busuanga,  the  largest  island  of  the  group,  is  about  34 


TI1E  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


326 

miles  in  extent  NW.  by  W.  and  SE.  by  E.,  and  18  miles  broad.  It  is  very  irregular 
in  form,  being  indented  with  numerous  deep  bays.  The  islands  and  reefs  which  front 
its  northeast  side  form  the  western  side  of  Northumberland  Strait. 

These  islands  .form,  with  the  northern  part  of  Palawan  and  the  Cuyos  Islands,  a 
province,  the  capital  of  which  is  at  Port  Tai  Tai.  The  climate  of  these  islafids  is  in 
general  hot  and  unhealthful.  Intermittent  fevers  and  cutaneous  diseases  prevail, 
attributable,  in  all  probability,  to  the  great  moisture  and  the  insalubrious  quality  of 
the  drinking  water.  All  these  islands  are,  generally  speaking,  hilly  and  broken. 
The  industry  of  the  locality  is  in  collecting  Salanganes  (edible  birds’  nests),  honey, 
and  wax;  but  cultivation  is  not  practiced  to -any  great  extent.  The  forests  produce 
good  timber  for  building  or  cabinet  work. 

Tara  Island,  when  seen  from  the  northward,  shows  a triple  summit  to  its  north- 
west end;  while  its  southern  part  looks  like  a separate  island,  saddle-shaped.  The 
island  does  not  appear  to  be  permanently  inhabited;  in  March,  1885,  it  was  occupied 
by  parties  from  Busuanga,  burning  the  grass  and  digging  cassava. 

Lagat  is  a small  island  334  feet  high,  surrounded  by  a reef  with  a narrow  passage 
between  it  and  the  reef  off  the  south  of  Tara. 

Botak  Island,  800  feet  high,  is  fairly  well  cultivated.  OfT  its  northern  end  there 
is  a queer  pin-shaped  rock,  and  off  its  southern  end  are  same  sharp-pointed  rocks. 
The  vicinity  has  not  been  sounded. 

The  space  included  between  the  Sulu  Archipelago  to  the  south  and  Mindoro  to 
the  north,  and  having  the  Philippine  Islands  on  the  east  and  Palawan  on  the  west, 
is  distinguished  by  the  name  of  the  Sulu  Sea.  Although  of  great  depth,  2,550  fath- 
oms, this  sea,  which  is  in  connection  with  the  China  and  Celebes  seas,  and  also  with 
the  Pacific  by  San  Bernardino  and  Surigao  straits,  has  a minimum  deep-sea  tem- 
perature of  50.5  degrees,  reached  invariably  at  400  fathoms.  As  this  temperature 
in  the  China  Sea  is  at  the  depth  of  200  fathoms,  and  in  the  Celebes  Sea  at  180 
fathoms,  and  in  the  Pacific  at  230  fathoms,  it  may  be  inferred  that  the  Sulu  Sea  is 
prevented  from  freely  interchanging  its  waters  with  those  seas  by  ridges  which 
do  not  exceed  those  depths. 

In  the  Sulu  Sea  easterly  winds  with  fine  weather  prevail  in  October,  and  the 
northeast  monsoon  is  not  established  until  November.  In  January  and  February 
it  blows  hardest,  but  not  with  the  force  of  the  China  seas,  and  it  is  felt  strongest 
before  the  openings  between  Panay  and  Negros,  and  Negros  and  Mindanao.  At  the 
end  of  May  southwest  winds  begin  to  blow,  and  in  a month  become  established,  to 
terminate  in  October,  bringing  with  them  a season  made  up  of  rain  squalls  and  tem- 


SOUTHERN  ISLANDERS — SHOWING  COCOANUT  PALMS  AND  THE  MONKEY  TREE. 


A REVIEW  OF  SPANISH  FILIPINO  VOLUNTEERS. 


A SPANISH  FESTIVAL  IN  MANILA. 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


329 


pests,  which  take  place  principally  in  July  and  August.  In  September  a heavy  mist 
hangs  about  the  coast  of  Mindanao. 

The  island  and  province  of  Paragua  is  the  most  western  of  the  Philippine  Archi- 
pelago, and  is  situated  to  the  north  of  Borneo.  It  is  long  and  narrow,  following  a 
northeast  direction,  and  nearly  closes  on  the  southwest  the  Sea  of  Mindanao,  which 
enters  from  the  China  Sea  by  Balabac  Strait  on  the  south  and  between  Mindoro  and 
Paragua  on  the  north.  A chain  of  high  mountains,  some  6,5G0  feet  high,  runs  length- 
wise of  the  narrow  belt  formed  by  the  island,  whose  length  is  266  miles.  The  north- 
west and  northeast  slopes  are  narrow.  The  island  has  extensive  and  well  protected 
harbors  and  bays.  The  area  is  2,315  square  miles  and  the  population  45,000. 

The  capital  is  Puerto  Princesa,  with  a population  of  1,589. 

Panay  is  divided  into  three  provinces,  viz:  Capiz  to  the  north,  Iloilo  to  the  south- 
east, and  Antique  to  the  southwest.  In  general  it  is  wild,  with  very  high  coasts,  ex- 
cept in  the  northeastern  part,  where  the  latter  are  somewhat  marshy.  A mountain 
chain  crosses  the  island  from  Point  Juraojurao  on  the  south  as  far  as  Point  Potol  on 
the  north,  following  a direction  almost  parallel  to  the  western  coast.  Large  groups 
of  sierras  branch  out  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  central  chain;  on  the  eastern  slope 
begins  another  chain,  running  northeast  to  the  extreme  northeasterly  point  of  the 
island.  Owing  to  its  cragginess,  it  has  a great  number  of  streams  running  in  different 
directions.  The  area  is  4,540  square  miles. 

The  town  of  Iloilo  stands  on  a low  sandy  flat  on  the  right  bank  of  a river;  at  the 
end  of  this  flat  is  a spit  on  which  a fort  is  built,  and  close  to  which  there  is  deep 
water.  Vessels  of  moderate  draft  (15  feet)  can  ascend  the  river  a short  distance 
and  lie  alongside  wharves  which  communicate  with  the  merchant  houses,  but  large 
vessels  must  anchor  outside  near  the  spit.  It  is  a town  of  great  commercial  impor- 
tance, and  a brisk  coasting  trade  is  carried  on  from  it.  The  better  class  of  houses  in 
Iloilo  are  built  on  strong  wooden  posts,  2 or  3 feet  in  diameter,  that  reach  to  the 
roof;  stone  walls  to  the  first  floor,  with  wooden  windows  above,  and  an  iron  roof.  The 
poorer  class  of  dwellings  are  flimsy  erections  of  nipa,  built  on  four  strong  posts. 
The  roads  and  bridges  are  in  a deplorable  condition  and  almost  impassable  in  the 
rainy  season. 

The  chief  imports  are  Australian  coal,  and  general  merchandise  from  Europe,  but 
most  sailing  ships  arrive  in  ballast. 

The  exports  are  sugar,  tobacco,  rice,  coffee,  hides,  and  hemp;  it  is  also  the  prin- 
cipal place  of  manufacture  of  pina,  juse,  and  sinamoya,  a tissue  greatly  in  use  among 
the  Philippines.  In  1883,  93,750  tons  of  sugar  were  exported,  principally  to  America. 


330 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


Typhoons  do  not  occur  regularly,  but  in  most  years  the  tail  of  one  passes  over 
the  place,  which  suffers  also  from  the  visitations  of  locusts. 

Provisions  of  all  kinds  can  be  obtained,  but  the  prices  are  higher  than  at  Manila. 
In  1886  beef  was  12^  cents  per  pound,  bread  11  cents,  vegetables  11  cents,  fowls  $2 
per  dozen.  Water  is  scarce  and  is  brought  across  from  Guimaras  in  tank  boats;  it  is 
supplied  to  the  shipping  at  the  rate  of  $1  per  ton;  the  Europeans  depend  mainly 
upon  rain  water. 

There  are  generally  about  500  tons  of  coal  in  store,  chiefly  Australian;  it  is  kept 
for  the  supply  of  local  steamers  that  take  in  what  they  require  alongside  the  wharves. 
Vessels  in  the  roads  can  have  it  brought  off  in  bulk  in  lighters  or  schooners  at  a 
cost  of  50  cents  a ton.  Coolies  can  be  hired  at  75  cents  per  ton,  but  they  will  not 
coal  vessels  if  they  can  get  other  work.  Notice  is  required  the  day  before  coaling, 
as  men  are  not  kept  in  readiness.  The  price  of  coal  in  1886  was  $11.00  per  ton. 

There  is  regular  weekly  communication  with  Manila,  which  is  250  miles  distant. 

The  Province  of  Capiz  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  Archipelago  Sea,  on  the 
east  by  the  District  of  Concepcion,  on  the  south  by  the  ridge  separating  it  from 
Iloilo,  and  on  the  southwest  by  the  mountains,  separating  it  from 
the  Province  of  Antique.  Its  very  high  mountains  are  covered  with  luxuriant  vege- 
tation, and  give  rise  to  many  rivers  which  water  the  valleys  of  the  province.  There 
are  gold  and  copper  mines,  and  much  tobacco,  sugar,  rice,  and  abaca  is  raised.  Dur- 
ing the  year  three  fairs  are  held,  in  which  articles  of  the  country  are  bartered.  The 
province  is  divided  into  two  parts,  called  Ilaya  and  Aclan,  which  are  irrigated  by 
the  rivers  Panay  and  Adan,  respectively.  The  area  is  1,543  square  miles  and  the 
population  1S9,171,  distributed  among  36  pueblos  and  287  barrios. 

The  capital  is  Capiz,  with  a population  of  13,676.  It  is  situated  290  miles  from 
Manila.  It  has  a harbor  for  vessels  of  ordinary  draft,  and  highroads  to  Iloilo, 
Antique,  and  the  District  of  Concepcion.  There  is  a steamer  kept  by  the  state,  stop- 
ping at  the  harbor  every  28  days  and  keeping  up  communication  with  Manila, 
Romblon,  Iloilo,  and  Cebu. 

The  Province  of  Iloilo  is  to  the  southeast  of  the  Province  of  Capiz  and  west  of 
Antique.  The  ground  is  generally  level,  and,  being  irrigated  by  numerous  rivers, 
is  fertile,  so  that  tobacco,  cacao,  sugar  cane,  abaca,  rice,  and  maize  are  grown;  be- 
sides, there  is  good  pasturage  for  raising  herds  of  cattle  and  horses,  and  gold  and 
other  mines  are  known.  The  principal  industry  is  the  manufacture  of  fabrics  of 
sinamay,  pina,  jusi,  etc.,  requiring  over  30,000  looms.  The  dimensions  are  99  nvie^ 
in  length  by  27  miles  in  width,  and  the  population  is  472,728. 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


r>  o 1 
t)*Jl 

The  capital  is  Iloilo,  with  a population  of  10,380.  It  is  situated  355  miles  from 
Manila,  and  is  the  residence  of  the  governor,  captain  of  port,  and  a number  of 
treasury,  justice,  and  fomento  officials.  It  has  a pretty  cathedral,  a seminary,  casa 
real,  and  court  house.  It  is  one  of  the  most  mercantile  towns  of  the  Visaya  group, 
and  has  some  industries,  among  which  are  a machine  shop  and  foundry,  a carriage 
factory,  and  a hat  factory. 

The  Province  of  Bohol  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  sea  between  Cebu  and  Leyte, 
on  the  east  by  the  Surigao  Sea,  on  the  south  by  the  Sea  of  Mindanao,  and  on  the 
west  by  the  channel  separating  it  from  Cebu.  The  province  is  composed  of  the 
islands  of  Bohol  and  Dauis.  They  are  somewhat  mountainous  and  well  wooded,  and 
coffee,  abaca,  sugar  cane,  and  tobacco  are  raised.  In  the  mountains  of  Bohol  game 
is  plenty,  and  many  coal  and  phosphate  of  iron  mines  are  supposed  to  exist.  Manu- 
factures consist  in  fabrics  of  sinamay  and  other  materials.  The  area  is  1,617  square 
miles  and  the  population  247,745. 

The  capital  is  Tagbilaran,  with  a population  of  8,638.  It  is  situated  365  miles 
from  Manila. 

The  island  and  province  of  Cebu  are  the  most  important  of  the  Visayas,  on 
account  of  the  central  position,  nature  of  the  soil,  and  the  industry  of  its  numerous 
inhabitants.  It  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  sea  separating  it  from  Masbate  and 
Leyte,  on  the  east  by  the  sea  separating  it  from  Leyte  and  Bohol,  on  the  south 
by  the  Mindanao  Sea,  and  on  the  west  by  the  Tanon  Channel  and  the  island  of 
Negros.  The  area  is  2,092  square  miles  and  the  population  504,076.  Great  mountain 
chains  cross  the  island;  the  chief  of  these  starts  at  the  extreme  north  between  Point 
Marab  on  the  west  and  Baluarte  on  the  east,  and,  continuing  south  between  the  two 
coasts,  ends  almost  in  the  center  of  the  island.  Two  other  chains  run  along  the  coast, 
and  one  starts  near  Carcas,  to  the  southwest  of  the  city  of  Cebu,  terminating  on  the 
south  in  Tanon  Point.  The  coasts  are  high  and  the  rivers  of  little  importance. 

The  capital  is  Cebu,  with  a population  of  35,243.  It  is  the  mercantile  center  of 
the  islands,  and  is  situated  460  miles  from  Manila.  It  is  an  Episcopal  see,  and  has 
a good  cathedral,  Episcopal  palace,  casa  real,  court  house,  and  private  edifices,  simple  but 
tasty;  there  is  also  a postoffice  and  telegraph  station.  On  the  south,  and  at  the  en- 
trance of  the  channel,  is  the  castle  of  Point  Cauit,  and  north  of  this  the  tower  of  Man- 
daui;  both  these  fortifications  communicate  with  the  capital  by  means  of  a wagon 
road,  the  city  being  midway  between  them.  At  the  capital  reside  the  politico- 
military  governor,  a secretary,  judge  and  attorney-general,  a number  of  public  func- 
tionaries, a captain  of  engineers,  and  the  captain  of  the  port. 


3:52 


THE  SOUTHERN'  PHILIPPINES. 


JIaktan  Island  consists  of  an  old  coral  reef,  raised  a few  feet  (8  or  10  at  most) 
above  the  present  sea  level.  At  the  northern  part  of  the  island,  where  a convent 
stands,  a low  cliff  fringes  the  shore,  being  an  upper  stratum  of  the  upheaved  reef. 
The  raised  reef  is  here  preserved,  but  over  the  portion  of  the  island  immediately 
fronting  Cebu  it  has  been  removed  by  denudation,  with  the  exception  of  a few  pillar- 
Jike  blocks  which  remain,  and  which  are  conspicuous  from  the  anchorage.  The 
surface  is  scooped  out  into  irregular  basins  and  sharp  projecting  pinnacles  and  cov- 
ered in  all  directions  with  mud,  resulting  from  the  denudation.  Nearly  all  the  island 
is  covered  by  mangroves,  but  on  the  part  left  dry  there  are  plantations  of  cocoanuts. 

The  only  town  on  the  island  is  Opon,  on  the  west  coast,  S\V.  of  Mandaui  Point 
in  Cebu.  It  was  here  that  Magellan  was  killed  in  1521,  after  making  the  first  passage 
across  the  Pacific. 

The  town  of  Cebu  is  the  most  ancient  in  the  Philippines;  it  is  the  seat  of  govern- 
ment of  the  Yisayan  Islands,  which  include  Cebu,  Bohol,  Panav,  Negros,  and  Leyte, 
and  it  is  the  residence  of  a bishop.  It  is  built  on  a large  plain  at  the  foot  of  the 
chain  of  hills  that  traverse  the  island  throughout  its  length,  and  is  a well-constructed, 
thriving  place;  the  merchants’  quarter  is  situated  along  the  port,  and  includes  some 
well-built  stone. houses,  though  many  arc  of  old  construction.  The  huts  of  the  Malays, 
for  the  most  part  fishermen,  are  on  the  beach,  and  form  the  west  part  of  the  city. 
The  fort  is  a triangular  edifice  of  stone,  painted  red,  with  an  open  square  in  front. 

The  island  of  Leyte  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  canal  separating  it  from 
Samar,  on  the  east  by  the  Pacific  Ocean,  on  the  west  by  the  sea  separating  it  from 
Bohol  and  Cebu,  and  on  the  south  by  the  one  separating  it  from  Mindanao.  It  is 
extensive  and  irregular,  having  an  area  of  3,087  square  miles  and  a population  of 
270,191.  A high  and  abrupt  mountain  chain  crosses  the  island  nearly  parallel  to 
the  west  coast;  the  coasts  are  high,  with  good  natural  harbors.  In  the  northern 
part  and  on  the  western  slopes  of  the  great  sierras,  streams  of  potable  water  and  also 
many  lagoons  abound.  This  is  different  from  the  eastern  part,  where  the  latter  are 
scarce.  The  principal  product  of  the  island  is  abaca,  but  rice  is  also  raised  and  co- 
coanut  oil  is  extracted.  There  are  unworked  mines  of  gold,  magnetite,  and  sulphur. 

The  capital  is  Tacloban,  with  a population  of  3,226.  It  is  situated  338  miles 
from  Manila.  Among  the  important  towns  are  11a  ru,  population  12,222;  Boraucn, 
21,290;  C'auyaia,  13.732:  Dagami,  23,000;  Ililongos,  13,713;  Ja:o,  12,475;  Massiu, 
18,199;  Falo,  17,736;  Tauauau,  18,509. 

The  island  of  Negros  is  mountainous  and  wild;  its  coasts  arc  difficult  of  access, 
and  the  breakers  strong,  except  on  the  west  coast  from  Point  Bulucabo  on  the  north 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


of  Palompon  on  the  west,  where  it  is  marshy.  A high  mountain  chain  crosses  it 
from  Point  Doong  on  the  north  to  the  harbor  and  point  Bombonon  on  the  south; 
from  the  last  third  extend  several  ramifications  of  high  mountains,  terminating 
on  the  coast  at  the  extreme  south  and  in  the  Sierra  Dumaguete.  Its  streams  are 
not  important,  being  short  and  of  little  value.  The  ground  is  uneven  hut  fertile. 
The  natives  irrigate  their  estates,  and  produce  tobacco,  coffee,  sugar  cane,  and  wheat. 
Manufactures  consist  in  fabrics  of  abaca  and  canoncgro,  of  which  boat  cables  are 
made.  The  interior  of  the  island,  covered  with  thick  forests,  is  almost  unexplored, 
being  inhabited  by  a few  savages. 

The  Province  of  Western  Negros  is  situated  on  Negros  Island,  it  is  bounded  on 
the  north  by  the  Visayas  Sea,  on  the  west  by  the  Paragua  Sea,  and  on  the  south  and 
east  by  the  Province  of  Eastern  Negros.  The  area  is  1,929  square  miles,  and  the 
population  22G,995. 

The  capital  is  Bacolod,  with  a population  of  G,268.  It  is  the  residence  of  the 
politico-military  governor,  the  secretary,  judge,  attorney-general,  and  several  public 
functionaries. 

It  is  situated  379  miles  from  Manila. 

The  Province  of  Negros  has  a population  of  91,782 — the  capital,  Dumaguete, 
13,613. 

The  Province  of  Romblon  consists  of  the  following  six  islands:  Romblon  (the 

principal  one),  Tablas,  Sibuyan,  Banton,  Simara,  and  Maestre  Campo.  It  is  bounded 
on  the  north  by  the  Tayabas  Sea,  on  the  south  by  the  Visayas  Sea,  on  the  east  by 
the  Sea  of  Masbate,  and  on  the  west  by  the  Sea  of  Mindoro.  The  area  is  813  square 
miles,  and  the  population  38,633,  distributed  among  13  barrios  and  3 rancherias  of 
infieles. 

The  capital  is  Romblon,  with  a population  of  6,764.  It  is  situated  on  the  harbor 
of  the  same  name  at  the  north  of  the  island,  204  miles  from  Manila,  and  is  the  resi- 
dence of  the  politico-military  commander. 

The  Island  and  Province  of  Samar  is  situated  to  the  southeast  of  Luzon,  it  is 
bounded  on  the  north  by  the  Strait  of  San  Bernardino,  on  the  south  by  the  Jaha- 
netes  Canal,  separating  it  from  Leyte  Island,  on  the  east  by  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  on 
the  west  by  the  Visayas  Sea.  It  is  very  mountainous,  with  high,  steep  coasts.  A 
number  of  sierras  and  mountains  extend  in  various  directions,  forming  valleys  and 
glens  fertilized  by  numerous  rivers,  which,  however,  have  little  current  and  volume. 
The  length  of  the  island  is  155  miles.  The  chief  products  are  abaca,  rice,  and  cocoa- 
nuts,  oil  being  extracted  from  the  latter.  Among  the  medicinal  plants  the  most 


334 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


highly  valued  is  the  catbalonga  seed.  Commerce  is  quite  active  in  spite  of  the  few 
means  of  communication  and  the  dangerous  coasts.  The  island  is  visited  yearly 
by  tornadoes  which  devastate  crops  and  cause  much  damage  to  agriculture.  The 
high  mountains  and  thick  forests  of  the  interior  are  inhabited  by  a great  number  of 
savages  who  have  sought  refuge  here.  The  area  is  4,699  square  miles,  and  the  pop- 
ulation 200,733,  distributed  among  13  pueblos,  208  visitas,  and  3 rancherias  of  sub- 
dued infieles. 

The  capital  is  Catbalogan,  population  of  6,459,  situated  on  the  harbor  and  bay 
of  like  name  on  the  west  of  the  island  338  miles  from  Manila,  and  is  the  residence  of 
the  politico-military  governor. 

The  Jolo  Archipelago,  formed  of  some  160  islands,  is  situated  southwest  of 
Mindanao  and  south  of  Basilan.  It  is  bounded  on  the  south  by  the  Jolo  Sea,  on 
the  northeast  by  Mindanao  and  on  the  west  and  southwest  by  Borneo.  The  small 
islands  are  covered  with  mangroves,  while  the  large  ones  have  thick  forests  of  good 
timber,  and  the  natives  raise  rice,  maize,  and  various  alimentary  roots,  ambergris 
being  found  on  the  coasts.  The  principal  island,  called  Sulu,  or  Jolo  (eh.  47,  48,  49, 
50,  p.  285),  is  occupied  in  a military  way  by  the  Spanish  forces,  whose  chief,  or  gov- 
ernor, resides  in  the  old  capital,  which  has  well-constructed  and  armed  forts,  a pier, 
etc  Bv  rwyal  decree  of  November  13,  1877,  the  sultanship  was  transformed  into  a 
civico-military  government.  The  population  consists  of  500  aborigines,  612  Chinese 
traders,  and  16,000  negroes. 

Next  to  Luzon,  t lie  island  of  Mindanao  is  the  most  extensive  and  important  of 
the  Philippines. 

By  decree  of  July  30,  1860,  the  territorial  division  of  this  island  was  definitely 
established,  and  a civico-military  government,  under  the  denomination  of  Mindanao 
and  adjacent  islands,  was  created.  It  is  divided  into  eight  districts.  The  island  is 
situated  between  Visavas  on  the  north  and  Borneo  on  the  south;  it  is  bounded  on 
the  oast  by  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  on  the  west  by  the  island  of  Paragua,  the  Strait 
of  Balabac,  and  Borneo.  The  area  is  16.595  square  miles,  and  the  population  611,300, 
of  which  211,000  are  Christians  and  the  rest  Mohammedans  and  Pagans.  It  is  very 
extensive  and  irregular  in  form,  possessing  high  and  extended  mountain  chains, 
which  have  not  been  entirely  explored,  and  which  are  grown  over  with  very  rich 
woods.  It  is  inhabited  almost  throughout  the  interior  by  savages.  Its  rivers,  some  of 
great  volume,  are  as  follows:  On  the  north  coast  and  Butuan  Baj',  the  Jabonga  and 
Butuan;  on  the  Macajalar  coast,  the  Cagayan;  in  Eligan  Bay,  the  Malanao  and  others 
of  minor  importance;  in  the  cove  of  Dapitan,  the  Palaven. 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


In  Port  Kakule  the  greatest  rise  of  tide  is  seven  feet.  In  Surigao  Strait  the  flood 
tide  sets  to  the  west,  and  the  ebb  to  the  east.  The  velocity  of  the  stream  in  the  strait 
reaches  six  knots  at  springs.  There  is  a difference  of  about  two  hours  between 
the  time  of  high  water  at  Surigao  and  in  Surigao  Strait.  Fishermen  roughly  esti- 
mate that  when  the  moon  rises  the  ebb  tide  commences  to  run  in  Surigao  Strait. 
From  January  to  June  there  is  but  one  high  water  during  the  twenty-four 
hours,  in  Surigao  Strait,  which  occurs  during  the  night.  From  July 
to  December  the  same  phenomenon  takes  place,  but  the  time  of  high  water  is  by  day. 

From  observations  made  by  the  Spanish  surveyors,  it  appears  that  the  highest 
tide  on  the  west  coasts  of  the  islands  of  the  strait  takes  place  at  the  same  hour  as  the 
lowest  tide  on  the  east  coasts. 

The  Mindanao  river  disembogues  five  miles  to  the  south  of  Palak  Harbor  by  two 
wide  arms,  on  the  northernmost  of  which  is  the  town  of  Kota-batu,  about  5|  miles 
from  the  mouth.  The  river  is  navigable  for  60  miles  by  vessels  of  3^  feet  draught; 
it  flows  through  a beautiful  valley  30  miles  in  width,  which  scarcely  shows  any 
change  of  level;  the  valley  is  capable  of  producing  tobacco,  cacao,  sugar,  maize,  and 
cotton;  but  this  is  only  known  at  present  by  specimens  produced.  The  course  of 
the  river  lies  SE.  for  45  miles  from  its  mouth  to  the  lake  Ligauasan,  out  of  which  it 
is  seen  to  flow;  from  the  other  side  of  the  lake  the  direction  of  the  river  is  NNE.  to 
its  source  in  the  Sugut  Mountains.  At  21  miles  from  the  northern  mouth  the  river 
divides  into  two  arms,  which  enter  the  sea  4-J  miles  apart. 

In  the  northern  part  of  Mindanao  is  the  province  of  Surigao,  bordered  on‘  the 
north  by  the  Surigao  Sea,  on  the  east  by  the  Pacific,  on  the  south  by  the  District  of 
Davao,  and  on  the  west  by  the  territory  of  the  infieles.  It  is  mountainous,  but 
the  Christian  population  resides  on  the  coasts  and  in  the  northern  point  of  the  terri- 
tory. The  population  is  95,775,  distributed  among  45  pueblos,  10  barrios,  and  30 
rancherias  of  subdued  infieles.  Abaca  and  palay  are  raised,  and  in  the  gold  washings 
considerable  gold  of  good  quality  is  found. 

Military  notes  on  the  Philippines  affirm  that  the  islands  are,  in  many  respects, 
Spain’s  best  possessions,  due  to  the  abundance  and  variety  of  products,  numerous 
and  good  ports,  character  of  inhabitants,  and  on  account  of  the  vicinity  of  certain 
countries  of  eastern  Asia,  which  are  now  entering  upon  a stage  of  civilization  and 
commerce.  The  group  is  composed  of  some  2,000  islands.  In  1762  Manila  was  taken 
and  held  by  the  English  for  a ransom  of  1,000,000  pounds  sterling.  This,  however, 
was  never  paid,  and  the  islands  were  finally  returned  to  Spain. 

The  archipelago  extends  from  5 degrees  32  minutes  to  19  degrees  38  minutes, 


336 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


north  latitude,  and  from  117  degrees  to  126  degrees,  east  longitude.  It  thus  covers 
about  1,000  miles  north  and  south  and  600  east  and  west. 

The  whole  surface  of  the  Philippines  is  essentially  mountainous,  the  only  plains 
that  occur  being  alluvial  districts  at  the  river  mouths  and  the  spaces  left  by  the 
intersection  of  the  ranges.  The  principal  ranges  have  a tendency  to  run  north 
and  south,  with  a certain  amount  of  deflection  east  and  west,  as  the  case  may  be, 
so  that  the  orographic  diagram  of  the  archipelago,  as  a whole,  has  a similarity  to  a 
fan,  with  northern  Luzon  as  its  center  of  radiation. 

While  none  of  the  mountain  peaks  greatly  exceed  8,000  feet  in  height,  Apo,  in 
Mindanao,  is  over  9,000  feet;  liaison,  in  Mindoro,  is  over  8,900  feet;  and  Mayon,  in 
Luzon,  over  8,200.  The  latter  is  an  active  volcano,  which  has  been  the  scene  of 
several  eruptions  during  the  present  century.  Extinct  or  active  craters  are  relatively 
as  numerous  in  the  Philippines  as  in  the  eastern  archipelago,  and  as  a consequence  of 
these  subterranean  forces  earthquakes  are  frequent  and  violent. 

In  1627  one  of  the  most  elevated  mountains  of  Cagayan  disappeared,  and  on  the 
island  of  Mindanao,  in  1675,  a passage  was  opened  to  the  sea  and  a vast  plain 
emerged.  The  more  recent  of  the  convulsions  occurred  in  1863  and  in  1880.  The 
destruction  of  property  was  great,  especially  in  Manila. 

The  general  belief  is  that  the  Philippines  once  formed  a part  of  an  enormous 
continent  from  which  it  was  separated  by  some  cataclysm.  This  continent  probably 
extended  from  Celebes  to  the  farthest  Polinesian  islands  on  the  east,  to  New  Zealand 
on  the  south,  and  the  Mariana  and  Sandwich  islands  on  the  north. 

These  islands,  according  to  Ramon  Jordana,  are  divided  into  two  volcanic  re- 
gions, the  eastern  and  the  western.  The  principal  point  is  the  volcano  Taal,  located 
in  the  northeastern  portion  of  the  province  of  P>atangas.  It  is  situated  on  a small 
island  in  the  center  of  the  Rombon  laguna,  and  has  an  altitude  of  550  feet  above  sea 
level.  Its  form  is  conical,  and  the  rock  is  composed  of  basalt  feldspar  with  a small 
quantity  of  augite.  The  crater  is  supposed  to  be  232  feet  deep.  Its  sides  are  almost 
vertical,  and  there  are  two  steaming  lagunas  at  its  bottom. 

In  the  regions  embracing  the  provinces  of  Manila,  Bulacan.  Pampanga,  Tarlac, 
and  Pmgasinan  the  soil  is  mostly  composed  of  clay  containing  remnants  of  sea  shells, 
a circumstance  which  gives  rise  to  the  belief  that  the  coast  of  Manila  has  risen  from 
the  sea  in  not  so  remote  an  epoch.  Smooth,  dark  gray  tophus  predominates;  it  forms 
the  bed  of  the  Rio  Pasig,  and  rising  forms  hillocks  in  the  vicinity  of  the  city  of 
Binangonan.  Farther  on,  trachyte  and  banks  of  conchilerous  sand  predominate. 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


337 


The  vast  plain  of  Panpanga  extends  to  the  north  of  Manila  Bay,  to  the  south  of 
which  is  situated  Mount  Arayat,  of  doleritic  nature. 

The  disposition  of  the  mountain  ranges  in  parallel  chains  affords  space  for  the 
development  of  streams  both  in  Luzon  and  Mindanao.  The  larger  islands  contain 
inland  seas,  into  which  pour  countless  small  streams  from  the  inland  hills.  Many  of 
them  open  out  into  broad  estuaries,  and  in  numerous  instances  coasting  vessels  of 
light  draft  can  sail  to  the  very  foot  of  the  mountains.  Rivers  and  inland  lakes 
swarm  with  varieties  of  fish  and  shellfish.  By  reason  of  Spanish  restrictions,  hut  little 
can  be  said  as  to  the  character  of  the  stream  banks  and  beds.  Four  of  the  rivers  are 
navigable,  and,  by  the  statements  of  those  who  have  spent  some  little  time  on  the 
islands,  most  are  fordable.  Drinking  water  is  obtained  by  many  of  the  towns  from 
the  rivers  at  points  just  above  tide  limits,  and  the  water  is  said  to  be  good.  Bridges 
are  few  and  crude,  but  are  generally  built  to  withstand  heavy  strain. 

The  island  of  Luzon  abounds  in  rivers  and  streams.  The  following  are  the  prin- 
cipal water  courses: 

Rio  Grande  de  Cagayan,  the  source  of  which  is  in  the  northern  slope  of  the  Cara- 
ballo Norte.  It  has  numerous  affluents,  among  others  the  Magat  and  Bangag,  and, 
after  a course  of  about  200  miles,  falls  into  the  China  Sea  in  the  vicinity  of  Aparri. 

Agno  Grande  starts  in  the  north,  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  ranch  of  Loo,  re- 
ceives the  affluents  Tarlag  and  Camiling,  as  well  as  many  others,  has  a course  of 
about  112  miles,  and  falls  into  the  Gulf  of  Lingayen. 

Abra  has  its  origin  on  the  opposite  slope  to  that  where  Agno  Grande  takes  its 
rise,  runs  for  about  87  miles,  and,  after  receiving  the  affluent  Suyoc,  divides  into 
three  arms  and  falls  into  the  China  Sea  over  the  sand  bars  of  Butao,  Nioig,  and  Dile. 

Rio  Grande  de  la  Pampanga  is  called  Rio  Chico  up  to  the  lake  of  Canasen,  near 
Arayat,  where  it  changes  its  name  after  its  junction  with  Rio  Gapan.  Its  course  is  a 
little  over  38  miles;  it  receives  the  Rio  de  San  Jose  and  divides  into  a multitude  of 
arms  as  it  falls  into  the  sea  to  the  north  of  Manila  Bay. 

Rio  Pasig  has  its  source  in  the  Bay  Lagoon,  and  falls  after  a course  of  19  miles 
into  Manila  Bay. 

The  military  notes  on  the  climate  of  the  Philippines,  the  official  record  of  the 
temperature  and  the  gales  and  typhoons,  and  directions  regarding  the  handling  of 
ships  in  the  peculiar  tempests  that  prevail  at  certain  seasons  around  the  islands,  are 
of  absorbing  popular  interest,  and  of  striking  special  usefulness. 

Climate. — In  the  region  of  Manila  the  hottest  season  is  from  March  to  June,  the 
greatest  heat  being  felt  in  May  before  the  rains  set  in,  when  the  maximum  tempera- 


338 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


ture  ranges  from  80  degrees  to  100  degrees  in  the  shade.  The  coolest  weather  occurs 
in  December  and  January,  when  the  temperature  falls  at  night  to  60  or  65  degrees, 
and  seldom  rises  in  the  day  above  75  degrees.  From  November  to  February  the  sky 
is  bright,  the  atmosphere  cool  and  dry,  and  the  weather  in  every  way  delightful.  Ob- 
servations made  at  the  Observatortio  Meteorologico  de  Manila  have  been  compiled  by 
the  United  States  Weather  Bureau,  covering  a record  of  from  seventeen  to  thirty-two 


years,  from  which  the  following  is  an  extract: 
Temperature,  degrees  F.: 

Mean  annual 

Warmest  month 

Coolest  month 

Highest 

Lowest 


80  degrees 
82  degrees 
79  degrees 
100  degrees 
60  degrees 


Humidity: 

Relative  per  cent 78 

Absolute  grains  per  cubic  foot. . 8.75 


Wind  movements  in  miles: 


Daily  mean 

Greatest  daily... 

Least  daily 

Prevailing  wind  direction — NE.,  November  to  April; 

Cloudiness,  annual  per  cent 

Days  with  rain 


134 

204 

95 

SW.,  May  to  October. 

53 

135 


Rainfall  in  inches: 


Moan  annual 75.43 

Greatest  monthly 120.98 

Least  monthly 55.65 

The  following  is  the  mean  temperature  for  the  three  seasons,  at  points  specified: 


Cold. 

Hot. 

Wet. 

Manila 

87  degrees 

S4  degrees 

Cebu 

75  decrees 

86  degrees 

75  degrees 

Davao 

88  degrees 

87  degrees 

Sulu 

81  decrees 

82  degrees 

83  degrees 

Seasons  vary  with  the  prevailing  winds  (monsoons  or  trade  winds)  and  are  classed 
as  “wet”  and  “dry.”  There  is  no  abrupt  change  from  one  to  the  other,  and  between 
periods  there  are  intervals  of  variable  weather. 

The  Spanish  description  of  seasons  is  as  follows: 

Seis  meses  de  lodo — six  months  of  mud. 


Seis  meses  de  polvo — six  months  of  dust. 

Seis  meses  de  todo — six  months  of  everything. 

The  northern  islands  lie  in  the  track  of  the  typhoons  which,  developing  in  tht 


TILE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


339 


Pacific,  sweep  over  the  China  Sea  from  NE.  to  SW.  during  the  southwest  monsoon. 
They  may  be  looked  for  at  any  time  between  May  and  November,  but  it  is  during 
the  months  of  July,  August,  and  September  that  they  are  most  frequent.  Early 
in  the  season  the  northern  region  feels  the  greatest  force,  but  as  the  season  advances 
the  typhoon  gradually  works  southward  and  the  dangerous  time  at  Manila  is  about 
the  end  of  October  and  the  beginning  of  November.  Typhoons  rarely,  if  ever,  pass 
south  of  9 degrees  N.  latitude.  Sometimes  the  typhoon  is  of  large  diameter  and 
travels  slowly,  so  far  as  progressive  movement  is  concerned;  at  others  it  is  of  smaller 
dimensions,  and  both  the  circular  and  progressive  motions  are  more  rapid.  How- 
ever they  are  always  storms  of  terrific  energy  and  frequently  cause  terrible  destruc- 
tion of  crops  and  property  on  shore  and  of  shipping  at  sea.  Thunderstorms,  often 
of  great  violence,  are  frequent  in  May  and  June,  before  the  commencement  of  the 
rainy  season.  During  July,  August,  September,  and  October  the  rains  are  very 
heavy.  The  rivers  and  lakes  are  swollen  and  frequently  overflow,  flooding  large 
tracts  of  low  country. 

At  Manila  the  average  rainfall  is  stated  to  be  from, 7 5 to  120  inches  per  annum, and 
there  the  difference  between  the  longest  and  shortest  day  is  only  1 hour  47  min- 
utes and  12  seconds.  This  rainfall,  immense  though  it  be,  is  small  as  compared  with 
that  of  other  parts  of  the  archipelago;  e.  g.,  in  Liano,  NE.  of  Mindanao,  the  average 
yearly  downpour  is  142  inches. 

Gales. — The  gales  of  the  Philippines  may  be  divided  into  three  classes,  known  by 
the  local  names  of  Colla,  Nortada,  and  Baguio.  The  Colla  is  a gale  in  which  the 
wind  blows  constantly  from  one  quarter,  but  with  varying  force  and  with  alternations 
of  violent  squalls,  calms,  and  heavy  rains,  usually  lasting  at  least  three  days;  these 
gales  occur  during  the  southwest  monsoon  and  their  direction  is  from  the  southwest 
quarter.  The  Nortada  is  distinguished  from  the  Collo,  in  that  the  direction  is  con- 
stant and  the  force  steady,  without  the  alternations  of  passing  squalls  and  calms. 
The  Nortada  is  generally  indicative  that  a typhoon  is  passing  not  very  far  off. 
These  gales  occur  chiefly  in  the  northern  islands,  and  their  direction,  as  the  name 
implies,  is  from  the  northward.  Baguio  is  the  local  name  for  the  revolving  storm 
known  as  the  typhoon,  which,  being  the  more  familiar  term,  will  be  used  in  these 
notes 

T}rphoons. — These  storms  have  their  origin  to  the  east  or  to  the  southeast  of 
the  Philippines,  whence  their  course  is  westward,  with  a slight  divergence  to  the 
north  or  south,  the  average  direction  appearing  to  he  west  by  north.  They  occur 
in  all  months  of  the  year,  but  the  greater  number  take  place  about  the  time  of  the 


340 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


equinoxes.  The  most  violent  ones  occur  at  the  autumnal  equinox,  and  on  an  aver- 
age, two  or  three  occur  every  year,  and  sometimes  one  follows  another  at  a very  short 
interval.  It  is  believed  that  when  one  of  these  typhoons  passes  a high  latitude  in 
September  there  will  be  another  in  October  of  that  year,  and  one  may  be  looked 
for  in  November  in  a lower  latitude.  These  tempests  are  not  encountered  in  lati- 
tudes below  9 degrees  N.  The  rate  of  pi’ogress  of  these  storms  is  about  13  miles 
an  hour;  in  none  of  those  observed  has  it  exceeded  14  miles  nor  fallen  below  11  miles. 
The  diameter  of  the  exterior  revolving  circle  of  the  storm  varies  from  40  to  130 
miles,  and  the  diameter  of  the  inner  circle  or  calm  region,  may  be  estimated  at  from 
8 to  15  miles.  The  duration  of  the  true  typhoon  at  any  one  place  is  never  longer  than 
ten  hours  and  generally  much  less.  These  storms  are  always  accompanied  by  abun- 
dant rain,  with  low,  dense  clouds,  which  at  times  limit  the  horizon  to  a few  yards 
distance,  and  are  generally  accompanied  by  electrical  discharges.  The  barometer 
falls  slowly  for  some  days  before  the  typhoon,  then  falls  rapidly  on  its  near  approach, 
and  reaches  its  lowest  when  the  vortex  is  but  a little  way  off.  It  then  rises  rapidly 
as  the  vortex  passes  away,  and  then  slowly  when  it  has  gained  some  distance.  Near 
the  vortex  there  are  usually  marked  oscillations.  The  typhoon  generally  begins  with 
a northerly  wind,  light  drizzling  rain,  weather  squally  and  threatening,  a falling  bar- 
ometer and  the  wind  veering  to  the  eastward,  when  the  observer  is  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  path  of  the  storm,  and  backing  to  the  westward  when  he  is  to  the  south- 
ward of  it;  the  wind  and  rain  increase  as  the  wind  shifts,  and  the  storm  generally 
ends  with  a southerly  wind  after  abating  gradually. 

The  following  warnings  of  the  approach  of  a typhoon,  and  directions  for  avoid- 
ing the  most  dangerous  part  of  it,  are  taken  from  the  China  Sea  Directory:  The  ear- 
liest signs  of  a typhoon  are  clouds  of  a cirrus  type,  looking  like  fine  hair,  feathers 
or  small  white  tufts  of  wool,  traveling  from  east  or  north,  a slight  rise  in  the  barom- 
eter, clear  and  dry  weather,  and  light  winds.  These  signs  are  followed  by  the  usual 
ugly  and  threatening  appearance  of  the  weather  which  forebodes  most  storms,  and 
the  increasing  number  and  severity  of  the  gusts  with  the  rising  of  the  wind.  In  some 
cases  one  of  the  earliest  signs  is  a long  heavy  swell  and  confused  sea,  which  comes 
from  the  direction  in  which  the  storm  is  approaching,  and  travels  more  rapidly 
than  the  storm’s  center.  The  best  and  surest  of  all  warnings,  however,  will  he  found 
in  the  barometer.  In  every  case  there  is  great  barometric  disturbance.  Accordingly, 
if  the  barometer  falls  rapidly,  or  even  if  the  regularity  of  its  diurnal  variation  he  in- 
terrupted, danger  may  be  apprehended.  No  positive  rule  can  be  given  as  to  the 
amount  of  depression  to  be  expected,  hut  at  the  center  of  some  of  the  storms  the 


TILE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


341 


barometer  is  said  to  stand  fully  2 inches  lower  than  outside  the  storm  field.  The 
average  barometric  gradient,  near  the  vortex  of  the  most  violent  of  these  storms,  is 
said  to  be  rather  more  than  1 inch  in  50  nautical  miles.  As  the  center  of  the  storm 
is  approached  the  more  rapid  become  the  changes  of  wind,  until  at  length,  instead 
of  its  direction  altering  gradually,  as  is  the  case  on  first  entering  the  storm  field, 
the  wind  flies  around  at  once  to  the  opposite  point,  the  sea  meanwhile  breaking  into 
mountainous  and  confused  heaps.  There  are  many  instances  on  record  of  the  wind 
suddenly  falling  in  the  vortex  and  the  clouds  dispersing  for  a short  interval,  though 
the  wind  soon  blows  again  with  renewed  fury. 

In  the  northern  hemisphere  when  the  falling  barometer  and  other  signs  create 
suspicion  that  a typhoon  is  approaching,  facing  the  wind  and  taking  10  or  12 
points  to  the  right  of  it,  will  give  the  approximate  bearing  of  its  center.  Thus,  with 
the  wind  NE.,  the  center  will  probably  be  from  S.  to  SSE.  of  the  observer’s  position. 
However,  it  is  difficult  to  estimate  the  center  of  the  vortex  from  any  given  point. 
This  partly  arises  from  the  uncertainty  as  to  the  relation  between  the  bearing  of  the 
center  and  the  direction  of  the  wind,  and  greatly  from  there  being  no  meansof  knowing 
whether  the  storm  he  of  large  or  small  dimensions.  If  the  barometer  falls  slowly,  and 
the  weather  grows  worse  only  gradually,  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  storm 
center  is  distant;  and  conversely,  with  a rapidly  falling  barometer  and  increasing 
bad  weather  the  center  may  be  supposed  to  be  approaching  dangerously  near. 

Practical  Rules. — When  in  the  region  and  in  the  season  of  revolving  storms, 
be  on  the  watch  for  premonitory  signs.  Constantly  observe  and  carefully  record  the 
barometer. 

When  on  sea  and  there  are  indications  of  a typhoon  being  near,  heave  to  and 
carefully  observe  and  record  the  changes  of  the  barometer  and  wind,  so  as  to  find 
the  bearing  of  the  center,  and  ascertain  by  the  shift  of  the  wind  in  which  semi- 
circle the  vessel  is  situated.  Much  will  often  depend  upon  heaving  to  in  time. 
When,  after  careful  observation,  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  the  center  of  the 
typhoon  is  approaching,  the  following  rules  should  be  followed  in  determining  wheth- 
er to  remain  hove  to  or  not,  and  the  tack  on  which  to  remain  hove  to: 

In  the  northern  hemisphere,  if  the  right-hand  semicircle,  heave  to  on  the  star- 
board tack.  If  in  the  left-hand  semicircle,  run,  keeping  the  wind  if  possible,  on 
the  starboard  quarter,  and  when  the  barometer  rises,  if  necessary  to  keep  the  ship 
from  going  too  far  from  the  proper  course,  heave  to  on  the  port  tack.  When  the 
vessel  lies  in  the  direct  line  of  advance  of  the  storm — which  position  is,  as  previously 
observed,  the  most  dangerous  of  all — run  with  the  wind  on  the  starboard  quarter.  In 


342 


THE  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


all  cases  increase  as  soon  as  possible  the  distance  from  the  center,  bearing  in  mini 
that  the  whole  storm  field  is  advancing. 

In  receding  from  the  center  of  a typhoon  the  barometer  will  rise  and  the  wind 
and  sea  subside.  It  should  be  remarked  that  in  some  cases  a vessel  may,  if  the  storm 
be  traveling  slowly,  sail  from  the  dangerous  semicircle  across  the  front  of  the  storm, 
and  thus  out  of  its  influence.  But  as  the  rate  at  which  the  storm  is  traveling  is 
quite  uncertain,  this  is  a hazardous  proceeding,  and  before  attempting  to  cross  the 
seaman  should  hesitate  and  carefully  consider  all  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  ob- 
serving particularly  the  rate  at  which  the  barometer  is  falling. 

Northward  of  the  Equator  the  current  is  divided  into  north  and  south 
equatorial  currents  by  the  equatorial  countercurrent,  a stream  flowing  from  west  to 
east  throughout  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The  currents  in  the  western  part  of  the  Pacific, 
to  the  northward  of  the  Equator,  are  affected  by  the  monsoons,  and  to  the  southward 
of  the  Equator  they  are  deflected  by  the  coast  of  Australia. 

The  trade  drift,  which  flows  to  the  westward  between  the  parallels  of  9 degrees 
and  20  degrees  N.,  on  reaching  the  eastern  shores  of  the  Philippine  Islands  again 
turns  to  the  northward,  forming  near  the  northern  limit  of  that  group  the  com- 
mencement of  the  Japan  stream.  The  main  body  of  the  current  then  flows  along 
the  east  coast  of  Formosa,  and  from  that  island  pursues  a northeasterly  course 
through  the  chain  of  islands  lying  between  Formosa  and  Japan;  and  sweeping  along 
the  southeastern  coast  of  Japan  in  the  same  general  direction,  it  is  known  to  reach 
the  parallel  of  50  degrees  N.  The  limits  and  velocity  of  the  Japan  stream  are  consid- 
erably influenced  by  the  monsoons  in  the  China  Sea,  and  by  the  prevailing  winds 
in  the  corresponding  seasons  in  the  Yellow  and  Japan  seas;  also  by  the  various 
drift  currents  which  these  periodic  winds  produce.  * 

Admiral  Dewey  has  forwarded  to  the  navy  department  a memorandum  on  min- 
eral resources  of  the  Philippines  prepared  at  the  admiral’s  request  by  Professor 
George  W.  Becker  of  the  United  States  geological  survey.  Only  about  a score  of  the 
several  hundred  islands,  he  says,  are  known  to  contain  deposits  of  valuable  minerals. 
He  includes  a table  showing  the  mineral  bearing  islands  and  their  resources.  This 
table  follows: 

“Luzon,  coal,  gold,  copper,  lead,  iron,  sulphur,  marble,  kaolin;  Sataanduanes, 
Sibuyan,  Bohol  and  Panaoan,  gold  only;  Marimduque,  lead  and  silver;  Mindoro,  coal, 
gold  and  copper;  Carraray,  Batan.  Rapu  Rapu,  Semarara,  Negros,  coal  only;  Masbete, 
coal  and  copper;  Romblon,  marble;  Samar,  coal  and  gold;  Panay,  coal,  oil,  gas,  gold, 
copper,  iron  and  perhaps  mercury;  Biliram,  sulphur  only;  Leyte,  coal,  oil  and  per- 


THFJ  SOUTHERN  PHILIPPINES. 


343 


haps  mercury;  Cebu,  coal,  oil,  gas,  gold,  lead,  silver  and  iron;  Mindanao  coal,  gold, 
copper  and  platinum;  Sulu  archipelago,  pearls.” 

The  coal,  Mr.  Becker  says,  is  analogous  to  the  Japanese  coal  and  that  of  Wash- 
ington, but  not  to  that  of  the  Welsh  or  Pennsylvania  coals.  It  might  better  be 
characterized  as  a highly  carbonized  lignite,  likely  to  contain  much  sulphur  as  iron 
pyrites,  rendering  them  apt  to  spontaneous  combustion  and  injurious  to  boiler  plates. 
Nevertheless,  he  says,  when  pyrites  seams  are  avoided  and  the  lignite  is  properly 
handled,  it  forms  a valuable  fuel,  especially  for  local  consumption. 

Not  least  among  the  promising  resources  of  the  Philippines  is  a curious  natural 
product.  Several  vegetable  growths  appear  to  possess  the  faculty  of  secreting 
mineral  concretions,  in  all  respects  resembling  certain  familiar  precious  stones.  The 
famous  James  Smithson  was  the  first  to  give  any  real  attention  to  these  curious 
plant  gems,  but,  though  there  can  be  no  doubt  of  their  authenticity,  neither  scientist 
nor  merchant  has  followed  this  lead.  One  of  the  jewels,  the  bamboo  opal,  rivals  the 
best  stones  in  its  delicate  tints  of  red  and  green,  but  it  is  among  the  rarest,  and 
1.000  stems  may  be  cut  up  before  a single  specimen  be  found. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


' SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 

An  Official  Copy  of  the  Manifesto  of  the  Junta  Showing  the  Bad  Faith  of  Spain  in 
the  Making  and  Evasion  of  a Treaty — The  Declaration  of  the  Renewal  of  the 
War  of  Rebellion — Complaints  Against  the  Priests  Defined — The  Most  Im- 
portant Document  the  Filipinos  Have  Issued — Official  Reports  of  Cases  of 
Persecution  of  Men  and  Women  in  Manila  by  the  Spanish  Authorities — Mem- 
oranda of  the  Proceedings  in  Several  Cases  in  the  Court  of  Inquiry  of  the 
United  States  Officers. 

The  pages  following,  showing  a cynical  disregard  of  a solemn  treaty  by  the 
Spaniards,  a complete  exposure  of  the  reasons  the  Filipinos  had  for  renewing  the 
war,  and  the  particulars  of  cases  of  individual  wrongs  suffered,  as  they  were  made 
known  in  the  course  of  legal  investigation,  have  been  received  direct  from  Manila,  and 
enable  us  to  complete  the  story  of  the  Philippines  with  the  testimony  that  the  de- 
pravity of  bad  faith  in  regard  to  treaties,  and  incidents  of  personal  cruelties  in 
Spanish  colonial  governments,  have  illustrations  in  the  Philippines  as  in  Cuba, 
and  demand  of  the  American  Nation  in  the  hour  of  victory  that  Spain  shall  lose  now 
and  forever  all  her  possessions  in  the  East  and  West  Indies,  and  be  restricted  to  the 
peninsula  and  islands — the  Canary  and  Balearic  groups — that  is,  in  two  words  to 
home  rule.  The  circumstances  of  the  treaty  between  the  Philippine  Junta — the 
treaty  of  Biyak — and  the  Spanish  authorities,  are  of  great  notoriety,  but  the  Philip- 
pine story  has  not  until  now  reached  the  English  speaking  peoples.  We  give  it  from 
the  official  paper: 

“On  signing  the  Treaty  of  Biyak  na  bato,  we,  the  natives  of  the  Philippines  and 
the  government  of  Spain,  agreed  that  between  our  armies  be  established  an  armistice 
which  was  to  last  three  years  from  the  date  of  the  mentioned  treaty. 

“The  natives  were  to  lay  down  their  arms  and  turn  them  over  to  the  Spanish  au- 
thorities with  all  their  depot  (maestranza,  a manufactory  of  ammunition,  for  repairs  of 
rifles,  etc.,  etc.)  their  ammunitions  and  forts. 

“The  Spanish  authorities,  on  the  other  hand,  bound  themselves  to  consent  to 
the  reforms  (of  public  opinion  amongst)  the  natives  of  the  country  claim;  reforms 
which,  according  to  the  text  of  the  decree  of  9th  August,  1897,  the  Captain  and 
Guberno  General  assured  us  were  granted  and  the  execution  of  which  was  suspended 
on  account  of  the  insurrection. 


314 


SPANIARDS  REPELLING  INSURGENT’S,  ATTACK  ON  A CONVENT 


BUSINESS  CORNER  IN  MANILA. 


A COUNTRY  PAIR. 

* 


A NATIVE  IN  REGIMENTALS. 


PEASANT  COSTUMES. 


WOODMAN  IN  WORKING  GARB. 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS.  347 


“The  reforms  asked  for  and  granted  were  the  following: 

1.  Expulsion  or  at  least  exclaustration  of  the  religious  orders. 

2.  Representation  of  the  Philippines  in  the  Spanish  Cortes. 

3.  Application  of  real  justice  in  the  Philippines,  equal  for  the  Indian  and  for  the 
Peninsular.  Unity  of  laws  between  Spain  and  the  Philippines.  Participation  of  the 
Indians  in  the  chief  offices  of  the  Civil  Administration. 

4.  Adjustment  of  the  property  of  the  Parishes  (church  property)  and  of  contri- 
butions in  favor  of  the  Indians. 

5.  Proclamation  of  the  individual  rights  of  the  Indians,  as  also  of  the  liberty 
of  the  press  and  of  association. 

“The  same  Spanish  government  agreed  to  pay  the  liberating  government  a war 
indemnity,  reduced  to  the  limited  sum  of  600,000  pesos,  in  payment  of  the  arms, 
ammunitions,  depots  and  forts  which  were  surrendered,  and  in  order  to  indemnify 
those  who  were  to  be  obliged  to  live  abroad  during  the  term  of  the  armistice,  as  an 
assistance  to  stay  out  of  the  Philippines  while  they  were  trying  to  establish  them- 
selves and  looking  for  legitimate  and  decorous  means  of  existence. 

“It  was  agreed  in  like  manner  that  General  Don  Fernando  Primo  de  Eivera,  Gob- 
erno  General  of  the  islands,  should  remain  in  his  post  during  the  time  of  the  ar- 
mistice, as  a guarantee  that  the  reforms  be  established. 

“And,  finally,  said  authority  promised  that  he  would  propose  and  there  would  be 
conceded  a very  ample  amnesty. 

“Contrary  to  what  was  stipulated,  the  mentioned  General  was  removed  from  his 
post  shortly  after  the  agreement  was  signed;  and  although  the  liberating  govern- 
ment had  fulfilled  the  laying  down  and  delivery  of  the  arms,  ammunitions,  depot 
and  forts  of  its  general  encampment,  the  reforms  were  not  established,  only  part  of 
the  offered  indemnity  has  been  paid  and  the  amnesty  remains  a project  only,  some 
pardons  being  given. 

“The  government  of  Madrid,  deriding  the  natives,  and  with  contempt  of  what 
had  signed  as  a gentleman  the  General  Commander  of  their  army  in  the  field,  tried, 
instead  of  carrying  out  the  expulsion  or  exclaustration  of  the  Priests,  to  elevate 
them  more,  nominating  at  once  for  the  two  bishoprics,  vacant  in  the  colonies,  two 
Priests  of  those  same  religious  orders  that  oppressed  the  country  and  were  the  first 
cause  of  the  insurrection,  the  disorder  and  the  general  dissatisfaction  in  the  islands; 
thus  ridiculing  the  virtue,  knowledge  and  worth  of  the  numerous  secular  Spanish 
elergy,  and  especially  of  that  of  the  Philippines. 

“Not  contented  with  this,  they  have  raised  and  rewarded  those  Peninsulars  who 


348  SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


in  the  Philippines,  as  in  Madrid,  more  cowardly  and  miserable  still,  because  they 
abused  their  position  and  the  protection  of  those  same  authorities  who  signed  the 
treaty,  insulted  at  banquets,  assemblies  and  through  the  press,  with  epithets  and 
jokes  offensive  and  vulgar,  the  patient  natives;  as  happened  with  the  Peninsular 
Rafael  Comenge,  the  protege  and  farcical  table  companion  of  the  Priest,  who  amongst 
us  performs  the  duties  of  the  Archbishopric  of  Manila;  the  Minister  of  War  has 
just  conceded  the  said  Comenge  the  grand  cross  of  military  merit,  for  shouting  against 
us  and  imputing  to  us  every  kind  of  baseness  and  vices,  knowing  that  he  was  lying, 
and  for  exacting  from  the  gamblers  of  the  Casino  Espanol  of  Manila,  as  their  presi- 
dent, the  contribution  of  30,000  pesos,  to  present  General  Primo  de  Rivera  with  a 
golden  statute  of  that  value,  and,  a curious  coincident,  this  brave  was  one  of  the 
first  who  escaped  from  Manila,  full  of  fear  when  the  news  arrived  there  that  an 
American  squadron  would  attack  that  port  and  that  the  risk  he  would  run  was  real. 

“You  have  seen  before  now,  how  that  insect  Wencestao  Retana  was  rewarded  with 
a cooked  up  deputyship  to  the  Cortes,  that  salaried  reptile  of  the  Philippine  con- 
vents, who,  with  the  aid  of  that  tyrant  General  Weyler,  his  worthy  godfather,  the 
despotic  incendiary  of  the  town  of  Calamba,  of  ominous  memory  amongst  us,  does 
nothing  hut  vomit  rabid  foam,  insulting  us  by  day  and  night  with  calumnies  and 
shrieks,  in  that  paper  whose  expenses  the  Procurators  of  the  Manila  convents  pay. 

“Prepare  yourselves  also  for  seeing  that  a titled  nobility  be  given  to  the  well 
known  ‘Quioguiap’  (fecer  y Temprado),  writer  in  the  ‘El  Liberat,’  of  Madrid,  who, 
to  be  in  unison  with  the  priests,  does  not.  cease  to  call  us  inferior  race,  troglodytes, 
without  human  nature  or  understanding,  big  boy;  the  same  who,  in  order  to  ie- 
prive  the  rich  ‘Abellas’  (father  and  son)  of  Carnarines,  of  the  position  they  had  con- 
quered by  their  industry,  economy  and  intelligence  as  almost  exclusive  purchasers 
of  the  Abaco  (Manila  hemp)  of  that  region,  tried  and  succeeded  villainously  in 
having  them  accused  and  shot  in  the  camp  of  Bagumbayan;  the  same  who  afterwards 
sought  in  vain  the  regard  of  his  criminal  attempts,  although  conscious  of  his  per- 
verseness, to  deliver  to  himself  the  produce  of  their  harvest  and  their  labor. 

“Peace  was  hardly  made,  when  General  Primo  de  Rivera  denied  the  existence  of 
the  agreement  and  shot  day  after  day  those  same  persons  whom  he  had  promised 
to  protect,  believing  foolishly  that,  the  nucleus  of  the  revolution  once  destroyed, 
the  insurgents  would  need  thirty  or  forty  years  in  order  to  reunite  themselves;  but 
he  accepted  freelv  the  pension  of  the  grand  cross  of  San  Fernando,  which,  as  a 
reward  for  the  peace,  he  was  given. 

“The  same  happened  with  bloodthirsty  Monet,  the  author  of  the  hecatomb  of 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


349 


Zambales,  who  was  promoted  to  the  rank  of  a general  and  honored  by  a grand  cross; 
also  with  his  competitor  in  brutal  deeds,  General  Tejeirs,  the  assassin  of  the  Bisayos, 
and  with  the  Vice  Admiral  Montojo,  so  severely  punished  later  on,  by  whose  orders 
the  city  of  Cebu  was  destroyed  and  demolished,  to  revenge  the  death  of  an  impure 
Recoleto  Priest. 

“In  eloquent  contrast  with  what  the  natives  had  to  expect,  there  has  not  been 
one  single  concession  or  reward  for  the  credulous  Pedro  A.  Paterno,  a Filipino,  the 
only  real  agent  of  the  miracle  of  the  Peace,  to  whom  they  have  denied  even  the 
modest  historical  title  ‘Maguinong’  (Don). 

“Add  to  all  these  infamies  and  indignities  the  removal  of  General  Primo  de 
Rivera,  who,  we  repeat,  was  bound  to  remain  in  Manila  during  the  three  years  of  the 
armistice,  and  the  nomination  in  his  stead  of  another  governor,  General  Augusti, 
who,  completely  without  knowledge  of  the  country,  brought  with  him  as  his  coun- 
sellor the  unworthy  Colonel  Olive,  the  same  who  had  proceeded  with  the  utmost 
haste  and  greatest  partiality  and  passion  against  the  pretended  chieftains,  authors, 
protectors  and  followers  of  the  sacred  movement  begun  in  August,  1896;  who  had, 
as  military  prosecutor  for  the  'Captain  General,’  exacted  with  insolent  cynicism, 
and  with  lire  knowledge  and  consent  of  his  superior  officers,  considerable  sums  of 
money  from  those  who  wished  to  be  absolved,  in  order  to  imprison  them  again  when 
they  did  not  comply  with  all  his  extortions;  the  same  who,  with  shameless  partiality 
worked  and  used  his  influence  all  he  could  towards  the  shooting  of  the  immortal 
Tagalo  martyr,  Dr.  Jose  Rizal;  the  same  finally,  who,  during  the  command  of  weak 
General  Blanco  and  of  bloodthirsty  and  base  General  Polariyi  demanded  continu- 
ally the  imprisoning  of  the  so-called  'Sons  of  the  Country,’  the  descendants  of  the 
Europeans,  that  is,  who  had  amongst  us  any  importance  by  their  learning,  their  in- 
dustry, their  fortunes  or  their  lineage,  and  who  were  not  willing  to  bribe  him  so  as  to 
be  left  in  liberty. 

“In  view  of  this  series  of  acts  of  faithlessness,  of  contempt,  of  insults,  of  crimes, 
and  before  all,  the  forgetting  of  the  treaty,  so  recently  as  well  as  solemnly  entered 
upon,  those  same  who  signed  the  treaty  of  Biyak  na  bato,  have  considered  them- 
selves free  of  the  obligation  to  remain  abroad  and  of  keeping  any  longer  the  promised 
armistice. 

“And,  taking  advantage  of  the  Providential  coming  to  the  Philippines  of  the 
revenging  squadron  of  the  Great  Republic  of  the  United  States  of  North  America, 
they  come  back  to  their  native  soil  proud  and  contented,  to  reconquer  their  liberty 
and  their  rights,  counting  on  the  aid  and  protection  of  the  brave,  decided,  and  noble 


350  SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 

Admiral  Dewey,  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  squadron  which  has  succeeded  in  heating  and 
destroying  the  forces  of  the  tyrants  who  have  been  annihilating  the  personality  and 
energy  of  our  industrious  people,  model  of  noble  and  glorious  qualities. 

“The  moment  has  come,  therefore,  for  the  Filipinos  to  count  themselves  and  to 
enter  into  rank  and  file  in  order  to  defend  with  zeal  and  resolution  and  with  a viril- 
ity of  strong  men,  the  soil  that  saw  their  birth  as  well  as  the  honor  of  their  name, 
making  publicly  and  universally  known  their  competence,  ability  and  their  civic, 
political  and  social  virtues. 

“Let  us  all  fight  united;  seconding  the  revenging  and  humanitarian  action  of  the 
North  American  Republic;  and  let  us  learn  from  her,  accepting  her  counsels  and 
her  system,  the  way  of  living  in  order,  peace  and  liberty,  copying  her  institutions, 
which  are  the  only  adequate  ones  for  the  nations  who  wish  to  reconquer  their  per- 
sonality in  history,  in  the  period  we  are  passing. 

“On  going  to  battle,  let  us  inscribe  on  our  flag  with  clearness  and  accuracy  the 
sacred  legend  of  our  aspiration#. 

“We  want  a stable  government,  elected  by  the  people  themselves;  the  laws  of 
which  are  to  be  voted  for  by  those  same  who  have  to  keep  them  faithfully,  con- 
serving or  modifying  their  present  institutions  in  the  natural  times  in  the  life  of  na- 
tions, but  modeling  them  and  taking  us  their  own,  the  democratic  ones  of  tile 
United  States  of  North  America. 

“We  want  the  country  to  vote  its  taxes;  those  necessary  for  public  services  and 
to  satisfy  (pay  in  full)  the  assistance  North  America  and  the  corporations,  organi- 
zations and  individuals  who  help  us  to  rise  out  of  our  lethargic  slate,  are  rendering 
us;  taking  care  at  the  same  time  to  abolish  all  those  which  have  for  basis  a social  vice 
or  an  immoral  action,  like  the  lottery,  the  tax  on  gambling  dens,  on  galleras  (arenas 
for  fights  of  game) cocks)  and  the  farming  out  of  the  sale  of  opium.  But  before  all, 
may  there  nevermore  appear  again  that  repugnant  tax  levied  on  Pederasty,  which,  to 
get  two  thousand  pesos  offended  the  universal  conscience  and  the  chaste  name  of 
‘Chinese  Comedies.’ 

“We  want  plainest  liberty  in  all  its  bearings,  including  that  of  ideas,  association 
and  the  press,  without  arriving  at  lawlessness  and  disorder;  just  as  it  is  established  in 
that  great,  so  well  regulated  Republic. 

“We  want  to  see  the  religion  of  the  natives  and  of  chose  that  come  to  this  country 
rigorously  respected  by  the  public  powers  and  by  the  individuals  in  particular. 

“We  want  Christianism,  the  basis  of  present  civilization,  to  be  the  emblem  and 
solid  foundation  of  our  religious  institutions,  without  force  or  compulsion;  that 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


351 


the  native  clergy  o£  the  country  be  that  which  direct  and  teach  the  natives  in  all 
the  degrees  of  the  ecclesiastical  hierarchy. 

“We  want  the  maintenance  of  this  clergy  to  be  effected  as  the  different  regional 
governments  may  see  fit,  or,  as  the  city  councils  or  popular  elective  institutions  estab- 
lished in  every  locality  may  determine. 

“We  want  personal  property  to  he  absolutely  and  unconditionally  respected;  and, 
as  a consequence,  the  recognition  to  the  land  holder  of  the  property  he  cultivates  and 
has  improved  by  his  labor,  of  the  so-called  Haciendas  of  the  religious  orders,  who 
have  usurped  them  and  robbed  them  by  the  perverse  acts  of  the  confessionary,  be- 
guiling the  fanaticism  of  ignorant  women  and  or  more  than  timid  aged  man,  afraid 
of  the  vengeance  the  priests  in  their  innate  wickedness  might  meditate  against  their 
families,  who  extorted  from  them  dues  at  the  last  moments  of  their  existence  denying 
them  spiritual  aid  and  divine  rewards  without  the  cession  of  their  material  inter- 
ests before  departing  from  this  earth. 

“We  want  the  possessions  of  these  land  holders  to  be  respected  without  their  being 
obliged  to  pay  any  canon,  lease  or  tax  whatsoever  of  religious  character,  depressive  or 
unjust,  ceasing  thus  their  detainment,  anti-juridicial  and  anti-social,  on  the  part  of 
monarchial  orders,  rapacious  orders  whom,  on  the  strength  of  their  being  a ‘nec- 
essary evil,’  the  ignorant  functionaries  of  Spanish  administration,  like  themselves 
insatiable  extortioners,  have  been  aiding,  in  disdain  of  right,  reason  and  equity. 

“We  want  in  order  to  consolidate  the  property,  the  ominous  ‘Inspection  de 
Montes,’  to  disappear  and  cease  in  its  actual  functions,  as  a disorganizing  and  fiscal- 
izing  center  of  the  titles  of  property  of  the  natives,  which  on  pretense  of  investigating 
and  discovering  the  detainment  of  State  lands,  had  the  custom  of  declaring  the 
property  of  the  State  or  of  others,  such  as  was  already  cultivated  and  producing 
by  the  improvements  made  by  the  poor  peasant,  awarding  such  to  their  friends 
or  to  those  who  bribe  them  if  the  legitimate  proprietor  refused  to  give  them,  in 
shameless  auction,  what  they  asked  for  as  a remuneration  for  what  they  called  ‘shut- 
ting their  eves,’  as  has  happened  lately,  amongst  other  scandalous  cases,  in  Mindoro, 
when  staking  out  the  limits  of  the  new  Hacienda  adjudged  there  to  the  Recoleto 
Priests. 

“We  want  public  administration  to  be  founded  and  to  act  on  a basis  of  morality, 
economy  and  competence,  in  the  charge  of  natives  of  the  country  or  of  such  others 
who  by  their  experience  and  learning  can  serve  us  as  guides  and  teaeh  us  the  basis 
and  the  system  of  those  countries  who  have  their  economical,  political  and  adminis- 
trative offices  and  proceedings  simplified  and  well  organized. 


352 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


“We  want  Hie  recognition  of  all  the  substantive  rights  of  the  human  personality^ 
guaranteed  by  judicial  power,  cemented  in  the  principles  in  force  in  all  the  cultured 
nations;  that  the  judicial  authorities,  when  applying  the  laws,  be  penetrated  by 
and  identified  with  the  spirit  and  the  necessities  of  the  locality;  that  the  administra- 
tion of  justice  be  developed  by  simple,  economical  and  decisive  proceedings;  and  that 
judges  and  magistrates  have  their  attributions  limited  by  the  functions  of  a jury 
and  by  verbal  and  public  judgment,  making  thus  disappear  the  actual  state  of 
affairs,  of  which  prevarication  and  crooked  dealings  are  the  natural  and  necessary 
mark. 

“We  want  sensible  codes,  adapted  to  our  manner  of  being  without  differentiation 
of  races  and  without  odious  privileges  contrary  to  the  principle  of  equality  before  the 
law. 

“We  want  the  increase  and  protection  of  our  industries  by  means  of  subventions 
and  of  local  and  transient  privileges  without  putting  barriers  to  the  general  ex- 
change of  produce  and  of  mercantile  transactions  with  all  the  nations  of  the  globe 
without  exception. 

“We  want  liberty  of  banking  business,  liberty  oj  mercantile  and  industrial  socie- 
ties and  companies,  commercial  liberty,  and  that  the  Philippines  cease  to  be  shut 
up  amongst  the  walls  of  its  convents,  to  become  again  the  universal  market,  like  that 
of  Hongkong,  that  of  Singapore,  that  of  the  Straits,  that  of  Borneo,  that  of  the  Mo- 
luccas, and  that  of  some  of  the  autonomous  colonies  of  Australia,  countries 
which  surround  us;  and  that  capital  may  with  confidence  develop  all  the  elements 
of  wealth  of  this  privileged  soil,  without  more  duties  or  charges  on  import  and 
export  than  those  the  circumstances  of  each  epoch  may  require  for  determined 
purposes. 

1 ‘We  want  roads,  canals  and  ports,  the  dredging  of  our  rivers  and  other  waterways, 
railroads,  tramways  and  all  the  means  of  locomotion  and  transport,  on  water  and 
earth,  with  such  help  and  assistance  as  may  be  needed  to  carry  them  out  within 
a certain  time  and  develop  them  conveniently. 

“We  want  the  suppression  of  the  so-called  ‘Guardia  Civil,’  this  pretorian  and 
odious  institution  in  whose  malignment  and  inhuman  meshes  so  many  Philippine  mar- 
tyrs have  suffered  and  expired;  that  center  of  tortures  and  iniquities,  those  contempti- 
ble flatterers  of  small  tyrants  and  of  the  concupiscense  of  the  priests,  those  in- 
satiable extortioners  of  the  poor  native;  those  hardened  criminals  animated  con- 
stantly in  their  perverseness  by  the  impunity  with  which  their  accomplices,  the 
representatives  of  despotism  and  official  immorality,  covered  them. 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


353 


*‘In  their  stead  we  want  a judicial  and  gubernatorial  police,  which  is  to  watch 
orer  and  oblige  the  fulfillment  of  existing  laws  and  regulations  without  tortures 
and  abuses. 

“We  want  a local  army,  composed  of  native  volunteers,  strictly  limited  to  what 
order  and  natural  defense  demands. 

“We  want  a public  instruction  less  levitical  and  more  extensive  in  what  refers 
to  natural  and  positive  sciences;  so  that  it  may  be  fitted  to  industrate  woman  as  well 
as  man  in  the  establishment  and  development  of  the  industries  and  wealth  of  the 
country,  marine  and  terrestrial  mining,  forestal  and  industrial  of  all  hinds,  an 
instruction  which  is  to  be  free  of  expenses  in  all  its  degrees  and  obligatory  in  its 
primary  portion,  leaving  and  applying  to  this  object  all  such  property  as  is  destined 
to-day  to  supply  the  sustainment  of  the  same;  taking  charge  of  the  administration  of 
such  property  a Council  of  Public  Instruction,  not  leaving  for  one  moment  longer 
in  the  hands  of  religious  institutions,  since  these  teach  only  prejudice  and  fanati- 
cism, proclaiming,  as  did  not  long  since  a rector  of  the  university  of  Manila,  that 
‘medicine  and  physical  sciences  are  materialistic  and  impious  studies,’  and  another, 
that  ‘political  economy  was  the  science  of  the  devil.’ 

'Wewant  to  develop  this  public  instruction,  to  have  primary  schools,  normal  schools, 
institutes  of  second  degree, professional  schools, universities, museums, public  libraries, 
meteorological  observatories,  agricultural  schools,  geological  and  botanical  gardens  and 
a general  practical  and  theoretical  system  of  teaching  agriculture,  arts  and  handicraft 
and  commerce.  All  this  exists  already  in  the  country,  but  badly  organized  and  dis- 
persed, costing  the  contributors  a good  deal  without  practical  results,  which  might 
have  been  expected,  by  the  incompetency  of  the  teachers  and  the  favoritism  em- 
ployed in  their  nominations  and  remunerations. 

“We  want  laws  for  hunting  and  fishing,  and  teaching  and  regular  vigilance  for  the 
faithful  carrying  on  of  pisciculture,  well-known  already  to  the  natives,  for  the  ad- 
vantageous disposing  of  their  marine  products,  such  as  conch  shell,  mother  of  pearl, 
pearls,  bichi  de  mer,  ray  skins,  fish  lime,  etc.,  and  for  the  raising  of  all  kinds  of 
animals  useful  for  agricultural  and  industrial  purposes  and  as  victuals  for  the  natives 
and  for  export. 

“We  want  liberty  of  immigration  and  assistance  for  foreign  settlers  and  capital- 
ists, with  such  restrictions  only,  when  there  be  an  opportunity,  as  limit  actually 
Chinese  immigration,  similar  to  legislature  on  this  point  in  North  America  and 
Australia. 

“We  want,  finally,  anything  that  be  just,  equitable  and  orderly;  all  that  may  be 


854  SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


basis  for  development,  prosperity  and  well  being;  all  that  may  be  a propelling  ele- 
ment of  morality,  virtue  and  respect  to  the  mutual  rights  of  all  the  inhabitants, 
in  their  minor  relations  and  in  those  with  the  foreigner. 

“Do  not  believe  that  the  American  nation  is  unbelieving  or  fanatically  protestant, 
that  it  take  to  the  scaffold  or  to  the  fire  those  who  do  not  believe  determined 
principles  and  practice  special  religious  creeds;  within  that  admirable  organization, 
masterly  and  living  model  of  perfection  for  the  old  nations  of  Europe  and  Asia, 
lives  and  prospers  the  Roman  Catholic  Church. 

“There  are  some  seven  million  inhabitants  who  profess  that  religion  directed  by 
natural  clergy  with  their  proper  ministers,  taken  from  that  fold  of  Christ. 

“Then  there  are  bishops,  archbishops,  cardinals  of  the  Roman  Church,  American 
subjects,  beloved  faithful  of  the  Pope  Leo  XIII. 

“There  then  is  a Temporal  Apostolical  Delegate  representative  of  the  legitimate 
successor  of  St.  Peter;  there  are  parsons,  canons,  dignitaries  and  provisors,  who  live 
and  teach  in  order  peace  and  prosperity,  respected  by  one  and  all,  as  you  yourselves 
will  be  the  day  the  American  flag  will  influence  in  the  spiritual  direction  of  the 
Philippine  people. 

“Then  there  are  cathedrals,  parish  churches,  temples  and  chapels,  sumptuous  and 
admired,  where  they  adore  the  same  God  of  the  Sinai  and  Golgotha,  where  severs 
and  ostcnsive  cult  is  rendered  to  Immaculate  Virgin  Mary  and  to  the  Saints  you  have 
on  your  altars  and  none  dare  to  destroy,  attack  or  prostitute  them. 

“There  then  are  seminaries,  convents,  missions,  fraternities,  schools,  everything 
Catholic,  richly  furnished,  well  kept  up  and  perfectly  managed  to  the  glory  of  the 
religion. 

“There  resides  Ilis  Eminence  Cardinal  Gibbons,  a wise  Roman  Catholic  prelate, 
American  citizen,  who  recently  and  on  occasion  of  the  present  war,  has  ordered,  with 
consent  of  Ilis  Sanctity,  that  all  the  catholic  clergy  of  the  American  nation  raise 
daily  prayers  to  the  Most  High  to  obtain  the  triumph  of  the  arms  of  their  country, 
for  the  good  of  religion  and  humanity,  which  cause,  in  the  present  conflict  legiti- 
mately and  unquestionably  represents  that  government. 

“And  just  as  Christ,  to  be  Messiah,  had  to  be  according  to  the  prophecies,  Jew 
and  of  the  Tribe  of  Judah,  that  is:  By  right  of  his  political  fatherland,  as  by  that  of 
his  native  soil,  of  the  chosen  people,  thus  amongst  you  who  ever  wants  to  be  a clergy- 
man or  merit  being  canon,  dignitary,  provisor,  bishop,  archbishop  and  cardinal, 
must  as  an  indispensable  condition,  have  been  born  on  your  proper  soil,  as  is  occur- 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


355 


ring  absolutely  in  all  the  civilized  nations  of  the  old  and  new  world,  with  the  only 
exception  of  the  Philippines. 

“There  may  be  priests,  religious  congregations,  nuns  and  convents,  but  sub- 
missive to  the  laws  of  the  country  and  obliged  to  admit  in  their  bosom  as  formerly 
happened  in  these  isles,  as  estimable  and  superior  members  of  such  institutions,  those 
feel  a vocation  for  a conventual  life,  as  the  noble  and  generous  people  of  North 
America  will  demand,  and  will,  do  not  doubt  it,  recognize  these  your  legitimate  rights. 

FILIPINOS  AND  COUNTRYMEN. 

“The  protection  of  the  great  American  Republic  will  make  you  respected  and  con- 
sidered before  the  cultured  powers,  legitimately  constituted;  and  your  personalitj 
will  be  proclaimed  and  sanctioned  everywhere. 

“We  have  the  duty  to  exact  the  rights  we  have  just  proclaimed  and  the  ‘natives’ 
in  all  the  isles  and  in  all  their  different  races,  as  well  as  the  ‘Mestizo  Sangley,’  as 
the  ‘Mestizo  Espanol,’  and  the  ‘Son  of  the  Country,’  we  all  have  the  honorable 
duty  of  defending  ourselves  against  the  whip  and  the  contempt  of  the  Spaniards,  ac- 
cepting the  protection  and  direction  of  the  humane  North  American  nation. 

VIVA  FILIPINOS 

Hurrah  for  liberty  and  right. 

Hurrah  for  the  Grand  Republic  of  the  United  States  of  North  America. 

Hurrah  for  President  McKinley  and  Rear  Admiral  Dewey. 

THE  JUNTA  PATRIOTICA. 

“Hongkong,  April,  1898.” 

Under  the  authority  of  the  United  States  there  have  been  inquiries  by  a court  into 
the  causes  of  the  imprisonment  of  the  inmates  of  the  penitentiary  and  common  jail 
at  Manila,  and  others  who  have  suffered  from  the  enmities  of  the  members  of  the  gov- 
ernment that  ceased  when  the  Spanish  flag  was  taken  down  and  the  American  flag 
raised.  The  memoranda  following  were  made  in  the  court  proceedings,  and  state 
the  facts  as  judicially  established. 

FULGENCIA  TUAZON. 

This  lady  was  confined  in  Bilibid  seven  years  ago  (though  the  record  shows  July 
11,  1898,)  by  order  of  the  Governor-General,  on  a charge  of  selling  counterfeit 
stamps.  She  was  tried,  and  sentenced  to  six  years’  confinement;  but  the  Judge  ac- 
cepted a bribe  of  $900  and  released  ber  about  a week  after  her  trial.  A year  after- 


356  SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 

wards  she  was  again  arrested  by  a new  judge  on  the  same  charge,  and  $3,000  was  de- 
manded as  the  price  of  her  liberty.  This  was  refused,  and  imprisonment  followed. 
She  claims  to  have  bought  the  stamps  (which  were  telegraph  stamps),  from  the 
Government. 

DOROTEA  ARTEAGA. 

This  young  lady,  who  was  a school  teacher  in  her  native  province,  Montinlupa, 
Manila  province,  was  confined  in  Bilibid,  August  8th,  1895,  charged  with  “sacrilege 
and  robbery,”  and  insurrection.  She  came  to  Malate  to  see  about  her  license  as  a 
school  teacher,  and  was  arrested  by  the  civil  guard  on  the  above  charge.  She  claims 
her  arrest  was  instigated  by  a priest  who  had  made  overtures  to  her  to  have  carnal 
intercourse  with  him,  and  had  attempted  the  same,  and  had  been  repulsed  and  re- 
fused. To  cover  up  his  ill-doing  he  caused  her  arrest  on  the  charge  of  having 
stolen  part  of  the  vessels  used  in  the  communion  service  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
church.  She  has  never  been  married  and  the  Alcalde  says,  ‘Tier  conduct  in  prison 
has  been  very  good.” 

SENORA  MAXIMA  GUERRERA. 

This  woman  was  born  in  Santa  Cruz,  in  1838,  and  has  been  confined  in  Bilibid 
since  1S90,  though  the  record  shows  that  she  was  imprisoned  July  11,  1898,  by  order 
of  the  Governor-General.  This  date,  however,  is  admitted  to  be  an  error  by  the 
Alcalde,  without  any  explanation  of  the  error.  The  record  shows  that  she  was  im- 
prisoned because  she  objected  to  the  Government  taking  wood  otT  her  property 
without  paying  for  it.  She  claims  that  since  her  imprisonment,  the  Government 
has  confiscated  $10,000  worth  of  her  property. 

FELIPE  REMENTINA. 

This  prisoner  was  confined  in  the  year  1889,  when  only  12  years  old.  At  that 
time  a revolution  was  in  progress  in  the  province  in  which  he  resided,  and  he  was 
“captured”  by  the  Spanish  forces  and  sent  to  Bilibid  Carcel.  lie  did  not  know 
with  what  he  was  charged,  and  while  he  was  tried,  he  never  received  any  sentence. 

JOSE  DAVID. 

“I  was  put  in  here  June  13th,  1898.  Am  a civilian  and  a ‘Katipunan.’  V as 
tried,  but  never  sentenced.”  The  foregoing  is  the  testimony  of  the  prisoner  Jose 
David,  and  is  quoted  here  as  an  example  of  the  testimony  of  some  hundreds  of 
others,  which  is  almost  identical.  Large  numbers  of  the  natives  seem  to  be  mem- 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


357 


bers  of  the  “Kaiipunan”  society,  which  appears  to  he  a revolutionary  brotherhood 
of  some  kind.  They  have  been  imprisoned  for  terms  varying  from  one  or  two 
months  to  several  years  (in  some  cases  ten  or  twelve  years),  upon  the  charge  of  be- 
longing to  this  society;  in  very  many  cases  without  trial,  and  in  the  majority  with  no 
sentence  whatever,  and,  very  largely,  simply  “on  susupicion.” 

AGAPITO  CALIBUGAR. 

This  man  was  arrested  by  the  Civil  Guard,  in  July,  1889,  in  his  own  house,  and 
was  tried  but  not  sentenced,  or  rather  did  not  know  what  his  sentence  was.  He 
was  told  that  his  sentence  was  served  out,  but  he  could  not  be  returned  to  his  own 
province  of  Negros  because  the  Governor  had  no  ships  available  for  that  purpose.  He 
had  no  idea  why  he  was  arrested  and  tried.  There  are  several  other  cases  similar 
to  this  one,  in  which  the  charge  is  “resisting  armed  forces” — most  of  which  were 
tried  by  court  martial,  and  never  sentenced. 

GREGORIO  DOMINGO. 

This  prisoner  was  confined  in  Bilibid  Carcel  on  the  25th  of  November,  1896, 
the  entry  on  the  prison  record  against  his  name  being  “no  se  espresa” — “no  charge 
expressed.”  He  was,  of  course,  neither  tried  nor  sentenced,  but  had  been  in  prison 
almost  two  years,  with  absolutely  no  reason  attempted  to  be  made  for  his  confine- 
ment. This  case  is  also  cited  as  an  example  of  many  similar  ones. 

JOSE  TRABADO. 

This  is  the  case  of  a man  who  was  a member  of  the  Katipunan  society,  but  who 
was  tried  and  sentenced.  He  was  imprisoned  in  Bilibid  Carcel,  May  5th,  1898,  his 
sentence  being  confinement  “cardena  perpetua” — “in  chains  forever.”  He  was  one 
of  five  men  who  received  the  same  sentence  for  a like  offence.  He,  with  the  others, 
was  set  free  August  31st,  1898. 

SILYINO  DE  CASTRO. 

In  this  case  the  prisoner,  who  was  formerly  employed  as  a clerk  in  a grocery 
store,  was  imprisoned  in  Bilibid  Carcel  on  the  25th  of  December,  1897,  charged 
with  having  stolen  $4.50  (Spanish,  which  represents  about  $2.25  American).  His 
story  was  that  he  was  sent  out  to  collect  a bill,  but  lost  the  said  bill,  and  was  there- 
fore accused  by  his  employer  of  stealing  the  money,  and  was  imprisoned.  He  was 
tried,  but  never  received  any  sentence. 


358  SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


DON  FERNANDO  SIERRA. 

The  prisoner  above  named  is  a full-blooded  Spaniard,  thirty-eight  years  of  age, 
married,  and  has  one  child,  three  months  old.  He  was  confined  in  Bilibid,  May  28, 
1893,  for  “insulting”  a civil  guard,  while  drunk,  and  was  tried  and  sentenced  to 
six  years  and  six  months  imprisonment.  He  had  already  served  over  five  years  of  this 
sentence,  when  he  was  released  September  2nd,  189S. 

CRISTAN  DEL  CARMEN. 

This  man  was  confined  in  the  Carcel  De  Bilibid,  the  “common  prison,”  May 
4th,  1898,  and  his  offense  was  that  he  was  “suspected  of  being  an  American!”  For 
this  heinous  crime  he  was  neither  tried  nor  sentenced. 

JULIAN  SORIANO. 

In  this  case  the  prisoner  was  confined  in  Bilibid,  March  25th,  1895,  after  hav- 
ing been  in  prison  one  year  in  his  province  on  suspicion  of  being  implicated  in  the 
killing  of  a civil  guard  at  a place  colled  Balauga.  He  was  tried  by  a sergeant  of  the 
civil  guard,  who  caused  him  to  be  tortured  in  order  to  wring  a confession  from  him. 
This  torture  was  inflicted  by  means  of  a thin  rope  or  cord,  tied  very  tightly  around 
the  muscles  of  the  arm  above  the  elbow  (cutting  into  the  flesh  deeply),  and  left 
there  in  some  instances  for  thirty  days.  In  some  cases  the  men  were  also  hung  up, 
the  weight  of  the  bodv  being  sustained  by  the  cords  around  the  arms.  Several  of 

P y o y 

the  prisoners  have  deep  scars  on  their  arms  caused  by  the  torture.  This  man  was 
never  sentenced. 

LEON  BUENO. 

The  charge  against  this  man  was  that  he  had  stolen  a pig,  and  he  was  confined 
in  Bilibid,  March  21st.  1893,  after  being  tried  and  sentenced  to  eight  years'  impris- 
onment. He  bad  already  served  over  five  years  when  released  Sept.  3.  1898. 

JOSE  CASTILLO. 

This  man  was  confined  in  Bilibid  Carcel,  December  15th,  1894,  charged  with 
“insulting  the  armed  forces  of  Spain.”  His  version  of  the  reason  for  his  imprison- 
ment is  as  follows:  His  cousin  and  a lieutenant  in  the  guardia  civile  were  very 

close  friends,  and  the  said  cousin,  wishing  to  present  a cow  to  the  lieutenant,  applied 
to  the  prisoner  for  one,  which  was  given  to  him.  Later  on  the  cousin  thought  he 
would  like  to  present  his  friend  with  another  cow,  so  applied  to  the  prisoner  for 


SPECIFICATIONS  OF  GRIEVANCES  OF  THE  FILIPINOS. 


359 


cow  No.  2,  and  was  this  time  refused.  In  order  to  take  vengeance  on  the  prisoner, 
the  cousin  denounced  him  to  the  civil  guard  lieutenant  as  a “bandit,”  and  he  was 
arrested  and  imprisoned  as  above.  The  prisoner  was  sixty  years  of  age. 

ANASTACIO  DE  MESA. 

The  story  of  this  prisoner  seems  to  be  particularly  sad.  He  was  a chorister  or 
sacristan  in  a Roman  Catholic  church,  with  several  others,  and  was  arrested,  with 
his  companions,  by  the  civil  guard,  charged  with  “sacrilege.”  The  truth  of  the 
matter,  however,  seems  to  be  as  follows:  The  prisoner  had  a sweetheart  with  whom 
a lieutenant  of  the  civil  guard,  named  de  Vega,  appears  to  have  been  infatuated. 
After  imprisoning  Anastacio  de  Mesa  and  his  companions  upon  the  above  charge, 
which  seems  to  be  without  foundation  entirely,  de  Vega  took  the  girl,  and  com- 
pelled her  by  force  and  against  her  will  to  live  with  him  as  his  mistress.  The  girl 
soon  died,  her  end,  no  doubt,  being  hastened  by  the  brutal  cruelty  of  de  Vega. 
These  young  men,  hardly  more  than  boys,  wrere  imprisoned  on  August  3,  1895, 
after  having  been  tried  by  court  martial,  but  not  sentenced.  They  have  now  been 
liberated.  It  should  be  stated  that  de  Vega  himself  constituted  the  “court  martial” 
before  which  these  boys  were  tried. 

Note. — There  are  several  cases  of  arrests  for  “insulting  and  resisting  the  armed 
forces  of  Spain.”  In  the  case  of  Pedro  Javier,  the  accused  was  over  seventy  years 
old,  and  in  that  of  Miguel  de  la  Gruz,  he  was  seventy-five  years  old;  while  in  one 
or  two  other  cases  boys  of  ten  or  twelve  years  of  age  were  arrested  on  the  same  charge. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 

The  Star  Spangled  Banner  Up  Again  in  Hawaii,  and  to  Stay — Dimensions  of  the 
Islands — What' the  Missionaries  Have  Done — Religious  Belief  by  Nation- 
ality— Trade  Statistics — Latest  Census — Sugar  Plantation  Laborers — Coinage 
of  Silver — Schools — Coffee  Growing. 

The  star  spangled  banner  should  have  been  waving  in  peaceful  triumph  over  our 
central  possessions  in  the  Pacific  for  five  years.  Now  Old  Glory  has  ascended  the 
famous  flag-staff,  from  which  it  was  mistakenly  withdrawn,  and  is  at  home.  Its 
lustrous  folds  are  welcomed  by  a city  that  is  strangely  American,  in  the  sense  that 
it  is  what  the  world  largely  calls  “Yankee,”  and  does  not  mean  bad  manners  by 
the  most  expressive  word  that  has  so  vast  a distinction.  The  shops  of  Honolulu 
are  Americanized.  There  is  a splendid  blossoming  of  the  flag  of  the  country.  The 
British  parties  of  opposition  have  faded  out.  There  is  the  wisdom  in  English 
statesmanship  to  be  glad  to  see  us  with  material  interest  in  the  Pacific  Ocean.  In 
this  connection  there  is  something  better  than  a treaty. 

Do  not  mispronounce  the  name  of  the  capital  city  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands.  Call 
it  noo-noo-luu-luu  and  let  it  sing  itself.  Remember  that  this  city  is  not  on  the 
larger  of  the  islands,  but  the  third  in  size.  The  area  of  Hawaii,  the  greater  island, 
is  4,210  square  miles.  Oahn,  the  Honolulu  island,  has  600  square  miles,  with  a 
population  of  40,205,  and  Hawaii  has  33,285  people.  The  area  of  the  islands,  told 
in  acres  is,  Hawaii,  2,000,000;  Nani,  400,000;  Oahu,  260,000;  Kauai,  350,000; 
Malokai,  200,000;  Lauai,  100,000;  Nichan,  70,000;  Kahloolawe,  30,000.  The 
dimensions  of  the  tremendous  volcanoes  that  are  our  property  now  are  startling: 

DIMENSIONS  OF  KILAUEA,  ISLAND  OF  HAWAII. 

(The  largest  active  Volcano  in  the  World.) 

Area,  4.14  square  miles,  or  2,650  acres. 

Circumference,  41,500  feet,  or  7.85  miles 

Extreme  width,  10.300  feet,  or  1.95  miles. 

Extreme  length,  15,600  feet,  or  2.93  miles. 

Elevation,  Volcano  House,  1,040  feet. 

360 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


3(53 


DIMENSIONS  OF  MOKTTAWEOWEO. 

(The  Summit  Crater  of  Mauna  Loa,  Island  of  Hawaii.) 


Area,  3.70  square  miles,  or  2,370  acres. 
Circumference,  50,000  feet,  or  9.47  miles. 
Length,  19,500  feet,  or  3.7  miles. 

Width,  9,200  feet,  or  1.74  miles. 
Elevation,  13,675  feet. 


DIMENSIONS  OF  HALEAKALA. 

(The  great  Crater  of  Maui,  the  Largest  in  the  World.) 


Area,  19  square  miles,  or  12,160  acres. 

Circumference,  105,600  feet,  or  20  miles. 

Extreme  length,  39,500  feet,  or  7.48  miles. 

Extreme  width,  12,500  feet,  or  2.37  miles. 

Elevation  of  summit,  10,032  feet. 

Elevation  of  principal  cones  in  crater,  8,032  and  7,572  feet. 
Elevation  of  cave  in  floor  of  crater,  7,380  feet. 


DIMENSIONS  OF  IAO  VALLEY,  MAUI. 


Length  (from  Wailuku)  about  5 miles. 

Width  of  valley,  2 miles. 

Depth,  near  head,  4,000  feel. 

Elevation  of  Puu  Kukui,  above  head  of  valley,  5,788  feet. 
Elevation  of  Crater  of  Eke,  above  Waihee  Valley,  4,500  feet. 


Honolulu’s  importance  comes  from  the  harbor,  and  the  favor  of  the  missionaries. 
As  to  the  general  judgment  of  the  work  of  the  missionaries,  there  is  nothing  better 
to  do  than  to  quote  Mr.  Bichard  H.  Dana’s  “Two  Years  Before  the  Mast.”  He 
said  in  that  classic: 

“It  is  no  small  thing  to  say  of  the  missionaries  of  the  American  Board,  that  in 
less  than  forty  years  they  have  taught  this  whole  people  to  read  and  write,  to  cipher 
and  to  sew.  They  have  given  them  an  alphabet,  grammar  and  distionary;  pre- 
served their  language  from  extinction;  given  it  a literature  and  translated  into  it 
the  Bible,  and  works  of  devotion,  science  and  entertainment,  etc.  They  have 
established  schools,  reared  up  native  teachers,  and  so  pressed  their  work  +hat  povv 


304 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


the  proportion  of  inhabitants  who  can  read  and  write  is  greater  than  in  New  England. 
And,  whereas,  they  found  these  islanders  a nation  of  half-naked  savages,  living  in 
the  surf  and  on  the  sand,  eating  raw  fish,  fighting  among  themselves,  tyrannized 
over  by  feudal  chiefs  and  abandoned  to  sensuality,  they  now  see  them  decently 
clothed,  recognizing  the  law  of  marriage,  knowing  something  of  accounts,  going  to 
school  and  public  worship  more  regularly  than  the  people  do  at  home,  and  the 
more  elevated  of  them  taking  part  in  conducting  the  affairs  of  the  constitutional 
'monarchy  under  which  they  live,  holding  seats  on  the  judicial  bench  and  in  the 
legislative  chambers,  and  filling  posts  in  the  local  magistracies.” 

Take  away  the  tropical  vegetation  and  the  gigantic  scenery  and  we  have  here,  in 
our  new  Pacific  possessions,  a new  Connecticut.  The  stamp  of  New  England  is  upon 
this  lofty  land,  especially  in  Honolulu,  where  the  spires  of  the  churches  testify. 
There  is  much  that  is  of  the  deepest  and  broadest  interest  in  the  possible  missionary 
work  here,  on  account  of  the  remarkable  race  questions  presented.  Here  are  the 
nations  and  the  people  of  mixed  blood — the  Chinese,  Japanese  and  Portuguese — a 
population  immensely  representative  of  Oriental  Asia.  The  measure  of  success  of 
the  missionaries  under  our  flag  in  dealing  with  these  people  can  hardly  fail  to  be 
accepted  by  the  world  as  a test  of  the  practical  results  of  the  labor  with  the  Asiatica. 
In  this  connection,  the  figures  following,  from  the  Hawaiian  Annual  of  1898,  fur 
nish  a basis  of  solid  information  for  study: 

TABLE  OF  RELIGIOUS  BELIEF,  BY  NATIONALITY. 


(So  Far  as 

Reported  in  Census  Returns,  1896.) 

Nationalities. 

Protestants. 

Roman 

Catholics. 

Mormons. 

Hawaiians 

12,842 

8,427 

4,368 

396 

Part  Hawaiians 

3,242 

2.633 

Hawaiian  born  foreigners....  1,801 

6,622 

15 

Americans 

1.404 

212 

34 

British 

1,184 

180 

7 

Germans 

592 

83 

2 

French 

6 

57 

Norwegians 

154 

8 

Portuguese 

146 

7,812 

1 

Japanese 

711 

49 

4 

Chinese 

837 

67 

49 

South  Sea  Islanders.. 

178 

42 

3 

Other  nationalities... 

176 

171 

7 

Totals 

23,273 

26,363 

4,886 

NOTE. — This  table  shows  but  54,522  of  the  population  (just  about  one-half! 
to  have  made  returns  of  their  religious  belief.  With  21.535  Japanese  and  18,429 


M A LACAN  AN  PALACE  AND  PASIG  RIVER.  MANILA. 


GENERAL  OTIS  AND  STAFF.  DINING  ROOM.  MALACANAN  PALACE.  MANILA. 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED, 


367 


368 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


Cliinese  (probably  Buddhists  and  Confucians)  unreported  because  not  provided  for 
in  the  schedules,  the  great  difference  is  largely  accounted  for. 

The  latest  census  returns  show  that  of  the  whole  population,  109,020,  there  are: 
Males,  72,517;  females,  30,503.  The  latest  information  of  labor,  under  contract  for 
sugar-making,  make  the  number  of  males  on  the  island  more  than  double  that  of  the 
females.  There  has  been  an  increase  of  population  of  more  than  50,000  in  the 
eighteen  years  from  1878  to  1896.  The  census  of  the  several  islands,  taken  Septem- 
ber 27,  1896,  shows: 


Population. 

Dwellings. 

Male. 

Female. 

Total. 

Inhab- 

Unin- 

babl-  Build- 

Total. 

Oahu 

. .26,164 

14,041 

40,205 

lted. 

6,685 

ted. 

1,065 

lug. 

60 

7,010 

Hawaii.. . . 

. . 22,632 

10,663 

33,285 

5.033 

955 

35 

6,027 

Molokai.  . . 

..  1,335 

972 

2,307 

651 

92 

3 

746 

Lanai  .... 

...  51 

54 

105 

23 

13 

. . 

36 

Maui 

. .11,435 

6,291 

17,726 

3,156 

650 

18 

3,824 

Niihau. . . . 

..  76 

88 

164 

31 

3 

• • 

34 

Kauai  

. .10,824 

4,404 

15,228 

2,320 

299 

8 

2,627 

Totals 

. .72,517 

36,503 

109,020 

17,099 

3,081 

124 

21,104 

waii’s  annual  trade  balance  since  1879  is 

a notable 

record: 

Excess  Export  Custom  Douse 


Y ear. 

Imports. 

Exports. 

Values. 

Kecelpls. 

1880. . 

$3,673,268.41 

$4,968,444.87 

$1,295,176.46 

$402,181.63 

1881 . . 

4,547,978.64 

6,885,436.56 

2,337,457.92 

423.192.01 

1882. . 

4,974,510.01 

8,299,016.70 

3.324,506.69 

505.390.98 

1883. . 

5,624,240.09 

8,133.313.88 

2,509.103.79 

577.332.87 

1884. . 

4,637.514.22 

8,184,922.63 

3.547,408.41 

551,739.59 

1885. . 

3,830,544.58 

9.158.818.01 

5,328.273.43 

502.337.38 

1886.  . 

4.877,738.73 

10,565,885.58 

5.688.146.85 

580,444.04 

1887. . 

4,943.840.72 

9.707.047.33 

4,763,206.61 

695,002.64 

1888. . 

4,540,887.46 

11.903,398.76 

7,362,511.30 

546,142.63 

1889.  . 

5,438.790.63 

14,039,941.40 

8.601.150.77 

550.010.16 

1890. . 

6,962,201.13 

13.142,829.48 

6.180.628.35 

695.956.91 

1891. . 

7.438.582.65 

10.395.788.27 

2,957.205.62 

732,594.93 

1892.. 

4,028.295.31 

8.181.687.21 

4.153.391.90 

494.385.10 

1893. . 

4.363.177.58 

10.962,598.09 

5,599,420.51 

545.754.16 

1894. . 

5.104.481.43 

9.678,794.56 

4.574.313.13 

524.767.37 

1895. . 

5.714.017.54 

8.474.138.15 

2.760.120.61 

547.149.40 

1896. . 

7,164,561.40 

/.5, 515, 230.13 

8.350.668.73 

656,895.82 

The  percentage  of  imports  from  the  United  States  in  1896  was  76.27;  Great 
Britain,  10.51:  Germany.  2.06:  France,  .15;  China.  4.17:  Japan,  3.86.  In  1895 
the  export  of  sugar  was  294,784,819  pounds:  value,  $7,975,500.41. 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXE©. 


309 


NATIONALITY  OF  VESSELS  EMPLOYED  IN  FOREIGN  CARRY- 


ING TRADE,  1889-1896. 


Nat  ions. 

No. 

1809. 

Tons. 

No. 

1890. 

Tons. 

No. 

1891. 

Tons. 

No. 

1892. 

Tons. 

American . . 

..185 

125,196 

224 

153,098 

233 

169,472 

212 

160,042 

Hawaiian.  . 

..  44 

56,670 

35 

43,641 

21 

26,86S 

:i 

4,340 

British .... 

..  22 

21,108 

16 

22,912 

33 

52,866 

.30 

58,317 

German . . . 

..  5 

3,337 

9 

7,070 

9 

9,005 

5 

5,978 

Japanese. . 

• • • • 

• • • • • • • 

• • • 

. 

5 

8,239 

3 

4,701 

All  others. 

..  9 

12,268 

9 

9,980 

10 

8,401 

11 

8,201 

Total  . 

..269 

218,579 

293 

236,701 

311 

274,852 

722 

242,579 

BONDED  DEBT,  ETC.,  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS,  JUNE  30,  1897. 


Per  Cent. 


Under  Loan  Act  of  1876. 

7 . . . , 

$ 1,500.00 

U U 

“ 1882 

6 ... 

67,400.00 

u « 

“ 1886 

6 .... 

2,000,000.00 

U (C 

“ 1888 

6 . . . . 

190,000.00 

iC  cc 

“ 1890 

5 and  6 . . . . 

124,100.00 

u u 

“ 1892 

5 and  6 . . . . 

82.100.00 

u « 

“ 1893 

6 . . . , 

650,000.00 

a a 

“ 1896 

5 . . . . 

3,337,100.00 

Due  Postal  Savings  Bank  Depositors , . . . . 

782,074.25 

Total $4,119,174.25 

NUMBER  AND  NATIONALITY  OF  SUGAR  PLANTA- 
TION LABORERS. 


(Compiled  from  latest  Report  of  Secretary  Bureau  of  Immigration,  December 
31,  1897.) 


Hawaii- 

Portu- 

Japan- 

S.  S. 

All 

Islands. 

ans. 

guese. 

ese. 

Chinese. 

Isl’ders. 

Others. 

Total. 

Hawaii  

..  594 

980 

6.245 

2,511 

24 

232 

10,586 

Mauai 

..  580 

526 

2.010 

1,114 

45 

110 

4,385 

Oahu 

. . 197 

211 

1,331 

973 

16 

55 

2,783 

Kauai  

..  244 

551 

3,307 

1,691 

30 

203 

6,026 

Total,  1896.. 

. .1,615 

2,268 

12,893 

6,289 

115 

600 

23,780 

Total,  1895.. 

. .1,584 

2,497 

11,584 

3,847 

133 

473 

20,120 

Increase,  1896... 
Decrease,  1899... 

. . 31 

' 231 

1,309 

2,442 

18 

127 

3,660 

The  number  of  day  laborers,  11,917,  or  a little  over  one-half  of  the  total  force 
engaged.  The  Japanese  and  South  Sea  Islanders  are  about  evenly  divided  in  their 
numbers  as  to  term  and  day  service,  while  Haevaiians  and  Portuguese  shew  each  but 


370 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


a small  proportion  of  their  numbers  under  contract.  Minors  are  reducing  in  num- 
ber. Women  laborers,  numbering  1,02-1  in  all,  show  a gain  of  89  over  1875.  Only 
thirty  Hawaiian  females  are  engaged  among  all  the  plantations,  and  confined  to  one 
plantation  each  in  Oahu,  Kauai  and  Maui. 

The  Ilvvaiian  Annual  of  1S98  makes  this  annotation: 

During  the  year  various  changes  have  occurred  in  the  labor  population  of  the 
country,  and  under  the  working  of  the  present  law,  requiring  a proportion  of  other 
than  Asiatic  of  all  immigrant  labor  introduced, there  has  already  arrived  one  company 
of  Germans,  comprisingg  11.1  men,  25  women  and  47  children,  all  of  whom  found 
ready  engagements  with  various  plantations. 

Chinese  arirvals  in  1S97  to  take  the  place  of  Japanese  whose  terms  were  expiring, 
will  alter  the  proportions  of  these  nationalitis  of  plantation  labor,  and  by  the  new 
law  Asiatic  laborers  must  return  to  their  country  at  the  expiration  of  their  term  of 
service,  or  re-engage;  they  cannot  drift  around  the  country,  nor  engage  in  competi- 
tion with  artizans  or  merchants. 

The  islands  comprising  the  Hawaiian  territory  are  Hawaii,  Mauai,  Oahu,  Kauai, 
Molokai,  Lauai,  Niihau,  Kahaalawc,  Lehua  and  Molokini,  “The  Leper  Prison,”  and, 
in  addition,  Nihoa,  or  Bird  Island,  was  taken  possession  of  in  1822;  an  expedition  for 
that  purpose  having  been  fitted  out  by  direction  of  Kaahumanu,  and  sent  thither 
under  the  charge  of  Captain  William  Sumner. 

Laysan  Island  became  Hawaiian  territory  May  1st,  1857,  and  on  the  10th  of  the 
same  month  Lysiansky  Island  was  added  to  Kamehameha’s  realm  by  Captain 
John  Paty. 

Palmyra  Island  was  taken  possession  of  by  Captain  Zcnas  Bent,  April  15th, 
1802,  and  proclaimed  Hawaiian  territory  in  the  reign  of  Kamchameha  IV.,  as  per 
“By  Authority"  notice  in  the  “Polynesian"  of  June  2 1st,  18C2. 

Ocean  Bland  was  acquired  September  20th.  18SG,  as  per  proclamation  of  Colonel 
J.  IT.  Boyd,  empowered  for  such  service  during  the  reign  of  Kalakaua. 

Nccker  Island  was  taken  possession  of  May  27th,  1S94,  by  Captain  James  A. 
King,  on  behalf  of  the  Hawaiian  Government. 

French  Frigate  Shoal  was  the  latest  acquisition,  also  by  Captain  King,  and  pro- 
claimed Hawaiian  territory  July  13th.  1895. 

Gardener  Island,  Mara  or  Moro  Beef,  Fearl  and  nermes  Beef,  Gambia  Bank,  and 
Johnston  or  Cornwallis  Island  are  also  claimed  as  Hawaiian  possessions,  but  there 
is  some  obscurity  as  to  the  dates  of  acquisition,  and  it  is  of  record  in  the  Foreign 
Office  articles  of  convention  between  Hon.  Charles  St.  Julien,  the  Commissioner 
and  Political  and  Commercial  Agent  of  Ills  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


371 


Islands,  and  John  Webster,  Esq.,  the  Sovereign  Chief  and  Proprietor  of  the  group 
of  islands  known  as  Stewart’s  Islands  (situated  near  the  Solomon  Group),  whereby  is 
ceded  to  the  Hawaiian  Government — subject  to  ratification  by  the  King — the  islands 
of  Ihikaiana,  Tc  Parena,  Taore,  Matua  Awi  and  Matua  Ivoto,  comprising  said  group 
of  Stewart’s  Islands.  But  the  formalities  do  not  seem  to  have  been  perfected,  so 
that  we  are  not  certain  that  the  Stewart’s  Islands  are  our  possessions.  The  latest 
thorough  census  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  was  taken  in  September,  189G,  but  the 
population  was  closely  estimated  July  1st,  1897. 


Population  as  per  Census, 

Septenrber,  1896 

Passengers — Arrivals — 
Excess  over  departures, 

4th  quarter,  1896 

Excess  over  departures, 
6 mos.  to  July  1,  1897. 

Total 


Natives. 

Chinese. 

Japan- 

ese. 

Portu- 

guese. 

All  Other 
Foreigners. 

Total 

39,504 

21,616 

24,407 

15,191 

8,302 

109,020 

1,377 

1,673 

339 

3,389 

2,908 

396 

58 

207 

3,569 

39,504 

25,901 

26,476 

15,249 

8,848 

115,978 

The  following  denominations  of  Hawaiian  silver  were  coined  during  the  reign 
of  Kalakaua,  at  the  San  Francisco  mint,  and  imported  for  the  circulating  medium 
of  the  islands  in  1883  and  1884.  They  are  of  the  same  intrinsic  value  as  the 
United  States  silver  coins  and  were  first  introduced  into  circulation  January  14th, 
at  the  opening  of  the  hank  of  Claus  Spreckles  & Co.  in  Honolulu.  The  amount 
coined  was  $1,000,000,  divided  as  follows: 


Hawaiian  Dollars $ 500,000 

“ Half  Dollars 350,000 

“ Quarter  Dollars 125,000 

“ Dimes 25,000 


Total 


$1,000,000 


SCHOOLS,  TEACHERS  AND  PUPILS  FOR  THE  YEAR  1896. 

— Teachers. — — Pupils. — 


Government  . . . . 
Independent  . . . . 

Schools. 

132 

63 

Male. 

Ill 

72 

Female. 

169 

130 

Total. 

280 

202 

Male. 

5,754 

1,994 

Female. 

4,435 

1,840 

195 

183 

299 

482 

7,748 

6,275 

872 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


NATIONALITY  OF  PUPILS  ATTENDING  SCHOOLS  FOR  THE 

YEAR  1896. 


Nationality. 

Male. 

Female. 

Hawaiian 

3,048 

2,432 

Part-Hawaiian 

1,152 

1,296 

American 

219 

198 

British 

105 

151 

German 

152 

136 

Portuguese 

2,066 

1,534 

Scandinavian 

51 

47 

Japanese 

242 

155 

Chinese 

641 

280 

South  Sea  Islanders 

15 

13 

Other  foreigners 

57 

33 

7,748 

6,275 

Of  the  Japanese,  8.5  per  cent,  were  born  on  the  islands;  of  the  Chinese,  per- 
centage born  here,  10.3.  Of  a total  of  41,711  Japanese  and  Chinese,  36,121  are 
males  and  5,590  females.  The  figures  show  that  the  Asiatics  are  not  at  home. 

The  sugar  industry  in  our  new  possessions  has  had  great  prominence  agricultur- 
ally. The  sugar  interest  of  these  islands  has  had  a formidable  influence  in  the  United 
States.  Recent  events  and  the  ascertained  certainties  of  the  future  show  that  the  peo- 
ple of  the  United  States  will  soon  raise  their  sugar  supply  on  their  own  territory.  The 
annexation  of  these  sugar  islands  was  antagonized  because  there  was  involved  the 
labor  contract  system.  As  a matter  of  course,  the  United  States  will  not  changb 
the  labor  laws  of  the  nation  to  suit  the  sugar  planters  of  Hawaii,  who  have  been  ob- 
taining cheap  labor  through  a system  of  Asiatic  servitude.  There  is  but  one  solu- 
tion— labor  will  be  better  compensated  in  Hawaii  than  it  has  been,  and  yet  white 
men  will  not  be  largely  employed  in  the  cultivation  of  sugar  cane  in  our  tropical 
islands.  The  beet  sugar  industry  is  another  matter.  There  will  be  an  end  of  the 
peculiar  institution  that  has  had  strength  in  our  new  possessions,  that  brings,  under 
contract,  to  Hawaii  a mass  of  forty  thousand  Chinese  and  Japanese  men,  and  turns 
over  the  majority  of  them  to  the  plantations,  whose  profits  have  displayed  an  un- 
wholesome aggrandizement.  Once  it  was  said  cotton  could  not  be  grown  in  the 
cotton  belt  of  our  country  without  slave  labor,  but  the  latter  trouble  is,  the  cotton 
producers  claim,  there  is  too  much  of  their  product  raised.  A ten-miljon  bale 
crop  depresses  the  market.  Already  experiments  have  been  tried  successfully  to 
pay  labor  in  the  sugar  fields  by  the  tons  of  cane  delivered  at  the  mills  for  grinding. 
'I'his  is  an  incident  full  of  auspicious  significance.  A general  feeling  is  expressed  in 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


373 


the  current  saying  that  coffee  raising  is  “the  coming  industry.”  The  confidence 
that  there  is  prosperity  in  coffee  amounts  to  enthusiasm.  Here  are  some  of  the  sta- 
tistics of  coffee  growers,  showing  number  of  trees  and  area,  trees  newly  planted  and 
trees  in  bearing: 

NO.  OP  TREES  OR  AREA. 


J.  C.  Lenhart,  Kaupo 

Mokulau  Coffee  Co.,  Kaupo 

E.  E.  Paxton,  Kaupo 

Native  Patches  throughout  Kaupo 

Lahaina  Coffee  and  Fruit  Co.,  Ltd.,  Lahaina  . . . 

H.  P.  Baldwin,  Honokahua 

Waianae  Coffee  Plantation  Co.,  Waianae 

C.  A.  Wideman,  Waianae 

Makaha  Coffee  Co.,  Ltd.,  Waianae 

Lanihau  Plantation,  Kailua 

Kona  Coffee  Co.,  Ltd.,  Kailua 

Geo.  McDougal  & Sons,  Kailua 

H.  C.  Achi,  Holualoa 

E.  W.  Barnard,  Laupahoelioe 

J.  M.  Barnard,  Laupahoehoe 

John  Gaspar,  Napoopoo 

Manuel  Sebastian,  Kealakekua 

J.  G.  Henriques,  Kealakekua 

C.  Hooper,  Kauleoli 

J.  Keanu,  Keei 

A.  S.  Cleghorn 

Mrs.  E.  C.  Greenwell 

J.  M.  Monsarrat,  Kolo 

Queen  Emma  Plantation 

L.  M.  Staples  Plantation 

Olaa  Coffee  Co.,  Ltd 

Grossman  Bros 

B.  H.  Brown 

Herman  Eldart 


Newly  1 to  3 year  Trees 
Planted.  old.  in  Bearing. 


2,000  trs. 

2.000  trs. 

5.000  trs. 
10  acres. 

10,000  trs. 
35,947  trs. 
7,500  trs. 
10,000  trs. 
112  acres. 
20,700  trs. 


5 acres. 
3 acres. 


50  acres. 
100  acres. 
2,200  trs. 
40,000  trs. 


4.000  trs 

10,000  trs.  2 acres 

7.000  trs 


100, 000  trs.  30,000  trs. 
4,669  trs.  2,641  trs. 
23,000  trs.  36,000  trs. 
8,5u0  trs.  


25,000  trs.  10,000  trs. 

35  acres 

176  acres.  105  acres. 

10,000  trs. 

30,000  trs. 

5.000  trs.  

33,0(  0 trs.  16,000  trs. 

8,000  trs, 

3,000  trs. 

2 acres.  12  acres. 

10  acres.  16  acres. 

100  acres. 

8 acres.  25  acres. 

38  acres.  40  acres, 

25,000  trs. 

25.000  trs.  12,000  trs. 

90  acres 

30  acres 

2.000  trs.  3,225  trs, 

20.000  trs.  7,000  trs. 


The  list  of  coffee  growers  is  very  long.  That  which  is  of  greater  interest  is 
the  showing  made  of  the  immense  number  of  new  trees.  The  coffee  movement  stead- 
ily gains  force  and  the  pace  of  progress  is  accelerated. 

Everybody  has  not  been  pleased  with  annexation.  The  Japanese  are  not  in  a 
good  humor  about  it.  The  minister  of  Japan  got  his  orders  evidently  to  leave  for 
Japan  when  the  news  arrived  that  the  question  had  been  settled  in  Washington,  and 
he  left  for  Yokohama  by  the  boat  that  brought  the  intelligence.  Japanese  journals 
of  importance  raise  the  question  as  to  the  propriety  of  our  establishing  a coal  sta- 
tion here.  There  is  some  dissatisfaction  among  the  Hawaiians,  who  are  bewildered. 


374 


HAWAII  AS  ANNEXED. 


They  are  children  who  believe  stories  in  proportion  as  they  are  queer.  Many  of 
them  feel  that  they  have  a grievance.  The  young  princess  who  is  the  representative 
of  the  extinguished  monarchy  is  affable  and  respected.  If  the  question  as  to  giv- 
ing her  substantial  recognition  were  left  to  the  Americans  here,  they  would  vote 
for  her  by  a large  majority.  It  would  not  be  bad  policy  for  the  government  to  be 
generous  toward  her.  She  is  not  in  the  same  boat  with  the  ex-Queen.  The  Ameri- 
cans who  have  been  steadfast  in  upholding  the  policy  that  at  last  has  prevailed  are 
happy,  but  not  wildly  so,  just  happy.  Now  that  they  have  gained  their  cause,  their 
unity  will  be  shaken  by  discussions  on  public  questions  and  personal  preferments. 

There  should  be  no  delay  in  understanding  that  in  this  Archipelago  the  race 
questions  forbid  mankind  suffrage,  and  that  our  new  possessions  are  not  to  become 
states  at  once,  or  hurriedly;  that  it  will  take  generations  of  assimilation  to  prepare 
the  Hawaiian  Islands  for  statehood. 

The  objection  to  the  climate  of  the  marvelous  islands  of  which  we  have  be- 
come possessed  is  its  almost  changeless  character.  There  is  no  serious  variation 
in  the  temperature.  There  is  a little  more  rain  in  “winter”  than  in  “summer.” 
There  is  neither  spring  nor  fall.  The  trade  winds  afford  a slight  variety,  and  this 
seems  to  be  manipulated  by  the  mountains,  that  break  up  the  otherwise  unsparing 
monotony  of  serene  loveliness.  The  elevations  of  the  craters,  and  the  jagged 
peaks  are  from  one  thousand  to  thirteen  thousand  feet.  If  you  want  a change  of 
climate,  climb  for  cold,  and  escape  the  mosquitos,  the  pests  of  this  paradise.  There 
are  a score  of  kinds  of  palms;  the  royal,  the  date,  the  cocoanut,  are  of  them.  The 
bread  fruit  and  banana  are  in  competition.  The  vegetation  is  voluptuous  and  the 
scenery  stupendous.  There  is  a constellation  of  islands,  and  they  differ  like  the 
stars  in  their  glories  and  like  human  beings  in  their  difficulties. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 

Captain  James  Cook’s  Great  Discoveries  and  His  Martyrdom — Character  and  Tra- 
ditions of  the  Hawaiian  Islands — Charges  Against  the  Famous  Navigator,  and 
effort  to  Array  the  Christian  World  Against  Him— The  True  Story  of  His 
Life  and  Death — How  Charges  Against  Cook  Came  to  Be  Made — Testimony 
of  Vancouver,  King  and  Dixon,  and  Last  Words  of  Cook’s  Journal — Light 
Turned  on  History  That  Has  Become  Obscure — Savagery  of  the  Natives — 
Their  Written  Language  Took  Up  Their  High  Colored  Traditions,  and  Pre- 
served Phantoms — Scenes  in  Aboriginal  Theatricals — Problem  of  Govern- 
ment in  an  Archipelago  Where  Race  Questions  Are  Predominant — Now 
Americans  Should  Remember  Captain  Cook  as  an  Illustrious  Pioneer. 

Regarding  the  islands  in  the  Pacific  that  we  have  for  a long  time  largely  occu- 
pied and  recently  wholly  possessed,  the  Hawaiian  cluster  that  are  the  stepping 
stone,  the  resting  place  and  the  coal  station  for  the  golden  group  more  than  a thou- 
sand leagues  beyond,  we  should  remember  Captain  Cook  as  one  of  our  own  Western 
pioneers,  rejoice  to  read  his  true  story,  and  in  doing  so  to  form  a correct  estimate 
of  the  people  who  have  drifted  into  the  area  of  our  Protection,  or  territory  that  is 
inalienably  our  own,  to  be  thoroughly  Americanized,  that  they  may  some  day  be 
worthy  to  become  our  fellow-citizens. 

Sunday,  January  18th,  1778,  Captain  Cook,  after  seeing  birds  every  day,  and 
turtles,  saw  two  islands,  and  the  next  day  a third  one,  and  canoes  put  off  from  the 
shore  of  the  second  island,  the  people  speaking  the  language  of  Otaheite.  As  the 
Englishmen  proceeded,  other  canoes  appeared,  bringing  with  them  roasted  pigs  and 
very  fine  potatoes.  The  Captain  says:  “Several  small  pigs  were  purchased  for 

a six-penny  nail,  so  that  we  again  found  ourselves  in  a land  of  plenty.  The  natives 
were  gentle  and  polite,  asking  whether  they  might  sit  down,  whether  they  might 
spit  on  the  deck,  and  the  like.  An  order  restricting  the  men  going  ashore  was 
issued  that  I might  do  everything  in  my  power  to  prevent  the  importation  of  a 
fatal  disease  into  the  island,  which  I knew  some  of  our  men  now  labored  under.” 
Female  visitors  were  ordered  to  be  excluded  from  the  ships.  Captain  Cook’s  journal 
is  very  explicit,  and  he  states  the  particulars  of  the  failure  of  his  precautions.  This 
is  a subject  that  has  been  much  discussed,  and  there  is  still  animosity  in  the  con- 
troversy. The  discovery  of  the  islands  that  he  called  the  Sandwich,  after  his  patron 
the  Earl  of  Sandwich,  happened  in  the  midst  of  our  Revolutionary  war.  After 


875 


376 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


Cook’s  explorations  for  the  time,  he  sailed  in  search  of  the  supposed  Northwest  pass- 
age, and  that  enterprise  appearing  hopeless,  returned  to  the  summer  islands,  and 
met  his  fate  in  the  following  December.  Captain  George  Vancouver,  a friend  and 
follower  of  Cook,  says,  in  his  “Voyage  of  Discovery  and  Around  the  World.”  from 
1790  to  1795: 

“It  should  seem  that  the  reign  of  George  the  Third  had  been  reserved  by  the 
Great  Disposer  of  all  things  for  the  glorious  task  of  establishing  the  grand  key- 
stone to  that  expansive  arch  over  which  the  arts  and  sciences  should  pass  to  the 
furthermost  corners  of  the  earth,  for  the  instruction  and  happiness  of  the  most  lowly 
children  of  nature.  Advantages  so  highly  beneficial  to  the  untutored  parts  of  the 
human  race,  and  so  extremely  important  to  that  large  proportion  of  the  subjects  of 
this  empire  who  are  brought  up  to  the  sea  service  deserve  to  be  justly  appreciated; 
and  it  becomes  of  very  little  importance  to  the  bulk  of  our  society,  whose  enlightened 
humanity  teaches  them  to  entertain  a lively  regard  for  the  welfare  and  interest 
of  those  who  engage  in  such  adventurous  undertakings  for  the  advancement  of 
science,  or  for  the  extension  of  commerce,  what  may  he  the  animadversions  or  sar- 
casms of  those  few  unenlightened  minds  that  may  peevishly  demand,  “what  bene- 
ficial consequences,  if  any,  have  followed,  or  are  likely  to  follow  to  the  discoverers, 
or  to  the  discovered,  to  the  common  interests  of  humanity,  or  to  the  increase  of 
useful  knowledge,  from  all  our  boasted  attempts  to  explore  the  distant  recesses  of  the 
globe?”  The  learned  editor  (Dr.  Douglas,  now  Bishop  of  Salisbury)  who  has  so 
justly  anticipated  this  injudicious  remark,  has,  in  his  very  comprehensive  introduc- 
tion to  Captain  Cook’s  last  voyage,  from  whence  the  above  quotation  is  extracted, 
given  to  the  public  not  only  a complete  and  satisfactory  answer  to  that  question,  but 
has  treated  every  other  part  of  the  subject  of  discovery  so  ably  as  to  render  any  further 
observations  on  former  voyages  of  this  description  wholly  unnecessary,  for  the 
purpose  of  bringing  the  reader  acquainted  with  what  had  been  accomplished,  pre- 
viously to  my  being  honored  with  Ilis  Majesty's  commands  to  follow  up  the  labors 
of  that  Illustrious  navigator  Captain  James  Cook;  to  whose  steady,  uniform,  inde- 
fatigable and  undiverted  attention  to  the  several  objects  on  which  the  success  of  his 
enterprises  ultimately  depended,  the  world  is  indebted  for  such  eminent  and  im- 
portant benefits.” 

Captain  George  Vancouver  pays,  in  the  introduction  of  his  reports,  a remark- 
able tribute  to  Captain  Cook,  that  should  become  familiar  to  the  American  people, 
for  it  is  one  of  the  features  of  prevalent  Hawaiian  literature  that  the  great  navigator 
is  much  disparaged,  and  denounced.  One  of  the  favorite  theories  of  the  missionaries 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


377 


has  been  that  Cook’s  death  at  the  hands  of  the  savages  was  substantially  the  pun- 
ishment inflicted  by  God,  because  the  Captain  allowed  himself  to  he  celebrated  and 
worshipped  as  a god  by  the  heathen,  consenting  to  their  idolatry  when  he  should 
have  preached  to  them,  as  was  done  with  so  much  efficiency  nearly  half  a century 
later.  The  fact  is  the  natives  had  a great  deal  of  “religion”  of  their  own,  and 
defended  their  superstitions  with  skill  and  persistence  before  yielding  to  the  great 
simplicities  of  the  Christian  faith.  Captain  Cook,  it  must  he  admitted,  did  not 
attempt  to  preach  the  gospel.  The  gentleness  of  the  natives  turned  out  to  con- 
tain a great  deal  that  was  most  horrible. 

The  closing  years  of  the  last  century  were  those  of  rapid  progress  in  the  art  of 
navigation,  and  Captain  Vancouver  gives  this  striking  summary  of  testimony: 

“By  the  introduction  of  nautical  astronomy  into  marine  education,  we  are  taught 
to  sail  on  the  hypothenuse,  instead  of  traversing  two  sides  of  a triangle,  which  was 
the  usage  in  earlier  times;  by  this  means  the  circuitous  course  of  all  voyages  from 
place  to  place  is  considerably  shortened;  and  it  is  now  become  evident  that  sea 
officers  of  the  most  common  rate  abilities  Avho  will  take  the  trouble  of  making 
themselves  acquainted  with  the  principles  of  this  science,  will,  on  all  suitable  occa- 
sinos,  with  proper  and  correct  instruments,  he  enabled  to  acquire  a knowledge  of 
their  situation  in  the  Atlantic,  Indian  or  Pacific  Oceans,  wdth  a degree  of  accuracy 
sufficient  to  steer  on  a meridianal  or  diagonal  line,  to  any  known  spot,  provided  it 
be  sufficiently  conspicuous  to  he  visible  at  any  distance  from  five  to  ten  leagues. 

“This  great  improvement,  by  which  the  most  remote  parts  of  the  terrestrial 
globe  are  brought  so  sasily  within  our  reach,  would  nevertheless  have  been  of  com- 
paratively little  utility  had  not  those  happy  means  been  discovered  for  preserving  the 
lives  and  health  of  the  officers  and  seamen  engaged  in  such  distant  and  perilous 
undertakings;  which  were  so  peacefully  practiced  by  Captain  Cook,  the  first  great 
discoverer  of  this  salutary  system,  in  all  his  latter  voyages  around  the  globe.  But 
in  none  have  the  effect  of  his  wise  regulations,  regimen  and  discipline  been  more 
manifest  than  in  the  course  of  the  expedition  of  which  the  following  pages  are 
designed  to  treat.  To  an  unremitting  attention,  not  only  to  food,  cleanliness,  ven- 
tilation, and  an  early  administration  of  antiseptic  provisions  and  medicines,  but 
also  to  prevent  as  much  as  possible  the  chance  of  indisposition,  by  prohibiting  indi- 
viduals from  carelessly  exposing  themselves  to  the  influence  of  climate,  or  unhealthy 
indulgences  in  times  of  relaxation,  and  by  relieving  them  from  fatigue  and  the 
inclemency  of  the  weather  the  moment  the  nature  of  their  duty  would  permit  them 
to  retire,  is  to  be  ascribed  the  preservation  of  the  health  and  lives  of  sea-faring  peo- 
ple on  long  voyages.” 


378 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


“Those  benefits  did  not  long  remain  unnoticed  by  the  commercial  part  of  the 
British  nation.  Remote  and  distant  voyages  being  now  no  longer  objects  of  terror, 
enterprises  were  projected  and  carried  into  execution,  for  the  purpose  of  establishing 
new  and  lucrative  branches  of  commerce  between  Northwest  America  and  China; 
and  parts  of  the  coast  of  the  former  that  had  not  been  minutely  examined  by  Cap- 
tain Cook  became  now  the  general  resort  of  the  persons  thus  engaged.” 

The  special  zeal  and  consistency  with  which  Cook  is  defended  by  the  English 
navigators  who  knew  him  and  were  competent  to  judge  of  the  scope  of  bis  achieve- 
ments is  due  in  part  to  the  venom  of  bis  assailants.  The  historian  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands,  Sheldon  Dibble,  says:  “An  impression  of  wonder  and  dread  having  been 
made,  Captain  Cook  and  his  men  found  little  difficulty  in  having  such  intercourse 
with  the  people  as  they  chose.  In  regard  to  that  intercourse,  it  was  marked,  as  the 
world  would  say,  with  kindness  and  humanity.  But  it  cannot  be  concealed  that  here 
and  there  at  this  time,  in  the  form  of  loathsome  disease,  was  dug  the  grave  of  the 
Hawaiian  nation;  and  from  so  deep  an  odium  it  is  to  be  regretted  that  faithful  his- 
tory cannot  exempt  even  the  fair  name  of  Captain  Cook  himself,  since  it  was  evident 
that  he  gave  countenance  to  the  evil.  The  native  female  first  presented  to  him  was 
a person  of  some  rank;  her  name  was  Lelemahoalani.  Sin  and  death  were  the 
first  commodities  imported  to  the  Sandwich  Islands.” 

We  have  already  quoted  Captain  Cook’s  first  words  on  this  subject.  He  had  much 
more  to  say  giving  in  detail  difficulties  rather  too  searching  to  be  fully  stated.  As  for 
the  charge  that  Cook  personally  engaged  in  debauchery,  it  rests  upon  the  tradition 
of  savages,  who  had  no  more  idea  than  wild  animals  of  the  restraint  of  human  pas- 
sion. It  was  debated  among  the  islanders  whether  the  white  men  should  be  as- 
sailed by  the  warriors,  and  it  was  on  the  advice  of  a native  queen  that  the  women 

were  sent  to  make  friends  with  the  strangers;  and  this  was  the  policy  pursued.  As 
for  the  decline  of  the  natives  in  numbers,  and  the  “digging  the  grave  of  the  na- 
tion,” the  horror  of  the  islands  was  the  destruction  of  female  infants,  and  also  the 
habit  of  putting  aged  and  helpless  men  and  women  to  death.  The  general  indict- 
ment against  Captain  Cook  is  that  this  amiable  race  was  just  about  prepared  for 
Christianity  when  he  thrust  himself  forward  as  a god.  and  with  his  despotic  licen- 
tiousness destroyed  immediate  possibilities  of  progress.  In  Sandwich  Island  notes 
by  “a  Haole”  (that  is  to  say,  a white  person)  we  see  what  may  be  said  on  the  other 
side  of  the  picture:  “It  becomes  an  interesting  duty  to  examine  their  social,  po- 
litical and  religious  condition.  The  first  feature  that  calls  the  attention  to  the 

past  is  their  social  condition,  and  a darker  picture  can  hardly  be  presented  to  the 

contemplation  of  man.  They  had  their  frequent  boxing  matches  on  a public  arena, 


OF  THE  SANDV 


/ 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


379 


and  it  was  nothing  uncommon  to  see  thirty  or  forty  left  dead  on  the  field  of  con- 
test. 

“As  gamblers  they  were  inveterate.  The  game  was  indulged  in  by  every  per- 
son, from  the  king  of  each  island  to  the  meanest  of  his  subjects.  The  wager  ac- 
companied every  scene  of  public  amusement.  They  gambled  away  their  property  to 
the  last  vestige  of  all  they  possessed.  They  staked  every  article  of  food,  their  grow- 
ing crops,  the  clothes  they  wore,  their  lands,  wives,  daughters,  and  even  the  very 
bones  of  their  arms  and  legs — to  be  made  into  fishhooks  after  they  were  dead. 
These  steps  led  to  the  most  absolute  and  crushing  poverty. 

“They  had  their  dances,  which  were  of  such  a character  as  not  to  be  conceived 
by  a civilized  mind,  and  were  accompanied  by  scenes  which  would  have  disgraced 
even  Nero’s  revels.  Nearly  every  night,  with  the  gathering  darkness,  crowds  would 
retire  to  some  favorite  spot,  where,  amid  every  species  of  sensual  indulgence  they 
would  revel  until  the  morning  twilight.  At  such  times  the  chiefs  would  lay  aside 
their  authority,  and  mingle  with  the  lowest  courtesan  in  every  degree  of  debauchery. 

“Thefts,  robberies,  murders,  infanticide,  licentiousness  of  the  most  debased  and 
debasing  character,  burying  their  infirm  and  aged  parents  alive,  desertion  of  the 
sick,  revolting  cruelties  to  the  unfortunate  maniac,  cannibalism  and  drunkenness, 
form  a list  of  some  of  the  traits  in  social  life  among  the  Llawaiians  in  past  days. 

“Their  drunkenness  was  intense.  They  could  prepare  a drink,  deadly  intoxicat- 
ing in  its  nature,  from  a mountain  plant  called  the  awa  (Piper  methysticum).  A 
bowl  of  this  disgusting  liquid  was  always  prepared  and  served  out  just  as  a party  of 
chiefs  were  sitting  down  to  their  meals.  It  would  sometimes  send  the  victim  into 
a slumber  from  which  he  never  awoke.  The  confirmed  awa  drinker  could  be  imme- 
diately recognized  by  his  leprous  appearance. 

“By  far  the  darkest  feature  in  their  social  condition  was  seen  in  the  family  rela- 
tion. Society,  however,  is  only  a word  of  mere  accommodation,  designed  to  express 
domestic  relations  as  they  then  existed.  ‘Society’  was,  indeed,  such  a sea  of  pollution 
as  cannot  be  well  described.  Marriage  was  unknown,  and  all  the  sacred  feelings 
which  are  suggested  to  our  minds  on  mention  of  the  various  social  relations,  such 
as  husband  and  wife,  parent  and  child,  brother  and  sister,  were  to  them,  indeed, 
as  though  they  had  no  existence.  There  was,  indeed,  in  this  respect,  a dreary  blank 
- — a dark  chasm  from  which  the  soul  instinctively  recoils.  There  were,  perhaps, 
some  customs  which  imposed  some  little  restraint  upon  the  intercourse  of  the  sexes, 
but  those  customs  were  easily  dispensed  with,  and  had  nothing  of  the  force  of  estab- 
lished rules.  It  was  common  for  a husband  to  have  many  wives,  and  for  a wife  also 
to  have  many  husbands.  The  nearest  ties  of  consanguinity  were  but  little  regarded, 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


380 

and  among  the  chiefs,  especiall}r,  the  connection  of  brother  with  sister,  and  parent 
with  child,  were  very  common.  For  husbands  to  interchange  wives,  and  for  wives 
to  interchange  husbands,  was  a common  act  of  friendship,  and  persons  who  would 
not  do  this  were  not  considered  on  good  terms  of  sociability.  For  a man  or  woman 
to  refuse  a solicitation  was  considered  an  act  of  meanness;  and  this  sentiment  was 
thoroughly  wrought  into  their  minds,  that,  they  seemed  not  to  rid  themselves  of 
the  feeling  of  meanness  in  a refusal,  to  feel,  notwithstanding  their  better  knowledge, 
that  to  comply  was  generous,  liberal,  and  social,  and  to.  refuse  reproachful  and  nig- 
gardly. It  would  he  impossible  to  enumerate  or  specify  the  crimes  which  emanated 
from  this  state  of  affairs.  Their  political  condition  was  the  very  genius  of  despotism, 
systematically  and  deliberately  conducted.  Kings  and  chiefs  were  extremely  jealous 
of  their  succession,  and  the  more  noble  their  blood,  the  more  they  were  venerated 
by  the  common  people.” 

Mr.  Sheldon  Dibble  is  a historian  whose  work  was  published  in  1843.  He  com- 
plains most  bitterly  that  the  natives  bothered  the  missionaries  by  trying  to  give 
them  the  benefit  of  native  thought.  They  wanted  to  do  some  of  the  talking,  and 
said  very  childish  things,  and  were  so  intent  on  their  own  thoughts  that  they  would 
not  listen  to  the  preachers.  But  it  ought  not  fo  have  been  held  to  be  an  offense  for 
a procession  of  heathen  to  march  to  a missionary’s  house  and  tell  him  their  thoughts. 
That  was  an  honest  manifestation  of  profound  interest — the  slow  ripening  of  a 
harvest  field.  Mr.  Dibble’s  book  is  printed  bv  the  Mission  Seminary,  and  Mr.  Dib- 
ble says,  page  21:  “We  know  that  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  descended  from 
Noah,”  therefore,  the  Hawaiians  “must  once  have  known  the  great  Jehova  and 
the  principles  of  true  religion.”  But  the  historian  says  on  the  next  page  that  the 
Hawaiians  were  heathen  from  time  immemorial,  for,  “Go  back  to  the  very  first  re- 
puted progenitor  of  the  Hawaiian  race,  and  you  find  that  the  ingredients  of  their 
character  are  lust,  anger,  strife,  malice,  sensuality,  revenge  and  the  worship  of  idols.” 
This  is  the  elevation  upon  which  Mr.  Dibble  places  himself  to  fire  upon  the  memory 
of  the  English  navigator  Captain  James  Cook.  The  first  paragraph  of  the  assault 
on  Cook  is  this: 

“How  unbounded  the  influence  of  foreign  visitors  upon  the  ignorant  inhabitants 
of  the  Pacific!  If  the  thousands  of  our  countrymen  who  visit  this  ocean  were  actu- 
ated by  the  pure  principles  of  the  religion  of  Jesus,  how  immense  the  good  they 
might  accomplish!  But,  alas!  how  few  visitors  to  the  Western  hemisphere  are 
actuated  by  such  principles.” 

This  is  preparatory  to  the  condemnation  of  Cook  in  these  terms:  “Captain 

Cook  allowed  himself  to  be  worshipped  as  a god.  The  people  of  Ivealakcakua  de- 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


381 


elined  trading  with  him,  and  loaded  his  ship  freely  with  the  best  productions  of 
the  island.  The  priests  approached  him  in  a crouching  attitude,  uttering  prayers, 
and  exhibiting  all  the  formalities  of  worship.  After  approaching  him  with  prostra- 
tion the  priests  cast  their  red  kapas  over  his  shoulders  and  then  receding  a little,  they 
presented  hogs  and  a variety  of  other  offerings,  with  long  addresses  rapidly  enun- 
ciated, which  were  a repetition  of  their  prayers  and  religious  homage. 

“When  he  went  on  shore  most  of  the  people  fled  for  fear  of  him,  and  others 
bowed  down  before  him,  with  solemn  reverence.  He  was  conducted  to  the  house 
of  the  gods,  and  into  the  sacred  enclosure,  and  received  there  the  highest  homage. 
In  view  of  this  fact,  and  of  the  death  of  Captain  Cook,  which  speedily  ensued,  who 
can  fail  being  admonished  to  give  to  God  at  all  times,  and  even  among  barbarous 
tribes,  the  glory  which  is  his  due?  Captain  Cook  might  have  directed  the  rude  and 
ignorant  natives  to  the  great  Jehovah,  instead  of  receiving  divine  homage  himself. 

“Kalaniopuu,  the  king,  arrived  from  Maui  on  the  24th  of  January,  and  imme- 
diately laid  a tabu  on  the  canoes,  which  prevented  the  women  from  visiting  the 
ship,  and  consequently  the  men  came  on  shore  In  great  numbers,  gratifying  their 
infamous  purposes  in  exchange  for  pieces  of  iron  and  small  looking-glasses.  Some 
of  the  women  washed  the  coating  from  the  back  of  the  glasses  much  to  their  regret, 
when  they  found  that  the  reflecting  property  was  thus  destroyed. 

“The  king,  on  his  arrival,  as  well  as  the  people,  treated  Captain  Cook  with  much 
kindness,  gave  him  feather  cloaks  and  fly  brushes  and  paid  him  divine  honors. 
This  adoration,  it  is  painful  to  relate,  was  received  without  remonstrance.  I shall 
speak  here  somewhat  minutely  of  the  death  of  Captain  Cook,  as  it  develops  some 
traits  of  the  heathen  character,  and  the  influence  under  which  the  heathen  suffer 
from  foreign  intercourse.” 

After  setting  forth  the  horrible  character  of  the  natives,  Captain  Cook  is  con- 
demned and  denounced  because  he  did  not  refuse  the  homage  of  the  ferocious  savages, 
paid  him  as  a superior  creature.  One  of  Cook’s  troubles  was  the  frantic  passion 
the  islanders  had  to  steal  iron.  The  common  people  were  the  property  of  the  chiefs, 
and  they  had  no  other  sense  of  possession.  They  gave  away  what  they  had,  but  took 
what  they  wanted. 

Mr.  Dibble  shows  his  animus  when  he  charges  that  Cook  did  not  give  the  natives 
the  real  value  of  their  hogs  and  fruit,  and  also  that  he  had  no  right  to  stop  pilferers 
in  canoes  by  declaring  and  enforcing  a blockade.  This  is  a trifling  technicality 
much  insisted  upon.  Dibble’s  account  of  the  death  of  Cook  is  this: 

“A  canoe  came  from  an  adjoining  district,  hound  within  the  bay.  In  the  canoe 
were  two  chiefs  of  some  rank,  Ivekuhaupio  and  Kalimu.  The  canoe  was  fired  upon 


3b2 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


from  one  of  the  boats  and  Kalimu  was  killed.  Kekuhaupio  made  the  greatest  speed 
fill  he  reached  the  place  of  the  king,  where  Captain  Cook  also  was,  and  communi- 
cated the  intelligence  of  fhe  death  of  the  chief.  The  attendants  of  the  king  were 
enraged  and  showed  signs  of  hostility,  but  were  restrained  by  the  thought  that 
Captain  Cook  was  a god.  At  that  instant  a warrior,  with  a spear  in  his  hand,  ap- 
proached Captain  Cook  and  was  heard  to  say  that  the  boats  in  the  harbor  had 
killed  his  brother,  and  he  would  be  revenged.  Captain  Cook,  from  his  enraged 
appearance  and  that  of  the  multitude,  was  suspicious  of  him,  and  fired  upon  him 
with  his  pistol.  Then  followed  a scene  of  confusion,  and  in  the  midst  Captain  Cook 
being  hit  with  a stone,  and  perceiving  the  man  who  threw  it,  shot  him  dead.  He  also 
struck  a certain  chief  with  his  sword,  whose  name  was  Kalaimanokahoowalia.  The 
chief  instantly  seized  Captain  Cook  with  a strong  hand,  designing  merely  to  hold 
him  and  not  to  take  his  life;  for  he  supposed  him  to  be  a god  and  that  lie  could  not 
die.  Captain  Cook  struggled  to  free  himself  from  the  grasp,  and  as  he  was  about 
to  fall  uttered  a groan.  The  people  immediately  exclaimed,  “He  groans — he  is  not 
a god,”  and  instantly  slew  him.  Such  was  the  melancholy  death  of  Captain  Cook. 

“Immediately  the  men  in  the  boat  commenced  a deliberate  fire  upon  the  crowd. 
They  had  refrained  in  a measure  before,  for  fear  of  killing  their  Captain.  Many  of 
the  natives  were  killed.” 

“Historian  Dibble  does  not  notice  the  evidence  that  Cook  lost  his  life  by  turning 
to  his  men  in  the  boats,  ordering  them  not  to  fire.  It  was  at  that  moment  he  was 
stabbed  in  the  back.  Dibble  represents  the  facts  as  if  to  justify  the  massacre  of  the 
great  navigator,  because  he  allowed  the  heathen  to  think  he  was  one  of  their  gang  of 
gods.  But  this  presumption  ought  not  to  have  been  allowed  to  excuse  prevarica- 
tion about  testimony.  The  importance  of  Dibble’s  history  is  that  it  is  representa- 
tive. He  concludes  with  this  eloquent  passage:  “From  one  heathen  nation  we 

may  learn  in  a measure  the  wants  of  all.  And  we  ought  not_  to  restrict  our  view, 
but,  look  at  the  wide  world.  To  do  then  for  all  nations  what  I have  urged  in  be- 
half of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  how  great  and  extensive  a work!  How  vast  the  num- 
ber of  men  and  how  immense  fhe  amount  of  means  which  seem  necessary  to  elevate 
all  nations,  and  gain  over  the  whole  earth  to  the  permanent  dominion  of  the  Lord 
Jesus  Christ!  Can  300,000,000  of  pagan  children  and  youth  be  trained  and  in- 
structed by  a few  hands?  Can  the  means  of  instructing  them  be  furnished  by  the 
mere  farthings  and  pence  of  the  church?  Will  it  not  be  some  time  yet  before  minis- 
ters and  church  members  will  need  to  be  idle  a moment  for  the  want  of  work?  I? 
there  any  danger  of  our  being  cut  off  from  the  blessed  privilege  either  of  giving  or 
of  going?  There  is  a great  work  yet  to  be  done — a noble  work — a various  and  a 


HU.WA  WALL 

5EPT.>,,e9S: 


INTERIOR  IN  PALACE 
'MANILLA,  SEPT, 1398. 


: QF  OLD  MANILLA  wfcyy 

AUG.  1398.  / 


4Lv  ^n0«- 


'WfyS 

n 

Ft 

i 1 i 
M 

Ii;i 

1 1 1 

i 

t 

! 

VIEWS  IN  MANILA,  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS 


SOLO  ICRS  WASHING  >♦. 
THEIR  PERSONS  ANP 


CANAL  SCENE  IN  NUEVA,  MANILA 


VIEW'S  IN  MANILA,  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OP  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


385 


difficult  work — a work  worthy  of  God’s  power,  God’s  resources,  and  God’s  wisdom. 
What  Christendom  has  as  yet  done  is  scarcely  worthy  of  being  called  a commence- 
ment. When  God  shall  bring  such  energies  into  action  as  shall  be  commensurate 
with  the  greatness  of  the  work — when  he  shall  cause  every  redeemed  sinner,  by 
the  abundant  influence  of  His  Holy  Spirit,  to  lay  himself  out  wholly  in  the  great 
enterprise,  then  there  will  be  a sight  of  moral  sublimity  that  shall  rivet  the  gaze  of 
angels.” 

We  quote  this  writer  as  to  what  became  of  the  remains  of  Cook:  “The  body  of 
Captain  Cook  was  carried  into  the  interior  of  the  island,  the  bones  secured  accord- 
ing to  their  custom,  and  the  flesh  burned  in  the  fire.  The  heart,  liver,  etc.,  of  Cap- 
tain Cook,  were  stolen  and  eaten  by  some  hungry  children,  who  mistook  them  in  the 
night  for  the  inwards  of  a dog.  The  names  of  the  children  were  Ivupa,  Mohoole  and 
Kaiwikokoole.  These  men  are  now  all  dead.  The  last  of  the  number  died  two 
years  since  at  the  station  of  Lahaina.  Some  of  the  bones  of  Captain  Cook  were 
sent  on  board  his  ship,  in  compliance  with  the  urgent  demands  of  the  officers;  and 
some  were  kept  by  the  priests  as  objects  of  worship.”  The  “heart,  liver,  etc.,”  were 
of  course  given  to  the  children  to  eat!  The  bones  are  still  hidden,  and  presumably 
not  much  worshiped.  The  first  of  the  remains  of  Captain  Cook  given  up  was  a 
mass  of  his  bloody  flesh,  cut  as  if  from  a slaughtered  ox.  After  some  time  there 
were  other  fragments,  including  one  of  his  hands  which  had  a well  known  scar, 
and  perfectly  identified  it.  Along  with  this  came  the  story  of  burning  flesh,  and 
denials  of  cannibalism.  Mr.  Dibble  speaks  of  Cook’s  “consummate  folly  and  out- 
rageous tyranny  of  placing  a blockade  upon  a heathen  bay,  which  the  natives  could 
not  possibly  be  supposed  either  to  understand  or  appreciate.”  That  blockade,  like 
others,  was  understood  when  enforced.  The  historian  labors  to  work  out  a case  to 
justify  the  murder  of  Cook  because  he  received  worship.  As  to  the  acknowledgment 
of  Cook  as  the  incarnation  of  Lono,  in  the  Hawaiian  Pantheon,  Captain  King  says: 
“Before  I proceed  to  relate  the  adoration  that  was  paid  to  Captain  Cook,  and  the 
peculiar  ceremonies  with  which  he  was  received  on  this  fatal  island,  it  will  be  nec- 
essary to  describe  the  Moral,  situated,  as  I have  already  mentioned,  at  the  south 
side  of  the  beach  at  Ivakooa  (Kealakeakua).  It  'was  a square  solid  pile  of  stones, 
about  forty  yards  long,  twenty  broad,  and  fourteen  in  height.  The  top  was  flat  and 
well  paved,  and  surrounded  by  a wooden  rail,  on  which  were  fixed  the  skulls  of  the 
captives  sacrificed  on  the  death  of  their  chiefs.  In  the  center  of  the  area  stood  a ruin- 
ous old  building  of  wood,  connected  with  the  rail  on  each  side  by  a stone  wall, 
which  next  divided  the  whole  space  into  two  parts.  On  the  side  next  the  country 
were  five  polos,  upward  of  twenty  feet  high,  supporting  an  irregular  kind  of  scaffold; 


386 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


on  the  opposite  side  toward  the  sea,  stood  two  small  houses  with  a covered  communi- 
cation. 

“We  were  conducted  by  Koah  to  the  top  of  this  pile  by  an  easy  ascent  leading 
from  the  beach  to  the  northwest  corner  of  the  area.  At  the  entrance  we  saw  two 
large  wooden  images,  with  features  violently  distorted,  and  a long  piece  of  carved 
wood  of  a conical  form  inverted,  rising  from  the  top  of  their  heads;  the  rest  was 
without  form  and  wrapped  round  with  red  cloth.  We  were  here  met  by  a tall  young 
man  with  a long  beard,  who  presented  Captain  Cook  fo  the  images,  and  after  chanting 
a kind  of  hymn,  in  which  he  was  joined  by  Ivoah,  they  led  us  to  that  end  of  the 
Morai  where  the  five  poles  were  fixed.  At  the  foot  of  them  were  twelve  images 
ranged  in  a semicircular  form,  and  before  the  middle  figure  stood  a high  stand  or 
table,  exactly  resembling  the  Whatta  of  Othaheiti,  on  which  lay  a putrid  hog,  and 
under  it  pieces  of  sugar  cane,  cocoanuts,  bread  fruit,  plantains  and  sweet  potatoes. 
Koah  having  placed  the  Captain  under  the  stand,  took  down  the  hog  and  held  it 
toward  him;  and  after  having  a second  time  addressed  him  in  a long  speech,  pro- 
nounced with  much  vehemence  and  rapidity,  he  let  it  fall  on  the  ground  and  led 
him  to  the  scaffolding,  which  they  began  to  climb  together,  not  without  great  risk  of 
falling.  At  this  time  we  saw  coming  in  solemn  procession,  at  the  entrance  of  the  top 
of  the  Morai,  ten  men  carrying  a live  hog  and  a large  piece  of  red  cloth.  Being 
advanced  a few  paces,  they  stopped  and  prostrated  themselves;  and  Kaireekeea,  the 
young  man  above  mentioned,  went  to  them,  and  receiving  the  cloth  carried  it  to 
Koah,  who  wrapped  it  around  the  Captain,  and  afterwards  offered  him  the  hog, 
which  was  brought  by  Kaireekeea  with  the  same  ceremony. 

“Whilst  Captain  Cook  was  aloft  in  this  awkward  situation,  swathed  round  with 
red  cloth,  and  with  difficulty  keeping  his  hold  amongst  the  pieces  of  rotten  scaf- 
folding, Kaireekeea  and  Koah  began  their  office,  chanting  sometimes  in  concert  and 
sometimes  alternately.  This  lasted  a considerable  time;  at  length  Koah  let  the 
hog  drop,  when  he  and  the  Captain  descended  together.  He  then  led  him  to  the 
images  before  mentioned,  and,  having  said  something  to  each  in  a sneering  tone, 
snapping  his  fingers  at  them  as  he  passed,  he  brought  him  to  that  in  the  center, 
which,  from  its  being  covered  with  red  cloth,  appeared  to  be  in  greater  estimation 
than  the  rest.  Before  this  figure  he  prostrated  himself  and  kissed  it,  desiring  Cap- 
tain Cook  to  do  the  same,  who  suffered  himself  to  be  directed  by  Koah  throughout 
the  whole  of  this  ceremony. 

“We  were  now  led  back  to  the  other  division  of  the  Morai,  where  there  was  a 
space  ten  or  twelve  feet  square,  sunk  about  three  feet  below  the  level  of  the  area. 
Into  this  we  descended,  and  Captain  Cook  was  seated  between  cwo  wooden  idols, 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


387 


Koah  supporting  one  of  his  arms,  whilst  I was  desired  to  support  the  other.  At 
this  time  arrived  a second  procession  of  natives,  carrying  a baked  hog  and  a pudding, 
some  bread  fruit,  cocoanuts  and  other  vegetables.  When  they  approached  us  Kai- 
reekeea  put  himself  at  their  head,  and  presenting  the  pig  to  Captain  Cook  in  the 
usual  manner,  began  the  same  kind  of  chant  as  before,  his  companions  making 
regular  responses.  We  observed  that  after  every  response  their  parts  became  grad- 
ually shorter,  till,  toward  the  close,  Ivaireekeea’s  consisted  of  only  two  or  three 
words,  while  the  rest  answered  by  the  word  Orono. 

“When  this  offering  was  concluded,  which  lasted  a quarter  of  an  hour,  the  na- 
tives sat  down  fronting  us,  and  began  to  cut  up  the  baked  hog,  to  peel  the  vegetables 
and  break  the  cocoanuts;  whilst  others  employed  themselves  in  brewing  the  awa, 
which  is  done  by  chewing  it  in  the  same  manner  as  at  the  Friendly  Islands.  Ivairee- 
keea  then  took  part  of  the  kernel  of  a cocoanut,  which  he  chewed,  and  wrapping 
it  in  a piece  of  cloth,  rubbed  with  it  the  Captain’s  face,  head,  hands,  arms  and  shoul- 
ders. The  awa  was  then  handed  around,  and  after  we  had  tasted  it  Ivoah  and 
Pareea  began  to  pull  the  flesh  of  the  hog  in  pieces  and  put  it  into  our  mouths.  I had 
no  great  objection  to  being  fed  by  Pareea,  who  was  very  cleanly  in  his  person,  but 
Captain  Cook,  who  was  served  by  Koah,  recollecting  the  putrid  hog,  could  not 
swallow  a morsel;  and  his  reluctance,  as  may  be  supposed,  was  not  diminished  when 
the  old  man,  according  to  his  own  mode  of  civility  had  chewed  it  for  him. 

“When  this  ceremony  was  finished,  which  Captain  Cook  put  an  end  to  as  soon  as 
he  decently  could,  we  quitted  the  Moral.” 

Evidently  the  whole  purpose  of  Captain  Cook  in  permitting  this  performance, 
was  to  flatter  and  gratify  the  natives  and  make  himself  strong  to  command  them. 
The  Captain  himself  was  sickened,  and  got  away  as  quickly  as  he  could  without 
giving  offense.  This  was  not  the  only  case  in  which  the  native  priests  presented  the 
navigator  as  a superior  being.  Perhaps  the  view  the  old  sailor  took  of  the  style 
of  ceremony  was  as  there  were  so  many  gods,  one  more  or  less  did  not  matter.  Cook 
never  attached  importance  to  the  freaks  of  superstition,  except  so  far  as  it  might  be 
made  useful  in  keeping  the  bloody  and  beastly  savages  in  check.  Bearing  upon 
this  point  we  quote  W.  D.  Alexander’s  “Brief  History  of  the  Hawaiian  People,” 
pages  33-34: 

“Infanticide  was  fearfully  prevalent,  and  there  were  few  of  the  older  women 
at  the  date  of  the  abolition  of  idolatry  who  had  not  been  guilty  of  it.  It  was  the 
opinion  of  those  best  informed  that  two-thirds  of  all  the  children  born  were  de- 
stroyed in  infancy  by  their  parents.  They  were  generally  buried  alive,  in  many  cases 
in  the  very  houses  occupied  by  their  unnatural  parents.  On  all  the  islands  the  mini- 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


388 

ber  of  males  was  much  greater  than  that  of  females,  in  consequence  of  the  girls 
being  more  frequently  destroyed  than  the  hoys.  The  principal  reason  given  for  it 
was  laziness — unwillingness  to  take  the  trouble  of  rearing  children.  It  was  a very 
common  practice  for  parents  to  give  away  their  children  to  any  persons  who  were 
willing  to  adopt  them. 

“No  regular  parental  discipline  was  maintained,  and  the  children  were  too  often 
left  to  follow  their  own  inclinations  and  to  become  familiar  with  the  lowest  vices. 

“Neglect  of  the  helpless.  Among  the  common  people  old  age  was  despised.  The 
sick  and  those  who  had  become  helpless  from  age  were  sometimes  abandoned  to  die 
or  put  to  death.  Insane  people  were  also  sometimes  stoned  to  death.” 

Again  we  quote  Alexander’s  History',  page  49: 

“Several  kinds  of  food  were  forbidden  to  the  women  on  pain  of  death,  viz., 
pork,  bananas,  cocoanuts,  turtles,  and  certain  kinds  of  fish,  as  the  ulua,  the  liumu, 
the  shark,  the  hihimanu  or  sting-ray,  etc.  The  men  of  the  poorer  class  often  formed 
a sort  of  eating  club  apart  from  their  wives.  These  laws  were  rigorously  enforced. 
At  llonaunau,  Hawaii,  two  young  girls  of  the  highest  rank,  Kapiolani  and  Iveoua, 
having  been  detected  in  the  act  of  eating  a banana,  their  kahu,  or  tutor,  was  held  re- 
sponsible, and  put  to  death  by  drowning.  Shortly  before  the  abolition  of  the  tabus, 
a little  child  had  one  of  her  eyes  scooped  out  for  the  same  offense.  About  the  same 
time  a woman  was  put  to  death  for  entering  the  eating  hquse  of  her  husband,  al- 
though she  was  tipsy  at  the  time.” 

Captain  Cook  seems  to  have  committed  the  unpardonable  sin  in  not  beginning 
the  stated  work  of  preaching  the  gospel  a long  generation  before  the  missionaries 
arrived,  and  the  only  sound  reason  for  this  is  found  in  Dibble’s  Historv,  in  his  state- 
ment that  the  islanders  steadily  degenerated  until  Flic  missions  were  organized. 

Writers  of  good  repute,  A.  Fornander,  chief  of  them,  are  severe  with  Captain 
Cook  on  account  of  his  alleged  greed,  not  paying  enough  for  the  red  feathers  woven 
into  fanciful  forms.  Perhaps  that  is  a common  fault  in  the  transactions  of  civilized 
men  with  barbarians.  William  Tcnn  is  the  only  man  with  a great  reputation  for 
dealing  fairly  with  American  Red  Men,  and  he  was  not  impoverished  by  it.  Cook 
gave  nails  for  hogs,  and  that  is  mentioned  in  phrases  that  are  malicious.  Iron  was 
to  the  islanders  the  precious  metal,  and  they  were  not  cheated.  A long  drawn  out 
effort  has  been  made  to  impress  the  world  that  Cook  thought  himself  almost  a god,  and 
was  a monster.  The  natives  gave  to  the  wonderful  people  who  came  to  them  in  ships, 
liberally  of  their  plenty,  and  received  in  return  presents  that  pleased  them,  articles 
of  utility.  Beads  came  along  at  a later  day.  The  natives  believed  Cook  one  of 
tpe  heroes  of  the  imagination  that  they  called  gods.  He  sought  to  propitiate  them 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWTC'H  ISLANDS. 


389 


and  paid  for  fruit  and  meat  in  iron  and  showy  trifles.  His  policy  of  progress  was  to 
introduce  domestic  animals. 

Note  the  temper  of  Mr.  Abraham  Fornander,  a man  who  has  meant  honesty  of 
statement,  but  whose  information  was  j)erverted: 

“And  how  did  Captain  Cook  requite  this  boundless  hospitality,  that  never  once 
made  default  during  his  long  stay  of  seventeen  days  in  Ivealakeakua,  these  mag- 
nificent presents  o f immense  value,  this  delicate  and  spontaneous  attention  to  every 
want,  this  friendship  of  the  chiefs  and  priests,  this  friendliness  of  the  common 
people?  By  imposing  on  their  good  nature  to  the  utmost  limit  of  its  ability  to  re* 
spond  to  the  greedy  and  constant  calls  of  their  new  friends;  by  shooting  at  one  of 
the  king’s  officers  for  endeavoring  to  enforce  a law  of  the  land,  an  edict  of  his 
sovereign  that  happened  to  be  unpalatable  to  the  new  comers,  and  caused  them 
some  temporary  inconvenience,  after  a week’s  profusion  and  unbridled  license; 
by  a liberal  exhibition  of  his  force  and  the»meanest  display  of  his  bounty;  by  giving 
the  king  a linen  shirt  and  a cutlass  in  return  for  feather  cloaks  and  helmets,  which, 
irrespective  of  their  value  as  insignia  of  the  highest  nobility  in  the  land,  were  worth 
singly  at  least  from  five  to  ten  thousand  dollars,  at  present  price  of  the  feathers, 
not  counting  the  cost  of  manufacturing;  by  a reckless  disregard  of  the  proprieties 
of  ordinary  intercourse,  even  between  civilized  and  savage  man,  and  a wanton  insult 
to  what  he  reasonably  may  have  supposed  to  have  been  the  religious  sentiments 
of  his  hosts.”  This  is  up  to  the  mark  of  a criminal  lawyer  retained  to  prove  by 
native  testimony  that  Captain  James  Cook  was  not  murdered,  but  executed  for  cause. 
The  great  crime  of  Cook  is  up  to  this  point  that  of  playing  that  he  was  one  of  the 
Polynesian  gods.  Fornander  says:  “When  the  sailors  carried  off,  not  only  the  rail- 
ing of  the  temple,  but  also  the  idols  of  the  gods  within  it,  even  the  large-hearted 
patience  of  Ivaoo  gave  up,  and  he  meekly  requested  that  the  central  idol  at  least 
might  be  restored.  Captain  Iving  failed  to  perceive  that  the  concession  of  the 
priests  was  that  of  a devotee  to  his  saint.  The  priests  would  not  sell  their  religioup 
emblems  and  belongings  for  “thirty  pieces  of  silver,”  or  any  remuneration,  but  they 
were  willing  to  offer  up  the  entire  Ileiau,  and  themselves  on  the  top  of  it,  as  a 
holocaust  to  Lono,  if  he  had  requested  it.  So  long  as  Cook  was  regarded  as  a god 
in  their  eyes  they  could  not  refuse  him.  And  though  they  exhibited  no  resentment 
at  the  request,  the  want  of  delicacy  and  consideration  on  the  part  of  Captain  Cook 
is  none  the  less  glaring.  After  his  death,  and  when  the  illusion  of  godship  had  sub- 
sided, his  spoliation  of  the  very  Ileiau  in  which  he  had  been  deified  was  not  oe« 
of  the  least  of  the  grievances  which  native  annalists  laid  up  against  him.'’ 


890 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


Contrast  this  flagraney  in  advocacy  of  the  cause  of  the  barbarous  natives  with 
the  last  words  Cook  wrote  in  his  journal.  We  quote  from  “A  Voyage  to  the 
Pacific  Ocean/’  by  Captain  James  Cook,  F.  R.  S.,  (Vol.  II.,  pages  251-252): 

“As  it  was  of  the  last  importance  to  procure  a supply  of  provisions  at  these 
islands;  and  experience  having  taught  me  that  I could  have  no  chance  to  succeed 
in  this,  if  a free  trade  with  the  natives  were  to  be  allowed;  that  is,  if  it  were  left 
to  every  man’s  discretion  to  trade  for  what  he  pleased,  and  in  what  manner  he 
pleased;  for  this  substantial  reason,  I now  published  an  order  prohibiting  all  per- 
sons from  trading,  except  such  as  should  be  appointed  by  me  and  Captain  Clarke; 
and  even  these  were  enjoined  to  trade  only  for  provisions  and  refreshments.  Women 
were  also  forobidden  to  be  admitted  into  the  ships,  except  under  certain  restric- 
tions. But  the  evil  I intended  to  prevent,  by  this  regulation,  I soon  found  had 
already  got  amongst  them. 

“I  stood  in  again  the  next  morning  till  within  three  or  four  miles  of  the  land, 
where  we  were  met  with  a number  of  canoes  laden  with  provisions.  We  brought 
to,  and  continued  trading  with  the  people  in  them  till  four  in  the  afternoon, 
when,  having  got  a pretty  good  supply,  we  made  sail  and  stretched  oil  to  the 
northward. 

“I  had  never  met  with  a behavior  so  free  from  reserve  and  suspicion  in  my 
intercourse  with  any  tribe  of  savages  as  we  experienced  in  the  people  of  this  island. 
It  was  very  common  for  them  to  send  up  into  the  ship  the  several  articles  they 
brought  for  barter;  afterward,  they  would  come  in  themselves  and  make  their  bar- 
gains on  the  quarter-deck. 

“We  spent  the  night  as  usual,  standing  ofT  and  on.  It  happened  that  four 
men  and  ten  women  who  had  come  on  board  the  preceding  day  still  remained  with 
us.  As  I did  not  like  the  company  of  the  latter,  I stood  in  shore  toward  noon, 
principally  with  a view  to  get  them  out  of  the  ship;  and,  some  canoes  coming  off, 
I took  that  opportunity  of  sending  away  our  guests. 

“In  the  evening  Mr.  Bligh  returned  and  reported  that  he  had  found  a bay  in 
which  was  good  anchorage,  and  fresh  water  in  a situation  tolerably  easy  to  be  come 
at.  Into  this  bay  I resolved  to  carry  the  ships,  there  to  refit  and  supply  ourselves 
with  every  refreshment  that  the  place  could  afford.  As  night  approached  the 
greater  part  of  our  visitors  retired  to  the  shore,  but  numbers  of  them  requested 
our  permission  to  sleep  on  board.  Curiosity  was  not  the  only  motive,  at  least  with 
some,  for  the  next  morning  several  things  were  missing,  which  determined  me  not 
to  entertain  so  many  another  night. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OP  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


391 


“At  eleven  o’clock  in  the  forenoon  we  anchored  in  the  bay,  which  is  called 
by  the  natives  Karakaooa,  (Kealakeakua),  in  thirteen  fathoms  water,  over  a sand} 
bottom,  and  about  a quarter  of  a mile  from  the  northeast  shore.  In  this  situation 
the  south  point  of  the  bay  bore  south  by  west,  and  the  north  point  west  half 
north.  We  moored  with  the  stream-anchor  and  cable,  to  the  northward,  unbent 
the  sails  and  struck  yards  and  topmasts.  The  ships  continued  to  be  much  crowded 
with  natives,  and  were  surrounded  by  a multitude  of  canoes.  I had  nowhere,  in 
the  course  of  my  voyages,  seen  so  numerous  a body  of  people  assembled  in  one 
place.  For,  besides  those  who  had  come  off  to  us  in  canoes,  all  the  shore  of  the 
bay  was  covered  with  spectators,  and  many  hundreds  were  swimming  around  the 
ships  like  shoals  of  fish.  We  could  not  but  be  struck  with  the  singularity  of  this 
scene,  and  perhaps  there  were  few  on  board  who  lamented  our  having  failed  in  our 
endeavors  to  find  a northern  passage  homeward  last  summer.  To  this  disappoint- 
ment we  owed  our  having  it  in  our  power  to  revisit  the  Sandwich  Islands,  and  to 
enrich  our  voyage  with  a discovery  which,  though  the  last,  seemed  in  many  re- 
spects to  be  the  most  important  that  had  hitherto  been  made  by  Europeans,  through- 
out the  extent  of  the  Facific  Ocean.” 

This  is  the  end  of  Cook’s  writing.  His  murder  followed  immediately.  He  fell 
by  the  hands  of  people  for  whom  his  good  will  was  shown  in  his  last  words.  The 
concluding  pages  of  the  journal  answer  all  the  scandals  his  enemies  have  so  busily 
circulated. 

There  is  a gleam  of  humor  that  shows  like  a thread  of  gold  in  the  midst  of 
the  somber  tragedies  of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  and  we  must  not  omit  to  extract 
it  from  “The  Voyage  of  Discovery  Around  the  World”  by  Captain  George  Van- 
couver, when  he  spent  some  time  in  Hawaii,  and  gives  two  bright  pictures — one 
of  a theatrical  performance,  and  the  other  the  happy  settlement  of  the  disordered 
domestic  relations  of  a monarch. 

A GIFTED  NATIVE  ACTRESS  AND  SOME  ROYAL  DRAMATISTS. 

“There  was  a performance  by  a single  young  woman  of  the  name  of  Puckoo, 
whose  person  and  manners  were  both  very  agreeable.  Her  dress,  notwithstanding 
the  heat  of  the  weather,  consisted  of  an  immense  quantity  of  cloth,  which  was 
wreaths  of  black,  red  and  yellow  feathers;  but,  excepting  these,  she  wore  no  dress 
a manner  as  to  give  a pretty  effect  to  the  variegated  pattern  of  the  cloth;  and  was 
otherways  disposed  with  great  taste.  Her  head  and  neck  were  decorated  with 
wreaths  of  black,  red  and  yellow  feathers;  but,  excepting  these,  she  wore  no  dress 


392 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


from  the  waist  upwards.  Her  ankles,  and  nearly  half  way  up  her  legs,  were  deco- 
rated with  several  folds  of  cloth,  widening  upwards,  so  that  the  upper  parts  ex- 
tended from  the  leg  at  least  four  inches  all  round;  this  was  encompassed  by  a 
piece  of  net  work,  wrought  very  close,  from  the  meshes  of  which  were  hung  the 
small  teeth  of  dogs,  giving  this  part  of  her  dress  the  appearance  of  an  ornamented 
funnel.  On  her  wrists  she  wore  bracelets  made  of  the  tusks  of  the  largest  hogs. 
These  were  highly  polished  and  fixed  close  together  in  a ring,  the  concave  sides 
of  the  tusks  being  outwards;  and  their  ends  reduced  to  a uniform  length,  curving 
naturally  away  from  the  center,  were  by  no  means  destitute  of  ornamental  effect. 
Thus  equipped,  her  appearance  on  the  stage,  before  she  uttered  a single  word,  ex- 
cited considerable  applause. 

“These  amusements  had  hitherto  been  confined  to  such  limited  performances; 
but  this  afternoon  was  to  be  dedicated  to  one  of  a more  splendid  nature,  in  which 
some  ladies  of  consequence,  attendants  on  the  court  of  Tamaahmaah,  were  to  per- 
form the  principal  parts.  Great  pains  had  been  taken,  and  they  had  gone  through 
many  private  rehearsals,  in  order  that  the  exhibition  this  evening  might  be  worthy 
of  the  public  attention;  on  the  conclusion  of  which,  I purposed  by  a display  of 
fireworks,  to  make  a return  for  the  entertainment  they  had  afforded  us. 

“About  four  o’clock  we  were  informed  it  was  time  to  attend  the  royal  dames; 
their  theatre,  or  rather  place  of  exhibition,  was  about  a mile  to  the  southward  of 
our  tents,  in  a small  square,  surrounded  by  houses,  and  sheltered  by  trees,  a situa- 
tion as  well  chosen  for  the  performance,  as  for  the  aeeommodationo  of  the  specta- 
tors; who,  on  a moderate  computation,  could  not  be  estimated  at  less  than  four 
thousand,  of  all  ranks  and  descriptions  of  persons. 

“The  dress  of  the  actresses  was  something  like  that  worn  by  Puekoo,  though 
made  nf  superior  materials,  and  disposed  with  more  taste  and  elegance.  A very  con- 
siderable quantity  of  their  finest  cloth  was  prepared  for  the  occasion;  of  this  their 
lower  garment  was  formed,  which  extended  from  their  waist  half  down  their  legs, 
and  was  so  plaited  as  fo  appear  very  much  like  a hoop  petticoat.  This  seemed  the 
most  difficult  part  of  their  dress  to  adjust,  for  Tamaahmaah,  who  was  considered 
to  be  a profound  critic,  was  frequently  appealed  to  by  the  women,  and  his  direc- 
tions were  implicitly  followed  in  many  little  alterations.  Instead  of  the  ornaments 
of  cloth  and  net-work,  decorated  with  dogs’  teeth,  these  ladies  had  each  a green 
wreath  made  of  a kind  of  bind  weed,  twisted  together  in  different  parts  like  a rope, 
which  was  wound  round  from  the  ankle,  nearly  to  the  lower  part  of  the  petticoat. 
On  their  wrists  they  wore  no  bracelets  nor  other  ornaments,  but  across  their  necks 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS.  893 

and  ehoulders  were  green  sashes,  very  nicely  made,  with  the  broad  leaves  of  the 
tee,  a plant  that  produces  a very  luscious  sweet  root,  the  size  of  a yam.  This  part, 
of  their  dress  was  put  on  the  last  by  each  of  the  actresses;  and  the  party  being  now 
fully  attired,  the  king  and  queen,  who  had  been  present  the  whole  time  of  their 
dressing,  were  obliged  to  withdraw,  greatly  to  the  mortification  of  the  latter,  who 
would  gladly  have  taken  her  part  as  a performer,  in  which  she  was  reputed 'to 
excel  very  highly.  But  the  royal  pair  were  compelled  to  retire,  even  from  the  ex- 
hibition, as  they  are  prohibited  by  law  from  attending  such  amusements,  except- 
ing on  the  festival  of  the  new  year.  Indeed,  the  performance  of  this  day  was  con- 
trary to  the  established  rules  of  the  island,  but  being  intended  as  a compliment  to 
us,  the  innovation  was  permitted. 

“As  their  majesties  withdrew,  the  ladies  of  rank  and  the  principal  chiefs  began 
to  make  their  appearance.  The  reception  of  the  former  by  the  multitude  was 
marked  by  a degree  of  respect  that  I had  not  before  seen  amongst  any  inhabitants 
of  the  countries  in  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The  audience  assembled  at  this  time  were 
standing  in  rows,  from  fifteen  to  twenty  feet  deep,  so  close  as  to  touch  each  other; 
but  th'ese  ladies  no  sooner  approached  in  their  rear,  in  any  accidental  direction,  than 
a passage  was  instantly  made  for  them  and  their  attendants  to  pass  through  in 
the  most  commodious  manner  to  their  respective  stations,  where  they  seated  them- 
selves on  the  ground,  which  was  covered  with  mats,  in  the  most  advantageous  sit- 
uation for  seeing  and  hearing  the  performers.  Most  of  these  ladies  were  of  a cor- 
pulent form,  which,  assisted  by  their  stately  gait,  the  dignity  with  which  they 
moved,  and  the  number  of  their  pages,  who  followed  with  fans  to  court  the  refresh- 
ing breeze,  or  with  fly-flaps  to  disperse  the  offending  insects,  announced  their  con- 
sequence as  the  wives,  daughters,  sisters,  or  other  near  relations  of  the  principal 
chiefs,  who,  however,  experienced  no  such  marks  of  respect  or  attention  themselves; 
being  obliged  to  make  their  way  through  the  spectators  in  the  best  manner  they 
were  able. 

“The  time  devoted  to  the  decoration  of  the  actresses  extended  beyond  the  limits 
of  the  quiet  patience  of  the  audience,  who  exclaimed  two  or  three  times,  from  all 
quarters,  “Hoorah,  hoorah,  poaliealee,”  signifying  that  it  would  be  dark  and  black 
night  before  the  performance  would  begin.  But  the  audience  here,  like  similar 
ones  in  other  countries,  attending  with  a pre-disposition  to  be  pleased,  was  in  good 
humor,  and  was  easily  appeased,  by  the  address  of  our  faithful  and  devoted  friend 
Trywhookee,  who  was  the  conductor  of  the  ceremonies,  and  sole  manager  on  this 
occasion.  He  came  forward  and  apologized  by  a speech  that  produced  a general 


394 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  TPIE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


laugh,  and,  causing  the  music  to  begin,  we  heard  no  further  murmurs. 

“The  hand  consisted  of  five  men,  all  standing  up,  each  with  a highly  polished 
wooden  spear  in  the  left,  and  a small  piece  of  the  same  material,  equally  well  fin- 
ished, in  the  right  hand;  with  this  they  heat  on  the  spear,  as  an  accompaniment 
to  their  own  voices  in  songs,  that  varied  both  as  to  time  and  measure,  especially 
the  latter;  yet  their  voices,  and  the  sounds  produced  from  the  rude  instruments, 
which  differed  according  to  the  place  on  which  the  tapering  spear  was  struck,  ap- 
peared to  accord  very  well.  Having  engaged  us  a short  time  in  this  vocal  perform- 
ance, the  court  ladies  made  their  appearance,  and  were  received  with  shouts  of  the 
greatest  applause.  The  musicians  retired  a few  paces,  and  the  actresses  took  their 
station  before  them. 

“The  heroine  of  the  piece,  which  consisted  of  four  or  five  acts,  had  onc-e  shared 
the  affections  and  embraces  of  Tamaahmaah,  hut  was  now  married  to  an  inferior 
chief,  whose  occupation  in  the  household  was  that  of  the  charge  of  the  king’s  ap- 
parel. This  lady  was  distinguished  by  a green  wreath  round  the  crown  of  the  head; 
next  to  her  was  the  captive  daughter  of  Titeeree;  the  third  a younger  sister  to  the 
queen,  the  wife  of  Crymamahoo,  who,  being  of  the  most  exalted  rank,  stood  in 
the  middle.  On  each  side  of  these  were  two  of  inferior  quality,  making  in  all  seven 
actresses.  They  drew  themselves  up  in  a line  fronting  that  side  of  the  square  that 
was  occupied  by  ladies  of  quality  and  the  chiefs.  These  were  completely  detached 
from  the  populace,  not  by  any  partition,  hut,  as  it  were,  by  the  respectful  consent 
of  the  lower  orders  of  the  assembly;  not  one  of  which  trespassed  or  produced  the 
least  inaccommodation. 

“This  representation,  like  that  before  attempted  to  be  described,  was  a compound 
of  speaking  and  singing;  the  subject  of  which  was  enforced  by  gestures  and  actions. 
The  piece  was  in  honor  of  a captive  princess,  whose  name  was  C'ryeowculleneaow; 
and  on  her  name  being  pronounced,  every  one  present,  men  as  well  as  women,  who 
wore  any  ornaments  above  their  waists,  were  obliged  to  take  them  off,  though  the 
captive  lady  was  at  least  sixty  miles  distant.  This  mark  of  respect  was  unobserved 
by  the  actresses  whilst  engaged  in  the  performance;  but  the  instant  any  one  sat 
down,  or  at  the  close  of  the  act,  they  were  also  obliged  to  comply  with  this  mys- 
terious  ceremony. 

“The  variety  of  attitudes  into  which  these  women  threw  themselves,  with  the 
rapidity  of  their  action,  resembled  no  amusement  in  any  other  part  of  the  world 
within  my  knowledge,  by  a comparison  with  which  I might  be  enabled  to  convey 
some  idea  of  the  stage  effect  thus  produced,  particularly  in  the  three  first  parts, 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


395 


in  which  there  appeared  much  correspondence  and  harmony  between  the  tone  of 
their  voices  and  the  display  of  their  limbs.  One  or  two  of  the  performers  being 
not  quite  so  perfect  as  the  rest,  afforded  us  an  opportunity  of  exercising  our  judg- 
ment by  comparison;  and  it  must  be  confessed,  that  the  ladies  who  most  excelled, 
exhibited  a degree  of  graceful  action,  for  the  attainment  of  which  it  is  difficult  to 
account. 

“In  each  of  these  first  parts  the  songs,  attitudes  and  actions  appeared  to  me  of 
greater  variety  than  I had  before  noticed  amongst  the  people  of  the  great  South 
Sea  nation  on  any  former  occasion.  The  whole,  though  I am  unequal  to  its  de- 
scription, was  supported  with  a wonderful  degree  of  spirit  and  vivacity;  so  much 
indeed  that  some  of  their  exertions  were  made  with  such  a degree  of  agitating  vio- 
lence as  seemed  to  carry  the  performers  beyond  what  their  strength  was  able  to 
sustain;  and  had  the  performance  finished  with  the  third  act,  we  should  have  re- 
tired from  their  theatre  with  a much  higher  idea  of  the  moral  tendency  of  their 
drama,  than  was  conveyed  by  the  offensive,  libidinous  scene,  exhibited  by  the  la- 
dies in  the  concluding  part.  The  language  of  the  song,  no  doubt,  corresponded 
with  the  obscenity  of  their  actions;  which  were  carried  to  a degree  of  extravagance 
that  were  calculated  to  produce  nothing  but  disgust,  even  to  the  most  licentious.” 

From  “A  Voyage  of  Discovery,”  by  Captain  George  Vancouver: 

THE  RECONCILIATION  BY  STRATEGY  OF  A KING  WITH  ONE  OF  HIS 

QUEENS. 

“Tahowmotoo  was  amongst  the  most  constant  of  our  guests;  but  his  daughter, 
the  disgraced  queen,  seldom  visited  our  side  of  the  bav.  I was  not,  however,  ig- 
norant of  her  anxious  desire  for  a reconciliation  with  Tamaahmaah;  nor  was  the 
same  wish  to  be  misunderstood  in  the  conduct  and  behavior  of  the  king,  in  whose 
good  opinion  and  confidence  I had  now  acquired  such  a predominancy  that  I be- 
came acquainted  with  his  most  secret  inclinations  and  apprehensions. 

“His  unshaken  attachment  and  unaltered  affection  for  Tahowmannoo  was  con- 
fessed with  a sort  of  internal  self  conviction  of  her  innocence.  He  acknowledged 
with  great  candor  that  his  own  conduct  had  not  been  exactly  such  as  warranted 
his  having  insisted  upon  a separation  from  his  queen;  that  although  it  could  not 
authorize,  it  in  some  measure  pleaded  in  excuse  for  her  infidelity;  and  for  his  own, 
he  alleged,  that  his  high  rank  and  supreme  authority  was  a sort  of  licence  for  such 
indulgences. 

“An  accommodation  which  I considered  to  be  mutually  wished  by  both  parties 


396 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


was  urged  in  tlie  strongest  terms  by  the  queen’s  relations.  To  effect  this  desira- 
ble purpose,  my  interference  was  frequently  solicited  by  them;  and  as  it  concurred 
with  my  own  inclination,  I resolved  on  embracing  the  first  favorable  opportunity 
to  use  my  best  endeavors  for  bringing  a reconciliation  about.  For  although,  on 
our  former  visit,  Tahowmannoo  had  been  regarded  with  the  most  favorable  im- 
pressions, yet,  whether  from  her  distresses,  or  because  she  had  really  improved  in 
her  personal  accomplishments,  I will  not  take  upon  me  to  determine,  but  certain 
it  is  that  one  or  both  of  these  circumstances  united  had  so  far  prepossessed  us  all 
in  her  favor,  and  no  one  more  so  than  myself,  that  it  had  long  been  the  general 
wish  to  see  her  exalted  again  to  her  former  dignities.  This  desire  was  probably 
not  a little  heightened  by  the  regard  we  entertained  for  the  happiness  and  repose 
of  our  noble  and  generous  friend  Tamaahmaah,  who  was  likely  to  be  materially 
affected  not  only  in  his  domestic  comforts,  but  in  his  political  situation,  by  receiv- 
ing again  and  reinstating  his  consort  in  her  former  rank  and  consequence. 

“I  was  convinced  beyond  all  doubt  that  there  were  two  or  three  of  the  most 
considerable  chiefs  of  the  island  whose  ambitious  views  were  inimical  to  the  in- 
terests and  authority  of  Tamaahmaah;  and  it  was  much  to  be  apprehended  that 
if  the  earnest  solicitations  of  the  queen’s  father  (whose  condition  and  importance 
was  next  in  consequence  to  that  of  the  king)  should  continue  to  be  rejected,  that 
there  could  be  little  doubt  of  his  adding  great  strength  and  influence  to  the  dis- 
contented and  turbulent  chiefs,  which  would  operate  highly  to  the  prejudice,  if 
not  totally  to  the  destruction,  of  Tamaahmaah’s  regal  power;  especially  as  the  ad- 
verse party  seemed  to  form  a constant  opposition,  consisting  of  a minority  by  no 
means  to  be  despised  by  the  executive  power,  and  which  appeared  to  be  a principal 
constituent  part  of  the  Owhvean  politics. 

“For  these  substantial  reasons,  whenever  he  was  disposed  to  listen  to  such  dis- 
course. T did  not  cease  to  urge  the  importance  and  necessity  of  his  adopting  measures 
so  highly  essential  to  his  happiness  as  a man,  and  to  his  power,  interest  and  authority 
as  the  supreme  chief  of  the  island.  All  this  he  candidly  acknowledged,  but  his 
pride  threw  impediments  in  the  way  of  a reconciliation,  which  were  hard  to  be  re- 
moved. Tie  would  not  himself  become  the  immediate  agent;  and  although  he  con- 
sidered it  important  that  the  negotiation  should  be  conducted  by  some  one  of  the 
principal  chiefs  in  his  fullest  confidence,  yet,  to  solicit  their  good  offices  after 
having  rejected  their  former  overtures  with  disdain,  was  equally  hard  to  recon- 
cile to  his  feelings.  I stood  nearly  in  the  same  situation  with  his  favorite  friends; 
but  being  thoroughly  convinced  of  the  sincerity  of  his  wishes,  I spared  him  the 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


3(.)7 

mortification  of  soliciting  the  offices  lie  had  rejected,  by  again  proffering  my  services. 
To  this  he  instantly  consented,  and  observed  that  no  proposal  could  have  met  his 
mind  so  completely;  since,  by  effecting  a reconciliation  through  my  friendship, 
no  umbrage  could  be  taken  at  his  having  declined  the  several  offers  of  his  country- 
men by  any  of  the  individuals;  whereas,  had  this  object  been  accomplished  by  any 
one  of  the  chiefs,  it  would  probably  have  occasioned  jealousy  and  discontent  in 
the  minds  of  the  others. 

“All,  however,  was  not  yet  complete;  the  apprehension  that  some  concession 
might  be  suggested,  or  expected,  on  his  part,  preponderated  against  every  other 
consideration;  and  he  would  on  no  account  consent,  that  it  should  appear  that 
he  had  been  privy  to  the  business,  or  that  it  had  been  by  his  desire  that  a negotia- 
tion had  been  undertaken  for  this  happy  purpose,  but  that  the  whole  should  have 
the  appearance  of  being  purely  the  result  of  accident. 

“To  this  end  it  was  determined  that  I should  invite  the  queen,  with  several 
of  her  relations  and  friends,  on  board  the  Discovery,  for  the  purpose  of  presenting 
them  with  some  trivial  matters,  as  tokens  of  my  friendship  and  regard;  and  that, 
whilst  thus  employed,  our  conversation  should  be  directed  to  ascertain  whether  an 
accommodation  -was  still  an  object  to  be  desired.  That  on  this  appearing  to  be 
the  general  wish,  Tamaahmaah  would  instantly  repair  on  board  in  a hasty  man- 
ner, as  if  he  had  something  extraordinary  to  communicate;  that  I should  appear 
to  rejoice  at  this  accidental  meeting,  and  by  instantly  uniting  their  hands,  bring 
the  reconciliation  to  pass  without  the  least  discussion  or  explanation  on  either  side. 
But  from  his  extreme  solicitude  lest  he  should  in  any  degree  be  suspected  of  being 
concerned  in  this  previous  arrangement,  a difficulty  arose  how  to  make  him  ac- 
quainted with  the  result  of  the  proposed  conversation  on  board,  which  could  not 
be  permitted  by  a verbal  message;  at  length,  after  some  thought  he  took  up  two 
pieces  of  paper,  and  of  his  own  accord  made  certain  marks  with  a pencil  on  each  of 
them,  and  then  lelivered  them  to  me.  The  difference  of  these  marks  he  could 
well  recollect;  tin  one  was  to  indicate  that  the  result  of  my  inquiries  was  agreeable 
to  his  wishes,  pt  1 the  other  that  it  was  contrary.  In  the  event  of  my  making  use 
of  the  former.  Le  proposed  that  it  should  not  be  sent  on  shore  secretly,  but  in  an 
open  and  declared  manner,  and  by  way  of  a joke,  as  a present  to  his  Owhyhean 
majesty.  The  natural  gaiety  of  disposition  which  generally  prevails  among  these 
islanders,  would  render  this  supposed  disappointment  of  the  king  a subject  for 
mirth,  would  in  some  degree  prepare  the  company  for  his  visit,  and  completely 
do  away  with  every  idea  of  its  being  the  effect  of  a preconcerted  measure. 


398 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


‘This  plan  was  accordingly  carried  into  execution  on  the  following  Monday. 
Whilst  the  queen  and  her  party,  totally  ignorant  of  the  contrivance,  were  receiving 
the  compliments  I had  intended  them,  their  good  humor  and  pleasantry  were  in- 
finitely heightened  by  the  jest  I proposed  to  pass  upon  the  king,  in  sending  him  a 
piece  of  paper  only,  carefully  wrapped  up  in  some  cloth  of  their  own  manufacture, 
accompanied  by  a message;  importing,  that  as  I was  then  in  the  act  of  distributing 
favors  to  my  Owhyhean  friends,  I had  not  been  unmindful  of  his  majesty. 

“Tamaahmaah  no  sooner  received  the  summons,  than  he  hastened  on  board,  and, 
with  his  usual  vivacity,  exclaimed  before  he  made  his  appearance  that  he  was 
come  to  thank  me  for  the  present  I had  sent  him,  and  for  my  goodness  in  not 
having  forgotten  him  on  this  occasion.  This  was-  heard  by  everyone  in  the  cabin 
before  he  entered;  and  all  seemed  to  enjoy  the  joke  except  the  poor  queen,  who 
appeared  to  be  much  agitated  at  the  idea  of  being  again  in  his  presence.  The  in- 
stant that  he  saw  her  his  countenance  expressed  great  surprise,  he  became  imme- 
diately silent,  and  attempted  to  retire;  but,  having  posted  myself  for  the  especial 
purpose  of  preventing  his  departure,  I caught  his  hand  and,  joining  it  with  the 
queen’s,  their  reconciliation  was  instantly  completed.  This  was  fully  demonstrated, 
not  only  by  the  tears  that  involuntarily  stole  down  the  checks  of  both  ns  they 
embraced  each  other  and  mutually  expressed  the  satisfaction  they  experienced;  but 
by  the  behavior  of  every  individual  present,  whose  feelings  on  the  occasion  were  not 
to  be  repressed;  whilst  their  sensibility  testified  the  happiness  which  this  appar- 
ently fortuitous  event  had  produced. 

“A  short  pause,  produced  by  an  event  so  unexpected,  was  succeeded  by  the  sort 
of  good  humor  that  such  a happy  circumstance  would  naturally  inspire;  the  con- 
versation soon  became  general,  cheerful  and  lively,  in  which  the  artifice  imagined 
to  have  been  imposed  upon  the  king  bore  no  small  share.  A little  refreshment  from 
a few  glasses  of  wine  concluded  the  scene  of  this  successful  meeting. 

“After  the  queen  had  acknowledged  in  the  most  grateful  terms  the  weighty  ob- 
ligations which  she  felt  for  my  services  on  this  occasion,  I was  surprised  by  her 
saving,  as  we  were  all  preparing  to  go  on  shore,  that  she  had  still  a very  great 
favor  to  request;  which  was,  that  I should  obtain  from  Tamahmaah  a solemn  prom- 
ise that  on  her  return  to  his  habitation  he  would  not  beat  her.  The  great  cor- 
diality with  which  the  reconciliation  had  taken  place,  and  the  happiness  that  each 
of  them  had  continued  to  express  in  consequence  of  it,  led  me  at  first  to  consider 
this  entreaty  of  the  queen  as  a jest  only;  but  in  this  T was  mistaken,  for,  notwith- 
standing that  Tamaahmaah  readily  complied  with  my  solicitation,  and  assured  me 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


399 


nothing  of  the  kind  should  take  place,  yet  Tahowmannoo  would  not  be  satisfied 
without  my  accompanying  them  home  to  the  royal  residence,  where  I had  the 
pleasure  of  seeing  her  restored  to  all  her  former  honors  and  privileges,  highly  to 
the  satisfaction  of  all  the  king’s  friends,  but  to  the  utter  mortification  of  those  who 
by  their  scandalous  reports  and  misrepresentations  had  been  the  cause  of  the  un- 
fortunate separtion. 

“The  domestic  affairs  of  Tamaahmaah  having  thus  taken  so  happy  a turn,  his 
mind  was  more  at  liberty  for  political  considerations;  and  the  cession  of  Owhyhee 
to  his  Britannic  Majesty  now  became  an  object  of  his  serious  concern.” 


Captain  Cook  makes  a strong  plea  in  his  journal  that  he  was  the  very  original 
discoverer  of  the  Sandwich  Islands.  Referring  to  the  wonderful  extent  of  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth  in  which  the  land  is  occupied  by  the  Polynesia!  race,  he  exclaims: 

“How  shall  we  account  for  this  nation's  having  spread  itself,  in  so  many  de- 
tached islands,  so  widely  disjoined  from  each  other,  in  every  quarter  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean!  We  find  it,  from  New  Zealand  in  the  South,  as  far  as  the  Sandwich  Islands, 
to  the  North!  And,  in  another  direction,  from  Easter  Islands  to  the  Hebrides! 
That  is,  over  an  extent  of  sixty  degrees  of  latitude,  or  twelve  hundred  leagues, 
North  and  South!  And  eighty-three  degrees  of  longitude,  or  sixteen  hundred  and 
sixty  leagues,  East  and  West!  How  much  farther,  in  either  direction,  its  colonies 
reach,  is  not  known;  but  what  we  know  already,  in  consequence  of  this  and  our 
former  voyage,  warrants  our  pronouncing  it  to  be,  though  perhaps  not  the  most 
numerous,  certainly,  by  far,  the  most  extensive,  nation  upon  earth. 

“Had  the  Sandwich  Islands  been  discovered  at  an  early  period  by  the  Span- 
iards, there  is  little  doubt  that  they  would  have  taken  advantage  of  so  excellent  a 
situation,  and  have  made  use  of  Atooi,  or  some  other  of  the  islands,  as  a refresh- 
ing place  to  the  ships,  that  sail  annually  from  Acapulco  for  Manilla.  They  lie  al- 
most midway  between  the  first  place  and  Guam,  one  of  the  Ladrones,  which  is  at 
present  their  only  port  in  traversing  this  vast  ocean;  and  it  would  not  have  been  a 
week’s  sail  out  of  their  common  route  to  have  touched  at  them;  which  could  have 
been  done  without  running  the  least  hazard  of  losing  the  passage,  as  they  are  suf- 
ficiently within  the  verge  of  the  easterly  trade  wind.  An  acquaintance  with  the 
Sandwich  Islands  would  have  been  equally  favorable  to  our  Buccaneers,  who  used 
sometimes  to  pass  from  the  coast  of  America  to  the  Ladrones,  with  a stock  of  food 
and  water  scarcely  sufficient  to  preserve  life.  Here  they  might  always  have  found 
plenty,  and  haye  been  within  a month’s  sure  sail  of  the  very  part  of  California 


100 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


which  the  Manilla  ship  is  obliged  to  make,  or  else  have  returned  to  the  coast  of 
America,  thoroughly  refitted,  after  an  absence  of  two  months.  How  happy  would 
Lord  Anson  have  been,  and  what  hardships  he  would  have  avoided,  if  he  had 

known  that  there  was  a group  of  islands  half  way  between  America  and  Tinian, 

where  all  bis  wants  could  have  been  effectually  supplied;  and  in  describing  which 
the  elegant  historian  of  that  voyage  would  have  presented  his  reader  with  a more 
agreeable  picture  than  I have  been  able  to  draw  in  this  chapter.” 

And  yet  there  seems  to  be  reason  for  believing  that  there  was  a Spanish  ship 

cast  away  on  one  of  the  Hawaiian  group,  and  that  their  descendants  are  distinctly 

marked  men  yet:  There  was  also  a white  man  and  woman  saved  from  the  sea  at 
some  unknown  period,  of  course  since  Noah,  and  they  multiplied  and  replenished, 
and  the  islanders  picked  up  somewhere  a knack  for  doing  tilings  in  construction 
of  boats  and  tbe  weaving  of  mats  that  hint  at  a crude  civilization  surviving  in  a 
mass  of  barbarianism. 

Captain  George  Dixon  names  the  islands  discovered  by  Captain  Cook  on  his 
last  voyage: 

“Owhyhee  (Hawaii),  the  principal,  is  the  first  to  the  southward  and  eastward, 
the  rest  run  in  a direction  nearly  northwest.  The  names  of  the  principals  are 
Mowee  (Maui),  Morotoy  (Molokai),  Ranai  (Lanai),  Whahoo  (Oahu),  Attooi  (Kauai), 
and  Oncehow  (Niihau).” 

This  account  Dixon  gives  of  two  curious  and  rather  valuable  words:  “The 

moment  a chief  concludes  a bargain,  he  repeats  the  word  Coocoo  thrice,  with  quick- 
li®  and  is  immediately  answered  by  all  the  people  in  his  canoe  with  the  word 
Wi»oali,  pronounced  in  a tone  of  exclamation,  but  with  greater  or  less  energy,  in 
proportion  as  the  bargain  he  has  made  is  approved.” 

The  great  and  celebrated  Kamehamelia,  who  consolidated  the  government  of 
the  islands,  did  it  by  an  act  of  treachery  and  murder,  thus  told  in  Alexander’s 
history: 

“The  Assassination  of  Kcoua. — Toward  the  end  of  the  year  llfil  two  of  Kanie- 
hamcha’s  chief  counsellors,  Kamanawa  and  Iveaweaheulu,  were  sent  on  an  embassy 
to  Kcoua  at  Ivahuku  in  Kau.  Keoua's  chief  warrior  urged  him  to  pul  them  to 
death,  which  he  indignantly  refused  to  do. 

“By  smooth  speeches  and  fair  promises  they  persuaded  him  to  go  to  Kawaihae, 
and  have  an  interview  with  Kamehamelia.  in  order  to  put  an  end  to  the  war,  which 
had  lasted  nine  vears.  Accordingly  he  set  out  with  hi?  most  intimate  friends  aud 


NATIvawoMAN 
WITH  .Pkl  -MI 


FRUIT  WOMAN 


NATIVE 

OMAN. 


canal 


BUFFALO,  wAOOPI  / 
AND  TWO  cooues. 


MOUSE 


BEGGAR  on 
MAIN  BRIOGE. 


NATIVE 


VIEWS  IN  MANILA,  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS- 


£/M/fNG  HONOIUOTaBOARO 
SS  PERU.  FOR  MANILA.  ^ 


THRtE  vtOLLEC 

rnuMon a m 
I CentI 


U 5.5  PHILADELPHIA. 
ENTERING  HONOLULU 
HARBOR. 


LEAVirtU  HONOLULU 
U S 5 PE&U  fOR  MANILA 


5.5  PHIlAOCT-PH**. 
HONOLULU  HARBOR 


U.5S  PHILADELPHIA. 
HONOLULU  HARBOR 


VIEWS  IN  HONOLULU  AND  MANILA. 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


403 


twenty-four  rowers  in  his  own  double  canoe,  accompanied  by  Keaweaheulu  in  an- 
other canoe,  and  followed  by  friends  and  retainers  in  other  canoes. 

“As  they  approached  the  landing  at  Kawaihae,  Keeaumoku  surrounded  Ke- 
oua’s  canoe  with  a number  of  armed  men.  As  Ivamakau  relates:  ‘Seeing  Kame- 

hameha  on  the  beach,  Iveoua  called  out  to  him,  “Here  I am,”  to  which  he  replied, 
“Rise  up  and  come  here,  that  we  may  know  each  other.”  ’ 

“As  Iveoua  was  in  the  act  of  leaping  ashore,  Keeaumoku  killed  him  with  a 
spear.  All  the  men  in  Keoua’s  canoe  and  in  the  canoes  of  his  immediate  company 
were  slaughtered  but  one.  But  when  the  second  division  approached,  Kamehameha 
gave  orders  to  stop  the  massacre.  The  bodies  of  the  slain  were  then  laid  upon  the 
altar  of  ruukohola  as  an  offering  to  the  blood-thirsty  divinity  Ivukailimoku.  That 
of  Iveoua  had  been  previously  baked  in  an  oven  at  the  foot  of  the  hill  as  a last 
indignity.  This  treacherous  murder  made  Kamehameha  master  of  the  whole  island 
of  Hawaii,  and  was  the  first  step  toward  the  consolidation  of  the  group  under  one 
government.” 

This  is  one  of  those  gentle  proceedings  of  an  amiable  race,  whose  massacre  of 
Captain  Cook  has  been  so  elaborately  vindicated  by  alleged  exponents  of  civilization. 

There  is  found  the  keynote  of  the  grevious  native  government  in  an  incident 
of  the  date  of  1841  by  which  “the  foreign  relations  of  the  government  became 
involved  with  the  schemes  of  a private  firm.  The  firm  of  Ladd  & Co.  had  taken 
the  lead  in  developing  the  agricultural  resources  of  the  islands  by  their  sugar  plan- 
tation at  Ivoloa  and  in  other  ways,  and  had  gained  the  entire  confidence  of  the 
king  and  chiefs.  On  the  24th  of  November,  1841,  a contract  was  secretly  drawn 
up  at  Lahaina  by  Mr.  Brinsmade,  a member  of  the  firm,  and  Mr.  Richards,  and 
duly  signed  by  the  king  and  premier,  which  had  serious  after-consequences.  It 
granted  to  Ladd  & Co.  the  privilege  of  “leasing  any  now  unoccupied  and  unim- 
proved localities”  in  the  islands  for  one  hundred  years,  at  a low  rental,  each  mill- 
site  to  include  fifteen  acres,  and  the  adjoining^^d  for  cultivation  in  each  locality 
not  to  exceed  two  hundred  acres,  with  privileges  of  wood,  pasture,  etc.  These 
sites  were  to  be  selected  within  one  year,  which  term  was  afterwards  extended  to 
four  years  from  date.” 

Of  course  there  are  many  safeguards,  particularly  in  this  case,  but  the  points 
of  the  possession  of  land  conceded,  the  time  for  the  people  to  recover  their  rights 
never  comes. 

One  of  the  difficulties  in  the  clearing  up  of  the  foggy  chapters  of  the  history 
of  the  Hawaiian  islands  is  that  within  the  lifetime  of  men  who  were  young  at  the 


404 


EARLY  HISTORY  OF  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS. 


close  of  the  last  century,  the  Hawaiian  tongue  became  a written  language,  and 
made  the  traditions  of  savages  highly  colored  stories,  in  various  degrees  accord- 
ing to  ignorance,  prejudice  and  sympathy,  accepted  as  historical.  The  marvels 
accomplished  by  the  missionaries  influenced  them  to  deal  gently  with  those  whose 
conversion  was  a recognized  triumph  of  Christendom,  and  there  was  an  effort  to 
condemn  Captain  Cook,  who  had  affected  to  nod  as  a God,  as  a warning  to  blas- 
phemers. Still,  the  truth  of  history  is  precious  as  the  foundations  of  faith  to  men 
of  all  races  and  traditions,  and  the  Englishman  who  surpassed  the  French,  Span- 
iards and  Portuguese  in  discoveries  of  islands  in  the  vast  spaces  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  should  have  justice  at  the  hands  of  Americans  who  have  organized  states 
and  built  cities  by  that  sea,  and  possess  the  islands  that  have  been  named  its  para- 
dise because  endowed  surpassingly  with  the  ample  treasures  of  volcanic  soil  and 
tropical  climate.  There  the  trade  winds  bestow  the  freshness  of  the  calm  and  mighty 
waters,  and  there  is  added  to  the  bounty  of  boundless  weulth  the  charms  of  luxuriant 
V \ity.  All  Americans  should  find  it  timely  to  be  just  to  Captain  Cook,  and  claim 
as  one  of  the  pioneers  of  our  conquering  civilization. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


THE  START  FOR  THE  LAND  OF  CORN  STALKS. 

Spain  Clings  to  the  Ghost  of  Her  Colonies — The  Scene  of  War  Interest  Shifts  from 
Manila — The  Typhoon  Season — General  Merritt  on  the  Way  to  Paris — Ger- 
man Target  Practice  by  Permission  of  Dewey — Poultney  Bigelow  with  Canoe, 
Typewriter  and  Kodak — Hongkong  as  a Bigger  and  Brighter  Gibraltar. 

When  Spain  gave  up  the  ghosts  of  her  American  colonies,  and  the  war  situation 
was  unfolded  to  signify  that  the  fate  of  the  Philippines  was  referred  to  a conference, 
and  Aguinaldo  announced  the  removal  of  his  seat  of  government  to  Molones,  one 
hour  and  a half  from  Manila,  the  scene  of  greatest  interest  was  certainly  not  in  the 
city  and  immediate  surroundings.  Then  it  was  plain  the  American  army  must 
remain  for  some  time,  and  would  have  only  guard  duty  to  perform.  The  Spaniards 
had  succumbed  and  were  submissive,  having  laid  down  their  arms  and  surrendered 
all  places  and  phases  of  authority.  The  insurgents’  removal  of  their  headquarters 
declared  that  they  had  abandoned  all  claim  to  sharing  in  the  occupation  of  the  con- 
quered city,  and  their  opposition  to  the  United  States,  if  continued  in  theory,  was  not 
to  be  that  in  a practical  way.  Between  the  American,  Spanish  and  Philippine  forces 
there  was  no  probability  of  disputed  facts  or  forms  that  could  he  productive  of  con- 
tention of  a serious  nature.  There  was  hut  one  question  left  in  this  quarter  of  the 
world  that  concerned  the  people  of  the  United  States,  and  that  whether  they  would 
hold  their  grip,  snatched  by  Dewey  with  his  fleet,  and  confirmed  by  his  govern- 
ment in  sending  an  army,  making  our  country  possessors  of  the  physical  force  to 
sustain  our  policy,  whatever  it  might  be,  on  the  land  as  well  as  on  the  sea.  Whether 
we  should  stay  or  go  -was  not  even  to  be  argued  in  Manila,  except  in  general  and 
fruitless  conversation.  Then  came  the  intelligence  that  General  Merritt  had  been 
called  to  Paris  and  General  Greene  to  Washington,  and  there  was  a deepened  im- 
pression that  the  war  was  over.  It  was  true  that  the  army  was  in  an  attitude  and 
having  experiences  that  were  such  as  travelers  appreciate  as  enjoyable,  and  that 
no  other  body  of  soldiers  had  surroundings  so  curious  and  fascinating.  The  most 
agreeable  time  of  the  year  was  coming  on,  and  the  sanitary  conditions  of  the  city,, 
under  the  American  administration,  would  surely  improve  constantly,  and  so  would! 
the  fare  of  the  men,  for  the  machinery  in  all  departments  was  working  smoothly. 
The  boys  were  feeling  pretty  well,  because  they  found  their  half  dollars  dollars — ■ 

405 


THE  START  FOR  THE  LAND  OF  CORN  STALKS. 


406 

ihe  Mexican  fifty-cent  piece,  bigger  and  with  more  silver  in  it  than  the  American 
standard  dollar,  was  a bird.  A dollar  goes  further  if  it  is  gold  in  Manila  than  in 
an  American  city,  and  if  our  soldiers  are  not  paid  in  actual  gold  they  get  its  equiv- 
alent, and  the  only  money  question  unsettled  is  whether  the  Mexican  silver  dollar  is 
worth  in  American  money  fifty  cents  or  less.  One  of  the  sources  of  anxieties  and 
disappointment  and  depression  of  the  American  soldiers  in  Manila  has  been  the 
irregularity  and  infrequency  with  which  they  get  letters.  If  one  got  a letter  or 
newspaper  from  home  of  a date  not  more  than  six  weeks  old  he  had  reason  to  be 
congratulated.  The  transports  trusted  with  the  mails  were  slow,  and  communica- 
tions through  the  old  lines  between  Hongkong  and  San  Francisco,  Yokohama  and 
Vancouver,  were  not  reliably  organized.  There  were  painful  cases  of  masses  of 
mail  on  matter  precious  beyond  all  valuation  waiting  at  Hongkong  for  a boat,  and 
an  issue  whether  the  shorter  road  home  was  not  by  way  of  Europe.  This  is  all 
in  course  of  rapid  reformation.  There  will  be  no  more  mystery  as  to  routes  or 
failures  to  connect.  The  soldiers,  some  of  whom  are  ten  thousand  miles  from  home, 
should  have  shiploads  of  letters  and  papers.  They  need  reading  matter  almost  as 
much  as  they  do  tobacco,  and  the  charming  enthusiasm  of  the  ladies  who  enter- 
tained the  soldier  boys  when  they  were  going  away  with  feasting  and  flattery,  praise 
and  glorification,  should  take  up  the  good  work  of  sending  them  letters,  papers,  mag- 
azines and  books.  There  is  no  reason  why  soldiers  should  be  more  subject  to  home- 
sickness than  sailors,  except  that  they  are  not  so  well  or  ill  accustomed  to  absence. 
The  fact  that  the  soldiers  arc  fond  of  their  homes  and  long  for  them  can  have 
ways  of  expression  other  than  going  home.  A few  days  after  the  news  of  peace 
reached  Manila,  the  transports  were  inspected  for  closing  up  the  contracts  with 
them  under  which  they  were  detained,  and  soon  they  began  to  move.  When  the 
China  was  ordered  to  San  Francisco, I improved  the  opportunity  to  return  to  the  great 
republic.  There  was  no  chance  to  explore  the  many  islands  of  the  group  of  which 
Manila  is  the  Spanish  Capital.  General  Merritt  changed  the  course  of  this  fine  ship 
and  added  to  the  variety  of  the  voyage  by  taking  her  to  Hongkong  to  sail  thence  by 
way  of  the  China  Sea.  the  Indian  Ocean,  the  Arabian  Gulf,  the  Red  Sea,  the  Suez 
Canal  and  the  Mediterranean,  to  Taris.  Our  route  to  San  Francisco,  by  way  of 
Ilonukong,  Nagasaki,  Sunanaski,  Kobe  and  the  Yokohama  light,  was  6,905  knots, 
about  seven  thousand  seven  hundred  statute  miles,  and  gave  us  glimpses  of  the  Asia 
shore,  the  west  coast  of  Formosa  and  the  great  ports  of  Hongkong  and  Nagasaki. 
The  first  thing  on  the  Sea  of  China,  in  the  month  of  September,  is  whether  we 
shall  find  ourselves  in  the  wild  embrace  of  a typhoon.  It  was  the  season  for  those  terri- 
ble tempests  and  when  we  left  Manila  the  information  that  one  was  about  due  was 


THE  START  FOR  THE  LARD  OF  CORN  STALKS. 


407 


not  spared  us.  We  heard  later  on  that  the  transport  ahead  of  us  four  days,  the 
Zealandia,  was  twenty-eight  hours  in  a cyclone  and  much  damaged — wrung  and 
hammered,  and  shocked  until  she  had  to  put  into  Nagasaki  for  extensive  repairs. 
The  rainfall  was  so  heavy  during  the  storm  that  one  could  not  see  a hundred  yards 
from  the  ship,  and  she  was  wrung  in  so  furious  a style  in  a giddy  waltz,  that  the 
Captain  was  for  a time  in  grave  doubt  whether  she  would  not  founder.  The  rule 
is  when  one  is  in  the  grasp  of  the  oriental  whirl  to  run  through  it,  judging  from  the 
way  of  the  wind,  the  shortest  way  out.  There  is  a comparatively  quiet  spot  in  the 
center,  and  if  the  beset  navigator  can  find  the  correct  line  of  flight',  no  matter  which 
way  as  relates  to  the  line  of  his  journey,  he  does  well  to  take  it.  Often  in  this 
sea,  as  in  this  case,  there  were  uncertainties  as  to  directions.  The  rain  narrowed 
observation  like  a dense  fog,  and  there  was  danger  of  running  upon  some  of  the 
islands  and  snags  of  rocks.  The  battered  vessel  pulled  through  a cripple,  with  her 
boats  shattered,  her  deck  cracked  across  by  a roller,  and  her  crew  were  happy  to  find 
a quiet  place  to  be  put  in  order.  “To  be  or  not  to  be”  an  American  instead  of  a 
Spanish  or  Asiatic  city  was  the  parting  thought  as  the  China  left  Manila  Ray,  and 
the  dark  rocks  of  Corrigedor  faded  behind  us,  and  the  rugged  rocks  that  confront 
the  stormy  sea  loomed  on  our  right,  and  the  violet  peaks  of  volcanic  mountains 
bounded  our  eastern  horizon.  The  last  view  we  had  of  the  historic  bay,  a big 
German  warship  was  close  to  the  sentinel  rock,  that  the  Spaniards  thought  they  had 
fortified,  until  Dewey  came  and  saw  and  conquered,  swifter  than  Caesar,  and  the 
Germans,  venturing  some  target  practice,  by  permission  of  Dewey,  who  relaxes  no 
vigilance  of  authority.  Hongkong  is  628  miles  from  Manila,  and  the  waters  so  often 
stirred  in  monstrous  wrath,  welcomed  us  with  a spread  of  dazzling  silk.  The  clumsy 
junks  that  appeared  to  have  come  down  from  the  days  of  Confucius,  were  languid 
on  the  gentle  ripples.  The  outstanding  Asian  islands,  small  and  grim,  are  singu- 
larly desolate,  barren  as  if  splintered  by  fire,  gaunt  and  forbidding.  Hongkong  is 
an  island  that  prospers  under  the  paws  of  the  British  lion,  and  it  is  a city  displayed  on 
a mountain  side,  that  by  day  is  not  much  more  imposing  than  the  town  of  Gibraltar, 
which  it  resembles,  but  at  night  the  lights  glitter  in  a sweeping  circle,  the  steep 
ascent  of  the  streets  revealed  by  many  lamps,  and  here  and  there  the  illumination 
climbs  to  the  tops  of  the  mountains  that  are  revealed  with  magical  efforts  of  color  and 
form.  The  harbor  is  entered  by  an  ample,  but  crooked  channel,  and  is  land-locked, 
fenced  with  gigantic  bumps  that  sketch  the  horizon,  and  with  their  heads  and 
shoulders  are  familiar  with  the  sky.  Here  General  Merritt,  with  his  personal  staff, 
left  us,  and  between  those  bound  from  this  port  east  and  west,  we  circumnavigated 
the  earth. 


408 


THE  START  FOR  THE  LAND  OF  CORN  STALKS. 


Mr.  PouRney  Bigelow,  of  Harper’s  Weekly,  who  dropped  in  by  the  way  just 
to  make  a few  calls  at  Manila,  and  has  a commission  to  explore  the  rivers  and 
lagoons  of  China  with  his  canoe,  left  us,  in  that  surprising  craft,  plying  his  paddle 
in  the  fashion  of  the  Esquimaux,  pulling  right  and  left,  hand  over  hand,  balancing 
to  a nicety  on  the  waves  and  going  ashore  dry  and  unruffled,  with  his  fieldglass  and 
portfolio,  his  haversack  and  typewriter  machine  that  he  folds  in  a small  box  as  if  it 
was  a pocket  comb,  and  his  kodak,  with  which  he  is  an  expert.  He  has  not  only 
ransacked  with  his  canoe  the  rivers  of  America,  but  has  descended  the  Danube  and 
the  Volga.  He  puts  out  in  his  canoe  and  crosses  arms  of  the  sea,  as  a pastime,  makes  a 
tent  of  his  boat  if  it  rains.  Fighting  the  desperadoes  of  all  climes  with  the  super- 
stition, for  which  he  is  indebted  to  their  imagination  for  his  safety  in  running 
phenomenal  hazards,  that  he  is  a magician.  Marco  Polo  was  not  so  great  a traveler 
or  so  rare  an  adventurer  as  Bigelow,  and,  having  left  Florida  under  a thunder  cloud 
of  the  scowl  of  an  angry  army  for  untimely  criticisms,  he  has  invaded  the  celestial 
empire  in  his  quaint  canoe,  and  he  can  heat  the  Chinese  boatmen  on  their  own 
rivers,  and  sleep  like  a sea  bird  on  the  swells  of  green  water,  floating  like  a feather, 
and  safe  in  his  slumbers  as  a solon  goose  with  his  head  under  his  wing.  How- 
ever, he  has  not  a winged  boat,  a bird  afloat  sailing  round  the  purple  peaks  remote, 
as  Buchanan  Reed  put  it  in  his  “Drifting”  picture  of  the  Vesuvian  bay,  for 
Bigelow  uses  a paddle.  There  has  been  a good  deal  of  curiosity  as  well  as  indigna- 
tion about  his  papers  on  the  handling  of  our  Cuban  expedition  before  it  sailed, 
and  it  is  possible  he  was  guilty  of  the  common  fault  of  firing  into  the  wrong  people. 
He  was  in  Washington  in  June,  and  he  and  I meeting  on  the  Bridge  of  Spain  over 
the  Pesang  in  Manila  in  August,  we  had,  between  us,  put  a girdle  about  the  earth. 
Some  say  such  experiences  are  good  to  show  how  small  the  earth  is,  but  I am  more 
than  over  persuaded  that  it  is  big  enough  to  find  mankind  in  occupation  and  sub- 
sistence until  time  shall  he  no  more.  In  the  dock  at  Hongkong  was  Admiral  Dewey's 
flagship  Olympia,  and  while  she  had  the  grass  scratched  from  her  bottom,  the  gallant 
crew  were  having  a holiday  with  the  zest  that  rewards  those  who  for  four  months  were 
steadily  on  shipboard  with  arduous  cares  and  labors.  II.  B.  M.  S.  Powerful,  of  12,000 
tons  displacement,  with  four  huge  flues  and  two  immense  military  masts,  presided  at 
Hongkong  under  orders  to  visit  Manila.  The  mingling  of  the  English  and  Chinese 
in  Ilongkomr  is  a livelv  object  lesson,  showing  the  extent  of  the  British  capacity  to 
utilize  Asiatic  labor,  and  get  the  profit  of  European  capital  and  discipline,  an  ac- 
cumulation that  requires  an  established  sense  of  safety — a justified  confidence  in 
permanency. 

The  contrast  between  the  city  of  Hongkong  and  that  of  Manila  is  one  that 


THE  START  FOR  THE  LAND  OF  CORN  STALKS. 


409 


Americans  should  study  now,  to  be  instructed  in  the  respective  colonial  systems  of 
England  and  Spain.  Hongkong  is  clean  and  solid,  with  business  blocks  of  the  best 
style  of  construction,  the  pavements  excellent  in  material  and  keeping,  shops  full  of 
goods,  all  the  appliances  of  modern  times- — a city  up  to  date.  There  are  English 
enough  to  manage  and  Chinese  enough  to  toil.  There  are  two  British  regiments, 
one  of  them  from  India,  the  rank  and  file  recruited  from  the  fighting  tribes  of 
northern  mountaineers.  There  are  dark,  tall  men,  with  turbans,  embodiment  of 
mystery,  and  Parsees  who  have  a strange  spirituality  of  their  own,  and  in  material 
matters  maintain  a lofty  code  of  honor,  while  their  pastime  is  that  of  striving 
w'hile  they  march  to  push  their  heads  into  the  clouds.  There  are  no  horses  in 
Hongkong,  the  coolies  carrying  chairs  on  bamboo  poles,  or  trotting  with  two- 
wheelers,  an  untiring  substitute  for  quadrupeds,  and  locomotion  on  the  streets  or 
in  the  boats  is  swift  and  sure.  I had  an  address  to  find  in  the  city,  on  a tip  at 
Manila  of  the  presence  of  a literary  treasure,  and  my  chairmen  carried  me,  in  a 
few  minutes,  to  a tall  house  on  a tall  terrace,  and  the  works  of  a martyr  to  liberty 
in  the  Philippines  were  located.  The  penalty  for  the  possession  of  these  books 
in  Manila  was  that  of  the  author  executed  by  shooting  in  the  back  in  the  pres- 
ence of  a crowd  of  spectators.  The  cost  of  the  carriers  was  thirty  cents  in  silver — 
fifteen  cents  in  United  States  money — and  the  men  were  as  keen-eyed  as  they  were 
sure-footed,  and  the  strength  of  their  tawny  limbs  called  for  admiration.  They  were 
not  burdened  with  clothes,  and  the  play  of  the  muscles  of  their  legs  was  like  a 
mechanism  of  steel,  oiled,  precise,  easy  and  ample  in  force.  The  China  took  on  a 
few  hundred  tons  of  coal,  which  was  delivered  aboard  from  heavy  boats  by  the 
basketful,  the  men  forming  a line,  and  so  expert  were  they  at  each  delivery,  the 
baskets  were  passed,  each  containing  about  half  a bushel — perhaps  there  were  sixty 
baskets  to  the  ton — at  the  rate  of  thirty-five  baskets  in  a minute.  Make  due  allow- 
ances and  one  gang  would  deliver  twenty  tons  of  coal  an  hour.  The  China  was 
anchored  three-quarters  of  a mile  from  the  landing,  and  a boat  ride  was  ten  cents, 
or  fifteen  if  you  were  a tipster.  The  boats  are,  as  a rule,  managed  by  a man  and  his 
wife;  and,  as  it  is  their  own,  they  keep  the  children  at  home.  The  average  families  on 
the  boats — and  I made  several  counts — were  nine,  the  seven  children  varying  from  one 
to  twelve  years  of  age.  The  vitality  of  the  Chinese  is  not  exhausted,  or  even 
impaired. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 

Glimpses  of  China  and  Japan  on  the  Way  Home  from  the  Philippines — Hongkong 
a Greater  Gibraltar — Coaling  the  China — Gangs  of  Women  Coaling  the  China 
— IIow  the  Japanese  Make  Gardens  of  the  Mountains — Transition  from  the 
Tropics  to  the  Northern  Seas — A Breeze  from  Siberia — A Thousand  Miles 
Nothing  on  the  Pacific — Talk  of  Swimming  Ashore. 

Formosa  was  so  far  away  eastward — a crinkled  line  drawn  faintly  with  a fine  blue 
pencil,  showing  as  an  artistic  scrawl  on  the  canvass  of  the  low  clouds — we  could 
hardly  claim  when  the  sketch  of  the  distant  land  faded  from  view,  that  we  had  seen 
Japan.  When  Hongkong,  of  sparkling  memory,  was  lost  to  sight,  the  guardian 
walls  that  secluded  her  harbor,  closing  their  gates  as  we  turned  away,  and  the  head- 
lands of  the  celestial  empire  grew  dim,  a rosy  sunset  promised  that  the  next  day 
should  be  pleasant,  our  thoughts  turned  with  the  prow  of  the  China  to  Japan.  We 
were  bound  for  Nagasaki,  to  get  a full  supply  of  coal  to  drive  us  across  the  Pacific, 
having  but  twelve  hundred  tons  aboard,  and  half  of  that  wanted  for  ballast.  It  was 
at  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  of  Nagasaki  that  there  was  a settlement  of  Dutch 
Christians  for  some  hundreds  of  years.  An  indiscreet  letter  captured  on  the  way 
to  Holland  by  a Portuguese  adventurer  and  maliciously  sent  to  Japan,  caused  the 
tragic  destruction  of  the  Christian  colony.  The  enmity  of  Christian  nations  anxious 
to  add  to  their  properties  in  the  islands  in  remote  seas  was  so  strong  that  any  one 
preferred  that  rather  than  his  neighbors  might  aggrandize  the  heathen  should  pre- 
vail. The  first  as  well  as  the  last  rocks  of  Japan  to  rise  from  and  sink  into  the  prodi- 
gous  waters,  through  which  we  pursued  our  homeward  way,  bathing  our  eyes  in  the 
delicious  glowing  floods  of  eastern  air,  were  scraggy  with  sharp  pinnacles,  and  sheer 
precipices,  grim  survivals  of  the  chaos  that  it  was,  before  there  was  light.  I have 
had  but  glimpses  of  the  extreme  east  of  Asia,  yet  the  conceit  will  abide  with  me  that 
this  is  in  geology  as  in  history  the  older  world,  as  we  classify  our  continents,  that 
a thousand  centuries  look  upon  us  from  the  terrible  towers,  lonesome  save  for  the 
flutter  of  white  wings,  that  witness  the  rising  of  the  constellations  from  the  greater 
ocean  of  the  globe.  But  there  are  green  hills  as  we  approach  Nagasaki,  and  on  a 
hillside  to  the  left  are  the  white  walls  of  a Christian  church  with  a square  tower, 
stained  with  traditions  of  triumphs  and  suffering  and  martyrdom  long  ago.  Nagasaki 
is  like  Hongkong  in  its  land-locked  harbor,  in  clinging  to  a mountain  side,  in  the 

110 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


411 


circle  of  illumination  at  night  and  the  unceasing  paddling  of  boats  from  ship  to 
ship  and  between  the  ships  and  landings.  One  is  not  long  in  discovering  that  here 
are  a people  more  alert,  ingenious,  self-confident  and  progressive  than  the  Chinese. 
As  we  approached  the  harbor  there  came  to  head  us  off,  an  official  steam  launch,  with 
men  in  uniform,  who  hailed  and  commanded  us  to  stop.  Two  officers  with  an 
intense  expression  of  authority  came  aboard,  and  we  had  to  give  a full  and  par- 
ticular account  of  ourselves.  Why  were  we  there?  Coaling.  Where  were  we  from? 
Manila  and  Hongkong.  Where  were  we  going?  San  Francisco.  Plad  we  any  sick- 
ness on  board?  No.  We  must  produce  the  ship  doctor,  the  list  of  passengers,  and 
manifest  of  cargo.  We  had  no  cargo.  There  were  a dozen  passengers.  It  was  dif- 
ficult to  find  fault  with  us.  No  one  was  ill.  We  wanted  coal.  What  was  the  matter? 
We  had  no  trouble  at  Hongkong.  We  could  buy  all  the  coal  we  wanted  there,  but 
preferred  this  station.  We  had  proposed  to  have  our  warships  cleaned  up  at  Nagasaki, 
but  there  were  objections  raised.  So  the  job  went  to  the  docks  at  Hongkong,  and 
good  gold  with  it.  Why  was  this?  Oh  yes;  Japan  wanted,  in  the  war  between  the 
United  States  and  Spain,  to  be  not  merely  formally,  but  actually  neutral!  The 
fact  is  that  the  Japanese  Empire  is  not  pleased  with  us.  They  had,  in  imperial  cir- 
cles, a passion  for  Honolulu,  and  intimated  their  grief.  Now  they  are  annoyed 
because  that  little  indemnity  for  refusing  the  right  to  land  Japanse  labor  was 
paid  by  the  Hawaiian  Government  before  the  absorption  into  the  United  States. 
As  the  Hawaiian  diplomatic  correspondence  about  this  was  conducted  with  more 
asperity  than  tact,  if  peace  were  the  purpose,  it  was  a good  sore  place  for  the 
Japanese  statesmen  to  rub,  and  they  resent  in  the  newspapers  the  facile  and  cheap 
pacification  resulting  from  the  influence  of  the  United  States.  In  addition  the 
Japanese  inhabitants,  though  they  have  a larger  meal  than  they  can  speedily  digest 
in  Formosa,  are  not  touched  with  unqualified  pleasurable  feeling  because  we  have 
the  Philippines  in  our  grasp.  If  Japan  is  to  be  the  great  power  of  the  Pacific,  it  is 
inconvenient  to  her  for  us  to  hold  the  Hawaiian,  the  Aleutian  and  the  Philippine 
groups  of  islands.  The  Philippines  have  more  natural  resources  than  all  the  islands 
of  Japan,  and  our  Aleutian  Islands  that  are  waiting  for  development  would  prob- 
ably be  found,  if  thoroughly  investigated,  one  of  our  great  and  good  bargains.  The 
average  American  finds  himself  bothered  to  have  to  treat  the  Japanese  seriously, 
out  we  must,  for  they  take  themselves  so,  and  are  rushing  the  work  on  new  ships  of 
war  so  that  they  will  come  out  equal  with  ourselves  in  sea  power.  They  have  ready 
for  war  one  hundred  thousand  men.  If  we  did  not  hold  any  part  of  the  Pacific 
Coast,  this  might  be  a matter  of  indifference,  but  we  have  three  Pacific  States,  and 
there  is  no  purpose  to  cede  them  to  the  Japanese.  It  would  not  be  statesmanship 


412 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


to  give  up  the  archipelagoes  we  possess,  even  if  we  consider  them  as  lands  to  hold  for 
the  hereafter.  It  is  not  deniable  that  the  Japanese  have  good  reason  to  stand  off  for 
strict  examination  the  ships  of  other  nations  that  call  at  their  ports.  The  British 
and  Chinese  have  had  an  experience  of  the  bubonic  plague  at  Hongkong,  and  the 
Japanese  are  using  all  the  power  of  arms  and  the  artifice  of  science  they  possess  to 
keep  aloof  from  the  disastrous  disease,  which  is  most  contagious.  The  China  had 
called  at  Hongkong,  and  hence  the  sharp  attentions  at  a coaling  station  where  there 
are  about  seventy-five  thousand  inhabitants  of  the  Japanese  quarters,  which  are  an 
exhibit  of  Old  Japan,  and  most  interesting.  Nagasaki  has,  indeed,  the  true  Japanese 
flavor.  If  there  had  been  a sick  man  on  our  ship  we  should  have  been  quarantined. 
Further  on  we  were  halted  in  the  night  off  the  city  of  Kobe,  to  the  sound  of  the 
firing  of  a cannon,  for  we  had  dropped  there  a passenger,  Mr.  Tilden,  the  Hongkong 
agent  of  the  Pacific  Mail  line,  and  if  our  ship  had  been  infected  with  plague  he  might 
have  passed  it  on  to  Japan!  I had  gone  to  bed,  and  was  called  up  to  confront  the 
representative  of  the  Imperial  Government  of  the  Japanese,  and  make  clear  to  his 
eyes  that  I had  not  returned  on  account  of  the  plague.  Authorities  of  Japan  treat 
people  who  are  quarantined  in  a way  that  removes  the  stress  of  disagreeableness. 
All  are  taken  ashore  and  to  a hospital.  There  is  furnished  a robe  of  the  country, 
clean  and  tidy  in  all  respects.  The  common  clothing  is  removed  and  fumigated. 
It  is  necessary  for  each  quarantined  person  to  submit  to  this  and  also  to  a bath,  which 
is  a real  luxury,  and  after  it  comes  a cup  of  tea  and  a light  lunch.  There  was  an 
actual  case  of  plague  on  an  American  ship  at  this  city  of  Kobe  not  long  ago,  at  least, 
it  was  so  reported  with  pretty  strong  corroborative  evidence.  The  symptom  in  the 
case  on  the  ship  was  that  of  a fever,  probably  pneumonia.  The  man  was  landed 
and  examined.  The  plague  fever  resembles  pneumonia  at  an  early  stage.  The 
Japanese  physicians  found  signs  of  plague  and  the  end  came  soon.  The  sick  man, 
taken  ashore  in  the  afternoon,  at  nine  o’clock  was  dead,  transferred  at  once  to  the 
crematory,  in  two  hours  reduced  to  ashes,  and  the  officers  of  the  ship  informed  that 
if  they  wanted  to  carry  the  “remains”  to  America  they  would  be  sealed  in  a jar  and 
certified.  The  ship’s  officers  did  not  want  ashes,  and  the  Japs  hold  the  jar.  They 
are  so  “advanced”  that  cremation  is  becoming  a fad  with  them.  It  would  not  be 
surprising  to  find  that  the  impending  danger  of  the  Japanese  is  excessi\e  imitati\e 
progress,  which  is  not  certain  to  he  exactly  the  right  thing  for  them.  They  have 
reached  a point  where  it  is  worth  while  to  examine  the  claim  of  new  things  with 
much  care  before  adopting  them.  We  have  very  high  authority  to  examine  all  things 
for  goodness  sake,  before  committing  ourselves  to  hold  them  fast.  We  had  to  take 
aboard  eighteen  hundred  tonsof  coalatNagasaki.  Afleet  of  arks  with  thirty  tons  of  Jap- 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


413 


anese  coal  approached  and  gathered  around  the  ship,  which  has  sixteen  places  to  throw 
coal  into  the  bunkers.  So  the  coal  business  was  carried  on  by  from  twelve  to  fifteen 
gangs,  each  of  about  ten  men  and  twenty  women!  The  latter  were  sturdy  creatures, 
modestly  attired  in  rough  jackets  and  skirts.  There  were  not  far  from  thirty  bamboo 
baskets  to  the  gang.  One  man  stood  at  the  porthole,  and  each  second  emptied  a 
coal  basket,  using  both  hands,  and  throwing  it  back  into  the  barge  with  one  hand, 
the  same  swing  of  the  arm  used  to  catch  the  next  basket  hurled  to  him  with  a quick, 
quiet  fling.  There  were  three  men  of  a gang  next  the  ship,  the  third  one  standing 
in  the  barge,  served  with  baskets  by  two  strings  of  women.  At  the  end  of  the  string 
furthest  from  the  ship  the  coal  was  shoveled  into  the  baskets  by  four  men,  and  there 
were  two  who  lifted  and  whirled  them  to  the  women.  The  numbers  and  order  of 
the  laborers  varied  a little  at  times  from  this  relation,  yet  very  little,  but  frequently  a 
lump  of  coal  was  passed  without  using  a basket.  The  work  of  coaling  was  carried 
on  all  night,  and  about  thirty-six  hours  of  labor  put  in  for  a day.  There  was  a great 
deal  of  talking  among  the  laborers  during  the  few  moments  of  taking  places,  and 
some  of  it  in  tones  of  high  excitement,  but  once  the  human  machine  started  there  was 
silence,  and  then  the  scratching  of  the  shovels  in  the  coal,  and  the  crash  of  the  coal 
thrown  far  into  the  ship  were  heard.  It  is,  from  the  American  contemplation, 
shocking  for  women  to  do  such  work,  but  they  did  their  share  with  unflinching 
assiduity,  and  without  visible  distress.  When  the  night  work  was  going  on  they  were 
evidently  fatigued,  and  at  each  change  that  allowed  a brief  spell  of  waiting,  they 
were  stretched  out  on  the  planks  of  the  boats,  the  greater  number  still,  but  some  of 
the  younger  ones  talking  and  laughing.  There  did  not  seem  to  be  much  flirtation, 
nothing  like  as  much  as  when  both  sexes  of  Europeans  are  engaged  in  the  same  wheat 
or  barley  field  harvesting.  There  wrere,  it  is  needful  to  remark,  neither  lights  nor 
shadows  to  invite  the  blanishments  of  courting.  The  coal  handling  women  wrere 
from  fifteen  to  fifty  years  of  age,  and  all  so  busy  the  inevitable  babies  must  have  been 
left  at  home.  I have  never  seen  many  American  or  European  babies  “good”  as 
weary  mothers  use  the  word,  as  the  commonest  Japanese  kids.  They  do  not  know 
how  to  cry,  and  a girl  of  ten  years  will  relieve  a mother  of  personal  care  by  carrying  a 
baby,  tied  up  in  a scarf,  just  its  head  sticking  out  (I  wish  they  could  be  induced  to 
use  more  soap  and  water  on  the  coppery  heads,  from  which  pairs  of  intent  eyes  stare 
out  with  sharp  inquiry,  as  wild  animals  on  guard).  The  girl  baby  bearer,  having  tied 
the  child  so  that  it  appears  to  be  a bag,  slings  it  over  her  shoulder,  and  it  interferes 
but  slightly  with  the  movements  of  the  nurse;  does  not  discernibly  embarrass  her 
movements.  The  men  colliers,  it  must  be  admitted,  are  a shade  reckless  in  the 
scarcity  of  their  drapery  when  they  are  handling  baskets  in  the  presence  of  ladies. 


414 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


They  do  usually  wear  shirts  with  short  tails  behind,  and  very  economical  breech- 
cloths,  but  their  shirts  are  sleeveless,  and  the  buttons  are  missing  on  collar  and 
bosom.  The  only  clothing  beneath  the  knees  consists  of  straw  sandals.  The 
precipitation  of  perspiration  takes  care  of  itself.  There  are  no  pocket  handkerchiefs. 

Nagasaki  has  good  hotels,  a pleasant,  airy  European  quarter,  and  shops  stored 
with  the  goods  of  the  country,  including  magnificent  vases  and  other  pottery  that 
should  meet  the  appreciation  of  housekeepers.  There  is  no  city  in  Japan  more 
typically  Japanese,  few  in  which  the  line  is  so  finely  and  firmly  drawn  between  the 
old  and  the  new,  and  that  to  the  advantage  of  both. 

It  is  hardly  possible  for  those  who  do  not  visit  Japan  to  realize  what  a hitter 
struggle  the  people  have  had  with  their  native  land,  or  how  brilliant  the  victory  they 
have  won.  The  passage  of  the  China  through  the  inner  sea  and  far  along  the  coast 
gave  opportunity  to  see,  as  birds  might,  a great  deal  of  the  country.  The  inner  sea  is 
a wonderfully  attractive  sheet  of  water,  twice  as  long  as  Long  Island  Sound,  and 
studded  with  islands,  a panorama  of  the  picturesque  mountains  everywhere,  deep 
nooks,  glittering  shoals,  fishing  villages  by  the  sea,  boats  rigged  like  Americans, 
flocks  of  white  sails  by  day,  and  lights  at  night,  that  suggest  strings  of  street  lamps. 
The  waters  teem  with  life.  Evidently  the  sea  very  largely  affords  industry  and  sus- 
tenance to  the  people,  for  there  is  no  bottom  or  prairie  land,  as  ure  call  the  level  or 
slightly  rolling  fields  in  America.  There  was  not  a spot  from  first  to  last  visible  in 
Japan,  as  seen  from  the  water,  or  in  an  excursion  on  the  land,  where  there  is  room  to 
turn  around  a horse  and  plow.  The  ground  is  necessarily  turned  up  with  spades  and 
mellowed  with  hoes  and  rakes,  all,  of  course,  by  human  hands.  This  is  easy  com- 
pared with  the  labor  in  constructing  terraces.  The  mountains  have  been  conquered 
to  a considerable  extent  in  this  way,  and  it  is  sensational  to  see  how  thousands  oi 
steep  places  have  been  cut  and  walled  into  gigantic  stairways,  covering  slopes  that 
could  hardly  answer  for  goat  pasture,  until  the  shelves  with  soil  placed  on  them 
for  cultivation  have  been  wrought,  and  the  terraces  are  like  wonderful  ladders  hearing 
against  the  skies.  So  rugged  is  the  ground,  however,  that  many  mountains  are 
unconquerable,  and  there  are  few  traces  of  the  terraces,  though  here  and  there,  viewed 
from  a distance,  the  evidences  that  land  is  cultivated  as  stairways  leaning  against 
otherwise  inaccessible  declivities.  I have  never  seen  elsewhere  anything  that  spoke 
so  unequivocably  of  the  endless  toil  of  men,  women  and  children  to  find  footings 
upon  which  to  sow  the  grain  and  fruit  that  sustain  life.  It  is  not  to  be  questioned 
that  the  report,  one-twelfth,  only  of  the  surface  of  Japan  is  under  tillage,  is  accu- 
rate. The  country  is  more  mountainous  than  the  Alleghenies,  and  some  of  it  barren 
as  the  wildest  of  the  Rockies  on  the  borders  of  the  bad  lands,  and  it  is  volcanic,  re- 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


415 


markably  so,  even  more  subject  to  earthquakes  than  the  Philippines.  The  whole  of 
Japan  occupies  about  as  much  space  as  the  two  Dakotas  or  the.  Philippines,  and 
the  population  is  forty-two  millions.  With  work  as  careful  and  extensive  as  that 
of  the  agricultural  mountaineers  of  Japan,  the  Dakotas  would  support  one  hundred 
million  persons.  But  they  would  have  to  present  the  washing  away  of  the  soil  and 
the  waste  through  improvident  ignorance  or  careless  profligacy  of  any  fertilizer,  or 
of  any  trickle  of  water  needed  for  irrigation.  One  of  the  features  of  the  terraces  is 
that  the  rains  are  saved  by  the  walls  that  sustain  the  soil,  and  the  gutters  that  guide 
the  water  conserve  it,  because  paved  with  pebbles  and  carried  down  by  easy  stages, 
irrigating  one  shelf  after  another  of  rice  or  vegetables,  whatever  is  grown,  until 
the  whole  slope  not  irreclaimable  is  made  to  blossom  and  the  mountain  torrents 
saved  in  their  descent,  not  tearing  away  the  made  ground,  out  of  which  the  means 
of  living  grows,  but  percolating  through  scores  of  narrow  beds,  gardens  suspended 
like  extended  ribbons  of  verdure  on  volcanic  steeps,  refreshing  the  crops  to  be  at  last 
ripened  by  the  sunshine.  This  is  a lesson  for  the  American  farmer — to  be  studied 
more  closely  than  imitated — to  grow  grass,  especially  clover,  to  stop  devastation  by 
creeks,  with  shrubbery  gifted  with  long  roots  to  save  the  banks  of  considerable 
streams,  and,  where  there  is  stone,  use  it  to  save  the  land  now  going  by  every  fresh- 
water rivulet  and  rivers  to  the  seas,  to  the  irreparable  loss  of  mankind.  It  is  the 
duty  of  man  who  inherits  the  earth  that  it  does  not  escape  from  him,  that  his 
inheritance  is  not  swept  away  by  freshets.  We  are  growing  rapidly,  in  America,  in 
the  understanding  of  this  subject,  beginning  to  comprehend  the  necessity  of  giving 
the  land  that  bears  crops  the  equivalent  of  that  which  is  taken  from  it,  that  the 
vital  capital  of  future  generations  may  not  be  dissipated  and  the  people  grow  ever 
poor  and  at  last  perish. 

A ride  in  a jinrikisha,  a two-wheeler,  with  a buggy  top  and  poles  for  the  biped 
horse  to  trot  between,  from  Nagasaki  to  a fishing  village  over  the  mountains,  .five 
miles  away,  passing  at  the  start  through  the  Japanese  quarter,  long  streets  of  shops, 
populous  and  busy,  many  diligent  in  light  manufacturing  work,  and  all  scant  in 
clothing — the  journey  continuing  in  sharp  climbs  alongside  steep  places  and  beside 
deep  ravines,  the  slopes  elaborately  terraced,  and  again  skirting  the  swift  curves  of  a 
rapid  brook  from  the  mountains,  that  presently  gathered  and  spread  over  pretty 
beds  of  gravel,  providing  abundant  fresh  water  bathing,  in  which  a school  of  boys, 
leaving  a small  guard  for  a light  supply  of  clothing  ashore— the  ride  ending  in  a 
village  of  fishermen  that,  by  the  count  of  the  inhabitants,  should  be  a town— per- 
mitted close  observation  of  the  Japanese  in  a city  and  a village,  on  their  sky-scraping 
gardens  and  in  the  road,  going  to  and  coming  from  market,  as  well  as  in  places  of 


416 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


roadside  entertainment;  and  at  last  a seaside  resort,  in  whose  shade  a party  of  globe- 
trotters were  lunching,  some  of  them,  I hear,  trying  to  eat  raw  fish.  There  could 
hardly  have  been  contrived  a more  instructive  exhibit  of  Japan  and  the  Japanese. 
The  road  was  obstructed  in  several  places  by  cows  bearing  bales  of  goods  from  the 
city  to  the  country,  and  produce  from  the  hanging  gardens  to  the  streets,  an  occa- 
sional horse  mustered  in,  and  also  a few  oxen.  The  beast  of  burden  most  frequently 
overtaken  or  encountered  was  the  cow,  and  a majority  of  the  laborers  were  women. 
There  were  even  in  teams  of  twos  and  fours,  carrying  heavy  luggage,  men  and  women, 
old,  middle-aged  and  young,  barefooted  or  shod  with  straw,  not  overloaded,  as  a rule, 
and  some  walking  as  if  they  had  performed  their  tasks  and  were  going  home.  On  the 
road  it  was  patent  there  was  extraordinary  freedom  from  care  as  to  clothing,  and  no 
feeling  of  prejudice  or  dismay  if  portions  of  it  esteemed  absolutely  essential  in  North 
America  and  Europe  had  been  left  behind  or  was  awaiting  return  to  the  possessor. 
This  applies  to  both  sexes.  The  day  was  warm,  even  hot,  and  the  sun  shone  fiercely 
on  the  turnpike — for  that  is  what  we  would  call  it — making  walking,  with  or  without 
loads,  a heating  exercise.  Even  the  bearing  of  baskets,  and  the  majority  of  the 
women  carried  them,  was  justification  under  the  customs  of  the  country  for  baring 
the  throat  and  chest  to  give  ample  scope  for  breathing,  and  there  is  no  restriction  in 
the  maintenance  of  the  drooping  lines  of  demarkation,  according  to  the  most  liberal 
fashionable  allowances,  in  dispensing  with  all  the  misty  suggestions  of  laces  to  the 
utmost  extent  artists  could  ask,  for  the  study  of  figures.  Beauty  had  the  advan- 
tage of  the  fine  curves  of  full  inhalations  of  the  air  that  circulated  along  the  dusty 
paths  between  the  sea  and  the  mountains.  It  is  a puzzle  that  the  artists  of  Japan 
have  not  better  improved  the  unparalleled  privilege  of  field  and  wall  sketching,  that 
they  enjoy  to  a degree  not  equalled  within  the  permission  of  the  conventional  con- 
struction of  that  which  is  becoming  in  the' absence  of  the  daylight  habilaments 
of  any  great  and  polite  people.  The  art  schools  of  Japan,  out  of  doors,  on  the 
highway,  even,  cannot  fail  to  produce  atmospheric  influences  of  which  the  world  will 
have  visions  hereafter,  and  the  Latin  quarter  of  Taris  will  lose  its  reputation  that 
attracts  and  adjusts  nature  to  inspiration. 

When  we  had  succeeded,  at  Kobe,  in  convincing  the  authorities  that  none  of  the 
passengers  on  the  China  had  picked  up  the  plague  at  Hongkong,  we  put  out  into  the 
big  sea,  and  shaped  our  course  for  the  fairer  land  so  far  away,  not  exactly  a straight 
line,  for  the  convexity  of  the  earth  that  includes  the  water,  for  the  ocean— particu- 
larly the  Pacific — is  rounded  so  that  the  straightest  line  over  its  surface  is  a curved 
lino,  if  astronomically  mentioned.  e struck  out  on  the  great  Northern  circle,  pur- 
posing to  run  as  high  as  the  forty-eighth  parallel,  almost  to  our  Alutian  Islands, 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


■117 


and  pursued  our  course  in  full  view,  the  bald  cliffs  of  Japan  changing  their  color  with 
the  going  down  of  the  sun.  When  morning  came  the  purple  bulk  of  the  bestirring 
little  empire  still  reminded  us  of  the  lights  and  shadows  of  Asia  and  the  missionary 
labors  of  Sir  Edwin  Arnold,  which  have  a flavor  of  the  classics  and  a remembrance 
of  the  Scriptures.  “Yonder,”  said  the  Captain,  “is  the  famous  mountain  of  Japan, 
Fugeyana.  “It  is  not  very  clearly  seen,  for  it  is  distant.  Oh,  you  are  looking  too 
low  down  and  see  only  the  foot-hills — that  is  it,  away  up  in  the  sky!”  It  was 
there,  a peak  so  lofty  that  it  is  solitary.  We  were  to  have  seen  it  better  later,  but 
as  the  hours  passed  there  was  a dimness  that  the  light  .of  declining  day  did  not  dis- 
perse, and  the  mountain  stayed  with  us  in  a ghostly  way,  and  held  its  own  in  high 
'communion. 

As  we  were  leaving  Asian  waters  there  came  a demand  for  typhoons  that  the 
Captain  satisfied  completely,  saying  he  was  not  hunting  for  them,  but  the  worst  one 
he  ever  caught  was  five  hundred  miles  east  of  lYkohama.  The  tourists  were  rather 
troubled.  The  young  man  who  had  been  in  the  wild  waltz  of  the  Zealandia  did  not 
care  for  a typhoon.  We  had  been  blessed  with  weather  so  balmy  and  healing,  winds 
so  soft  and  waves  so  low,  that  the  ship  had  settled  down  steady  as  a river  steamboat. 
We  pushed  on,  but  the  best  the  China  could  do  was  fourteen  knots  and  a half  an 
hour,  near  350  knots  a day,  with  a consumption  of  135  tons  of  coal  in  twenty-four 
hours.  So  much  for  not  having  been  cleaned  up  so  as  to  give  the  go  of  the  fine  lines. 
The  China  had  been  in  the  habit  of  making  sixty  miles  a day  more  than  on  this 
trip,  burning  less  than  100  tons  of  coal.  As  we  climbed  in  the  ladder  of  the  parallels 
of  latitude,  we  began  to  notice  a crispness  in  the  air,  and  it  was  lovely  to  the  lungs. 
It  was  a pleasure,  and  a stimulant  surpassing  wine,  to  breathe  the  north  temperate 
ozone  again,  and  after  a while  to  catch  a frosty  savor  on  the  breeze.  We  had  for- 
gotten, for  a few  days,  that  we  were  not  in  a reeking  state  of  perspiration.  Ah!  we 
were  more  than  a thousand  miles  north  of  Manila,  and  that  is  as  far  as  the  coast  of 
Maine  to  Cuba.  The  wind  followed  us,  and  at  last  gained  a speed  greater  than  our 
own;  then  it  shifted  and  came  down  from  the  northwest.  It  was  the  wind'  that 
swept  from  Siberia,  and  Kamschatlra’s  grim  peninsula  pointed  us  out.  The  smoke 
from  our  funnels  blew  black  and  dense  away  southeast,  and  did  not  change  more 
than  a point  or  two  for  a week.  The  Pacific  began  to  look  like  the  North  Atlantic. 
There  came  a “chill  out  of  a cloud”  as  in  the  poetic  case  of  Annabel  Lee.  There 
had  been,  during  our  tropical  experience,  some  outcries  for  the  favor  of  a few  chills, 
but  now  they  were  like  the  typhoons.  When  it  was  found  that  they  might  be  had  we 
did  not  want  them.  After  all,  warm  weather  was  not  so  bad,  and  the  chills  that 
were  in  the  wind  that  whistled  from  Siberia  were  rather  objectionable.  It  was 


418 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


singular  to  call  for  one,  two,  three  blankets,  and  then  hunt  up  overcoats.  White- 
trousers  disappeared  two  or  three  days  after  the  white  coats.  Straw  hats  were  called 
for  by  the  wind.  One  white  cap  on  an  officer's  head  responded  alone  to  the  swarm 
of  white  caps  on  the  water.  The  roll  of  the  waves  impeded  our  great  northern  circle. 
We  could  have  made  it,  hut  we  should  have  had  to  roll  with  the  waves.  We  got  no 
higher  than  45  degrees.  We  had  our  two  Thursdays,  and  thought  of  the  fact  that  on 
the  mystical  meridian  180,  where  three  days  get  mixed  up  in  one!  The  Pacific 
Ocean,  from  pole  to  pole,  so  free  on  the  line  where  the  dispute  as  to  the  day  it 
is,  goes  on  forever,  that  only  one  small  island  is  subject  to  the  witchery  of  mathe- 
matics, and  the  proof  in  commonplace  transactions  unmixed  with  the  skies  that  what- 
ever may  be  the  matter  with  the  sun — the  earth  do  move,  is  round,  do  roll  over,  and 
does  not  spill  off  the  sea  in  doing  so.  At  last  came  shrill  head  winds,  and  as  we 
added  fifteen  miles  an  hour  to  this  speed,  the  harp  strings  in  the  rigging  were 
touched  with  weird  music,  and  we  filled  our  lungs  consciously  and  conscientiously 
with  American  air,  experiencing  one  of  the  old  sensations,  better  than  anything  new. 

It  was  figured  out  that  we  were  within  a thousand  miles  of  the  continent,  and 
were  getting  home.  When  one  has  been  to  the  Philippines,  what’s  a thousand  miles 
or  two!  ‘TIello,  Captain  Seabury!  It  is  only  about  a thousand  miles  right  ahead 
to  the  land.  You  know  what  land  it  is,  don’t  you?  Well,  now,  you  may  break  the 
shaft  or  burst  the  boilers,  fling  the  ship  to  the  sperm  whales,  like  the  one  that  was 
the  only  living  thing  we  saw  since  Japan  entered  into  the  American  clouds  of  the 
West.  We  are  only  a thousand  miles  away  from  the  solid,  sugary  sweet,  redolent, 
ripe  American  soil,  and  if  there  is  anything  the  matter  we  do  not  mind,  why  we 
will  just  take  a boat  and  pull  ashore.”  Rut  we  would  have  had  a hard  time  if  the 
Captain  had  taken  us  up  in  the  flush  of  the  hilarity  that  laughed  at  a thousand  miles, 
when  the  breeze  brought  us  the  faint  first  hints  that  we  were  almost  home,  after  a 
voyage  of  five  thousand  leagues.  The  wind  shifted  to  the  south  and  increased 
until  it  roared,  and  the  waves  were  as  iron  tipped  with  blue  and  silver,  hurling 
their  salty  crests  over  our  towering  ship:  and  we  were  in  the  grasp — 

On  the  Pacific  of  the  terrific 

Storm  King  of  the  Equinox. 

Mr.  Longfellow  mentioned  the  storm  wind  gigantic,  that  shook  the  Atlantic  at 
the  time  of  the  equinox— the  one  that  urges  the  boiling  surges  bearing  seaweed  from 
the  rocks;  and  all  those  disappointed  because  they  had  not  bounded  on  the  billows 
of  the  briny  enough  for  healthy  exercises,  were  satisfied  in  the  reception  by  the  tre- 
mendous Pacific  when  nigh  the  shore,  which  was  once  the  western  boundary,  but 
is  so  no  more,  of  that  blessed  America,  of  which  her  sons  grow  fonder  the  farthei 


BRIDGE  OVER  RIVER  NAIG,  CONNECTING  SARA  CRUZ  ROAD  WITH  TOWN  OF  NAIG,  PHILIPPINES, 


A HIGHWAY  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


NATIVE  DWELLING  IN  SUBURBS  OF  MANILA. 


KODAK  SNAPPED  AT  JAPAN. 


421 


they  roam.  God’s  country,  as  the  boys  and  girls  call  it  reverently,  when  they  are 
sailing  the  seas,  was  veiled  from  us  in  a fog  that  blanketed  the  deep.  For  five 
thousand  miles  our  ship  had  been  in  a remorseless  solitude.  No  voice  had  come  to 
us;  no  spark  of  intelligence  from  the  universe  touched  us,  save  from  the  stars 
and  the  sun,  but  at  the  hour  of  the  night,  and  the  point  of  the  compass,  our  navigator 
had  foretold,  we  should  hear  the  deep-throated  horn  on  Eeyes  point — it  came 
to  us  out  of  the  gloomy  abyss — and  science  had  not  failed.  Across  the  trackless 
waste  we  had  been  guided  aright,  and  there  was  music  the  angels  might  have  envied 
in  the  hoarse  notes  of  the  fog-hern  that  welcomed  the  wanderers  home. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 


OUR  PICTURE  GALLERY. 

Annotations  and  Illustrations — Portraits  of  Heroes  of  the  War  in  the  Array  and 
Navy,  and  of  the  Highest  Public  Responsibilities — Admirals  and  Generals, 
the  President  and  Cabinet — Photographs  of  Scenes  and  Incidents — The 
Characteristics  of  the  Filipinos — Their  Homes,  Dresses  and  Peculiarit.es  in 
Sun  Pictures — The  Picturesque  People  of  Our  New  Possessions. 

The  portrait  of  President  McKinley  is  from  the  photograph  that  seems  to  his 
friends  upon  the  whole  the  most  striking  of  his  likenesses.  That  of  the  Secretary 
of  State,  the  Honorable  John  Hay,  is  certainly  from  the  latest  and  best  of  his 
photos.  The  Postmaster  General,  the  Honorable  Charles  Emory  Smith,  and  Secre- 
tary Bliss,  are  presented  in  excellent  form  and  the  whole  Cabinet 

with  unusual  faithfulness.  Our  naval  and  military  heroes  in  the  war 

that  has  introduced  the  American  nation  to  the  nations  of  the  earth  as  a belligerent 
of  the  first  class,  cannot  become  loo  familiar  to  the  people,  for  they  arc  of  the  stuff 
that  brightens  with  friction,  and  the  more  it  is  worn  gives  higher  proof  that  it  is 
of  both  the  precious  metals  in  war,  gold  and  steel. 

Admiral  Dewey,  as  we  have  set  forth  in  this  volume,  is  not  thus  far  fairly  dealt 
with  in  the  pictures  that  have  been  taken.  He  is  a surprise  to  those  who  meet  him 
face  to  face — so  far  has  photography  failed  to  adequately  present  him,  but  the 
portrait  we  give  is  the  best  that  has  been  made  of  him. 

Major-General  Merritt  retains  the  keen,  clear  cut  face,  and  the  figure  and  bearing 
of  an  ideal  soldier  that  has  characterized  him  since,  as  a youth  just  from  West  Point, 
he  entered  the  army  and  won  his  wayby  his  courage  and  courtesy, his  brilliant  conduct 
and  excellent  intelligence,  his  dashing  charges  and  superb  leadership,  to  a distin- 
guished position  and  the  affectionate  regard  of  the  army  and  the  people.  In  the 
Indian  wars,  after  the  bloody  struggle  of  the  States  was  over,  he  outrode  the  Indians 
on  the  prairies  and  was  at  once  their  conqueror  and  pacificator.  He  ranks  in  chi\- 
alry  with  the  knights,  and  his  work  at  Manila  was  the  perfection  of  campaigning 
that  produced  conclusive  results  with  a comparatively  small  shedding  of  blood. 

The  likeness  of  the  Archbishop  of  Manila  was  presented  me  by  His  Grace  at 
the  close  of  a personal  interview,  and  represents  him  as  he  is.  The  chapter  devoted 
to  him  is  meant  to  do  him  simple  justice  as  a man  and  priest.  The  fact  that  he 
bestowed  upon  me  in  the  inscription  with  which  he  greatly  increased  the  value  of  his 

122 


OUE  PICTUEE  GALLEEY. 


423 

portrait  a military  dignity  to  which  I have  no  title  is  an  expression  only  of  his  friend- 
liness. He  frankly  stated  his  pleasure  in  meeting  an  American  who  would  convey  to 
the  President  of  the  United  States  the  message  he  gave  me  about  the  American 
army,  to  which  he  was  indebted  for  security  and  peace  of  mind. 

General  Aguinaldo  gave  me  his  photograph,  and  the  flag  of  the  Filipinos  with 
him  in  the  effort  to  establish  an  independent  government,  republican  in  form.  One 
is  not  always  sure  of  that  which  happens  in  the  Philippines,  even  when  one  reads 
about  it.  I am  prepared  to  believe  that  there  is  much  truth  in  the  dispatch  saying 
a majority  of  the  Congress  of  the  insurgents  at  Molores  favor  annexation  to  the 
United  States.  The  whole  truth  probably  is  that  they  would  gladly  have  this  country 
their  Protector  at  large,  supreme  in  the  affairs  international,  they  to  legislate  in  re- 
spect to  local  affairs.  They  need  to  know,  however,  that  their  Congress  must  be- 
come a territorial  legislature,  and  that  the  higher  law  for  them  is  to  be  the  laws  of 
Congress.  The  Philippine  flag  is  oriental  in  cut  and  color,  having  red  and  blue  bars 
— a white  obtuse  angle — the  base  to  the  staff,  and  a yellow  moon  with  fantastic  dec- 
orations occupying  the  field.  This  flag  is  one  that  Admiral  Dewey  salutes  with  re- 
spect. General  Aguinaldo  is  giving  much  of  his  strength  to  the  production  of 
proclamations,  and  his  literary  labors  should  be  encouraged. 

On  a September  morning  two  years  ago,  Dr.  Jose  Eizal  was  shot  by  a file  of 
soldiers  on  the  Manila  Luneta,  the  favorite  outing  park,  bordering  on  the  bay.  The 
scene  was  photographed  at  the  moment  the  Doctor  stood  erect  before  the  firing  squad, 
and  the  signal  from  the  officer  in  command  was  awaited  for  the  discharge  of  the 
volley  killing  the  most  intellectual  man  of  his  race.  Dr.  Eizal  is  known  as  the 
Tagalo  Martyr.  The  Tagalos  are  of  the  dominant  tribe  of  Malays.  General  Aguin- 
aldo is  of  this  blood,  as  are  the  great  majority  of  the  insurgents.  The  Doctor  is 
more  than  the  martyr  of  a tribe.  He  is  the  most  talented  and  accomplished 
man  his  people  and  country  has  produced.  A history  of  Luzon  from  his  pen  is  a 
bulky  volume  full  of  facts.  I was  not  able  to  procure  all  of  his  books.  Anyone  in 
Manila  found  in  possession  of  one  of  them  during  Spanish  rule,  would  have  been 
taken  to  the  ground  selected  for  human  butchery  in  the  appointed  place  of  fes- 
tivity,  and  shot  as  he  was,  making  a holiday  for  the  rulers  of  the  islands.  He  wrote 
two  novels,  “Touch  Us  Hot”  and  “The  Filibusters,”  the  latter  a sequel  of  the  former. 
These  are  books  using  the  weapons  put  into  the  hand  of  genius  to  smite  oppressors 
in  command  of  the  force  of  arms.  The  novels  are  said  to  be  interesting  as  novels, 
■ — rather  sensational  in  their  disregard  of  the  personal  reputation  of  his  foes,  the  friars, 
but  all  along  between  the  lines  there  was  argument,  appeals  for  the  freedom  of  the 


424 


OUR  PICTURE  GALLERY. 


Filipinos,  for  freedom  of  speech,  conscience  and  country.  There  are  pamphlets 
printed  the  size  of  an  average  playing  card,  from  thirty  to  forty  pages  each,  one 
“Don  Rodriguez,”  and  another  “The  Telephone.”  These  I obtained  in  Hongkong 
from  the  hands  of  the  niece — daughter  of  the  sister  of  the  Doctor, — and  she  pre- 
sented me  also  his  poem  written  when  in  the  shadow  of  death,  of  which  this  volume 
gives  a prose  translation.  The  poem  is  the  farewell  of  the  author  to  his  friends, 
his  country  and  the  world.  It  is  given  in  prose  because  in  that  style  the  spirit  of  the 
poet,  indeed  the  poetry  itself,  can  be  rendered  with  better  results,  than  by  striving  to 
sustain  tire  poetic  form.  The  poem  would  be  regarded  as  happy  and  affecting  in 
the  thought  that  is  in  it,  the  images  in  which  the  ideas  gleam,  the  pathos  of  resig- 
nation, the  ascendency  of  hope,  if  there  were  nothing  in  the  attendant  circumstances 
that  marked  it  with  the  blood  of  historic  tragedy.  This  poetry  that  it  would  have 
been  high  treason  to  own  in  Manila,  for  it  would  not  have  been  safe  in  any  drawer 
however  secret,  was  treasured  by  the  relatives  of  the  martyr  at  Hongkong.  The 
niece  spoke  excellent  English,  and  there  was  at  once  surprise  and  gratification  in  the 
family  that  an  American  should  be  interested  in  the  Doctor  who  sacrificed  himself  to 
the  freedom  of  his  pen,  so  much  as  to  ascend  the  steep  places  of  the  cit}r  to  seek  his 
writings  for  the  sake  of  the  people  for  whose  redemption  he  died.  On  the  page 
showing  the  face  of  the  Doctor  and  the  scene  of  his  execution,  there  are  two  men 
in  black,  the  victim  standing  firm  as  a rock  to  be  shot  down,  and  the  priest  retiring 
after  holding  the  crucifix  to  the  lips  of  the  dying;  and  the  portrait  of  the  beautiful 
woman  to  whom  the  poet  was  married  a few  hours  before  he  was  killed.  It  is  said 
that  Rizal  wanted  to  go  to  Cuba,  but  Captain-General  Y eyler  answered  a request 
from  him  that  he  might  live  there,  that  he  would  be  shot  on  sight  if  he  set  foot 
on  Cuban  soil.  Rizal,  hunted  hard,  attempted  to  escape  in  disguise  on  a Spanish 
troop  ship  carrying- discharged  soldiers  to  Spain,  but  was  detected  while  on  the 
Red  Sea,  returned  to  Manila  and  shot  to  death.  I stood  on  the  curbstone  that  bor- 
ders the  Luneta  along  the  principal  pleasure  drive,  between  the  whispering  trees 
and  the  murmuring  surf  of  the  bay,  just  where  the  martyred  poet  and  patriot  waited 
and  looked  over  .the  waters  his  eyes  beheld,  the  last  moment  before  the  crash  of  the 
rifles  that  destroyed  him,  and  in  the  distance  there  was  streaming  in  the  sunshine  the 
flag  of  our  country — the  star  spangled  banner,  and  long,  long  may  it  wave,  oter  a 
land  of  the  free  and  home  of  the  brave! 

The  picture  of  the  cathedral  shows  a tower  that  was  shattered  from  the  founda- 
tion to  the  cross  by  the  earthquake  of  1863.  Ambitious  architecture  must  conform  to 
the  conditions  imposed  by  such  disasters,  and  the  great  edifice  is  greatly  changed. 


OUR  PICTURE  GALLERY. 


425 


In  our  gallery  we  treat  Admirals  Sampson  and  Schley  as  the  President  set  the 
example.  As  there  was  glory  for  all  at  Santiago,  there  was  advancement  for  both. 
We  present  them  together.  The  wholesome,  manly  face  of  General  Lee  is  in  the 
gallery.  His  country  knows  him  and  thinks  of  him  well. 

The  bombarded  church  of  Cavite  shows  that  shells  spare  nothing  sacred  in  their 
flights  and  concussions.  The  Bridge  of  Spain  is  the  one  most  crossed  in  passing 
between  the  old  walled  city  and  the  newer  town  that  was  not  walled,  but  was  for- 
midably intrenched  where  rice  swamps  were  close  to  the  bay.  The  public  buildings 
aie  commodious  and  would  be  higher,  but  the  earth  is  uncertain,  and  sky-scrapers 
are  forbidden  by  common  prudence.  Our  picture  of  the  principal  gate  of  the  walled 
city  is  taken  truly,  but  does  not  give  the  appearance  of  extreme  antiquity,  of  the 
reality.  The  wall  looks  old  as  one  that  has  stood  in  Europe  a thousand  years. 

Naturally  the  gallery  has  many  works  of  art  representative  of  Manila.  The 
shipping  in  the  habor  is  an  advertisement  of  a commerce  once  extensive.  Each 
picture  that  shows  a woman,  a man,  or  tree;  a wood-cutter,  a fisherman,  or  a house, 
opens  for  the  spectator  a vista  that  may  be  interpreted  by  the  intelligent.  A verit- 
able picture  is  a window  that  reveals  a landscape.  That  which  is  most  valuable  in 
a gallery  like  this  is  the  perfect  truth  not  everywhere  found,  for  the  eyes  that  see 
a picture  that  is  really  representative,  setting  forth  the  colors,  the  light,  and  the 
substance  of  things  find  that  which  does  not  fade  when  the  story  is  told. 

There  is  one  most  hideous  thing  in  our  gallery — that  of  the  head  of  a Spaniard, 
bleeding,  just  severed  from  the  body — the  weapon  used,  a naked  dagger  in  a clenched 
hand — around  the  ghastly  symbol  a deep  black  border.  This  is  one  of  the  ways 
of  the  Katapuna  society — the  League  of  Blood — have  of  saying  what  they  would 
have  us  understand  are  their  awful  purposes.  There  are  terrible  stories  about  this 
Blood  League — that  they  bleed  themselves  in  the  course  of  their  proceedings,  and 
each  member  signs  his  name  with  his  own  blood — that  they  establish  brotherhood 
by  mingling  their  blood  and  tasting  it.  They  are  the  sworn  enemies  of  the  Span- 
iards, and  particularly  of  the  priests.  I inquired  of  Senor  Agonc-illo,  the  Philippine 
commissioner  to  Paris,  whether  those  bloody  stories  were  true.  He  scoffed  at  the 
notion  that  they  might  be  so,  and  laughed  and  shouted  “No,  no!”  as  if  he  was  having 
much  fun.  But  Agoncillo  is  a lawyer  and  a diplomat,  and  I had  heard  so  much 
of  this  horrid  society  I did  not  feel  positive  it  was  certain  that  its  alleged  blood 
rites  w'ere  fictitious.  Of  one  thing  I am  sure — that  the  dreadful  picture  is  no  joke, 
and  was  not  meant  for  a burlesque,  though  it  might  possibly  be  expected  to  per- 
form the  office  of  a scarecrow.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  there  are  oath-bound 


OUR  PICTURE  GALLERY. 


-12(i 

secret  societies  that  are  regarded  by  the  Spaniards  as  fanatical,  superstitious,  mur- 
derous and  deserving  death. 

There  is  a good  deal  of  feeble-minded  credulity  among  the  Filipinos,  that  is 
exhibited  in  the  stories  told  by  Aguinaldo.  He  has  many  followers  who  believe  that 
lie  has  a mighty  magic,  a charm,  that  deflects  bullets  and  is  an  antidote  for  poison. 
Intelligent  people  believe  this  imbecility  is  one  of  the  great  elements  of  his  power— 
that  his  leadership  would  be  lost  if  the  supernaturalism  attached  to  him  should  go 
the  way  of  all  phantoms.  Aguinaldo  is  said  not  to  have  faith  in  the  charm,  for 
he  takes  very  good  care  of  himself. 

We  give  several  views  of  executions  at  Manila.  As  a rule,  these  pictures  are  not 
fine  productions  of  art.  They  are  taken  under  such  conditions  of  light  and  back- 
ground that  they  are  somewhat  shadowy.  This  sinister  addition  to  our  gallery 
seems  to  be  the  first  time  the  photographs  of  executions  have  been  reproduced.  The 
photos  were  not  furtively  taken.  There  is  no  secrecy  about  the  process,  no  at- 
tempts to  hide  it  from  the  Spaniards.  Executions  in  the  Philippines  were  in  the 
nature  of  dramatic  entertainments.  There  were  often  many  persons  present,  and 
ladies  as  conspicuous  as  at  bull  fights.  There  is  no  more  objections  offered  to  pho- 
tographing an  execution  than  a cock  fight,  which  is  the  sport  about  which  the 
Filipinos  are  crazily  absorbed.  It  is  the  festal  character  to  the  Spaniard  of  the 
rebel  shooting  that  permits  the  actualities  to  be  reproduced,  and  hence  these  strange 
contributions  to  our  gallery. 

Many  of  our  pictures  are  self-explanatory.  They  were  selected  to  show  things 
characteristic,  and  hence  instructive,  peasants’  customs — women  riding  buffaloes 
through  palm  groves — native  houses,  quaint  costumes.  “The  insurgent  outlook”  re- 
veals a native  house — a structure  of  grasses.  This  is  a perfect  picture.  The  south- 
ern islanders,  and  the  group  of  Moors,  the  dressing  of  the  girls,  work  in  the  fields,  the 
wealth  of  vegetation,  the  dining  room  of  the  Governor-General  prepared  for  com- 
pany, General  Merritt’s  palatial  headquarters  before  he  had  taken  the  public  prop- 
ertv  into  his  care  and  suited  it  to  his  convenience;  the  Spanish  dude  officer,  show- 
ing a young  man  contented  in  his  uniform,  and  a pony  pretty  in  his  harness. 

We  reproduce  the  war  department  map  of  the  Philippine  islands.  It  will  be 
closely  studied  for  each  island  has  become  a subject  of  American  interest.  The 
imprint  of  the  war  department  is  an  assurance  of  the  closest  attainable  accuracy.  The 
map  of  the  Hawaiian  islands  clearly  gives  them  in  their  relative  positions  and  pro- 
portions as  they  are  scattered  broadcast  in  the  Pacific.  The  Philippine  and  Hawaiian 
groups  as  they  thus  appear  will  be  found  more  extensive  than  the  general  fancy  has 


OUR  PICTURE  GALLERY. 


427 


painted  them.  The  Philippine  Archipelago  has  been  held  to  resemble  a fan,  with 
Luzon  for  the  handle.  The  shape  is  something  fantastic.  It  is  worth  while  to  note 
that  the  distance  between  the  north  coast  of  Luzon  and  the  Sulu  Archipelago  is 
equal  to  that  from  England  to  Southern  Italy. 

There  are  pictures  in  our  gallery  that  could  only  he  found  at  the  end  of  a journey 
of  ten  thousand  miles,  and  they  go  far  to  show  the  life  of  the  people  of  a country  that 
is  in  such  relations  with  ourselves  the  whole  world  is  interested.  There  is  truth- 
telling that  should  he  prized  in  photography,  and  our  picture  gallery  is  one  of  the 
most  remarkable  that  has  been  assembled. 


CHAPTER  XXY. 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 

Conditions  In  and  Around  Havana — Fortifications  and  Water  Supply  of  the  Capital 
City — Other  Sections  of  the  Pearl  of  the  Antilles — Porto  Rico,  Our  New 
Possession,  Described — Size  and  Population — Natural  Resources  and  Pro- 
ducts— Climatic  Conditions — Towns  and  Cities — Railroads  and  Other  Im- 
provements— Future  Possibilities. 

There  was  the  fortune  of  good  judgment  in  attacking  the  Spaniards  in  Cuba 
at  Santiago  and  Porto  Rico,  the  points  of  Spanish  possession  in  the  West  Indies 
farthest  south  and  east,  instead  of  striking  at  the  west,  landing  at  Pinar  del  Rio, 
the  western  province,  and  moving  upon  the  fortifications  of  Havana,  where  the  diffi- 
culties and  dangers  that  proved  so  formidable  at  Santiago  would  have  been  quad- 
rupled, and  our  losses  in  the  field  and  hospital  excessive.  The  unpreparedness  of  this 
country  for  war  has  not  even  up  to  this  time  been  appreciated  except  by  military 
experts  and  the  most  intelligent  and  intent  students  of  current  history.  The  mili- 
tary notes  prepared  in  the  War  Department  of  the  United  States  at  the  beginning 
of  the  war  with  Spain,  contain  the  following  of  Santiago  de  Cuba: 

This  city  was  founded  in  1514,  and  the  famous  Hernando  was  its  first  mayor.  It 
is  the  most  southern  place  of  any  note  on  the  island,  being  on  the  twentieth  degree 
of  latitude,  while  Havana,  the  most  northern  point  of  note,  is  23  degrees  9 minutes 
2G  seconds  north  latitude.  The  surrounding  country  is  very  mountainous,  and  the 
city  is  built  upon  a steep  slope;  the  public  square,  or  Campo  de  Marte,  is  140  to 
160  feet  above  the  sea,  and  some  of  the  houses  are  located  200  feet  high.  The  charac- 
ter of  the  soil  is  reported  to  be  more  volcanic  than  calcareous;  it  has  suffered  re- 
peatedly from  earthquakes.  It  is  the  second  city  in  the  island  with  regard  to  popu- 
lation, slightly  exceeding  that  of  Matanzas  and  Puerto  Principe.  So  far  as  Ameri- 
can commerce  is  concerned,  it  ranks  only  ninth  among  the  fifteen  Cuban  ports  of 
entry.  Tt  is  located  on  the  extreme  northern  bank  of  the  harbor  of  Santiago  de  Cuba, 
a harbor  of  the  first  class  and  one  of  the  smallest;  hence,  as  is  believed,  the  great  lia- 
bility of  its  shipping  to  infection.  According  to  the  chart  of  the  Madrid  hydro- 
graphic  bureau,  1863/ this  harbor  is,  from  its  sea  entrance  to  its  extreme  northern 
limit,  5 miles  long,  the  city  being  located  4 miles  from  its  entrance,  on  the  north- 
eastern side  of  the  harbor.  The  entrance  is  for  some  little  distance  very  narrow — 

428 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


431 


not  more  than  220  yards  wide — and  may  be  considered  about  2 miles  long,  with 
a width  varying  from  one-eighth  to  five-eighths  of  a mile.  For  the  remaining  3 
miles  the  harbor  gradually  widens,  until  at  its  northern  extremity  it  is  about  2 miles 
wide.  The  city  is  so  situated  in  a cove  of  the  harbor  that  the  opposite  shore  is 
only  about  one-half  mile  distant.  At  the  wharves  from  10  to  15  feet  of  water  is 
found,  and  within  300  to  500  yards  of  the  shore  from  20  to  30  feet.  This,  therefore, 
is  probably  the  anchorage  ground.  Three  or  more  so-called  rivers,  besides  other 
streams,  empty  into  this  harbor,  and  one  of  these,  the  Caney  River,  empties  into  the 
harbor  at  the  northern  limit  of  the  city,  so  that  its  water  flows  from  one  island  ex- 
tremity through  the  whole  harbor  into  the  sea.  The  difference  here,  as  elsewhere 
in  Cuba,  between  low  and  high  tide  is  about  2 feet.  Population  in  1877  was  40,835, 
and  5,100  houses.  This  city  is  one  of  the  most  noted  yellow-fever  districts  in  the 
island.  The  population  in  1896  was  42,000. 

The  following  has  been  reported: 

Preparations  for  mounting  new  and  heavy  ordnance  is  now  going  on  at  the  en- 
trance of  the  bay  (March  5,  1898). 

New  and  heavier  guns  are  also  ordered  for  Punta  Blanca,  on  the  right  of  the  bay 
near  Santiago  City. 

Plans  have  been  made  for  constructing  two  batteries  in  the  city  of  Santiago, 
one  about  25  yards  in  front  of  the  American  consulate  and  the  other  about  two 
blocks  in  rear. 

Cayo  Rolones,  or  Rat  Island,  located  near  the  middle  of  the  bay,  is  the  Govern- 
ment depository  for  powder,  dynamite,  and  other  explosives. 

The  elevation  on  the  right  of  the  entrance,  where  stands  Castle  Morro,  is  40 
yards  above  the  sea  level,  while  the  hill  on  the  left  is  20  yards. 

“La  Bateria  Nueva  de  la  Estrella”  is  mounted  with  four  revolving  cannons. 

The  fortifications  of  Havana  were  carefully  covered  in  the  military  notes,  and 
thus  enumerated: 

There  are  fifteen  fortifications  in  and  about  the  city  of  Havana,  more  or  less 
armed  and  garrisoned,  besides  a work  partly  constructed  and  not  armed,  called  Las 
Animas,  and  the  old  bastions  along  the  sea  wall  of  the  harbor.  These  works  are  as 
follows: 

Nos.  1 and  2 are  earthen  redans  on  the  sea  coast,  east  of  Havana. 

Yelazo  Battery,  just  east  of,  and  a part  of,  El  Morro. 

El  Morro,  a sea  coast  fort,  with  flanking  barbette  batteries,  east  of  harbor  entrance. 


432 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


The  Twelve  Apostles,  a water  battery  lying  at  the  foot  of  Morro,  with  a field 
of  fire  across  the  harbor’s  mouth.  It  is  a part  of  Morro. 

La  Cabana,  a stone-bastioned  work  with  both  land  and  water  front,  in  rear  of  El 
Morro,  and  directly  opposite  the  city  of  Havana. 

San  Diego,  a stone-bastioned  work  with  only  land  fronts,  east  of  Cabana. 

Atares,  a stone-bastioned  work  on  bill  at  southwestern  extremity  of  Havana  Bay, 
near  the  old  shipyard  called  the  arsenal. 

San  Salvador  de  la  Punta,  a stone-bastioned  work  west  of  harbor  entrance,  with 
small  advanced  and  detached  work,  built  on  a rock  near  harbor  mouth. 

La  Reina,  a stone  work,  in  shape  the  segment  of  a circle,  placed  on  the  seacoast, 
at  western  limits  of  city,  on  an  inlet  called  San  Lazardo. 

Santa  Clara,  a small  but  powerful  seacoast  battery  of  stone  and  earth,  placed 
about  II  miles  west  of  harbor. 

El  Principe,  a stone-bastioned  redoubt  west  of  Havana. 

Nos.  3 A,  3 B,  and  4 are  earthen  redans  on  the  seacoast  west  of  Havana. 

There  are,  in  addition,  several  works  built  for  defense,  but  now  used  for  other 
purposes  or  abandoned.  These  are: 

The  Torreon  de  Vigia,  a martello  tower  placed  on  the  inlet  of  San  Lazaro  opposite 
La  Reina. 

The  old  fort  called  La  Fuerza,  built  three  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago,  near  the 
present  Plaza  de  Armas,  and  now  used  for  barracks  and  public  offices. 

The  work  called  San  Nazario,  situated  north  of  El  Principe,  but  now  used  in 
connection  with  the  present  cartridge  factory,  abandoned  for  defensive  purposes. 

The  partially  constructed  fort  called  Las  Animas,  southeast  of  Principe,  lying 
on  a low  hill,  partly  built  but  useless  and  unarmed. 

The  old  sea  wall  extending  from  near  La  Punta  to  the  Plaza  de  Armas,  unarmed, 
and  useless  except  as  a parapet  for  musketry. 

The  old  arsenal,  on  the  west  of  the  inner  bay,  now  used  as  repair  works  for 
ships,  useless  for  defense. 

The  old  artillery  and  engineer  storehouses  near  La  Punta,  probably  once  used  as 
strongholds,  now  mere  storehouses  for  munitions  of  war. 

There  are,  besides,  in  the  vicinity  of  Havana,  three  old  and  now  useless  stone 
works — one  at  Chorrera,  the  mouth  of  the  Almendarez  River,  about  4 miles  from 
Havana  harbor;  another  at  Cojimar,  on  the  coast,  about  3 miles  eastward  of  Cabana, 
and  the  third  at  the  inlet  called  La  Playa  de  Mariano,  about  7 miles  west  of  Havana. 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


433 


Batteries  Nos.  1 and  2 were  equipped  with,  No.  1,  four  Hontoria  6-inch  guns; 
iwo  Nordenfeldt  6-pounders;  No.  2,  two  Krupp  12-inch  guns;  four  Hontoria 
3-inch  mortars.  The  12-inch  Krupps  were  to  stand  off  battleships  attempting  to 
force  the  harbor,  or  to  bombard  the  Morro.  The  Valago  battery,  a part  of  the  Morro, 
an  out-work  on  the  edge  of  the  cliff,  mounting  four  11-inch  Krupp  guns  separated  by 
earth  traverses. 

The  Morro,  commenced  in  1589  and  finished  in  1597,  is  important  for  historical 
associations.  It  is  a most  picturesque  structure,  and  is  useful  as  a lighthouse  and 
prison,  and  is  mounted  with  twelve  old  10-inch,  eight  old  8-inch,  and  fourteen 
old  4-inch  guns. 

Cabana,  finished  in  1774  at  a cost  of  $14,000,000,  lies  some  500  yards  southeast 
of  El  Morro,  on  the  east  side  of  Havana  Bay.  Toward  the  city  it  exposes  a vertical 
stone  wall  of  irregular  trace,  with  salients  at  intervals.  Toward  the  Morro  is  a 
bastioned  face  protected  by  a deep  ditch,  sally  port,  and  drawbridge.  Eastward  and 
southward  a beautifully  constructed  land  front  incloses  the  work.  This  front  is 
protected  by  ditches  40  or  more  feet  deep,  well  constructed  glacis,  stone  scarp,  and 
counterscarp.  Cabana  is  a magnificent  example  of  the  permanent  fortifications 
constructed  a century  ago.  Probably  10,000  men  could  be  quartered  in  it. 

The  entrance  to  Cabana  is  by  the  sally  port  that  opens  upon  the  bridge  across  the 
moat  lying  between  Cabana  and  El  Morro.  Upon  entering,  the  enormous  extent  of 
the  work  begins  to  be  perceived,  parapet  within  parapet,  galleries,  casemates,  and 
terrepleins  almost  innumerable,  all  of  stone  and  useless.  There  are  no  earth  covers 
or  traverses,  and  no  protection  against  modern  artillery. 

Cabana  is  the  prison  for  offenders  against  the  State,  and  the  scene  of  innumer- 
able executions.  From  an  exterior  or  salient  corner  of  the  secretary’s  office  of  the 
headquarters  there  leads  a subterranean  passage  326  meters  long,  2.5  meters  wide, 
and  1.86  high,  excavated  in  the  rock  It  conducts  to  the  sea,  debouching  at  the 
mouth  of  a sewer,  87  meters  from  the  Morro  wharf.  At  exactly  132  meters  along 
the  road  rising  from  the  Morro  pier  or  wharf  to  the  Cabana,  there  will  be  found 
by  excavating  the  rock  on  the  left  of  the  road,  at  a depth  of  3 meters,  a grating,  on 
opening  which  passage  will  be  made  into  a road  107  meters  long,  1.6  high,  and  1.42 
wide,  leading  to  the  same  exit  as  the  Cabana  secret  way.  These  passages  are  most 
secret,  as  all  believe  that  the  grating  of  the  sewer,  seen  from  the  sea,  is  a drain. 

The  battery  of  Santa  Clara  is  the  most  interesting  of  the  fortifications  of  Havana, 
and  one  of  the  most  important.  It  lies  about  100  yards  from  the  shore  of  the  gulf, 
at  a point  where  the  line  of  hills  to  the  westward  runs  back  (either  naturally  or 


m 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


artificially)  into  quarries,  thus  occupying  a low  salient  backed  by  a bill.  Here  are 
three  new  Krupp  11-inch  guns,  designed  to  protect  El  Principe,  the  land  side  of 
Havana.  It  is  187  feet  above  sea  level  and  completely  dominates  Havana,  the  bay, 
Morro,  Cabana,  the  coast  northward,  Atares,  and  from  east  around  to  south,  the  ap- 
proaches of  the  Marianao  Road,  Cristina,  and  the  Western  Railroad  for  about  3 kilo- 
meters, i.  e.,  between  Cristina  and  a cut  at  that  distance  from  the  station.  Principe 
gives  fire  upon  Tulipan,  the  C’erro,  the  Hill  of  the  Jesuits,  and  the  valley  through 
which  passes  the  Havana  Railroad,  sweeping  completely  with  its  guns  the  railroad 
as  far  as  the  cut  at  Cienaga,  to  3 miles  away.  It  dominates  also  the  hills  south- 
ward and  westward  toward  Puentes  Grandes  and  the  Almendarez  River,  and  country 
extending  toward  Marianao,  also  the  Calzada  leading  to  the  cemetery  and 
toward  Chorrera;  thence  the  -entire  sea  line  (the  railroad  to  Chorrera  is 
partly  sheltered  by  the  slope  leading  to  Principe.  This  is  by  all  means  the  strongest 
position  about  Havana  which  is  occupied.  Lying  between  it  and  the  hill  of  the  Cerro 
is  the  hill  of  the  Catalan  Club,  right  under  the  guns  of  the  work  and  about  one-half 
mile  away.  The  Marianao  Road  is  more  sheltered  than  the  Havana,  as  it  runs  near 
the  trees  and  hill  near  the  Cerro.  The  only  points  which  dominate  the  hill  of  the 
Principe  lie  to  the  south  and  southeast  in  the  direction  of  Jesus  del  Monte  and  be- 
yond Regia.  On  its  southern,  southeastern,  and  southwestern  faces  the  hill  of  Prin- 
cipe is  a steep  descent  to  the  calzada  and  streets  below.  The  slope  is  gradual  west- 
ward and  around  by  the  north.  From  this  hill  is  one  of  the  best  views  of  Havana 
and  the  valley  south.  El  Principe  lies  about  one-half  mile  from  the  north  coast, 
from  which  hills  rise  in  gradual  slopes  toward  the  work.  It  is  Havana  gossip  that 
El  Principe  is  always  held  by  the  Spanish  regiment  in  which  the  Captain-General 
has  most  confidence.  The  military  notes  pronounce  El  Principe  undoubtedly  the 
strongest  natural  position  about  Havana  now  occupied  by  defensive  works.  Its 
guns  sweep  the  heights  of  the  Almendares,  extending  from  the  north  coast  south- 
ward by  the  hills  of  Puentes  Grandes  to  the  valley  of  Cienaga,  thence  eastward  across 
the  Hill  of  the  Jesuits  and  the  long  line  of  trees  and  houses  leading  to  the  Cerro. 
The  country  beyond  the  Cerro  is  partly  sheltered  by  trees  and  hills,  but  eastward  El 
Principe  commands  in  places  the  country  and  the  bay  shore,  and  gives  fire  across 
Havana  seaward. 

The  most  vulnerable  spot  in  the  defenses  of  Havana  is  the  aqueduct  of  Isabella 
II,  or  the  Yento.  The  water  is  from  the  Yento  Springs,  pure  and  inexhaustable,  nine 
miles  out  of  Havana. 

All  three  of  the  water  supplies  to  Havana,  the  Zanja  and  the  two  aqueducts  of 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


435 


Ferdinand  VII  and  of  the  Vento,  proceed  from  the  Almendares  and  run  their  course 
near  to  each  other,  the  farthest  to  the  west  being  the  Zanja  and  to  the  east  the  Vento. 

At  Vento  Springs  is  constructed  a large  stone  basin,  open  at  the  bottom,  through 
which  springs  bubble.  From  this  reservoir  the  new  aqueduct  leads.  It  is  an  ellip- 
tical tunnel  of  brick,  placed  under  ground,  and  marked  by  turrets  of  brick  and 
stone  placed  along  its  course. 

From  the  Vento  Reservoir  the  new  aqueduct  crosses  the  low  valley  south  of 
Havana,  following  generally  the  Calzada  de  Vento,  which  becomes,  near  the  Cerro, 
the  Calzada  de  Palatino,  to  a point  on  the  Western  Railway  marked  5 kilometers 
(about);  hence  the  calzada  and  the  aqueduct  closely  follows  the  railway  for  about  a 
mile,  terminating  at  a new  reservoir. 

The  Vento  water  is  the  best  thing  Havana  has,  and  indispensable.  The  old 
sources  of  supply  are  intolerable.  The  main  water  supply  is  the  Zanja.  Through- 
out the  most  of  its  course  this  river  flows  through  unprotected  mud  banks;  the  fluids 
of  many  houses,  especially  in  the  Cerro  ward  which  it  skirts,  drain  into  them;  men, 
horses,  and  dogs  bathe  in  it;  dead  bodies  have  been  seen  floating  in  it,  and  in  the 
rainy  season  the  water  becomes  very  muddy.  In  fine,  the  Zanja  in  its  course  receives 
all  which  a little  brook  traversing  a village  and  having  houses  and  back  yards  on  its 
banks  would  receive.  The  water  can  not  be  pure,  and  to  those  who  know  the  facts 
the  idea  of  drinking  it  is  repulsive.  This  supply  had  long  been  insufficient  to  the 
growing  city,  and  in  1835  the  well-protected  and  excellent  aqueduct  of  Ferdinand 
VII  was  completed.  It  taps  the  Almendares  River  a few  hundred  yards  above  filters 
mentioned,  hence  carried  by  arches  to  the  east  El  Cerro,  and  for  some  distance 
nearly  parallel  to  the  Calzada  del  Cerro,  but  finally  intersecting  this.  These  works 
are  succeeded  by  the  Famous  Vento.  When  Havana  is  fought  for  hereafter  the 
fight  will  be  at  the  Vento  Springs.  This  remark  is  not  made  in  the  military  notes, 
but  the  military  men  know  it  well.  When  General  Miles  expected  to  attack  Havana 
he  procured  all  the  accessible  surveys  and  detail  of  information,  official  and  through 
special  observation  and  personal  knowledge  obtainable  of  the  water  works.  Life 
could  not  be  sustained  many  days  in  the  city  of  Havana  without  the  water  of  the 
adorable  Vento. 

A special  interest  attaches  to  Havana,  as  it  is  to  be  a city  under  the  control  of 
the  United  States.  The  surface  soil  consists  for  the  most  part  of  a thin  layer  of 
red,  yellow,  or  black  earths.  At  varying  depths  beneath  this,  often  not  exceeding 
1 or  2 feet,  lie  the  solid  rocks.  These  foundation  rocks  are,  especially  in  the  north- 
ern and  more  modern  parts  of  the  city  toward  the  coast  of  the  sea  and  not  of  the 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 

harbor,  Quarternary,  and  especially  Tertiary,  formations,  so  permeable  that  liquids 
emptied  into  excavations  are  absorbed  and  disappear. 

* - *-•  - r * z 

^ - - “ 7 

. . . on  ,he  streets'  Less  than  one-third  of  the  population  live  on  paved  streets, 

city,  are  no  bet  ° H , traverse  them  with  difficulty  at  all  times,  and 

other  irregularity  » thrt  ^ for  tw0  months.  Rough,  muddy, 

in  the  rainy  season  ) anent  receptacles  for  much  decom- 

or  both,  these  streets  serve  admirably  ^ ftan  onc. 

posing  animal  and  vege  a c « • • constantly  in  an  extremely 

- — - - ■"  - — 

trtn°tVe\C»  «■  "hich  ab°ul  40f°t  ,’e0|;'°'  r^hHdt 

"■"7 but  B7:^^;rt^^"ae:,;:ich  side  „ no, «. 

"L:  L.  the  neiv,  extramural  tmvn  ^ “ 

(33,  feet)  wide,  with  " exeep't  in  the  first  four 

feet)  for  the  wagonway.  there  are  iew 

of  the  nine  city  districts. 

More  than  two-thirds  of  the  population  live  in  densely 
eity  where  the  l>«u»  are  houses,  of  which  15,494 

l0,  does  not  exceed  . are  three  stories,  and  only  27  are  four  stories 

are  one-story.  1,552  are  ti  - Jg  inhabitallts  U„  in  one-story  houses;  and 

with  none  higher.  A - 2 ^ latio„  exceeds  200,000  there  are  more 

as  the  total  civil,  militar  , . ■ Jcnt  houses  may  have  many  small  rooms, 

lhan  12  inhabitants  to  ever;  » - ■ ,h[  one.storJ  houses  have  four  or 

but  each  room  ,s  oeeupie.  • ^ ^ is  rendered  so  expensive  bv 

five  rooms;  but  house  ren  .....  b rarc  for  workmen,  even  when  paid 

taxation.!,;  export  as  well  a-  unpm  t “ onc  #f  these  mean  little  houses; 

$50  to  $100  a month,  to  enjoy  the  ■ - the  balance.  This  condition  of 

reserving  one  or  two  rooms  for  hu  tarn  . , 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


437 


affairs  is  readily  understood  when  it  is  known  that  so  great  a necessity  as  flour 
cost  in  Havana  $15.50  when  its  price  in  the  United  States  was  $6.50  per  barrel. 

In  the  densely  populated  portions  of  the  city  the  houses  generally  have  no  back 
yard,  properly  so  called,  but  a flagged  court,  or  narrow  vacant  space  into  which  sleep- 
ing rooms  open  at  the  side,  and  in  close  proximity  with  these,  at  the  rear  of  this  con- 
tracted court  are  located  the  kitchen,  the  privy,  and  often  a stall  for  animals.  In 
the  houses  of  the  poor,  that  is,  of  the  vast  majority  of  the  population,  there  are 
no  storerooms,  pantries,  closets,  or  other  conveniences  for  household  supplies.  These 
are  furnished  from  day  to  day,  even  from  meal  to  meal,  by  the  corner  groceries; 
and  it  is  rare,  in  large  sections  of  Havana,  to  find  any  one  of  the  four  corners  of 
a square  without  a grocery. 

The  walls  of  most  of  the  houses  in  Havana  are  built  of  “mamposteria”  or 
rubble  masonry,  a porous  material  which  freely  absorbs  atmospheric  as  well  as 
ground  moisture.  The  mark  of  this  can  often  be  seen  high  on  the  walls,  which 
varies  from  2 to  7 feet  in  the  houses  generally.  The  roofs  are  excellent,  usually 
flat,  and  constructed  of  brick  tiles.  The  windows  are,  like  the  doors,  unusually 
high,  nearly  reaching  the  ceiling,  which,  in  the  best  houses  only,  is  also  unusually 
high.  The  windows  are  never  glazed,  but  protected  by  strong  iron  bars  on  the  out- 
side and  on  the  inside  by  solid  wooden  shutters,  which  are  secured,  like  the  doors, 
with  heavy  bars  or  bolts,  and  in  inclement  weather  greatly  interfere  with  proper  ven- 
tilation. Fireplaces  with  chimneys  are  extremely  rare,  so  that  ventilation  depends 
entirely  on  the  doors  and  windows,  which,  it  should  be  stated,  are  by  no  means 
unusually  large  in  most  of  the  sleeping  rooms  of  the  poor.  Generally  in  Havana, 
less  generally  in  other  cities,  the  entrances  and  courtyards  are  flagged  with  stone, 
while  the  rooms  are  usually  floored  with  tile  or  marble.  With  rare  exceptions  the 
lowest  floor  is  in  contact  with  the  earth.  Ventilation  between  the  earth  and  floor 
is  rarely  seen  in  Cuba.  In  Havana  the  average  height  of  the  ground  floor  is  from 
7 to  11  inches  above  the  pavement,  but  in  Havana,  and  more  frequently  in  other 
Cuban  towns,  one  often  encounters  houses  which  are  entered  by  stepping  down  from 
the  sidewalk,  and  some  floors  are  even  below  the  level  of  the  street.  In  Havana 
some  of  the  floors,  in  Matanzas  more,  in  Cardenas  and  Cienfuegos  many  are  of  the 
bare  earth  itself,  or  of  planks  raised  only  a few  inches  above  the  damp  ground. 

The  narrow  entrance  about  400  yards  in  width  and  1,200  in  length,  opens  into 
the  irregular  harbor,  which  has  three  chief  coves  or  indentations,  termed  “ensena- 
das.”  The  extreme  length  of  the  harbor  from  its  sea  entrance  to  the  limit  of  the 
most  distant  ensenada  is  3 miles,  and  its  extreme  breadth  1-J  miles;  but  within  the 


438 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


entrance  the  average  length  is  only  about  1,  and  the  average  breadth  about  two-thirds 
of  a mile.  However,  because  of  the  irregularly  projecting  points  of  land  which  form 
the  ensenadas,  there  is  no  locality  in  the  harbor  where  a vessel  can  possibly  anchor 
farther  than  500  yards  from  the  shore.  Its  greatest  depth  is  about  40  feet,  but  the 
anchorage  ground  for  vessels  drawing  18  feet  of  water  is  very  contracted,  not  exceed- 
ing one-half  the  size  of  the  harbor.  The  rise  and  fall  of  the  tide  does  not  exceed 
2 feet. 

The  Cuban  city  next  in  celebrity  to  Havana  is  Matanzas,  and  it  is  one  likely  to 
become  a favorite  of  Americans,  as  the  country  in  the  vicinity  is  distinguished  by 
beauty  as  well  as  remarkable  for  fertility.  Matanzas  was  first  regularly  settled  in 
1693.  It  is  in  the  province  of  Matanzas,  54  miles  west  of  Havana,  by  the  most  di- 
rect of  the  two  railroads  which  unite  these  two  cities,  and  is  situated  on  the  western 
inland  extremity  of  the  bay  of  Matanzas,  a harbor  of  the  first  class.  Matanzas  is 
divided  into  three  districts,  viz,  the  central  district  of  Matanzas,  which,  about  half 
a mile  in  width  across  the  center  of  population,  lies  between  the  two  little  rivers, 
San  Juan  to  the  south,  and  the  Yumuri  to  the  north;  the  Pueblo  Nuevo  district, 
south  of  the  San  Juan,  and  around  the  inland  extremity  of  the  harbor;  and  the  dis- 
trict of  Versalles,  north  of  the  Yumuri,  nearest  to  the  open  sea,  as  also  to  the  an- 
chorage ground,  and,  sanitarily,  the  best  situated  district  in  the  city.  About  two- 
thirds  of  the  population  are  in  the  district  of  Matanzas,  and  the  Pueblo  Nuevo  district 
has  about  double  the  population  of  Versalles.  Pueblo  Nuevo  stands  on  ground 
originally  a swamp,  and  is  low,  flat,  and  only  3 or  4 feet  above  the  sea.  The  Ma- 
tanzas district  has  many  houses  on  equally  low  ground,  on  the  harbor  front,  and  on 
the  banks  of  the  two  rivers  which  inclose  this  district;  but  from  the  front  and  be- 
tween these  rivers  the  ground  ascends,  so  that  its  houses  are  from  2 to  even  100  feet 
above  the  sea;  however,  the  center  of  population,  the  public  square,  is  only  about  20 
feet  above  sea  level.  Versalles  is  on  a bluff  ef  the  harbor,  and  its  houses  are  situated, 
for  the  most  part,  from  15  to  40  feet  above  the  sea.  The  district  of  Matanzas  has 
ill  constructed  and  useless  sewers  in  only  two  streets,  and  no  houses  connected 
therewith.  So  much  of  this  district  and  of  Versalles  as  is  built  on  the  hill  slope  js 
naturally  well  drained,  but  the  Pueblo  Nuevo  district,  and  those  parts  of  Matanzas 
built  in  immediate  proximity  to  the  banks  of  the  river,  are  very  ill  drained. 

Since  1872  Matanzas  has  had  an  aqueduct  from  the  Bello  spring,  7 miles  distant. 
The  supply  is  alleged  to  be  both  abundant  and  excellent.  But  of  the  4,710  houses 
in  the  city  840  stand  on  the  hills  outside  the  zone  supplied  by  the  waterworks,  while 
of  the  remaining  3,870  houses  within  this  zone  only  about  2,000  get  their  water 


ARSENAL  GROUNDS  IN  CAVITE— CHAPEL  IN  FRONT  OF  COMMANDANT’S  HOUSE. 


BRIDGE  CROSSING  RIVER  AT  TAMBOBENG,  MANILA  PROVINCE. 


* 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


441 


from  the  waterworks  company.  Hence  more  than  half  of  the  houses  of  Matanzas 
(2,710)  do  for  the  most  part  get  their  supply  in  kegs  by  purchase  in  the  streets. 
There  are  a few  public  fountains,  as  also  some  dangerous  wells.  The  streets  are 
30  feet  wide,  with  24  feet  wagon  way.  Few  of  them  are  paved,  some  are  very  poor 
roads,  but,  for  the  most  part,  these  roads  are  in  good  condition.  In  the  Matanzas  dis- 
trict some  of  the  streets  are  of  solid  stone,  and  natural  foundation  rock  of  the  place, 
for  the  superficial  soil  is  so  thin  that  the  foundation  rocks  often  crop  out.  Of  this 
very  porous  rock  most  of  the  houses  are  built.  The  houses  have  wider  fronts,  larger 
air  spaces  in  rear,  are  not  so  crowded,  and  are  better  ventilated  than  the  houses  of 
Havana.  As  is  usual  in  Cuba,  the  ground  floors  are  generally  on  a level  with  the 
sidewalk,  and  some  are  even  below  the  level  of  the  streets.  A heavy  rain  floods  many 
of  the  streets  of  Matanzas,  the  water  running  back  into  and  beneath  the  houses.  The 
porous  limestone  of  which  the  houses  are  built  greatly  favors  absorption. 

The  population  of  Matanzas  and  suburbs  was  about  50,000  at  the  beginning  of 
the  war. 

Porto  Rico  is  not  quite  as  large  as  Connecticut,  but  larger  than  the  States  of  Del- 
aware and  Rhode  Island.  The  climate  of  the  island  is  delightful,  and  its  soil  exceed- 
ingly rich.  In  natural  resources  it  is  of  surpassing  opulence.  The  length  of  the 
island  is  about  one  hundred  miles,  and  its  breadth  thirty-five,  the  general  figure  of 
it  being  like  the  head  of  a sperm  whale.  The  range  of  mountains  is  from  east  to 
west,  and  nearly  central.  The  prevalent  winds  are  from  the  northwest,  and  the 
rainfall  is  much  heavier  on  the  northern  shores  and  mountain  slopes  than  on  the 
southern.  The  height  of  the  ridge  is  on  the  average  close  to  1,500  feet,  one  bold 
peak,  the  Anvil  being  3,600  feet  high.  The  rainy  north  and  the  droughty  south, 
with  the  lift  of  the  land  from  the  low  shores  to  the  central  slopes  and  rugged  eleva- 
tions, under  the  tropical  sun,  with  the  influence  of  the  great  oceans  east,  south  and 
north,  and  the  multitude  of  western  and  southern  islands,  give  unusual  and  charm- 
ing variety  in  temperature.  Porto  Rico  is,  by  the  American  people,  even  more  than 
the  Spaniards,  associated  with  Cuba.  But  is  is  less  than  a tenth  of  Cuban  propor- 
tions. Porto  Rico  has  3,600  square  miles  to  Cuba’s  42,000,  but  a much  greater 
proportion  of  Porto  Rico  than  of  Cuba  is  cultivated.  Less  than  one-sixteenth  of 
the  area  of  Cuba  has  been  improved,  and  while  her  population  is  but  1,600,000,  ac- 
cording to  the  latest  census,  and  is  not  so  much  now,  Porto  Rico,  with  less  than  a 
tenth  of  the  land  of  Cuba,  has  half  the  number  of  inhabitants.  Largely  Porto 
Rico  is  peopled  by  a better  class  than  the  mass  of  the  Cubans.  Cuba  is  wretchedly 
provided  with  roads,  one  of  the  reasons  why  the  Spaniards  were  incapable  of  putting 


442 


CUBA  AND  POBTO  RICO. 


down  insurrections.  If  they  had  expended  a fair  proportion  of  the  revenues  de- 
rived from  the  flourishing  plantations  and  the  monopolies  of  Spanish  favoritisms 
that  built  up  Barcelona  and  enriched  Captain-Generals,  and  in  less  degree  other  public 
servants,  the  rebellions  would  have  been  put  down.  The  Spanish  armies  in  Cuba, 
however,  were  rather  managed  for  official  speculation  and  peculation,  were  more 
promenaders  than  in  military  enterprise  and  the  stern  business  of  war.  With 
Weyler  for  an  opponent,  Gomez,  as  a guerilla,  could  have  dragged  on  a series  of 
skirmishes  indefinitely.  The  story  of  the  alleged  war  in  Cuba  between  the  Span- 
iards and  the  Cubans  was  on  both  sides  falsified,  and  the  American  people  deceived. 
Porto  Rico  does  not  seem  to  have  appealed  so  strongly  to  the  cupidity  of  the  Span- 
iards as  Cuba  did,  and  to  have  been  governed  with  less  brutality.  The  consequence 
is  there  has  not  been  a serious  insurrection  in  the  smaller  island  for  seventy  years, 
and  it  falls  into  our  possession  without  the  impoverishment  and  demoralization  of 
the  devastation  of  war — one  of  the  fairest  gems  of  the  ocean. 

It  was  October  18th  that  the  American  flag  was  raised  over  San  Juan.  The  fol- 
lowing dispatch  is  the  official  record: 

“San  Juan,  Porto  Rico,  Oct.  18. — Secretary  of  War,  Washington,  D.  C.:  Flags 
have  been  raised  on  public  buildings  and  forts  in  this  city  and  saluted  with  national 
salutes.  The  occupation  of  the  island  is  now  complete. 

“BROOKE,  Chairman.” 

On  the  morning  of  the  18th,  the  11th  regular  infantry  with  two  batteries  of  the 
Mh  artillery  landed.  The  latter  proceeded  to  the  forts,  while  the  infantry  lined 
up  on  the  docks.  It  was  a holiday  for  San  Juan  and  there  were  many  people  in  the 
streets.  Rear-Admiral  Schley  and  General  Gordon,  accompanied  by  their  staffs, 
proceeded  to  the  palace  in  carriages.  The  11th  infantry  regiment  and  band  with 
Troop  H,  of  the  6th  United  States  cavalry  then  marched  through  the  streets  and 
formed  in  the  square  opposite  the  palace. 

At  11:40  a.  m.,  General  Brooke,  Admiral  Schley  and  General  Gordon,  the  United 
States  evacuation  commissioners,  came  out  of  the  palace  with  many  naval  officers 
and  formed  on  the  right  side  of  the  square.  The  streets  behind  the  soldiers  were 
thronged  with  townspeoeple,  who  stood  waiting  in  dead  silence. 

At  last  the  city  clock  struck  12,  and  the  crowds,  almost  breathless  and  with  eyes 
fixed  upon  the  flagpole,  watched  for  developments.  At  the  sound  of  the  first  gun 
from  Fort  Morro,  Major  Dean  and  Lieutenant  Castle,  of  General  Brooke’s  staff, 
hoisted  the  stars  and  stripes,  while  the  band  played  “The  Star  Spangled  Banner.” 
All  heads  were  bared  and  the  crowds  cheered.  Fort  Morro,  Fort  San  Cristobal  and 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO.  443 

the  United  States  revenue  cutter  Manning,  lying  in  the  harbor,  fired  twenty-one 
guns  each. 

Senor  Munoz  Rivera,  who  was  president  of  the  recent  autonomist  council  of  sec- 
retaries, and  other  officials  of  the  late  insular  government  were  present  at  the  pro- 
ceedings. Many  American  flags  were  displayed. 

Acknowledgment  has  been  made  of  the  better  condition  of  Porto  Rico  than  of 
Cuba,  but  the  trail  of  the  serpent  of  colonial  Spanish  government  appears.  Mr. 
Alfred  Somamon  writes  in  the  Independent: 

“The  internal  administration  of  the  island  disposes  of  a budget  of  about  $3,300,- 
000,  and  is  a woeful  example  of  corrupt  officialism.  Of  this  sum  only  about  $650,000 
is  expended  in  the  island,  the  remainder  being  applied  to  payment  of  interest  on 
public  debt,  salaries  of  Spanish  officials,  army,  navy,  and  other  extra-insular  ex- 
penditures. But  the  whole  of  the  revenue  is  collected  in  the  island.” 

An  article  of  great  value  by  Eugene  Deland,  appeared  in  the  Chatauquan  of 
September,  on  the  characteristics  of  Porto  Rico,  and  we  present  an  extract,  showing 
its  admirable  distinction  of  accurate  information  well  set  forth: 

“The  mountain  slopes  are  covered  with  valuable  timbers,  cabinet  and  dye-woods, 
including  mahogany,  walnut,  lignum  vitae,  ebony,  and  logwood,  and  various  medic- 
inal plants.  Here,  too,  is  the  favorite  zone  of  the  coffee  tree,  which  thrives  best  one 
thousand  feet  above  sea  level.  The  valleys  and  plains  produce  rich  harvests  of  sugar- 
cane and  tobacco.  The  amount  of  sugar  yielded  by  a given  area  is  said  to  be  greater 
than  in  any  other  West  Indian  island.  Rice,  of  the  mountain  variety  and  grown 
without  flooding,  flourishes  almost  any  place  and  is  a staple  food  of  the  laboring 
classes.  In  addition  to  these  products  cotton  and  maize  are  commonly  cultivated, 
and  yams,  plantains,  oranges,  bananas,  cocoanuts,  pineapples,  and  almost  every  other 
tropical  fruit  are  grown  in  abundance.  Among  indigenous  plants  are  several  noted 
for  their  beautiful  blossoms.  Among  these  are  the  coccoloba,  which  grows  mainly 
along  the  coasts  and  is  distinguished  by  its  large,  yard-long  purple  spikes,  and  a 
talauma,  with  magnificent,  ororous,  white  flowers. 

“Of  wild  animal  life  Porto  Rico  has  little.  No  poisonous  serpents  are  found, 
but  pestiferous  insects,  such  as  tarantulas,  centipedes,  scorpions,  ticks,  fleas,  and 
mosquitos,  supply  this  deficiency  in  a measure.  All  sorts  of  domestic  animals  are 
raised,  and  the  excellent  pasture-lands  support  large  herds  of  cattle  for  export  and 
home  consumption,  and  ponies,  whose  superiority  is  recognized  throughout  the  West 
Indies. 

“The  mineral  wealth  of  the  island  is  undeveloped,  but  traces  of  gold,  copper,  iron, 


444 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


lead,  and  coal  are  found.  Salt  is  procured  in  considerable  quantities  from  the  lakes. 

“Porto  Rico  carries  on  an  extensive  commerce,  chiefly  with  Spain,  the  United 
States,  Cuba,  Germany,  Great  Britain,  and  France.  In  1895  the  volume  of  its  trade 
was  one-half  greater  than  that  of  the  larger  British  colony — Jamaica.  The  United 
States  ranks  second  in  amount  of  trade  with  the  island.  During  the  four  years  from 
1893-9G  Spain’s  trade  with  the  colony  averaged  $11,402,888  annually,  and  the  United 
States,  $5,028,544.  The  total  value  of  Porto  Rican  exports  for  189G  was  $18,341,- 
430,  and  of  imports,  $18,282,690,  making\  a total  of  $36,624,120,  which  was  an 
excess  over  any  previous  year.  The  exports  consist  almost  entirely  of  agricultural 
products.  In  1895  coffee  comprised  about  sixty  per  cent,  and  sugar  about  twenty- 
eight  per  cent,  of  their  value;  leaf  tobacco,  molasses,  and  honey  came  next.  Maize, 
hides,  fruits,  nuts,  and  distilled  spirits  are  also  sent  out  in  considerable  quantities. 
Over  one-half  of  the  coffee  exported  goes  to  Spain  and  Cuba,  as  does  most  of  the  to- 
bacco, which  is  said  to  be  used  in  making  the  finest  Havana  cigars;  the  sugar  and 
molasses  are,  for  the  most  part,  sent  to  the  United  States.  Among  imports,  manu- 
factured articles  do  not  greatly  exceed  agricultural.  Rice,  fish,  meat  and  lard, 
flour,  and  manufactured  tobacco  are  the  principal  ones.  Customs  duties  furnish 
about  two-thirds  of  the  Porto  Rican  revenue,  which  has  for  several  years  yielded 
greater  returns  to  Spain  than  that  of  Cuba. 

“The  climate  of  Porto  Rico  is  considered  the  healthiest  in  the  Antilles.  The 
heat  is  considerably  less  than  at  Santiago  de  Cuba,  a degree  and  a half  farther  north. 
The  thermometer  seldom  goes  above  90  degrees.  Pure  water  is  readily  obtained  in 
most  of  the  island.  Yellow  fever  seldom  occurs,  and  never  away  from  the  coast.  The 
rainy  season  begins  the  first  of  June  and  ends  the  last  of  December,  but  the  heavy 
downpours  do  not  come  on  until  about  August  1st. 

“In  density  of  population  also  this  island  ranks  first  among  the  West  Indies, 
having  half  as  many  inhabitants  as  Cuba,  more  than  eleven  times  as  large.  Of  its 
807,000  people,  326,000  are  colored  and  many  of  the  others  of  mixed  blood.  They 
differ  little  from  other  Spanish-Americans,  being  fond  of  ease,  courteous,  and  hos- 
pitable, and,  as  in  other  Spanish  countries,  the  common  people  are  illiterate,  public 
education  having  been  grievously  neglected.  The  natives  are  the  agriculturists  of 
the  country,  and  are  a majority  in  the  interior,  while  the  Spaniards,  who  control 
business  and  commerce,  are  found  mainly  in  the  towns  and  cities. 

“The  numerous  good  harbors  have  naturally  dotted  the  seaboard  with  cities 
and  towns  of  greater  or  less  commercial  importance.  -San  Juan,  Ponce,  Mayaguez, 
Aguadilla,  Arecibo  and  Fajardo  sll  carry  on  extensive  trade.  Intercourse  between 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


■145 

coast  towns  is  readily  had  by  water,  but  is  to  be  facilitated  by  a railroad  around 
the  island,  of  which  137  miles  have  been  built  and  170  miles  more  projected.  The 
public  highways  of  the  island  are  in  better  condition  than  one  might  expect.  Ac- 
cording to  a recent  report  of  United  States  Consul  Stewart,  of  San  Juan,  there  are 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles  of  good  road.  The  best  of  this  is  the  military  high- 
way connecting  Ponce  on  the  southern  coast  with  San  Juan  on  the  northern.  This  is 
a macadamized  road,  so  excellently  built  and  so  well  kept  up  that  a recent  traveler 
in  the  island  says  a bicycle  corps  could  go  over  it  without  dismounting.  Whether 
it  is  solid  enough  to  stand  the  transportation  of  artillery  and  heavy  army  trains  we 
shall  soon  know.  Of  telegraph  lines  Porto  Rico  has  four  hundred  and  seventy 
miles,  and  two  cables  connect  it  with  the  outside  world,  one  running  from  Ponce  and 
the  other  from  San  Juan.” 

Mr.  Alfred  Solomon,  already  quoted  as  an  instructive  contributor  to  the  Inde- 
pendent, writes: 

“The  population  of  Porto  Rico,  some  800,000,  is  essentially  agricultural.  A 
varied  climate,  sultry  in  the  lowlands,  refreshing  and  invigorating  in  the  mountain 
ranges,  makes  possible  the  cultivation  of  almost  every  variety  of  known  crop — sugar, 
tobacco,  coffee,  annatto,  maze,  cotton  and  ginger  are  extensively  grown;  but  there  are 
still  thousands  of  acres  of  virgin  lands  awaiting  the  capitalist.  Tropical  fruits 
flourish  in  abundance,  and  the  sugar-pine  is  well  known  in  our  market,  where  it 
brings  a higher  price  than  any  other  pine  imported.  Hardwood  and  fancy  cabinet 
■wood  trees  fill  the  forests,  and  await  the  woodman’s  ax.  Among  these  are  some 
specimens  of  unexampled  beauty,  notably  a tree,  the  wood  of  which,  when  polished, 
resembles  veined  marble,  and  another,  rivaling  in  beauty  the  feathers  in  a peacock’s 
tail.  Precious  metals  abound,  although  systematic  effort  has  never  been  directed 
to  the  locating  of  paying  veins.  Rivers  and  rivulets  are  plenty,  and  water-power 
is  abundant;  and  the  regime  should  see  the  installation  of  power  plants  and  electric 
lighting  all  over  the  island,  within  a short  time  after  occupation.  On  the  lowlands, 
large  tracts  of  pasturage  under  guinea  grass  and  malojilla  feed  thousands  of  sleek 
cattle,  but,  as  an  article  of  food,  mutton  is  almost  unknown.  The  native  pony, 
small,  wiry  and  untirable,  has  a world- wide  reputation,  and  for  long  journeys  is 
unequaled,  possessing  a gait,  as  they  say  in  the  island,  like  an  arm-chair. 

“Perhaps  a third  of  the  population  of  the  island  is  of  African  descent;  but, 
strangely  enough,  the  colored  people  are  only  to  be  found  on  the  coast,  and  are 
the  fishermen,  boatmen  and  laborers  of  the  seaports.  The  cultivation  of  the  crops 
is  entirely  in  the  hands  of  the  jibaro,  or  peasant,  who  is  seldom  of  direct  Spanish 


14(5 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


descent,  while  the  financiering  and  exportation  is  conducted  almost  entirely  by 
peninsulares.  or  Spanish-born  colonists,  who  monopolize  every  branch  of  commerce 
to  the  exclusion  of  the  colonian-born  subject. 

“Coffee  planting  is  largely  engaged  in,  returning  from  ten  to  fifteen  per  cent,  on 
capital.  Improved  transportation  facilities,  abolition  of  export  dues  and  the  con- 
solidation of  small  estates  would,  doubtless,  help  toward  better  results.  This  crop  is 
marketed  in  Europe — London,  Havre  and  Barcelona — where  better  prices  are  ob- 
tainable than  in  New  York.  With  the  exception  of  a few  plantations  in  strong 
hands,  most  of  this  property  could  be  purchased  at  a fair  valuation,  and  would  prove 
to  be  a very  profitable  investment. 

“Cocoa  grows  wild  on  the  lowlands,  but  has  not  been  cultivated  to  any  apprecia- 
ble extent.  Small  consignments  sent  to  Europe  have  been  pronounced  superior  to  the 
Caracas  bean.  The  tree  takes  a longer  period  than  coffee  to  come  to  maturity  and 
bear  fruit;  but  once  in  bearing  the  current  expenses  are  less  and  the  yield  far 
greater.  The  same  remarks  apply  to  the  cultivation  of  rubber,  which,  although  a 
most  profitable  staple  with  an  ever-increasing  market,  has  received  no  attention 
whatever. 

"Corn  is  raised  in  cpiantities  insufficient  for  home  consumption.  Of  this  cereal 
three  crops  can  be  obtained  in  two  years;  sometimes  two  a year.  The  demand  is 
constant,  and  the  price  always  remunerative. 

“In  Torto  Rico,  as  in  most  other  West  Indian  islands,  sugar  is  king.  In  the 
treatment  of  this  product  the  lack  of  capital  has  been  sadly  felt.  Planters  possess 
only  the  most  primitive  machinery,  and  in  the  extraction  of  the  juice  from  the  cana 
the  proportion  of  saccharine  matter  has  been  exceedingly  small.  Great  outlay  is 
necessary  for  the  installation  of  a complete  modern  crushing  and  centrifugal  plant.” 

A flattering  picture  of  our  new  possessions  is  drawn  in  McClure’s  Magazine,  by 
Mr.  George  B.  Waldron. 

“Here,  then,  are  Cuba  and  Torto  Rico  in  the  Atlautic,  and  the  Hawaiian  and 
Philippine  groups  in  the  Pacific,  whose  destiny  has  become  intertwined  with  our  own. 
Their  combined  area  is  168,000  square  miles,  equaling  New  England,  New  York, 
Pennsylvania,  and  New  Jersey.  Their  population  is  about  10,000,000,  or  perhaps 
one-half  of  that  of  these  nine  home  States.  The  Philippines,  with  three-quarters 
of  the  entire  population,  and  Porto  Rico,  with  800,000  people,  alone  approach  our 
own  Eastern  States  in  density.  Cuba,  prior  to  the  war,  was  about  as  well  populated 
as  Virginia,  and  the  Hawaiian  group  is  as  well  peopled  as  Kansas.  What,  then,  can 
these  islands  do  for  us? 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


447 


“Americans  use  more  sugar  in  proportion  to  population  than  any  other  nation  of 
the  world.  The  total  consumption  last  year  was  not  less  than  2,500,000  tons.  This 
is  enough  to  make  a pyramid  that  would  overtop  the  tallest  pyramid  of  Egyptian 
fame.  Of  this  total,  2,200,000  tons  came  from  foreign  countries,  the  Spanish  pos- 
sessions and  Hawaii  sending  about  twenty-five  per  cent.  Five  years  earlier,  when 
our  imports  were  less  by  half  a million  tons,  these  islands  supplied  double  this 
quantity,  or  nearly  two-thirds  of  the  nation’s  entire  sugar  import.  But  that  was 
before  Cuba  had  been  devastated  by  war  and  when  she  was  exporting  1,100,000  tons 
of  sugar  to  other  countries.  Restore  Cuba  to  her  former  fertility,  and  the  total  sugar 
crop  of  these  islands  will  reach  1,500,000  tons,  or  two-thirds  our  present  foreign 
demand.” 

There  is  much  more  in  Mr.  Waldron’s  summary  of  the  vast  addition  that  has 
been  made  to  our  resources  by  the  occupation  and  possession  of  the  islands  that 
have  recently  been  gathered  under  our  wings  by  the  force  of  our  arms.  It  is  enough 
to  know  that  with  the  tropical  islands  we  have  gained,  we  have  in  our  hands  the 
potentialities,  the  luxuries,  the  boundless  resources  including,  as  we  may,  and  must, 
Alaska,  of  all  the  zones  of  the  great  globe  that  we  inhabit  in  such  ample  measure. 

The  following  notes  were  compiled  for  the  information  of  the  army,  and  embody 
all  reliable  information  available. 

The  notes  were  intended  to  supplement  the  military  map  of  Porto  Rico.  The 
following  hooks  and  works  were  consulted  and  matter  from  them  freely  used  in 
the  preparation  of  the  notes:  Guia  Geografico  Militar  de  Espana  y Provincias 

Ultramarinas,  1879;  Espana,  sus  Monumentos  y Artes,  su  Naturaleza  e Historia, 
1887;  Compendio  de  Geografia  Militar  de  Espana  y Portugal,  1882;  Anuario  deComer- 
cio  de  Espana,  1896;  Anuario  Militar  de  Espana,  1898;  Reclus,  Nouvelle  Geographic 
Universelle,  1891;  Advance  Sheets  American  Consular  Reports,  1898;  An  Account 
of  the  Present  State  of  the  Island  of  Porto  Rico,  1834;  The  Statesman’s  Year  Book, 
1898. 

Situation. — Porto  Rico  is  situated  in  the  Torrid  Zone,  in  the  easternmost  part  of 
the  Antilles,  between  latitude  17  deg.  54  min.  and  18  deg.  30  min.  40  sec.  1ST.  and 
longitude  61  deg.  54  min.  26  sec.  and  63  deg.  32  min.  32  sec.  W.  of  Madrid.  It  is 
bounded  on  the  north  by  the  Atlantic,  on  the  east  and  south  by  the  sea  of  the 
Antilles,  and  on  the  west  by  the  Mona  Channel. 

Size. — The  island  of  Porto  Rico,  the  fourth  in  size  of  the  Antilles,  has,  ac- 
cording to  a recent  report  of  the  British  consul  (1897),  an  extent  of  about  3,668 


448 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


square  miles — 35  miles  broad  and  95  miles  long.  It  is  of  an  oblong  form,  extending 
from  east  to  west. 

Population. — Porto  Rico  is  the  first  among  the  Antilles  in  density  of  population 
and  in  prosperity.  The  Statesman’s  Year  Book,  1898,  gives  the  population  (1887) 
at  813,937,  of  which  over  300,000  are  negroes,  this  being  one  of  the  few  countries 
of  tropical  America  where  the  number  of  whites  exceeds  that  of  other  races.  The 
whites  and  colored,  however,  are  all  striving  in  the  same  movement  of  civilization, 
and  are  gradually  becoming  more  alike  in  ideas  and  manners.  Among  the  white 
population  the  number  of  males  exceeds  the  number  of  females,  which  is  the  con- 
trary of  all  European  countries.  This  is  partly  explained  by  the  fact  that  the 
immigrants  are  mostly  males.  On  an  average  the  births  exceed  the  deaths  by  double. 
The  eastern  portion  of  the  island  is  less  populous  than  the  western. 

Soil. — The  ground  is  very  fertile,  being  suitable  for  the  cultivation  of  cane,  coffee, 
rice,  and  other  products  raised  in  Cuba,  which  island  Porto  Rico  resembles  in  rich- 
ness and  fertility. 

Climate. — The  climate  is  hot  and  moist,  the  medium  temperature  reaching  104 
degs.  F.  Constant  rains  and  winds  from  the  east  cool  the  heavy  atmosphere  of 
the  low  regions.  On  the  heights  of  the  Central  Cordillera  the  temperature  is  healthy 
and  agreeable. 

Iron  rusts  and  becomes  consumed,  so  that  nothing  can  be  constructed  of  this 
metal.  Even  bronze  artillery  has  to  be  covered  with  a strong  varnish  to  protect  it 
from  the  damp  winds. 

Although  one  would  suppose  that  all  the  large  islands  in  the  Tropics  enjoyed 
the  same  climate,  yet  from  the  greater  mortality  observed  in  Jamaica,  St.  Domingo, 
and  Cuba,  as  compared  with  Porto  Rico,  one  is  inclined  to  believe  that  this  latter 
island  is  much  more  congenial  than  any  of  the  former  to  the  health  of  Europeans. 
The  heat,  the  rains,  and  the  seasons  are,  with  very  trifling  variations,  the  same  in  all. 
But  the  number  of  mountains  and  running  streams,  which  are  everywhere  in  view 
in  Porto  Rico,  and  the  general  cultivation  of  the  land,  may  powerfully  contribute 
to  purify  the  atmosphere  and  render  it  salubrious  to  man.  The  only  difference  of 
temperature  to  be  observed  throughout  the  island  is  due  to  altitude,  a change  which 
is  common  to  every  country  under  the  influence  of  the  Tropics. 

In  the  mountains  the  inhabitants  enjoy  the  coolness  of  spring,  while  the  valle}Ts 
would  be  uninhabitable  were  it  not  for  the  daily  breeze  which  blows  generally  from 
the  northeast  and  east.  For  example,  in  Ponce  the  noonday  sun  is  felt  in  all  its  rigor, 
while  at  the  village  of  Adjuntas,  4 leagues  distant  in  the  interior  of  the  mountains. 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


449 


the  traveler  feels  invigorated  by  the  refreshing  breezes  of  a temperate  clime.  At  one 
place  the  thermometer  is  as  high  as  90  deg.,  while  in  another  it  is  sometimes  under 
GO  deg.  Although  the  seasons  are  not  so  distinctly  marked  in  this  climate  as  they 
are  in  Europe  (the  trees  being  always  green),  yet  there  is  a distinction  to  be  made 
between  them.  The  division  into  wet  and  dry  seasons  (winter  and  summer)  does  not 
give  a proper  idea  of  the  seasons  in  this  island;  for  on  the  north  coast  it  sometimes 
rains  almost  the  whole  year,  while  sometimes  for  twelve  or  fourteen  months  not  a 
drop  of  rain  falls  on  the  south  coast.  However,  in  the  mountains  at  the  south  there 
are  daily  showers.  Last  year,  for  example,  in  the  months  of  November,  December, 
and  January  the  north  winds  blew  with  violence,  accompanied  by  heavy  showers  of 
rain,  while  this  year  (1832)  in  the  same  months,  it  has  scarcely  blown  a whole  day 
from  that  point  of  the  compass,  nor  has  it  rained  for  a whole  month.  Therefore, 
the  climate  of  the  north  and  south  coasts  of  this  island,  although  under  the  same 
tropical  influence,  are  essentially  different. 

As  in  all  tropical  countries,  the  year  is  divided  into  two  seasons — the  dry  and 
the  rainy.  In  general,  the  rainy  season  commences  in  August  and  ends  the  last 
of  December,  southerly  and  westerly  winds  prevailing  during  this  period.  The  rain- 
fall is  excessive,  often  inundating  fields  and  forming  extensive  lagoons.  The  exhala- 
tions from  these  lagoons  give  rise  to  a number  of  diseases,  but,  nevertheless,  Porto 
Rico  is  one  of  the  healthiest  islands  of  the  archipelago. 

In  the  month  of  May  the  rains  commence,  not  with  the  fury  of  a deluge,  as 
in  the  months  of  August  and  September,  but  heavier  than  any  rain  experienced  in 
Europe.  Peals  of  thunder  reverberating  through  the  mountains  give  a warning  of 
their  approach,  and  the  sun  breaking  through  the  clouds  promotes  the  prolific  vegeta- 
tion of  the  fields  yvith  its  vivifying  heat.  The  heat  at  this  season  is  equal  to  the  sum- 
mer of  Europe,  and  the  nights  are  cool  and  pleasant;  but  the  dews  are  heavy  and 
pernicious  to  health.  The  following  meteorological  observations,  carefully  made  by 
Don  Jose  Ma.  Yertez,  a Captain  of  the  Spanish  navy,  will  exhibit  the  average  range 
of  temperature: 

Degrees  of  heat  observed  in  the  capital  of  Porto  Rico,  taking  a medium  of  five 
years. 


Degrees  of  Heat  Observed  in  the  Capital  of  Porto  Rico,  taking  a Medium  of 

Five  Years. 


Hours  of  the  Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

<1 

Sept. 

Oct. 

> 

o 

& 

Dec. 

Seven  in  the  morning 

72 

72i- 

74 

78 

78 

82 

85 

86 

80  i 

77 

75 

75 

Noon 

82 

81 

82 

83 

85 

86 

00 

92 

88 

85 

84 

80 

Five  in  the  evening 

78 

74 

78 

80 

81 

84 

87 

90 

83 

82 

80 

79 

450 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


Thu  weather,  after  a fifteen  or  twenty  clays’  rain,  clears  up  and  the  sun,  whose 
heat  has  been  hitherto  moderated  by  partial  clouds  and  showers  of  rain,  seems,  as 
it  were,  set  in  a cloudless  shy.  The  cattle  in  the  pastures  look  for  the  shade  of 
the  trees,  and  a perfect  calm  pervades  the  whole  face  of  nature  from  sunrise  till  be- 
tween 10  and  11  o’clock  in  the  morning,  when  the  sea  breeze  sets  in.  The  leaves 
of  the  trees  seem  as  if  afraid  to  move,  and  the  sea,  without  a wave  or  ruffle  on  its 
vast  expanse,  appears  like  an  immense  mirror.  Man  partakes  in  the  general  lan- 
gour  as  well  as  the  vegetable  and  brute  creation. 

The  nights,  although  warm,  are  delightfully  clear  and  serene  at  this  season. 
Objects  may  be  clearly  distinguished  at  the  distance  of  several  hundred  yards,  so 
that  one  may  even  shoot  by  moonlight.  The  months  of  June  and  July  offer  very 
little  variation  in  the  weather  or  temperature.  In  August  a suffocating  heat  reigns 
throughout  the  day,  and  at  night  it  is  useless  to  seek  for  coolness;  a faint  zephyr  is 
succeeded  by  a calm  of  several  hours.  The  atmosphere  is  heavy  and  oppressive, 
and  the  body,  weakened  by  perspiration,  becomes  languid;  the  appetite  fails,  and 
the  mosquitos,  buzzing  about  the  ears  by  day  and  night,  perplex  and  annoy  by  their 
stings,  while  the  fevers  of  the  tropics  attack  Europeans  with  sudden  and  irresistible 
violence.  This  is  the  most  sickly  season  for  the  European.  The  thermometer  fre- 
quently exceeds  90  deg.  The  clouds  exhibit  a menacing  appearance,  portending 
the  approach  of  the  heavy  autumnal  rains,  which  pour  down  like  a deluge.  About 
the  middle  of  September  it  appears  as  if  all  the  vapors  of  the  ocean  had  accumu- 
lated in  one  point  of  the  heavens.  The  rain  comes  down  like  an  immense  quantity 
of  water  poured  through  a sieve;  it  excludes  from  the  view  every  surrounding 
object,  and  in  half  an  hour  the  whole  surface  of  the  earth  becomes  an  immense 
sheet  of  water.  The  rivers  are  swollen  and  overflow  their  banks,  the  low  lands  are 
completely  inundated,  and  the  smallest  brooks  become  deep  and  rapid  torrents. 

In  the  month  of  October  the  weather  becomes  sensibly  cooler  than  during  the 
preceding  months,  and  in  November  the  north  and  northeast  winds  generally  set 
in,  diffusing  an  agreeable  coolness  through  the  surrounding  atmosphere.  The  body 
becomes  braced  and  active,  and  the  convalescent  feels  its  genial  influence.  The 
north  wind  is  accompanied  (with  few  exceptions)  by  heavy  showers  of  rain  on 
the  north  coast;  and  the  sea  rolls  on  that  coast  with  tempestuous  violence,  while 
the  south  coast  remains  perfectly  calm. 

When  the  fury  of  the  north  wind  abates,  it  is  succeeded  by  fine  weather  and  a 
clear  sky.  Nothing  can  exceed  the  climate  of  Porto  Rico  at  this  season;  one  can  only 
eompare  it  to  the  month  of  May  in  the  delightful  Province  of  Andalusia,  where  the 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


451 


cold  of  winter  and  the  burning  heat  of  summer  are  tempered  by  the  cool  freshness 
of  spring.  This  is  considered  to  he  the  healthiest  season  of  the  year,  when  a Euro- 
pean may  visit  the  tropics  without  fear. 

The  small  islands,  destitute  of  wood  and  high  mountains,  which  have  a powerful 
effect  in  attracting  the  clouds,  suffer  much  from  drought.  It  sometimes  happens  that 
in  Curacao,  St.  Bartholomews,  and  other  islands  there  are  whole  years  without  a 
drop  of  rain,  and  after  exhausting  their  cisterns  the  inhabitants  are  compelled  to 
import  water  from  the  rivers  of  other  islands. 

“The  land  breeze”  is  an  advantage  which  the  large  islands  derive  from  the  in- 
equality of  their  surface;  for  as  soon  as  the  sea  breeze  dies  away,  the  hot  air  of  the 
valleys  being  Tariffed,  ascends  toward  the  tops  of  the  mountains,  and  is  there  con- 
densed by  cold,  which  makes  it  specifically  heavier  than  it  was  before;  it  then  de- 
scends back  to  the  valleys  on  both  sides  of  the  ridge.  Hence  a night  wind  (blowing 
on  all  sides  from  the  land  toward  the  shore)  is  felt  in  all  the  mountainous  countries 
under  the  torrid  zone.  On  the  north  shore  the  wind  comes  from  the  south,  and  on 
the  south  shore  from  the  north. 

Storms. — The  hurricanes  which  visit  the  island,  and  which  obey  the  general  laws 
of  tropical  cyclones,  are  one  of  the  worst  scourges  of  the  country.  For  hours  before 
the  appearance  of  this  terrible  phenomenon  the  sea  appears  calm;  the  waves  come 
from  a long  distance  very  gently  until  near  the  shore,  when  they  suddenly  rise 
as  if  impelled  by  a superior  force,  dashing  against  the  land  with  extraordinary 
violence  and  fearful  noise.  Together  with  this  sign,  the  air  is  noticed  to  be  disturbed, 
the  sun  red,  and  the  stars  obscured  by  vapor  which  seems  to  magnify  them.  A 
strong  odor  is  perceived  in  the  sea,  which  is  sulphureous  in  the  waters  of  rivers,  and 
there  are  sudden  changes  in  the  wind.  These  omens,  together  with  the  signs  of  un- 
easiness manifested  by  various  animals,  foretell  the  proximity  of  a hurricane. 

This  is  a sort  of  whirlwind,  accompanied  by  rain,  thunder  and  light- 
ning, sometimes  by  earthquake  shocks,  and  always  by  the  most  terri- 
ble and  devastating  circumstances  that  can  possibly  combine  to  ruin  a 
country  in  a few  hours. _A  clear,  serene  day  is  followed  by  the  darkest  night;  the 
delightful  view  offered  by  woods  and  prairies  is  diverted  into  the  deary  waste  of  a 
cruel  winter;  the  tallest  and  most  robust  cedar  trees  are  uprooted,  broken  off  bodily, 
and  hurled  into  a heap;  roofs,  balconies,  and  windows  of  houses  are  carried  through 
the  air  like  dry  leaves,  and  in  all  directions  are  seen  houses  and  estates  laid  waste  and 
thrown  into  confusion. 

The  fierce  roar  of  the  water  and  of  the  trees  being  destroyed  by  the  winds, 


452 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


the  cries  and  moans  of  person?,  the  bellowing  of  cattle  and  neighing  of  horses, 
which  are  being  carried  from  place  to  place  by  the  whirlwinds,  the  torrents  of  water 
inundating  the  fields,  and  a deluge  of  fire  being  let  loose  in  flashes  and  streaks  of 
lightning,  seem  to  announce  the  last  convulsions  of  the  universe  and  the  death 
agonies  of  nature  itself. 

Sometimes  these  hurricanes  are  felt  only  on  the  north  coast,  at  others  on  the 
south  coast,  although  generally  their  influence  extends  throughout  the  island. 

In  1825  a hurricane  destroyed  the  towns  of  Patillas,  Maunabo,  ATabucoa,  Ilu- 
inacao,  Gurabo,  and  Caguas,  causing  much  damage  in  other  towns  in  the  east,  north, 
and  center  of  the  island.  "The  island  was  also  visited  by  a terrible  hurricane  in  1772. 

Earthquakes. — Earthquakes  are  somewhat  frequent,  but  not  violent  or  of  great 
consequence.  The  natives  foretell  them  by  noticing  clouds  settle  near  the  ground 
for  some  time  in  the  open  places  among  the  mountains.  The  water  of  the  springs 
emits  a sulphurous  odor  or  leaves  a strange  taste  in  the  mouth;  birds  gather  in 
large  flocks  and  fly  about  uttering  shriller  cries  than  usual;  cattle  bellow  and 
horses  neigh,  etc.  A few  hours  beforehand  the  air  becomes  calm  and  dimmed 
by  vapors  which  arise  from  the  ground,  and  a few  moments  before  there  is  a slight 
breeze,  followed  at  intervals  of  two  or  three  minutes  by  a deep  rumbling  noise, 
accompanied  by  a sudden  gust  of  wind,  which  are  the  forerunners  of  the  vibration, 
the  latter  following  immediately.  These  shocks  are  sometimes  violent  and  are  usually 
repeated,  but  owing  to  the  special  construction  of  the  houses,  they  cause  no  damage. 

Tides. — For  seven  hours  the  tide  runs  rapidly  in  a northwest  direction,  return- 
ing in  the  opposite  direction  with  equal  rapidity  for  five  hours. 

Orography. — The  general  relief  of  Porto  Rico  is  much  inferior  in  altitude  to  that 
of  the  rest  of  the  Great  Antilles,  and  even  some  of  the  Lesser  Antilles  have  mountain 
summits  which  rival  it. 

A great  chain  of  mountains  divides  the  islands  into  two  parts,  northern  and 
southern,  which  are  called  by  the  natives  Banda  del  Norte  and  Banda  del  Sur. 
This  chain  sends  out  long  ramifications  toward  the  coasts,  the  interstices  of  which 
form  beautiful  and  fertile  valleys,  composed  in  the  high  parts  of  white  and  red 
earths,  on  the  spurs  of  black  and  weaker  earths,  and  near  the  coasts  of  sand. 

To  the  northwest  and  following  a direction  almost  parallel  with  the  northern 
coast,  the  Sierra  of  Lares  extends  from  Aguadilla  to  the  town  of  Lares,  where  it 
divides  into  two  branches,  one  going  north  nearly  to  the  coast,  near  Arecibo  harbor, 
and  the  other  extending  to  the  spurs  of  the  Sierra  Grande  de  Banos;  this 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


453 


latter  starting  from  Point  Guaniquilla,  crosses  the  island  in  its  entire 
length,  its  last  third  forming  the  Sierra  of  Cayey. 

The  whole  island  may  be  said  to  form  a continuous  network  of  sierras,  hills,  and 
heights.  Of  these  the  Sierra  del  Loquillo  is  distinguished  for  its  great  altitude 
(the  highest  peak  being  Yunque,  in  the  northeast  corner  of  the  island  and  visible 
from  the  sea,  a distance  of  120  kilometers),  as  is  also  Laivonito  Mountain,  near  the 
south  coast. 

The  following  are  the  four  highest  mountains,  with  their  heights  above  the 
sea  level:  Yunque,  in  Luquillo,  1,290  yards;  Guilarte,  in  Adjuntas,  1,180  yards; 
La  Somanta,  in  Aybonito,  1,077  yards;  Las  Tetas  de  Cerro  Gordo,  in  San  German, 
860  yards.  All  are  easily  ascended  on  foot  or  horseback,  and  there  are  coffee  plan- 
tations near  all  of  them. 

Approximate  Height  of  Towns  Above  the  Sea  Level. — Aybonito,  with  its  accli- 
matization station,  970  yards;  Adjuntas,  an  almost  exclusively  Spanish  town,  810 
yards;  Cayey,  with  a very  agreeable  climate,  750  yards;  Lares,  with  a very  agree- 
able climate,  540  j'ards;  Utuado,  with  a very  agreeable  climate,  480  yards;  Muricao, 
an  exclusively  Spanish  town,  480  yards.  To  ascend  to  all  these  towns  there  are 
very  good  wagon  roads.  There  are  no  fortifications  of  any  kind  in  them,  but  they 
are  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  mountains. 

Hydrography. — Few  countries  of  the  extent  of  Porto  Rico  are  watered  by  so 
many  streams.  Seventeen  rivers,  taking  their  rise  in  the  mountains,  cross  the  val- 
leys of  the  north  coast  and  empty  into  the  sea.  Some  of  these  are  navigable  2 or  3 
leagues  from  their  mouths  for  schooners  and  small  coasting  vessels.  Those  of 
Manati,  Loisa,  Trabajo,  and  Arecibo  are  very  deep  and  broad,  and  it  is  difficult  to 
imagine  how  such  large  bodies  of  water  can  be  collected  in  so  short  a course.  Owing 
to  the  heav-y  surf  which  continually  breaks  on  the  north  coast,  these  rivers  have  bars 
across  their  embouchures  which  do  not  allow  large  vessels  to  enter.  The  rivers  of 
Bayamo  and  Rio  Piedras  flow  into  the  harbor  of  the  capital,  and  are  also  navigable 
for  boats.  At  high  water  small  brigs  may  enter  the  river  of  Arecibo  with  perfect 
safety  and  discharge  their  cargoes,  notwithstanding  the  bar  which  crosses  its  mouth. 

The  rivers  of  the  north  coast  have  a decided  advantage  over  those  of  the  south 
coast,  where  the  climate  is  drier  and  the  rains  less  frequent.  Nevertheless,  the 
south,  west,  and  east  coasts  are  well  supplied  with  water;  and,  although  in  some 
seasons  it  does  not  rain  for  ten,  and  sometimes  twelve  months  on  the  south  coast, 
the  rivers  are  never  entirely  dried  up. 


454 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  BICU. 


From  the  Cabeza  tie  San  Juan,  which  is  the  northeast  extremity  of  the  island, 
to  the  cape  of  Mala  Pascua,  which  lies  to  the  southeast,  9 rivers  fall  into  the  sea. 

From  Cape  Mala  Pascua  to  Point  Aguila,  which  forms  the  southwest  angle  of 
the  island,  16  rivers  discharge  their  waters  on  the  south  coast. 

On  the  west  coast  3 rivers,  5 rivulets,  and  several  fresh-water  lakes  communicate 
with  the  sea.  In  the  small  extent  of  330  leagues  of  area  there  are  46  rivers,  besides  a 
countless  number  of  rivulets  and  branches  of  navigable  water. 

The  rivers  of  the  north  coast  are  stocked  with  delicious  fish,  some  of  them  large 
enough  to  weigh  two  quintals. 

From  the  river  of  Arecibo  to  that  of  Manati,  a distance  of  5 leagues,  a fresh-water 
lagoon,  perfectly  navigable  for  small  vessels  through  the  whole  of  its  extent,  runs 
parallel  to  the  sea  at  about  a mile  from  the  shore. 

In  the  fertile  valley  of  Anasco,  on  the  western  coast,  there  is  a canal  formed 
by  nature,  deep  and  navigable.  None  of  the  rivers  are  of  real  military  importance; 
for,  though  considering  the  shortness  of  their  course,  they  attain  quite  a volume, 
still  it  is  not  sufficient  for  good-sized  vessels. 

The  rivers  emptying  on  the  north  coast  arc  Loisa,  Aguas  Prietas,  Arecibo,  Baya- 
mon,  Camuy,  Cedros,  Grande,  Guajataca  de  la  Tuna,  Lesayas,  Loquillo,  Manati, 
Bio  Piedras,  Sabana,  San  Martin,  Sibuco,  Toa,  and  Vega. 

Those  emptying  on  the  east  coast  are  Candelero,  Dagua,  Fajardo,  Guayanes, 
Majogua,  and  Maonabo. 

On  the  south  coast:  Aquamanil,  Caballon,  Cana,  Coamo,  Descalabrado,  Guanica, 
Guayama,  Guayanilla,  Jacagua,  Manglar,  renuela,  Ponce  and  Yigia. 

On  the  west  coast:  Aguada,  Boqucron,  Cajas,  Culcbrina,  Chico,  Guanajibo, 

Mayagiiez,  and  Rincon. 

The  limits  of  the  Loisa  river  are:  On  the  east,  the  sierra  of  Luquillo  (situated 
near  the  northeast  corner  of  the  island);  on  the  south,  the  sierra  of  Cayey,  and 
on  the  west,  ramifications  of  the  latter.  It  rises  in  the  northern  slopes  of  the  sierra 
of  Cayey,  and,  running  in  a northwest  direction  for  the  first  half  of  its  course  and 
turning  to  northeast  in  the  second  half,  it  arrives  at  Loisa,  a port  on  the  northern 
coast,  where  it  discharges  its  waters  into  the  Atlantic.  During  the  first  part  of  its 
course  it  is  known  by  the  name  of  Cayagua. 

The  Sabana  river  has,  to  the  east  and  south,  the  western  and  southern  limits 
of  the  preceding  river,  and  on  the  west  the  Sierra  Grande,  or  De  Barros,  which  is 
situated  in  the  center  of  the  general  divide,  or  watershed.  It  rises  in  the  sierra  of 
Cayey,  and,  with  the  name  of  Pinones  river,  it  flows  northwest,  passing  through  Ai- 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO 


455 


bonito,  Toa  Alta,  Toa  Baja,  and  Dorado,  where  it  discharges  into  the  Atlantic  to 
the  west  of  the  preceding  river. 

The  Manati  river  is  bounded  on  the  cast  and  south  by  the  Sierra  Grande  and 
on  the  west  by  the  Siales  ridge.  It  rises  in  the  Sierra  Grande,  and  parallel  with 
the  preceding  river,  if  how  through  Siales  and  Manati,  to  the  north  of  which  latter 
town  it  empties  into  the  Atlantic. 

The  Arecibo  river  is  bounded  on  the  east  by  the  Siales  mountain  ridge,  on  the 
south  by  the  western  extremity  of  the  Sierra  Grande,  and  on  the  west  by  the  Dares 
ridge.  It  rises  in  the  general  divide,  near  Adjuntas,  and  flows  north  through  the 
town  of  Arecibo  to  the  Atlantic,  shortly  before  emptying  into  which  it  receives  the 
Tanama  river  from  the  left,  which  proceeds  from  the  Lares  Mountains. 

The  Culebrina  river  is  hounded  on  the  south  and  east  by  the  Lares  mountain 
ridge,  and  on  the  north  by  small  hills  of  little  interest.  From  the  Lares  Mountains 
it  flows  from  east  to  west  and  empties  on  the  west  coast  north  of  San  Francisco  de  la 
Aguada,  in  the  center  of  the  hay  formed  between  Point  Penas  Blancas  and  Point 
San  Francisco. 

The  Anasco  river  is  formed  by  the  Lares  mountain  ridge.  It  rises  in  the  eastern 
extremity  of  the  mountains  called  Tetas  de  Cerro  Gordo,  flowing  first  northwest 
and  then  west,  through  the  town  of  its  name  and  thence  to  the  sea. 

The  Guanajivo  river  has  to  its  north  the  ramifications  of  the  Lares  ridge,  to 

the  east  the  Tetas  de  Cerro  Gordo  Mountains,  and  on  the  south  Torre  Hill.  In 

the  interior  of  its  basin  is  the  mountain  called  Cerro  Montuoso,  which  separates 
its  waters  from  those  of  tis  affluent  from  the  right,  the  Rosaria  river.  It  rises  in  the 
general  divide,  flowing  from  east  to  west  to  Nuestra  Senora  de  Montserrat,  where 
it  receives  the  affluent  mentioned,  the  two  together  then  emptying  south  of  Port 
Mayaguez. 

The  Coamo  river  is  bounded  on  the  west  and  north  by  the  Sierra  Grande, 
and  on  the  west  by  the  Coamo  ridge.  It  rises  in  the  former  of  these  sierras,  and 
flowing  from  north  to  south  it  empties  east  of  Coamo  Point,  after  having  watered  the 
town  of  its  name. 

The  Salinas  river  is  bounded  on  the  west  by  the  Coamo  ridge,  on  the  north  by 

the  general  divide,  and  on  the  east  by  the  Cayey  ridge.  It  rises  in  the  southern 

slopes  of  the  Sierra  Grande  and  flowing  from  north  to  south  through  Salinas  de 
Coamo,  empties  into  the  sea. 

Coasts,  Harbors,  Bays,  and  Coves. — The  northern  coast  extends  in  an  almost 
straight  line  from  east  to  west,  and  is  high  and  rugged.  The  only  harbors  it  has 


45G 


CUBA  AND  POETO  EICO. 


are  the  following:  San  Juan  de  Porto  Eico,  surrounded  by  mangrove  swamps  and 
protected  by  the  Cabras  and  the  Cabritas  islands  and  some  very  dangerous  banks; 
the  anchoring  ground  of  Arecibo,  somewhat  unprotected;  and  the  coves  of  Cangrejos 
and  Condado.  During  the  months  of  November,  December,  and  January,  when 
the  wind  blows  with  violence  from  the  east  and  northeast,  the  anchorage  is  danger- 
ous in  all  the  bays  and  harbors  of  this  coast,  except  in  the  port  of  San  Juan.  Ves- 
sels are  often  obliged  to  put  to  sea  on  the  menacing  aspect  of  the  heavens  at  this  sea- 
son, to  avoid  being  driven  on  shore  by  the  heavy  squalls  and  the  rolling  waves  of  a 
boisterous  sea,  which  propel  them  to  destruction.  During  the  remaining  months 
the  ports  on  this  coast  are  safe  and  commodious,  unless  when  visited  by  a hurricane, 
against  whose  fury  no  port  can  offer  a shelter,  nor  any  vessel  be  secure.  The  ex- 
cellent port  of  San  Juan  is  perfectly  sheltered  from  the  effects  of  the  north  wind. 
The  hill,  upon  which  the  town  of  that  name  and  the  fortifications  which  defend  it 
are  built,  protects  the  vessels  anchored  in  the  harbor.  The  entrance  of  this  port 
is  narrow,  and  requires  a pilot;  for  the  canal  which  leads  to  the  anchorage,  although 
deep  enough  for  vessels  of  any  dimensions,  is  very  narrow,  which  exposes  them  to 
run  aground.  This  port  is  several  miles  in  extent,  and  has  the  advantage  of  having 
deep  canals  to  the  east,  among  a wood  of  mangrove  trees,  where  vessels  are  perfectly 
secure  during  the  hurricane  months.  Vessels  of  250  tons  can  at  present  unload 
and  take  in  their  cargoes  at  the  wharf.  Harbor  improvements  have  been  recently 
made  here. 

On  the  northwest  and  west  are  the  coves  of  Aguadilla,  the  town  of  this  name 
being  some  4 kilometers  inland.  There  are  the  small  coves  of  Eincon,  Anasco,  and 
Mayaguez,  the  latter  being  protected  and  of  sufficient  depth  to  anchor  vessels  of  mod- 
erate draft;  the  harbor  of  Eeal  de  Cabo  Eojo,  nearly  round,  and  entered  by  a narrow 
channel;  and  the  cove  of  Boqueron.  The  spacious  bay  of  Aguadilla  is  formed  by 
Cape  Borrigua  and  Cape  San  Francisco.  When  the  north-northwest  and  southwest 
winds  prevail  it  is  not  a safe  anchorage  for  ships.  A heavy  surf  rolling  on  the  shore 
obliges  vessels  to  seek  safety  by  putting  to  sea  on  the  appearance  of  a north  wind. 
Mayaguez  is  also  an  open  roadstead  formed  by  two  projecting  capes.  It  has  good 
anchorage  for  vessels  of  a large  size  and  is  well  sheltered  from  the  north  winds. 
The  port  of  Cabo  Eojo  has  also  good  anchorage.  It  is  situated  S.  one-fourth  N. 
of  the  point  of  Guanajico,  at  a distance  of  5£  miles.  Its  shape  is  nearly  circular, 
and  it  extends  from  east  to  west  3 to  I miles.  At  the  entrance  it  has  3 fathoms  of 
water,  and  16  feet  in  the  middle  of  the  harbor.  The  entrance  is  a narrow  canal. 

The  south  coast  abounds  in  bays  and  harbors,  but  is  covered  with  mangroves 


ROYAL  STREET  IN  ILO-ILO,  ISLAND  OF  PANAY,  PHILIPPINES. 


native  dwelling  in  suburbs  of  calamba,  Philippines. 


CANE  BRIDGE  OVER  ARM  OF  BAY  AT  ILO-ILO,  PHILIPPINES. 


VIEW  OF  PAGSANGAN  RIVER  IN  THE  PROVINCE 
OF  LA  LAGUNA. 


SERGEANT  DAN  HEWITT. 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


459 


and  reefs,  the  only  harbor  where  vessels  of  regular  draft  can  enter  being  Guanica 
and  Ponce.  The  former  of  these  is  the  westernmost  harbor  on  the  southern 
coast,  being  at  the  same  time  the  best,  though  the  least  visited,  owing  to  the  swamps 
and  low  tracts  difficult  to  cross  leading  from  it  to  the  interior.  The  nearest  towns, 
San  German,  Sabana  Grande,  and  Yauco,  carry  on  a small  trade  through  this  port. 

In  the  port  of  Guanica,  vessels  drawing  21  feet  of  water  may  enter  with  perfect 
safety.  Its  entrance  is  about  100  yards  wide,  and  it  forms  a spacious  basin,  com- 
pletely landlocked.  The  vessels  may  anchor  close  to  the  shore.  It  has,  in  the  whole 
extent,  from  6-|-  to  3 fathoms,  the  latter  depth  being  formed  in  the  exterior  of  the 
port.  The  entrance  is  commanded  by  two  small  hills  on  either  side,  which  if  mounted 
with  a few  pieces  of  artillery  would  defy  a squadron  to  force  it.  This  port  would  be 
of  immense  advantage  in  time  of  war.  The  national  vessels  and  coasters  would  thus 
have  a secure  retreat  from  an  enemy’s  cruiser  on  the  south  coast.  There  are  no 
wharves,  hut  vessels  could  disembark  troops  by  running  alongside  the  land  and  run- 
ning out  a plank.  Coamo  Cove  and  Aguirre  and  Guayama  are  also  harbors.  The 
port  of  Jovos,  near  Guayama,  is  a haven  of  considerable  importance.  It  is  a large 
and  healthy  place,  and  the  most  Spanish  of  any  city  on  the  island  after  San  Juan. 
There  are  good  roads  to  the  capital.  Vessels  of  the  largest  kind  may  anchor  and 
ride  in  safety  from  the  winds,  and  the  whole  British  navy  would  find  room  in  its 
spacious  bosom.  It  has  4 fathoms  of  water  in  the  shallowest  part  of  the  entrance. 
However,  it  is  difficult  to  enter  this  port  from  June  to  November,  as  the  sea  breaks 
with  violence  at  the  entrance,  on  account  of  the  southerly  winds  which  reign  at  that 
season.  It  has  every  convenience  of  situation  and  locality  for  forming  docks  for  the 
repair  of  shipping.  The  large  hay  of  Anasco,  on  the  south  coast,  affords  anchorage 
to  vessels  of  all  sizes.  It  is  also  safe  from  the  north  winds.  Although  on  the  eastern 
coast  there  are  many  places  for  vessels  to  anchor,  yet  none  of  them  are  exempt 
from  danger  during  the  north  winds  except  Fajardo,  where  a safe  anchorage  is  to 
he  found  to  leeward  of  two  little  islands  close  to  the  bay,  where  vessels  are  completely 
sheltered. 

The  island  of  Vieques  has  also  several  commodious  ports  and  harbors,  where 
vessels  of  the  largest  size  may  ride  at  anchor. 

On  the  east  coast  is  Cape  Cabeza  de  San  Juan,  Points  Lima,  Candeleros,  and  Nar- 
anjo, and  Cape  Mala  Pascua;  on  the  south  coast,  Point  Viento,  Tigueras,  Corchones, 
Arenas,  Fama  or  Maria,  Cucharas,  Guayanilla,  Guanica,  and  Morillos  de  Cabo  Rojo; 
on  the  west  coast,  points  San  Francisco,  Cadena,  Guanijito,  Guaniquilla,  and  Ralo 
Seco. 


460 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


Highways. — There  are  few  roads  or  ways  of  communication  which  are  worthy  of 
mention,  with  the  exception  of  the  broad  pike  which  starts  from  the  capital  and 
runs  along  the  coast,  passing  through  the  following  towns:  Aguadilla,  Bayamon, 

Cabo  Rojo,  Humacao,  Juana  Diaz,  Mayaguez,  Fonce,  and  San  German.  It  has  no 
bridges;  is  good  in  dry  weather,  but  in  the  rainy  season  is  impassible  for  wagons  and 
even  at  times  for  horsemen. 

For  interior  communication  there  are  only  a few  local  roads  or  paths.  They 
are  usually  2 yards  in  width,  made  by  the  various  owners,  and  can  not  be  well  trav- 
eled in  rainy  weather.  They  are  more  properly  horse  and  mule  trails,  and  oblige 
people  to  go  in  single  file.  In  late  years  much  has  been  attempted  to  improve 
the  highways  connecting  the  principal  cities,  and  more  has  been  accomplished 
than  in  Spanish  colonies.  There  is  a good  made  road  connecting  Ponce  on  the 
southern  coast  with  San  Juan  the  capital.  Other  good  roads  also  extend  for  a short 
distance  along  the  north  coast  and  along  the  south  coast.  The  road  from  Guayama 
is  also  said  to  he  a passably  good  one. 

There  arc  in  the  island  about  130  miles  of  excellent  road,  and  this  is  all  that  re- 
ceives any  attention,  transportation  being  effected  elsewhere  on  horse  back.  Im  the 
construction  of  a road  level  foundation  is  sought,  and  on  this  is  put  a heavy  layer 
of  crushed  rock  and  brick,  which,  after  having  been  well  packed  and  rounded,  is  cov- 
ered with  a layer  of  earth.  This  is  well  packed  also,  and  upon  the  whole  is  spread  a 
layer  of  ground  limestone,  which  is  pressed  and  rolled  until  it  forms  almost  a glossy 
surface.  This  makes  an  excellent  road  here  where  the  climate  is  such  that  it  docs 
not  affect  it,  and  when  there  is  no  heavy  traffic,  but  these  conditions  being  changed, 
the  road,  it  is  thought,  would  not  stand  so  well. 

From  Palo  Seco,  situated  about  a mile  and  a half  from  the  capital,  on  the  op- 
posite side  of  the  bay,  a carriage  road,  perfectly  level,  has  been  constructed  for  a 
distance  of  22  leagues  to  the  town  of  Aguadilla  on  the  west  coast,  passing  through 
the  towns  of  Vegabaja,  Manati,  Arecibo,  Hatillo,  Camuy,  and  Isabella.  This  road 
has  been  carried  for  several  leagues  over  swampy  lands,  which  are  intersected  by 
deep  drains  to  carry  off  the  water. 

The  road  from  Aguadilla  to  Mayaguez  is  in  some  parts  very  good,  in  other  parts 
only  fair.  From  Aguadilla  to  Aguada,  a distance  of  a league,  the  road  is  excellent 
and  level.  From  thence  to  Mayaguez,  through  the  village  of  Rincon  and  the  town  of 
Anasco,  the  road  is  generally  good,  but  on  the  seashore  it  is  sometimes  interrupted 
by  shelving  rocks.  Across  the  valley  of  Anasco  the  road  is  carried  through  a boggy 
tract,  with  bridges  over  several  deep  creeks  of  fresh  water.  From  thence  to  the 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


461 


large  commercial  town  of  Mayaguez  the  road  is  uneven  and  requires  some  improve- 
ment. But  the  roads  from  Mayaguez  and  Ponce  to  their  respective  ports  on  the 
seashore  can  not  be  surpassed  by  any  in  Europe.  They  are  made  in  a most  sub- 
stantial manner,  and  their  convex  form  is  well  adapted  to  preserve  them  from  the 
destruction  caused  by  the  heavy  rains  of  the  climate.  These  roads  have  been  made 
over  tracts  of  swampy  ground  to  the  seacoast,  but  with  little  and  timely  repair 
they  will  last  forever. 

A road,  which  may  be  called  a carriage  road,  has  been  made  from  Ponce  to  the 
village  of  Ad  juntas,  situated  5 leagues  in  the  interior  of  the  mountains.  The  road 
along  the  coast,  from  Ponce  to  Guayama,  is  fairly  good;  from  thence  to  Patillas 
there  is  an  excellent  carriage  road  for  a distance  of  3 leagues;  from  the  latter  place 
to  the  coast  is  a high  road  well  constructed.  From  Patillas  to  Fajardo,  on  the  eastern 
coast,  passing  through  the  towns  of  Maimavo,  Yubacao,  Humacao,  and  Naguabo,  the 
roads  are  not  calculated  for  wheel  vehicles,  in  consequence  of  being  obliged  to  ascend 
and  descend  several  steep  hills.  That  which  crosses  the  mountain  of  Mala  Pascua, 
dividing  the  north  and  east  coasts,  is  a good  and  solid  road,  upon  which  a person 
on  horseback  may  travel  with  great  ease  and  safety.  The  road  crossing  the  valley  of 
ALfbacao,  which  consists  of  a soft  and  humid  soil,  requires  more  attention  than  that 
crossing  the  mountain  of  Mala  Pascua,  which  has  a fine,  sandy  soil. 

From  Fajardo  to  the  capital,  through  the  towns  of  Luquillo,  Loisa,  and  Rio 
Piedras,  the  road  is  tolerably  good  for  persons  on  horseback  as  far  as  Rio  Pie- 
clras,  and  from  thence  to  the  city  c,  San  Juan,  a distance  of  2 leagues,  is  an  ex- 
cellent carriage  road,  made  by  the  order  and  under  the  inspection  of  the  Captain- 
General,  part  of  it  through  a mangrove  swamp.  Over  the  river  Loisa  is  a handsome 
wooden  bridge,  and  on  the  road  near  Rio  Piedras  is  a handsome  stone  one  over  a 
deep  rivulet. 

One  of  the  best  roads  in  the  island  extends  from  the  town  of  Papino,  situated  in 
the  mountains,  to  the  town  of  Aguadilla  on  the  coast,  distant  5|  leagues,  through  the 
village  of  La  Moca;  in  the  distance  of  3 leagues  from  the  latter  place,  it  is  crossed 
by  10  deep  mountain  rivulets,  formerly  impassable,  but  over  which  solid  bridges 
have  now  been  built,  with  side  railings.  In  the  mountainous  district  within  the  cir- 
cumference of  a few  leagues  no  less  than  47  bridges  have  been  built  to  facilitate 
the  communication  between  one  place  and  the  other. 

The  following  are  the  roads  of  6 meters  width,  4|  in  center  of  pounded  stone. 
They  have  iron  bridges  and  are  in  good  shape  for  travel  all  the  year. 

(1)  San  Juan  to  the  Shore  near  Ponce. — From  San  Juan  to  Ponce  the  central 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


462 


road  is  exactly  134  kilometers.  Distances  along  the  line  are:  Rio  Piedras,  11; 

Caguas,  25;  to  Cayei,  24;  Aybonito,  20;  Coamo,  18;  Juana  Diaz,  20;  to  Ponce, 
13;  and  to  the  shore,  3.  Exact. 

(2)  San  Juan  to  Bayamon. — By  ferry  fifteen  minutes  to  Catano,  and  from  there 
by  road  to  Bayamon  10  kilometers.  This  passes  alongside  the  railway. 

(3)  Rio  Piedras  to  Mameyes,  36  kilometers;  from  Rio  Piedras  to  Carolina,  12; 
to  Rio  Grande,  19;  to  Mameyes,  5. 

(4)  Cayei  to  Arroyo,  35  kilometers;  from  Cayei  to  Guayama,  25;  to  Arroyo,  8; 
from  San  Juan  to  Arroyo,  via  Cayei,  is  95  kilometers. 

(5  Ponce  to  Adjuntas,  32  kilometers. 

(6)  San  German  to  Anasco,  33  kilometers;  from  San  German  to  Mayaguez,  21 
kilometers;  Mayaguez  to  Anasco,  12;  Mayaguez  to  Mormigueros,  11;  Mayaguez  to 
Cabo  Rojo,  18;  Mayaguez  to  Las  Marias,  23;  Mayaguez  to  Maricao,  35;  Ilor- 
migueras  to  San  German,  14.  Near  Mayaguez  the  roads  are  best.  There  are  good 
roads  in  all  directions. 

(7)  Aguadilla  to  San  Sebastian,  18. 

(8)  Arecibo  to  Utuado,  33. 

Highways  of  first  class  in  the  island,  335  kilometers. 

Along  these  roads  are,  at  a distance  of  8 to  10  kilometers,  a fort,  stone,  and 
brick  barracks,  or  large  buildings,  where  the  Spanish  troops  stop  and  rest  when 
on  the  march. 

Railroads. — In  1878  a report  was  presented  to  the  minister  of  the  colonies  on  a 
study  made  by  the  engineer  and  head  of  public  works  of  the  island  in  view  of  con- 
structing a railroad  which  should  start  from  the  capital  and,  passing  through  all 
the  chief  towns  and  through  the  whole  island,  return  to  the  point  of  departure. 

Of  this  railroad  the  following  parts  have  been  completed:  San  Juan,  along 

the  coast  through  Rio  Piedras,  Bayamon,  Dorado,  A.ecibo,  and  Hatillo,  to  Camuy; 
Aguadilla,  through  Aguado,  Rincon,  Anasco,  and  Mayaguez,  to  Hornigueros.  A 
branch  of  this  railroad  from  Anasco,  through  San  Sebastian,  to  Lares.  Ponce, 
through  Guayanilla,  to  Yauco.  This  latter  railroad  follows  the  southern  coast  line 
and  is  followed  by  a wagon  road  throughout  its  course.  In  one  place  the  railroad  and 
road  run  within  a few  hundred  yards  of  the  coast  line.  According  to  the  Statesman  s 
Year  Book  for  1898  there  are  in  operation  137  miles  of  railroad,  besides  over  170 
miles  under  construction. 

All  the  railroads  are  single  track,  and  the  gauge  is  1 meter  20  centimeters,  or  3 
feet  11^  inches. 


ta 

p 

►aS 

o o 

&B 

o © 
Ht-cjo 

tSaT*a 

H Cj 
HtJP. 

Zog 
w £. 
cl  cx 
» ? 
O 
W 

on 

H ® 

£ ® 

tn  n. 

fl*  D 

3 ° 
M o, 
W ® 
CO  M 


W P 

SI 

P°  l» 

gfl 

2s| 

-2g5 

02  o-S 
- o o 
* a 


trf- 

O 


ta 


© 

p* 


B 


D 

O 


MAJOR-GENERAL  THOMAS  M.  ANDERSON  AND  STAFF.  IN  COMMAND  OF  THE  1ST  DIVISION  8TH  ARMY  CORPS  AT  MANILA. 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


4B5 


The  following  are  the  railways  of  1-meter  gauge: 

(1)  San  Juan  to  Rio  Piedras,  11  kilometers. 

(2)  Catano  to  Bayamon,  10  kilometers. 

(3)  Anasco  to  San  Sebastian  and  Lares,  35  kilometers. 

Total  of  three  lines,  56  kilometers. 

The  lines  are  all  in  good  shape;  have  plenty  of  engines  and  cars;  speed,  20  kil- 
ometers per  hour;  use  coal  for  fuel  imported  from  the  United  States;  supply  usually 
large,  may  be  small  now;  hard  coal;  fine  stations;  plenty  of  water,  and  everything 
in  shape,  for  business. 

Telegraphs. — The  capital  communicates  with  the  principal  towns  of  the  coast  and 
interior  by  means  of  a well-connected  telegraph  system.  There  are  in  all  some  470 
miles  of  telegraph. 

Telephones. — The  British  Consular  Report  says  that  the  telephone  system  of  San 
Juan,  Ponce,  and  Mayaguez  have  recently  been  contracted  for  by  local  syndicates. 
In  Ponce  a United  States  company  obtained  the  contract  for  the  material.  There 
are  100  stations  already  connected,  and  it  is  expected  that  200  more  will  be  in  opera- 
tion shortly.  , 

Administration. — From  an  administrative  standpoint,  Porto  Rico  is  not  con- 
sidered as  a colony,  hut  as  a province  of  Spain,  assimilated  to  the  remaining  prov- 
inces. The  Governor-General,  representing  the  monarchy,  is  at  the  same  time  Cap- 
tain-General of  the  armed  forces.  In  each  chief  town  resides  a military  commander, 
and  each  town  has  its  alcalde,  or  mayor,  appointed  by  the  central  power.  The  prov- 
incial deputation  is  elected  by  popular  suffrage  under  the  same  conditions  as  in 
Spain.  The  regular  peace  garrison  is  composed  of  about  3,000  men,  and  the  annual 
budget  amounts  to  some  20,000,000  pesos. 

Education. — In  1887  only  one-seventh  of  the  population  could  read  and  write, 
but  of  late  years  progress  in  public  instruction  has  been  rapid. 

Agriculture,  Industry,  and  Commerce. — In  1878  there  arrived  in  the  harbors  of 
the  island  1,591  vessels  of  different  nationalities  and  1,534  departed.  The  value  of 
products  imported  was  14,787,551  pesos,  and  that  of  articles  exported  was  13,070,- 
020  pesos.  The  following  are  the  relative  percentages  of  values: 


Flags.  Relation. 

Per  Cent. 

Spanish 49.91 

American : 13.47 

English 21.43 

Various  Nations 15.19 


Total 


100.00 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


46ft 

Navigation  is  very  active,  but  the  part  the  inhabitants  take  in  the  commercial 
fleet  is  small.  The  Porto  Ricans  are  not  seagoing  people.  The  eastern  part  of  the 
island  offers  less  advantage  to  commerce'  than  the  western,  being  to  the  windward 
and  affording  less  shelter  to  vessels. 

Torto  Rico  has  more  than  seventy  towns  and  cities,  of  which  Ponce  is  the  most 
important.  Ponce  has  22,000  inhabitants,  with  a jurisdiction  numbering  47,000.  It 
is  situated  on  the  south  coast  of  the  island,  on  a plain,  about  2 miles  from  the  sea- 
board. It  is  the  chief  town  of  the  judicial  district  of  its  name,  and  is  70  miles  from 
San  Juan.  It  is  regularly  built,  the  central  part  almost  exclusively  of  brick  houses, 
and  the  suburbs  of  wood.  It  is  the  residence  of  the  military  commander,  and  the  seat 
of  an  official  chamber  of  commerce.  There  is  an  appellate  criminal  court,  besides  other 
courts;  2 churches,  one  Protestant,  said  to  be  the  only  one  in  the  Spanish  West 
Indies;  2 hospitals  besides  the  military  hospital,  a home  of  refuge  for  old  and  poor, 
2 cemeteries,  3 asylums,  several  casinos,  3 theaters,  a market,  a municipal  public 
library,  3 first-class  hotels,  3 barracks,  a park,  gas  works,  a perfectly  equipped  fire  de- 
partment, a bank,  thermal  and  natural  baths,  etc.  Commercially,  Ponce  is  the  second 
city  of  importance  on  the  island.  A fine  road  leads  to  the  port  (Playa),  where  all 
the  import  and  export  trade  is  transacted.  Playa  has  about  5,000  inhabitants,  and 
here  are  situated  the  custom  house,  the  office  of  the  captain  of  the  port,  and  all  the 
consular  offices.  The  port  is  spacious  and  will  hold  vessels  of  25  feet  draft.  The 
climate,  on  account  of  the  sea  breezes  during  the  day  and  land  breezes  at  night,  is  not 
oppressive,  but  very  hot  and  dry;  and,  as  water  for  all  purposes,  including  the  fire 
department,  is  amply  supplied  by  an  aqueduct  4,442  yards  long,  it  is  said  that  the 
city  of  Ponce  is  perhaps  the  healthiest  place  in  the  whole  island.  There  is  a stage 
coach  to  San  Juan,  Mayaguez,  Guayama,  etc.  There  is  a railroad  to  Yauco,  a post 
office,  and  a telegraph  station. 

It  is  believed  that  Ponce  was  founded  in  1600;  it  was  given  the  title  of  villa  in 
1S48,  and  in  1877  that  of  city.  Of  its  34  streets  the  best  are  Mayor,  Salud,  Villa, 
Vives,  Marina,  and  Comercio.  The  best  squares  are  Principal  and  Las  Delicias,  which 
are  separated  by  the  church  of  Nuestra  Senora  de  Guadalupe.  The  church,  as  old  as 
Hie  town  itself,  began  to  be  reconstructed  in  1838  and  was  finished  in  1847.  It  is 
86  yards  long  by  43  broad,  and  has  two  steeples,  rich  altars,  and  fine  ornaments. 

The  theater  is  called  the  Pearl,  and  it  deserves  this  name,  for  it  is  the  finest 
on  the  island.  It  has  a sculptured  porch,  on  the  Byzantine  order,  with  very  graceful 
columns.  It  is  mostly  built  of  iron  and  marble  and  cost  over  70,000  pesos.  It  is  52 
yaids  deep  by  29  wide.  The  inside  is  beautifil,  the  boxes  and  seats  roomy  and 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


467 


nicely  decorated.  It  may,  by  a mechanical  arrangement,  be  converted  into  a danc- 
ing hall. 

About  l-£  miles  northeast  of  the  town  are  the  Quintana  thermal  baths,  in  a build- 
ing surrounded  by  pretty  gardens.  They  are  visited  by  sufferers  from  rheumatism 
and  various  other  diseases. 

San  Juan  is  a perfect  specimen  of  a walled  town,  with  portcullis,  moat,  gates, 
and  battlements.  The  wall  surrounding  this  town  is  defended  by  several  batteries. 
Facing  the  harbor  are  those  of  San  Fernando,  Santa  Catalina,  and  Santa  Toribio. 
Looking  toward  the  land  side  is  Fort  Abanico,  and  toward  the  ocean  the  batteries  of 
San  Antonio,  San  Jose,  and  Santa  Teresa,  and  Fort  Princesa.  The  land  part  has 
two  ditches,  or  cuts,  which  are  easy  to  inundate.  The  fort  and  bridge  of  San  Antonio 
that  of  San  Geronimo,  and  the  Escambron  battery  situated  on  a tongue  of  land 
which  enters  the  sea.  Built  over  two  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago,  the  city  is  still 
in  good  condition  and  repair.  The  walls  are  picturesque,  and  represent  a stupendous 
work  and  cost  in  themselves.  Inside  the  walls  the  city  is  laid  off  in  regular  squares, 
six  parallel  streets  running  in  the  direction  of  the  length  of  the  island  and  seven  at 
right  angles. 

The  peninsula  on  which  San  Juan  is  situated  is  connected  with  the  mainland  by 
three  bridges.  The  oldest,  that  of  San  Antonio,  carries  the  highway  across  the 
shallow  San  Antonio  Channel.  It  is  a stone-arched  bridge  about  350  yards  long 
including  the  approaches.  By  the  side  of  this  bridge  is  one  for  the  railroad  and 
one  for  the  tramway  which  follows  the  main  military  highway  to  Rio  Piedras. 

Among  the  buildings  the  following  are  notable:  The  palace  of  the  Captain- 
General,  the  palace  of  the  intendencia,  the  town  hall,  military  hospital,  jail,  Ballaja 
barracks,  theater,  custom  house,  cathedral,  Episcopal  palace,  and  seminary.  There 
is  no  university  or  provincial  institute  of  second  grade  instruction,  and  only  one 
college,  which  is  under  the  direction  of  Jesuit  priests.  The  houses  are  closely  and 
compactly  built  of  brick,  usually  of  two  stories,  stuccoed  on  the  outside  and  painted 
in  a variety  of  colors.  The  upper  floors  are  occupied  by  the  more  respectable  people, 
while  the  ground  floors,  almost  without  exception,  are  given  up  to  the  negroes  and 
the  poorer  class,  who  crowd  one  upon  another  in  the  most  appalling  manner. 

The  population  within  the  walls  is  estimated  at  20,000  and  most  of  it  lives  on 
the  ground  floor.  In  one  small  room,  with  a flimsy  partition,  a whole  family  will 
reside.  The  ground  floor  of  the  whole  town  reeks  with  filth,  and  conditions  are 
most  unsanitary.  In  a tropical  country,  where  disease  readily  prevails,  the  conse- 
quences of  such  herding  may  be  easily  inferred.  There  is  no  running  water  in  the 


468 


CUBA  AND  PORTO  RICO. 


town.  The  entire  population  depend  upon  rain  water,  caught  upon  the  flat  roofs 
of  the  buildings  and  conducted  to  the  cistern,  which  occupies  the  greater  part  of 
the  inner  court-yard  that  is  an  essential  part  of  Spanish  houses  the  world  over, 
but  that  here,  on  account  of  the  crowded  conditions,  is  very  small.  There  is  no 
sewerage,  except  for  surface  water  and  sinks,  while  vaults  are  in  every  house  and 
occupy  whatever  remaining  space  there  may  be  in  the  patios  not  taken  up  by  the 
cisterns.  The  risk  of  contaminating  the  water  is  very  great,  and  in  dry  seasons 
the  supply  is  entirely  exhausted.  Epidemics  are  frequent,  and  the  town  is  alive 
with  vermin,  fleas,  cockroaches,  mosquitoes,  and  dogs. 

The  streets  are  wider  than  in  the  older  part  of  Havana,  and  will  admit  two  car- 
riages abreast.  The  sidewalks  are  narrow,  and  in  places  will  accommodate  but 
one  person.  The  pavements  are  of  a composition  manufactured  in  England  from 
slag,  pleasant  and  even,  and  durable  when  no  heavy  strain  is  brought  to  bear  upon 
them,  but  easily  broken,  and  unfit  for  heavy  traffic.  The  streets  are  swept  once  a 
day  by  hand,  and,  strange  to  say,  are  kept  very  clean. 

From  its  topographical  situation  the  town  should  be  healthy,  but  it  is  not.  The 
soil  under  the  city  is  clay  mixed  with  lime,  so  hard  as  to  be  almost  like  rock.  It  is 
consequently  impervious  to  water  and  furnishes  a good  natural  drainage. 

The  trade  wind  blows  strong  and  fresh,  and  through  the  harbor  runs  a stream 
of  sea  water  at  a speed  of  not  less  than  three  miles  an  hour.  With  these  conditions 
no  contagious  diseases,  if  properly  taken  care  of,  could  exist;  without  them  the  place 
would  be  a veritable  plague  spot. 

Besides  the  town  within  the  walls  there  are  small  portions  just  outside,  called 
the  Marina  and  Puerta  de  Tierra,  containing  two  or  three  thousand  inhabitants 
each.  There  are  also  two  suburbs,  one,  San  Turce,  approached  by  the  only  road 
leading  out  of  the  city,  and  the  other,  Catano,  across  the  bay,  reached  by  ferry. 
The  Marina  and  the  two  suburbs  are  situated  on  sandy  points  or  spits,  and  the 
latter  are  surrounded  by  mangrove  swamps. 

The  entire  population  of  the  city  and  suburbs,  according  to  the  census  of  1887, 
was  27,000.  It  is  now  (1896)  estimated  at  30,000.  One-half  of  the  population  com 
sists  of  negroes  and  mixed  races. 

There  is  but  little  manufacturing,  and  it  is  of  small  importance.  The  Standard 
Oil  Company  has  a small  refinery  across  the  bay,  in  which  crude  petroleum  brought 
from  the  United  States  is  refined.  Matches  are  made,  some  brooms,  a little  soap, 
and  a cheap  class  of  trunks.  There  are  also  ice,  gas,  and  electric  light  works. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 


THE  LADRONES. 

The  Island  of  Guam  a Coaling  Station  of  the  United  States — Discovery,  Size  and 
Products  of  the  Islands. 

When  the  Philippine  expedition  on  its  way  to  Manila  incidentally  ran  up  the 
Stars  and  Stripes  over  the  Island  of  Guam,  there  was  perhaps  no  thought  of  the 
island  becoming  a permanent  part  of  our  domain.  However,  the  fortunes  of  war  are 
such  that  the  island  is  likely  to  become  ours  permanently  as  a coaling  station  in  the 
Pacific. 

Magellan  named  these  islands  the  Ladrones  from  the  Latin  word  “latro,”  mean- 
ing a robber,  because  of  the  thievish  propensities  of  the  natives.  According  to 
Magellan’s  reports,  the  native  people  of  these  islands  had  reduced  stealing  to  a 
science  of  such  exactness  that  the  utmost  vigilance  could  not  prevail  against  their 
operations.  The  group  was  named  the  Mariana  Islands  by  the  Jesuits,  who  settled 
in  them  in  1667. 

The  Ladrone  group  consists  of  twenty  islands,  of  which  five  are  inhabited.  The 
group  extends  forty-five  miles  from  north  to  south,  and  is  located  between  13  deg. 
and  21  deg.  north  latitude,  and  between  144  deg.  and  146  deg.  east  longitude.  The 
principal  islands  are  Guam,  Rota  and  Linian.  They  were  discovered  by  Magellan  in 
1521,  and  have  belonged  to  Spain  ever  since.  Their  population  is  11,000.  The  soil 
is  fertile  and  densely  wooded.  The  climate  is  temperate. 

Guam,  the  southernly  and  principal  island,  is  100  miles  in  circumference,  and 
has  a population  of  8,100,  of  which  1,400  are  Europeans.  Its  central  part  is  moun- 
tainous, and  it  has  a small  volcano.  The  products  are  guacas,  bananas,  cocoa, 
oranges  and  limes.  The  natives  are  noted  as  builders  of  the  most  rapidly  sailing 
canoes  in  the  world. 

With  Guam  as  a part  of  the  territory  of  the  United  States,  we  have  a direct  line 
of  possessions  across  the  Pacific,  in  the  order  of  Hawaii,  Guam  and  the  Philippines; 
while  in  a northwesterly  direction  from  our  Pacific  coast  we  have  the  islands  forming 
a part  of  Alaska.  By  holding  all  these  islands  we  will  be  prepared  to  control  prac- 
tically the  commerce  of  the  Pacific,  the  future  great  commercial  highway  of  the 
world 


471 


472 


O 


O 

QBABUJW 


CO 

p. 

-4 

P 

co 

I— I 

W 

I— I 

P 

P 

hH 

P 

I— I 

w 

p 

w 

i-h 

t-H 

p 


41 

to 

a* 

.15 

a 

P 

© 

P 


a 

o 

O 

© 

P 


53  * 

1 s 

o •£? 
CO  to 

r3 

—4  CQ 

0)  c3 

P ^ 
a <d 
p<  a 
c$ 

^ <v 

2 ^ 


CD 

-P> 

o 

s 


s © 
«2  5 

rt1  ^ 

a 

© 

P 


c3 

P 

© 

<3 

P 

CO 

© 

P 

H 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 


THE  OFFICIAL  TITLE  TO  OUR  NEW  POSSESSIONS  IN  THE  INDIES. 

Full  Text  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Spain  Handed  the  President  of  the  United 
States  as  a Christmas  Gift  for  the  People,  at  the  White  House,  1898 — The 
Gathered  Fruit  of  a Glorious  and  Wonderful  Victory. 

On  an  August  midnight  the  good  ship  Peru,  Major-General  Otis  with  his  staff 
and  General  Hughes,  and  a thousand  regular  cavalry  and  “the  historian  of  the 
Philippines”  aboard,  approached  within  a few  miles,  an  immense  mass  of  darkness. 
About  where  the  mouth  of  Manila  Bay  should  be  there  was,  deep  in  the  east  and 
at  a considerable  elevation,  a spark  of  white,  and  in  a few  seconds  a red  light, 
keener  than  stars,  and  in  half  a minute  there  were  the  sharp  flashes  again,  and  we 
knew  that  there  were  friends  watching  and  waiting— that  “our  flag  was  still  there,” 
that  Admiral  Dewey  and  General  Merritt  of  the  Navy  and  Army  of  the  United 
States  had  upheld  the  symbol  of  the  sovereignty  of  the  Great  Republic  of  North 
America,  that  the  lights  glowed  down  from  the  massive  rock  of  Corregidor,  that 
through  the  shadows  that  fell  on  these  darksome  waters  the  American  squadron  had 
entered  into  immortality  less  than  four  months  before,  and  that  with  the  morning 
light  we  should  look  upon  the  famous  scene  of  triumphant  Americanism.  We 
had  been  fifteen  days  out  of  the  world,  for  there  were  only  the  southern  constellations 
to  tell  us,  the  southern  cross  so  high  and  the  north  star  so  low,  and  the  dazzling 
scorpion  with  diamond  claws  touching  the  central  blue  dome,  to  say  how  far  down 
into  the  tropics  we  were,  while  the  clouds  of  flame  rested  on  the  serenities  of  the 
matchless  sea;  and  what  had  the  great  deep  in  its  mysterious  resplendence  been 
whispering  along  the  enchanting  shores  of  the  islands  of  Asia — the  true  Indies, 
Oriental  or  Occidental  as  might  be — what  had  the  wild  waves  that  beat  against 
the  volcanic  coasts  made  known  in  the  boats  wafted  by  the  welcoming  winds?  We 
knew  of  the  bloody  days  on  the  hills  of  Santiago,  and  the  fate  of  the  fleet  of  Admiral 
Cervera,  and  there  must  be  news  of  other  victories!  Our  ship  turned  away  from  the 
looming  rock  that  sent  forth  flashes  as  if  to  say  all  is  well,  in  the  universe  that  we  in 
our  vast  adventure  bad  almost  abandoned.  And  when  the  day  dawned  and  the 
green  hills  and  blue  mountains  and  the  silvery  waters  were  revealed  we  turned  to 
the  left,  where  Dewey  led  his  squadron  to  the  right,  and  there  was  the  bay 
hundred  and  twenty  knots  in  circumference.  Yonder  were  the  white  walls  of 

473 


474  OFFICIAL  TITLE  TO  OUR  NEW  POSSESSIONS  IN  THE  INDIES. 

Cavite,  and  further  along  domes  and  steeples,  masts  and  heavy  lines  of  buildings,  a 
wide  spread  city  crouching  on  a plain  rising  a few  feet  above  the  tides.  It  was 
Manila.  Presently  a boat  swept  near,  and  what  was  that,  a dozen  words  repeated 
here  and  there — Merritt  in  possession  of  the  city — of  course,  that  was  what  he  was 
there  for, — but  who  said  “there  was  a declaration  of  peace?’5  The  strange  statement 
was  made.  What — could  it  be  that  Spain  had  surrendered?  Surely  the  President 
would  not  stop  pushing  things  until  he  had  gathered  the  fruits  of  victory?  No,  there 
was  a protocol,  a*d  that  was  a treaty  in  fact!  France  had  been  the  medium  of 
negotiation.  Spain  had  sued  for  peace,  and  terms  were  granted.  Cuba  was  sur- 
rendered. Porto  Rico  was  ceded  to  us.  The  Spaniards  claimed  that  they  had  given 
up  Manila  after  peace  was  settled,  and  they  must  repossess  it.  But ‘Merritt  was  ashore 
was  he  not,  and  going  to  stay?  Dewey  had  not  given  up  anything,  had  he?  Surely 
not!  But  there  was  to  be  a conference,  a meeting  of  .joint  commissioners  held  at 
Paris  to  provide  a treaty,  that  was  to  say  the  details — all  the  important  points  were 
fixed  irrevocably  except  the  fate  of  the  Philippines!  At  this  point  the  news  of  the 
morning  gave  out,  all  except  the  particulars  of  the  seige,  the  high  claims  of  the 
Spaniards,  the  dissatisfaction  of  the  insurgents.  It  was  some  days  be|pre  tlj^e  realiza^ 
liolLof  the  situation  was  perfected.  The  full  terms  of  the  protocol  'were  nq^  made 
known  at  once.  Spain  gave  up  the  West  Indies  and  a Ladrone  island,  ^nd  the 
United  States  was  to  hold  the  city',  bay  and  harbor  of  Manila  pending  the  conclusion 
of  a treaty  of  peace  which  should  determine  the  control,  disposition  and  govern- 
ment of  the  Philippines.  Certainly  this  was  the  conclusive  surrender  of  Spain! 
General  Merritt  was  ordered  to  Paris,  and  there  represented  the  army  of  the  United 
States,  and  its  faith  and  honor  and  glory.  Our  Peace  Commissioners  were  Wm.  R. 
Day,  Cushman  K.  Davis,  William  P.  Frye,  George  Gray  and  Whitelaw  Reid,  who 
started  for  Paris  September  IS.  The  Spanish  Commissioners  made  a long  struggle, 
and  protracted  their  unhappy  task  for  more  than  two  months,  using  all  arts  of 
procrastination  and  persuasion,  claiming  that  the  United  States  should  pay  the 
Cuban  debt,  and  striving  for  allowances  of  indemnity,  yielding  at  last  to  the  in- 
evitable. The  text  of  the  treaty  is  in  seventeen  articles  as  follows: 

Article  I. — Spain  renounces  all  right  of  sovereignty  over  Cuba.  Whereas  said  isle 
when  evacuated  by  Spain  is  to  be  occupied  by  the  United  States,  the  United  States, 
while  the  occupation  continues,  shall  take  upon  themselves  and  fulfill  the  obligations 
which,  by  the  fact  of  occupation,  international  law  imposes  on  them  for  the  protec- 
tion of  life  and  property. 

Article  II. — Spain  cedes  to  the  United  States  the  Island  of  Porto  Rico  and  the 
other  islands  now  under  her  sovereignty  in  the  West  Indies  and  the  Isle  of  Guam  in 
the  archipelago  of  the  Marianas  or  Ladrones. 


MAJOR-GENERAL  THOMAS  M.  ANDERSON,  COMMANDER  OF  1ST  DIVISION  8TH  ARMY  CORPS  AT  MANILA. 


A SPANISH  DUDE— AN  OFFICER  AT  MANILA. 


OFFICIAL  TITLE  TO  OUR  NEW  POSSESSIONS  IN  THE  INDIES.  477 


Article  III. — Spain  cedes  to  the  United  States  the  archipelago  known  as  the 
Philippine  Islands,  which  comprise  the  islands  situated  between  the  following  lines: 
A line  which  runs  west  to  east  near  the  twentieth  parallel  of  north  latitude  across 
the  center  of  the  navigable  canal  of  Bachi,  from  the  118th  to  the  127th  degrees  of 
longitude  east  of  Greenwich,  from  here  to  the  width  of  the  127th  degree  of  longitude 
east  to  parallel  4 degrees  45  minutes  of  north  latitude.  From  here  following  the 
parallel  of  north  latitude  4 degrees  45  minutes  to  its  intersection  with  the  meridian 
of  longitude  119  degrees  35  minutes  east  from  Greenwich.  From  here  following  the 
meridian  of  119  degrees  35  minutes  east  to  the  parallel  of  latitude  7 degrees  40 
minutes  north.  From  here  following  the  parallel  of  7 degrees  40  minutes  north  to 
its  intersection  with  116  degrees  longitude  east.  From  here  along  a straight  line  to 
the  intersection  of  the  tenth  parallel  of  latitude  north  with  the  118th  meridian  east, 
and  from  here  following  the  118th  meridian  to  the  point  whence  began  this  de- 
marcation. The  United  States  shall  pay  to  Spain  the  sum  of  $20,000,000  within 
three  months  after  the  interchange  of  the  ratifications  of  the  present  treaty. 

Article  IV. — The  United  States  shall,  during  the  term  of  ten  years,  counting  from 
the  interchange  of  the  ratifications  of  the  treaty,  admit  to  the  ports  of  the  Philippine 
Islands  Spanish  ships  and  merchandise  under  the  same  conditions  as  the  ships  and 
merchSfidise  of  the  United  States. 

Article  V. — The  United  States,  on  the  signing  of  the  present  treaty,  shall  trans- 
port to  Spain  at  their  cost  the  Spanish  soldiers  whom  the  American  forces  made 
prisoners  of  war  when  Manila  was  captured.  The  arms  of  these  soldiers  shall  be  re- 
turned to  them.  Spain,  on  the  interchange  of  the  ratifications  of  the  present  treaty, 
shall  proceed  to  evacuate  the  Philippine  Islands,  as  also  Guam,  on  conditions  similar 
to  those  agreed  to  by  the  commissions  named  to  concert  the  evacuation  of  Porto 
Rico  and  the  other  islands  in  the  Western  Antilles  according  to  the  protocol  of  Aug. 
12,  1898,  which  shall  continue  in  force  until  its  terms  have  been  completely  complied 
with.  The  term  within  which  the  evacuation  of  the  Philippine  Islands  and  Guam 
shall  be  completed  shall  be  fixed  by  both  Governments.  Spain  shall  retain  the  flags 
and  stands  of  colors  of  the  warships  not  captured,  small  arms,  cannon  of  all  calibers, 
with  their  carriages  and  accessories,  powders,  munitions,  cattle,  material  and  effects 
of  all  kinds  belonging  to  the  armies  of  the  sea  and  land  of  Spain  in  the  Philippines 
and  Guam.  The  pieces  of  heavy  caliber  which  are  not  field  artillery  mounted  in 
fortifications  and  on  the  coasts  shall  remain  in  their  places  for  a period  of  six  months 
from  the  interchange  of  the  ratifications  of  the  present  treaty,  and  the  United  States 
may  during  that  period  buy  from  Spain  said  material  if  both  Governments  arrive  at  a 
satisfactory  agreement  thereon. 

Article  VI. — Spain,  on  signing  the  present  treaty,  shall  place  at  liberty  all 


478  OFFICIAL  TITLE  TO  OUR  NEW  POSSESSIONS  IN  TILE  INDIES. 


prisoners  of  war  and  all  those  detained  or  imprisoned  for  political  offences  in  conse- 
quence of  the  insurrections  in  Cuba  and  the  Philippines  and  of  the  war  with  the 
United  States.  Reciprocally  the  United  States  shall  place  at  liberty  all  prisoners 
of  war  made  by  the  American  forces,  and  shall  negotiate  for  the  liberty  of  all 
Spanish  prisoners  in  the  power  of  the  insurgents  in  Cuba  and  the  Philippines.  The 
Government  of  the  United  States  shall  transport,  at  their  cost,  to  Spain,  and  the 
Government  of  Spain  shall  transport,  at  its  cost,  to  the  United  States,  Cuba,  Porto 
Rico  and  the  Philippines,  conformably  to  the  situation  of  their  respective  dwellings, 
the  prisoners  placed  or  to  be  placed  at  liberty  in  virtue  of  this  article. 

Article  "VII. — Spain  and  the  United  States  mutually  renounce  by  the  present 
treaty  all  claim  to  national  or  private  indemnity,  of  whatever  kind,  of  one  Govern- 
ment against  the  other,  or  of  their  subjects  or  citizens  against  the  other  Government, 
which  may  have  arisen  from  the  beginning  of  the  last  insurrection  in  Cuba,  anterior 
to  the  interchange  of  the  ratifications  of  the  present  treaty,  as  also  to  all  indemnity  as 
regards  costs  occasioned  by  the  war.  The  United  States  shall  judge  and  settle  the 
tlaims  of  its  citizens  against  Spain  which  she  renounces  ill  this-  article. 

Article  VIII. — In  fulfilment  of  Articles  I.,  II.  and  III.  of  this  treaty  Spain 
renounces  in  Cuba  and  cedes  in  Porto  Rico  and  the  other  West  Indian  isles,  in 
Guam  and  the  Philippine  archipelago,  all  buildings,  moles,  barracks,  fortresses, 
establishments,  public  roads  and  other  real  property  which  by  custom  or  right  are 
of  the  public  domain,  and  as  such  belong  to  the  crown  of  Spain.  Nevertheless,  it 
is  declared  that  this  renouncement  or  cession,  as  the  case  may  be,  referred  to  in 
the  previous  paragraph,  in  no  way  lessens  the  property  or  rights  which  belong  by 
custom  or  law  to  the  peaceful  possessor  of  goods  of  all  kinds  in  the  provinces  and 
cities,  public  or  private  establishments,  civil  or  ecclesiastical  corporations  or  whatever 
bodies  have  judicial  personality  to  acquire  and  possess  goods  in  the  above-mentioned, 
renounced  or  ceded  territories,  and  those  of  private  individuals,  whatever  be  their 
nationality. 

The  said  renouncement  or  cession  includes  all  those  documents  which  exclusively 
refer  to  said  renounced  or  ceded  sovereignty  which  exist  in  the  archives  of  the 
peninsula.  When  these  documents  existing  in  said  archives  only  in  part  refer 
to  said  sovereignty,  copies  of  said  part  shall  be  supplied,  provided  they  be  requested. 
Similar  rules  are  to  be  reciprocally  observed  in  favor  of  Spain  with  respect  to  the 
documents  existing  in  the  archives  of  the  before-mentioned  islands.  In  the  above- 
mentioned  renunciation  or  cession  are  comprised  those  rights  of  the  crown  of  Spain 
and  of  its  authorities  over  the  archives  and  official  registers,  as  well  administrative 
as  judicial,  of  said  islands  which  refer  to  them  and  to  t*m  rights  and  properties  of 
their  inhabitants.  Said  archives  and  registers  must  be  refully  preserved,  and  all 


OFFICIAL  TITLE  TO  OUR  NEW  POSSESSIONS  IN  THE  INDIES.  WO 


individuals,  without  exception,  shall  have  the  right  to  obtain,  conformably  to  law, 
authorized  copies  of  contracts,  wills  and  other  documents  which  form  part  of 
notarial  protocols  or  which  are  kept  in  administrative  and  judicial  archives,  whether 
the  same  be  in  Spain  or  in  the  islands  above  mentioned. 

Article  IX. — Spanish  subjects,  natives  of  the  peninsula,  dwelling  in  the  territory 
whose  sovereignty  Spain  renounces  or  cedes  in  the  present  treaty,  may  remain  in 
said  territory  or  leave  it,  maintaining  in  one  or  the  other  case  all  their  rights  of 
property,  including  the  right  to  sell  and  dispose  of  said  property  or  its  produces;  and, 
moreover,  they  shall  retain  the  right  to  exercise  their  industry,  business  or  pro- 
fession, submitting  themselves  in  this  respect  to  the  laws  which  are  applicable  to 
other  foreigners.  In  case  they  remain  in  the  territory  they  may  preserve  their 
Spanish  nationality  by  making  in  a registry  office,  within  a year  after  the  interchange 
of  the  ratifications  of  this  treaty,  a declaration  of  their  intention  to  preserve  said 
nationality.  Failing  this  declaration  they  will  be  considered  as  having  renounced 
said  nationality  and  as  having  adopted  that  of  the  territory  in  which  they  may 
reside.  The  civil  rights  and  political  status  of  the  native  inhabitants  of  the  territories 
hereby  ceded  to  the  United  States  shall  be  determined  by  Congress. 

Article  X. — The  inhabitants  of  the  territories  whose  sovereignty  Spain  renounces 
or  cedes  shall  have  assured  to  them  the  free  exercise  of  their  religion. 

Article  XI. — Spaniards  residing  in  the  territories  whose  sovereignty  Spain  cedes 
or  renounces  shall  be  subject  in  civil  and  criminal  matters  to  the  tribunals  of  the 
country  in  which  they  reside,  conformably  with  the  common  laws  which  regulate 
their  competence,  being  enabled  to  appear  before  them  in  the  same  manner  and  to 
employ  the  same  proceedings  as  the  citizens  of  the  country  to  .which  the  tribunal 
belongs  must  observe. 

Article  XII. — Judicial  proceedings  pending  on  the  interchange  of  the  ratifica- 
tions of  this  treaty  in  the  territories  over  which  Spain  renounces  or  cedes  sovereignty 
shall  be  determined  conformably  with  the  following  rules:  First,  sentences  pro- 

nounced in  civil  cases  between  individuals  or  in  criminal  cases  before  the  above- 
mentioned  date,  and  against  which  there  is  no  appeal  or  annulment  conformably  with 
the  Spanish  law,  shall  be  considered  as  lasting,  and  shall  be  executed  in  due  form  by 
competent  authority  in  the  territory  within  which  said  sentences  should  be  carried 
out.  Second,  civil  actions  between  individuals  which  on  the  aforementioned  date 
have  not  been  decided  shall  continue  their  course  before  the  tribunal  in  which  the 
lawsuit  is  proceeding  or  before  that  which  shall  replace  it.  Third,  criminal  actions 
pending  on  the  aforementioned  date  before  the  supreme  tribunal  of  Spain  against 
citizens  of  territory  which,  according  to  this  treaty,  will  cease  to  he  Spanish,  shall  con- 
tinue under  its  jurisdiction  until  definite  sentence  is  pronounced,  but  once  sentence 


480  OFFICIAL  TITLE  TO  OUR  NEW  POSSESSIONS  IN  THE  INDIES. 


is  decreed  its  execution  shall  be  intrusted  to  competent  authority  of  the  place  where 
the  action  arose. 

Article  XIII. — Literary,  artistic  and  industrial  rights  of  property  acquired  by 
Spaniards  in  Cuba,  Porto  Rico,  the  Philippines  and  other  territories  ceded  on  the  in- 
terchange of  ratifications  of  this  treaty  shall  continue  to  be  respected.  Spanish 
scientific,  literary  and  artistic  works  which  shall  not  he  dangerous  to  public  order 
in  said  territories  shall  continue  entering  therein  with  freedom  from  all  customs 
duties  for  a period  of  ten  years  dating  from  the  interchange  of  the  ratifications  of 
this  treaty. 

Article  XIV. — Spain  may  establish  consular  agents  in  the  ports  and  places  of 
the  territories  whose  renunciation  or  cession  are  the  object  of  this  treaty. 

Article  XV. — The  Government  of  either  country  shall  concede  for  a term  of  ten 
years  to  the  merchant  ships  of  the  other  the  same  treatment  as  regards  all  port  dues, 
including  those  of  entry  and  departure,  lighthouse  and  tonnage  dues,  as  it  concedes 
to  its  own  merchant  ships  not  employed  in  the  coasting  trade.  This  article  may  be 
repudiated  at  any  time  by  either  Government  giving  previous  notice  thereof  six 
months  beforehand. 

Article  XVI. — Be  it  understood  that  whatever  obligation  is  accepted  under  this 
treaty  by  the  United  States  with  respect  to  Cuba  is  limited  to  the  period  their 
occupation  of  the  island  shall  continue,  hut  at  the  end  of  said  occupation  they  will 
advise  the  Government  that  may  he  established  in  the  island  that  it  should  accept 
the  same  obligations. 

Article  XVII. — The  present  treaty  shall  be  ratified  by  the  Queen  Regent  of 
Spain  and  the  President  of  the  United  States,  in  agreement  and  with  the  approval  of 
the  Senate,  and  ratifications  shall  he  exchanged  in  Washington  within  a period  of 
six  months  from  this  date  or  earlier  if  possible. 

The  treaty  of  peace  will  he  ratified  by  the  Senate.  It  appears  before  ratification, 
as  was  the  case  of  the  protocol,  through  the  favor  of  the  French  translations.  The 
treaty  fitly  crowns  the  triumphs  of  the  war.  The  payment  of  the  small  indemnity 
of  twenty  million  dollars  only  covers  at  a reasonable  estimate  the  public  property  of 
Spain,  in  territory  ceded  to  us,  that  was  beyond  the  lines  of  the  areas  that  formally 
submitted  to  our  arms. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 

The  Aguinaldo  War  Upon  the  Americans — The  Course  of  Events  in  the  Philippines 
Since  the  Fall  of  Manila — Origin  of  the  Filipino  War — Aguinaldo’s  Insolent 
and  Aggressive  Acts,  Including  Treachery — His  Agent’s  Vanity  and  Duplic- 
ity in  Washington — Insurgents  Under  Aguinaldo  Attack  American  Forces — - 
Battle  of  Manila,  February  4 and  5 — Heroism  of  American  Troops  in  Re- 
pelling the  Insurgents — Aguinaldo’s  Proclamations — Agoncillo’s  Flight  to 
Canada — The  Ratification  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  With  Spain  by  the  Am- 
erican Senate  Followed  the  Fighting — The  Gallantry  and  Efficiency  of  the 
American  Volunteers — Another  Glorious  Chapter  of  Our  War  History. 

When  Manila  fell,  August  13th,  the  insurgents  made  demonstrations  of  their 
purpose  to  insist  upon  the  occupation  of  the  city  as  part  of  their  business,  and  were 
so  excited  by  the  prohibition  of  the  indulgence  of  their  passion  for  looting  and 
revenge,  that  thA  fired  several  volleys  in  the  direction  of  the  Americans.  The  way 
they  were  prevented  from  executing  their  purposes  is  stated  in  the  10th  chapter  of 
this  volume, — “J^he  Official  History  of  the  Conquest  of  Manila.”  The  Filipino 
forces  were  excluded  from  the  city  unless  unarmed,  and  Aguinaldo  made  various 
claims  to  high  consideration,  asserting  that  the  Spaniards  could  have  escaped  from 
the  city  if  it  had  not  been  for  his  army.  He  was,  in  his  conversations  before  the 
destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleet,  and  while  he  was  on  his  way  to  Cavite,  a professed 
friend  of  the  annexation  of  the  Philippines  to  the  United  States,  and  constantly  a 
very  voluble  creature.  The  American  Consul  at  Manila,  writing  from  Manila  Bay, 
opposite  to  the  city,  May  12th,  1898,  said: 

“These  natives  are  eager  to  be  organized  and  led  by  United  States  officers,  and 
the  members  of  their  cabinet  visited  me  and  gave  assurance  that  all  would  swear 
allegiance  to  and  cheerfully  follow  our  flag.  They  are  brave,  submissive,  and 
cheaply  provided  for. 

“To  show  their  friendliness  for  me  as  our  nation’s  only  representative  in  this 
part  of  the  world,  I last  week  went  on  shore  at  Cavite  with  British  Consul,  in  his 
launch,  to  show  the  destruction  wrought  by  our  fleet.  As  soon  as  natives  found  me 
out,  they  crowded  around  me,  hats  off,  shouting  “Viva  los  Americanos,”  thronged 
about  me  by  hundreds  to  shake  either  hand,  even  several  at  a time,  men,  women,  and 
children  striving  to  get  even  a finger  to  shake.  So  I moved  half  a mile,  shaking  con- 
tinuously with  both  hands.  The  British  Consul,  a smiling  spectator,  said  he  never 

481 


482 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


before  saw  such  an  evidence  of  friendship.  Two  thousand  escorted  me  to  the  launch 
amid  hurrahs  of  good  feeling  for  our  nation,  hence  I must  conclude.” 

Nov.  3,  1897,  the  American  Consul  at  Hong  Kong  gave  this  account  of  Mr. 
Agoncillo,  who  is  an  interesting  person  because  of  his  celebrity  for  insistent  and 
vain  letters  written  at  Washington,  and  his  flight  to  Canada  when  the  Filipinos 
attacked  the  Americans  at  Manila: 

Mr.  Wildman  to  Mr.  Day. 

No.  19.]  Hongkong,  November  3,  1897. 

Sir:  Since  my  arrival  in  Hongkong  I have  been  called  upon  several  times  by 

Mr.  F.  Agoncillo,  foreign  agent  and  high  commissioner,  etc.,  of  the  new  republic  of 
the  Philippines. 

Mr.  Agoncillo  holds  a commission,  signed  by  the  president,  members  of  cabinet, 
and  general  in  chief  of  the  republic  of  Philippines,  empowering  him  absolutely  with 
power  to  conclude  treaties  with  foreign  governments. 

Mr.  Agoncillo  offers  on  behalf  of  his  government  alliance  offensive  and  de- 
fensive with  the  United  States  when  the  United  States  declares  war  on  Spain,  which, 
in  Mr.  Agoncillo’s  judgment,  will  be  very  soon.  In  the  meantime  he  wishes  the 
United  States  to  send  to  some  port  in  the  Philippines  20,000  stand  of  arms  and 
200,000  rounds  of  ammunition  for  the  use  of  his  government,  to  be  paid  for  on  the 
recognition  of  his  government  by  the  United  States.  He  pledges  as  security  two 
provinces  and  the  custom-house  at  Manila. 

He  is  not  particular  about  the  price — is  willing  the  United  States  should  make 
25  per  cent,  or  30  per  cent,  profit. 

He  is  a very  earnest  and  attentive’  diplomat  and  a great  admirer  of  the  United 
States. 

On  his  last  visit  he  surprised  me  with  the  information  that  he  had  written  his 
government  that  he  had  hopes  of  inducing  the  United  States  to  supply  the  much- 
needed  guns,  etc. 

In  case  Senor  Agoncillo’s  dispatch  should  fall  into  the  hands  of  an  unfriendly 
power  and  find  its  way  into  the  newspapers,  I have  thought  it  wise  to  apprise  the 
State  Department  of  the  nature  of  the  high  commissioner’s  proposals. 

Senor  Agoncillo  informs  me  by  late  mail  that  he  will  proceed  at  once  to  Wash- 
ington to  conclude  the  proposed  treaty,  if  I advise. 

I shall  not  advise  said  step  until  so  instructed  by  the  State  Department. 

I have  the  honor  to  be,  sir,  your  obedient  servant, 

ROUNSEVILLE  WILDMAN,  Consul. 


m 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


The  offensive  impertinence  of  Mr.  Agoncillo  is  quite  conspicuous  in  this  consular 
communication.  On  the  money  question  he  was  very  peculiar. 


Mr.  Wildman  was  instructed  by  Assistant  Secretary  Cridler  to  “briefly  advise  Mr. 
Agoncillo”  that  the  United  States  “does  not  negotiate  such  treaties,”  and  that  he 
“should  not  encourage  any  advances  on  the  part  of  Mr.  Agoncillo.”  Mr.  Wildman 
busied  himself  with  sending  tenders  of  allegiance  to  the  United  States  from  in- 
fluential families  of  Manila. 


Mr.  Williams  cabled  the  following: 


Manila,  September  5,  1898,  (Received  10.20  a.  m.) 

To-day  delegation  from  4,000  Viscayan  soldiers,  also  representing  southern  busi- 
ness interests,  came  to  me  pledging  loyalty  to  annexation.  Several  insurgent  leaders 
likewise.  Spain  can  not  control;  if  we  evacuate,  anarchy  rules.  WILLIAMS. 

Mr.  Wildman,  writing  from  Hongkong,  July  18th,  said: 

“I  believe  I know  the  sentiments  of  the  political  leaders  and  of  the  moneyed  men 
among  the  insurgents,  and,  in  spite  of  all  statements  to  the  contrary,  I know  that 
they  are  fighting  for  annexation  to  the  United  States  first,  and  for  independence 
secondly,  if  the  United  States  decides  to  decline  the  sovereignty  of  the  islands.  In 
fact  I have  had  the  most  prominent  leaders  call  on  me  and  say  they  would  not  raise 
one  finger  unless  I could  assure  them  that  the  United  States  intended  to  give  them 
United  States  citizenship  if  they  wished  it.” 

August  9th,  Mr.  Wildman  gave  the  following  character  sketch  of  Aguinaldo, 
writing  of  the  position  Consul  Williams,  of  Manila,  and  himself  took  toward  the 
insurgents,  says: 

“I  tried  to  briefly  outline  the  position  Consul  Williams  and  myself  have  taken 
toward  the  insurgents.  We  believed  that  they  were  a necessary  evil,  and  that  if 
Aguinaldo  was  placed  in  command,  and  was  acceptable  to  the  insurgents  as  their 
leader,  that  Admiral  Dewey  or  General  Merritt  would  have  some  one  whom  they 
could  hold  responsible  for  any  excesses-  The  other  alternative  was  to  allow 
the  entire  islands  to  be  overrun  by  small  bands  bent  only  on  revenge' and  looting. 
We  considered  that  Aguinaldo  had  more  qualifications  for  leadership  than  any  of 
his  rivals.  We  made  him  no  pledges  and  extracted  from  him  but  two,  viz.,  to  obey 
unquestioningly  the  commander  of  the  United  States  forces  in  the  Philippine 
Islands,  and  to  conduct  his  warfare  on  civilized  lines.  He  was  in  and  out  of  the 
consulate  for  nearly  a month,  and  I believe  I have  taken  his  measure  and  that  I ac- 
quired some  influence  with  him.  I have  striven  to  retain  his  influence  and  have 


434 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


used  it  in  conjunction  with  and  with  the  full  knowledge  of  both  Admiral  Dewey 
and  Consul  Williams. 

“Aguinaldo  has  written  me  by  every  opportunity,  and  I believe  that  he  has  been 
frank  with  me  regarding  both  his  actions  and  his  motives.  I do  not  doubt  but  that 
he  would  like  to  be  President  of  the  Philippine  Republic,  and  there  may  be  a 
small  coterie  of  his  native  advisers  who  entertain  a like  ambition,  but  I am  perfectly 
certain  that  the  great  majority  of  his  followers,  and  all  the  wealthy  educated  Filipinos 
have  but  the  one  desire — to  become  citizens  of  the  United  States  of  America.  As 
for  the  mass  of  uneducated  natives,  they  would  be  content  under  any  rule  save  that 
of  the  friars.  My  correspondence  with  Aguinaldo  has  been  strictly  of  a personal 
nature,  and  I have  missed  no  opportunity  to  remind  him  of  his  ante-bellum  prom- 
ises. His  letters  are  childish,  and  he  is  far  more  interested  in  the  kind  of  cane  he 
will  carry  or  the  breastplate  he  will  wear  than  in  the  figure  he  will  make  in  history. 
The  demands  that  he  and  his  junta  here  have  made  upon  my  time  is  excessive  and 
most  tiresome.  He  is  a man  of  petty  moods,  and  I have  repeatedly  had  letters  from 
Consul  Williams  requesting  me  to  write  to  Aguiaaldo  a friendly  letter  congratulating 
him  on  his  success,  and  reminding  him  of  his  obligations.  I do  not  care  to  quote 
Admiral  Dewey,  as  his  letters  are  all  of  a strictly  personal  nature,  but  I feel  perfectly 
free  to  refer  you  to  him  as  to  my  attitude  and  actions.” 

Mr.  Pratt,  the  United  States  Consul  General  at  Singapore,  took  in  hand  Aguin- 
a.ldo — this  was  April  28 — and  got  him  off  to  Hong  Kong,  having  had  this  corre- 
spondence by  cable  with  Admiral  Dewey: 

Aguinaldo,  insurgent  leader,  here.  Will  come  Hongkong  arrange  with  Conn 
modore  for  general  co-operation  insurgents  Manila  if  desired.  Telegraph. 

PRATT. 

The  Commodore’s  reply  reading  thus: 

Tell  Aguinaldo  come  soon  as  possible.  DEWEY. 

Mr.  Pratt  says  of  this: 

I received  it  late  that  night,  and  at  once  communicated  to  General  Aguinaldo, 
who,  with  his  aid-de-camp  and  private  secretary,  all  under  assumed  names,  I suc- 
< ceded  in  getting  off  by  the  British  steamer  Malacca,  which  left  here  on  Tuesday, 

the  2Gth. 

And  Mr.  Pratt  made  the  following  report  to  the  Secretary  of  State  of  the  Lnited 

States: 

Consulate-General  of  the  United  States, 

Singapore,  April  30,  1898. 

Sir:  Referring  to  my  dispatch  No.  212,  of  the  28th  instant,  I have  the  honor 


485 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


to  report  that  in  the  second  and  last  interview  I had  with  Gen.  Emilio  Aguinaldo 
on  the  eve  of  his  departure  for  Hongkong,  I enjoined  upon  him  the  necessity,  under 
Commodore  Dewey’s  direction,  of  exerting  absolute  control  over  his  forces  in  the 
Philippines,  as  no  excesses  -on  their  part  would  be  tolerated  by  the  American  Govern- 
ment, the  President  having  declared  that  the  present  hostilities  with  Spain  were 
to  be  carried  on  in  strict  accord  with  modern  principles  of  civilized  warfare. 

To  this  General  Aguinaldo  fully  assented,  assuring  me  that  he  intended  and  was 
perfectly  able,  once  on  the  field,  to  hold  his  followers,  the  insurgents,  in  check  and 
lead  them  as  our  commander  should  direct. 

The  general  further  stated  that  he  hoped  the  United  States  would  assume  pro- 
tection of  the  Philippines  for  at  least  long  enough  to  allow  the  inhabitants  to  estab- 
lish a government  of  their  own,  in  the  organization  of  which  he  would  desire  Am- 
erican advice  and  assistance. 

These  questions  I told  him  I had  no  authority  to  discuss. 

I have,  etc., 


E.  SPENCER  PRATT, 


United  States  Consul-General. 

June  16th  Secretary  Day  cabled  Consul  Pratt:  “Avoid  unauthorized  negotia- 

tions with  the  Philippine  insurgents,”  and  the  Secretary  wrote  the  consul  on  the 
same  day: 

“The  Department  observes  that  you  informed  General  Aguinaldo  that  you  had 
no  authority  to  speak  for  the  United  States;  and,  in  the  absence  of  the  fuller  report 
which  you  promise,  it  is  assumed  that  you  did  not  attempt  to  commit  this  Government 
to  any  alliance  wdth  the  Philippine  insurgents.  To  obtain  the  unconditional  personal 
assistance  of  General  Aguinaldo  in  the  expedition  to  Manila  was  proper,  if  in  so  doing 
he  was  not  induced  to  form  hopes  which  it  might  not  be  practicable  to  gratify.  This 
Government  has  known  the  Philippine  insurgents  only  as  discontented  and  rebellious 
subjects  of  Spain,  and  is  not  acquainted  with  their  purposes.  While  their  contest 
with  that  power  has  been  a matter  of  public  notoriety,  they  have  neither  asked  nor 
received  from  this  Government  any  recognition.  The  United  States,  in  entering  upon 
the  occupation  of  the  islands,  as  the  result  of  its  military  operations  in  that  quarter, 
will  do  so  in  the  exercise  of  the  rights  which  the  state  of  war  confers,  and  will  expect 
from  the  inhabitants,  without  regard  to  their  former  attitude  toward  the  Spanish 
Government,  that  obedience  which  will  be  lawfully  due  from  them. 

“If,  in  the  course  of  your  conferences  with  General  Aguinaldo,  you  acted  upon 
the  assumption  that  this  Government  would  co-operate  with  him  for  the  furtherance 
of  any  plan  of  his  own,  or  that,  in  accepting  his  co-operation,  it  would  consider  itself 


480 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


pledged  lo  recognize  any  political  claims  which  he  may  put  forward,  your  action  was 
unauthorized  and  can  not  be  approved.  Respectfully  yours, 

WILLIAM  R.  DAY. 

The  following  letter  is  a valuable  link  in  the  chain  of  the  story  of  the  Philippines: 

Hongkong,  August  4,  1S98. 

Sir:  By  request  I have  the  honor  to  confirm  the  following  telegram  sent  you  on 

the  2d  instant: 

Cortes  family,  representing  wealthy  educated  families  Manila,  implore  you 
through  Consul-General  Wildman,  in  name  humanity  and  Christianity,  not  to  desert 
them,  and  aid  to  obtain  annexation  Philippines  to  America.  Please  see  the  President. 

I may  add  in  explanation  of  this  telegram  that  there  is  a large  colony  of  wealthy 
Filipinos  who  have  been  driven  out  of  Manila,  and  the  bulk  of  whose  fortunes  have 
been  confiscated,  resident  here.  They  are  people  of  education  as  well  as  wealth,  and 
they  are  intensely  loyal  to  the  United  States.  The  Cortes  family  are  particularly  so, 
and  they  have  contributed  money  liberally  to  aid  Aguinaldo  on  the  understanding 
that  he  was  fighting  for  annexation  of  the  Philippines  to  the  United  States. 
Naturally  I sympathize  with  them  in  their  desire  to  become  a part  of  the  United 
States,  and  have  advised  them  that  you  would  give  their  cablegram  your  kindly 
consideration. 

I have  the  honor  to  be,  sir,  your  obedient,  servant, 

ROUNSEYELLE  WILDMAN, 

• Consul-General. 

Hon.  Marcus  Hanna, 

United  States  Senate,  Washington. 

Mr.  Andre,  the  Belgian  Consul  at  Manila,  an  important  man,  wrote  the  American 
Commission  in  Paris,  that  “everybody  in  the  Philippines,  even  Spanish  merchants,” 
begged  the  Americans  for  protection,  and  added: 

“The  Indians  do  not  desire  independence.  They  know  that  they  are  not  strong 
enough.  They  trust  the  United  States,  and  they  know  that  they  will  be  treated 
rightly.  The  present  rebellion  only  represents  a half  per  cent,  of  the  inhabitants, 
and  it  would  not  be  right  to  oblige  6,000,000  inhabitants  to  submit  to  30,000  rebels. 
Luzon  is  only  partly  held  by  them,  and  it  is  not  to  be  expected  that  a civilized  nation 
will  make  them  present  with  the  rest  of  the  island,  which  is  hostile  to  the  Tagals  of 
Luzon.  The  Spanish  officers  refuse  to  fight  for  the  sake  of  the  priests,  and  if  the 
Spanish  Government  should  retain  the  Philippines  their  soldiers  will  all  fall  prisoners 
in  the  hands  of  the  Indians  in  the  same  way  as  they  did  already,  and  this  is  because 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


487 


the  army  is  sick  of  war  without  result,  and  only  to  put  the  country  at  the  mercy  of 
the  rapacious  empleados  and  luxurious  monks. 

“The  monks  know  that  they  are  no  more  wanted  in  the  Philippines,  and  they 
asked  me  to  help  them  go  away  as  soon  as  possible,  and  it  is  principally  for  them 
that  I asked  for  the  transports  to  the  United  States  Government,  and  to  send  them 
to  Hongkong.  The  Indians  will  be  delighted  to  see  them  go,  and  will  be  grateful 
to  the  United  States. 

“If  some  chiefs  of  the  rebellion  will  be  a little  disappointed  in  their  personal 
pride,  they  will  be  convinced  that  it  is  better  for  them  to  submit  in  any  case,  for 
most  of  these  chiefs  prefer  American  authority.” 

Aguinaldo  became  swollen  -with  the  conceit  of  greatness,  and  flattered  to 
believe  he  had  a commanding  destiny,  he  took  on  airs  of  extravagant  consequence  in 
his  correspondence  with  General  Anderson,  who  commanded  the  first  expedition  of 
the  United  States  troops  to  the  Philippines,  and  dared  to  assume  to  have  authority 
as  to  the  disembarkation  of  the  soldiers  of  the  United  States.  July  24th  Aguinaldo 
wrote  to  Anderson: 

“I  came  from  Hongkong  to  prevent  my  countrymen  from  making  common 
cause  with  the  Spanish  against  the  North  Americans,  pledging  before  my  word  to 
Admiral  Dewey  to  not  give  place  [to  allow]  to  any  internal  discord,  because,  [being] 
a judge  of  their  desires,  I had  the  strong  conviction  I could  succeed  in  both  objects.” 
After  this  false  and  foolish  presumption,  he  proceeded  in  a pompous  way  to 
observe  that  “without  the  destruction  of  the  Spanish  squadron  the  Philippine  revo- 
lution would  not  have  advanced  so  rapidly.”  He  claimed,  in  a letter  dated  August 
1st  to  Consul  Williams,  that  if  he  did  not  assert  himself  as  he  was  doing  he  would  be 
held  by  his  people  to  be  a traitor.  His  point  at  Singapore  was  that  he  could 
wield  his  people  at  his  pleasure.  His  observation  was : 

‘T  have  done  what  they  desire,  establishing  a government  in  order  that  nothing- 
important  may  be  done  without  consulting  fully  their  sovereign  will,  not  only  be- 
cause it  was  my  duty,  but  also  because  acting  in  any  other  manner  they  would  fail 
to  recognize  me  as  the  interpreter  of  their  aspirations  and  would  punish  me  as  a 
traitor,  replacing  me  by  another  more  careful  of  his  own  honor  and  dignity.” 

On  the  day  after  the  storming  of  Manila,  Aguinaldo  wrote  to  Anderson: 

“My  troops,  who  have  been  for  so  long  besieging  Manila,  have  always  been  prom- 
ised that  they  could  appear  in  it,  as  you  know  and  can  not  deny,  and  for  this  reason 
and  on  account  of  the  many  sacrifices  made  of  money  and  lives,  I do  not  consider  it 
prudent  to  issue  orders  to  the  contrary,  as  they  might  be  disobeyed  against  my  au- 


488 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


thority.  Besides,  I hope  that  you  will  allow  the  troops  to  enter,  because  we  have 
given  proofs  many  times  of  our  friendship.” 

On  the  day  of  occupancy  of  Manila  Aguinaldo  wrote  Anderson : 

“I  received  a telegram.  My  interpreter  is  in  Cavite;  in  consequence  of  this  1 
have  not  answered  till  now!  My  troops  are  forced  by  yours,  by  means  of  threats  of 
violence,  to  retire  from  positions  taken.  It  is  necessary,  to  avoid  conflicts,  which  I 
should  lament,  that  you  order  your  troops  that  they  avoid  difficulty  with  mine,  as 
until  now  they  have  conducted  themselves  as  brothers  to  take  Manila.” 

General  Merritt  did  not  tolerate  any  folly  about  “joint  occupation,”  and  sharply/ 
demanded  the  insurgents  should  restore  the  city  the  water  supply  from  the  mountain' 
stream  that  is  diverted  from  the  Pasig  to  the  city,  and  Aguinaldo  claimed  credit  on 
the  water  question  in  these  terms'  of  prevarication  and  presumption. 

“Since  I have  permitted  the  use  of  water  before  the  formal  declaration  of  the 
treaty,  you  can  easily  see  that  I am  disposed  to  sacrifice  to  friendship  everything 
not  greatly  prejudicial  to  the  rights  of  the  Philippine  city. 

“I  comprehend,  like  yourself,  the  inconvenience  of  a double  occupation  of  the  city 
of  Manila  and  its  environs,  considering  the  conditions  of  the  capitulation  with  the 
Spaniards,  hut  you  must  also  understand  that  without  the  wide  blockade  maintained 
by  my  forces  you  would  have  obtained  possession  of  the  ruins  of  the  city,  but  never 
the  surrender  of  the  Spanish  forces,  who  would  have  been  able  to  retire  to  the  interior 
towns. 

“Now,  do  not  make  light  of  the  aid  formerly  given  by  us  to  secure  the  capitula- 
tion mentioned.  Greatly  though  justice  may  suffer,  and  risking  well-founded  fears 
in  regard  to  my  city,  I do  not  insist  upon  the  retention  of  all  the  positions  conquered 
by  my  forces  within  the  environs  at  the  cost  of  much  bloodshed,  unspeakable  fatigue, 
and  much  money.” 

At  the  same  time  this  Dictator  was  strutting  with,  the  powerful  persuasion  that 
the  United  States  must  be  subordinate  to  his  will,  he  was  ambitious  to  live  in  the 
palace  of  the  Governor  General,  putting  an  impertinance  to  that  effect  in  his  corre- 
spondence, but  General  Merritt  told  him  he  wanted  it  for  himself  and  had  already 
occupied  and  taken  it  into  possession.  It  has  been  made  clear  that  Aguinaldo  was 
from  the  first  appearance  of  Americans  writhing  with  the  pangs  of  wounded  vanity^ 
jonspiring  to  initiate  the  ignorant  and  inflate  the  insignificant,  exciting  a consider- 
able force  tosharehis  sentiments.  Unquestionably  the  news  communicated  by  Agoncillo 
)o  Aguinaldo  of  the  sailing  of  the  regular  troops  to  reinforce  the  army  in  Manila 
caused  the  desperate  assault  upon  our  lines,  and  it  may  be  accepted  as  the  measure- 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


189 


ment  of  the  Filipino  ignorance  of  American  character,  that  the  insurgent  calculation 
was  that  the  combat  designed  and  its  influence  estimated,  was  expected  to  cause  the 
defeat  of  the  ratification  of  the  treaty  in  the  Senate. 

General  Merritt  assumed  the  Governor’s  duties  on  August  23,  at  Matacanan  pal- 
ace. Insurgents  seemed  more  pacific,  and  business  was  resumed.  On  August  25, 
Aguinaldo  sent  the  following  cablegram  to  the  American  press: 

Manila,  August  24. — I am  satisfied  with  America’s  occupation.  The  Filipinos 
are  disbanding.  AGUINALDO. 

Head  of  the  Philippine  Insurgent  Army. 

The  same  day  Aguinaldo  issued  orders  for  his  soldiers  to  return  to  their  homes. 
The  order  was  obeyed,  and  the  insurgents  expressed  willingness  to  surrender  if 
assured  that  the  islands  would  remain  under  American  or  British  control. 

In  a clash  at  Cavite  between  United  States  soldiers  and  insurgents  on  August  25, 
George  Hudson,  a member  of  the  Utah  regiment,  was  killed,  and  Corporal  William 
Anderson,  of  the  same  battery,  was  mortally  wounded.  Four  troopers  of  the  Fourth 
Cavalry  were  slightly  wounded.  Aguinaldo  expressed  his  regret  and  promised  to 
punish  the  offenders. 

Complaint  of  the  conduct  of  Aguinaldo  was  reported  by  insurgents  a few  days 
later,  and  he  said  many  of  his  compatriots  accused  him  of  endeavoring  to  sell  out 
their  cause.  This  story  was  his  standing  excuse  for  insolence  to  Americans,  and 
the  commission  of  savage  injustice.  Fie  announced  his  intention  to  send  peace  com- 
missioners to  Paris. 

On  September  5,  Aguinaldo  effected  an  important  alliance  with  the  Santiaglesia 
party  in  the  northern  Provinces  of  Pangasinan  Zamballes.  This  party  commanded 
5,000  troops  which  hitherto  had  resisted  Aguinaldo’s  claims  to  dictatorship. 

At  a meeting  of  twenty  leaders  of  the  Filipinos  on  September  5,  eighteen  of  them 
declared  in  favor  of  annexation  to  the  United  States. 

Aguinaldo,  on  September  10,  demanded  the  right  to  occupy  part  of  Manila.  His 
demand  was  refused  by  General  Otis,  who  ordered  him  to  remove  his  forces  by  a 
given  day  to  avoid  trouble.  Aguinaldo  removed  his  headquarters  to  Malolos  on  the 
railroad  forty  miles  north  of  Manila. 

It  was  on  October  10  that  the  open  arrogance  of  Aguinaldo  asserted  itself.  He 
refused  to  permit  a burial  party  from  the  British  ship  Powerful  to  pass  into  the 
city  carrying  arms.  For  this  he  was  reproved  by  the  American  commanders,  and  he 
apologized. 

October  16  Aguinaldo  again  took  the  offensive,  refusing  to  permit  the  American 


490 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


schooner  Merinanos  to  load.  Following  that  report  came  the  report  of  a battle  be- 
tween Americans  and  insurgents,  which  was  exaggerated,  but  showed  the  seriousness 
of  the  situation.  The  same  day  the  Czar  of  Russia  suggested  a joint  note  from 
the  powers  to  the  United  States  on  the  Philippine  question. 

Later  Aguinaldo  refused  the  request  of  General  Otis  for  the  release  of  Spanish 
priests  held  as  captives  by  the  Filipinos,  and  General  Otis  reported  the  entire  island 
of  Panay,  with  the  exception  of  the  City  of  Iloilo,  in  the  hands  of  insurgents. 

On  November  14,  the  Filipino  Junta  at  Hongkong  issued  a long  statement  and 
petition  directeed  to  President  McKinley,  demanding  recognition  of  the  insurgents. 

On  November  18,  President  McKinley  issued  orders  to  General  Otis  to  occupy  the 
Islands  of  Panay  and  Negros,  and  for  this  purpose  troops  were  later  sent  from 
Manila  on  an  unsuccessful  mission.  January  1 came  the  serious  news  from  Manila 
that  the  American  forces  before  Iloilo,  under  the  command  of  General  Miller,  were 
confronted  by  6,000  armed  Filipinos,  who  refused  them  permission  to  land. 

The  Spanish  had  yielded  Iloilo  to  the  insurgents  for  the  purpose  of  troubling  the 
Americans. 

Agoncillo,  on  January  6,  filed  a request  with  the  authorities  at  Washington  for 
an  interview  with  the  President  to  discuss  affairs  in  the  Philippines.  The  next 
day  the  government  officials  were  surprised  to  learn  that  messages  to  General  Otis 
to  deal  mildly  with  the  rebels  and  not  to  force  a conflict  had  become  known  to  Agon- 
cillo, and  cabled  by  him  to  Aguinaldo.  At  the  same  time  came  Aguinaldo’s  protest 
against  General  Otis  signing  himself  “Military  Governor  of  the  Philippines.” 

Agoncillo  expressed  still  more  violent  sentiments  during  the  second  week  in 
January.  On  the  8th  of  the  month  he  gave  out  this  statement: 

“In  my  opinion  the  Filipino  people,  whom  I’ represent,  will  never  consent  to 
Become  a colony  dependency  of  the  United  States.  The  soldiers  of  the  Filipino  army 
have  pledged  their  lives  that  they  will  not  lay  down  their  arms  until  General  Agui- 
naldo  tells  them  to  do  so,  and  they  will  keep  that  pledge,  I feel  confident.” 

On  the  day  after  Aguinaldo  issued  his  second  proclamation  in  Manila,  in  wljich 
he  threatened  to  drive  the  Americans  from  the  islands,  called  the  Deity  to  witness 
that  their  blood  would  be  on  their  own  heads  if  it  was  shed,  and  detailed  at  greater 
length  the  promises  he  claimed  were  made  by  the  Americans  as  to  the  part  of  the 
insurgents  in  the  campaign. 

The  Filipino  committees  in  London,  Paris  and  Madrid  about  this  time  tele- 
graphed to  President  McKinley  as  follows: 

“We  protest  against  the  disembarkation  of  American  troops  at  Tlodo.  The  treaty 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEE  OLE  MANILA. 


41)1 


of  peace  still  unratified,  tlie  American  claim  to  sovereignty  is  premature.  Pray 
reconsider  the  resolution  regarding  Iloilo.  Filipinos  wish  for  the  friendship  of 
America  and  abhor  militarism  and  deceit.” 

The  threats  that  Manila  must  be  taken  never  ceased  in  the  rebel  camp,  and  they 
hung  around  with  sweltering  venom,  cultivating  grievances,  like  a horde  of 
wolves  and  panthers,  hungry  and  rabid. 

At  the  beginning  of  February  the  situation  at  Manila  was  regarded  as  serious,  but 
the  officials  saw  no  reason  why  they  could  not  command  it  for  a time  at  least. 
General  Otis  reported,  in  connection  with  some  matters  pertaining  to  the  shipment 
home  of  sick  Spanish  soldiers,  that  he  could  hold  out  beyond  a doubt  until  his  re- 
inforcements arrived,  and  added  that  as  the  news  had  reached  Manila  that  there 
was  every  prospect  that  the  peace  treaty  would  soon  he  ratified,  the  effect  on  the 
natives  had  been  satisfactory.  Sunday  morning,  February  5,  reports  were  received  by 
the  American  press  that  the  Filipino  insurgents  under  Aguinaldo  had  attacked  the 
American  lines  before  Manila,  and  that  a battle  had  been  fought,  in  which  many  on 
both  sides  had  been  killed  or  wounded. 

When  news  of  the  attack  of  the  Filipinos  was  received  at  Washington,  Agoncillo, 
the  special  representative  of  Aguinaldo,  immediately  left  the  capital,  taking  the 
first  train  for  Canada.  He  reached  Montreal  February  6.  In  an  interview  at  the 
latter  place  he  professed  not  to  know  that  an  attach  on  the  American  forces  at  Manila 
had  been  planned  by  his  people.  Furthermore,  he  stated  it  as  his  belief  that  no 
attack  had  been  made  as  described  in  the  reports.  His  manner  and  somewhat  evasive 
statements  indicated  that  he  knew  more  than  he  cared  to  tell.  His  action  in  fleeing 
from  Washington  indicated  complicity. 

One  of  the  immediate  results  of  the  Filipinos’  attack  on  Manila  was  the  hastening 
of  the  ratification  by  the  Senate  of  the  peace  treaty.  At  2:45  o’clock,  Monday  after- 
noon, February  6,  the  Senate  met  in  executive  session,  and  three-fourths  of  an  hour 
later  the  vote  on  the  ratification  of  the  treaty  was  announced.  It  stood  57  for,  and 
27  against,  the  absent  and  paired  being  six.  The  treaty  was  ratified  by  a major- 
ity of  1. 

The  Senators  who  voted  for  the  treaty  were:  Aldrich,  Allen,  Allison,  Baker, 
Burrows,  Butler,  Carter,  Chandler,  Clark,  Clay,  Cullom,  Davis,  Deboe,  Elkins, 
Fairbanks,  Faulkner,  Foraker,  Frye,  Gallinger,  Gear,  Gray,  Hanna,  Hansbrough, 
Harris,  Hawley,  Jones  (Nev.),  Kenney,  Kyle,  Lindsay,  Lodge,  McBride,  McEnery, 
McLaurin,  McMillan,  Mantle,  Mason,  Morgan,  Nelson,  Penrose,  Perkins,  Pettus, 
Platt  (Conn.),  Platt  (N.  Y.),  Pritchard,  Qua}r,  Boss,  Sewell,  Shoup,  Simon,  Spooner, 
Stewart,  Sullivan,  Teller,  Thurston,  Warren,  Wellington,  Wolcott. 


4(J2 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


The  Senators  who  voted  against  the  treaty  were:  Bacon,  Bate,  Berry,  Caffery, 

Chilton,  Cockrell,  Daniel,  Gorman,  Hale,  Heitfeld,  Hoar,  Jones  (Ark.),  Mallory, 
Martin,  Mills,  Mitchell,  Money,  Murphy,  Pasco,  Pettigrew,  Rawlins,  Roach,  Smith, 
Tillman,  Turley,  Turner,  Vest. 

Those  who  were  absent  and  paired  were:  Cannon  and  Wilson  for,  with  White 

against;  Proctor  and  Wetmore  for,  with  Turpie  against. 

The  ratification  of  the  treaty  was  not  a party  question.  Thirty-nine  Republicans, 
ten  Democrats,  and  eight  Silver  men  voted  for  the  treaty,  and  two  Republicans, 
twenty-two  Democrats  and  three  Silver  men  voted  against  it. 

On  February  4,  Aguinaldo  issued  the  following  proclamation: 

“I  order  and  command: 

“1.  That  peace  and  friendly  relations  with  the  Americans  be  broken  and  that 
the  latter  be  treated  as  enemies,  within  the  limits  prescribed  by  the  laws  of  war. 

“2.  That  the  Americans  captured  be  held  as  prisoners  of  war. 

“3.  That  this  proclamation  be  communicated  to  the  consuls  and  that  congress 
order  and  accord  a suspension  of  the  constitutional  guarantee,  resulting  from  the 
declaration  of  war.” 

February  5th,  Aguinaldo  issued  a second  proclamation  in  which  he  said  that  the 
outbreak  of  hostilities  was  “unjustly  and  unexpectedly  provoked  by  the  Americans.” 
He  also  spoke  of  “the  constant  outrages  and  taunts  which  have  been  causing  misery 
to  the  Manilans,”  and  referred  to  the  “useless  conferences”  and  contempt  shown  for 
the  Filipino  government  as  proving  a “premeditated  transgression  of  justice  and 
liberty.”  He  called  on  his  people  to  “sacrifice  all  upon  the  altar  of  honor  and 
national  integrity,”  and  insisted  that  he  tried  to  avoid  as  far  as  possible  an  armed 
conflict.  He  claimed  that  all  his  efforts  “were  useless  before  the  unmeasured  pride 
of  the  Americans,”  whom  he  charged  as  having  treated  him  as  a rebel  “because  I 
defended  the  interests  of  my  country  and  would  not  become  the  instrument  of  their 
dastardly  intentions.”  He  concluded  by  saying: 

“Be  not  discouraged.  Our  independence  was  watered  freely  by  the  blood  of 
martyrs,  and  more  will  be  shed  in  the  future  to  strengthen  it.  Remember  that 
efforts  are  not  to  be  wasted  that  ends  may  be  gained.  It  is  indispensable  to  adjust 
our  actions  to  the  rules  of  law  and  right  and  to  learn  to  triumph  over  our  enemies. 
We  have  fought  our  ancient  oppressors  without  arms,  and  we  now  trust  to  God  to 
defend  us  against  the  foreign  foe.” 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  L ELOPE  MANILA. 


493 


THE  OFFICIAL  BATTLE  BULLETINS. 

The  messages  following  were  received  in  the  order  given. 

“Manila,  February  5. — Adjutant-General,  Washington:  Have  established  our 

permanent  lines  well  out  and  have  driven  off  the  insurgents.  The  troops  have 
conducted  themselves  with  great  heroism.  The  country  about  Manila  is  peaceful, 
and  the  city  is  perfectly  quiet.  List  of  casualties  to-morrow.  OTIS.” 

‘Manila,  February  5. — To  the  Adjutant-General:  Insurgents  in  large  force 

opened  attack  on  our  outer  lines  at  8:45  p.  m.  last  evening;  renewed  attack  several 
times  during  night;  at  4 o’clock  this  morning  entire  line  engaged;  all  attacks  re- 
pulsed; at  daybreak  advanced  against  insurgents,  and  have  driven  them  beyond  the 
lines  they  formerly  occupied,  capturing  several  villages  and  their  defense  works;  in- 
surgent loss  in  dead  and  wounded  large;  our  own  casualties  thus  far  estimated  at  175, 
few  fatal.  Troops  enthusiastic  and  acting  fearlessly.  Navy  did  splendid  execution 
on  flanks  of  enemy;  city  held  in  check,  and  absolute  quiet  prevails;  insurgents  have 
secured  a good  many  Mauser  rifles,  a few  field  pieces  and  quick-firing  guns,  with 
ammunition,  during  last  month.  OTIS.” 

“Manila,  February  5. — To  Adjutant-General:  Situation  most  satisfactory.  No 

apprehension  need  be  felt.  Perfect  quiet  prevails  in  city  and  vicinity.  List  of  casual- 
ties being  prepared,  and  will  be  forwarded  as  soon  as  possible.  Troops  in  excellent 
health  and  spirits.  OTIS.” 

“Manila,  February  7. — Adjutant-General,  Washington:  The  insurgent  army 

concentrated  around  Manila  from  Luzon  provinces,  numbered  over  20,000,  possess- 
ing several  quick-firing  and  Krupp  field  guns.  Good  portion  of  enemy  armed  with 
Mausers,  latest  pattern.  Two  Krupp  and  great  many  rifles  captured.  Insurgents 
fired  great  quantity  of  ammunition.  Quite  a number  of  Spanish  soldiers  in  insur- 
gent service  who  served  artillery. 

Insurgents  constructed  strong  intrenchments  near  our  lines,  mostly  in  bamboo 
thickets.  These  our  men  charged,  killing  or  capturing  many  of  the  enemy.  Our 
casualties  probably  aggregate  250.  Full  reports  to-day.  Casualties  of  insurgents 
very  heavy.  Have  buried  some  500  of  their  dead  and  hold  500  prisoners.  Their  loss, 
'killed,  wounded,  and  prisoners,  probably  4,000. 

“Took  waterworks  pumping  station  yesterday,  six  miles  out.  Considerable  skir- 
mish with  enemy,  which  made  no  stand.  Pumps  damaged;  will  be  working  in  a 
week.  Have  number  of  condensers  set  up  in  city,  which  furnish  good  water.  Troops 
in  excellent  spirits.  Quiet  prevails.  OTIS.” 


494 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


“Manila,  February  3. — Adjutant-General,  Washington:  Situation  rapidly  im- 

proving. Reconnaissance  yesterday  to  south  several  miles  ; to  east  to  Laguna  Bay; 
to  northeast  eight  miles,  driving  straggling  insurgent  troops  in  various  directions, 
encountering  no  decided  opposition. 

“Army  disintegrated,  and  natives  returning  to  village,  displaying  white  flag. 

“Near  Caloocan,  six  miles  north,  enemy  made  stand  behind  entrenchments. 
Charged  by  Kansas  troops,  led  by  Colonel  Funston;  close  encounter,  resulting  in 
rout  of  enemy,  with  very  heavy  loss. 

“Loss  to  Kansas  troops,  Lieutenant  Alford  killed,  six  men  wounded. 

“Night  of  4th,  Aguinaldo  issued  flying  proclamation,  charging  Americans  with 
initiative,  and  declared  war. 

“His  influence  throughout  this  section  destroyed.  Now  applies  for  cessation  of 
hostilities  and  conference.  Have  declined  to  answer. 

“Insurgents’  expectation  of  rising  in  city  on  night  of  4th  unrealized.  Provost 
Marshal-General,  with  admirable  disposition  of  troops,  defeated  every  attempt. 

“City  quiet.  Business  resumed.  Natives  respectful  and  cheerful. 

“The  fighting  qualities  of  American  troops  a revelation  to  all  inhabitants. 
Signed,  OTIS.'’ 

Secretary  Alger  sent  the  following  cablegram  to  General  Otis,  at  Manila: 

“Accept  my  best  congratulations  upon  your  magnificent  victory  of  Sunday,  all  the 
more  creditable  because  you  were  not  the  aggressor. ' 

“Manila,  February  10. — Adjutant-General:  Insurgents  collected  considerable 

force  between  Manila  and  Caloocan,  where  Aguinaldo  is  reported  to  be,  and  threat- 
ened attack  and  uprising  in  city. 

“This  afternoon  swung  left  of  McArthur  division,  which  is  north  of  Pasig  River, 
into  Caloocan,  driving  enemy  easy. 

“Our  left  now  at  Caloocan.  Our  loss  slight;  that  of  insurgents  considerable. 
Particulars  in  morning. 

“Attack  preceded  by  one-half  hour’s  firing  from  two  of  Admiral  Dewey's  vessels. 

“OTIS.” 

“Manila,  February  13.— Adjutant-General,  Washington:  Everything  quiet  this 
morning;  business  in  city  resuming  former  activity.  OTIS. 

“Manila,  February  13.— General  Miller  reports  from  Iloilo  that  that  town  was 
taken  on  the  11th  inst.,  and  is  held  by  troops.  Insurgents  given  until  evening  of 
11th  to  surrender,  but  their  hostile  actions  brought  on  an  engagement  during  the 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


495 


morning.  Insurgents  fired  the  native  portion  of  town,  but  little  losses  to  property  of 
toreign  inhabitants.  No  casualties  among  United  States  troops  reported. 

“OTIS.” 

The  legal  situation,  while  the  treaty  was  not  ratified,  and  seemed  gravely  in  doubt, 
was  an  embarrassment  to  the  executive  of  the  United  States.  The  Philippine  ques- 
tion was  by  the  act  of  the  President  a special  reservation,  and  it  was  submitted  to 
the  people  as  too  great  in  scope  and  various  in  detail,  to  be  determined  by  one  man, 
especially  as  the  Philippine  Archipelago  was  so  far  away  from  our  Pacific  shore  as 
to  be,  according  to  the  average  citizen’s  information,  a new  departure ; and  the  nov- 
elties in  a Republic  need  much  consideration.  Really  the  departure  is  not  new — 
it  is  in  the  direct  line  of  the  logic  of  our  history.  The  President  exceedingly  desired 
to  preserve  the  peace  with  the  Filipinos,  and  gave  orders  not  to  attack  them.  He 
trusted  this  anxious  care  would  prevent  bloodshed.  Hence  the  annoying  attitude 
of  waiting  acquiesence  at  Iloilo,  and  at  Manila  under  almost  intolerable  provocation. 
A personal  letter  from  Manila,  dated  December  8th,  and  written  by  a general  officer 
contains  this. 

“Aguinaldo  has  sent  for  a new  hatter  with  inflated  blocks,  and  has  his  people 
dragging  up  field  guns  in  face  of  our  outposts.  You  can  draw  your  own  inferences.” 

There  is  a flavor  of  bitter  humor  in  this',  but  the  fact  is  prominent  that  the  des-  * 
peradoes  were  quite  wild,  and  had  no  understanding  of  themselves  or  of  us,  and  could 
acquire  it  only  by  getting  themselves  whipped  by  us. 

We  quote  again  from  the  letter  of  which  we  have  taken  the  passage  above: 

“The  able  and  thinking  men  in  this  country  tell  me  in  unmistakable  language 
that  they  are  in  no  way  prepared  to  take  up  the  government  of  these  islands.  They 
insist  upon  the  fact  that  tribunals  will  have,  through  lack  of  native  material,  to  be 
mixed  bodies.  They  say  that  with  all  the  harshness  that  must  accompany  occupancy, 
the  people  here  never  had  as  much  liberty  as  they  have  now,  and  that  they  show  a 
strong  inclination  to  abuse  what  is  given  them.” 

This  is  the  true  story  of  the  Philippine  people  wherever  there  has  been  a free  and 
intelligent  expression 

Our  army  did  not  go  to  Manila  to  harm  the  Filipinos  who  have  the  misfortune 
to  become  infatuated  with  the  malicious  vanity  of  those  who  have  surrounded  them- 
selves with  a cloud  of  superstition  and  all  the  inventions  of  falsehood.  It  was  nec- 
essary that  Americans  should  protect  themselves,  or  yield  the  country  to  the  de- 
structiveness of  barbarism,  and  they  have  defended  Americanism  and  civilization. 

The  dragging  of  field  pieces  to  bear  upon  our  pickets  was  with  the  purpose  of  bring- 


4% 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


ing  American  soldiers  into  contempt,  at  once,  and  to  force  fighting  ultimately.  The 
poor  men  who  became  victims  were  deluded  and  carried  their  defiance  to  an  intoler- 
able pitch.  In  the  same  style  employed  when  he  demanded  that  General  Anderson 
should  consult  him  about  getting  on  Philippine  soil,  Aguinaldo  attempted  to  intimi- 
date General  Otis  by  inviting  a conference,  and  avowing  that  he  would  make  war 
if  any  more  troops  were  sent  to  Manila.  He  would  have  bloodshed,  and  is  responsible 
for  it,  so  far  as  he  is  an  accountable  being.  It  is  of  the  horrors  of  war  that  the 
blood  of  brave  men  is  shed  on  both  sides  of  a controversy  that  has  been  appealed 
to  the  arbitrament  of  arms,  though  the  origin  of  the  affray  may  he  obscure  and  the 
issue  uncertain.  In  the  bloodshed  around  Manila  the  case  is  clear  and  the  conclusion 
certain,  and  there  is  the  compensation  that  the  heroism,  enterprise,  activity  and 
dash  and  continuance  of  the  American  soldiers  under  the  most  trying  circumstauces, 
flame  forth,  and  the  glory  of  our  soldiers  is  equal  to  that  of  our  sailors  in  the  judg- 
ment of  the  men  of  all  nations. 

There  is  something  more  in  this  second  clash  of  arms  at  Manila.  It  is  difficult  to 
find  ground  harder  to  carry  in  offensive  movements  than  the  sultry  thickets  in  which 
the  Filipinos  were  hidden,  hut  our  soldiers  obeyed  all  orders  to  advance  with  alacrity, 
energy  and  enthusiasm,  and  were  eager  for  their  work.  The  men  who  can  do  what 
ours  did  at  Manila  can  do  anything  that  may  rationally  be  dared.  And  in  this  story 
of  Manila  is  the  testimony  that  after  the  volunteers  have  been  seasoned,  they  do 
keep  step  with  the  dread  music  of  war  with  the  regulars  of  any  race  or  people,  and 
there  can  he  no  national  retreat  from  the  duty  destiny  defines  in  the  Philippines,  any 
more  than  from  the  States  of  the  valley  that  is  the  heart  of  the  country — the  valley 
watered  by  the  Ohio,  the  noblest  river  in  the  world,  that  flows  westward  in  the  course 
of  empire. 

The  dispatches  of  General  Otis  are  clear  and  striking  in  tone,  and  may  at  once 
be  classified  as  model  bulletins  of  history.  He  is  a most  energetic,  careful,  studious 
and  laborious  soldier,  bearing  himself  with  the  dignity  of  a man  modest  as  brave,  and 
full  of  kindliness,  but  determined  in  discipline,  knowing  it  to  be  for  the  common 
good.  He  is  resolute  in  demanding  that  the  requisitions  shall  be  according  to  the 
forms,  and  those  associated  with  him  must  respect  the  regulations.  The  objection 
to  him  of  those  who  seek  one  is  that  he  attends  too  much  to  details,  but  that  is  well 
when  the  commander  is  absolute  in  duty  and  has  an  appetite  for  hard  work  before 
which  the  small  matters  disappear  as  by  magic  and  the  greater  ones  are  conquered 
by  force  of  habit. 

The  scenery  of  the  battle  fields  around  Manila  should  be  carefully  regarded  and 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


497 


remembered.  The  bay  is  a vast  sheet  nearly  thirty  miles  in  length,  with  a width 
exceeding  twenty  miles.  The  shores  of  the  bay  are  low — not  more  than  six  feet  at 
most,  above  high  tide.  They  are  also  sandy  and  soft,  resembling  in  some  respects  the 
banks  of  Louisiana  rivers,  but  no  levees  are  attempted.  The  famous  Pasig  river  is 
only  twenty  miles  long,  and  drains  a large  lake,  in  which  there  is  an  immense  multi- 
plication of  vegetable  growth  that  floats  perpetually  to  the  Bay,  and  is  calley  “lilies,” 
though  having  the  look  of  small  cabbages.  The  stream  is  almost  as  broad  as  the 
Ohio,  and,  in  its  snaky  turns,  crooked  as  the  Mississippi.  The  banks  seem  to  be 
prevented  from  washing  away  by  the  dense  matting  of  grasses,  and  the  overhanging 
thickets,  imposing  in  luxuriance.  The  houses  are  close  to  the  water,  for  the  tidal 
river  does  not  rise  and  fall  enough  to  disturb  the  inhabitants.  There  are  mountains 
a few  miles  away  east  and  south — big  lumps  of  blue.  The  stream  that  furnishes 
pure  water  to  Manila  is  from  the  mountains,  and  tapped  near  the  mouth,  where  it 
empties  into  the  Pasig,  seven  miles  from  the  city,  Manila  is  widespread,  and  of 
structures  whose  height  has  been  moderated  by  experience  of  earthquakes.  There  is 
a great  deal  of  marshy  land,  and  rice  fields,  and  the  jungles,  so  thick  and  thorny, 
and  the  grasses  so  tall,  fibrous,  and  rasping,  that  the  marching  of  columns  of  soldiers 
is  excessively  fatiguing.  It  was  a terrible  task  that  was  cut  out  for  our  men,  by  the 
delay  in  the  Senate,  mischievously  elongated,  the  insurgents  having  fortified  them- 
selves in  a way  that  they  knew  would  have  been  utterly  impervious  by  Spaniards. 
The  military  leaders  of  the  Filipinos  have  the  explanation  to  offer,  if  they  have 
the  enlightenment  to  comprehend  their  own  predicament,  as  a discomfited  mass 
of  fugitives,  that  they  never,  before  the  American  regulars  and  volunteers  charged 
them,  met  soldiers  who  would  not  have  retreated  in  dismay  from  the  fiery  ambus- 
cades. The  achievement  of  the  Americans  in  confronting,  rushing  and  routing  the 
array,  formidable  in  numbers,  of  natives,  gathered  with  great  expectations  of  a victory 
that  would  convert  them  into  the  barbaric  conquerors  of  a civilized  community — the 
consecutive  and  conclusive  victories  over  them  that  covered  our  arms,  will  have  hon- 
orable distinction,  of  putting  soldiers  to  the  proof  and  finding  them  pure  steel,  for 
a long  time  to  come.  Our  boys,  weary  of  the  aggressive  attitude  of  the  still  insurgent 
crowds,  though  the  power  of  Spain  had  been  broken,  welcomed  with  cheers  the  order 
to  charge;  and  it  has  been  many  days  since  there  has  been  a trial  of  manliness  more 
severe,  or  testimony  of  devotion  more  true,  and  of  the  staunch  fighting  quality  of  the 
troops  whose  only  way  out  of  difficulty  was  to  find  the  enemy  and  drive  them  head- 
long. 

It  is  not  to  be  forgotten,  while  the  flag  of  the  nation  flies,  that  the  brave  regi- 


498 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


ments  that  will  bear  upon  their  banners  the  name  Manila,  with  the  dates  of  Feb- 
ruary, 1899,  are  Horn  all  sections  of  the  country,  from  the  Alleghenies  to  the  Pacific. 

They  come  from  western  Pennsylvania,  Tennessee,  Wisconsin,  the  Dakotas,  Oregon, 
Washington,  Wyoming,  Utah,  Montana,  Idaho,  and  California,  and  as  Admiral  Dewey 
said  so  well  of  the  crews  of  his  ships  on  his  immortal  May  day,  “There  was  not 
a man  in  the  fleet  who  did  not  do  his  duty,  and  no  man  did  more.”  It  is,  as 
Admiral  Schley  said  of  the  famous  naval  victory  on  the  Southern  Cuban  coast, 

‘'There  is  glory  enough  to  go  around.”  Take  the  list  of  regiments  and  batteries 

and  troops  in  the  Eighth  Army  Corps,  under  the  command  of  Major-General 
E.  S.  Otis,  and  there  is  but  one  record — each  officer  and  enlisted  man  was  in  his 
place,  and  all  are  worthy  to  be  glorified,  for  their  dashing  rushes  through  the  swamps 
and  the  hideous  tropic  tangles,  they  penetrated  to  find  the  foe,  equally  with  those 
heroes  who  mounted  with  unquailing  ardor  that  only  death  could  quench  and  that 
victory  crowned  the  bloody  hills  of  Santiago. 

The  easy  capture  of  Iloilo  proves  the  inadequacy  of  the  followers  of  Aguinaldo 
to  do  any  mischief  beyond  bushwhacking,  and  it  will  not  be  found  worth  while  to 
pursue  the  natives  who  made  an  occupation  of  war  far  into  the  jungles.  The  com- 
plete possession  of  the  railroad  by  our  troops  will  be  necessary,  and  the  navy  will 
have  business  for  light  vessels  in  preventing  the  smuggling  of  Japanese  arms,  which 
are,  no  doubt,  furnished  at  low  rates  for  special  purposes. 

Two  proclamations  have  appeared  in  the  Philippines — one  by  General  Otis,  the 
American  General  commanding  the  Eighth  Army  Corps,  and  the  other  by  Aguinaldo, 
that  make  clear  in  a few  words  the  policy  of  those  engaged  in  the  war  that  has  fol- 
lowed the  downfall  of  the  sovereignty  of  Spain  over  the  bits  of  the  archipelago 
they  occupied.  General  Otis  said,  January  4th,  that  the  “United  States  forces  came 
to  give  the  blessings  of  peace  and  individual  freedom  to  the  Philippine  people.  We 
are  here  as  friends  of  the  Filipinos  to  protect  them  in  their  homes,  their  employ- 
ments, their  individual  and  religious  liberty.  All  persons  who,  either  by  active  aid  or 
honest  endeavor,  co-operate  with  the  government  of  the  L^nitcd  States  to  give  effect 
to  these  benefieient  purposes  will  receive  the  reward  of  its  support  and  protection.” 

The  General  quoted  the  instructions  of  the  President,  and  remarked: 

“I  am  fully  of  the  opinion  that  it  is  the  intention  of  the  United  States  govern- 
ment, while  directing  affairs  generally,  to  appoint  the  representative  men  now  form- 
ing the  controlling  element  of  the  Filipinos  to  civil  positions  of  trust  and  responsi- 
bility, and  it  will  be  my  aim  to  appoint  to  these  such  Filipinos  as  may  be  acceptable 
to  the  supreme  authorities  at  Washington. 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  IT  LILIA  OS  BEFORE  MANILA.  4TJ 

•‘It  is  also  my  belief  that  it  is  the  intention  of  the  United  States  Government 
to  draw  from  the  Filipino  people  so  much  of  the  military  force  of  the  islands  as 
possible  and  consistent  with, a free  and  well-constituted  government  of  the  country, 
and  it  is  my  desire  to  inaugurate  a policy  of  that  character. 

“I  am  also  convinced  that  it  is  the  intention  of  the  United  States  government 
to  seek  the  establishment  of  a most  liberal  government  for  the  islands,  in  which  the 
people  themselves  shall  have  as  full  representation  as  the  maintenance  of  order 
and  law  will  permit,  and  which  shall  be  susceptible  of  development  on  lines  of  in- 
creased representation  and  the  bestowal  of  increased  powers  into  a government  as 
free  and  independent  as  is  enjoyed  by  the  most  favored  provinces  of  the  world. 

“It  will  be  my  constant  endeavor  to  co-operate  with  the  Filipino  people,  seeking 
the  good  of  the  country,  and  I invite  their  full  confidence  and  aid.” 

Aguinaldo,  on  this  conciliatory  definition  of  American  purposes,  objects  to  Gen- 
eral Otis  calling  himself  “Military  Governor,”  and  cries  out,  with  “all  the  energy  of 
his  soul  against  such  authority,”  and  alludes  to  the  policy  of  the  President  referring 
to  the  Philippine  annexation,  adding  : 

“I  solemnly  protest,  in  the  name  of  God,  the  root  and  fountain  of  all  justice 
and  of  all  right,  and  who  has  given  to  me  power  to  direct  my  dear  brothers  in 
the  difficult  work  of  our  regeneration,  against  this  intrusion  of  the  government  of 
the  United  States  in  the  sovereignty  of  these  iilands. 

“And  so,  you  must  understand,  my  dear  brothers,  that,  united  by  bonds  which 
it  will  be  impossible  to  break,  such  is  the  idea  of  our  liberty  and  our  absolute  inde- 
pendence, which  have  been  our  noble  aspirations,  all  must  work  together  to  arrive 
at  this  happy  end,  with  the  force  which  gives  conviction,  already  so  generally  felt, 
among  all  the  people,  to  never  turn  back  in  the  road  of  glory,  on  which  we  have 
already  so  far  advanced.” 

President  McKinley,  on  the  evening  of  February  15th,  addressed  at  the  Boston 
Home  Market  Club  banquet,  all  civilized  nations,  setting  forth  the  policy  of  the 
United  States  in  the  Philippines,  saying  : 

“The  Philippines,  like  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico,  were  intrusted  to  our  hands  by 
the  war,  and  to  that  great  trust,  under  the  providence  of  God  and  in  the  name  of 
human  progress  and  civilization,  we  are  committed.  It  is  a trust  from  which  we 
will  not  flinch. 

“There  is  universal  agreement  that  the  Philippines  shall  not  be  turned  back  to 
Spain.  No  true  American  would  consent  to  that. 

“The  suggestions  that  they  should  be  tossed  into  the  arena  for  the  strife  of  nations 
or  be  left  to  the  anarchy  or  chaos  of  no  protectorate  at  all  were  too  shameful  to  be 


500 


BATTLES  WITH  THE  FILIPINOS  BEFORE  MANILA. 


considered.  The  treaty  gave  them  to  the  United  States.  Could  we  have  required 
less  and  done  our  duty? 

“Our  concern  is  not  for  territory,  or  trade,  or  empire,  hut  for  the  people  whose 
interests  and  destiny  were  put  in  our  hands. 

“It  is  not  a good  time  for  the  liberator  to  submit  important  questions  to  the  liber- 
ated while  they  are  engaged  in  shooting  down  their  rescuers. 

“The  future  of  the  Philippine  Islands  is  now  in  the  hands  of  the  American  people. 

“I  know  of  no  better  or  safer  human  tribunal  than  the  people. 

“Until  Congress  shall  direct  otherwise,  it  will  be  the  duty  of  the  executive  to 
possess  and  hold  the  Philippines. 

“That  the  inhabitants  of  the  Philippines  will  be  benefited  is  my  unshaken  belief. 

“No  imperial  designs  lurk  in  the  American  mind.  They  are  alien  to  American 
sentiment.” 

There  is  a directness  of  purpose  and  precision  of  statement  about  this  that  bears 
the  stamp  of  sincerity,  is  impressive  with  the  power  of  authority,  and  shines  with 
the  spirit  of  patriotism. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 


THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 

The  Filipino  Swarms,  After  Being  Repulsed  with  Slaughter,  Continue  Their 
Scattering  Efforts  to  Be  Assassins — They  Plan  a General  Massacre  and  the 
Burning  of  Manila — Defeated  in  Barbarous  Schemes,  They  Tell  False 
Tales  and  Have  Two  Objects,  One  to  Deceive  the  People  of  the  Philippines, 
the  Other  to  Influence  Intervention — The  Peril  of  Fire — Six  Thousand 
Regulars  Sent  to  General  Otis — Americans  Capture  Iloilo  and  Many 
Natives  Want  Peace — The  People  of  the  Isla  of  Negros  Ask  That  They 
May  Go  with  Us — Dewey  Wants  Battleships  and  Gunboats,  Gets  Them, 
and  Is  Made  an  Admiral — Arrival  of  Peace  Commissioners,  with  Their 
School  Books,  Just  Ahead  of  the  Regulars  with  Magazine  Rifles — The 
Germans  at  Manila  Salute  Admiral  Dewey  at  Last. 

The  activity  of  the  Aguinaldo  insurgents  was  persisted  in,  while  their  com- 
missioners were  on  the  way  to  us,  and  ours  to  them.  While  Congress  was  in 
a reactionary  state  owing  to  political  games,  and  many  members  tearful  on  the 
side  of  the  barbarians,  there  wras  a desperate  conspiracy  to  massacre  the  white 
people  of  Manila  and  destroy  the  city  by  fire;  and  fighting  was  going  on  along 
our  extended  lines,  the  Filipinos  shooting  at  Americans  from  the  jungles.  On 
February  15th  the  California  Volunteers  abandoned  Guadalupe  church  and  retired 
to  San  Pedro  Macati,  and  the  Filipinos  held  ambuscades  near  the  Pasig  River. 
It  was  reported  that  on  the  night  of  the  14th  the  retirement  of  General  King's 
advance  posts  upon  San  Pedro  Macati  had  evidently  been  construed  by  the  rebels  as 
a sign  of  weakness,  as  they  pressed  forward  along  both  sides  of  the  river,  per- 
sistently harassing  the  occupants  of  the  town. 

The  rebels  poured  volley  after  volley  into  San  Pedro  Macati  from  the  brush 
on  the  adjacent  ridge,  but  without  effect.  General  King’s  headquarters,  in  the 
center  of  the  town,  was  the  target  for  scores  of  bullets.  The  rebels  were  using 
smokeless  powder  and  it  was  extremely  difficult  to  locate  individual  marksmen. 

The  heat  wras  intense  and  increasing  perceptibly.  It  was  impossible  to  provide 
shade  for  the  troops  in  parts  of  the  line. 

On  the  21st  the  following  remarkable  dispatch  was  received  from  General 

Otis; 

“Manila,  Feb.  21. — Adjutant-General,  Washington:  Following  issued  by  an 

501 


502 


THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


important  officer  of  insurgent  government  at  Malolos  February  15,  1899,  for  exe- 
cution during  tliat  evening  and  night  in  this  city: 

“ ‘You  will  so  dispose  that  at  8 o’clock  at  night  the  individuals  of  the 
territorial  militia  at  your  order  will  be  found  united  in  all  of  the  streets  of  San 
Pedro,  armed  with  their  bolos  and  revolvers  or  guns  and  ammunition,  if  con- 
venient. 

“ ‘Philippine  families  only  will  be  respected.  They  should  not  be  molested, 
but  all  other  individuals,  of  whatever  race  they  may  be,  will  be  exterminated  with- 
out any  compassion  after  the  extermination  of  the  army  of  occupation. 

“ ‘The  defenders  of  the  Philippines  in  your  command  will  attack  the  guard 
at  Hilibicl  and  liberate  the  prisoners  and  “presidiarios,”  and,  having  accomplished 
this,  they  will  be  armed,  saying  to  them: 

“ ‘ “Brothers,  we  must  avenge  ourselves  on  the  Americans  and  exterminate 
them,  that  we  may  take  our  revenge  for  the  infamy  and  treachery  which  they  have 
committed  upon  us;  have  no  compassion  upon  them;  attack  with  vigor.  All 
Filipinos  cn  masse  will  second  you.  Long  live  Filipino  independence.” 

“‘The  order  which  will  be  followed  in  the  attack  will  be  as  follows:  The 

sharpshooters  of  Tondo  and  Santa  Ana  will  begin  the  attack  from  without  and 
these  shots  will  be  the  signal  for  the  militia  of  Troso  Binondo,  Quiata  and  Sam- 
paloe  to  go  out  into  the  street  and  do  their  duty;  those  of  Pake,  Ermita  and 
Malate,  Santa  Cruz  and  San  Miguel  will  not  start  out  until  12  o’clock  unless 
they  see  that  their  companions  need  assistance. 

“ ‘The  militia  of  Tondo  will  start  out  at  3 o’clock  in  the  morning;  if  all  do 
their  duty  our  revenge  will  be  complete.  Brothers,  Europe  contemplates  us;  we 
know  how  to  die  as  men,  shedding  our  blood  in  defense  of  the  liberty  of  our 
country.  Death  to  the  tyrants. 

“ AFar  without  quarter  to  the  false  Americans  who  have  deceived  us. 

“ Tfither  independence  or  death.’  ” 

There  is  not  sufficient  reason  to  assume  that  this  paper  setting  forth  an  order 
to  carry  out  a conspiracy  of  house  burning  and  assassination  is  beyond  belief. 
It  is  characteristic  cf  the  Filipino  literature  that  relates  to  Americans.  General 
Otis  is  a man  whose  communications  may  be  relied  upon  absolutely.  He  is  a 
believer  in  the  exact  truth  and  has  shown  exemplary  care  in  stating  it.  The 
Fil i pino  faction  of  warriors  are  habitually  false,  and  wherever  they  have  an  agent, 
are  circulating  falsehoods  manufactured  to  order.  The  Junta  of  the  Aguinaldo 
pretenders,  issued  at  Hongkong  a statement  as  follows: 

“Information  which  has  leaked  through  the  Pinkertons,  sent  by  President 


THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


503 


McKinley  to  investigate  the  shipment  of  arms  to  the  Filipinos,  shows  that  the 
first  shipments  to  Aguinaldo  were  made  by  order  of  the  American  government, 
through  Consul  Wildman,  hence  the  shipment  per  the  Wing  Foi.  The  American 
government  subsequently  telegraphed  to  cease  this,  coincident  with  the  change  of 
policy  to  annexation. 

“Mr.  Wildman  and  Rear  Admiral  Dewey  promised  to  pay,  but  have  not  yet 
paid,  for  a subsequent  expedition  by  the  Abbey,  authorized  by  Admiral  Dewey,  who 
afterward  seized  the  steamer,  and  it  is  still  held.  Papers  respecting  this  are  now 
in  the  possession  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy. 

“The  protestations  of  Admiral  Dewey  and  other  Americans  that  they  made 
no  promises  are  ridiculous.  In  view  of  these  facts  let  the  American  people  judge 
how  the  nation’s  word  of  honor  was  pledged  to  the  Filipinos  and  confided  in  by 
them,  and  violated  by  the  recent  treachery  of  General  Otis.” 

There  may  be  an  occasional  member  of  Congress  who  cannot  help  believing 
this,  but  he  does  not  allow  his  ignorance  to  be  moderated  by  any  ingredient  of 
information. 

On  the  same  day  the  above  publication  appeared  there  was  given  at  Hongkong 
to  the  American  Consul,  Wildman,  news  of  the  “discovery  of  20,000  rifles  and 
2,000,000  cartridges  stored  on  lighters  at  Nankin  by  Filipinos  and  ready  for 
shipment  to  the  islands.  The  American  Minister  promptly  induced  the  Chinese 
authorities  to  impound  the  munitions,  thus  inflicting  a hard  blow  to  Aguinaldo. 

“The  extraordinary  thing  is  that  the  Japanese  government  sold  the  arms 
to  the  regular  agent  of  the  Filipinos  at  Yokohama,  although,  for  the  sake  of 
appearances,  a form  of  auction  was  used.  The  Japanese  officials,  it  develops, 
offered  100,000  rifles,  with  machinery  for  loading  and  ammunition,  to  the  Filipinos 
in  September. 

“Traitorous  Americans  here  are  aiding  the  insurgents  to  smuggle  arms. 
Agoncillo’s  dispatches  are  leading  the  Filipinos  to  believe  President  McKinley 
intends  to  treat  with  them.” 

The  official  correspondence  of  the  American  Consuls  at  Singapore,  Manila 
and  Hongkong  with  the  State  Department,  proves  that  there  was  no  treaty  with 
Aguinaldo,  no  deception  so  far  as  our  Government  was  concerned,  and  that  he 
was  a professor  of  Americanism,  talking  of  annexation  and  a protectorate  and  his 
gratitude;  and  then  a sulking  and  swollen  little  creature;  as  Wildman  wrote,  a 
spoiled  child,  requiring  flatteries  to  keep  him  in  a good  humor.  Admiral  Dewey 
was  very  careful  never  to  promise  Aguinaldo  anything — giving  him  some  old  guns 
and  encouraging  him  to  keep  the  Spaniards  busy,  but  never  presuming  or  allowing 


504 


TIIE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


it  to  be  assumed  that  he  was  speaking  for  our  Government.  By  way  of  Seattle  we 
have  an  extract  of  a letter  written  by  an  insurgent  officer  at  Hongkong  in  these 
terms: 

“More  than  25,000  families  have  left  Manila  since  we  began  our  war  on  the 
Americans.  American  soldiers  are  deserting  and  presenting  themselves  to  our 
officers.  In  order  to  get  the  American  troops  who  were  ordered  to  Hoilo  on  board 
the  transport  many  of  the  men  had  first  been  made  drunk,  others  were  embarked 
forcibly.  They  all  protested  against  going,  saying  that  they  had  come  to  fight 
Spaniards,  not  Filipinos.  After  the  boat  got  under  way  the  men  mutinied. 
Many  jumped  overboard  and  swam  ashore.  Those  who  remained  began  to  wreck 
all  parts  of  the  vessel.” 

The  intensity  of  the  folly  of  the  Filipinos  making  war  upon  the  United 
States  is  on  exhibition  in  this  letter,  and  it  is  serviceable  as  a measure  of  their 
intelligence.  It  is  with  this  equipment  of  elementary  knowledge  that  Agoncillo 
is  in  Europe  to  solicit  the  intervention  of  the  great  powers  for  his  country  and 
asserts  that  he  lost  Dewey’s  letters  in  a shipwreck,  lie  should  exploit  his  mission 
in  Madrid. 

It  was  on  the  nights  of  the  22nd  and  23d  of  February  that  an  effort  was 
made  by  the  Filipinos  to  bum  Manila.  The  attempt  to  destroy  property  closely 
resembled  in  the  stealthy  preliminaries,  and  desperate  strife  to  burn  the  city,  the 
cunningly  prepared  first  attack  upon  the  American  army,  repulsed  with  a slaughter 
that  has  moved  deeply  the  sympathies  of  our  statesmen  opposed  to  the  admin- 
istration of  our  Government  the  growth  of  the  country  and  the  public  honor. 
The  fact  is  they  are  sentimentalists  in  decay  or  degenerates  running  for  a decline 
and  fall. 

There  was  some  fighting  in  the  streets  during  the  night,  but  the  Americans 
quickly  quelled  the  uprising.  A number  of  the  insurgents  were  killed  and  several 
American  soldiers  severely  wounded.  A large  market  place  was  the  first 
to  bum.  Between  six  and  seven  hundred  residences  and  business  houses  were 
destroyed.  Fires  started  at  several  points  simultaneously,  and,  spreading  with  great 
rapidity,  resisted  efforts  to  control  them.  Hundreds  of  homeless  natives  were 
huddled  in  the  streets,  making  the  patrol  duty  of  the  Americans  difficult.  The 
fire  was  started  in  three  places.  Native  sharpshooters  were  concealed  behind  corner 
buildings.  They  shot  at  every  American  in  sight.  Flames  burst  forth  simul- 
taneously from  Santa  Cruz,  San  Nicolas  and  Tondo.  From  these  points  the  fire 
spread.  In  a short  time  a great  part  of  the  city  was  burning.  Notwithstanding 
the  continual  activity  of  the  hidden  sharpshooters  the  American  garrison  turned 


THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


505 


out  and  fought  the  fire.  In  many  cases  they  had  first  to  drive  away  the  lurking 
assassins. 

No  one  of  our  troops  was  killed,  hut  seven  members  of  the  Minnesota  regiment 
were  wounded  making  a rush  into  the  burning  Tondo  quarter.  Captain 
C.  Robinson  of  Company  C was  one  of  the  wounded.  The  troops  were  rallied 
from  some  of  the  outlying  encampments,  quickly  spread  through  all  parts  of  the 
city  and  subdued  what  was  evidently  planned  for  a general  uprising  and  massacre. 

The  fire  lasted  all  night.  The  native  rebels  in  the  city  have  been  completely 
checked  by  the  prompt  work  of  General  Otis  and  the  other  commanders.  It  is 
evident  that  the  incendiaries  and  assassins  believed  that  the  entire  town  would  be 
destroyed  and  with  it  the  foreign  residents  and  the  American  soldiers. 

General  Otis  telegraphed  Adjutant-General  Corbin  February  23d: 

“Determined  endeavors  to  bum  city  last  night.  Buildings  fired  in  three 
different  sections  of  city.  Fires  controlled  by  troops,  after  severe  labor. 

“A  considerable  number  of  incendiaries  shot  and  a few  soldiers  wounded. 

“Early  this  morning  a large  body  of  insurgents  made  a demonstration  off 
MacArthur’s  front,  near  Caloocan,  and  were  repulsed.  Loss  of  property  by  fire 
last  night  probably  $500,000.” 

February  21st,  9:35  P.  M. — “The  natives  of  the  village  of  Paco  made  a 
bold  attempt  last  night  to  burn  the  quarters  of  the  First  Washington  Volunteers 
by  setting  fire  to  the  huts  adjoining  their  quarters  in  the  rear. 

“Fortunately  the  wind  changed  at  the  moment  the  fire  was  discovered,  and, 
fanned  by  a stiff  breeze,  the  flames  spread  in  the  opposite  direction,  destroying 
fully  twenty  shacks  and  houses  opposite  the  ruins  of  the  church.  The  incendiaries 
escaped. 

“Mysterious  signals  were  frequently  made  along  the  enemy’s  lines  during  the 
night.” 

From  the  high  points  in  the  city  fires  were  seen  in  a dozen  places,  and  a 
cloud  of  smoke  hovered  over  the  city,  conveying  the  impression  to  people  about  the 
bay  and  in  the  outside  districts  that  the  whole  city  was  burning. 

On  the  21st  of  February  the  Nebraska  troops  drove  a force  of  300  insurgents 
three  miles  to  Pasig.  Twenty-one  of  them  were  found  dead  on  the  field  and 
many  more  were  believed  to  have  been  killed.  The  Americans  had  three  wounded. 

A most  serious  problem  confronts  General  Otis  in  the  protection  of  Manila 
and  the  suburban  towns  from  fire,  not  only  because  of  the  treacherous  character 
of  the  rebel  Filipinos,  but  also  because  outside  of  the  business  establishments  the 
houses  are.  built  of  the  flimsiest  bamboo,  hung  with  matting  screens.  Even  the 
floors  are  made  of  strips  of  bamboo,  separated  so  as  to  allow  the  free  circulation 


TIIE  AGU1NALD0  WAlt  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


501) 

of  air.  It  is  'within  the  power  of  almost  any  person  to  set  fire  to  these  houses 
from  without  or  within  in  a few  seconds,  and,  as  they  are  closely  built,  the  ravages 
of  a single  fire  in  a quarter  so  closely  constructed  might  easily  reach  the  $500,000 
point  mentioned  by  General  Otis. 

The  foreign  quarter  is  of  better  construction,  hut  still  includes  many  of  these 
light  bamboo  houses,  which  the  older  residents  seem  to  find  cooler  than  those  of 
more  solid  construction.  The  walled  town,  which  the  insurgents  threaten  to 
burn,  is  said  to  he  of  substantial  structures,  and  probably  is  more  easily  defended 
against  such  an  attempt  than  any  other  section  of  the  town. 

February  26th,  6:30  A.  M.,  a dispatch  was  received  from  Colombo,  Island  of 
Colon,  as  follows: 

“The  United  States  transport  Grant,  which  sailed  from  New  York  for  Manila 
January  19  with  troops  under  command  of  Major-General  Henry  AY.  Lawton 
on  board,  arrived  here  to-day.  General  Lawton  received  a cablegram  from  Major- 
General  Otis  saying:  , 

“‘Situation  critical.  Your  early  arrival  necessary.’ 

“He  also  received  from  General  Corbin,  United  Status  Adjutant-General, 
a cable  dispatch  urging  him  to  hurry. 

“General  Lawton  ordered  his  officers  to  buy  supplies  regardless  of  expense, 
and  the  transport  is  taking  on  coal  and  water  hurriedly.  She  will  try  to  reach 
Manila  without  further  stop.” 

March  4th  a dispatch  from  General  Lawton  on  the  Grant  at  Singapore  was 

received  as  follows: 

“Arrived  here  to-night.  Will  stop  six  hours  for  coal.  Have  no  serious  illness 
to  report.  Favorable  conditions  still  continue. 

“We  shall  probably  reach  Manila  early  on  morning  of  March  10.  Have  so 
informed  Otis.” 

This  shows  the  strong  impression  the  Manila  news  made  in  the  War  Depart- 
ment, of  the  attempt  to  burn  the  city,  which  was  part  of  the  announced  plan 
of  the  insurgents.  Filipino  spies  and  sympathizers  had  been  watched  by  the 
American  troops  day  and  night  seeking  to  locate  places  of  weakness.  Many  were 
captured.  Some  of  them  were  disguised  in  women’s  clothing.  Plots  of  all  kinds 
were  rife.  There  had  been  constant  fear  for  weeks  in  the  city  that  a massacre  and 
conflagration  would  be  attempted.  General  Otis  warned  his  officers  to  be  ever 
vigilant.  Since  the  first  battle  our  troops  have  guarded  all  quarters  within  the 
lines.  The  conclusion  of  the  very  serious  phase  of  the  incendiary  period  was 
announced  bv  General  Otis  in  this  dispatch: 


THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


507 


“Manila,  Feb.  24. — To  Secretary  of  War,  Washington  Scandia  arrived  last 
night.  On  nights  21st  and  22d  and  yesterday  morning  insurgent  troops  gained 
access  to  outskirts  of  city  behind  our  lines.  Many  in  hiding  and  about  1,000 
intrenched  themselves.  Completely  routed  yesterday,  with  loss  of  killed  and 
wounded  about  500  and  200  prisoners.  Our  loss  was  slight.  City  quiet,  confi- 
dence restored,  business  progressing.  OTIS."’ 

On  the  afternoon  of  February  25th  it  was  stated  in  a Manila  cablegram  that 
the  military  police  had  raided  several  suspected  houses  in  various  districts,  cap- 
turing small  bodies  of  twenty  or  thirty  prisoners  in  each  place.  This  and  the 
7 o’clock  order  effectually  dispelled  the  fears  of  a threatened  outbreak  of  the 
natives,  who  do  not  dare  singly,  or  collectively,  to  appear  on  the  streets  after 
dark.  The  feeling  in  the  city  decidedly  improved,  although  the  Chinese  were 
timorous.  Hundreds  of  applicants  for  cedulus  besiege  the  register’s  office,  the 
natives  apparently  being  under  the  impression  that  their  possession  insures  them 
from  interference  and  the  ignominy  of  being  searched  for  arms  on  the  streets. 

There  was  a mystery  lasting  a clay  or  two  about  this  unusual  cable  communi- 
cation: 

“Manila,  Feb.  24. — To  Secretary  of  Navy,  Washington:  For  political  reasons 
the  Oregon  should  be  sent  here  at  once.  DEWEY.” 

It  was  not  a secret,  however,  in  Manila  Bay  in  August  that  Admiral  Dewey 
wanted  two  battleships,  just  as  he  wanted  and  had  needed  two  monitors,  and 
that  he  then  preferred  the  Oregon  and  the  Iowa.  He  has  deemed  it  of  the  utmost 
importance  that  he  should  have  a force  at  Manila  Bay  superior  to  that  of  any 
other  power.  The  German  fleet  had  for  a considerable  part  of  the  time  since 
the  destruction  of  the  Spanish  squadron  been  in  a menacing  attitude.  The 
Germans  were  ostentatious  in  discourtesy  during  Admiral  Diedrich’s  personal 
presence. 

The  Congress  of  the  United  States  that  was  so  divided  and  distracted  about 
the  Philippine  question  was  unanimous  as  to  the  pre-eminent  merits  as  a naval 
commander  of  George  Dewey,  though  he  was  the  embodiment  of  all  the  anti- 
Americans  railed  at.  This  is  the  official  paper  that  proclaims  Dewey’s  promotion: 

“PRESIDENT  of  the  United  States  of  America. 

“To  All  Who  Shall  See  These  Presents:  Greeting: 

“Know  ye,  that,  reposing  special  trust  and  confidence  in  the  patriotism,  valor 
and  fidelity  and  abilities  of 

“GEORGE  DEWEY, 

I have  nominated,  and  by  and  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate,  do 


508 


THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


appoint  him  Admiral  of  the  Navy  from  the  second  day  of  March,  1S99,  in  the 
service  of  the  United  States. 

“He  is,  therefore,  carefully  and  diligently  to  discharge  the  duties  of  Admiral 
by  doing  and  performing  all  manner  of  duties  thereto  belonging. 

“And  I do  strictly  charge  and  require  all  officers,  seamen  and  marines  under 
his  command  to  be  obedient  to  his  orders  as  Admiral. 

“And  he  is  to  observe  and  follow  such  orders  and  directions  from  time  to 
time  as  he  shall  receive  from  me  or  the  future  President  of  the  United  States 
of  America. 

“Given  under  my  hand  at  Washington  the  second  day  of  March,  in  the  year 
of  our  Lord  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  ninety-nine,  and  in  the  one  hundred 
and  twenty-third  year  of  the  independence  of  the  United  States. 

“By  the  President:  WILLIAM  M'KIX LET. 

“JOHN  D.  LONG,  Secretary  of  the  Navy.” 

The  Admiral  personally  responded,  cabling  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy: 

0 

“Manila,  March  4. — Please  accept  for  yourself,  the  President  and  Congress  and 
my  countrymen  my  heartfelt  thanks  for  the  great  honor  which  has  been  conferred 
upon  me.  DEWEY.” 

ITe  will  draw  from  the  Government  $14,700  n year,  including  allowances,  and 
is  entitled  to  a larger  staff.  1 1 is  direct  pay  is  $13,000  per  annum,  a rise  of  $7,000. 
ITe  outranks  any  officer  in  the  United  States  army,  the  fact  being  that  Rear 
Admirals  rank  with  the  Major-Generals,  who  are  the  highest  officers  at  present 
in  the  army,  and  Dewey  is  a full  Admiral.  This  is  the  result  of  not  being  afraid 
of  torpedoes  or  to  risk  ships  in  front  of  shore  batteries.  On  the  3rd  of  March 
the  President  nominated  Brigadier-General  Elwell  S.  Otis,  T . S.  A.,  to  be  Major- 
General  by  brOvet,  to  rank  from  February  4,  1899,  for  military  skill  and  most 
distinguished  service  in  the  Philippine  Islands.  The  nomination  was  confirmed 
by  the  Senate.  Secretary  Alger  sent  the  following  congratulatory  message  to 
General  Otis: 

“You  have  been  nominated  and  confirmed  a Major-General  by  brevet  in  the 
Regular  Army.  The  President  wishes  this  message  of  congratulations  sent  you, 
in  which  I cordially  join.” 

The  Spanish  way  of  dealing  with  unfortunate  officers  appears  in  this: 

“Madrid,  Friday. — Admiral  Montojo,  who  was  in  command  of  the  Spanish 
squadron  destroyed  by  Admiral  Dewey  in  the  battle  of  Manila  Bay,  and  the  com- 
mander of  the  Cavite  arsenal  were  this  evening  incarcerated  in  the  military  prison 
pending  trial  for  their  conduct  at  Manila.  Admiral  Cervera  has  also  been  im- 


THE  AGU1NALD0  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


509 


prisoned,  along  with  General  Linares,  the  two  men  in  the  Spanish  service  who 
gave  the  Americans  trouble. 

The  Colon  Gazette  on  the  23d  of  February  publishes  extracts  from  a private 
letter  dated  Iloilo,  January  12,  that  prior  to  the  conclusion  of  peace  Lieutenant 
Brandeis,  formerly  of  the  Twenty-first  Baden  Dragoons,  with  800  Spanish 
troops,  held  the  town  against  20,000  to  30,000  Filipinos,  who  were  monkeying 
about  and  assuming  to  be  conducting  a siege,  just  as  the  Aguinaldo  crowd  was 
doing  at  Manila  when  General  Merritt  arrived.  When  peace  was  declared  the 
Iloilo  Spaniards  presently  surrendered  and  the  Filipinos  rushed  in  as  conquering 
heroes.  The  pacific  policy  of  the  President  prevented  the  United  States  troops 
from. taking  the  place  from  the  swarm  of  islanders  until  the  outbreak  in  front  of 
Manila,  when  our  strict  defensive  was  unavailable  and  General  Miller  quietly  occu- 
pied and  possessed  Iloilo,  the  important  sugar-exporting  town  of  the  Philippines. 

The  natives  of  the  Island  of  Kegros  sent  a delegation  to  General  Miller,  after 
he  had  captured  Iloilo,  to  offer  their  allegiance  to  the  United  States,  and  the 
General  holds  Jaro  and  Molo,  where  there  has  been  skirmishing  recently.  The 
insurgents  have  2,000  men  at  Santa  Barbara. 

The  governor  of  Camarines,  in  the  interior  of  Luzon,  has  issued  a proclamation 
declaring  that  the  Americans  intend  to  make  the  Filipinos  slaves. 

March  4th  the  United  States  cruiser  Baltimore  arrived  at  Manila  having  on 
board  the  civil  members  of  the  United  States  Philippine  Commission.  On  the 
same  day  the  rebels  of  the  village  of  San  Jose  fired  on  the  United  States  gunboat 
Bennington  and  the  warship  shelled  that  place  and  other  suburbs  of  Manila  in 
the  afternoon. 

At  daylight  General  Wheaton’s  outposts  discovered  a large  body  of  rebels 
attempting  to  cross  the  river  for  the  purpose  of  re-enforcing  the  enemy  at  Guada- 
lupe. 

A gunboat  advanced  under  a heavy  fire  and  poured  shot  into  the  jungle  on 
both  sides  of  the  river  and  shelled  the  enemy’s  position  at  Guadalupe,  effectually 
but  temporarily  scattering  the  rebels.  The  enemy’s  loss  was  heavy.  American 
loss,  one  killed  and  two  wounded.  General  Otis  cabled: 

“The  transport  Senator  just  arrived;  troops  in  good  health.  One  casualty, 
accidental  drowning.  OTIS.” 

The  Senator  carried  Companies  A,  B,  C,  D,  H and  K of  the  Twenty-second 
Infantry  and  sailed  from  San  Francisco  on  February  1.  The  remainder  of  this 
regiment  arrived  at  Manila  on  the  transport  Ohio,  which  followed  the  Senator. 


510 


T1IE  AGU1NALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


The  transport  Valentia  sailed  from  San  Francisco  March  -1th,  carrying  in 
addition  to  150  soldiers,  stores  and  supplies,  $1,500,000  to  pay  the  soldiers  now 
m the  Philippines. 

March  3d  general  order  Xo.  30  was  issued  from  the  Adjutant-General's 
office.  War  Department  of  the  United  States: 

“The  following  regiments  will  he  put  in  readiness  for  service  in  the  Philippine 
Islands  without  delay,  the  movement  to  take  place  from  time  to  time  under  instruc- 
tions to  he  communicated  hereafter:  Sixth  Artillery,  Sixth  Infantry,  Ninth  In- 
fantry, Thirteenth  Infantry,  Sixteenth  Infantry  and  Twenty-first  Infantry. 

“The  following  troops  will  be  put  in  readiness  for  early  departure  for  station, 
in  Honolulu,  Hawaiian  Islands: 

“Twenty-fourth  Infantry,  one  field  officer  and  four  companies;  one  company 
from  Fort  Douglas,  Utah,  and  three  companies  from  Fort  I).  A.  Russell,  Wyoming. 

“The  department  commanders  are  charged  with  the  preparation  of  their 
commands  for  these  movements.  The  Quartermaster-General  will  make  timely 
arrangements  for  the  transportation  of  the  various  commands.  The  Commissary- 
General  of  Subsistence  and  the  Surgeon-General  will  make  necessary  provision 
for  proper  subsistence  and  medical  supplies  and  attendance.” 

This  means  that  our  army  at  Manila  will  be  rc-enforccd  by  G,O00  regulars. 
Recent  advices  show  that  Aniccto  Lanson,  President  of  Xegros  Island,  called  on 
General  Otis  with  his  fellow-delegates,  Pose  De  Luzuriago,  President  of  Xegros 
Congress;  Gosebio  Luzuriago,  Secretary  of  Finance,  and  Deputy  Andries  Azcoule. 
They  assured  General  Otis  of  the  hearty  support  of  the  Visayas  except  those  few 
who  have  been  stirred  into  revolt  by  the  agents  of  Aguinaldo  on  the  Island  of 
Pa nay. 

The  government  of  Xegros,  they  declared,  was  in  favor  of  American  rule, 
and  there  was  no  adverse  sentiment  whatever  among  the  natives.  The  stars  and 
stripes  ar<^  now  floating  over  all  the  official  buildings  on  the  island.  The  com- 
mission offered  to  raise  an  army  of  100,000  Visayans  to  fight  the  Tagalos  on  the 
Island  of  Luzon.  The  commissioners  represent  large  sugar-interests  in  Xegros. 

The  Xegros  Island  deputation  was  greatly  pleased  with  its  reception. 

Admiral  Dewey’s  flag  as  a full  American  Admiral  was  saluted  becomingly 
by  all  the  warships  of  foreign  nations  at  Manila,  even  including  the  Germans, 
who  had  not  until  then  showed  the  Americans  any  significant  courtesy.  The 
English  led  the  function  with  an  Admiral's  salute.  There  was  no  novelty  in  this, 
for  they  long  ago  in  every  friendly  way  recognized  Manila  as  an  American  port. 
The  Germans  have  given  signal  manifestation  of  their  desire  to  promote  the  most 


THE  At.  I iXALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


511 


cordial  relations  between  Germany  and  the  United  States  by  ordering  the  with- 
drawal of  all  vessels  of  their  navy  from  Philippine  waters  and  placing  the  lives 
and  property  of  their  subjects  there  under  the  protection  of  the  United  States 
Government. 

A Hongkong  dispatch  of  February  28  contained  this  information: 

“Professors  Schurman  and  Worcester  to-day,  after  a long  consultation  with 
Wildman,  who  is  looked  upon  as  one  of  the  best-posted  men  in  the  Orient  in  regard 
to  Philippine  affairs,  expressed  themselves  as  satisfied  with  the  outlook. 

“They  are  especially  pleased  with  the  action  of  President  McKinley  in  restoring 
to  the  wealthy  Cortes  family  the  great  estates  illegally  confiscated  by  the  Spaniards. 

“ ‘It  is  good  politics,’  said  a leading  member  of  the  Hongkong  colonial  cabinet 
to-day.  ‘It  will  seal  to  America  every  Filipino  who  possesses  property.  It  is  the 
hardest  blow  Aguinaldo  has  suffered.’” 

Admiral  Dewey  is  strengthened  by  gunboats  enough  to  keep  out  the  Filipino 
supplies  of  arms  picked  up  in  Asia,  and  Congress  may  not  be  making  a noise 
agreeable  to  our  enemies  for  the  rest  of  this  year.  There  is  compensation  in  the 
omission.  There  will  be  no  European  or  American  interference  in  the  process  of 
pacificating  the  military  faction  of  Filipinos,  who  are  ungrateful  and  murderous, 
during  the  rest  of  the  last  year  of  the  century. 

Hugh  Brown,  an  Englishman,  who  arrived  at  Hongkong  from  Manila  Feb- 
ruary 11,  gives  in  detail  evidence  of  the  conspiracy  of  the  insurgent  swarms  in 
attacking  the  American  army.  He  was  at  a circus  where  there  were  no  natives 
when  our  soldiers  were  called  out.  They  behaved  nobly,  disarming  natives,  but 
not  killing  them.  There  was  mysterious  shooting  going  on  in  the  city  “when  an 
American  shell  struck  a tree  200  yards  away,  and  four  natives  dropped  to  the 
ground.  The  trees  were  found  to  be  full  of  hiding  natives,  using  smokeless 
powder.”  Aguinaldo  was  fifty  miles  away  and  telegraphed  Admiral  Dewey  that 
he  was  not  to  blame,  and  for  God’s  sake  to  stop  the  firing  of  the  fleet. 

Captain  Frazer  of  London,  late  of  the  Imperial  British  forces,  arrived  at 
Vancouver  direct  from  Hongkong  March  8th,  and  gave  this  account  of  the 
declining  health  of  Admiral  Dewey: 

“The  war  at  Manila  will  have  to  end  soon  or  the  life  of  the  great  American 
Admiral  will  be  worth  nothing. 

“I  dined  with  him  at  Manila  within  a month,  and  am  convinced  that  if  he  is 
not  relieved  of  the  terrible  strain  imposed  upon  him  he  cannot  last  a month  longer. 
As  he  sat  at  the  banquet  table,  surrounded  by  his  staff,  he  looked  to  me  like  a 
dying  man.  His  hair  is  snowy  white,  his  face  ashen,  and  he  ate  hardly  anything. 


512 


THE  AGUINALDO  WAR  OF  SKIRMISHES. 


‘‘I  had  the  pleasure  of  a few  minutes’  conversation  with  him  when  we  retired 
to  the  smoking-room.  Having  in  mind  his  enfeebled  appearance,  I asked  him  if 
he  thought  of  returning  to  America  soon. 

“ T would  like  to,  but  my  work  is  by  no  means  finished  here.  When  it  is, 
and  only  then,  will  I return.’ 

“I  am  thoroughly  convinced  that  only  the  Admiral’s  indomitable  will  has 
kept  him  up  so  long.  The  strain  on  him  is  terrible,  and  the  climatic  conditions 
have  reduced  him  to  a shadow. 

“One  of  his  officers  said  to  me  just  before  I left  Manila: 

“ ‘The  war  will  be  ended  by  the  Admiral  soon  or  it  will  end  him.  No  man 
can  stand  such  a strain  as  he  does  in  this  climate  and  live  long.’  ” 

If  this  is  to  be  literally  accepted,  and  we  may  hope  that  it  is  overstated, 
there  has  been  a distressingly  unfavorable  change  within  five  months  in  the 
Admiral.  His  trouble  is  said  to  be  with  his  liver.  There  is  no  question  the 
strain  upon  him  has  been  more  wearing  than  the  public  have  realized.  Last 
summer  his  anxieties  afflicted  him  with  insomnia  at  night,  and  he  has  not  for 
a day  since  he  left  Hongkong  in  April  been  free  from  burdens  of  harrassing  care. 
His  last  words  on  the  deck  of  the  China  to  the  Author  of  this  Book  were  that 
the  President  had  invited  him  to  go  home  and  counsel  with  him,  but  he  had 
written  the  substance  of  what  he  held  to  be  the  way  to  deal  with  the  Philippines, 
and  would  not  leave  Manila  Bay  “without  peremptory  orders  to  go,  until  all  things 
here  are  settled — settled — settled,”  a characteristic  repetition  of  the  important 
word.  He  had  already  stated  he  wanted  “two  battleships”  and  the  Oregon  and 
Iowa  were  accordingly  ordered  to  join  him.  Instead  of  anticipating  pleasure  from 
the  ovations  that  thousands  of  letters  and  all  callers  assure  him  he  could  not 
avoid  in  this  country  he  sincerely  dreads  them,  and  when  told  what  the  inevitable 
was  whenever  lie  put  his  foot  on  his  native  shore  he  said:  “That  would 

be  very  distasteful  to  me.”  He  is  human,  and,  of  course,  not  insensible  of  the 
boundless  compliment  of  the  endless  enthusiasm  of  the  public  regarding  him, 
but  he  habitually  insists  that  every  man  in  his  fleet  did  his  duty  on  the  day  of 
battle  and  victory,  and  it  would  be  “injustice  to  brave  men  if  one  man  got  all 
the  glory.”  The  Admiral  knows  the  President’s  invitation  to  him  to  come  home  is  a 
standing  one,  and  no  limit  on  it,  but  the  sense  of  duty  of  the  Admiral,  in  whose 
judgment  there  is  perfect  confidence,  forbids.  The  information  of  his  declining 
health  will  certainly  result  in  his  recall  overruling  his  personal  feeling  and  official 
purpose,  if  it  is  believed  that  there  is  danger  he  is  sacrificing  himself. 


-|*V  • 


.*g 


V «■- 


